Project No. 10731 - Dunn County

PROJECT MANUAL
Bid Package No. 1
March 26, 2012
Dunn County
Health Care Center
Highway 12
Menomonie, WI 54751
Project No. 10731
ARCHITECT/CONSTRUCTION ADVISOR:
Hoffman LLC
122 East College Ave
Ste 1G
Appleton, WI 54911
PO Box 8034
Appleton, WI 54912-8034
920-731-2322
Fax: 920-380-2191
Architectural Design
Group
Building D04 Ste202
800 Wisconsin St.
Eau Claire, WI 54703
715-235-4848
AFTER BIDDING PLEASE RETURN
PLANS AND SPECS TO:
Franz Reprographics
Minneapolis
2781 Freeway Blvd.
Brooklyn Center, MN 55430
Phone: (763) 503-3401
Fax: (763) 503-3409

INDEX OF SECTIONS
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT
Invitation to Bid
00 10 12 - Owner Direct Insurance Program
00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders
00 31 00 - Available Project Information
00 41 00 - Bid Form
00 52 00 - Agreement Forms
00 52 00a - Contract Rider “A” – Safety
00 52 00b - Contract Rider “B” – Insurance
00 52 00c - Contract Rider “C” – Trade Contractors
00 61 13 - Performance and Payment Bonds
00 72 00 - General Conditions
00 73 00 - Supplementary Conditions
00 73 43 - Wage Rates Requirements
00 80 00 - Owner Direst Insurance Program
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00 - Summary of Work
01 11 23 - Owner Purchased Products
01 21 00 - Allowances
01 23 00 - Alternates
01 31 13 - Project Coordination
01 31 19 - Project Meetings
01 31 26 - Mechanical and Electrical Coordination
01 32 16 - Schedule
01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements
01 45 29 - Testing Laboratory Services
01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 51 13 - Temporary Electricity and Lighting
01 51 23 - Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating
01 51 36 - Temporary Water and Saniarty Facilities
01 58 00 - Project Identification
01 60 00 - Product Requirements
01 71 23 - Field Engineering
01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching
01 74 00 - Cleaning and Waste Management
01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures
01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data
01 78 36 - Warranties and Bonds
01 78 39 - Project Record Documents
DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024000 - Demolition and Structure Moving
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement
03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
JOB# 10-731 INDEX OF SECTIONS 00100 - 1

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Gouting
04 20 00 - Unit Masonry
04 72 00 - Cast Stone Masonry
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing
05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
06 17 53 - Plate Connected Wood Trusses
06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework
06 42 16 - Wood-Veneer Paneling
06 63 10 - Vinyl Posts and Railings
06 65 00 - Plastic Simulated Wood Trim
06 82 05 - Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation
07 21 19 - Foamed-In-Place Insulation
07 21 26 - Blown Insulation
07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles
07 31 30 - Stone Coated Metal Roof Shingle
07 46 16 - Aluminum Soffit and Facia
07 46 33 - Plastic Siding
07 46 46 - Fiber Cement Siding
07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing
07 61 00 - Sheet Metal Roofing
07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts
07 81 23 - Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing
07 84 00 - Firestopping
07 90 05 - Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 11 17 - Pre-Finished Steel Door Frames
08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors
08 14 33 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors
08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels
08 36 13 - Sectional Doors
08 42 29 - Automatic Entrances
08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts
08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows
08 52 00 - Wood Windows
08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows
08 62 23 - Tubular Skylights
08 71 00 - Door Hardware
JOB# 10-731 INDEX OF SECTIONS 00100 - 2

08 71 14 - Low-Energy Door Operators
08 80 00 - Glazing
08 83 00 - Mirrors
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 30 00 - Tiling
09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceiling
09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring
09 68 00 - Carpeting
09 91 00 - Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 14 53 - Traffic Signage and Pavement Markings
10 21 13.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments
10 21 23 - Cubicles
10 26 00 - Impact-Resistant Wall Protection
10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
10 31 00 - Manufactured Fireplaces
10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties
10 51 00 - Lockers
10 56 17 - Wall Mounted Standards and Shelving
10 75 00 - Flagpoles
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 40 00 - Food Service Equipment
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 35 30 - Residential Casework
12 36 00 - Countertops
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 - General Fire Protection Requirements
21 05 10 - Fire Protecting Piping
21 13 13 - Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System
21 13 16 - Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 05 00 - General Plumbing Requirements
22 05 03 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings
22 05 23 - Valves
22 05 29 - Supports & Anchors
22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation
22 10 00 - Piping Specialties
22 10 01 - Plumbing Specialties
22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment
22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
JOB# 10-731 INDEX OF SECTIONS 00100 - 3

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 05 00 - General HVAC Requirements
23 05 03 - Piping and Fittings
23 05 14 - Variable Frequency Drive
23 05 15 - Piping Specialties
23 05 23 - Valves
23 05 29 - Supports and Anchors
23 05 48 - Vibration Isolation
23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
23 07 00 - Ductwork Insulation
23 07 01 - HVAC Piping Insulation
23 09 00 - Temperature Control
23 20 00 - HVAC Pumps
23 21 14 - Ground Loop Heat Exchanger System
23 31 00 - Ductwork
23 33 00 - Ductwork Accessories
23 34 13 - Power Roof Ventilators
23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets
23 52 34 - Boilers
23 72 00 - Energy Recovery Units
23 81 07 - Rooftop Heating, Cooling and Make-up Air Unit (Gas Fired)
23 81 43 - Heat Pump Units
23 82 00 - Terminal Heat Transfer Units
23 84 15 - Humidifiers
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 - General Electrical Requirements
26 00 20 - Temporary Service
26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
26 05 03 - Wiring Connections
26 05 19 - Building Wire and Cable
26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes
26 09 23 - Occupancy Sensors
26 13 44 - Communications Distribution
26 24 16 - Panelboards
26 27 15 - Electrical Utility Services
26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
26 28 19 - Enclosed Switches
26 32 13 - Engine Generators and Transfer Switch
26 50 00 - Lumiaries
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 11 - Requirements for Communications Installation
27 10 00 - Telecommunications Cabling
27 41 00 - TV Distribution
27 52 23 - Emergency Call and Perimeter Alarm System
27 52 24 - Emergency Call System
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00 - Fire Alarm
JOB# 10-731 INDEX OF SECTIONS 00100 - 4

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 10 00 - Site Clearing
31 20 00 - Earth Moving
31 25 00 - Eroision and Sediment Control
31 37 00 - Riprap
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses
32 12 00 - Flexible Paving
32 13 13 - Concrete Paving
32 13 14 - Concrete Sidewalks and Aprons
32 16 00 - Curbs and Gutters
32 17 23.13 - Painted Pavement Markings
32 17 26 - Tactile Warning Surfacing
32 31 23 - Plastic Fences and Gates
32 92 00 - Turfs and Grasses
32 93 00 - Plants
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 04 00 - Trenching and Site Utilities
33 11 00 - Water Utilities
33 31 00 - Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
33 40 00 - Site Drainage Utilities
END OF SECTION 00100
JOB# 10-731 INDEX OF SECTIONS 00100 - 5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
INVITATION TO BID
DUNN COUNTY NEW HEALTH CARE
CENTER
FOR
DUNN COUNTY
PURCHASING DEPT.
800 WILSON AVE
MENOMONIE, WI
ARCHTECT:
HOFFMAN, LLC
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER:
THE SAMUELS GROUP, INC.
BIDS DUE: APRIL 12, 2012 at 2:00 PM LOCAL
TIME. PUBLIC BID OPENING WILL FOLLOW
A pre-bid meeting is scheduled for March 29 at
10:00 am at the existing Dunn County Health Care
Center, 3001 Highway 12 E., Menomonie, WI
54751.
Sealed Bids for the Project designated above will
be received on behalf of the Owner by the
Construction Manager, The Samuels Group, at the
above location.
All bids will be publicly opened and read at the
specified time and date indicated above by the
Owner or his designee.
The Work includes construction of a new Health
Care Center complex comprised of 12 new single
story buildings located on one project site. Review
bid documents and Bid Category description for
full description of the work. Construction Schedule
is Start May 2012 and Complete July 2013.
Documents may be viewed at The Samuels Group
in Wausau, WI; Isqft, Franz Reprographics Online
Plan Room, Samuels Group FTP Site, Select
Builders Exchanges in Wisconsin, Iowa and
Minnesota.
Copies of the above documents may be obtained
on or after March 26, 2012
You may view and order bid documents by going
to the Franz Reprographics web site at
www.franzrepro.com, and selecting the Franz
Public Plan Room. A hard copy set of Bid
documents will have a refundable deposit of
$225. Deposit check to be made out to Franz
Reprographics. A non-refundable fee of $60 will
be due to Franz Reprographics for shipping. To
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
view the project click on “Pink” Guest View
Button. Otherwise please complete the log-in
registration form to establish an account which
allows you to order the project plans and specs.
Once you have selected the project, please
review the Bid Details for information on
ordering documents. To receive Bid
Addendums, General Notifications etc, for this
project you must place the following email
address notice@plancommand.net in your
list of Outlook Contacts and indicate that it is a
Safe Sender: There is a ?Help button you can
select for assistance with using the Online Plan
Room. If you still have problems, please contact
Franz Reprographics by phone at 763-503-
3401/800-288-8541
Bid Security in the amount of five (5) percent of the
Bid must accompany each Bid in accord with the
Instructions to Bidders.
The Owner reserves the right to waive
irregularities and to accept any bid, reject any and
all bids, and upon acceptance of any bid, to
thereafter accept revisions or modifications on
such bid.
Invitation to Bid
00 11 16-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
SECTION 00 21 13
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
GENERAL
To be considered, Bids must be made in accord with these Instructions to Bidders. Bidders should
reference Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work to review the Bid Categories for this project.
DOCUMENTS
Contact the Architect or Construction Manager for instructions for obtaining bid documents.
EXAMINATION
Carefully examine the Procurement Documents which include the proposed Contract Documents and
the construction site to obtain first-hand knowledge of existing conditions. Each Bidder, by submitting
its bid, represents that Bidder has examined the Procurement Documents, inspected the site,
understands the provisions of the Procurement Documents, and has become familiar with the local
conditions under which the Work is to be performed. Bidders will not be entitled to extra payments or
Contract Time extensions for conditions which could have been determined by carefully examining the
site, subsurface information, and the Procurement Documents.
Copies of standards referenced in the Project Manual are available for review at the Architect's office,
or may be seen at College or University libraries.
ADDENDA
All changes in or interpretations of the Procurement Documents prior to the bid opening will be made by
written addenda issued by the Architect to each recipient of the Procurement Documents recorded by
the Architect. All addenda will be issued not later than 24 hours prior to bid opening.
PROOF OF COMPETENCY OF BIDDER
Any Bidder may be required to furnish evidence satisfactory to the Construction Manager that the
Bidder have sufficient means, expertise, financial ability, and experience in the types of work Bid to
assure completion of the Contract in a satisfactory manner.
QUESTIONS
Submit all questions about the Procurement Documents to the Architect, in writing, not later than 5 days
prior to Bid Date. Replies will be issued to all Bidders of Record as Addenda to the Procurement
Documents and will become part of the Contract. The Architect and Owner will not be responsible for
oral clarification. Questions received after this time cannot be answered.
SUBSTITUTIONS
To obtain approval to use unspecified products, submit Substitution Request Form not later than 10
days prior to Bid Date. Requests received after this time will not be considered. Utilize Substitution
Request Form at the end of Section 01 60 00. If the Product is acceptable, the Architect will so indicate
by Addendum issued to all Bidders of Record. Refer to Section 01 60 00 of the Specifications for
additional information.
PREPARATION OF BIDS
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Dunn County is a governmental entity and is exempt from Wisconsin Sales and Use Taxes on certain
purchases it makes.
Subject to Contracting Requirements and administrative procedures set forth in Section 01 11 23:
Owner Purchased Products, the County intends to purchase directly such materials, equipment, and/or
other incidental services as designated in the Bid Form by Bidder as "Maximum cost to Owner for
Owner-Direct Purchases".
NOTE Include all materials and equipment specified in Section 11 40 00 - Foodservice Equipment in
Part 2 of your Base Bid.
The BASE BID is the stipulated sum to perform all the Work including a guaranteed maximum sum
for Owner-Direct Purchases (including applicable Wisconsin Sales and Use Taxes).
Enter in Part 1 of the Base Bid the guaranteed maximum sum for Owner-Direct Purchases including
applicable Wisconsin Sales and Use Taxes.
Enter in Part 2 of the Base Bid the stipulated sum for all other costs to perform all the Work including
without limitation: labor, services, Contract Administration, all incidental materials and equipment
(excluded from Part 1), and all costs associated with providing administrative assistance to the Owner
to facilitate Owner-Direct Purchases as more fully described in the Procurement Documents. Include
all Work of Section 11 40 00.
Prepare Bids on unaltered Bid Forms bound in the Project Manual. Submit two copies. Bids shall be
signed with name typed below signature. Where Bidder is a corporation, Bids must be signed with the
legal name of the corporation followed by the name of the State of incorporation and the legal signature
of an officer authorized to bind the corporation to Contract. Do not submit Project Manual with Bid.
ALTERNATIVE BIDS
Where Alternative Bids are required in the Bid Form, Bidders shall fill in each alternative bid with a bid
price. There will be no division of awards between Base Bid and accepted alternative bids.
Prepare the Alternative Bid in a similar manner as the Base Bid except identification of Parts 1 and 2 is
not required, and all sales and use taxes must be included in the Alternative Bid. Should the Owner
elect to accept the Alternative Bid, then any products the Owner elects to purchase directly, together
with the applicable sales and use taxes will be credited to the Owner and the balance of the Alternative
Bid added to the Contract Sum.
UNIT PRICE ITEMS
When unit price items are included in the Procurement Documents, the bidder shall indicate, in figures,
a unit price for each separate item. The acceptance of bid unit prices shall be a condition of contract
award.
PRE-BID CONFERENCE
The Architect and Construction Manager will hold a pre-bid conference on March 29 at 10:00 am at the
existing Dunn County Health Care Center, 3001 Highway 12 E., Menomonie, WI 54751. The
conference is open to all Bidders and Suppliers. Attendance is not mandatory. The conference will be
held to determine that the Contract Documents, contract terms, and related matters are understood by
the Bidders. Any misunderstanding as to work procedure, scope of the work, project schedules, and
similar items are to be discussed and resolved. All pertinent agreements reached will become a part of
the project by written addendum.
Place and exact time of conference will be determined by the Architect and Construction Manager and
will be communicated by telephone or letter.
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
BID SECURITY
Make Bid Security payable to Dunn County in the amount of five (5) percent of the total Bid Sum, not
just Part 2. Security shall be either certified check or bid bond issued by surety licensed to conduct
business in the State of Wisconsin. The successful Bidder's security will be retained until he has
signed a Contract and furnished the required payment and performance bonds. The Owner will retain
the security of all Bidders until the successful bidder enters into Contract or until 45 days after bid
opening, whichever is the shorter. If any Bidder refuses to enter into a Contract, the Owner will retain
his Bid Security as liquidated damages, but not as a penalty. Submit Bid Security with Bid.
PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND
Each successful Bidder shall furnish and pay for a Performance Bond and Labor and Materials
Payment Bond. See Subparagraph 11.5 of the Supplementary Conditions. Reference Dunn County
Code of Ordinances Chapter 7.
SUBMITTAL
Submit Bid and Bid Security in an opaque sealed envelope. Identify the envelope with Project name,
and name of Bidder. Submit Bids in accord with the Invitation to Bid. Do not submit Project Manual
with Bid. Facsimile bids not acceptable.
MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL
Bids may not be modified after submittal. Bidders may withdraw Bids at any time before bid opening,
but may not resubmit them. No Bid may be withdrawn or modified after the bid opening except where
the award of Contracts has been delayed for more than 45 days from day of Bid opening.
DISQUALIFICATION
The Owner reserves the right to disqualify Bids, before or after opening upon evidence of collusion with
intent to defraud or other illegal practices upon the part of the Bidder.
OPENING
Bids will be opened as announced in the Invitation to Bid.
AWARD
The Owner reserves the right to waive irregularities and accept any Bid, reject any and all Bids, and
upon acceptance of any Bid, to thereafter accept revisions or modifications on such Bid.
If two or more Bidders submit identical Bids, the Owner may make award to that Bidder of his choice,
and such decision shall be final.
Awards will not be made to any Bidder in default of a Contract with the Owner, or to any Bidder having
as his agent or employee any individual previously in default or guilty of misrepresentation.
Bid results may be published in construction periodicals.
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Written notice of award to a Bidder in the form of a letter from the Construction Manager mailed or
delivered to the address shown on the Bid Form will be considered sufficient notice of acceptance of
Bid, intent to award the Contract, and "Notice to Proceed" with the Work.
EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The Agreement Forms which the accepted Bidder, as Contractor, will be required to execute is
indicated in the Project Manual.
The accepted Bidder shall assist and cooperate with the Construction Manager in preparing the formal
Agreement, and within ten days following its presentation shall execute same and return it to the
Construction Manager. Failure to execute Agreement and return it to Construction Manager within time
indicated shall be considered by Construction Manager as refusal by accepted Bidder to enter into the
Contract.
At or prior to delivery of the signed Agreement, the Contractor shall deliver to the Construction Manager
the Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond and the policies of insurance or
insurance certificates as required by the Contract Documents. All bonds and policies of insurance shall
be approved by the Construction Manager before the accepted Bidder may proceed with the Work.
Failure or refusal to furnish bonds or insurance policies or certificates in a timely manner and in a form
satisfactory to the Construction Manager shall not serve to waive any requirements of the Contract
Documents, including time of completion.
End of Instructions to Bidders
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 00 31 00
AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION
USING THE PROJECT MANUAL
The information contained in this Project Manual has been organized utilizing MASTERFORMAT, 2004
Edition, a publication jointly produced by the Constructions Specifications Institute (CSI) and
Construction Specifications Canada (CSC).
The Project Manual consists of three major parts:
Procurement Requirements
Contracting Requirements
Specifications
Specifications have been divided into 33 Divisions. Note that not all Divisions are necessarily used.
The Divisions are further divided into Sections classifying work results.
Work and requirements are specified in particular Divisions and Sections according to the TYPE of
Work to be furnished NOT according to trade jurisdiction nor local practices.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
The following information regarding site survey and subsurface conditions was obtained or otherwise
acquired by the Owner for his use. It is presented here to aid the Bidder in the preparation of his bid.
Neither Owner, Construction Manager, nor Architect warrant the accuracy of this information, which has
been furnished or prepared by other parties. Bidders should verify this information prior to submitting
their bid.
SITE SURVEY
The extent of site survey information available, is included in the bid documents.
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
A geotechnical report has been conducted by Owner. The written report and soil boring report is bound
immediately following this section.
End of Available Project Information
2006.07.00 Available Project Information
00000 00 31 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
SECTION 00 41 00
BID FORM
PROJECT: DUNN COUNTY HEALTH CARE CENTER
HIGHWAY 12
MENOMONIE, WI 54751
BIDS TO: DUNN COUNTY – PURCHASING DEPT.
ATTN: PATTY ISAACSON
800 WILSON AVE
MENOMONIE, WI 54751
I (We) ________________________________________________________________________________
(A Corporation) (A Partnership) (An Individual)
Strike out those that do not apply
Of ___________________________________________________________________________________
Street City State Zip
______________________________________________________________________________________
Telephone Number Fax Number Email
a Bona Fide Prime Bidder, have received the Procurement Documents which include the Project Manual and
Drawings prepared by Hoffman, LLC., dated _____________, 2012 for the above referenced project. I (We) have
also received Addenda Nos. ____________, and have included their provisions in this Bid.
I (We) have examined the Procurement Documents noted above including all referenced AIA Documents, and
agree to enter into and execute a Contract, if awarded, on the basis of this Bid, and to furnish guarantee bonds in
accord with Article 11 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
BASE BID
I (We) will perform all the Work except for Work described in Alternatives, for the stipulated sum of
__________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________ Dollars ($_____________________________________________).
which is the sum of Parts 1 and 2 following:
PART 1.
Maximum cost to Owner for Owner-Direct Purchases Including applicable Wisconsin Sales and Use
Taxes is ___________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________Dollars ($______________________________________ )
PART 2.
Stipulated sum for all other costs excluded from Part 1 above to perform all the Work is
__________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________Dollars ($______________________________________ )
Bid Form
00 41 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
ALTERNATIVE BIDS
Alternative Bids are more fully described in Section 01 23 00 of the Specifications. All Prime Bidders must
indicate the stipulated sum to be added to or deducted from their Base Bid or indicate "no change". A "no bid"
entry, or failure to enter a sum will be considered a "no change" to the Base Bid.
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 1 – IN FLOOR HEAT
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 2 – SOLAR TUBES
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 3 – SEPARATE ENTRY DRIVE
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 4 – HARDWOOD WALL BASE
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 5 – LARGE CORE FRONT ELEVATION BRICK & FOUNDATION WALL
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 6 – CEMENT SIDING
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 7 – ODIP INSURANCE
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 8 – ENHANCED HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 9 – ENHANCED ELOPEMENT SYSTEM
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 10 – VINYL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 11 – ENHANCED NURSE CALL SYSTEM
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 12 – EXPAND GENERATOR SYSTEM
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
Bid Form
00 41 00-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 13 – METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 14 – METAL SHAKE ROOFING
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 15 – OAK CHAIR RAIL
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 16 – PLANK STYLE VINYL FLOORING IN LIEU OF SHEET VINYL
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 17 – RE-USE GEOTHERMAL TEST WELL
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALTERNATIVE BID NO. 18 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS
If the Owner elects to accept this alternative, add to or deduct from my (our) Base Bid the stipulated sum of
____________________________________________ Dollars ( $ _______________________________).
ALLOWANCES
I (We) have included all allowances as stated in the Contract Documents.
SUBCONTRACTOR LIST
I (We) understand that after Bid opening, to be considered for contract Award, I (we) must submit a list of
Subcontractors in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.
WISCONSIN SALES/USE TAXES
I (We) have included all Wisconsin Sales/Use Taxes applicable to this Project in accordance with current
Wisconsin Statutes and regulations of the Wisconsin Department of Revenue.
BID SECURITY
I (We) have attached the required Bid Security to this Bid.
__________________________________
Firm Name
By (Signature) __________________________________
Printed Name and Title __________________________________
Attested __________________________________
(Authorized Corporate Officer)
Dated , 20__ (Affix Corporate Seal Here)
End of Bid Form
Bid Form
00 41 00-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
SECTION 00 52 00
AGREEMENT FORM
REFERENCED STANDARD
The "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor", AIA Document A101-2007, is not
bound in this Project Manual, but is included by this reference; is a part of the Procurement Documents;
and is incorporated herein as fully as if here set-forth. This Form of Agreement will be used between
Owner and each Contractor.
AIA Document A101-2007 as supplemented may be examined at the office of the Architect or at the
Construction Manager's place of business.
The following Riders will be made part of the Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and
Contractor.
1. Rider A – Safety
2. Rider B – Insurance
3. Rider C – Trade Contractors and Material Suppliers
Copies of AIA Document A101-2007 may be purchased from:
AIA Wisconsin
321 S. Hamilton Street
Madison, WI 53703
Phone (608) 257-8477
Fax (608) 257-0242
Agreement Form
00 52 00-1

00 52 00a
NEW DUNN COUNTY HEALTH CARE CENTER
RIDER A
LABOR OR LABOR/MATERIAL SUPPLIERS ONLY
SAFETY. The prevention of accidents or injuries on, about, or in the vicinity of the project site is the Trade
Contractor's responsibility. The Trade Contractor, its Subcontractors, and Suppliers must perform their Work in a safe
manner, must fully comply with safety measures initiated by the Owner or imposed by the Contract Documents, must adhere
to the applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, codes and orders of public authorities bearing upon the safety of
persons or property or their protection from damages, injury or loss, and must abide with all Federal and State OSHA
requirements relative to safety and the prevention of accidents or injuries.
The Trade Contractor shall be solely responsible for the protection and safety of its employees, its Subcontractor's
employees, and Supplier's employees, for the final selection of all safety methods and means, for required safety reports and
records, for daily inspection of its Work area and its employees' safety equipment, and for the continual instruction of its
employees on health and safety, including weekly safety meetings. The Trade Contractor must actively promote safe
working performances and practices on the part of its employees, its Subcontractor's employees, and Supplier's employees.
The Trade Contractor must establish and maintain a safety program implementing safety measures, policies and standards
conforming, on a comprehensive basis, to its obligations under these paragraphs which safety program shall include
provisions for selection of safety methods and means, conveyance of information and instruction with regard to those safety
methods and means to its employees, Subcontractors, and Suppliers, safety meetings of its employees at least once a week,
maintenance of required safety reports and records, periodic inspections of its Work area and equipment to detect and
correct hazardous conditions, safety rule violations and unsafe work practices, and enforcement of corrective actions as
required.
The Trade Contractor shall stop any part of the Work which the Owner deems unsafe until proper corrective measures have
been taken but failure on the part of the Owner to stop unsafe Work shall in no way relieve the Trade Contractor of its
responsibility therefor. The Trade Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for fines, penalties, damages or expenses incurred
by the Owner because of the Contractor's failure to comply with safety requirements.
HARDHATS, PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT. All personnel are to wear an approved
hardhat, safety shoes and glasses and goggles and comply with OSHA clothing standards at all times while on this project.
Failure to comply will result in that person being directed to leave the site.
ASBESTOS. The Trade Contractor must notify the Owner if any material containing asbestos is encountered
during performance of the Trade Contractor's Work. The Trade Contractor is prohibited from storing or installing any
equipment or material containing asbestos on the project site. The Trade Contractor is solely responsible for the prevention
of asbestos containing material or equipment to be installed as part of its Work.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL: The Trade Contractor must notify the Owner if any hazardous material is
encountered during performance of the Trade Contractor's Work. The Trade Contractor is prohibited from distributing,
removing or storing of any equipment or materials deemed to contain hazardous material. The Trade Contractor is solely
responsible for prevention of hazardous materials being installed as part of its work. All Trade Contractors are responsible
for all disposal of chemicals and containers used in the construction of their Work on this project. Each Trade Contractor
will submit OSHA required material safety data sheets on all chemicals before work is started.
OWNER: DUNN COUNTY
By__________________________
Its__________________________
TRADE CONTRACTOR:
By____________________________
Its____________________________

SECTION 00 52 00
CONTRACT RIDER B- INSURANCE
Contractor shall obtain insurance with limits at least equal to those specified below:
TYPE OF INSURANCE
ALL LIMITS IN THOUSANDS__________
General Liability
Commercial Liability
Comprehensive Form General Aggregate $2,000
Premises/Operations Products Comp/OPS Aggregate $2,000
Products/Completed Operations Personal & Advertising Injury $l,000
Contractual Each Occurrence $l,000
Damage to Rented Premises Each Occurrence $ 100
Medical Expenses Each Occurrence $ 5
Independent Contractors
Comprehensive General Liability
Broad Form Property Damage Bodily Injury $l,000
Personal Injury Property Damage $l,000
Explosion/Collapse/Underground (XCU) or CSL $l,000
Automobile Liability
Any Auto Bodily Injury (Per Person) $l,000
All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $l,000
Hired Autos Property Damage $l,000
Non-Owned Autos or CSL $l,000
Umbrella Liability Per Contract
All Subcontractors $5,000
Workers' Compensation and
Statutory
Employer's Liability
$l00 (Each Accident)
$500 (Disease - Policy Limit)
$l00 (Disease - Each Employee)
This policy must include The Samuels Group, Inc., Dunn County, Hoffman, LLC. and others as required in the Contract
Documents as Additional Insureds on General Liability, Waiver of Subrogation must be provided to certificate holder for all above
policies. General Liability coverage must be primary and non-contributory. Form CG-2010 and CG-2037 or its equivalent must
be attached., without recourse or contribution from similar insurance carried by The Samuels Group, Inc.
It is understood and agreed that the insurance coverages and limits, required above, shall not be limited to the extent of the
Subcontractor's responsibilities and liabilities specified within the Contract Documents or bylaw.
The policies obtained and maintained to provide the specified insurance must provide that the required coverages and limits will not be
altered, canceled, or allowed to expire without at least 30 days prior written notice to Construction Manager.
Any deductible amounts which may occur as part of the Builder's Risk policy shall be borne by the named Trade Contractor
making claims in direct proportion as their individual losses bear to the total loss and policy is to carry an appropriate rider to this
effect.
Before beginning any work under this trade contract, Trade Contractors and any Subcontractors will provide to the
Construction Manager an insurance certificate and endorsements showing compliance with these insurance specifications. Non-
Compliance with these specifications could result in the withholding of a payment.
Construction Manager
THE SAMUELS GROUP INC.
By:________________________________
Its:________________________________
TRADE
CONTRACTOR:___________________________
By:_______________________________________
Its:_______________________________________

SECTION 00 52 00
NEW DUNN COUNTY HEALTH CARE CENTER
RIDER "C"
TRADE CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS:
Trade Contractors shall list labor percentage of the total Contract, all material suppliers,
and all Subcontractors as a condition precedent to receipt of first payment. This form
must be filled out and returned with the signed Contract. This list is not to be construed
as a complete list.
LIEN WAIVERS from each Subcontractors and supplier will be required for their
portion of the previous months payment prior to release of the current payment.
FINANCIAL INFORMATION. A balance sheet is required from Trade Contractors
who have not worked for Dunn County. in the last three (3) years.
Labor percentage of Contract = ___________________________%
Listing of material suppliers and/or Subcontractors:
COMPANY CONTACT NAME PHONE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FIRM:_________________________
BY:___________________________
DATE:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
SECTION 00 61 13
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND FORM
REFERENCED STANDARD
The "Public Improvement Performance/Labor and Material Payment Bond", Wisconsin AIA Document
A312, August 1989 Edition, is not bound in the Project Manual, but is included by this reference; and is
incorporated herein as fully as if here set-forth.
Performance and Payment Bonds will be required for this project.
This document may be examined at the office of the Architect or at the Owner's place of business.
This document may be purchased from:
AIA Wisconsin
321 S. Hamilton Street
Madison, WI 53703
Phone (608) 257-8477
Fax (608) 257-0242
End of Performance/Labor and Material Payment Bond
2006.07.00 Performance and Payment Bond Form
00000 00 61 13-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
SECTION 00 72 00
GENERAL CONDITIONS
REFERENCE STANDARD
The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201/CMa - 1992, Articles 1
thru 14 inclusive, is not bound in this Project Manual, but is included by this reference; is a part of the
Procurement Documents; and is incorporated herein as fully as if here set-forth.
AIA Document A201/CMa as supplemented may be examined at the office of the Architect or at the
Construction Manager's place of business.
Copies of AIA Document A201/CMa may be purchased from:
AIA Wisconsin
321 S. Hamilton Street
Madison, WI 53703
Phone (608) 257-8477
Fax (608) 257-0242
End of General Conditions
General Conditions
00 72 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 00 73 00
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201/CMa - 1992, Articles 1
thru 14 inclusive, is a part of The Procurement Documents, and is incorporated herein as fully as if here
set-forth.
SUPPLEMENTS
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201/CMa - 1992. Where any Article of the General
Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by
these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall
remain in effect.
REFERENCE TO DIVISION 01 OF THE SPECIFICATIONS
The following provisions of the General Conditions relate to project administrative and work-related
requirements of the Contract and are deleted from the General Conditions. These provisions are
covered in Division 01, General Requirements of the Specifications. The deleted Paragraphs are:
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
3.6 TAXES
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
3.8 ALLOWANCES
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
3.13 USE OF SITE
3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.15 CLEANING UP
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
Add the following Clauses 1.1.2.1 and 1.2.2.2
1.1.2.1 Contract, Contract for Construction, and Owner-Contractor Agreement have the same meaning
as used throughout the Contract Documents.
1.1.2.2 The Contract does not include any products sold directly to Owner by separate contractors,
subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers.
1.1.3 THE WORK
Add the following sentence at the end of the paragraph:
The Work does not include furnishing any products purchased directly by Owner.
1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Add the following Clause 1.1.6.1:
1.1.6.1 Specifications are written in imperative and abbreviated form. This imperative language is
directed at the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Incomplete sentences shall be
completed by inserting "shall", "the Contractor shall", and "shall be", and similar mandatory phrases by
inference in the same manner as they are applied to notes on the Drawings. The words "shall be" shall
be supplied in inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases. Except as worded to
the contrary, fulfill (perform) all indicated requirements whether stated imperatively or otherwise.
Add the following Subparagraphs 1.1.8, 1.1.9, and 1.1.10:
1.1.8 PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS
The Procurement Documents consists of all contents of the Project Manual, the separately bound
Drawings, as listed in the Drawing Index, and Addenda relating to any of these, and the Contractor's
Bid.
1.1.9 MINOR CHANGE IN THE WORK
A minor change in the Work shall be defined as a change not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum
or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents,
including clarifications, correction of minor dimensional errors, responses to Contractor's requests for
information, and similar basic contract administrative procedures necessary for the successful
completion of the Project.
1.1.10 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS
1.1.10.1 The term "product" or "Product" as used in the Project Manual includes materials, systems
and equipment.
1.1.10.2 The term "furnish" (materials) as used in the Project Manual means to supply and deliver to
the project ready for installation and in operable condition.
1.1.10.3 The term "install" (services or labor) as used in the Project Manual means to place in final
position, complete, anchored, connected, and in operable condition.
1.1.10.4 The term "provide" as used in the Project Manual in connection with labor, materials, and
equipment means pay for, furnish, and install, complete; including connecting to utilities or service,
complete anchorage and suspension, fastening or anchor devices, trim, finish and other related work,
unless specifically specified otherwise.
1.1.10.5 The use of the term "Approved, Satisfactory, Equal to, Proper, as Directed, and Similar
Terms" is reserved solely to the A/E and means that the A/E's decision regarding this term shall be
final and binding upon the Contractor.
1.1.10.6 The term "Notice to Proceed" is a verbal or written notice by the CM, A/E or Owner to the
Contractor to commence work of the Contract, issued either before or after execution of the Contract.
If verbally given, and the Contractor requests, the Notice shall be confirmed in writing. In issuing the
Notice, stipulations may be included as to time and other requirements that may condition
commencement of the Work.
1.1.10.7 The term "fabricated" pertains to items specifically assembled or made of selected materials
or components to meet individual design requirements.
1.1.10.8 The term "Manufactured" means standard units, usually mass produced by an established
manufacturer of the respective item.
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
1.1.10.9 The terms "Shop fabricated" or "shop made" refer to items made by the Contractor in his
own shop.
1.1.10.10 The following terms and their definitions as used in the Project Manual are listed below (see
Drawing A001 for Abbreviations and additional definitions):
Term
Definition
Contractor:
Any individual, partnership, or corporation
that submits a Bid to the Construction
Manager for any portion or portions of the
Work.
Subcontractor:
Any individual, partnership, or corporation
that submits a Bid to the Contractor for any
portion or portions of the Work.
Major Contractor:
Any and each of the following:
PC, HC, EC, FPC
1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
Delete entire Subparagraph 1.2.4 and substitute the following:
1.2.4 The organization of the Specifications in the Project Manual into Divisions and Sections; and the
arrangement, numbering, titling and location of the Drawings within a separately bound set shall not
control the Construction Manager in dividing the Work among Contractors or in establishing the extent
of the Work to be performed by any trade.
Add the following Subparagraph 1.2.3.1: If there is an inconsistency in the quality of quantity of Work
required by the Contract Documents, the greater quality or quantity of Work indicated, or lesser quality
or quantity of Work indicated, shall be provided in accordance with the Architect’s interpretation, and no
change in the Contract Sum will be permitted.
Add the following Subparagraph 1.2.5.1: Where a number is used in the Contract Documents (as for
gauges, weights, temperatures, amounts of time, etc.) interpret the number as that or better.
Add the following Subparagraph 1.2.6:
1.2.6 Specification Sections of Division 01 - General Requirements govern the execution of all Sections
of the Specifications.
Add the following Paragraph 1.6:
1.6 REQUEST FOR ELECTRONIC DATA
1.6.1 Prior to the A/E providing any Instruments of Service in electronic form to the Construction
Manager, Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor, the
A/E shall receive from the Construction Manager, Contractor or Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor,
manufacturer, supplier, or distributor a signed disclaimer letter furnished by the A/E and a base fee of
$100.00 to cover services for preparation of the electronic data. In addition to the base fee, Potter
Lawson charges a $20.00 fee for each drawing in electronic media format. The fees indicated above
are subject to change based upon the fee assessed by the A/E’s consultants.
1.6.2 The A/E cannot guarantee the accuracy or completeness of the electronic data provided. If there
is a discrepancy between the electronic data and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. Any use of
the A/E’s electronic data will be at the Construction Manager’s, Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s, Subsubcontractor’s,
manufacturer’s, supplier’s, or distributor’s sole risk and without liability or legal
exposure to the A/E. The Construction Manager, Contractor or Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor,
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
manufacturer, supplier, or distributor shall also agree to indemnify and hold harmless the A/E from all
claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorney fees arising out of use of the electronic
data.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
2.1 DEFINITION
Add the following Clause 2.1.1.1:
2.1.1.1 The Owner as referenced in the Contract Documents is Green Lake County.
2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
Add the following Clause 2.4.1.1:
2.4.1.1 The Owner's actions pursuant to Subparagraph 2.4.1 shall not release any obligations of a
Surety upon its Performance/Labor and Material Payment Bond.
Add the following Paragraphs 2.5 and 2.6:
2.5 OWNER'S RIGHT TO ORDER ACCELERATION
If the Contractor fails to prosecute the work in accordance with the construction schedule, as provided
by the Construction Manager pursuant to the terms of Division 01, the Owner may require him to
increase the number of shifts or overtime operations, days of work, or number of construction workers,
or all of them, without additional compensation.
2.6 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PURCHASE PRODUCTS
2.6.1 Owner is a governmental entity, exempt from Wisconsin Sales and Use Tax liability on direct
purchases. To maintain exemption, Owner will make purchases directly, receive invoices directly, and
make payments directly on all products Owner elects to purchase.
2.6.2 Owner shall have the right to purchase certain products (as designated in Part 1 of the Base Bid)
to be incorporated in the Work or rent equipment directly from separate contractors, subcontractors,
vendors, and suppliers. Products to be purchased by Owner shall be identified prior to award of
Contract and the Contract Sum shall be established accordingly. The Contract Sum does not include
any products purchased by Owner directly from separate contractors, subcontractors, vendors, and
suppliers.
2.6.3 Owner will not purchase directly incidental materials such as shoring, formwork, fasteners, and
other items necessary for installation of the Work. Nor does Owner intend to purchase any item or
aggregation of items from a single supplier where the total cost is less than $5,000.00.
2.6.4 Owner may or may not purchase products relative to Change Orders, at its option.
2.6.5 Ownership of directly purchased products shall remain with Owner at all times.
2.6.6 All direct purchased products by Owner shall be used solely for benefit of Owner.
2.6.7 Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from and against any and all claims
asserted against Contractor relating to the liability for Wisconsin Sales or Use Tax (including interest
and penalties and, in the event of litigation, all reasonable expenses, including attorney's fees and
accountant's fees incurred by Contractor in connection therewith) on any products purchased or rented
directly by Owner, provided that (a) Contractor promptly tenders to Owner the defense, negotiation, or
other handling of such claim, (b) Owner shall have the right, at its own expense, to assume the defense
of the claim, and (c) Contractor shall cooperate fully with Owner in providing any and all information
which Owner reasonably requests in connection with the defense of the claim.
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
3.1 DEFINITION
Delete entire Subparagraph 3.1.1 and substitute the following:
3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Contract with the Owner, acting
directly or through his lawful agents or employees, who is primarily liable for the acceptable
performance of the work for which he has contracted, and also for the payment of all legal debts
pertaining to the work. The Contractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular
in number, and masculine in gender. The term Contractor means the Contractor or his authorized
representative.
Add the following Subparagraph 3.1.3:
3.1.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
Add the following Clause 3.2.1.1:
3.2.1.1 Utilize RFI form bound in this Project Manual following Section 01 33 00.
Add the following Subparagraph 3.2.1.1.1.: On all Project Drawings, figures take precedence over
measurements by scale, and any scaling is done at the Trade Contractor’s own risk. The Architect
shall decide on questions that may arise regarding the meaning and intent of the Contract Documents
however; except determinations involving Division One. Should any details or figures have been
omitted which are necessary to a clear understanding of the work or should any error appear in or
discrepancies be found in the Contract Documents, it is the duty of the Trade Contractor to notify the
Architect, through the Construction Manager of such omissions, errors, or Discrepancies, and in no
case proceed in uncertainty.
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 60 00, PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS, for
provisions on this subject. References to Paragraph 3.4 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall
read as referring to Specification Section 01 60 00.
3.5 WARRANTY
Delete entire Subparagraph 3.5.1 and substitute the following:
3.5.1 The Contractor warrants and represents to the Owner, Construction Manager and Architect that
materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality free of hazardous
substances in any form, and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents,
that the Work will be free from defects hot inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the
Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these
requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered
defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage and defect caused by abuse,
modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation,
or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Construction Manager or Architect, the
Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
Add the following Clause 3.5.1.1:
3.5.1.1 Hazardous substances referenced in Subparagraph 3.5.1 above include, but are not limited to:
asbestos, asbestos products, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other substances defined as
hazardous by Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act or listed as hazardous by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency.
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Add the following Subparagraph 3.5.2:
3.5.2 The Contractor warrants and represents to the Owner that products, equipment and systems
provided under the Contract have been tested and delivered so they will not malfunction or fail as a
result of changes in the date, month or year and will continue to function in accordance with the
specifications as they did when installed, tested and operated.
3.6 TAXES
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specifications Section 01 41 00, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS,
for provisions on this subject. References to Paragraph 3.6 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall
read as referring to Specification Section 01 41 00.
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 41 00, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS,
for provisions on this subject. References to Paragraph 3.7 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall
read as referring to Specification Section 01 41 00.
3.8 ALLOWANCES
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 21 00, ALLOWANCES, for provisions on
this subject. References to Paragraph 3.8 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall read as referring
to Specification Section 01 21 00.
3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
Add the following Subparagraph 3.9.2:
3.9.2 The Architect shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor's
superintendent or assistants.
Add the following Subparagraph 3.9.3: This superintendent or foreman shall not be removed from the
project without prior approval of the Construction Manager.
Add the following Subparagraph 3.9.4: The Construction Manager shall have the authority to remove
any workman or employee of the Trade Contractor from the site if found unsatisfactory to the
Construction Manager
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, for
provisions on this subject. Reference to Paragraph 3.10 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall
read as referring to Specification Section 01 33 00.
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 78 39, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS,
for provisions on this subject. Reference to Paragraph 3.11 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall
read as referring to Specification Section 01 78 39.
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, for
provisions on this subject. Reference to Paragraph 3.12 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall
read as referring to Specification Section 01 33 00.
3.13 USE OF SITE
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 11 00, SUMMARY OF WORK, for
provisions on this subject. References to Paragraph 3.13 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall
read as referring to Specification Section 01 11 00.
3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 73 29, CUTTING AND PATCHING, for
provisions on this subject. References to Paragraph 3.14 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall
read as referring to Specification Section 01 73 29.
3.15 CLEANING UP
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 74 00, CLEANING AND WASTE
MANAGEMENT, for provisions on this subject. References to Paragraph 3.15 elsewhere in the
Contract Documents shall read as referring to Specification Section 01 74 00.
Add the following Subparagraph 3.15.1: If the Trade Contractor fails to maintain the premises or clean
up as specified, the Construction Manager may do so after two (2) day written notice, with the cost paid
for by the Trade Contractor.
3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
3.17.1 In the last sentence following Architect, delete the period and add: "and Owner.".
Add the following Subparagraph 3.17.2:
3.17.2 If the Contractor uses any design, device, or material covered by letters, patent or copyright, he
shall provide for such use by suitable agreement with the Owner of such patented or copyrighted
design, device or material. The contract prices shall include all royalties or costs arising from the use of
such design, device or material, in any way involved in the work. The Contractor and his Sureties shall
indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use
of such patent or copyright in connection with Work, and shall indemnify the Owner for any cost,
expense or damage which it may be obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during
the prosecution of the Work or after completion of the Work.
ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 ARCHITECT
Add the following Clause 4.1.1.1:
4.1.1.1 The Architect as referenced in the Contract Documents is POTTER LAWSON, INC. The
Architect is referred to elsewhere in the Contract Documents as Engineer or A/E. Reference elsewhere
in the Contract Documents as Engineer or A/E shall mean Architect or his authorized representative.
4.2 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
Add the following Clause 4.2.1.1:
4.2.1.1 The Construction Manager as referenced in the Contract Documents is The Samuels Group.
The Construction Manager is referred to elsewhere in the Contract Documents as CM. Reference
elsewhere in the Contract Documents as CM shall mean Construction Manager or his authorized
representative.
4.6 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.6.5 In the first line delete the words at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction and insert in
its place as agreed by the Owner and the Architect in the Owner and Architect Agreement.
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
4.6.10 Delete the first sentence entirely and substitute in its place the following:
The Architect will have authority to advise the Owner to reject Work which does not conform to the
Contract Documents, and to recommend that the Owner require additional inspection or testing, in
accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or
completed, but will take such action only after notifying the Construction Manager.
4.6.10 In the fourth sentence delete the word decisions and insert in its place recommendations. In
the fifth sentence delete the word decision and insert in its place recommendation.
Delete entire Subparagraph 4.6.12. Refer to Specification Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS
PROCEDURES for provisions on this subject. References to Subparagraph 4.6.12 elsewhere in the
Contract Documents shall read as referring to Specification Section 01 33 00.
Delete Subparagraph 4.6.16 and substitute in its place the following:
4.6.16 The Construction Manager will assist the Architect in conducting reviews to determine the dates
of Substantial Completion and final completion, and will receive and forward to the Architect written
warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor. The
Construction Manager will forward to the Architect a final Project Application and Project Certificate for
Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect’s reviews
will be conducted to check conformance of the visible Work with the requirements of the Contract
Documents and to verify the accuracy and completeness of the list submitted by the Contractors of
Work to be completed or corrected.
4.6.18 Delete the first and second sentences entirely and substitute in its place the following:
The Architect will interpret and make recommendations to the Owner concerning performance under
and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of the Construction Manager, Owner or
Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made within a reasonable period of time.
4.6.19 Delete the word decisions (3 locations) and insert in its place recommendations.
4.7 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.7.2 Delete Decision of Architect and insert in its place Recommendation of Architect to the
Owner. Delete the word decision (3 locations) and insert in its place recommendation to the Owner.
4.7.6 At the end of the second to last sentence delete the word decision and insert in its place
recommendation.
4.8 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.8.4 Delete the word decision (2 locations) and insert in its place recommendation to the Owner.
4.9 ARBITRATION
4.9.1 Delete the word decision (2 locations) and insert in its place recommendation to the Owner.
Add the following Clause 4.9.2.1:
4.9.2.1 General procedure for Arbitration shall conform to Wisconsin Law, or Construction Industry
Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, as agreed upon by the parties involved.
4.9.4 Delete the word decision (2 locations) and insert in its place recommendation to the Owner.
4.9.4.1 Delete the word decision (8 locations) and insert in its place recommendation to the Owner.
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Delete Subparagraph 4.9.6 and substitute in its place the following:
4.9.7 Judgment on Final Award: The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and
judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with the laws of the State of Wisconsin.
ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
Add the following Clauses 7.2.3.: Overhead and profit for all methods of contract sum adjustments
shall be as follows:
A. For work performed by the Trade Contractor’s own forces—10%.
B. For Work performed by the Trade Subcontractors forces—5%.
7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.4.1 In the last line delete the period and add the following: as part of his normal administrative
requirements.
Add the following Clauses 7.4.1.1 and 7.4.1.2:
7.4.1.1 Written orders referenced above are limited to Supplemental Instructions or Construction
Bulletins issued on Architect's pre-printed forms.
7.4.1.2 Minor changes in the Work is defined in Article 1.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
Delete Subparagraph 8.2.3 entirely and substitute the following:
8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial
Completion of the whole Work on or before the date stipulated.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Delete entire Paragraph. Refer to Specification Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, for
provisions on this subject. References to Paragraph 9.2 elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall
read as referring to Specification Section 01 33 00.
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 9.3.1:
The form of Application for Payment shall be AIA Document G702, APPLICATION and
CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT, supported by AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet. Use
current editions of these documents. Contractor may utilize a computer generated form subject to A/E
approval.
Add the following Clause 9.3.2.1:
9.3.2.1 If the Contractor elects to request payment for materials or equipment stored off site and if
such request is approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall pay all costs incurred by the Owner to
protect his interest, including costs to visit the place of storage and inventory the stored materials or
equipment.
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
9.4.3 In the fifth line insert the word general between the words in and accordance.
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
9.6.1 Add the following Clauses 9.6.1.1, 9.6.1.2, 9.6.1.3, and 9.6.1.4:
9.6.1.1 The Owner will retain, until the Work is 50 percent complete, 5 percent of the amount due the
Contractor on account of progress payments. At the time the work is 50 percent completed or
thereafter, if the manner of completion of the Work and its progress are and remain satisfactory to the
Architect and Construction Manager, and in the absence of other good and sufficient reasons, the
Architect shall (on presentation by the Contractor of Consent of Surety) recommend any remaining
partial payments be paid in full.
9.6.1.2 The full contract retainage may be reinstated if the manner of completion of the Work and its
progress do not remain satisfactory to the Architect and Construction Manager or for other good and
sufficient reasons (or if the Surety withholds his consent).
9.6.1.3 Contractor shall submit one duly executed copy of Waiver of Lien Rights with each Application
for Payment. The Waiver must be in the amount of the Application and may be contingent upon receipt
of payment within thirty days of Application date. If a corporation, affix corporate seal.
9.6.1.4 Progress payments by Owner to vendors for Direct-Owner Purchased will be made in the
manner stated above in Subparagraph 9.6.1 and Clauses 9.6.1.1 and 9.6.1.2.
9.6.3 In the first line delete the word will and insert in its place may.
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
9.8.2 In the fourth sentence delete the words an inspection and insert in its place a review. In the
fifth and sixth sentences delete the word inspection and insert in its place review.
9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
9.9.1 In the last sentence delete the word decision and insert in its place recommendation to the
Owner.
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
9.10.1 In the first and second sentence delete the word inspection and insert in its place review. In
the third sentence delete the word inspections and insert in its place reviews.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
Add the following Clause 10.1.2.1:
10.1.2.1 Contractor's attention is directed to the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) in general
and to Parts 1926.1101 and 1910.1001 - ASBESTOS and 1926.62 – LEAD in particular. Compliance
with all possible applicable provisions is the Contractor's responsibility. Contractor's attention is also
directed to Wisconsin Administrative Code, Chapter NR 157 relative to PCB's.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
Delete entire Subparagraph 11.1.2 and substitute in its place the following:
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
11.1.2 Contractor shall, at its own expense, maintain the following types of policies with Best’s B+ VII
(or higher) rated insurer(s) which are licensed or approved by the State of Wisconsin. Coverage shall
be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until date of final
payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. Coverage
shall be written for not less than the limits of liability specified below or limits required by law, whichever
is greater. Neither the Owner nor Architect warrant the adequacy of the types of insurance or the limits
of liability required:
11.1.2.1 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS’ LIABILITY
Coverage A: Per State Statute
Coverage B: $ 100,000 Each accident
$ 500,000 Disease - Policy Limit
$ 100,000 Disease - Each Employee
11.1.2.2 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY REFER TO SECTION 00 10 10 RIDER “B”
Minimum Coverages: Operations of the Contractor
Operations of Subcontractor (Contingent Liability)
Products/Completed Operations (To be carried for two years after the Date
of
Substantial Completion of the Work.)
Personal Injury including employee related claims
Employees as Additional Insureds
Property Damage Hazards of Explosion, Collapse, and Underground
Contractual Liability to insure requirements of Paragraph 3.18
Limits: $ 0,000,000 General Aggregate
$ 0,000,000 Products/Completed Operations
$ 0,000,000 Each Occurrence
$ 0,000,000 Personal Injury
11.1.2.3 COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY REFER TO SECTION 00 10 10 RIDER “B”
Coverages: All owned automobiles
All non-owned automobiles
All hired automobiles
Limits: $ 0,000,000 Combined single limit bodily injury and property damage
11.1.2.4 UMBRELLA LIABILITY REFER TO SECTION 00 10 10 RIDER “B”
Limits: $ 0,000,000 Each Claim
$ 0,000,000 Annual Aggregate
11.1.2.5 The General Aggregate Limit specified in Clause 11.1.2.2 above shall apply separately to this
Work by attachment of “Amendments of Limits of Insurance-Designated Projects” Endorsement (ISO
Form No. CG25011185) or “Amendment-Aggregate Limits of Insurance-Per Project” Endorsement (ISO
Form CG25031185) or equivalent endorsement coverage.
11.1.2.6 The Umbrella Liability shall provide excess limits over and above the Commercial General
Liability, Employers’ Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability limits as stated in this Article 11.
11.1.2.7 Employers’ Liability, Commercial General Liability, and Commercial Automobile Liability
policies for the full limits required, or by a combination of underlying liability policies for lesser limits with
the remaining limits provided by Umbrella Liability policy.
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
11.1.2.8 Contractor shall require Subcontractor not protected under Contractor's insurance to take out
and maintain Worker's Compensation insurance and insurance of the same kind as specified above,
and in amounts that the Contractor considers appropriate for the proposed work. Contractor shall
submit evidence of such insurance coverage to Owner.
11.1.2.9 Contractor shall carry sufficient comprehensive insurance on his equipment at site of work
and on route to and from site to fully protect him. Contractor shall require same coverage of his
Subcontractors. It is expressly understood and agreed that Owner and/or Architect shall have no
responsibility therefore.
11.1.2.10 If policy includes a self insured retention or deductible sum, indicate sum on Certificate of
Insurance. The sum is subject to approval by Owner.
Add the following Clause 11.1.3.1:
11.1.3.1 Contractor shall furnish Owner with one copy of the Certificate for each copy of Agreement
(usually 3); specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by the Contract Documents. The
form of the Certificate shall be similar to ACORD Certificate Form 25-S or AIA Document G715 and
shall contain the following special provisions:
.1 Name and location of Project.
.2 Indication that the Commercial General Liability Aggregate Limit will apply on a “Per Project”
basis
or will apply to this “Designated Project” only.
.3 The policies certified shall not be canceled nor non-renewed without 30 days prior written
notice to
the Owner.
.4 The following entities are listed as additional insureds as respects to Commercial General
Liability and
Umbrella Liability coverage:
Green Lake County
Potter Lawson, Inc.
The Samuels Group
and their respective officers and employees.
.5 “Any coverage afforded the additional insureds shall be primary and any other coverage
additional
insureds may have will be excess of the
coverage provided by these policies.”
11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE
11.3.1.1 Add the following sentence: The form of policy for this coverage shall be completed value.
11.3.1.3 After the first sentence insert the following sentence: This property insurance shall be written
with a deductible of $_________ any one loss. **(OBTAIN DOLLAR AMOUNT FROM CM)**
Add the following Clause 11.3.1.6:
11.3.1.6 Property to be insured includes materials stored on site to be incorporated in the work.
Add the following Clause 11.3.7.1:
11.3.7.1 Provisions of Subparagraph 11.3.7 shall not apply to insurance policies covering the
completed Project unless permitted by insurer by endorsement or otherwise.
11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
Delete entire Subparagraph 11.4.1 and substitute the following:
11.4.1 Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Materials Payment Bond, each in
the amount of 100 percent of Part 2 of the Base Bid, and each on forms indicated in the Project
Manual. All such bonds shall be issued by Surety acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall
pay all premiums. Deliver said bonds to the Owner not later than the date of execution of the Contract.
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-12

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Failure or neglecting to deliver said bonds as specified, shall be considered as having abandoned the
Contract, and the Bid Security will be retained as liquidated damages. Utilize form indicated in the
Project Manual.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
12.2.2 In the third line following the word "Documents", insert "whichever is the longer period".
Add the following Paragraph 12.4
12.4 REIMBURSEMENT AND COMPENSATION
12.4.1 Where indicated in Paragraphs 12.1 and 12.2 of this Article 12 that Contractor “shall pay costs”,
“bear costs”, and similar phrases, such costs shall include costs to Owner for Architect’s services and
expenses made necessary thereby.
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.1 GOVERNING LAW
Add the following Clause 13.1.1.1:
13.1.1.1 The provisions of the Contract are divisible and to the extent that any provision is determined
to be void by reason of existing Wisconsin law such provision shall be void only to the extent necessary
to make the balance of the Contract not void.
Add the following Paragraph 13.8:
13.8 USE OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS PROHIBITED
13.8.1 Terminology used in this Paragraph shall be as defined in Federal Register 40 CFR Part 763,
Subpart E- Asbestos-Containing Materials in Schools.
13.8.2 Use of asbestos-containing materials as part of the Work is expressly prohibited. Contractor
shall notify Owner, in writing, as to conflicts with this Subparagraph and the Specifications so that
substitute materials can be investigated and a directive can be issued per Article 7 of the General
Conditions. In case of conflict, this Subparagraph shall govern.
13.8.3 Contractor shall submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with provisions of
Specification Section 01 33 00 for all suspect products utilized as part of the Work.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
Add the following Subparagraph 14.2.5:
14.2.5 The Owner's actions pursuant to terminating the Contract shall not release any obligation of the
Contractor's Surety upon its Performance/Labor and Material Payment Bonds.
End of Supplementary Conditions
Supplementary Conditions
00 73 00-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
SECTION 00 73 43
WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
There are no prevailing wage rates for this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Wage Rate Requirements
00 73 43-1

SECTION 00 80 00
OWNER DIRECT INSURANCE PROGRAM (ALTERNATE NO. 7)
The Owner may utilize an Owner Direct Insurance Purchase (ODIP) for this project. Under an ODIP,
the Owner purchases the Worker’s Compensation for ALL contractors and sub-contractors on the
project. The Owner is also responsible for purchasing the Builder's Risk Insurance for the project.
This coverage will be provided by the Wisconsin County Mutual Insurance Corporation. This Workers
Compensation coverage replaces their own Statutory Worker’s Compensation Insurance Policy for the
duration of their involvement on this project.
The TOTAL amount calculated for the Workers Compensation insurance should be quantified and
listed on the Insurance Bid Sheet (Exhibit C) for the work your staff performs and the cost of the
subcontractors providing service to your division(s) of work. The insurance amount listed on the
Insurance Bid Sheet will be a deduct Alternate Bid from the base bid submitted.
By supplying a bid for this project, the contractor and sub-contractors agree to the following:
• Contractor acknowledges the use of ODIP for this project.
• Contractor agrees to enroll and exchange necessary information to enroll.
• No contractors will be allowed on site without a Workers' Compensation policy for this project
issued from the Wisconsin County Mutual Insurance Corporation and an approved divided
coverage order from the State Department of Workforce Development (DWD).
• Contractor agrees to abide by the Safety Plan developed for the project and direction of the
Project Safety Coordinator (PSC).
• Contractor will keep payroll separate for this project, and will report its onsite payroll monthly to the
owner’s insurer using the required payroll certification form. This will ensure that the ODIP onsite
payroll is not used in the annual audit calculation, for the annual premium by their primary
Worker’s Compensation carrier.
• Workers' Compensation coverage under the ODIP does NOT cover "Punch list", “Warranty”,
“Calibration”, “Balancing” or any other follow-up work. Work done after the Certificate of
Substantial Completion has been issued is considered “Punch list” work unless determined
otherwise by the owner and/or their construction representative. (i.e. Architect, Construction
Manager) Contractor agrees to sign off of the ODIP coverage within seven days of completed
work on the project site.
• Contractor understands that hard hats and safety glasses will be required to be worn by all
individuals on the jobsite at all times.
• Contractor understands that all employees on the jobsite are subject to “post accident” drug
screening within 32 hours of the reporting of any accident requiring medical attention and that the
cost of this screening will be the responsibility of the ODIP insurer.
• All employees working on the jobsite are expected to take part in an ODIP Safety Orientation
given by a representative of the Wisconsin County Mutual Insurance Corporation.
Note to: CONTRACTORS
If you self perform any work on site, complete Worker’s Compensation “insurance worksheet”
(blank sheet enclosed Exhibit B) for your work. An example form (Exhibit A) is provided for
reference on the Workers Compensation deduct calculation.
All of your sub-contractors should return a completed Worker’s Compensation “insurance
worksheet” (blank sheet enclosed in bid document) to you, to be submitted. These worksheets
should be included in your bid packet along with the Subcontractor list (Exhibit D).
NOTE: Failure to provide the insurance costs as requested, will be considered by the Owner
as an irregularity and can result in rejection of your bid.
Owner Direct Insurance Program
00 80 00-1

Wisconsin County Mutual Insurance Corporation
Owner Direct Insurance Purchase
• UPON COMPLETION OF THE CALCULATIONS, PLEASE INSERT DATA
ON THE SUB-CONTRACTOR WORKSHEET
• Feel free to contact Jo Reinke, or Vance Forrest if you have questions about the ODIP
bidding process at 1-800-236-6885.
Information
The owner of the building project that you have bid on is requesting that ALL contractors and subcontractors
remove their insurance costs for Worker's Compensation Insurance. The owner may utilize
an Owner Direct Insurance Purchase (ODIP). This program is designed to allow the owner to control
the cost of construction by purchasing the needed insurance through their own insurance company.
The ODIP will NOT reduce any profit or income to any contractor or sub-contractor but rather, is a
pass through of insurance expense. YOUR insurance carrier audits your actual payroll and/or sales at
the end of your policy year. Contractors and sub-contractors will not have to count the payroll or sales
for this project toward their own insurance programs at your annual audit.
When your insurance carrier auditor calculates the actual payroll incurred during the year, the payroll
dollars allocated to this project SHOULD NOT be included in your auditor’s calculation. We will
review this in greater detail during the upcoming orientation meeting and give you official
documentation to pass along to the auditor for your annual policy audit.
Worker’s Compensation losses to your employee’s at this project site will be paid for by the ODIP
purchased policy. However, the state still will track and maintain records of these losses to your
employee’s to be used in your annual Experience Modifier used in your up coming policy year.
If you are having a hard time understanding the following calculation, your insurance agent will most
likely be able to help you calculate the information requested. They will need your estimated field
hours in your bid (no shop hours) and the NET prevailing wage or union wage being applied.
WORKER’S COMPENSATION CALCULATION
(Estimated Field Hours x Net Prevailing/Union Wage*) x Rate** x Experience Modification
Factor = WC Expense
100
* NET prevailing wage/union wage is: Overall hourly wage minus the portion of the wage that
goes to the Pension benefits and the portion that goes to the Health benefits.
** RATE is the Worker’s Compensation rate set by the states Worker’s Compensation Rating
Bureau.
Owner Direct Insurance Program
00 80 00-2

Exhibit A
EXAMPLE
Worker’s Compensation
CONTRACTOR or SUBCONTRACTOR
CALCULATION WORKSHEET
Masonry – Class Code 5022 / 16.38 (use current rate)
Estimated Field Hours Prevailing wage 18.00
Bricklayers 300 hrs. - 3.00 for Pension benefit
Mason Tenders 200 hrs. - 2.00 for health benefit
500 hrs. $13.00 Net Wage
500 (Field Hours x $13.00 (Net prevailing wage) x 16.38 (rate) x .89 (EMF) = $947.58
100
Wisconsin County Mutual Insurance Corporation
Owner Direct Insurance Purchase
SUBCONTRACTOR INSURANCE COST WORKSHEET
Worker’s Compensation
Class Code Class Payroll (divided by 100) Rate Total
5022 Masonry $65.00 16.38 $1,064.70
Experience
Modification .89
Total Worker’s
Compensation
premium $947.58
Owner Direct Insurance Program
00 80 00-3

Wisconsin County Mutual Insurance Corporation
Owner Direct Insurance Purchase
(Submit with Subcontractor list)
Contractor & Subcontractor Insurance Cost Worksheet
Please complete the worksheets below to determine the amount of insurance costs associated
with your bid. If you are a sub-contractor to a Prime Contractor, please return the completed
worksheet to the entity for which you are bidding the project.
Thorough instructions and explanations of this worksheet are included in the previous page.
Subcontractor:
___________________________________________________________________________
Project Bid:
___________________________________________________________________________
Services Bid:
___________________________________________________________________________
Owner Direct Insurance Program
00 80 00-4

Exhibit B
FORM FOR YOUR USE
Wisconsin County Mutual Insurance Corporation
Owner Direct Insurance Purchase
INSURANCE COST WORKSHEET
Worker’s Compensation
Contact Person:
___________________________________________________________________________
___
Phone Number: ________________________________Fax
Number:___________________________________
Address:
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________
Current Workers Compensation Policy Term Dates:
Worker’s Compensation
Class
Code
Class
Estimated Field
Hours
Payroll
(Divided by 100)
Rate
Total
Experience Modification
Total Worker’s
Compensation PREMIUM
Owner Direct Insurance Program
00 80 00-5

Exhibit C
INSURANCE BID WORKSHEET
This is a DEDUCT for your previously submitted base bid.
Should the owner not to utilize the Owner Direct Insurance Purchase (ODIP), your previously
submitted base bid will be used.
TOTAL INSURANCE COST
Workers Compensation cost
Exhibit D
CONTRACOTR NAME
$______________________
SUBCONTRACTOR LIST
TYPE OF WORK
PERFORMED
WORKERS
COMPENSATION
COST
END OF SECTION
Owner Direct Insurance Program
00 80 00-6

SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General Contractors may bid all general construction categories as defined by Bid Category 1. Generals
Contractors are requested to review and include in their proposals all items within the “Scope of Work” and
the “Clarifications” included in the individual bid categories listed under Bid Category 1. A Bid Bond is
required.
B. Subcontractors may bid individual Bid Categories as a Prime Contractor to the Owner following the bidding
procedures, and may also choose to provide a bid to any Bid Category 1 Bidder. A Bid Bond is required.
C. This Section is intended to clarify the scope of work in each Bid Category. Each Bid Category includes all
provisions of Division 1 Specifications.
D. When "L&M" is referenced, it shall mean "Labor and Material", when "L" is referenced, it shall mean
"Labor" and when "M" is referenced, it shall mean "Material".
E. The Clarification's listed with some of the Bid Categories are included for the basic understanding of the
Scope of Work within the Bid Category, and is not intended to define the limits of the Work for a complete
installation. This shall not relieve any Trade Contractor of the requirements within the technical Sections
as they are listed.
1.02 BID CATEGORIES
Bid Categories referenced in this Section are for work to be performed at the: Dunn County Healthcare
Facility, Menomonie, Wisconsin
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Bid Categories are constructed to follow as closely as possible the CSI format of the Contract
Documents. However, some Bid Categories may contain more than one specification section and/or parts
thereof.
B. Local custom and trade-union jurisdictional settlements do not control the scope-of-work included in each
Trade Contract. When a potential jurisdictional dispute or similar interruption of construction activities is
first identified or threatened, the affected Contracts shall promptly negotiate a reasonable settlement to
avoid or minimize the pending interruption and its delays.
C. Unless noted otherwise, all labor, material and equipment for each specification section is to be included
for each Bid Category.
D. Each Trade Contractor will be responsible for their own cutting and patching, unless indicated differently in
the drawings.
E. Project Manager and Foreman are required to attend progress meetings starting 2 weeks prior to
commencement of that Contractors work through completion of contractors work.
F. All Contractors are bound to Division 00 and 01 Requirements.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-1

1.04 BID CATEGORIES
BID CATEGORY NO. 1 – GENERAL CONSTRUCTION PACKAGE – COMBINED BID CATEGORIES
AS INDICATED BELOW (All L&M)
Bid Category No. 3 – Concrete
Bid Category No. 4 – Masonry
Bid Category No. 5A – Structural Steel – Material
Bid Category No. 5B – Structural Steel – Erection
Bid Category No.6A – Rough Carpentry
Bid Category No. 6B – Finish Carpentry
Bid Category No.7A – Insulation
Bid Category No.7B – Asphalt Shingles
Bid Category No. 7C – Stone Coated Metal Roof Shingle (Alternate)
Bid Category No. 7D – Sheet Metal Roofing (Alternate)
Bid Category No. 7E – Elastomeric Membrane Roofing
Bid Category No. 7F – Plastic Siding
Bid Category No.7G – Fiber Cement Siding (Alternate)
Bid Category No. 7H – Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts
Bid Category No. 8A – Doors/Frames/Hardware
Bid Category No. 8B – Sectional Doors
Bid Category No. 8C – Entrances/Storefronts/Skylights
Bid Category No. 9A – Gypsum Board Assemblies
Bid Category No. 9B – Tiling
Bid Category No. 9C – Acoustical Ceiling
Bid Category No. 9D – Resilient Flooring/Carpeting
Bid Category No. 9E – Painting & Coatings
Bid Category No. 10A – Mirrors/Metal Toilet Compartments/Toilet, Bath and Laundry
Accessories/Fire Protection Specialties/Wall Mounted Standards
And Shelving
Bid Category No. 10B – Impact Resistant Wall Protection
Bid Category No. 10D – Lockers
Bid Category No. 10E – Flagpoles
Bid Category No. 12 – Furnishings
Bid Category No. 25 - Earthwork
Bid Category No. 26 – Flexible Paving
Bid Category No. 27 – Concrete Paving/Curb & Gutter/Sidewalks
Bid Category No. 28 – Landscaping
Bid Category No. 29 Fences and Gates
Bid Category No. 30 – Utilities
CLARIFICATIONS:
All clarifications within each separate bid category pertain to Bid Category 1.
Bid Categories not listed above will be separate prime bidders.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-2

BID CATEGORY NO. 3 - CONCRETE
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement L&M
03 30 00 Cast In Place Concrete L&M
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
07 13 00 Sheet Waterproofing (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
07 84 00 Firestopping L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and materials for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractors responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup.
Include all cutting and patching required to complete the work.
Include all temporary heat and winter protection to protect work.
Exterior Concrete (sidewalks, curb and gutter, concrete paving, bases, bollards, etc) and Interior
Concrete Flatwork are part of Bid Category 32B.
Trade Contractor is responsible to keep foundation trenches dry while work is in progress and until
they are ready for backfill.
Include all exterior and interior concrete poured walls including stoop walls. Stoop slabs are part of
this Bid Category.
Include grouting of structural steel column bases and beam bearing plates.
Include setting all embed items including but not limited to, weld plates, sleeves, anchor bolts,
dovetail anchor slots, expansion joint assembly frames and floor mat frames.
All exterior bollards are by Bid Category 32B.
Include all blockouts required.
Include all reinforcement, including safety precautions. Safety caps on rebar are required.
Vapor retarders for all concrete slab-on-grade are part of this Bid Category.
Foundation insulation for all concrete foundations and concrete flatwork is part of this Bid
Category, including inside coolers and freezers.
Concrete bases are part of this Bid Category. Size and final location to be coordinated with MEP
Contractors.
Sealer for concrete floors is part of this Bid Category.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-3

BID CATEGORY NO. 4 MASONRY
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
04 05 11 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting L&M
04 20 00 Unit Masonry L&M
04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry L&M
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
07 84 00 Firestopping L&M
07 90 05 Joint Sealer (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor, materials and layout for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all layout for the above Bid Category.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are this Trade Contractors responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for the removal of debris to an approved landfill.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup.
Protect all concrete floors while laying up walls. Many floors are to have exposed concrete finish.
Include all temporary heat and winter protection to protect work
Include all masonry reinforcement including safety precautions. Safety caps on all rebar are
required.
Drill all dowels from the concrete foundation or slab into the masonry walls.
All mixing of mortar and grout will be performed outside of the building.
Include all grouting of builder door frames that are in masonry walls.
Include all cutting and patching required to complete the work.
Include setting of loose steel lintels, angels and plates embedded in masonry walls, materials
supplied by Bid Category 5A Trade Contractor.
Include insulation for masonry/cavity walls.
This Bid Category includes stone on the interior fireplaces.
BID CATEGORY NO. 5A STRUCTURAL STEEL – MATERIAL
05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing M
05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing M
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications M
09 90 00 Painting and Coating L&M
Summary of Work
01 11 00-4

CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all materials for the above listed Sections. This is a materials only category.
Include all anchor bolts for steel erection, to be installed by Bid Category 3 Contractor.
Include the supply of paint required for the field touch up of all welds and bolted connections to be
turned over to Bid Category 5B.
All steel to be fireproofed. Intumencent paint to be provided and installed by Bid Category 5A.
Include loose steel lintels, angles and plates that are built into masonry walls.
Include bollards.
BID CATEGORY NO. 5B STRUCTURAL STEEL – ERECTION
05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing L
05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing L
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications L
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all layout for the above Section.
Include all hoisting, lifting and rigging for the above Sections.
Due to the proximity of the airport, all Trade Contractors working on site using a crane or
conducting drilling operations in the area must coordinate with Mr. Gary Dikkers
(gary.dikkers@dot.state.wi.us) at the Bureau of Aeronautics and complete a FAA Form 7480.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractor's as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup and removal of all scrap materials generated
from the installation of Work included in this Bid Category.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
Bid Category 5A will supply all structural steel. Trade Contractor to coordinate deliveries with Bid
Category 5A. Contractor and provide labor and equipment to unload material.
Trade Contractor is responsible for all alignment, shoring, scaffolding, equipment, etc. necessary
to complete the work.
Include field touch-up intumencent paint of all welds and bolted connections. Paint supplied by
Bid Category 5A Trade Contractor.
Exclude installation of loose steel lintels, angles and plates that are built into masonry walls.
These will be installed by Bid Category 4 Trade Contractor.
Exclude installation of bollards. These will be installed by Bid Category 32B Trade Contractor.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-5

BID CATEGORY NO. 6A ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry L&M
06 17 53 Plate Connected Wood Trusses L&M
07 90 05 Joint Sealer (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
08 53 13 Vinyl Windows (Base Bid) L&M
08 52 00 Wood Windows (Alternate) L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all layout for the above Section.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Due to the proximity of the airport, all Trade Contractors working on site using a crane or
conducting drilling operations in the area must coordinate with Mr. Gary Dikkers
(gary.dikkers@dot.state.wi.us) at the Bureau of Aeronautics and complete a FAA Form 7480.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
Includes rough carpentry blocking and backing concealed in drywall, ceilings, soffits and walls,
ceiling mounted items, including but not limited to, toilet accessories, toilet partitions, grab bars,
millwork/casework, shelving standards, and lockers.
Include all rough carpentry associated with the project including that associated with the roofing
above and below the roofline. Include rough carpentry associated with all rooftop equipment.
Install roof curbs for mechanical equipment furnished by the mechanical contractor.
Studs over 10’ feet need to be engineered studs.
Window headers to be higher for truss support. Infill wall framing down to window.
BID CATEGORY NO. 6B FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 00 Finish Carpentry L&M
06 41 00 Architectural Woodwork L&M
06 42 16 Wood Paneling L&M
06 63 10 Vinyl Post and Railings L&M
06 65 00 Plastic Simulated Wood Trim L&M
06 82 05 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels L&M
07 90 05 Joint Sealer (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames L
08 11 17 Pre-Finished Steel Door Frames L
08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors L
08 14 33 Stile and Rail Wood Doors L
08 71 00 Door Hardware L
Summary of Work
01 11 00-6

08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels L
08 83 00 Mirrors L
10 21 13.13 Metal Toilet Compartments L
10 21 23 Cubicles L
10 26 00 Impact Resistant Wall Protection L
10 28 00 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories L
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties L
10 31 00 Manufactured Fireplaces L
10 56 17 Wall Mounted Standards and Shelving L
12 35 30 Residential Casework L&M
12 36 00 Countertops L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all layout for the above Section.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
Includes all nail and fastener holes to be filled.
Includes all finish caulking as required on all door frames, counter tops, cabinets, and trim.
BID CATEGORY NO. 7A INSULATION
07 21 00 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing L&M
07 21 21 Sprayed Foam Insulation L&M
07 21 26 Blown Insulation L&M
07 25 00 Weather Barriers L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
This Bid Category does not include Below Grade Rigid Insulation per Bid Category 3, and does
not include sound batts in interior walls per Bid Category 9. This does include the remainder of
labor and materials as specified in 07 21 00, 07 21 21, and 07 21 26 and as indicated on
drawings.
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-7

BID CATEGORY NO. 7B BASE BID – ASPHALT SHINGLES
07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles L&M
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all layout for the above Section.
Due to the proximity of the airport, all Trade Contractors working on site using a crane or
conducting drilling operations in the area must coordinate with Mr. Gary Dikkers
(gary.dikkers@dot.state.wi.us) at the Bureau of Aeronautics and complete a FAA Form 7480.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and fall protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
BID CATEGORY NO. 7C STONE COATED METAL ROOF SHINGLE (ALTERNATE No. 14)
07 31 30 Stone Coated Metal Roof Shingle L&M
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
Due to the proximity of the airport, all Trade Contractors working on site using a crane or
conducting drilling operations in the area must coordinate with Mr. Gary Dikkers
(gary.dikkers@dot.state.wi.us) at the Bureau of Aeronautics and complete a FAA Form 7480.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and fall protection are the Trade Contractor’s responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
BID CATEGORY NO. 7D SHEET METAL ROOFING (ALTERNATE NO. 13)
07 61 00 Sheet Metal Roofing L&M
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-8

Due to the proximity of the airport, all Trade Contractors working on site using a crane or
conducting drilling operations in the area must coordinate with Mr. Gary Dikkers
(gary.dikkers@dot.state.wi.us) at the Bureau of Aeronautics and complete a FAA Form 7480.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and fall protection are the Trade Contractor’s responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
BID CATEGORY NO. 7E ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
07 53 00 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing L&M
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Due to the proximity of the airport, all Trade Contractors working on site using a crane or
conducting drilling operations in the area must coordinate with Mr. Gary Dikkers
(gary.dikkers@dot.state.wi.us) at the Bureau of Aeronautics and complete a FAA Form 7480.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and fall protection are the Trade Contractor’s responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
BID CATEGORY NO. 7F BASE BID – PLASTIC SIDING
07 46 16 Aluminum Soffit and Fascia L&M
07 46 33 Plastic Siding L&M
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim L&M
07 90 05 Joint Sealer (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and fall protection are the Trade Contractor’s responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-9

BID CATEGORY NO. 7G FIBER CEMENT SIDING (ALTERNATE NO. 6)
07 46 16 Aluminum Soffit and Fascia L&M
07 46 46 Fiber Cement Siding L&M
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim L&M
07 90 05 Joint Sealer (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and fall protection are the Trade Contractor’s responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work.
BID CATEGORY NO. 7H MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
07 71 23 Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
BID CATEGORY NO. 8A DOORS/FRAMES/HARDWARE
08 11 13 Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames M
08 11 17 Pre-Finished Steel Door and Frames M
08 14 16 Wood Doors M
08 14 33 Stile and Rail Wood Doors M
08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels M
08 71 00 Door Hardware M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
Contractor is responsible for all field verifications.
Include all finish hardware. This is to include finish hardware for aluminum entrances. All hardware
associated with aluminum entrances to be installed by Bid Category 8C Trade Contractor.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-10

BID CATEGORY NO. 8B SECTIONAL DOORS
08 36 13 Sectional Doors L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include field measurements.
BID CATEGORY NO. 8C ENTRANCES/STOREFRONTS/SKYLIGHTS
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim L&M
07 90 05 Joint Sealer (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
08 42 29 Automatic Entrances L&M
08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts L&M
08 51 13 Aluminum Windows L&M
08 62 23 Tubular Skylights L&M
08 71 14 Low Energy Door Operators L&M
08 80 00 Glazing L&M
Aluminum Screen Assemblies
L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all layout for the above Section.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include field measurements.
Include blocking and metal closure strips that are an integral part of the installation.
BID CATEGORY NO. 9A GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing L&M
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
07 25 00 Weather Barriers L&M
07 84 00 Firestopping (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
07 90 05 Joint Sealer (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies L&M
Summary of Work
01 11 00-11

CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all layout for the above Section.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for the removal of debris.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup.
Include all thermal and sound insulation concealed in drywall partitions, ceilings, soffits and fascias
and at metal framed or furred exterior walls.
Include firestopping, firesafing, and firecaulking as required by code.
BID CATEGORY NO. 9B TILING
09 30 00 Tiling L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all layout for the above Section.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include filling and patching of minor floor imperfections and depressions where tile work is
scheduled.
Include all waterproofing and membranes as specified.
BID CATEGORY NO. 9C ACOUSTICAL CEILING
07 90 05 Joint Sealants (As it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
09 51 00 Acoustical Ceiling L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all layout for the above Section.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-12

ll temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include any cutting and patching necessary to complete the specified work, including ceiling panel
cuts to accommodate sprinkler heads, boxes for electrical devices, lights, etc.
BID CATEGORY NO. 9D RESILIENT FLOORING/CARPETING
09 65 00 Resilient Flooring L&M
09 68 00 Carpeting L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include filling and patching of minor floor imperfections and depressions where resilient, sheet,
VCT flooring and carpet are scheduled.
BID CATEGORY NO. 9E PAINTING & COATINGS
09 90 00 Painting and Coating L&M
09 91 00 Painting L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include touch-up painting and repairs to finish painted surfaces where damaged by others prior to
final acceptance.
BID CATEGORY NO. 10A MIRRORS/METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS/TOILET, BATH AND
LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES/FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES/WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND
SHELVING
08 83 00 Mirrors M
10 21 13 Toilet Compartments M
10 21 23 Cubicles M
10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories M
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties M
Summary of Work
01 11 00-13

10 56 17 Wall Mounted Standards and Shelving M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Provide material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
Include field measurements.
BID CATEGORY NO. 10B IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
10 26 00 Impact-Resistant Wall Protection M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
Include field measurements.
BID CATEGORY NO. 10D LOCKERS
10 51 00 Lockers L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Include field measurements.
BID CATEGORY NO. 10E FLAGPOLES
10 75 00 Flagpoles M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Provide material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
BID CATEGORY NO. 11 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
11 40 00 Food Service Equipment L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Summary of Work
01 11 00-14

Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Furnish and install stainless steel wall panels
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
BID CATEGORY NO. 12 ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK
12 35 30 Residential Casework M
12 36 00 Countertops M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
BID CATEGORY NO. 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION
07 84 00 Firestopping (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
21 05 03 General Fire Protection Requirements L&M
21 05 30 Fire Protection Piping L&M
21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System L&M
21 13 16 Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections only as they pertain to the fire protection system
specified in the Drawings and Specifications, unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Contractor is responsible for work related firestopping/fire restive caulking per code.
BID CATEGORY NO. 22 PLUMBING
07 84 00 Firestopping (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
22 05 00 General Plumbing Requirements L&M
22 05 03 Pipe and Pipe Fittings L&M
22 05 23 Valves L&M
22 05 29 Supports & Anchors L&M
22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation L&M
22 10 00 Piping Specialties L&M
22 10 00 Plumbing Specialties L&M
22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment L&M
Summary of Work
01 11 00-15

22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Coordinate final connection of water and sanitary with Bid Category 33 Trade Contractor.
Contractor is responsible for work related firestopping/fire restive caulking.
.
BID CATEGORY NO. 23 HVAC
07 84 00 Firestopping (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
10 31 00 Manufactured Fireplaces L&M
23 05 00 General HVAC Requirements L&M
23 05 03 Piping and Fittings L&M
23 05 15 Piping Specialties L&M
23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment L&M
23 05 23 Valves L&M
23 05 29 Supports and Anchors L&M
23 05 48 Vibration Isolation L&M
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC L&M
23 07 00 Ductwork Insulation L&M
23 07 01 HVAC Piping Insulation L&M
23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System for HVAC L&M
23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls L&M
23 20 00 HVAC Pumps L&M
23 21 14 Ground Loop Heat Exchanger L&M
23 31 00 Ductwork L&M
23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories L&M
23 34 13 Power Roof Ventilators L&M
23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets L&M
23 52 34 Boilers L&M
23 51 00 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks L&M
23 72 00 Energy Recovery Equipment L&M
23 81 43 Heat Pump Units L&M
23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioning Units L&M
23 82 00 Terminal Heat Transfer Units L&M
23 82 16 Air Coils L&M
23 84 15 Humidifiers L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required. Provide coordination drawings for all
MEP trades.
Trade Contractor to coordinate geothermal well drilling debris with Trade Contractor in Bid Category
31.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-16

Due to the proximity of the airport, all Trade Contractors working on site using a crane or conducting
drilling operations in the area must coordinate with Mr. Gary Dikkers (gary.dikkers@dot.state.wi.us)
at the Bureau of Aeronautics and complete a FAA Form 7480.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Contractor is responsible for work related firestopping/fire restive caulking.
Contractor is responsible for all temporary heating – installation and maintenance.
BID CATEGORY NO. 24 ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
07 84 00 Firestopping (as it pertains to this Bid Category) L&M
26 00 10 General Electrical Requirements L&M
26 00 20 Temporary Service L&M
26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods L&M
26 05 19 Building Wire and Cable L&M
26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes L&M
26 09 23 Occupancy Sensors L&M
26 09 24 Low Voltage Switching L&M
26 24 16 Panelboards L&M
26 27 15 Electrical Utility Services L&M
26 27 26 Wiring Devices L&M
26 28 19 Enclosed Switches L&M
26 32 13 Engine Generators and Transfer Switch L&M
26 35 53 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor L&M
26 36 13 Manual Transfer Equipment L&M
26 50 00 Luminaries L&M
27 05 11 Requirements for Communications Installation L&M
27 10 00 Telecommunications Cabling L&M
27 13 44 Communications Distribution L&M
27 41 00 TV Distribution L&M
27 52 23 Emergency Call and Perimeter Alarm System L&M
27 52 24 Emergency Call System L&M
28 05 11 Requirements for Security Installation L&M
28 16 00 Card Access System L&M
28 31 00 Fire Alarm L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Trade Contractor is responsible for all layout of sight lighting.
Trade Contractor is responsible for all site concrete related to this Bid Category.
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-17

Contractor is responsible for work related firestopping/fire restive caulking.
Include all required Temporary Power panels and Temporary lighting.
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Contractor is responsible for work related firestopping/fire restive caulking.
Include all labor and material for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractor's responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their own cleanup.
Contractor is responsible for work related firestopping/fire restive caulking.
BID CATEGORY NO. 25 EARTHWORK
31 10 00 Site Clearing L&M
31 20 00 Earth Moving L&M
31 22 00 Grading L&M
31 23 16 Excavation L&M
31 23 16.13 Trenching L&M
31 23 23 Fill L&M
31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control L&M
31 37 00 Riprap L&M
32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Trade Contractor is responsible for all layout and surveying required for all buildings, roads, parking
lots, ponds, etc.
Upon completion of final grading and prior to final landscaping, Trade Contractor must provide written
documentation from a certified surveyor showing correct grade elevations.
Trade Contractor is responsible for all permits and applications pertaining to this Bid Category.
Include all labor and materials for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all excavation and backfilling with Bid Category 3.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractors responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for the removal of all debris created by the geothermal well drilling.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-18

Include all cutting and patching required to complete the work.
Include protection of underground utilities; locate public and private underground utilities prior to
excavation.
Include necessary grading to allow for placement of seed and sod.
Include earthwork related to building foundation, backfilling, slab on grade.
Include earthwork and base for drives, parking lots, sidewalks, curbs and gutter and finish grading to
+/- 1/10 foot.
Include removal of all excess dirt within the shown construction limits from the site at the completion
of the project.
Install and maintain silt fence. Visit site to verify quantity and extent of work. After completion of
project, remove and dispose of silt fence and stakes. Final grade as required.
ECIP must be submitted within 10 days of the award of this Bid Category. Material will be temporarily
stock piled on Airport Property and therefore Trade Contractor must coordinate and obtain all
permits, applications, requirements from the property owner having jurisdiction.
Include protection of underground utilities.
Include all safety material necessary to protect personnel in and from open trenches or excavations.
Excavations shall be closed as soon as possible.
Install construction road as shown on drawings, road is to be installed approximately 800 feet long X
20 feet wide and is to be placed beneath the final road base course.
Due to the proximity of the airport, all Trade Contractors working on site using a crane or conducting
drilling operations in the area must coordinate with Mr. Gary Dikkers (gary.dikkers@dot.state.wi.us)
at the Bureau of Aeronautics and complete a FAA Form 7480.
BID CATEGORY NO. 26 FLEXIBLE PAVING
32 12 00 Flexible Paving L&M
32 17 23.13 Painted Pavement Markings L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and materials for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all surveying and/or layout for the above Section.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractors responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for the removal of debris.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup.
Include all cutting and patching required to complete the work.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-19

All activities must be coordinated with the Construction Manager.
Include all painting of parking lot striping and symbols.
Include subgrade preparation and test rolling. Bid Category 31 Trade Contractor to finish subgrade to
+/- 1/10 foot.
Include tie-in to existing pavement areas.
Include sweeping base course prior to installation of wear course.
BID CATEGORY NO. 27 CONCRETE PAVING/CURB & GUTTER/SIDEWALKS
10 75 00 Flagpoles L
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications (as it pertains to this Bid category) L
32 13 14 Concrete Sidewalks and Aprons L&M
32 16 00 Curbs and Gutters L&M
32 17 26 Tactile Warning Surfacing L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and materials for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all surveying and/or layout for the above Section.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractors responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for the removal of debris.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup.
Include all cutting and patching required to complete the work.
All activities must be coordinated with the Construction Manager.
Flag poles are installed by this Bid Category and Supplied Bid Category 10E.
Includes all dumpster pads, generator pads, site signage and bases.
Include signage foundations
Include subgrade preparation and test rolling. Bid Category 31 Trade Contractor to finish subgrade to
+/- 1/10 foot.
BID CATEGORY NO. 28 LANDSCAPING
32 92 00 Turf and Grasses L&M
32 92 19 Seeding L&M
32 93 00 Plants L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and materials for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-20

Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
Include all surveying and/or layout for the above Section.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractors responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for the removal of debris.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup.
Include all cutting and patching required to complete the work.
All activities must be coordinated with the Construction Manager.
BID CATEGORY NO. 29 FENCES AND GATES
32 31 23 Plastic Fences and Gates L&M
32 31 31 Fences and Gates L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and materials for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
Include all surveying and/or layout for the above Section.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractors responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for the removal of debris.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup.
Include all cutting and patching required to complete the work.
All activities must be coordinated with the Construction Manager.
Include chain link fencing in interior locations.
BID CATEGORY NO. 30 UTILITIES
31 20 00 Earth Moving (for Utilities only) L&M
33 04 00 Trenching and Site Utilities L&M
33 11 00 Water Utilities L&M
33 13 00 Disinfecting or Water Utility Distribution L&M
33 31 00 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities L&M
33 40 00 Site Drainage Utilities L&M
CLARIFICATIONS:
Include all labor and materials for above Sections unless noted otherwise.
Include all excavation and backfill for all utilities in accordance with the standards established by
specification Section 31 20 00.
Summary of Work
01 11 00-21

Trade Contractor is responsible for all layout and surveying required per Bid Category 33.
Coordinate all work with other Trade Contractors as required.
All temporary barricades, enclosures and protection are the Trade Contractors responsibility.
Trade Contractor is responsible for the removal of debris to an approved landfill.
Trade Contractor is responsible for their cleanup.
Include all cutting and patching required to complete the work.
Include protection of underground utilities; locate public and private underground utilities prior to
excavation.
Include all safety material necessary to protect personnel in and from open trenches or excavations.
Excavations shall be closed as soon as possible.
Coordinate final connection of water and sanitary with Bid Category 22 Trade Contractor.
All interruptions of service must be coordinated with the Construction Manager.
END OF SECTION
Summary of Work
01 11 00-22

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 11 23
OWNER PURCHASED PRODUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
Contractors shall comply with the process for Owner Direct Purchases so the Owner can realize tax
savings. This process will be managed by the Construction Manager, through New Beginnings Material
Acquisition, LLC (NBMA). NBMA will purchase materials on behalf of the Owner under their tax
exempt status. Contractors will be responsible for the receipt of products at jobsite, unloading,
handling, protecting, quantity verification, delivery inspection and storing on site until incorporated in the
Work.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
Conditions of the Contract
Section 01 11 00: Summary of Work
Section 01 41 00: Regulatory Requirements
Section 01 60 00: Product Requirements
PRODUCTS SUBJECT TO OWNER PURCHASE
In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, the Owner may elect to purchase, and
the Contractor shall incorporate in the Work, products specified in this Project Manual. See schedule in
Part Two - Products. Products excluded from purchase by Owner include products manufactured or
fabricated by Contractor, products which Contractor would be the vendor, products which would be
furnished and installed by the same entity.
PROCEDURES
Under Wisconsin Law, the Contractor is required to pay all sales and/or use taxes on materials and
equipment purchased by it for the work of construction described herein. Certain types of exempt
organizations, however, may purchase materials and equipment without the payment of Wisconsin
sales or use taxes, meaning that sales and use taxes can be saved with respect to the materials and
equipment that the exempt entity, rather than the Contractor, purchases directly from suppliers.
Because the Owner in this case has represented that it is an organization exempt from the payment of
Wisconsin sales or use tax, the materials and equipment purchased directly by the NBMA will not be
subject to Wisconsin sales and use tax.
In Part Two of this section is set forth a list of items of materials and equipment that shall be purchased
directly by the NBMA.
Contractor shall submit to the CM a schedule of all purchases to be made by NMBA including the
recommended supplier's name, a general description of the item(s) to be purchased, and the maximum
price (excluding applicable sales or use taxes) for each item. NBMA will purchase from the suppliers
recommended by the Contractor. Any discounts, saving rebates belong to NBMA.
Contractor shall prepare a purchase order requisition draft for each of the purchase orders that should
be issued to suppliers within two weeks of notice to proceed as required for delivery for incorporation in
the Work.
Suppliers and vendors shall invoice NBMA directly as purchaser, with a copy being sent to the
responsible Contractor. Invoices must reference purchase order number. Contractor shall review all
invoices and forward approved copies to the CM who will coordinate payment with NBMA.
2006.07.00 Owner Purchased Products
00000 01 11 23-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Contractor shall be responsible in contacting supplier or vendor to effect correction or adjustment of any
defects, shortfalls, or other deficiencies, and obtaining and/or perfecting any warranties, express or
implied, with regard to those products purchased directly by NBMA.
As part of the consideration received under the Contract, Contractor shall install replacement products
provided by vendors, suppliers or manufacturers within a period of two years after Substantial
Completion. Such responsibility relates to installation only and, by agreeing to perform this service,
Contractor does not assume any responsibility for defects or other deficiencies in the replacement
products, unless such defect or deficiency is due to Contractor's handling and/or installation of the
product.
NBMA will issue purchase orders to each supplier with payment terms not less than Net 30 and not
more than Net 60.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer/erector of products purchased by NBMA shall have experience and qualifications as stated in
the respective sections. Contractors are fully responsible for the quality of direct purchased material
and equipment.
SUBMITTALS
Product Delivery Schedule:
In conjunction with preparing the Construction Schedule as required by Section 01 33 00, prepare and
submit to the CM a Product Delivery Schedule for products which NBMA has elected to purchase.
Include the following:
Time to place order.
Time frame for shop drawing/sample review.
Time frame for fabrication/manufacturer.
Time for delivery to job site.
Shop Drawings, Samples, and Product Data:
Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 33 00 and referenced product sections.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
NBMA shall cause all direct-purchased products to be delivered to Contractor at the jobsite.
As Owner's agent, Prime Contractor or designated Subcontractor of it's choice shall receive and unload
products at the jobsite, and verify that the products delivered are in accordance with the purchase
order. NBMA will furnish a copy of purchase order to Contractor. Contractor shall immediately report to
CM any items found short, damaged, or not in accordance with the Contract Documents or approved
shop drawings and purchase order. Contractor, as Owner's agent, will take immediate action to correct
any discrepancy.
After receipt, Contractor shall store, handle, and protect products from damage until incorporated in the
Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Refer to referenced Sections for product specifications.
The materials and equipment specified in Divisions 2 through Division 33 are being considered by the
Owner for direct purchase in order to utilize the Owner's exemption from sales and/or use taxes.
2006.07.00 Owner Purchased Products
00000 01 11 23-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Refer to referenced Sections for inspection, preparation, installation and erection.
All excess Owner purchased products shall remain property of Owner. Stockpile and bind/package in a
neat manner and notify Owner to remove surplus products. If Owner does not want to retain the
surplus products, then, upon written authorization by Owner, Prime Contractor shall assume ownership
and remove from jobsite.
End of Section
2006.07.00 Owner Purchased Products
00000 01 11 23-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 01 21 00
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Include in the Base Bid all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Conditions of the Contract
Section :
Section :
UNIT COST ALLOWANCE FOR PRODUCTS
Section :
Include in the Base Bid a unit cost allowance of $ per of delivered to the job site.
This allowance will be applied to the net cost of the to the Contractor, less discounts; delivery to
the jobsite, and applicable taxes.
In addition to the amount of this allowance, include in your Base Bid your costs for:
Handling at the site; including unloading, uncrating, and storage.
Protection from the elements and from damage.
Labor for installation and finishing.
Other expenses required to complete the installation.
Contractor's and Subcontractor's overhead and profit.
LUMP SUM ALLOWANCES FOR WORK OR PRODUCTS
Section :
Include in your Base Bid a lump sum allowance of $ for . Allowance shall include all
necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, profit, and applicable taxes.
The Owner will select
in a timely manner for incorporation in the Work and notify the
Contractor accordingly.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY FOR PURCHASE, DELIVERY, AND INSTALLATION
Notify Owner sufficiently in advance of the time that materials and equipment will be incorporated in the
Work to allow Owner to make timely selection.
On notification of selection execute purchase agreement with designated supplier.
Arrange for and process Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples as required.
Make all arrangements for delivery.
Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects.
Submit claims for transportation damage.
Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of referenced Specification Sections.
Allowances
01 21 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
ADJUSTMENT OF COSTS
Should the new cost be more or less than the specified amount of the allowance, the Contract Sum will
be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.
The amount of the Change Order will recognize any changes in handling costs at the site, labor,
installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses caused by the selection under the
allowance. For products specified under a unit cost allowance, the unit cost shall apply to the
quantities actually used with a nominal allowance for waste, as determined by receipt invoices, or
by field measurement.
Submit to A/E any claims for anticipated additional costs at the Project Site, or other expenses caused
by the selection under the allowance, prior to execution of the Work.
Failure to submit claims within the designated time will constitute a waiver of claims for additional costs.
At Contract Closeout, reflect all approved changes in Contract amounts in the final statement of
accounting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
End of Section
Allowances
01 21 00-2

SECTION 01 23 00
PART 1 GENERAL
ALTERNATES
ALTERNATES
To enable the Owner to compare total costs where alternate materials and methods might be used,
Alternates have been established as described on the Drawings and in this Section of these
Specifications.
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Alternate submission procedures.
B. Documentation of changes to Contract Price and Contract Time.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders: Instructions for preparation of pricing for
alternatives.
B. Materials and methods to be used in the Base Bid and in the Alternatives are described on the
Drawings and in pertinent Sections of these Specifications.
C. Method for stating the Base Bid is described in the Bid Form.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposals for all Alternates listed and described in this Section are required to be reflected on the
Bid Form. Do not submit alternatives other than as described in this Section, unless requested
by Addendum.
1.04 PROCEDURE
A. If the Owner elects to proceed on the basis of one or more of the described Alternatives, make all
modifications to the Work required to provide the selected Alternative or Alternatives to the
approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner other than as indicated on the
Bid Form.
1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's
option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Agreement.
B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate.
C. Immediately following Contract award, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification
of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or
deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated
modifications to alternates.
D. A schedule of Alternates follows. Affected contracts or purchase orders, referenced in the
listing contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work
described under each alternate.
10731 ALTERNATES 01 23 00-1

E. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the
alternate.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. See following:
1) In floor heat in resident neighborhood resident room toilets and core Spa rooms.
Provide in each resident neighborhood resident room toilet, an in-floor hydronic heating
system. Each toilet room system to be sized by manufacturer and must include: Single
½” tubing loop, oxygen barrier PEX tubing with aluminum core (spacing and configuration
by manufacturer) tapped into the Low Temperature Loop supply and return mains
currently shown on the base bid drawings. Provide a programmable thermostat and
temperature actuated three-way diverting valve in supply to maintain water temperature
to the floor heating system as selected by the manufacturer. The low temperature loop
main is typically supplied at approx. 120-125 degrees F. System shall also include all
isolation valves, balance valves, unions, transformers and relays necessary – system
shall be completely stand-alone and complete/operational. HVAC Contractor must
provide 3” foam board insulation below slab of the area served by the tubing. System
shall be designed for 75 degrees max. interior design temperature. As manufactured by
Rehau or equal.
For each of the Core Spa rooms (3 total) provide an electric slab heating system
comprised of electric floor heating cables, wall mounted programmable thermostat, and
all necessary relays, transformers and miscellaneous hardware as necessary. Entire
system to be designed by manufacturer and shall be capable of maintain 75 degrees F.
interior design temperature. Suntouch SlabHeat or equal. Provide dedicated power
circuits, wiring, GFI breakers, contactors and all necessary line voltage/electrical required
for the system - coordinate all electrical work required with Electrical Contr. All line
voltage wiring to be performed by the Electrical Contractor at HVAC Contractors expense
- include all costs in the HVAC alternate bid. HVAC Contractor must provide 3” foam
board insulation below slab of the area served by the cable.
2) Provide (4) “Solar Tube” skylights in each neighborhood building. Approx. locations will
be at inside corners of corridors 133, 134 & 136. Final locations to be determined. Shaft
will be required to be 1 hr. rated. Bids will be on a per unit (install) with a pre-determined
max. tube length. Tube shaft to be encased in 1hr rated shaft wall from roof deck to rated
ceiling assembly.
3) Separate site 24’-0” wide (with 2’ gravel shoulder) 4” asphalt entry drive with direct
access for delivery trucks and visitors. See sheet LP-101 for location grades to be a min.
of 2’-0” above existing with a maximum slope of 5%. Provide culvert size as required to
maintain drainage in existing swale.
4) Hardwood (red oak) wall base stained and varnished in lieu of vinyl cove base in all
resident wings. #4 Substitute Wood Base, Stained, (similar to Ferche profile F275), in lieu
of RB1-RB5 in all Resident Wings. Stain to match the wood sheet vinyl.
5) Large Core building front elevation partial brick veneer with cast stone accents. See
sheet AE-201a for alternate elevations.
10731 ALTERNATES 01 23 00-2

a) Provide a cost per lineal foot for 14” concrete foundations walls and 12”x2’-2”
concrete footings with (2) #5 continuous reinforcing bars at brick locations.
6) Cement board siding in lieu of vinyl siding on all buildings – see specifications for material
information.
7) County provided ODIP insurance vs. contractor supplied. The base bid would have each
Contractor provide workers compensation insurance. This alternate would have workers
compensation insurance provided and paid for by the Owner through an Owner Direct
Insurance Program (ODIP). Refer to Section 00 80 00 for specific requirements of this
program.
8) Enhanced HVAC control system to tie into the existing County system.
Provide for the entire new facility (12 buildings) a DDC system (LON or BACNET)
replacing base bid controls. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall be a
subcontractor to the HVAC Contractor – HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all
controls and all costs to be included in his bid. The Temperature Controls Contractor
shall furnish and install a fully integrated temperature controls system incorporating direct
digital control for equipment monitoring, set point adjustments, equipment control and
failure alarms. The installation of the control system shall be performed under the direct
supervision of the controls manufacturer with the shop drawings, flow diagrams, bill of
materials, component designation or identification number and sequence of operation all
bearing the name of the manufacturer. The installing contractor shall certify in writing,
that the shop drawings have been prepared by the equipment manufacturer and that the
equipment manufacturer has supervised their installation. In addition, the equipment
manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that the shop drawings were prepared by their
company and that all temperature control equipment was installed under their direct
supervision. The DDC system shall be compatible with and capable of accepting the
County’s current IT extended communication and control system in one or more of the
County’s current facilities. Current facilities control system is a hybrid system of control
with latest upgrades of a RZ mediator for communication. Current system does not have
capacity to expand to accept the new facility and the product is no longer manufactured.
All requirements to be verified as to communication options from existing to the new
system. Provide any necessary translators or auxiliary equipment to existing systems
required to extend into new system. The new system shall house all main control panels
in each building – a data cable drop is provided for each panel by the IT system and is
intended for necessary communication and export from new system to server as needed.
The new system shall be web-based and final destination for residence of
communication/IP addresses and server location shall be as determined by the County IT
department – verify. Provide all necessary components, software, hardware and
programming as necessary. All materials and equipment used shall be standard
components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom
designed specifically for this project. All systems and components shall have been
thoroughly tested and proven in actual use for at least two years. Prior to acceptance of
alternate controls bid, Temperature Controls must provide a sequence of operation for
approval. Refer to base bid specifications for sequence of operation of base bid controls
– where base bid indicates stand alone electric type controls, provide direct digital control
upgrade to included necessary control points including, but not limited to, start/stop,
heat/cool call, stages display, valve positions and status, fan status and alarms. DDC
systems shall be as provided by Trane, Delta Controls, or Siemens.
9) Enhanced elopement system (additional exit/entry point coverage). Addition to Base Bid
to alarm doors designated on the drawings via pagers. Base Bid is local audible alarm
only.
10731 ALTERNATES 01 23 00-3

10) Vinyl clad wood windows in lieu of vinyl in neighborhood wings – see specifications for
material information.
11) Enhanced Nurse Call system (wireless system with electronic communication). Addition
to Base Bid to provide wireless nurse call system per Section 27 52 23. Base Bid is hard
wired system per Section 27 52 24.
12) Expand the emergency generator system to provide complete backup power to the
entire facility instead of its current design. Current design provides power for the life
safety branch and emergency power to select devices and equipment. The life safety
branch of the emergency generator system shall remain as designed. Revise the size of
the generators, breakers on the generator, load bank, distribution panels, feeders,
panels and power distribution as required. Small core generator size shall be 350KW,
large core generator size shall be 450KW, natural gas. It is acceptable to utilize parallel
generators to provide the required KW rating.
13) Metal standing seam roofing in lieu of asphalt shingles – see specifications for material
information.
14) Metal shake with aggregate coating in lieu of asphalt shingles – see specifications for
material information.
15) Oak chair rail (similar to wood base) in all Community Rooms, Chapels, Main Lobby and
Board Room.
16) “Plank” style vinyl “wood like” flooring in lieu of sheet “wood like” flooring.
Substitute Mannington; Nature's Path Luxure Vinyl Plank Flooring in Lieu of SV1-SV5.
Colors as indicated below;
• SV1 - Heritage Cherry #12105 Natural
• SV2 & SV5 - Heritage Cherry #12103 Select
• SV3 & SV4 - Windsor Oak #12111 Honeytone
17) Provide deduct for re-use of the existing 300’ geothermal test bore as noted in
Specification 23 21 14 1.10 D and as identified in G0.1.
18) Provide flush solid core oak doors at all resident neighborhood wings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. ADVANCE COORDINATION
10731 ALTERNATES 01 23 00-4

Immediately after award of the Contract, or as soon thereafter as the Owner has made a
decision on which if any Alternatives will be selected, thoroughly and clearly advise all
necessary personnel and suppliers as to the nature and extent of Alternatives selected by the
Owner. Use all means necessary to alert those personnel and suppliers involved as to all
changes in the Work caused by the Owner's selection or rejection of Alternatives.
END OF SECTION
10731 ALTERNATES 01 23 00-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 01 31 13
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Requirements of this Section are applicable to all Contractor and Subcontractors.
Contractors are responsible for the cost to purchase construction documents for use during
construction if awarded the project.
The Construction Manager or Contractor designated by the CM shall assume and take responsible
charge of the place of the Project and shall coordinate and expedite the Work of all Contractors and
Subcontractors, to complete the Project in an orderly and timely manner.
Each Contractor shall:
Coordinate work of its own employees and Subcontractors.
Expedite its Work to assure compliance with schedules.
Coordinate its Work with that of the other Contractors and Subcontractors.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Conditions of the Contract
All Sections of Division 01 - General Requirements
COORDINATION PROCEDURES
Comply with provisions of Section 01 31 26 and as further specified herein.
Cooperate with the Owner, Construction Manager, A/E and all other persons of all trades engaged in
the Work in such a manner and to such extent as will best facilitate the Work of each and the prompt
completion of the Work.
Inform yourself as to progress of the Work, order materials and let subcontracts promptly, and schedule
and expedite work so as to avoid delay.
Notify other Contractors, Subcontractors and trades whose Work is in any way connected to, combined
with, or influenced by your Work, and allow them reasonable time to complete their Work.
Carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications to ascertain the extent of the Work of all trades.
Cooperate with the Owner's authorized representative.
Coordinate access to and use of the site and storage of materials on the site.
Neither A/E nor Owner will expedite the Work of the Contractors or their Subcontractors.
Coordinate your Work with adjacent work and cooperate with all other trades so as to facilitate the
general progress of the Project. Afford all other trades every reasonable opportunity for the installation
of their work and for the storage of their material. In no case exclude from the premises or work, any
other Contractor, Subcontractor or their employees; or interfere with any other Contractor and
Subcontractor in the execution or installation of its Work.
Perform your Work in proper sequence in relation to that of other trades. Pay all costs caused by
defective or ill-timed Work.
Project Coordination
01 31 13-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Arrange your Work and dispose of your materials so as not to interfere with the Work or storage of
materials of other Contractors and Subcontractors and join your work to that of others in accordance
with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Project Coordination
01 31 13-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 31 19
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Pre-construction Meeting
Periodic Progress Meetings
Special Meetings
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Construction Manager shall:
1. Distribute written notice of each meeting to all required attendees and parties to the contracts in
advance of meeting date.
2. Prepare agenda for meetings.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meetings.
5. Record the minutes of the meeting; include significant proceedings and decisions.
6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within five days after each meeting to:
Meeting attendees.
All parties to the contracts.
Others affected by decisions made at the meetings.
Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified
and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
Owner may attend meetings to ascertain that Work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents
and construction schedules.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
The Construction Manager shall schedule and administer a pre-construction meeting.
Location: TBD
Attendance required by:
1. Owner
2. A/E and his professional consultants.
3. All Contractors and their Superintendents.
4. Major Subcontractors. (eg. Excavator)
5. Major suppliers.
6. Others as appropriate.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
Construction Manager shall schedule progress meetings at least Bi-Weekly or more frequently as
required.
Location of the Meetings: Project field office of Construction Manager.
Project Meetings
01 31 19-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Attendance required by:
1. Construction Manager.
2. A/E and his professional consultants as needed.
3. All Contractors and their Superintendents/Foreman
4. Owner.
5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
SPECIAL MEETINGS
The Construction Manager shall schedule special meetings prior to the start of the following activities:
1. Commencement of each Phase.
2. Masonry work.
3. Roofing.
4. Interior finishing
5. Prior to field installation of door hardware.
6. MEP above ceiling coordination meetings with fire protection, plumbing, hvac, and electrical
trades.
7. Geothermal Pre-Drill Meeting. The meeting is to be scheduled after geothermal submittals are
approved. Attendees shall include CM, A/E, Geothermal Contractor, HVAC Contractor,
Earthwork Contractor, Local Municipal Engineer and WI DNR Representative.
8. Other activities as requested by Owner or A/E or if specification sections indicate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Project Meetings
01 31 19-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 31 26
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Requirements of this Section are applicable to all Contractors and Subcontractors.
Coordination procedures.
Examination of Drawings.
Installation and arrangement.
Equipment Connections.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Conditions of the Contract
Section 01 31 13: Project Coordination
COORDINATION PROCEDURES
Comply with provisions of Section 01 31 13 and as further specified herein.
The Fire Protection, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Data/Communications Contractors, and any
necessary Subcontracytors, shall cooperate with each other in the timely incorporation of their
respective Work into the Project this will be done through a coordination meeting scheduled by the CM.
Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall allow other Contractors and Subcontractors adequate time
and area to fit their respective Work together. Be prepared to commence and continue Work in a
timely manner so as to cause no unusual or unreasonable delay in the Work of any other Contractor
and Subcontractor.
Coordinate with each other in the location of hangers, supports, sleeves, inserts, and other devices
necessary for the installation of the Work. Wherever possible, Contractors shall use common
supports. If to be built-in to the Work of other Contractor and Subcontractor, furnish devices to that
Contractor and Subcontractor in a timely manner for installation. Also furnish adequate information and
supervision for the proper placement of all such devices. See Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching.
EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS
Examine all Drawings together with the Specifications applicable to all Contracts.
The Drawings show the general arrangement, quantity, extent, and location of the Work of the Project.
This arrangement and location may be modified to make portions of the Work fit together.
After examination of the Contract Documents, bring to the attention of the Construction Manager and
A/E any questions with regard to the intent of these Documents, in a timely manner, prior to
commencing with the Work.
Also notify the Construction Manager and A/E of any unforeseen conditions found in the field, including
conflict in the arrangement and location of piping, conduits, ductwork, etc.
Sprinkler Head Locations:
Sprinkler heads are not necessarily indicated on the Drawings although some heads may be indicated
on reflected ceiling plans. Locate heads in symmetrical patterns. Coordinate with other trades that
require ceiling mounted or ceiling penetrated products. Center heads in acoustical ceiling panels and
Mechanical and Electrical Coordination
01 31 26-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
tiles. When heads are located in ceilings other than acoustical panels or tiles the heads shall be
located in a straight line.
INSTALLATION AND ARRANGEMENT
General:
Install all Work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles,
boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts requiring
periodic replacement or maintenance.
Arrange electrical raceways, pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks,
traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of swinging and overhead doors,
and access panels.
Coordinate opening locations with Construction Manager.
Adjustments in Locations:
Adjust locations of pipes, ducts, electrical raceways, switches, panels, equipment, fixtures, etc., as may
be required to accommodate work interferences.
Prior to fabrication, determine routes and locations of electrical raceways, pipes, and ducts.
Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch shall have right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example:
Condensate and plumbing drains shall normally have right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be
changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.
Make offset transition and changes in direction in electrical raceways, pipes, and ducts as required to
maintain headroom and pitch of sloping lines.
Provide all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to affect these offsets, transitions and
changes in direction.
Access Panels: Where required for access to your Work in otherwise inaccessible space, each
Contractor and Subcontractor shall furnish access panel, sized for purpose intended, suitable for
location installed, to Contractor designated by the CM for installation by the trade in whose work panel
is required. Verify size, type, and location with A/E prior to furnishing. Provide as specified in Divisions
21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28.
Ductwork: Change the cross-sectional dimensions of ductwork when required to meet job conditions,
but maintain at least the same velocity and pressure drop for the new cross-sectional area. Secure the
approval of Construction Manager and A/E prior to fabrication of ductwork requiring such changes.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
General: Equipment arrangements and connections shown on the Drawings are based upon the
particular manufacturer as noted on the Drawings or in the Specifications. In some cases if so
specified, other equivalent equipment may be furnished at the Contractor's option.
Where such equipment requiring different arrangement or connections from those shown is used,
install the equipment to operate and function with the intent of the system design. When requested by
the Construction Manager or A/E, submit drawings showing the proposed revised installation.
If the proposed installation is approved, make all incidental changes in piping, ductwork, supports,
insulation, wiring heaters, panelboards, etc. Provide any additional motors, controllers, valves, fittings,
and other additional equipment required for the proper operation of the system resulting from selection
of equipment.
Mechanical and Electrical Coordination
01 31 26-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Notify all other Contractors and Subcontractors who may be affected in a timely manner, and provide
for any additional costs which may be caused by different arrangement or connection.
SELECTED SPECIFIC DUTIES
Note: These duties are indicated here as an aid to the Construction Manager in soliciting Sub-bids and
are not mandatory.
Plumbing Contractor (PC):
Make final connections to the Work of fire/water, storm, and sanitary utility contractors.
HVAC Contractor (HC):
Make gas connections to equipment furnished by other Contractors and Subcontractors.
Provide all external control wiring for your equipment unless provided otherwise in the Contract
Documents. Coordinate opening locations with Construction Manager.
Electrical Contractor (EC):
Provide all wiring to motor operated equipment and motor control centers furnished by other
Contractors and Subcontractors, and make final connections unless provided otherwise in the
Contract Documents.
Provide motor starters and disconnects unless integral with equipment. Size motor starters to
equipment provided. Also, provide required accessories.
Provide final line voltage (110V and greater) to motors; provide heaters, check amperage draw,
and check motor rotation.
All Contractors and Subcontractors Except EC:
Provide wiring diagrams of all motorized equipment and deliver to EC. Prepare diagrams for the
specific equipment installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Mechanical and Electrical Coordination
01 31 26-3

ID Task Name Duration Start Finish
1 SITEWORK 337 days Mon 4/23/12 Tue 8/6/13
8
9 BULINDING GROUP 2 178 days Mon 6/18/12 Wed 2/20/13
10 Small Core (2A) 162 days Mon 6/18/12 Tue 1/29/13
39
40 Neighborhood 2B (16 Unit) 163 days Mon 6/25/12 Wed 2/6/13
66
67 Neighborhood 2C (14 Unit) 159 days Mon 7/2/12 Thu 2/7/13
93
94 Neighborhood 2D (16 Unit) 163 days Mon 7/9/12 Wed 2/20/13
120
121 BULINDING GROUP 1 257 days Mon 5/14/12 Tue 5/7/13
122 Large Core (1A) 257 days Mon 5/14/12 Tue 5/7/13
153
154 Neighborhood 1B (16 Unit W/Ceiling T 172 days Mon 5/28/12 Tue 1/22/13
181
182 Neighborhood 1C (13 Unit) 168 days Mon 6/4/12 Wed 1/23/13
208
209 Neighborhood 1D (16 Unit) 176 days Mon 6/11/12 Mon 2/11/13
235
236 BULINDING GROUP 3 191 days Mon 7/16/12 Mon 4/8/13
237 Small Core (3A) 162 days Mon 7/16/12 Tue 2/26/13
266
267 Neighborhood 3B (16 Unit) 163 days Mon 7/23/12 Wed 3/6/13
293
294 Neighborhood 3C (14 Unit) 164 days Mon 7/30/12 Thu 3/14/13
320
321 Neighborhood 3D (16 Unit) 176 days Mon 8/6/12 Mon 4/8/13
347
348 Punch, Test and Training 40 days Wed 5/8/13 Tue 7/2/13
350
351 Owner Starts Moving In 20 days Wed 7/10/13 Tue 8/6/13
2013 201
ter 2nd Quarter 3rd Quarter 4th Quarter 1st Quarter 2nd Quarter 3rd Quarter 4th Quarter 1st
Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan
BULINDING GROUP 2
Small Core (2A)
Neighborhood 2B (16 Unit)
Neighborhood 2C (14 Unit)
Neighborhood 2D (16 Unit)
SITEWORK
BULINDING GROUP 1
Large Core (1A)
Neighborhood 1B (16 Unit W/Ceiling Tracks)
Neighborhood 1C (13 Unit)
Neighborhood 1D (16 Unit)
BULINDING GROUP 3
Small Core (3A)
Neighborhood 3B (16 Unit)
Neighborhood 3C (14 Unit)
Neighborhood 3D (16 Unit)
Punch, Test and Training
Owner Starts Moving In
Project: 3-14-1-2012
Date: Wed 3/14/12
Task
Split
Progress
Milestone
Summary
Project Summary
External Tasks
External Milestone
Deadline
Page 1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Preparation: The Construction Manager shall prepare the construction schedule. Contractors shall
adhere to the deadlines within the construction schedule.
The CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE shall be reviewed and up-dated monthly (or more frequently if
requested by Owner) by the Construction Manager.
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE (for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals):
All Contractors shall prepare and submit a schedule to the CM of all contract required submittals within
ten days of receiving contract or letter of intent. Arrange submittals by priority of need, allowing
reasonable time for A/E review based upon complexity of submittal and potential additional time for
resubmittals. Time for review shall commence on A/E’s receipt of submittal. Schedule is subject to
approval of the CM.
Indicate: Early and late start dates, float time if any, required onsite delivery dates to Maintain
Construction Schedule as provide with the contract documents. Dates final approved submittals will be
required from the A/E, including additional time for re-submittals.
GENERAL
Perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to Owner and
Architect.
CONTRACTOR LIST
All contractors are to submit to the CM a list of their Subcontractors, Suppliers and vendors within ten
days of receiving their contract or letter of Intent.
The Construction Manager shall submit list of all Contractors, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and
vendors to A/E and Owner within 21 days after contract award.
BUILDING PERMIT
See Section 01 41 00.
SUBSTITUTIONS
See Section 01 60 00.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
General:
Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by
Contractors, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers or distributors to illustrate
some portion of the Work.
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures,
diagrams, and other information furnished by Contractors to illustrate materials or equipment for some
portion of the Work.
Samples are physical examples, which illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish
standards by which the Work will be judged.
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The
purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are
required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the
information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the A/E is
subject to the limitations of this Section. Informational submittals upon which the A/E is not expected to
take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not
required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action.
Contractors shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the
Construction Manager Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the
Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the
Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals that are not marked as
reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by Contractor will be returned by
CM or A/E without action.
By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the
Contractor represents that he has determined and verified materials, field measurements, and field
construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information
contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work, the Project, and the Contract
Documents.
Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal
and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective
submittal has been reviewed by the CM and A/E.
The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that Contractor shall not be relieved
of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the CM's and A/E's
approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals unless Contractor has
specifically informed the CM and A/E in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) CM
and A/E has given written approval to the specific deviation as a Minor Change in the Work, or (2) a
Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. Contractor
shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples,
or similar submittals by the CM's and A/E's approval thereof.
Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the CM and A/E on previous
submittals. In the absence of such written notice the CM's and A/E's approval of a resubmission shall
not apply to such revisions.
Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of
architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents
for a portion of the Work or unless Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out
Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures.
Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If
professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or
equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and A/E
will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause
such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose
signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop
Drawings and other submittals prepared by such design professional.
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professionals, if
prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to CM. The CM,
Owner and A/E shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the
services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the CM, Owner
and A/E have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must
satisfy. In accordance with the above, CM and A/E will review, approve or take other appropriate action
on such submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and
the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be responsible for the
adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contact Documents.
The CM shall review all Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and other submittals from the
Contractors. The CM shall coordinate submittals with information contained in related documents and
transmit to the A/E those which have been approved by the CM. The CM's actions will be taken with
such reasonable promptness as to cause no unreasonable delay in the Work or in the activities of the
Owner or Contractors.
A/E will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals such as Shop
Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The A/E's action will
be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no unreasonable delay in the Work or in the
activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the A/E's
professional judgment to permit adequate review by A/E or its consultants as applicable. Review of
such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of
other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or
performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor as required
by the Contract Documents. The A/E's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve Contractor
of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, and 3.5 of the General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction (AIA Doc A201-1997), and this Section 01 33 00 of the Specifications. The A/E's review
shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, of any construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures. The A/E's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an
assembly of which the item is a component.
NOTE: A/E will review a single submittal and one resubmittal. Should additional resubmittals be
required due to Contractor's failure to prepare a resubmittal in accordance with previously reviewed
submittals or should Contractor fail to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 of the
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA Doc A201-1997) in the preparation of a
correct resubmittal, Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to Owner as would have been
avoided if Contractor had performed such obligations.
Submittal Requirements:
Submit all Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals to CM.
Submit electronically and six hard copies of all Shop Drawings, Product Data, and similar submittals.
After positive review, two copies will be retained by the A/E and four copies will be returned to the
Construction Manager for his printing and distribution.
When samples are required, submit at least 5 samples of finishes and materials unless otherwise noted
in respective product specification. After positive review, two samples will be retained by the A/E and
the remaining sample(s) will be returned to the Construction Manager. One sample will be retained by
the CM and two samples will be returned to the Contractor.
Submittals shall include: Date and subsequent revision dates; names of Contractor, Subcontractor,
Supplier, CM, A/E and manufacturer; project title and number; identification of product or material;
relations to adjacent structure or materials; field dimensions, clearly indicated as such; identification of
deviations from Contract Documents; and the Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to
approval of the prepared submittal, verification of field conditions and measurements, and compliance
with Contract Documents.
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Contractor shall not submit any shop drawing that is simply a tracing or other copy of any of the
Contract Documents. Each Shop Drawing must be prepared by the Contractor, or a subcontractor or
supplier of the Contractor. A/E may reject any Shop Drawing that is not in conformance with this
provision, and no extension of the Contract Time shall be considered on account of such rejection.
Corrections or changes indicated on Shop Drawings shall not be considered as extra work order. No
Shop Drawings shall be used in the Work of the Project unless it bears stamp of the A/E's "Positive"
review.
Do not revise previously approved submittals. Prominently indicate on all submittals any changes that
have been made other than those requested by the A/E or its consulting Engineer. Also so indicate on
the USR form.
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS
Where required by Owner or governmental and/or regulatory agencies submit Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) with Product Data. Utilize OSHA Form OSHA-20 for any item or items provided during
the performance of the Work which may have toxic, hazardous, or infectious substances as defined by
the Federal Occupational, Safety and Health Standards entitled "Subpart Z -Toxic and Hazardous
Substances, Section 1910.1000-." Submit two copies with each Product Data copy.
PROGRESS REVISIONS TO CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
Show changes occurring since previous submission of Schedule:
Major changes in scope.
Activities modified since previous submission.
Revised projections of progress and completion.
Other identifiable changes.
Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the Schedule.
Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
The effect of changes on schedules of other Major Subcontractors.
Be prepared to present changes and report at Project Meetings. See Section 01 31 19.
Prepare copies and distribute to all Contractors, Subcontractors, Owner, and A/E.
Instruct recipients to report promptly in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections shown in the
Schedules.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the CM a schedule of values of
the various portions of the Work, including quantities if required by the CM aggregating the total
Contract Sum, divided so as to facilitate payments to Subcontractors.
Prepare a schedule of values in such form and supported by such substantiating data as the CM and
Owner may require. Each item in the schedule of values shall include its proper share of overhead and
profit. This schedule, when approved by the CM, shall be used only as a basis for the Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 01 41 00
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Unless otherwise specifically directed by Construction Manager, each Contractor, Subcontractor and
Sub-subcontractor shall comply with provisions of this Section as required for proper execution and
completion of their Work or portions thereof.
PROCEDURES
Comply with and give notices required by laws, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities having
jurisdiction applicable to performance of the Work. Also comply with and give notices required by
Owner's and Contractors' insurance companies, local utilities and labor regulations relating to the
performance of the Work, the protection of adjacent property, and the maintenance of passage ways,
guard fences or other protective facilities.
Procure all certificates of inspection, use, and occupancy, and all permits and licenses, pay all charges
and fees and give all notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the Work.
Certificates of inspection, use and occupancy shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the
Work in sufficient time for occupation of the Project in accordance with the approved schedule for the
Work. The costs of such procurement, payment and delivery shall be included within the Base Bid.
Exercise precaution at all times for the protection of persons (including employees) and property.
Observe the safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes. Refer to the Manual
of Accident Prevention in Construction, published by the Associated General Contractors of America.
It is not Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with
applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if Contractor
observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, Contractor shall promptly
notify CM, A/E and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate
Modification.
If Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and
rules and regulations without such notice to A/E and Owner, Contractor shall assume full responsibility
for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.
Refer to various Sections of the Work for referenced codes, standards, tests, etc., applicable to the
Work.
TAXES
Pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes required by law, including but not limited to unemployment,
FICA; state, Federal, and local municipality sales; excise and manufacturer's taxes for the Work
provided by Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,
whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.
If the tax laws are subsequently amended by legislation during the life of the Contract, necessary
changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
PERMITS
Permits, Fees, Licenses, and Inspections: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
Contractor designated by the CM shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and
governmental and utility fees, licenses, inspections, and approvals necessary for proper execution and
Regulatory Requirements
01 41 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are
legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded.
Owner will obtain plan approvals and pay all fees required by the Wisconsin Department of Commerce
- Safety & Buildings.
EC shall obtain all permits and pay all fees required by local utilities for permanent electric service.
HC shall obtain all permits and pay all fees required by local utilities for permanent gas service.
Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall furnish Construction Manager with copies of all required
permits and certificates of inspection applicable to its work.
Construction Manager shall furnish A/E with copy of all required permits and certificates.
The New Dunn County Health Care Center will be near the County Airport RW 09 approach.
Contractors will be responsible to coordinate with the County, Airport and Bureau of Aeronautics
regarding crane operation on this jobsite. Contractors are required to coordinate with Mr. Gary Dikkers
(gary.dikkers@dot.state.wi.us) at the Bureau of Aeronautics and completing FAA From 7480 and obtain
the necessary approvals or permits prior to scheduled work with use of cranes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Regulatory Requirements
01 41 00-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 01 45 29
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
The Construction Manager will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to
perform specified services and testing.
Testing Laboratory inspection, sampling and testing is required for, but not limited to, the following:
Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel Framing
Section 05 40 00: Cold-Formed Steel Framing
Section 31 20 00: Earth Moving
Section 31 23 16: Excavation
Section 31 23 16.13: Trenching
Section 31 23 23: Fill
Section 32 13 14: Concrete Paving
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Conditions of the Contract: Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations,
orders or approvals of public authorities.
Related Requirements Specified in Other Sections:
Division 22 and 23: Testing of Mechanical Systems
Division 26: Testing of Electrical Systems
QUALIFICATION OF LABORATORY
Meet "Recommended Requirements of Independent Laboratory Qualification" published by American
Council of Independent Laboratories.
Meet basic requirements of ASTM E 329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and
Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction."
Authorized to operate in State in which the Project is located.
LABORATORY DUTIES
Cooperate with A/E and Construction Manager; provide qualified personnel after due notice.
Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction:
Comply with specified standards.
Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.
Promptly notify the A/E and Construction Manager of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or
products.
Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to A/E, Consulting Engineer,
Owner, and Construction Manager. Each report shall include:
Date issued.
Project Title and number.
Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Testing Laboratory Services
01 45 29-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Date and time of sampling or inspection.
Record of temperature and weather conditions.
Date of test.
Identification of product and specification section.
Location of sample or test in the Project.
Type of inspection or test.
Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents.
Interpretation of test results, when requested by CM, A/E or Consulting Engineer.
Perform additional tests as required by CM, A/E or the Owner.
LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
Laboratory is not authorized to:
Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
Approve or accept any portions of the Work other than those portions of the Work scheduled for
testing.
Perform any duties of the Contractor.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work and to manufacturer's operations.
Secure and deliver to the laboratory, adequate quantities of representative samples of materials
proposed to be used and which require testing. Submit concrete mix designs to CM and A/E for
approval prior to pouring concrete.
Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other
material mixes that require control by the testing laboratory.
Furnish copies of Product test reports as required.
Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
To provide access to Work to be tested.
To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested.
To facilitate inspections and tests.
For storage and curing of test samples.
Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel
and scheduling of tests.
When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for laboratory
personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence.
Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's
convenience.
Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to
perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial tests indicate work does not
comply with Contract Documents.
Temporarily halt the progress of the Work upon notification by the Owner or his designated
representative that tested materials do not comply with Contract Documents.
Remove and replace at no cost to the Owner, all defective materials discovered upon testing not to
comply with Contract Documents.
Testing Laboratory Services
01 45 29-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SPECIFIC TEST, INSPECTIONS, AND METHODS REQUIRED
Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete
Secure samples of aggregates Contractor proposes to use and test for compliance with
Specifications.
Certify compliance with Specifications of cement proposed for use by the Contractor.
Review and approve the Contractor's proposed concrete mix proportions for the required
concrete strengths using materials Contractor proposes to use on the project. Incorporate
specified admixtures and not less than amounts of cement specified.
Perform appropriate laboratory tests, including compression tests of cylinders and slump test to
substantiate mix designs.
Inspect and test materials during concrete work to substantiate compliance with Specifications
and mix requirements.
Testing:
Sample and test concrete in accordance with ASTM C 31, ASTM C 143, ASTM C 172, and ASTM C
231.
Perform slump tests in accord with ASTM C 143 from same concrete batch used for test cylinders and
record results and comments on compression test reports.
Perform compression tests in accordance with ASTM C 39.
When air-entrained concrete is used, a minimum of one (1) air content test shall be performed in
accordance with ASTM C 231 for each set of test cylinders taken.
Identify all test cylinders with symbols to indicate location on the job where concrete test was made.
Record on project record drawings.
Strength tests shall be made for: each day's pour; each class of concrete; each change of supplies or
sources; and for each 100 cubic yards of concrete or fraction thereof.
One slump test shall be made for each set of test cylinders taken following the procedure in ASTM C
143.
Test Cylinders:
All Concrete:
Each test shall consist of a minimum of four cylinders.
Make test cylinders in conformity with ASTM C 31.
After 24 hours three cylinders to be carefully transported to the testing laboratory for moisture curing
and one cylinder to be field cured.
One laboratory cured and one field cured cylinder to be tested at 7 days and one laboratory cured
cylinder to be tested at 28 days. Reserve one cylinder for further testing.
The average of all strength tests representing each class of concrete, as well as the average of any
three consecutive strength tests for each class of concrete, shall be equal to or greater than the
specified strength.
If the CM or A/E has reason to believe that cylinder strength tests are not representative of the strength
of concrete in place, CM or A/E shall require drilled cores to be cut and tested at the Contractor’s
Testing Laboratory Services
01 45 29-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
expense. Coring and testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 42 Standard Method of Obtaining
and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel Framing
Welding:
Provide inspection of shop and field welding in accordance with Section 6 of AWS D1.1.
Visually inspect all welds, perform appropriate non-destructive tests on apparent defective welds.
Verify conformance with Specifications.
Non-destructive testing shall be performed on 20 percent of the total length of all full penetration welds.
If a sufficient number of welds are deficient, additional testing may be performed at the discretion of the
testing lab, at no cost to Owner.
Bolting:
Visually inspect all connections for proper number, size and type of bolt.
Test all bolted connections for compliance with “snug tight” requirements of AISC.
Where slip critical (SC) type bolts or fully tensioned bolts are required, test 10 percent of bolts or
minimum of one per connection for proper torque. If tightness in not adequate, Contractor shall
retighten all bolts on connection.
Section 05 54 00: Cold Formed Steel Framing
As directed by CM or A/E, Owner’s testing agency may inspect the maintenance of a quality control
program including spot checking weldments and welding procedures in accordance with AWS
standards.
Section 31 20 00: Soil Compaction Control
Section 31 23 16: Excavation
Section 31 23 16.13 Trenching
Section 31 23 23: Fill
Soils Engineer to be on site during excavation operation.
Visually inspect, test, and certify that exposed undisturbed underlying soil is suitable for required footing
bearing capacity and placement of fills.
Maximum and minimum density of fill soil for compaction percentage of relative density and
moisture density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Designation D 1557.
Number of tests as follows:
Subgrade, Undisturbed and Demolition Surfaces: Visual inspection and probe; test if required.
Interior Fills: One test per 2,500 sq. ft. for each two foot or less lift.
Exterior Fills: One test per 2,500 sq. ft. for each two foot or less lift.
Utility Trenches: One test per 50 lineal feet for each two foot or less lift.
Section 32 13 13: Concrete Paving
Test concrete paving in the manner specified above for all concrete (Section 03 30 00).
Testing Laboratory Services
01 45 29-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Testing Laboratory Services
01 45 29-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
GENERAL
Work and requirements of this Section are the responsibility of all Contractors as required for their
work, unless specifically assigned to a Contractor designated by the CM or indicated otherwise in the
Contract Documents.
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
General protective controls.
Cold weather protection.
Temporary communications systems.
Temporary first aid facilities.
Temporary fire protection.
Fire apparatus access.
Construction aids.
Temporary enclosures.
Protection against exposures.
Removal of aids and enclosures.
Barriers.
Guardrails and Barricades.
Security.
Site access and control.
Advertising.
Field offices.
Construction sanitary facilities.
Environmental controls.
Debris control.
Pollution control.
Temporary utility costs.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 51 13: Temporary Electricity and Lighting
Section 01 51 23: Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating
Section 01 51 36: Temporary Water and Sanitary Facilities
Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
Section 01 78 39: Project Record Documents
DEFINITIONS
Permanent Enclosure: Permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight;
exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction
or substantial temporary closures.
GENERAL PROTECTIVE CONTROLS
Notify adjacent owners of corporate or private property if their property interferes with your Work so that
arrangements for proper protection can be made.
Use all means necessary to protect the following:
Existing site improvements indicated to remain.
Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 50 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Equipment, materials, apparatus, fixtures, etc., incorporated in the Work or stored on the site,
free from injury or damage.
Temporary or permanent openings in the structure.
Existing trees indicated to remain.
Keep Project site accessible at all times. Remove snow, ice, and water as necessary for safety and
execution of the Work.
COLD WEATHER PROTECTION
Progress of the Work shall not be unreasonably delayed due to cold weather. Heating and covering
protection required to protect building and materials from damage due to freezing and precipitation
during construction period prior to permanent enclosure of building, shall be classified as "cold weather
protection".
Construction Manager or Contractor designated by the CM shall provide and pay for fuel.
Electrical power shall not be used as a source of heat for heating units.
Portable Heating Units: The use of stoves, salamanders, tar pots, etc., is prohibited. Temporary
heating devices shall be substantially constructed, in good operating conditions, not readily overturned,
and restricted to the use of oil or gas as source to produce heat. Provide means of venting units as
required.
Provide proper maintenance and supervision of portable heaters when being used to provide temporary
heat. At the end of each working day the heater units and associated hoses and controls shall be
checked by supervisory personnel to assure proper operating condition. Do not permit heaters to be
left operating unattended.
TEMPORARY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Construction Manager or Contractor designated by the CM shall provide the following:
At least one fixed telephone line.
A telephone answering device.
A facsimile machine with separate telephone line.
Pay all costs for installation, usage, and removal.
Use of communication systems is limited to CM, Contractors, Owner, and A/E; and any other parties at
the discretion of Construction Manager. Emergency use is exempted from any limitation.
Contractors and Subcontractors may provide their own communication systems as required to expedite
their work.
TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES
Construction Manager or Contractor designated by the CM shall provide and maintain first-aid
equipment for construction personnel, readily available for emergency use. Post in a conspicuous
place the telephone numbers and addresses of local police and fire departments and nearest hospital.
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
Provide and maintain in working order during the entire construction period, suitable fire extinguishers
and such other fire protective equipment and devices in sufficient quantity for the Project size,
necessary for any class or type of fire. Provide non-freeze type such as A-B-C rated dry chemical
extinguishers of not less than 10 lb. capacity each. In addition, any Contractor or Subcontractor who
maintains an enclosed shed on the premises shall provide and maintain in an accessible location, one
or more similar non-freezing type fire extinguishers in each shed.
Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 50 00-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
FIRE APPARATUS ACCESS
In accordance with Wisconsin Enrolled Commercial Building Code COMM 62.0500, required fire lanes
shall be provided prior to the placement of combustible materials at the building site, or the construction
of any portion of the building above the footing and foundation.
CONSTRUCTION AIDS
Consult with Construction Manager, review site conditions and factors which affect construction
procedures and construction aids, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be
affected by execution of the Work.
Provide and maintain construction aids and equipment required by construction personnel, and to
facilitate execution of the Work, scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings,
hoists, cranes, chutes, and other such facilities and equipment. Refer to respective Sections for
particular requirements for each trade.
When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms, and railings, for use by
all construction personnel.
Relocate construction aids as required by progress of Work, by storage or work requirements, and to
accommodate reasonable access to the Work.
TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
General: Temporary enclosures include the following:
1. Enclosing exterior building envelope openings in new construction prior to permanent
enclosure.
Materials:
Metal stud wall and ceiling framing, minimum 20 gauge for load bearing and 25 gauge for
non-load bearing. Frame 24 inches o.c.
Sheathing: Exterior Walls: Ship-lapped 1/2-inch plywood, weather resistant.
Interior Walls: 5/8-inch GWB.
Floor: 1/2-inch plywood, painted with non-slip aggregate.
Insulation: Fiberglass batt, full depth of void.
Miscellaneous: Paint, tape, self-closing doors, builders hardware as required, suitable for use
intended.
Provide all non-combustible materials or fire-retardant treated wood materials throughout.
Installation:
Provide temporary weather-tight enclosures of openings in building envelope for protection of
construction, in progress and completed, as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions,
weather protection for materials, effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized
persons.
Provide temporary doors with self-closing builders type hardware.
Provide temporary locks where required to prevent unauthorized entry.
PROTECTION AGAINST EXPOSURES
Construction Manager shall supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.
2. Excessively high or low temperatures.
Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 50 00-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
3. Excessively high or low humidity.
4. Water or ice.
5. Chemicals and solvents.
6. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.
7. Mold, mildew, fungus or other harmful microorganisms.
8. Rodent and insect infestation.
9. Unusual wear or other misuse.
10. Contact between incompatible materials.
11. Unprotected storage.
Repair or remove and replace construction damaged by such exposures promptly to prevent further
damage.
REMOVAL OF AIDS AND ENCLOSURES
Completely remove temporary materials, equipment and services when construction needs can be met
by use of permanent construction and upon completion of Project.
Clean, repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary facilities. Remove foundations and
underground installations for construction aids. Grade areas of site affected by temporary installations
to required elevations and slopes, and clean the areas.
BARRIERS
Furnish, install and maintain suitable barriers as required to prevent public entry, and to protect the
Project, existing trees and plants from construction operations. Remove when no longer needed, or at
completion of Project.
Materials shall be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not violate requirements of
applicable codes and standards.
Prior to start of Work at the Project site, install perimeter enclosure fence with suitably locked access
gates. Provide minimum 6-foot high portable chain link fence or approved equivalent. Enclose the
area around buildings or portions of the site determined sufficient to prevent public from easily entering
the site.
Install facilities of a neat and reasonable uniform appearance, structurally adequate for required
purposes.
Maintain barriers during entire construction period.
Relocate barriers as required by progress of construction.
Completely remove barriers, including foundations, when construction has progressed to the point that
they are no longer needed, and when approved by the Construction Manager and Owner.
Clean and repair damage caused by installation, fill and grade areas of the site to required elevations
and slopes, and clean the area.
GUARDRAILS AND BARRICADES
Provide, erect and maintain planking, barricades, guardrails, temporary walkways, etc., of sufficient size
and strength necessary for protection of material storage, sidewalks, curbs, streets, drives, adjoining
property and the building as well as to afford protection to the public and construction personnel at the
job site.
Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 50 00-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECURITY
Watchmen will not be provided by the Owner. Provide such watchmen and take such precautionary
measures as necessary to protect your interest.
SITE ACCESS AND CONTROL
Provide and maintain construction access as indicated on Drawings. Provide lockable construction
gate across access road.
Keep adjacent streets and parking areas free from all debris originating at the site, and comply with
local ordinances relative to construction activity.
ADVERTISING
No individual advertising signs, plaques, or credits, temporary or permanent, will be permitted on the
building or premises, except the name of the Contractor on his office or material shed.
FIELD OFFICES
Construction Manager shall provide and maintain a temporary field office for their use and the use of
A/E and Owner. Provide of suitable size to accommodate a desk, 3-foot x 6-foot plan table, plan rack,
2 chairs, one-4 drawer file and other required office equipment. Provide heat, AC (optional), and
lighting and maintain weatherproof. If electrically heated and/or air conditioned provide separate meter
and pay all costs for installation, consumption, and removal.
Keep a complete set of all Contract Documents, State approved plans, approved shop drawings,
change orders, and other modifications in office; see Section 01 78 39.
CONSTRUCTION SANITARY FACILITIES
Construction Manager or Contractor designated by the CM shall provide and maintain temporary toilets
for the use of all construction personnel in sufficient number required for the force employed. The
toilets shall comply with the requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction and local
regulations.
Maintain the temporary toilets in a sanitary condition at all times, and supply toilet tissue.
When construction has progressed sufficiently to utilize proposed toilet rooms within building, provide
and maintain temporary toilet compartments for temporary toilet rooms. See Section 01 51 36. Provide
with toilet tissue as above.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
General:
Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction, as necessary to provide
controls over environmental conditions at the construction site, and related areas under Contractor's
control; remove physical evidence of temporary facilities at completion of Work.
Erosion Control: Maintain erosion control measures provided by Earthwork Contractor for the duration
of the project.
Dust Control: Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from
construction operations, and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into the
atmosphere.
Water Control: Provide drawing and obtain permit if required by local municipality.
Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 50 00-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to the Project, the site, or adjoining
properties.
Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct surface drainage away from excavations, pits, tunnels,
and other construction areas; and to direct drainage to proper runoff.
Provide, operate and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity to control surface and water.
Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or other damage to any portion of
the site or to adjoining areas.
DEBRIS CONTROL
Maintain all areas of construction activity free of extraneous debris. See Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning
and Waste Management.
Initiate and maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at the Project site and along
access roads and haul routes.
Provide containers for deposit of debris.
Prohibit overloading of containers to prevent spillages on access and haul routes.
Provide periodic inspection of traffic areas to enforce requirements.
Schedule periodic collection and disposal of debris as specified in Section 01 74 00. Provide additional
collections and disposals of debris whenever the periodic schedule is inadequate to prevent
accumulation.
POLLUTION CONTROL
Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere
by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations.
Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required to contain any spillages, and
to remove contaminated materials or liquids.
Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters.
Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, or other such substances adjacent to streams,
or in sanitary or storm sewers.
Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants.
Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals.
Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere.
All PCB materials and hazardous substances as defined in federal and state statutes, regulations, and
orders, if any, shall be used, handled, stored, and disposed of in conformity with all state, federal, and
local laws, regulations and orders. Submit data sheets on all hazardous substances prior to materials
being delivered to Owner's property.
TEMPORARY UTILITY COSTS
Temporary Water: Usage costs paid by Construction Manager.
Temporary Power: Electricity paid by Construction Manager.
Temporary Heating: Fuel paid by Construction Manager.
End of Section
Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 50 00-6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 51 13
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Electrical Contractor shall install, pay for and maintain temporary electric power service and temporary
lighting for construction needs throughout the construction period, remove on completion of the Work.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 51 23: Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating
Section 01 60 00: Product Requirements
Section 01 77 00: Closeout Procedures
Applicable Sections of Division 26 - Electrical
SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
Power centers for miscellaneous tools and equipment used in the Project:
Weatherproof distribution box with minimum of four 20 amp, 120 volt, GFI grounded outlets.
Locate so that power is available at any point of use with not more than 100 ft. power cords.
Circuit breaker protection for each outlet.
Capacity of Service:
Provide electrical service for construction needs.
Minimum - 200 amp, 120/208 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz or equivalent.
Notify power company when unusually heavy loads, such as for welding and other equipment with
special power requirements, will be connected.
Any trade requiring service of capacity or characteristics other than that specified shall provide
and pay for the additional service.
Power Source:
Local Utility
Location: Adjacent to site. Verify exact location with utility.
LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
Provide temporary artificial lighting in enclosed areas and for all areas when natural light does not meet
minimum requirements for:
Construction work. For work areas: Uniform illumination of 20 foot candles.
Security. Locate as directed by CM.
Temporary offices, storage, shop and other construction buildings. Include temporary electrical
for two CM trailers and six additional trade contractor trailers.
Temporary Electricity and Lighting
01 51 13-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Illumination shall in all areas, meet or exceed State Code requirements or other more stringent State,
local, or Federal requirements.
USE OF PERMANENT SYSTEM
Prior to use of permanent system for construction purposes, obtain written permission of CM and
Owner.
The use of the permanent system shall not serve to waive compliance with any requirements of the
Contract Documents specified elsewhere.
Maintain permanent system as specified for temporary facilities.
COST OF INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
Pay fees and charges for permits and applications.
Pay cost of installation, maintenance and removal of temporary services and restoration of any
permanent facilities used.
Electrical consumption paid by Construction Manager. (See Section 01 50 00).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
General:
Comply with applicable requirements specified in Section of Division 26 - Electrical Work.
Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate for required usage, and must not violate
requirements of applicable codes and standards.
RECEPTACLES, FIXTURES, CONTROLS
Standard products, meeting UL standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
GENERAL
Install all service equipment in temporary weatherproof lockable enclosure.
Comply with applicable requirements specified in Section of Division 26 - Electrical Work.
Maintain system to provide continuous service.
Modify and extend service as work progress requires.
COORDINATION
Coordinate location of power centers and lighting fixtures with Construction Manager and Major
Contractors.
INSTALLATION
Locate fixtures to provide full illumination of required areas.
Temporary Electricity and Lighting
01 51 13-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Install distribution centers and power centers.
Provide service and lighting to field offices of Construction Manager and Major Contractors.
Make connections for temporary heating, ventilating and cooling equipment.
Wire all safety devices specified for final operation of equipment. Verify proper operation of safety
devices.
OPERATION OF PERMANENT SYSTEMS
Place operational areas of permanent electrical system in use sequentially as respective areas of
Project are enclosed or as required to substantially complete designated portions of the Project.
Prior to operation, verify that inspection has been made by proper authorities and installation has been
approved for operation.
REMOVAL
Completely remove temporary materials and equipment:
When construction and other needs can be met by use of permanent installation.
At completion of Project.
Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified condition.
Replace fixtures and other component parts that are damaged during the Work.
End of Section
Temporary Electricity and Lighting
01 51 13-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 01 51 23
TEMPORARY HEATING, COOLING, AND VENTILATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Heating Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain temporary heating, ventilating, dehumidification
and cooling systems as required to maintain specified environmental conditions in enclosed areas
throughout the construction period. Remove when no longer required or upon completion of the
Project. Provide temporary natural gas service and meter or provide permanent service.
Electric resistance heating not permitted.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 51 13: Temporary Electricity and Lighting
Section 01 60 00: Product Requirements
Section 01 77 00: Closeout Procedures
Applicable Sections of Division 23 - Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Section for each respective Product:
Heating Requirements for Cold-Weather Installation and Protection of Materials.
Ambient Temperatures and Humidities Required for Installation of Products.
CONDITIONS REQUIRED
See requirements of Products Specifications (Divisions 2 thru 33) for minimum temperatures to be
maintained for the various trades. Unless otherwise specified, maintain a minimum inside temperature
of 50 degrees F. in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65
degrees F. for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed.
Provide and operate equipment required to control temperature and humidity, as necessary to facilitate
progress of Work.
Provide ventilating and cooling required to maintain adequate conditions:
Ventilation Required:
General: To prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapors, or gasses in areas
occupied during construction. Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful dispersal of
hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas. Dispose of exhaust materials in a
manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons. Ventilate storage spaces containing
hazardous or volatile materials.
Cooling Required:
To control humidity, and to prevent condensation which would have an adverse affect on the
products and finishes or which would affect application of materials. To cure installed materials
and to protect installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity.
TEMPORARY NATURAL GAS SERVICE
Heating Contractor shall arrange for and provide connection to permanent gas service or provide
temporary gas service. Take out in the name of the Construction Manager.
Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating
01 51 23-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
USE OF PERMANENT SYSTEM
Prior to use of permanent system, obtain written permission of CM and Owner, which will define:
Conditions for use.
Provisions relating to warranties on equipment.
Also see Section 01 77 00.
COSTS OF INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
HC shall pay all costs of service, installation, operation, maintenance and removal of equipment. Costs
of fuel and power consumed shall be paid by Construction Manager. (See Section 01 50 00).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Comply with Division 23: Sections applicable to HVAC Work.
Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate for the purposes intended, and must not violate
requirements of applicable codes and standards.
EQUIPMENT
Provide required facilities, including piping, wiring and controls as appropriate.
Portable Heaters: Standard units, in compliance with applicable codes and regulations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
GENERAL
Comply with applicable Sections of Division 23 - Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
Modify and extend systems as work progress requires and as directed by Construction Manager.
INSTALLATION
Locate units to provide uniform distribution of heat and air movement.
OPERATION OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT
Place operational zones of permanent HVAC system in use sequentially as respective areas of the
Project become adequately enclosed for efficient operation.
Prior to operation, verify that inspection has been made by proper authorities and installation has been
approved for operation.
Provide and maintain temporary filters for air handling units and for permanent ducts.
Protect permanent radiation units, such as convectors for finned pipe.
Provide operation and maintenance of systems.
The use of the permanent system shall not serve to waive compliance with any requirements of the
Contract Documents specified elsewhere.
Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating
01 51 23-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
REMOVAL
Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when use is no longer required.
Restore permanent equipment used for temporary services to specified condition.
Remove temporary filters and install new.
End of Section
Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating
01 51 23-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 01 51 36
TEMPORARY WATER AND SANITARY FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Plumbing Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary water service for construction and for
sanitary needs throughout construction period, remove on completion of work.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 60 00: Product Requirements
Section 01 77 00: Closeout Procedures
Applicable Sections of Division 22 - Plumbing
CONSTRUCTION WATER
Provide adequate supply of water suitable for construction usage.
Capacity of Service:
Size water service to provide adequate volume for all anticipated construction uses, and to
maintain minimum specified pressure when taps are in use.
Water Source: Arrange with local utility for temporary water service.
Maintain strict supervision of use of temporary water system:
Protect against freezing, repair leaks.
Use all means to conserve water at all times. Immediately report miss-use of water to the Owner.
USE OF PERMANENT WATER SYSTEM
Place operational zones of permanent systems in use sequentially as respective areas of Project are
enclosed or as required to substantially complete designated portions of the Project.
Prior to use of permanent system for construction purposes, obtain written permission of CM and
Owner.
Prior to use of system for drinking water:
Disinfect piping.
Obtain inspections and approval of governing authority.
Extend system as necessary to comply with temporary water requirements.
The use of the permanent system shall not serve to waive compliance with any requirements of the
Contract Documents specified elsewhere.
CONSTRUCTION SANITARY FACILITIES
Portable Facilities:
See Section 01 50 00 for sanitary facilities during initial stages of construction.
Use of Permanent Facilities:
Temporary Water and Sanitary Facilities
01 51 36-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Permanent sanitary facilities may not be used by construction personnel. Temporary facilities must be
used at all times during the duration of the project.
Water and sewer usage costs paid by Construction Manager. (See Section 01 50 00).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Comply with Division 22: Sections applicable to Plumbing Work.
Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate for purpose intended, and must not create
unsanitary conditions nor violate code requirements.
TOILET FACILITIES
Temporary flush toilets and lavatories.
Temporary compartments provided by Contractor designated by the CM. (See Section 01 50 00).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
GENERAL
Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 22 - Plumbing.
Maintain water system to provide continuous service.
Modify and extend service as work progress requires.
WATER SYSTEM INSTALLATION
When necessary to maintain pressure, provide temporary pumps, tanks, and compressors.
REMOVAL
Water System:
Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when construction needs can be met by use of
permanent installation and upon completion of Project.
Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.
Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified condition.
Completely remove temporary materials and equipment at completion of Project.
Clean and repair areas used for temporary purposes; replace damaged fixtures, surfaces, and
accessories.
End of Section
Temporary Water and Sanitary Facilities
01 51 36-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
SECTION 01 58 00
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
Contractor designated by the CM shall provide Project Identification sign.
No other signage permitted except Contractor's identification on storage sheds and trailers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Provide project identification sign on minimum 4'-0" high by 8'-0" wide weather resistant rigid substrate.
Sign will include an architectural colored rendering of the building as well as identification information
for the Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, and Architect consultants.
A/E will furnish an electronic document file to the Construction Manager for use by the sign company in
the fabrication of the project identification sign.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Erect sign on job site where indicated by Architect. Provide adequate bracing to maintain in erected
position.
Upon completion, remove from site.
End of Section
Project Identification
01 58 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
All labor and materials.
Material and equipment incorporated into the Work:
Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the
A/E.
Manufactured and fabricated Products:
Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop practices.
Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be
interchangeable.
Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer.
Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless
variations are specifically approved in writing.
Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Conditions of the Contract.
Section 01 11 00: Summary of Work
Section 01 11 23: Owner Purchased Products
Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
Section 01 51 13: Temporary Electricity and Lighting
Section 01 51 23: Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating
Section 01 51 36: Temporary Water and Sanitary Facilities
Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
Section 01 78 23: Operating and Maintenance Data
LABOR AND MATERIALS
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment,
tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities
and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or
permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
Enforce strict discipline and good order among your employees and other persons carrying out the
Contract. Do not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
In the Specifications there are listed acceptable manufacturers. They are listed because to the best of
our knowledge and belief, they are capable of manufacturing the Product to the standards and
requirements specified.
The A/E will be the sole judge that the Product proposed by the contractor or manufacturer conforms to
the standards and requirements specified.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
Product Requirements
01 60 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
When Contract Documents require that installation of Work shall comply with manufacturer's printed
instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation,
including two copies to the A/E.
Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion.
Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions, and
in conformity with specified requirements.
Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with
A/E for further instructions.
Do not proceed with Work without clear instructions.
Perform Work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or
installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with
work and conditions at the site.
Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with
identifying labels intact and legible.
Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents and approved submittals, and that Products are properly protected and undamaged.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to
Products or packaging.
Refer to Section 01 11 23 for transportation and handling of Owner Purchased Products.
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
Store products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.
Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.
Maintain temperatures and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
Exterior Storage:
Store fabricated Products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining. Cover
products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate
ventilation to avoid condensation.
Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign
matter.
Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of
stored Products to assure that Products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from
damage or deterioration.
Protection after Installation:
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, including but not limited to environmental conditions,
which ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Remove when no longer needed.
Product Requirements
01 60 00-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Comply with manufacturers written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
Repair and restore damaged finished Work to its original condition. Repairing includes replacing
defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment.
Refer to Section 01 11 23 for storage and protection of Owner Purchased Products.
PRODUCT LABELS
Identifying product labels not permitted on products exposed to view in finished areas.
BIDDERS AND SUB-BIDDERS REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTE PRODUCT PRIOR TO RECEIPT OF
BIDS
For Products specified by naming one or more Products or manufacturer's and "or approved equal" or
"approved equivalent", submit to A/E a Substitution Request Form for substitutions prior to bidding for
any Product or manufacturer not specifically named. Utilize Substitution Request Form at end of this
Section.
Request for substitutions from any party other than the Bidder will not be considered.
CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S PRODUCT SELECTION OPTIONS
For Products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard.
For Products specified by naming only one Product and manufacturer, no substitute product will be
considered.
For Products specified by naming several Products or manufacturers select any one of the products or
manufacturers named, which complies with the specifications. No substitute product will be
considered.
SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the A/E
and in accordance with a Change Order.
The Contractor shall submit a Substitution Request Form for each product, supported with complete
data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
Comparison of qualities of the proposed substitutions with that specified.
Changes required in other elements of the Work because of the substitution.
Effect on the construction schedule.
Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the Product specified.
Any required license fees or royalties.
Availability of maintenance service and source of replacement materials.
Contractor's Representation:
A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor:
Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all
respects to that specified.
Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the Product specified.
Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and make such other
changes as may be required to make the work complete in all respects.
Product Requirements
01 60 00-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Waive all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become
apparent.
A/E will evaluate requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness and notify Owner in writing of
the A/E’s recommendation. The Owner shall be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed
substitution.
PRODUCT LISTS
Submit to A/E a complete list of major products proposed to be used, with the name of the
manufacturer and the installation subcontractor.
Should the Contractor fail to submit a complete list, the A/E will select from any product, system or
material specified or will select a Product to meet a referenced standard.
Comply with provisions of Section 01 11 23.
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
In addition to the requirements in labor and materials above, comply with the following:
Provide and maintain hoses and connections for water required in construction.
Provide electrical power extension cords and provide temporary lighting if required in addition to that
provided in Section 01 51 13.
Provide independent source of power or special circuits for large electrical motors (1/3 HP and up) and
welding equipment. Do not use temporary service system.
USE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED IN THE WORK
Obtain Owner's written permission to use completed portions of the Work prior to "Substantial
Completion" of the whole work.
Limit such use to essential facilities required to expedite completion of the Project.
Restore facilities used for temporary service to specified condition.
If use of permanent completed sanitary facilities is desired, limit use to two rooms (one for each sex).
Elevators may be used for material handling subject to Construction Manager and Owner approval.
Permanent electrical service shall not be used for motors larger than fractional HP, or for welding
equipment.
End of Section
Substitution Request Form follows this Section.
Product Requirements
01 60 00-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 71 23
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Contractor designated by the CM shall provide and pay for field engineering services required for
building location:
Land surveying services required to execute the Work, to include building location.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Conditions of the Contract
PROCEDURES
A property survey has been prepared for the Owner and has been bound with Contract Drawings.
Surveys shall describe physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the
Project, and a legal description of the site. If information is incomplete, notify Owner to furnish
additional information. Verify easement locations, front, side, and rear yard restrictions, if any; and
property line locations. Verify control points, and establish bench marks.
Verify locations of underground services, utilities, structures, etc., which may be encountered or
affected by the Work.
Protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve all permanent reference points during
construction.
Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to A/E. Report to A/E when any
reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in
grades or locations. Require land surveyor to replace Project control points which may be lost or
destroyed and establish replacements based on original survey control.
PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
If not already established, establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to
date, and established by survey control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on
Project Record Documents.
Establish two grid lines and bench marks, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate
means:
From time to time, verify layouts by same methods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Field Engineering
01 71 23-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 73 29
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Unless provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, all Contractors and Subcontractors shall be
responsible for cutting, patching, or fitting of their own Work as required to make its several parts fit
together, or to receive the Work of other Contractors and Subcontractors as shown or reasonably
implied by the Drawings and Specifications to complete the Work or to:
Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
Remove and replace defective Work.
Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
The Contractors shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed
construction of the Owner’s separate contractors or of other Contractors by cutting, patching or
otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. Contractors and Subcontractors shall not cut or
otherwise alter such construction by the Owner, Owner’s separate contractor or of other Contractors
except with written consent of the CM, Owner and such other Contractors; such consent shall not be
unreasonably withheld. Contractors and Subcontractors shall not unreasonably withhold from the other
Contractors, Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's and Subcontractors consent to cutting or
otherwise altering the Work.
Contractor designated by the CM shall provide required openings larger than six (6) inches in diameter
in structural work for other Contractors and Subcontractors, including structural support; provided that
Contractor and Subcontractor has furnished sizes, locations, sleeves, etc., prior to execution of the
Work.
Definition: Structural work includes load bearing walls and partitions, wood trusses, suspended slabs,
beams, masonry partitions, floors and roofs.
Contractors and Subcontractors shall provide openings for installation of their work, unless specified or
indicated on the Drawings otherwise. Openings in masonry or concrete work less than six (6) inches in
diameter shall be cored by Contractor or Subcontractor. Coring not permitted in locations that will
endanger the capacity of the structure.
Protection:
Do no torch cutting adjacent to or within occupied areas of the Project without prior approval of the CM,
A/E and Owner. Upon approval, use all means necessary to protect the occupants, from hazards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSPECTION
Cutting and Patching
01 73 29-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Inspect existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during
cutting and patching.
After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of Products, or performance of Work.
Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the CM and A/E in writing; do not proceed with
Work until CM and A/E has provided further instructions.
PREPARATION
Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected
portion of Work.
Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project that may be exposed by cutting and
patching work, and maintain excavations free from water.
PERFORMANCE
Execute cutting and demolition by methods that will prevent damage to other work, and will provide
proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.
Execute excavating and backfilling by methods that will prevent settlement or damage to other work,
and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.
Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for:
Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
Sight-exposed finished surfaces.
Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified
products, functions, tolerances, and finishes.
Restore work that has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed Work in accord
with requirements of Contract Documents.
Fit work tightly to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. Firestop wall
or floor fire separation penetrations with products specified in Section 07 84 00.
Seal penetration perimeters in "sound insulated" partitions with acoustical sealant specified in Section
09 29 00.
Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:
For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
End of Section
Cutting and Patching
01 73 29-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 74 00
CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall comply with requirements specified in this Section.
Throughout the construction period, maintain the buildings and site in a standard of cleanliness as
described in this Section.
If Contractor or Subcontractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the CM may do
so with the Owner’s approval and the cost thereof shall be charged to Contractor or Subcontractor.
It is the intent of CM to recycle as much of the construction waste as possible. To do this, we need to
have participation from everyone onsite Contractor and Subcontractor. This includes all contractors,
subcontractors and suppliers that are onsite. The following items can be recycled to reduce the waste
brought to local landfill.
Concrete, block, and brick can be broken up and used as fill on site, or used for road base or fill on
sights nearby. Contractors responsible for creating the debris are responsible to haul within the site to
the designated stockpiling area. The Excavation Contractor will be responsible to haul this material
offsite to the nearest recycling company.
Steel and metals can be recycled. The CM will provide a steel dumpster.
Paper/cardboard can be recycled. The CM will provide Paper/cardboard dumpster. The cardboard will
have to be broken down as it is loaded into the dumpster.
Plastic can be recycled. The CM an extra container to house the plastic. This includes bottles, plastic
banding, and the clear wrap from packaging.
Wood can be recycled. The CM will provide a separate dumpster.
Drywall can be recycled.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with all requirements for cleaning-up as
described in other Sections of these Specifications.
Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls; debris control
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Inspection: Conduct daily inspection of your Work areas, and more often if necessary, to verify that
requirements of cleanliness are being met.
Codes and Standards: In addition to the standards described in this Section, comply with all pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Cleaning and Waste Management
01 74 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Provide all required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specified standard of
cleanliness.
COMPATIBILITY
Use only the cleaning materials and equipment that are compatible with the surface being cleaned, as
recommended by the manufacturer of the material or as approved by the A/E.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PROGRESS CLEANING
General:
Retain all stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding drainage or
traffic, and providing the required protection of materials.
Do not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris, waste materials, and other items not required for
construction of Work.
At least weekly, and more often if necessary to maintain a clean and safe work site, completely remove
all scraps, debris, and waste material from the designated holding area on the job site. Provide
adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the job site, and observe all requirements for fire
protection and protection of the ecology.
Project Site:
Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material.
Remove all such items to the designated recycling area.
Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials stored on the site; restack,
tidy, or otherwise service all arrangements to meet the requirements noted above: (Progress cleaning
general).
Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times.
Building Work Areas:
Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect work areas and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste
material; remove to designated recycling area.
Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep all work areas clean. "Clean", for the purpose of this
subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being
removed by use of reasonable effort and handheld broom.
As required, preparatory to installation of succeeding material, clean the structures or pertinent portions
thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material,
using all equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness.
Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean finish floors daily (and more often if necessary)
at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials have been installed.
"Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from all foreign
material which, in the opinion of the A/E, may be injurious to the finish floor material.
FINAL CLEANING
Construction Manager or Contractor designated by the CM shall be responsible for final cleaning.
Cleaning and Waste Management
01 74 00-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Definition: Except as otherwise specifically provided, "clean" (for the purpose of this Paragraph) shall
be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using
commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials.
General:
Prior to completion of the Work, remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap,
debris, and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning as described in PROGRESS CLEANING above.
Project Site:
Unless otherwise specifically directed by the A/E broom clean all paved areas on the site and all public
paved areas directly adjacent to the site. Completely remove all resultant debris.
Building Work Areas:
Exterior: Visually inspect all exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste material, smudges,
and other foreign matter. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. If
necessary to achieve a uniform degree of exterior cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure.
In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, the A/E may require light sandblasting or other
cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner.
Interior: Visually inspect all interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste, material, smudges,
and other foreign matter. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. Remove all
paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces. Use only the specified cleaning
materials and equipment.
Glass: Clean all glass, all faces.
Polished Surfaces: To all surfaces requiring the routine application of buffed polish, apply the polish
recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished.
Timing: Schedule final cleaning as approved by the A/E to enable the Owner to accept a completely
clean project.
Miscellaneous Cleaning:
Clean all fixtures and equipment of every description, concealed or exposed to view, interior and
exterior.
Remove all markings, labels, and stickers not intended or suitable for permanent identification.
Use whatever means necessary to thoroughly clean all piping, ductwork, tanks, pumps, fans, motors,
and all equipment of every description provided as part of your Contract.
Clean, drain, and flush all piping systems, connected accessories and equipment.
Clean and polish or otherwise leave visible all identification plates, devices, etc.
End of Section
Cleaning and Waste Management
01 74 00-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Substantial completion.
Final completion.
Reinspection fees.
Closeout submittals.
Adjustment of accounts.
Application for final payment.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
Section 01 78 23: Operation and Maintenance Data
Section 01 78 36: Warranties and Bonds
Section 01 78 39: Project Record Documents
Respective Sections of Specifications: Closeout submittals for work of the Section.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Contractors shall substantially complete and put into service portions of the Work as contractually
required and/or as designated by the Owner in order to facilitate completion of the Project as a whole.
For warranty conditions, refer to Section 01 78 36.
Maintenance of equipment or component parts of equipment so placed into service shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor until Substantial Completion of the whole Work of the Contract.
Proceed as follows when Contractor considers the Work (or designated portion thereof) Substantially
Complete:
Contractor and Construction Manager shall jointly prepare and submit written notice to the A/E
with a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected.
Within a reasonable time, the A/E assisted by the CM will make a review to determine status of
completion.
Should CM or A/E determine that Work is not substantially complete, the CM will promptly notify
Contractor in writing, giving the reasons therefore.
Contractor shall remedy deficiencies, and send a second written notice of substantial completion,
and A/E assisted by the CM will make another review of the Work.
When A/E determines that Work is substantially complete, he will prepare a Certificate of
Substantial Completion in accordance with the General Conditions.
FINAL COMPLETION
A/E will consider Closeout Submittals within 10 days after date of Substantial Completion of the whole
Work.
When Contractor considers Work is complete, he shall submit written certification that:
Closeout Procedures
01 77 00-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and deficiencies
listed with Certificates of Substantial Completion have been corrected.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representative and are
operational.
5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
A/E will review to verify status of completion with reasonable promptness.
Should A/E determine that Work is incomplete or defective, he will promptly notify CM in writing, listing
incomplete or defective work.
Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy deficiencies and send a second written certification
that Work is complete, and A/E will review the Work.
REINSPECTION FEES
Should A/E perform additional reviews due to failure of Work to comply with claims made by the
Contractor, Owner will compensate A/E for such additional services, and have the option to deduct the
amount of such compensation from final payment to the Contractor.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:
1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificates of Inspection.
Project Record Documents: In accordance with Section 01 78 39.
Operation and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel: In accordance with Section
01 78 23.
Warranties and Bonds: In accordance with Section 01 78 36.
Keys and Keying Schedule: In accordance with Section 08 71 00.
Evidence of Payment of Debts and Claims and Release of Liens: Utilize AIA Documents G706 and
G706A.
Consent of Surety to Final Payment: Utilize AIA Document G707.
Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations: In accordance with Supplementary
Conditions.
APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
Submit Application for Final Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements in Conditions of
the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Closeout Procedures
01 77 00-2

1
2
3
Not Used.
End of Section
Closeout Procedures
01 77 00-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Contractors are to submit product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance
and operation of Products furnished under Contract to the Construction Manager. Prepare operating
and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent Sections of the
Specifications. Construction Manager shall compile the information and turnover to the Owner.
Construction Manager shall ensure Contractors instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of Products,
and in operation of equipment and systems.
Contractors shall also submit all information required electronically to the Construction Manager.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
Section 01 77 00: Closeout Procedures
Section 01 78 36: Warranties and Bonds
Section 01 78 39: Project Record Documents
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:
Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.
Familiar with requirements of this Section.
Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data.
Skilled as drafters competent to prepare required drawings.
FORM OF SUBMITTALS
Prepare and arrange product data and related information in form of an Instructional Manual for use by
Owner's personnel.
Manual Format:
Size: 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches.
Paper: 20 pound minimum, white for typed pages.
Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
Drawings: Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. Fold larger drawings to size
of text pages.
Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment.
Provide indexed tabs.
Cover:
Identify each volume with typed or printed title "MATERIALS AND FINISHES", or "EQUIPMENT
AND SYSTEMS", as applicable. List:
Title of Project.
Identity of general subject matter covered in Manual.
Binders:
Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
‘D’ Ring Size: 1-inch minimum, 2-inch maximum.
When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings.
Operation and Maintenance Data
01 78 23-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Content Format:
Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume arranged in CSI/CSC MASTERFORMAT
2004 Edition Major Division order.
Construction Manager, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
List each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume.
List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
Contractor, Subcontractor, installer or maintenance contractor, as appropriate, and identify
area of responsibility of each.
Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract
Documents.
Product Data:
Include only those sheets that are pertinent to the specific product.
Annotate each sheet to:
Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
Delete references to inapplicable information.
Drawings:
Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
Relations of component parts of equipment to systems.
Control and flow diagrams.
Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration
of completed installation.
Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance Drawings.
Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
Copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued.
Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel give:
Proper procedures in event of failure.
Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
Submit to A/E three copies of completed manual in final form.
Content - For architectural products, applied materials, and finishes:
Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
Catalog number, size, composition.
Color and texture designations.
Information required for re-ordering special manufactured products.
Instructions for care and maintenance.
Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product.
Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
Content - For moisture-protection and weather-exposed products:
Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
Applicable standards.
Chemical composition.
Detail of installation.
Operation and Maintenance Data
01 78 23-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
Additional requirements for maintenance data: Respective sections for Specifications.
Provide complete information for products specified in the Specifications listed under your Contract.
MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
Submit to A/E three copies of completed manual in final form.
Content - For each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
Description of unit and component parts.
Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
Operating procedures:
Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulations, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions.
Summer and winter operating instructions.
Special operation instructions.
Maintenance Procedures:
Routine operations.
Guide to "trouble-shooting"
Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
Alignment, adjusting and checking.
Servicing and lubrication schedule.
List of lubrication required.
Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for
maintenance.
Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
Each contractor's coordination drawings.
As-installed color coded piping diagrams.
Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve.
List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturers current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications.
Content - For each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
Description of system and component parts.
Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
Circuit directories of panelboards.
Electrical service.
Controls.
Communications.
As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
Operating Procedures:
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Sequences required.
Special operating instructions.
Maintenance Procedures:
Routine operations.
Guide to "trouble-shooting".
Disassembly, repair, and reassembly.
Adjustment and checking.
Operation and Maintenance Data
01 78 23-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. List of original manufacturer's spare
parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. Other
data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications.
Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction
of Owner's personnel.
Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective Sections for Specifications.
Provide complete information for products specified in the Specifications listed under your Contract.
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
Submit to A/E two copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents prior to start
of Work.
A/E will review draft and return one copy with comments.
Submit to A/E one copy of completed data in final form 15 days prior to final inspection or acceptance.
Copy will be returned after final inspection or acceptance, with comments.
Submit specified number of copies of approved product data in final form 10 days after final inspection
or acceptance.
INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance
personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems.
Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction.
Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and
maintenance.
Refer to respective Sections of Specifications for more specific instruction procedures and
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Operation and Maintenance Data
01 78 23-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 78 36
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Construction Manager shall:
Compile specified warranties and bonds.
Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
Co-execute submittals when so specified.
Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
Submit to A/E for review and transmittal to Owner.
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
Instructions to Bidders: Bid Bonds will be required
Conditions of the Contract:
Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond will be required
General Warranty of Construction
Section 01 77 00: Closeout Procedures
Section 01 78 23: Operation and Maintenance Data
Each respective Section of the Specifications as listed below: Warranties and Bonds required for
specific products, and duration.
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, executed jointly or severally as
specified by the Contractor, Subcontractor, Manufacturer, and Suppliers.
Number of original signed copies required: Two each.
Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence.
Provide complete information for each item.
1. Product or work items.
2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
3. Scope.
4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract.
5. Duration of warranty, bond, or service maintenance contract.
6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
Proper procedure in case of failure.
Instances that might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, email address and telephone number.
FORM OF SUBMITTALS
Prepare in duplicate packets.
Format:
1. Digitally, and;
2. Size 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches, punch sheets for standard 3 ring binder. Fold larger sheets to
fit into binders.
Warranties and Bonds
01 78 36-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS".
4. List:
Title of Project
Name of Contractor
Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring (‘D’ type), with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
For equipment or component parts of equipment, put into service with Owner's permission during
progress of Work.
1. Submit documents within 10 days after inspection and the established Substantial Completion
date of that portion of the Work.
Otherwise make submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion of the whole Work, and
prior to final request for payment.
For portions of the Work, where final acceptance is unreasonably delayed through no fault of the Owner
beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance,
listing date of final acceptance as start of warranty period.
SUBMITTAL REQUIRED
Submit warranties, bonds, service and maintenance contracts as specified in respective Sections of the
Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Warranties and Bonds
01 78 36-2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Construction Manager shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one record copy of:
1. Drawings, Project Manual, Addenda, and Architect’s Supplemental Instructions
2. Required State approved Documents.
3. Construction schedule.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. A/E field orders or written instructions.
6. Approved Shop Drawings, product data and samples.
7. Field test records.
Contractors shall maintain at the site for review by the Construction Manager, as it relates to their work,
one record copy of:
1. Drawings, Project Manual, Addenda, and Architect’s Supplemental Instructions
2. Updated record drawings documenting as-built conditions
3. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
4. A/E field orders or written instructions.
5. Approved Shop Drawings, product data and samples
6. Field test and inspection reports
RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
Section 01 45 29: Testing Laboratory Services
MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
Store documents and samples in CM's field office apart from documents used for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples.
File documents and samples using CSI/CSC MASTERFORMAT 2004 Edition numbering system.
Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition, and in good order. Do not use record documents
for construction purposes.
Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Owner, A/E, and A/E's
Consultants.
MARKING DEVICES
Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code designated by A/E.
RECORDING
Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large printed letters.
Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
Drawings; Legibly mark to record actual construction:
1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
Project Record Documents
01 78 39-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to
permanent surface improvements.
3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to
visible and accessible features of the structure.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by Field Order or Change Order.
6. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
Specifications and Addenda; Legibly mark each Section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each Product and item of equipment
actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
Post Construction Schedule.
SUBMITTALS
At Contract Closeout, deliver Record Documents to A/E for the Owner.
Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number.
3. Construction Manager's name and address.
4. Title and number of each Record Document.
5. Signature of Construction Manager or his authorized representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
End of Section
Project Record Documents
01 78 39-2

SECTION 024000
DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Saw cutting, removal and off-site disposal of pavement.
B. Demolition and disposal of miscellaneous structures.
C. Remove and salvage or disposal of miscellaneous structures.
D. Removal, salvage and reinstallation of miscellaneous structures.
E. Utility line removal or abandonment.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions
B. Supplementary Conditions
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1. Section 201 - Clearing and Grubbing
2. Section 203 - Removing Old Culverts and Bridges
3. Section 204 - Removing or Abandoning Miscellaneous Structures
1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
PART 2
MATERIALS
Not Used
10731 DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING 024000-1

PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVALS, ABANDONMENT, SALVAGING, AND REINSTALLATION
A. Remove materials in accordance with WisDOT Section 204 except as modified
or supplemented herein.
1. Coordinate shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services with the
Engineer, Owner and Utility Company.
2. All pipes, culverts, manholes, etc. designated for removal or which
interfere with planned improvements shall be removed entirely, or if limits
are designated on the plans, to such limits.
3. Saw cut the edge of all pavements required to be removed. Wait to saw
cut pavement until the new pavement is ready to be installed to prevent
damage to the pavement's edge.
4. When performing removals, the Contractor shall not disturb any material
beyond required limits of work.
5. Dispose of all materials off-site, unless otherwise noted, and in
accordance with applicable authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall
not be buried on-site.
6. Coordinate salvage and delivery with the Owner's Representatives.
7. All disposals shall be performed in accordance with applicable authorities
having jurisdiction.
8. State regulations require that water service to the existing health care
center can be shut down for a maximum of 4-hours. Water service to the
existing health care center can only be shut down one time.
9. Coordinate new water main installation and testing, connections to
existing water mains, and removal of existing mains to ensure that the
existing health care center is without water for no longer than 4-hours.
3.2 SALVAGE AND REINSTALL
A. Signs:
1. In no case shall a traffic sign or street sign be removed or disturbed by
Contractor without prior notification being given to Engineer and then only
after satisfactory arrangements have been made for a temporary
installation or its disposition.
2. Remove and salvage all posts, A-frame angle brackets, stringers, nuts,
bolts, and washers.
10731 DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING 024000-2

3.4 PROTECTION
3. Exercise reasonable care against damage to in-place signs during
storage and installation.
4. Remove signs damaged during construction and replace with new signs.
A. Protecting adjacent structures and pavement from damage.
3.5 CLEANING AND RESTORATION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning the construction area
including all pavements and structures after completion of demolition work.
B. Any damage to adjacent pavements or structures shall be repaired by the
Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
10731 DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING 024000-3

SECTION 04 72 00
CAST STONE MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Architectural cast stone.
B. Units required are:
1. Exterior wall units, including sills.
2. Other items indicated on the drawings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting: Mortar for setting cast stone.
B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry.
C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Materials and execution methods for sealing soft joints in cast
stone work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International.
B. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete.
C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
D. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
E. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
F. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
G. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
H. ASTM C642 - Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete.
I. ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
J. ASTM C1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the
work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Test results of cast stone components made previously by the manufacturer.
C. Shop Drawings: To include the following:
1. Piece numbers.
2. Setting sequence, stone sizes and shapes.
3. Joint locations and arrangement.
4. Bonding details.
5. Anchor and insert types and connections to supporting structure.
6. Installation and anchoring methods.
10731 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00-1

D. Mortar Color Selection Samples.
E. Verification Samples: Pieces of actual cast stone components not less than 12 inches square,
illustrating range of color and texture to be anticipated in components furnished for the project.
F. Source Quality Control Test Reports.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute with a
minimum of 5 years of experience in producing cast stone of the types required for project and:
1. Adequate plant capacity to furnish quality, sizes, and quantity of cast stone required
without delaying progress of the work.
2. Products previously produced by plant and exposed to weather that exhibit satisfactory
appearance.
B. Mock-Up: Provide full size cast stone components for installation in mock-up of exterior wall.
1. Approved mock-up will become standard for appearance and workmanship.
2. Mock-up may remain as part of the completed work.
3. Remove mock-up not incorporated into the work and dispose of debris.
C. Source Quality Control: Test compressive strength and absorption of specimens selected at
random from plant production.
1. Test in accordance with ASTM C642.
2. Select specimens at rate of 3 per 500 cubic feet, with a minimum of 3 per production week.
3. Submit reports of tests by independent testing agency, showing compliance with
requirements.
D. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years successful experience in handling and installing
cast stone units on projects of comparable size and scope.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and
discoloration. Protect corners from damage.
B. Number each piece individually to match shop drawings and schedule.
C. Store cast stone components and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Store cast stone components on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under
covers to prevent condensation. Prevent contact with dirt.
E. Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking, or
other damage.
F. Store mortar materials where contamination can be avoided.
G. Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry
work to optimize on-site inventory and to avoid delaying the work.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Architectural Cast Stone:
1. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc., Shawnee, Kansas.
10731 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00-2

2. Custom Cast Stone Inc., Westfield, IN.
3. Edwards Precast Concrete Company, Dubuque, Iowa.
4. Any current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute.
2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE
A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural
limestone, complying with ASTM C1364.
1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C1364; calculate strength of pieces to be
field cut at 80 percent of uncut piece.
2. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by field experience.
3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface
blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet.
4. Color: Selected by Hoffman LLC from manufacturer's full range.
5. Color Variation:
a. Viewing Conditions: Compare in direct sunlight at 10 feet, between components of
similar age, subjected to comparable weathering conditions.
6. Maximum Variation: ASTM D 2244:
a. Hue: 2 units.
b. Lightness, Chroma and Hue Combined: 6 units.
7. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment.
B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings.
1. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide:
a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces.
b. Drips on projecting components, wherever possible.
c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in.
C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses;
comply with ACI 318.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150.
1. For Units: Type I, white or gray as required to match Hoffman LLC 's sample.
2. For Mortar: Type I or II.
B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone.
C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands.
D. Pigments: ASTM C979, inorganic iron oxides; do not use carbon black.
E. Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M.
F. Air Entrainment: Comply with ASTM C 260. Wet-cast mixtures shall contain 6% (+/-) 1% air
entrainment where surfaces are exposed to freeze-thaw conditions.
G. Water: Potable.
H. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M deformed bars, galvanized.
I. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185/A185M, galvanized.
J. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required
for conditions.
K. Mortar: Portland cement-lime, as specified in Section 04 05 11.
L. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05.
M. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence,
and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging
10731 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00-3

masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner
manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Factory Fabrication: Comply with Cast Stone Institute recommended fabricating practices.
B. Tolerances: Comply with Cast Stone Institute recommendations and the following:
1. Height and Width: Plus 1/16 inch; minus 1/8 inch.
2. Length:
a. Up to 2 feet, 0 inches: Plus 1/16 inch; minus 1/8 inch.
b. From 2 feet, 0 inches to 5 feet 0 inches: Plus 1/8 inch; minus 1/8 inch.
c. From 5 feet, 0 inches to 10 feet 0 inches: Plus 1/8 inch; minus 3/16 inch.
C. Design Mix: Compressive strength of 6,500 psi at 28 days, maximum 6 percent absorption.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine construction to receive cast stone components. Notify Hoffman LLC if construction is
not acceptable.
B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of
Section 04 20 00.
B. Mechanically anchor cast stone units indicated; set remainder in mortar.
C. Setting:
1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation.
2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fill vertical joints with mortar.
4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout.
D. Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed.
1. Rake mortar joints 3/8 inch for sealant. Scrub face of each stone to remove excess mortar
before it sets.
2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints.
E. Sealant Joints:
1. Sealant Joints: Install sealants as specified in Section 07 90 05.
2. Prime ends of Cast Stone components, insert properly sized foam backing rod, and install
sealant using sealant gun.
3.03 SETTTING TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.
B. Variation from Level: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch
maximum.
C. Variation in Joint Width: Not more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or 1/4 of nominal joint width,
whichever is less.
D. Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Not more than 1/16 inch difference
between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units.
E. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20
feet.
10731 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00-4

1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Repair methods and results subject to Hoffman LLC 's approval.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Remove and replace work that does not meet the specified tolerances and appearance
requirements.
B. Any cast stone that is broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged; work that does not
match approved samples or mock-up; and any work containing defective joints shall be removed
and replaced.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean completed exposed cast stone after mortar is thoroughly set and cured.
1. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaner.
2. Apply cleaner to cast stone in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
4. Do not use acidic cleaners.
END OF SECTION
10731 CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00-5

SECTION 05 40 00
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior wall sheathing.
B. Bridging, bracing, clips, accessories, fasteners and other materials.
C. Sealants.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and miscellaneous framing.
B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members.
C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
D. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud
framing.
E. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members; American Iron and Steel Institute. (replaced SG-971)
B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and
Metal Plaster Bases.
E. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
Sheathing.
F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.
G. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society.
H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing
system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and
firestopping.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the
work of this section.
C. Review the following as a minimum:
1. Status of shop drawings and submittals.
2. Project schedule and sequence.
3. Local, state, and federal safety regulations.
10731 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-1

4. Attachment of studs to structural framing systems.
5. Attachment of gypsum wall sheathing.
6. Coordination with other trades.
7. Installation requirements for specified materials.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish,
product criteria, limitations.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing
compliance with requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, bearing, anchorage, loading, and welds, and
accessories or items required of related work.
1. Indicate framing component layout.
2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for welded framing connections.
3. Provide Design Engineer's stamp on shop drawings.
4. Provide calculations for loadings and stresses for structural members, stamped by a
Professional Structural Engineer.
5. Details of vertical movement devices and connection to framing and structure.
6. Methods of fastening framing members to each other and to adjacent materials and
structure.
7. Bearing and anchor points and anchor details.
8. Accessory products required for complete installation.
9. Prefabricated assemblies and special details.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special
attention.
F. Mill Certificates for each type structural framing member, indicating the following information:
1. Bare metal thickness of steel, measured to 1/1000 inch.
2. Yield strength of steel.
3. Tensile strength of steel.
4. Total elongation of steel in 2 inch gage length.
5. Chemical analysis of steel.
6. Thickness of galvanized coating, measured to 1/1000 inch.
G. Welder Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
the previous 12 months.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State in which project is located.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, and with minimum five years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years of experience.
D. Code Requirements: Comply with pertinent codes and regulations of agencies having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification
labels intact.
10731 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-2

B. Store materials protected from exposure to rain, snow or other harmful weather conditions, at
temperature and humidity conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. Clark Steel Inc; www.clarksteel.com
2. Dale Incor: www.daleincor.com
3. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.
4. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com.
5. Unimast, Inc: www.unimast.com.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM
A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,
fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.
B. Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics:
1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members
according to AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members.
2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design
loads for project conditions within required limits.
3. Design Loads: As indicated on the drawings.
4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/600 of span.
b. Design non-axial loadbearing framing to accommodate not less than 1/2 in vertical
deflection.
5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue
stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic
day/night temperature ranges.
6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members,
and clearances of intended openings.
C. Deliver to site in largest practical sections.
D. Behind masonry veneer, studs shall be minimum 16 gage and 16" o.c.
2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched
web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.
1. Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels, and as indicated on
drawings.
a. 18 gage and lighter: Minimum yield strength 33,000 psi.
b. 16 gage and heavier: Minimum yield strength 50,000 psi.
2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M G90/Z275 coating.
3. Studs to be continuously formed from single sections. No welded studs are permitted.
B. Furring: ASTM C 955; formed hat channel.
1. Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels, and as indicated on
drawings.
a. 20 gage and lighter: Minimum yield strength 26,000 psi.
2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating.
3. Studs to be continuously formed from single sections. No welded studs are permitted.
10731 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-3

2.04 WALL SHEATHING
A. Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum; ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, water-resistant core, square
long edges, 5/8 inch Type X fire-resistant.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dens-Glass Gold as manufactured by Georgia Pacific.
b. GlasRoc as manufactured by BPB America, Inc.
2. Size: Minimum 4'x8' panels.
3. Flame Spread: ASTM E 84; 0 maximum.
4. Smoke Developed: ASTM E 84; 0 maximum.
5. Warranty: Exposure to weather; 6 months, and manufacturing defects; 5 years.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions
encountered; finish to match framing components.
B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered;
finish to match framing components.
C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Air Infiltration Barrier: Woven polyolefin sheet, 0.005 inch thick, with a moisture vapor
transmission rate of 70 grams/sq. meter per ASTM E 96, procedure A and a flame spread not
exceeding 25 per ASTM E 84.
1. Provide the following:
a. Tyvek HouseWrap, DuPont Tyvek
E. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, track width, closed cell plastic foam from
continuous rolls.
F. Wall Sheathing Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS silicone sealant, compatible
with sheathing.
1. Dow Corning 795 Building Sealant.
G. Grout: Commercial, non-shrink cement grout; apply to bearing surfaces to ensure full contact of
bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry surfaces.
2.06 FASTENERS
A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM
A153/A153M.
1. Sheathing Screws: Type S or S-12, 1-1/4 inch long, #6 bugle head, self-tapping screws.
B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.
C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements,
including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of framing members.
B. Verify that bearing surfaces and supporting structures are ready to receive the work.
C. Verify that work by other trades is complete and accurate to the point where installation of the
framing can begin.
D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated in the drawings. Notify Hoffman LLC in writing of
any deviation between the drawings and actual conditions prior to starting work.
10731 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-4

E. Immediately notify Hoffman LLC of any discrepancies in the work, on the drawings or in the
specification that will interfere with the work.
F. Correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work.
G. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install components in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents, the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations, and approved shop drawings.
B. Install framing to support design loads and to accommodate movement of the primary building
structure and clearances of intended openings.
C. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
1. Cut framing members square for attachment to perpendicular members.
D. Field Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.3, and the following:
1. Stud-to-track connections: 1/2 inch fillet weld, full length of inside flange dimension, inside
each flange of stud onto track web, unless otherwise noted.
2. All other connections: Flat, plug, butt, or seam.
3. Minimum steel thickness for welded connections: 18 gage.
E. Field Fastening: Use minimum 2 self-tapping metal screws per connection, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Framing: Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, shop drawings,
and requirements of ASTM C 1007.
1. Provide for erection stresses; provide temporary bracing as construction activities progress.
2. Erect load bearing components in single piece full length; splicing of load bearing
components is prohibited.
3. Brace and reinforce load bearing assemblies as indicated or required for full design strength.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints and control joints with framing members; frame both
sides of joints independently.
H. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.
I. Touch up damaged coating surfaces; use specified primer.
3.03 EXTERIOR WALLS - NON-AXIALLY LOADED
A. Install horizontal bridging, using the following:
1. Cold-rolled steel channel, fastened to web of stud by a piece of angle of same thickness as
the framing member.
B. Space bridging as indicated but not less than 48 inches on center if no supporting calculations
are provided.
C. Structural Movement Isolation: Isolate wall framing from building structure to prevent transfer of
vertical loads while providing lateral support, using one of the following methods attached to
continuous angles or supplementary framing anchored to the building structure:
1. Vertical slide clips.
2. Deep leg slip track.
3.04 WALL SHEATHING
A. Install sheathing in accordance with ASTM C 1280 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws.
10731 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-5

C. Secure gypsum wall sheathing with specified screws, at the following spacings:
1. Panel Edges: 7 inches on center.
2. Intermediate Supports: 7 inches on center.
D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into
facing.
E. Fit boards tightly against each other and around openings.
F. Install solid metal blocking where end joints do not bear against framing sills or plates.
3.05 JOINT AND PENETRATION TREATMENT
A. Seal sheathing joints according to manufacturer's written recommendations for short term
exposure.
B. Seal all joints, penetrations, openings and cover all heads of fasteners with specified sealant.
C. Trowel sealant flat so all joints, penetrations, openings and fasteners are completely covered.
3.06 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER
A. Cover wall sheathing with air-infiltration barrier in compliance with manufacturer's printed
directions.
B. Apply air-infiltration barrier to cover window nailing flanges and upstanding flashing with 4-inch
overlap.
C. Weather lap edges and ends as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Tape punctures and seams with tape acceptable to barrier manufacturer.
3.07 CLEANUP
A. Cleanup, remove from the site, and legally dispose of all materials related to work in this section.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: Maximum 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Variation from Level: Maximum 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
C. Variation from True Plane: Maximum 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
D. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
10731 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-6

SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop fabricated steel items.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.
B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
C. Section 05 12 00: Structural steel column anchor bolts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless.
C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
D. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile
Strength.
E. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength.
F. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile
Strength (Metric).
G. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
H. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society.
I. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.
J. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings.
K. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast; Society for Protective Coatings (Part of Steel Structures
Painting Manual, Vol. Two).
L. SSPC (PM2) - Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and Specifications; Steel Structures Painting
Council.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details
where applicable.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
2. Submit manufacturer's data on primer.
10731 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-1

C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to local, state, and federal regulations for use of domestically produced materials when
required.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar
to that shown on the drawings, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units
without causing delay in the work.
C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 and D1.3.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original unopened packaging.
B. Store materials in a protected area and in a manner to prevent damage.
C. Do not install damaged materials. Remove damaged materials from site.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by
accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings.
B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
C. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, guarantee dimensions
and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate construction
to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for
trimming and fitting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
C. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1.
E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: High solids, rust inhibitive, interior-exterior alkyd primer, 51%
solids by volume, similar to Devguard 4160 as manufactured by ICI Devoe Coatings.
G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;
10731 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-2

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
10731 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-4

SECTION 06 20 00
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. All finish carpentry items keynoted 06 20 00.
B. Wood door frames, glazed frames.
C. Wood casings and moldings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work.
B. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
C. Section 08 14 33 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors.
D. Section 08 52 00 - Wood Windows.
E. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing:
F. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.
G. Section 12 35 30 - Residential Casework: Shop fabricated cabinet work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard.
B. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
C. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood
Plywood & Veneer Association.
D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association.
E. NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; National
Hardwood Lumber Association.
F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood.
G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce).
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated
and adjacent components.
B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.
C. Samples:
10731 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1

1. Submit two samples of each type and species of wood trim 12 inch long, including finish.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Grade materials in accordance with the following:
1. Softwood Lumber: In accordance with rules certified by ALSC; www.alsc.org.
2. Plywood: Certified by the American Plywood Association.
3. Hardwood Lumber Grading: NHLA G-101.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
C. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with
minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect work from moisture damage.
B. Store millwork and components in a ventilated space, with a relative humidity range of 20% to
40%.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.
B. Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards Illustrated for Premium grade.
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.03 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, for lumber.
B. Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1.
1. Core: Veneer.
2. Grade: A-B.
3. Face Species: Douglas fir.
C. Hardwood Plywood: Comply with HPVA HP-1.
1. Core: Veneer.
2. Grade: A-B.
3. Face Species: Maple.
2.04 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Hardwood Trim: Provide finished lumber and moldings that comply the following:
1. Species and Cut: Rift-sawn, clear, kiln-dried red oak, selected for compatible grain and
color.
2. Texture: Surfaced smooth, sanded.
2.05 FASTENINGS
A. Nails, Screws, and Other Anchoring Devices: Type, size, material, and finish required for
application.
B. Galvanized Fasteners: Provide galvanized anchors and fasteners in areas of high interior
humidity and exterior applications.
10731 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-2

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber species.
B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.
C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection.
C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
D. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16 inch radius.
E. Ease edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8 inch radius.
2.08 FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and
is of type recommended for the applicable finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
C. Do not proceed with installations if unsatisfactory conditions exist. Start of work in this section
indicates acceptance of substrate tolerances and conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards
requirements for grade indicated.
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
D. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
E. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is required.
F. Dowel plugs to be same species as required for components.
G. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION - STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Install trim with a minimum number of joints as practical, using full length pieces from maximum
10731 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-3

lengths of lumber. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary.
B. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at
corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact across joint.
C. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane the backs of casings to provide uniform thickness
across joints, if required.
D. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
E. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or
warping.
F. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
3.05 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B. Site Finishing: See Section 09 90 00.
C. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with
cementitious materials.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
10731 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-4

SECTION 06 41 00
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B. Cabinet hardware.
C. Factory finishing.
D. Preparation for installing utilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B. Section 12 36 00 - Countertops.
C. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.
D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for casework.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit Body Open Interiors: Any storage unit surface without solid door or drawer fronts and units
with glass sliding or glass framed doors.
B. Unit Body Closed Interiors: Any storage unit surface behind solid door or drawer fronts.
C. Unit Body Exposed Side: Any storage unit exterior side surface that is visible.
D. Concealed Surfaces: Any surface not normally visible after installation.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard.
B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards.
C. AWI P-200 - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards; Architectural Woodwork Institute.
D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
E. GSA CID A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber; Federal Specifications and
Standards.
F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association.
G. PS 1 - Structural Plywood.
H. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce).
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before
starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
10731 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-1

B. Shop Drawings: Submit 5 sets of shop drawings for laminate clad casework and countertops
showing layout, elevations, ends, cross-sections, service run spaces, and location of services.
Show details and location of anchorages.
1. Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows, and other building
components.
2. Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint
details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes.
D. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls and hinges, demonstrating hardware
design, quality, and finish.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with quality.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a
minimum of five years experience.
1.08 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet and wall cabinet, including hardware.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
B. Deliver laminate clad casework and countertops only after wet operations in building are
completed.
C. Store completed laminate clad casework and countertops in a ventilated place, protected from
the weather, with relative humidity range of 20% to 50%.
D. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep
covered with a protective covering.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions
in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. All materials and workmanship covered by work in this section shall carry a three (3) year
warranty from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hinges:
1. Blum.
2. Salice.
B. Adjustable Cabinet Shelf Supports:
10731 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-2

1. Bainbridge.
C. Adjustable Wall-Mounted Shelf Supports:
1. Knape and Vogt Mfg. Co.
D. Locks:
1. National Cabinet Lock.
2. Timberline.
E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 CABINETS
A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.
2.03 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.04 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; standard, composed of wood chips, density, made with; of grade
to suit application; sanded faces, located as follows:
B. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, grade, thick, smooth sides, located as follows:
2.05 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.
3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific
applications.
C. Provide specific types as scheduled.
1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as
scheduled, finish as scheduled.
2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled,
finish as scheduled.
3. Post-Formed Horizontal Surfaces: HGP, 0.039 inch nominal thickness, through color,
colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled.
4. Post-Formed Vertical Surfaces: VGP, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors
as scheduled, finish as scheduled.
5. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled,
finish as scheduled.
6. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to
concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.
D. Plastic Edging:
1. 3 mm PVC Banding: Machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive, edges machine
profiled to 1/8" radius for safety.
2. 2 mm PVC Banding: Machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive, edges machine
profiled to 1/8" radius for safety.
3. 1 mm PVC Banding: Machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive.
4. Extruded PVC Plastic: Of design to hold and trim glass in framed doors.
5. PVC Colors: Selected from Manufacturers standard and custom color range.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
10731 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-3

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.
B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
C. Countertop Supports: Brackets, legs and miscellaneous metal parts shall be furniture steel,
welded, degreased, cleaned, treated and powder painted in color as selected.
D. Rubber Bumpers: Provide resilient rubber bumpers on all doors and drawers to prevent
laminate to laminate contact.
E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
F. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.
G. Resins: No added urea-formaldehyde resins.
2.07 HARDWARE
A. Hinges: Blum, full overlay type with mounting plate for clip-on style hinge with 125 degree
swing and self-closing. The number of hinges per door shall be as follows:
1. Door Height 0"-36": 2 hinges per door.
2. Door Height 37"-62": 3 hinges per door.
3. Door Height 63"-80": 4 hinges per door.
B. Adjustable Cabinet Shelf Supports:
1. Injection molded polycarbonate, clear color to blend with selected interior finish, friction fit
into cabinet end panels and vertical dividers, readily adjustable on 32mm centers.
2. Each shelf support shall have two (2) integral support pins, 5mm diameter, to interface
predrilled holes, and to prevent accidental rotation of support.
3. The supports shall be automatically adaptable to 3/4 inch or 1 inch thick shelving and shall
provide non-tip feature for shelving.
4. Design supports that readily permit field fixing of shelf if desired.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, bronze with satin finish, 4 inch centers.
D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, disc tumbler cylinder cam type for overlay cabinet construction,
two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.
1. Verify with Owner key schedule and cylinder designations.
2. Key to be removable in locked and unlocked position.
E. Catches: Magnetic.
F. Drawer Slides:
1. Type: Full extension.
2. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Stops: Integral type.
5. Finish: Epoxy finish.
6. Warranty: Life time warranty as offered by slide manufacturer.
7. Pencil drawers shall be equipped with K.V. No. 8250 for under counter or support frame
mounting.
8. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Product BS 430E: www.knapeandvogt.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
G. Heavy Duty Soft-Down Stay-Heavy Duty
1. Heavy duty soft-down stay designed to securely latch a flap closed and hold it in the fully
opened position.
2. Downward-opening flap for use with butt hinge
3. Made of plastic, & steel
10731 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-4

4. Nickel finish
5. Supplied with screws
6. Designed to be used in pairs
7. Torque calculation= door height x 1/2 x door weight
8. Heavy duty for 216-260 lbs per inch/pair
H. Concealed fasteners: Of type suitable for application at vanity valance.
2.08 SITE FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Stain, Shellac, Varnish and Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 09 90 00.
2.09 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than
one piece for any single length.
C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.
D. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
E. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly
bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.
F. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
G. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify
locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal cut edges.
2.10 FABRICATION - CABINETS
A. General:
1. Fabricate laminate clad casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown.
B. Cabinet Joinery:
1. Tops and bottoms shall be joined to cabinet ends using a minimum of six (6) dowels at
each joint for twenty-four (24) inch deep cabinets, and a minimum of four (4) dowels at
each joint for twelve (12) inch deep cabinets.
2. Dowels are to be industrial grade hardwood, laterally fluted, with chamfered ends and
minimum diameter of ten (10) millimeters.
3. Internal cabinet components such as fixed horizontals, rails and verticals are to be doweled
in place.
4. Dowels are to be securely glued and cabinets clamped under pressure during assembly to
assure secure joints and cabinet squareness.
C. Unit Door and Drawer Fronts:
1. Match style specified for section 12 35 30 - Residential Casework.
2. Fabricate using 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
3. Laminate exposed surface with high pressure decorative laminate VGS.
4. Laminate interior surfaces with cabinet liner CLS.
5. All edges shall be finished with 3mm PVC.
6. Double doors shall be used on all cabinets in excess of 24 inches in width.
7. Clearance between doors and drawers shall be 1/8" maximum.
D. Unit Body Open Interiors:
1. Exposed Cabinet Sides:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
10731 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-5

. Laminate both sides with high pressure decorative laminate VGS.
c. The front edge shall be edge-banded with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer
front edge color.
2. Unexposed Cabinet Sides:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate the interior with high pressure decorative laminate VGS and balanced with
high pressure backer BKL.
c. The front edge shall be edge-banded with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer
front edge color.
3. Unit Top or Sub-Top:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate with high pressure decorative laminate VGS and balanced with high pressure
backer BKL.
c. Front edge with 1mm PVC to match the door and drawer front edge color.
d. All sub-tops shall be full depth.
4. Bottom of Base:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate the interior with high pressure decorative laminate VGS, and balanced with
high pressure backer BKL.
c. Front edge with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer front edge color.
5. Fixed Intermediates: Meeting the following:
a. Fixed intermediates shall be 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate both sides with high pressure decorative laminate VGS.
c. Front edge with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer front edge color.
d. An intermediate will be provided on all units over 36 inches wide.
6. Exposed Back on Fixed or Movable Cabinets:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate with VGS on the interior and exterior.
7. Adjustable Shelves: Meeting the following:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard up to 27 inches wide and 1 inch thick
particleboard over 27 inches wide.
b. Laminate both sides with high pressure decorative laminate VGS.
c. Shelves shall be front edged only with 1 mm PVC to match the shelf color.
E. Unit Body Closed Interiors:
1. Exposed Cabinet Sides:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate the exterior with high pressure decorative laminate VGS.
c. Balance with high pressure cabinet liner CLS.
d. The front edge shall be edge-banded with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer
front edge.
2. Unexposed Cabinet Sides:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate both sides with CLS in neutral color.
c. The front edge shall be edge-banded with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer
front edge color.
3. Unit Top or Sub top:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate both sides with CLS.
c. Front edge with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer front edge color.
d. Sink base units shall have a 3/4" front and rear stretcher in lieu of full sub top. Depth
of stretcher varies with sink size and location.
4. Bottom of Base and Wardrobe Units:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate both sides with CLS.
10731 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-6

c. Front edge with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer front edge color.
d. Sink cabinet bottoms shall be laminated both sides with CLS.
5. Fixed Intermediates:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate both sides with CLS.
c. Front edge with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer front edge color.
d. Provide an intermediate on all units over 36 inches wide.
6. Cabinet Unit Backs:
a. Fabricate with 3/8 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate with CLS on both sides in neutral color.
c. Exposed back on cabinet shall be 3/4 inch thick particleboard laminated with CLS on
the interior to match side color and VGS on the exterior.
d. Cabinet backs shall be fully housed into sides, top and bottom and recessed 7/8 inch
from cabinet rear.
e. Attach cabinet backs with waterproof hot melt adhesive.
7. Adjustable Shelves: Meeting the following:
a. Fabricate from 3/4 inch thick particleboard up to 27 inches wide and 1 inch thick
particleboard over 27 inches wide.
b. Laminate both sides with high pressure decorative laminate VGS.
c. Shelves shall be front edged only with 2 mm PVC to match the shelf color.
F. Wall Unit Bottom:
1. Open Interiors:
a. Units with open interiors shall be fabricated from 3/4 inch thick particleboard for units
up to 27" wide. Fabricate from 1 inch thick particleboard for units over 27" wide.
b. Laminate with high pressure decorative laminate VGS on the inside.
c. Laminate the outside with CLS, neutral color to match adjacent unit bottom.
2. Closed Interiors:
a. Units with closed interiors shall be fabricated from 3/4 inch thick particleboard for units
up to 27" wide. Fabricate from 1 inch thick particleboard for units over 27" wide.
b. Laminate both sides with CLS in neutral color.
3. Front Edges: Edge-banded with 1 mm PVC to match the door and drawer front edge color.
4. Exposed Bottom Edge: Edge band each cabinet side with 1 mm PVC.
G. Wall and Tall Unit Tops:
1. The top edge of all wall and tall unit end panels shall be factory edged with 1 mm PVC in
neutral color.
2. Raw edges at top of wall and tall end panels shall not be permitted.
3. Top shall be laminated with CLS in neutral color to match interior.
H. Drawers:
1. Sides, Back and Sub-Front:
a. Fabricate from 1/2 inch thick particleboard.
b. Laminate with CLS in neutral color.
c. Back and sub-front are to be butt jointed, glued with melamine glue, and pinned.
2. Drawer bottoms shall be 3/8 inch thick particleboard, laminated with CLS both sides in
neutral color.
3. Drawer bottom shall be fully housed in back, sub front and sides, recessed 1/2 inch, and
attached with waterproof hot melt adhesive.
4. Reinforce drawer bottoms with intermediate spreaders.
5. Paper storage drawers constructed the same as noted above with retaining hood at the rear
of each drawer.
6. Painted finish on drawer sides and/or bottom will not be permitted.
I. Bases:
1. Shall be of ladder type construction at front, back and sides with intermediates to form
10731 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-7

2.11 FACTORY FINISHING
secure and level top and side surfaces to attach units.
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
D. Finish work in accordance with AWI P-200 - Section 1500 System #1.
E. Seal, stain and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Spray apply only.
F. Seal stain and varnish internal exposed to view and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only.
G. Seal internal surfaces of cabinets with one coat of shellac. Brush apply only.
H. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
C. Do not proceed with installation if unsatisfactory conditions exist at project site and notify
contractor in writing of conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Condition laminate clad casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas
prior to installing.
3.03 INSTALLATION - CABINETS
A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not
use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species
to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust installed work.
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
B. Protect installed work from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
10731 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-8

SECTION 06 42 16
WOOD-VENEER PANELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Custom wood veneer paneling.
B. Solid wood panel trim.
C. Site finishing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards.
B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural
Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before
starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of finished plywood, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating wood grain
and specified finish.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim, 12 inch long.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Paneling: In accordance with AWI P-200, Premium Grade.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect work from moisture damage.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install paneling when temperature or humidity conditions may have a detrimental affect
on paneling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELING
A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.
2.02 WOOD-BASED MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS
10731 WOOD-VENEER PANELING 06 42 16-1

A. Hardwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated,
Custom quality; maple species, rift sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with flat
grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.04 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Plywood: Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated,
Custom quality; veneer core, type of glue recommended for application; oak face species, rift
sliced; of grain quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.05 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized finish in concealed locations and
galvanized finish in exposed locations.
B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Wood Filler: Tinted to match surface finish color.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Custom quality, of Flush design.
B. Fabricate panels with book matching between adjacent leaves.
C. Shop prepare and identify panels for grain matching during site erection.
D. Prepare panels for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
E. Finish exposed edges of panels as specified by grade requirements.
F. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for
full length only.
G. Grain match adjacent sheets to book matching.
H. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting and
scribing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards
requirements for grade indicated.
B. Do not begin installation until wood materials have been fully acclimated to interior conditions.
C. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level, using concealed fasteners
wherever possible.
D. Where necessary to cut and fit on site, scribe work abutting other components. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal gaps.
E. Coordinate the installation of firestopping behind paneling.
3.03 PREPARATION FOR FIELD FINISHING
10731 WOOD-VENEER PANELING 06 42 16-2

A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09 90 00.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
10731 WOOD-VENEER PANELING 06 42 16-3

SECTION 06 63 10
VINYL POSTS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Railing system.
B. Posts.
C. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking within walls for wall-mounted items.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2001a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: installation
procedures.
C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports.
D. Selection Samples: Two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of
available colors and patterns.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard 25 year warranty against defects in material and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Pacific Columns, Inc.: www.pacificcolumns.com
B. Railing Dynamics Inc.: www.rdirail.com
C. Royal Outdoor Products: www.royalcrownltd.com
D. Superior Column: www.superioraluminum.com
E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
10731 VINYL POSTS AND RAILINGS 06 63 10-1

2.02 RAILING
A. Railing: Extruded vinyl, pre-assembled structural railing system.
1. Assembly to include installation kit.
B. Top Railing: Extruded vinyl with aluminum core insert.
1. Style: Standard.
2. Color: White.
C. Bottom Railing: Section lengths of 8 feet, extruded vinyl with aluminum core insert.
1. Color: White.
D. Balusters: Extruded vinyl, 36 inches high.
2.03 POSTS
A. Intermediate Posts: Polyethylene shell surrounding galvanized steel pipe and polyurethane
foam filling; durable; low maintenance; complies with ASTM A 500.
1. Pacific Columns: Interior - "Endura-Craft" square non-tapered paneled profile - Project 3
2. Exterior - "Endura-Craft square non-tapered paneled profile (on brick base) - Project 3
3. Exterior - "Endura-Stone" Plain with pedestal base (freestanding porch column) - Project 2
& 3
4. Royal Outdoor Products: Interior - 5" Colonial Vinyl Column (2-4 interior porch location) -
Project 1
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Provide necessary hardware and fasteners for a complete installation of railing.
1. Provide support blocks per manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Hoffman LLC of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.
D. Field measure spaces where units are to be installed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install railing and post units level, plumb, and straight, securely and rigidly fastened, without
visible evidence of cutting, drilling, or patching.
C. Install units with minimal joints between components.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products at the direction of the Architect before the date of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 VINYL POSTS AND RAILINGS 06 63 10-2

SECTION 06 65 00
PLASTIC SIMULATED WOOD TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. PVC columns, brackets, louvers and accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.
B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods, including fastener types and nailing patterns.
C. Samples: Submit verification samples for each profile specified, minimum 6 inches long,
representing actual product and finish.
D. Certification: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Handle materials to prevent damage to product edges and corners.
C. Coordinate work with other operations and installation of trim to avoid damage to installed
materials.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum
results.
1. Comply with manufacturer's written installation guidelines to accommodate thermal
expansion and contraction.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Warranted to the original Owner under normal and proper use to be free of manufacturing
defects for the lifetime of the installation including labor for the first two years after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fypon - www.accentbuildingproducts.com/cgi-bin/accent/fypon/pvc-column-wraps.html
B. First Class Building Products - www.firstclassbp.com
C. HB&G PERMAWrap Columns - www.hbgcolumns.com
D. Melton Classics - www.meltonclassics.com
E. Pacific Columns, Inc. - www.pacificcolumns.com
F. Spectis moulders Inc. - www.spectis.com
10731 PLASTIC SIMULATED WOOD TRIM 06 65 00-1

G. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.02 MATERIAL
A. General: Free foam cellular PVC material produced from PVC resin with a small-cell
microstructure and density of .55 grams/cm^3.
B. Physical Properties:
1. Density: 0.57 grams per cubic centimeter.
2. Water Absorption: Less than or equal to 1 percent per ASTM D 570.
3. Tensile Strength: 2256 psi per ASTM D 638.
4. Tensile Modulus: 144,000 psi per ASTM D638.
5. Flexural Strength: 3329 psi per ASTM D790
6. Flexural Modulus: 144,219 psi per ASTM D 790.
7. Nail Hold: 35 Lbf/in of penetration per ASTM D1761.
8. Screw Hold: 680 Lbf/in of penetration per ASTM D1761.
9. Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 3.2 x 10-5 in/in/degree F per ASTM D 696.
10. Flame Spread Index: 25; self extinguishing; will not burn once active flame source is
removed.
C. Tolerances:
1. Variation in Component Length: Minus 0.00 inches, plus 1.00 inch.
2. Variation in Component Width: Plus or minus 1/32 inch.
3. Variation in Component Thickness: Plus or minus 1/32 inch.
4. Variation in Component Edge Cut: Plus or minus 2 degrees.
5. Variation in Density: Minus 0 percent, plus 10 percent.
2.03 PRODUCTS
A. Architectural Closed Louvers:
1. Profile: Per Plans.
2.04 ADHESIVES AND FILLERS
A. Adhesive:
1. Approved Product: Cellular PVC adhesive/filler approved by manufacturer of trim
components.
a. Sandable and paintable.
b. Work Time: Maximum of one hour.
B. Sealants: Urethane, polyurethane or acrylic based sealants without silicone approved by
manufacturer of trim components.
C. Adhesive Caulk: Urethane or acrylic based, as approved by manufacturer.
D. Filler: Provide exterior grade, flexible filler to fill nail holes and dents in PVC trimboard.
1. Approved Product: Meeting the following properties.
a. Non-structural.
b. Cures within 24 hours.
c. Sandable, paintable.
d. Requires no primer.
2.05 FASTENERS
A. General: Fasteners shall have sufficient tensile strength in the shaft to resist bending during
linear expansion and contraction.
B. Type: Provide the following fasteners.
1. Nails with smooth, thin shanks, blunt tips and full round heads (e.g.: wood siding nails, box
nails) long enough to penetrate the substrate a minimum of 1-1/2 inches.
2. Exterior grade, trim-head screws, minimum #7 gauge long enough to penetrate the
10731 PLASTIC SIMULATED WOOD TRIM 06 65 00-2

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
substrate a minimum of 1-1/2 inches.
a. Material: Hot dip galvanized.
b. Material: Stainless steel.
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Prior to installation, verify governing dimensions and condition of substrate.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Examine, clean, and repair as necessary any substrate conditions that would be detrimental to
proper installation.
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by manufactuer of trim components for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.
2. Use trim details indicated on drawings.
B. Cutting:
1. Use conventional woodworking saws.
2. Use carbide tipped blades designed to cut wood. Do not use fine-tooth metal-cutting
blades.
3. Avoid rough edges from cutting caused by: excessive friction, poor board support, worn
saw blades or badly aligned tools.
C. Drilling:
1. Do not use bits made for rigid PVC.
2. Avoid frictional build-up and remove shavings from the drill hole frequently as necessary.
3. Drill with standard woodworking drill bits.
D. Milling:
1. Mill using standard milling machines used to mill lumber.
2. Relief angle 20 to 30 degrees.
3. Do not score material.
4. Cutting speed to be optimized with the number of knives and feed rate.
E. Routing:
1. Rout using standard bits and the same tools used to rout lumber.
2. Carbide tipped router bits are recommended.
F. Edge Finishing:
1. Edges can be finished sanding, grinding, or filling with traditional woodworking tools.
G. Joints:
1. Provide bevel or shiplapped joints for material subject to expansion and contraction. Do
not use butt joints.
2. Provide butt joints for corner units or T-joints, only.
H. Heat Forming:
1. Utilize convection air circulating oven, strip heater, or radiant heaters to heat material from
10731 PLASTIC SIMULATED WOOD TRIM 06 65 00-3

oth sides.
2. Do not overheat material. Surface temperature shall not exceed 320 degrees F (160
degree C) for more than 10 minutes.
3. Secure pliable material around a template to obtain finished shape during cooling.
4. Cool with natural air circulation, fans or compressed air.
I. Thermal Expansion and Contraction:
1. Expansion and contraction of trim material will occur with changes in temperature. Using
the appropriate quantity of the proper fasteners along the entire length of component is
essential to help minimize expansion and contraction.
2. Follow manufacturer's guidelines for required gap width between trim pieces.
J. Fastening:
1. Fasteners shall be hand nailed, power nailed, or screwed.
2. Pre-drill material when installing in low temperatures.
3. Do not use ring shank nails.
4. Fasteners should be long enough to penetrate a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) solid wood substrate a
minimum of 1-1/2 inch (38 mm).
5. Staples, small brads and wire nails must not be used as fastening members.
6. Fasten trim into a flat, solid wood substrate that is a minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
Do not fasten trim into hollow or uneven substrates.
K. Fastener Schedule:
1. Along Length of Board: Fasten at 16 inches on center, maximum.
2. Within Width of Board: 4 inches on center, maximum.
3. Distance from End of Each Board: Not more than 2 inches.
L. Bonding:
1. Follow adhesive manufacturer's guidelines.
2. Glue joints shall be secured on each side of the joint to allow adequate bonding time.
3. Surfaces to be glued should be clean and dry and in complete contact with each other.
Smooth surfaces shall be sanded and cleaned prior to bonding.
4. Use PVC adhesive when installing short runs of trim.
M. Finishing:
1. Correct dents and gouges before applying final coating.
2. Provide paint materials and prepare surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Paint as
specified in Section 09 90 00.
3. Clean material with a light detergent and warm water. Stubborn stains may be removed
with denatured alcohol.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed materials until completion of project.
END OF SECTION
10731 PLASTIC SIMULATED WOOD TRIM 06 65 00-4

SECTION 06 82 05
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester panel system for adhesive mounting.
B. Moldings, adhesive, and joint sealants.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of
Plastics.
B. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
C. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
D. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics
Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer.
E. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
F. ASTM D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of
Plastics by Displacement.
G. ASTM D 2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a
Barcol Impressor.
H. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Maintenance Instructions.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
10731 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 06 82 05-1

A. Manufacturer: Marlite; www.marlite.com
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Provide plastic panels at slop sinks.
2.03 PANEL SYSTEM
A. Plastic Panel System: Factory finished panels, trim, sealant, and accessories.
B. Panels: Marlite FRP Panels; fiberglass reinforced polyester, USDA approved for incidental food
contact.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 200 or less, smoke developed
index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 (Class C/III).
2. Surface Texture: High-gloss, smooth.
3. Color: White.
4. Thickness: 3/32 inch, nominal.
5. Width: 48 inches.
6. Height: 96 inches.
7. Flexural Strength: 17,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790.
8. Flexural Modulus: 600,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790.
9. Tensile Strength: 8,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638.
10. Tensile Modulus: 9,430 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638.
11. Barcol Hardness: 40, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2583.
12. Impact Resistance: 7 ft-lb/in, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 256, Izod method.
13. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 0.0000157 in/in/degree F, measured in accordance with
ASTM D 696.
14. Water Absorption: 0.17 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 570.
15. Specific Gravity: 1.53, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 792.
C. Panel Trim: Extruded PVC, in manufacturer's standard colors.
1. Outside corners, inside corners, edge trim, and division molding.
2. Base Molding: Design that simplifies installation and helps seal wall panel system, with
factory made corners and splices.
3. Borders: 4 inch wide decorative strips made of same material as panels.
D. Sealant: Marlite Silicone Sealant; gunnable silicone rubber; clear.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Hoffman LLC of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Take panels out of cartons and allow to acclimatize to room conditions for at least 48 hours prior
to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
D. Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
10731 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 06 82 05-2

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use the adhesives recommended by the panel manufacturer unless prohibited by local
regulations; obtain manufacturer's approval of alternative adhesives.
C. Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and
adjacent construction, maintaining 1/8 inch expansion space.
D. Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners; clean as necessary
and replace if not possible to repair to original condition.
E. Protect installed products until completion of project.
F. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 06 82 05-3

SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall.
B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction.
C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall
and roof.
D. Visqueen vapor retarder.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Board insulation as wall sheathing.
C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.
D. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire-rated through-penetration assemblies.
E. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
B. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
Degrees C.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
limitations.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions
required for installation and installation techniques.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Type IV extruded polystyrene board.
B. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
C. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Type as noted Extruded polystyrene board with cut cell
surfaces; with the following characteristics:
10731 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-1

1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
4. Board Thickness: 2 inches or as scheduled.
5. Board Edges: Square.
6. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.18.
7. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume.
8. Type IV Board:
a. Compressive Resistance: 25 psi.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.
b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
10. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used,
at Contractor's option.
B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136.
4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
5. Thermal Resistance: R of 19.
6. Facing: Unfaced.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Clear polyethylene film for above grade application, 6 mil thick, with a
maximum permeance rating of 0.06 perms.
B. Tape: Polyethylene self-adhering type, 2 inch wide.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are
ready to receive insulation.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, or irregularities.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER
A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.
1. Install in running bond pattern.
2. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
3.03 BATT INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
10731 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-2

D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of the insulation.
E. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on
center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.
F. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
G. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other
items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.
3.04 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on
center. Lap sheet retarder joints over member face.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs.
C. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
D. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other
items penetrating the plane of the membrane.
E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with tape of type recommended by manufacturer to create an airtight seal between
penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove loose insulation residue.
B. Remove and legally dispose of all materials related to work of this section.
END OF SECTION
10731 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-3

SECTION 07 21 19
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Foamed-in-place insulation.
1. In masonry cavity walls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
B. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
C. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
D. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data on products to be installed.
1. Application or installation instructions.
2. Listing, classification, and approval certifications.
3. Safety and handling instructions for storage, handling and use of the materials.
C. Product Certification: SPI/SPDF accreditation test for materials.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
E. Shop Drawings: Show materials and details of fabrication of sheet metal, accessories, or other
fabricated items.
F. Applicator's Field Quality Control Procedures: Written description of procedures to be utilized to
insure proper preparation and installation of foam and coatings, detail work and follow-up
inspection.
G. Maintenance Data: Manufacturers' recommended protection, cleaning, and repair procedures,
including recommended frequency of inspection.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified, with
minimum three years of experience.
10731 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 19-1

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide materials packaged in the manufacturer's original, tightly sealed containers or unopened
packages, clearly labelled with the manufacturer's name, product identification, safety
information, and batch or lot numbers where appropriate. Where materials are covered by a
referenced specification, the labels shall bear the specification number, type and class, as
applicable.
B. Store materials out of the weather and out of direct sunlight in locations where the temperatures
are within the limits specified by the manufacturer.
1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke limitations.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply foam when temperature is below that specified by the manufacturer for ambient air
and substrate.
B. Do not apply foam when temperature is within 5 F of dew point.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Foamed-In-Place Insulation:
1. BASF Polyurethane Foam Enterprises LLC: www.basf.us.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Medium-density, rigid or semi-rigid, open or closed cell
polyurethane foam; foamed on-site, using blowing agent of water or non-ozone-depleting gas.
1. Aged Thermal Resistance (R-value): 5 (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu, minimum, when tested at 1
inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C518 after aging for 180 days at 41 degrees F.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: Vapor retarder; 1 perm, maximum, when tested at intended
thickness in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, dessicant method.
3. Water Absorption: 1 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D2842.
4. Air Permeance: 0.004 cfm/sq ft, maximum, when tested at intended thickness in
accordance with ASTM E2178 at 1.5 psf.
5. Products:
a. Tailored Chemical Products; Core Fill 500.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify work within construction spaces or crevices is complete prior to insulation application.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, dry, and free of matter that may inhibit insulation or overcoat
adhesion.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from over spray or dusting.
B. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Grout, tape, or calk all joint openings that exceed 1/4 inch in width.
3.03 APPLICATION
10731 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 19-2

A. Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fill all open cells and voids in hollow concrete masonry walls where noted on drawings.
C. Patch holes with mortar and finish to match adjacent surfaces.
D. Patch damaged areas.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspections and tests will be performed by an independent testing agency under provisions
of Section 01 40 00.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit subsequent construction work to disturb applied insulation.
END OF SECTION
10731 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 19-3

SECTION 07 21 26
BLOWN INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ceiling: Loose insulation pneumatically placed.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C764 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation.
B. ASTM C1015 - Standard Practice for Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill
Thermal Insulation.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Blown Insulation:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Loose Fill Insulation: ASTM C764, glass fiber type, bulk for pneumatic placement.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU in/(hr sq ft deg F).
2. Total Thermal Resistance: 44 (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu.
B. Ventilation Baffles: Formed plastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.
B. Verify that light fixtures have thermal cut-out device to restrict over-heating in soffit or ceiling
spaces.
C. Verify spaces are unobstructed to allow placement of insulation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation and ventilation baffle in accordance with ASTM C1015 and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Place insulation pneumatically to completely fill joist and rafter spaces.
10731 BLOWN INSULATION 07 21 26-1

C. Place insulation against baffles. Do not impede natural attic ventilation to soffit.
D. Place against and behind mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation.
E. Completely fill intended spaces. Leave no gaps or voids.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Remove loose insulation residue.
END OF SECTION
10731 BLOWN INSULATION 07 21 26-2

SECTION 07 31 13
ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Asphalt shingle roofing.
B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection.
C. Associated metal flashings and accessories.
D. Roof vents
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.
B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Edge and cap flashings.
C. Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet
Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.
B. ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced
With Mineral Granules.
C. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
D. ASTM D4869 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Underlayment Used in
Steep Slope Roofing.
E. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association.
F. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the
work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
B. Review the following:
1. Roofing schedule.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review loading limitations of decking during and after roofing.
4. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that will affect roofing.
5. Review governing regulations and requirements for safety, fall protection, and covering of
roof openings.
6. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
Also review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics.
10731 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13-1

C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal flashings and
installation details.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish
texture/pattern.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum five years of documented experience.
C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of 16 sq ft, including underlayment.
B. Locate where directed.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish shingle manufacturer's 40 year material replacement
warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHINGLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Elk; Product Prestique® Cool Color Series.
B. Other acceptable Manufacturers:
1. GAF Materials Corp.
2. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
3. Certainteed Corporation.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM
D3462; Class A fire resistance.
1. Weight: 250 lb/100 sq ft.
2. Self-sealing type.
3. Style: Laminated overlay.
4. Basis of Design: Prestique High Definition as manufactured by Elk Corporation.
5. Color: Elk Prestique Cool Color: Barkwood.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Eave Protection Membrane: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with
ASTM D1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and mineral granule
top surface.
1. Manufacturer's:
a. Certainteed Corporation, Winterguard Waterproofing Shingle Underlayment.
b. W.R. Grace, Ice and Water Shield.
10731 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13-2

B. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated fiberglass felt underlayment, complying with ASTM D 4869 13
lb/100 sq ft (Type II).
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inch
shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing
or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking.
B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, asphalt roof cement.
C. Ridge Vents: Molded plastic with wind baffle, weather filter, and vent openings that do not
permit direct water or weather entry; flanged to receive shingles; Shinglevent II-12 manufactured
by Air Vent Inc..
D. Roof Louver; Equal to Famco (www.famcomfg.com) model number JV10CL. Nominal 80 sq.
inches of free vent area per louver. Factory painted, color to be selected.
2.04 METAL FLASHINGS
A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, ridge, and wall flashing.
1. Form flashings to profiles indicated on Drawings.
2. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from
distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
3. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside.
B. Sheet Metal: Prefinished aluminum, 0.024" thick; PVC coating, color as selected.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners.
C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface.
D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed.
E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, cover knot holes with
sheet metal.
B. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection.
C. Install eave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with
plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 8 inches on center.
3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE
A. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 2 ft up-slope beyond interior face
of exterior wall.
B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT
A. At Roof Slopes Less Than 4:12 : Install two layers of underlayment over entire roof area, with
ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer.
B. At Roof Slopes Greater Than 4:12 : Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof, with
ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive
10731 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13-3

layer. Weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection.
C. Secure felt to sheathing with staples as needed of sufficient length to maintain weathertight
enclosure.
D. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic
cement.
3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION
A. Install two plies of eave protection membrane, minimum 36" wide each, centered over valleys for
a total width of 69" with a 3" lap.
3.06 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES
A. Install flashings in accordance with NRCA requirements.
B. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement.
C. Secure in place with nails at 8 inches on center. Conceal fastenings.
D. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic
cement.
E. At exposed valleys install one layer of sheet metal flashing, minimum 24 inches wide, centered
over open valley with center splash diverter or rib. Weahther lap joints a minimum 8 inches.
F. Strip in the flanges on either side of the metal valley with a 9 to 12 inch strip of self-adhering
underlayment material.
3.07 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES
A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is
greater.
2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater.
B. Fasten shingles with specified nails at spacing and pattern recommended by shingle
manufacturer. Do not use staples.
C. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double
thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.
D. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards.
E. Extend shingles 1/4 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards.
F. Cap hips with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed
nails.
G. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather
tight placement of counterflashings.
H. Complete installation to provide weather tight service.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.
END OF SECTION
10731 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13-4

SECTION 07 31 30
STONE COATED METAL ROOF SHINGLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTUION ICLUDES
A. Section Includes: Formed metal roofing panels with colored stone chip finish.
1. Associated metal flashings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for framing and sheathing.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal flashing, gutters, and
downspouts.
3. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof ventilators.
4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants.
5. Division 9 Section “Painting” for painting of roof accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 10 00 - “Rough Carpentry” for framing and sheathing.
B. Section 07 62 00 - "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal flashing, gutters, and downspouts.
C. Section 07 90 05 - "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants.
D. Section 09 90 00 - “Painting”.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.
B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, finishes, fasteners, accessories, and manufacturers written installation
instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans and elevations; sections at hips, ridges, gables, valleys, and
eaves; and details of components, accessories, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts and samples consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type
DECRA Shingle indicated.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Conform to applicable building code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements.
2. Conform to building code for minimum wind uplift resistance.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide DECRA Shingle with fire-test-response
characteristics indicated, as determined per test method ASTM E108 - Test for Fire Resistance
of Roof Covering Materials, for application and slopes indicated.
1. Fire-Test Exposure: Class A.
B. ASTM A792/A792M: Sheet Steel, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process,
Structural (physical) Quality.
C. UL 1897 and UL 580: Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.
D. ASTM C920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
10731 STONE COATED METAL ROOF SHINGLE 07 31 30-1

E. Impact Resistance: UL 2218, Class 4.
F. Appraisal Certificates:
1. International Code Council (ICC), Whittier California, Report No. ESR 1483.
2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Northbrook, Illinois, USA File No. R14710.
3. Canadian Construction Materials Center, Ottawa, Ontario, CCMC#13085-R.
G. [Texas Department of Insurance Report RC-280 - Wind Resistance]
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and handle roofing materials to ensure dryness. Store in a dry, well-ventilated, weather
tight place. Protect from corrosion, staining and traffic and wind damage. Store rolls of felt and
other sheet materials on end on pallets or another raised surface.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturing Warranty: Written, transferable, limited warranty provided by DECRA Roofing
Systems, covering manufacturing defects/excessive granule loss. Refer to warranty for specifics.
1. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Wind Warranty: 120 mph winds, full warranty period.
3. Hail Penetration: full warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. DECRA Roofing Systems, Inc., 1230 Railroad Street, Corona, CA 92882 (951-272-8180),
(951-272-4476 FAX); www.decra.com.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Metal Shingle: DECRA Shingle formed interlocking panels resembling dimensional roofing
shingles.
1. Material: Rolled and pressure formed, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel with three vertical
ribs forming three flat steps, each of which shall have raised and lowered pan sections.
2. Finish: Ceramic coated colored stone chip finish.
3. Thickness: 26 Gauge, .0179 inches.
4. Size: 21” wide by 52” long.
5. Exposure: 19-3/4” wide by 49” long.
6. Weight: 125 pounds per square.
7. Color: [Canyon Brown] [Fawn Grey] [Midnight Eclipse] [Vintage Slate] [Woodland Green].
B. Flashing:
1. Valley: DECRA Roofing Systems, Inc., Shingle Valley, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy coated Steel
sheet 26 Gauge, . Pressure formed into a valley with a stone coated valley cap. Finish:
Match upper exposed stone coated surface of the valley cap to the shingle material.
2. Fascia Metal: DECRA Roofing Systems, Inc., Shingle Starter Clip w/ Drip Edge,
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel sheet, 26 Gauge. Pressure formed to fit along the
leading edge of roof panels at eave/fascia.
3. Rake / Gable Channel: DECRA Roofing Systems, Inc., Shingle Rake/Gable Channel,
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel sheet, 26 Gauge. Pressure formed to match roofing
material, color, and finish to be applied along rakes and gables.
4. Short Course Clip: DECRA Roofing Systems, Inc., Shingle Short Course Clip,
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel sheet, 26 Gauge. Pressure formed for use with starting
a short course or when Shingle Edge Clip w/ Drip Edge will not conform to existing
eave/fascia.
5. Pipe Jack Flashing: 26 Gauge, Galvanized or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel, clean,
prime and paint to match roof material.
6. Underpan: DECRA Roofing Systems, Inc., DECRA Shingle Underpan: Aluminum-Zinc Alloy
10731 STONE COATED METAL ROOF SHINGLE 07 31 30-2

Coated Steel sheet, 26 Gauge, pressure formed to counter flash roof penetrations matching
Shingle material profile.
C. Hip & Ridge: Shingle Hip & Ridge covers hips and ridges matching shingle material, color, and
finish.
1. Hips / Ridges: DECRA Roofing Systems, Inc., DECRA Shingle Hip & Ridge,
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel sheet, 26 Gauge. Pressure formed to match roofing
material, color, and finish to be applied along hips and ridges.
2. Fasteners: Corrosion Resistant Screws: Minimum No. 8, of sufficient length to penetrate
substrate 1/2 inch minimum, black or color coordinated to match the panels.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Materials: Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class
AZ50 (AZ150) coating designation; minimum Grade 37 (Grade 255).
B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type I, No.15 or ASTM D 226, Type II, No.30, non-perforated,
asphalt-saturated organic felt.
C. Perimeter Underlayment: ASTM D 1970; self-adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheet
underlayment; 40 mils thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
D. Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, sealant as recommended in writing by panel
manufacturer. Where sealant will be exposed, provide in color to match panels.
1. Standard: ASTM C920-86.
E. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant screws.
1. Screws: Minimum No. 8, hex head, of sufficient length to penetrate substrate 1/2 inch
minimum see manufacturer's instructions for fastening positions. Recommended length is
1-1/2 inch long.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture
content, soundness of roof deck and other conditions affecting performance of DECRA metal
roofing. Damaged, rotted or loose roofing materials shall be removed and the substrate corrected
for re-roofing applications. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of any projections and substances detrimental to metal panel roofing. Cover
knotholes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with roofing nails.
B. Coordinate installation of metal shingles with roof deck, flashing and other adjoining work to
ensure proper sequencing. Do not install roofing until vent stacks and other penetrations through
roofing have been installed, are securely fastened and flashing is in place.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for products and applications indicated,
unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Underlayment: Apply number of plies required by governing code, but at least one ply, with each
ply overlapping the ply below at least 6 inches and ends lapped at least 18 inches.
C. Perimeter Underlayment: Apply minimum 36 inches wide layer of perimeter underlayment along
entire perimeter of surface to receive metal shingles, including at eaves, ridges, edges, hips,
valley, skylights, dormers, and around projections through roof. Extend perimeter underlayment
a minimum of 36 inches inside exterior wall line at edges.
10731 STONE COATED METAL ROOF SHINGLE 07 31 30-3

D. Valleys: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with a minimum 6 inch overlap in
direction of flow.
E. Shingle Panels: Install DECRA Shingle, accessories, flashing, and hip & ridge level and plumb.
Use fasteners per above specifications.
1. Using the recommended offset, the first course of panels lock into the Shingle Starter Clip
w/ Drip Edge.
2. The second course of panels start at the rake edge, valley or hip with a panel that is 28
inches in length, panel exposure is 25 inches, measured from the left side of the panel.
3. Position the panel into the top clip of the panels on the course below. The center of each
field panel will be placed directly above the overlap of the panels on the previous course.
4. Make sure the top clips of each panel are flush. The maximum allowable gap should be
3/16 inches.
5. Once the panel is in position, firmly push (by hand or foot) on the panel in the area that
overlaps the joint of the two panels below. This will help position the panel for fastener
placement.
6. After positioning the panel, firmly push (by hand or foot) on the left side of the panel until it
is locked firmly into the clip-lock of the panel on the course below. Install a fastener in the
upper left corner straight down through the panel.
7. Firmly push (by hand or foot) on the right side of the panel and make sure it is locked into
the previously installed panel. Install a fastener in the upper right portion of the panel.
Placing this fastener at a slight upward angle (45°) will help draw the shingle panel into the
proper locking position. Complete the installation with 2 additional fastners straight down
into the panel.
8. Fasten each panel with minimum [4] fasteners along top edge of panel.
9. Cut and slot DECRA panels that will terminate at the Rake/Gable Channel or at the Valley
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
F. Hip & Ridge: Install Shingle Hip & Ridge along hips, ridges and rakes as indicated on approved
submittals and in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. Bend and fold exposed
ends of hips ridges and neatly, cap with an end cap or a piece of similar material.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work that have been dented,
damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup with acrylic coating
and stone chip granules.
B. Cleaning: After completing installation, remove any debris from the roof.
C. Foot Traffic: Avoid walking on side laps.
END OF SECTION 07313
10731 STONE COATED METAL ROOF SHINGLE 07 31 30-4

SECTION 07 46 16
ALUMINUM SOFFIT AND FASCIA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum soffit and fascia.
B. Aluminum break metal trim.
C. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing.
B. Section 07 46 33 - Plastic Siding
C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AAMA 1402 - Standard Specifications for Aluminum Siding, Soffit, and Fascia; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard printed product data and installation instructions for
specified products.
C. Selection Samples: Submit color chips of manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Maintenance Instructions: Printed instructions for maintaining aluminum products.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project site in original packaging.
B. Store siding and soffit products in original packaging, on flat surface under cover, stacked no
more than 12 boxes high; do not store in location where temperatures may exceed 130 degrees
F.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Manufacturer's standard limited lifetime, 50-year non-prorated warranty, transferable to new
owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Soffit: 3105 aluminum sheet.
1. Minimum Tensile Strength: 26,000 psi.
2. Minimum Yield Strength: 22,000 psi.
3. Conform to AAMA 1402.
4. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07900.
B. Pre-Finished Aluminum break metal: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.040 inch thick; plain
finish shop pre coated with modified silicone coating of color as selected. Color to match
windows.
10731 ALUMINUM SOFFIT AND FASCIA 07 46 16-1

1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603;
baked enamel finish system; color as scheduled.
2.02 ALUMINUM SOFFIT AND TRIM
A. Aluminum Soffit: Soffit; polyester finish.
1. Product Description: Double V-groove profile, 16 inch exposure; nominal 12' piece length.
2. Center vented.
3. Thickness:
a. Soffit and Accessories: 0.032 inch nominal.
b. Fascia: 0.024 inch nominal.
4. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. Color to match
windows.
B. Aluminum Soffit: Soffit; polyester finish.
1. Product Description: Double V-groove profile, 16 inch exposure; nominal 12' piece length.
2. Fully vented. Where indicated on plans.
3. Thickness:
a. Soffit and Accessories: 0.032 inch nominal.
b. Fascia: 0.024 inch nominal.
4. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
C. Soffit Trim: Supply trim items indicated or required for installation of soffit in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions, including, but not limited to the following:
1. Soffit J-Channel: 1-1/2 inch nailing leg, 1/2 inch channel width.
2. Except for items specified otherwise and items available in one color and texture only,
supply trim items of same color and texture as adjacent soffit.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Accessory Components: Fascias of same material and finish as soffit.
B. Fasteners: Aluminum nails, alloy 5056 or 6010, having minimum tensile strength 63,000 psi.
C. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 90 05.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation of siding; verify dimensions and
acceptability of substrate.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SOFFIT AND FASCIA
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
B. Attach products to substrate for weathertight installation; ensure that horizontal components are
installed true to level, that vertical components are installed true to plumb.
C. Coordinate installation of soffit components with electrical and mechanical trades.
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb and Level: 1/4 inch per 10 feet.
B. Maximum Offset From Joint Alignment: 1/16 inch.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt from surface of installed products, using mild soap and water.
10731 ALUMINUM SOFFIT AND FASCIA 07 46 16-2

B. After completing installation, remove from project site excess materials and debris resulting from
installation.
END OF SECTION
10731 ALUMINUM SOFFIT AND FASCIA 07 46 16-3

SECTION 07 46 33
PLASTIC SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vinyl siding and trim.
B. Thermoplastic polyolefin shakes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate.
B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D 1929 - Standard Test Method for Determing Ignition Temperature of Plastics.
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
D. VSI (INST) - Vinyl Siding Installation Manual; Vinyl Siding Institute, Society of the Plastics
Industry.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Characteristics of PVC: Provide vinyl siding products that meet or exceed the following:
1. Flame spread index of 20 or less, smoke developed index of 360 or less; when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Minimum self-ignition temperature of 824 degrees F, per ASTM D 1929.
3. Effect on Fire Restistance of Wall Assembly: No reduction in endurance of 1 hour rated
assembly, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 119.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Samples: Provide samples in colors specified, not less than 12 inches in length.
D. Color Charts: Where colors are not specified, provide samples of manufacturer's entire color
line for selection.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Not less than three years of experience with products specified.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.08 WARRANTY
10731 PLASTIC SIDING 07 46 33-1

A. Provide manufacturer's standard lifetime limited warranty on siding products, transferable to new
owners.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Alcoa Home Exteriors, Inc: www.alcoahomes.com.
B. Ashland-Davis.
C. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
D. Georgia-Pacific.
E. Variform: www.variform.com
F. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Polyvinyl Chloride: Provide siding materials made of PVC compound with cell classification of
13344, as defined by ASTM D 4216, meeting or exceeding the following properties:
1. Impact strength: 2.20 ft-lbs per inch at test temperature of 73 degrees F, and 1.30 ft-lbs
per inch at test temperature of 32 degrees F, per ASTM D 256.
2. Tensile strength: 7,344 psi.
3. Flexural modulus of elasticity in tension: 455,750 psi.
4. Deflection temperature under load of 264 psi: 168 degrees F.
5. Coefficient of expansion: 0.000034 in/in/degree F.
6. Chemical resistance: Excellent.
B. Vinyl Components: Provide products made of extruded polyvinyl chloride compound as
specified in this section and manufactured to comply with requirements of ASTM D 3679.
1. Provide elongated nailing slots on nailing flanges to allow for movement.
2. Factory-notch ends of horizontal panels to form overlapping joints.
3. Provide products that meet weathering requirements of ASTM D 3679 using methods
outlined in ASTM D 1435.
C. Horizontal Vinyl Siding:
1. Profile: Clapboard, Double 5-Inch; 5 inches wide; 10 inch exposure.
2. Thickness: 0.044 inch, minimum.
3. Length: 12 feet, minimum.
4. Nailing Hem: Single layer, with 1-1/8 inch long nail holes at maximum 18 inches on center.
5. Finish: Woodgrain.
6. Color: As selected by Hoffman LLC from manufacturers full range of available colors.
7. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. Each building to have
different color scheme.
D. Shakes: Injection molded simulated cedar shingles made from thermoplastic polyolefin,
complying with ASTM D3679 except for material composition.
1. Thickness: 0.10 inch, minimum.
2. Nailing Hem: Single layer, with 1-1/8 inch long nail holes at maximum 18 inches on center.
3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. Each building to have
different color scheme.
E. Accessories: Provide coordinating accessories made of same material as required for complete
and proper installation whether or not specifically shown on the drawings.
1. Color: Contrasting color, to be selected.
2. Length:
a. Corner Posts: 10 feet, minimum.
b. Other Trim: 12.5 feet, minimum.
10731 PLASTIC SIDING 07 46 33-2

3. Profiles: Provide the following accessories:
4. Starter Strip: Single-row nailing hem with elongated nailing holes 1-1/4 inches long at 18
inches on center, with 1/4 inch base projection.
5. J-Channel Trim: 3/8 inches.
6. Corner Posts:
a. Outside: Universal.
b. Outside Corner Width: 4 inches].
7. Window and Door Surround: 3-1/2 inches wide.
8. Other Linear Trim: 3-1/2 inches wide unless otherwise indicated.
9. Back Plate: Universal.
10. Drip Cap.
F. Fasteners: Aluminum nails, alloy 5056 or 6110, with minimum tensile strength of 63,000 pounds
per square inch; length as required to penetrate framing at least 3/4 inch.
G. Straight Flashing - Self-Adhering: Self-adhering straight flashing tape, butyl adhesive, textured
polyethylene laminate barrier, 30 mil thickness, with 1 piece siliconized paper, width as required.
1. Similar to StraightFlash as manufactured by DuPont.
H. Joint Sealers: As specified in Section 07 90 05.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation; verify dimensions and acceptability
of substrate.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Hoffman LLC of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install siding, soffit, and trim in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions
and Vinyl Siding Institute's Installation Manual.
B. Attach securely to framing, not sheathing, with horizontal components true to level and vertical
components true to plumb, providing a weather resistant installation.
C. Nailing: Drive nails straight, leaving 1/16 inch space between nail head and flange of panel.
1. Nail horizontal panels by placing nail in center of slot.
D. Install joint sealers between siding/soffit/trim and adjacent construction, using procedures
specified in Section 07 90 05.
E. Allow space between both ends of siding panels and trim for thermal movement.
F. Overlap horizontal panel ends one-half the width of factory pre-cut notches.
G. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Stagger lap joints in uniform pattern as successive courses of siding
are installed.
H. Clean dirt from surface of installed products, using mild soap and water.
3.03 CLEANING
A. At completion of work, remove debris caused by siding installation from project site.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
10731 PLASTIC SIDING 07 46 33-3

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 PLASTIC SIDING 07 46 33-4

SECTION 07 46 46
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood-fiber cement siding.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate.
B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods, including nail patterns.
C. Maintenance Instructions: Periodic inspection recommendations and maintenance procedures.
D. Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer’s warranty, made out in Owner’s name, showing that it
has been registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this
section with minimum 3 years of experience.
1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene one week before starting work of this section.
B. Review the following:
1. Siding installation schedule.
2. Review methods and procedures related to siding and soffit installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Review flashings, special details, penetrations, and condition of other construction that will
affect siding.
4. Review governing regulations and requirements for safety, fall protection, and scaffolding.
5. Review temporary protection requirements for siding system during and after installation.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIDING
A. Lap Siding: Individual horizontal boards made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high
pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with
10731 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46-1

machined edges, for nail attachment.
1. Style: Standard lap style.
2. Texture: Simulated cedar grain.
3. Length: 12 ft, nominal.
4. Width (Height): 5-1/4 inches (exposed).
5. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.
6. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard range.
7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.
8. Lap Siding Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Furring Strips: Galvanized metal channels.
B. Trim: Same material and texture as siding.
C. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4
inch.
D. Joint Sealer: As specified in Section 07 90 05.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be
detrimental to proper installation.
B. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Hoffman LLC of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.
2. Use trim details indicated on drawings.
3. Touch up all field cut edges before installing.
4. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.
B. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are
inevitable stagger joints between successive courses.
C. Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs,
patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.
D. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations.
Paint all exposed cut edges.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46-2

SECTION 07 53 00
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Elastomeric roofing membrane, adhered conventional application.
B. Insulation, flat and tapered.
C. Base flashings.
D. Roofing stack boots.
E. Walkway pads.
F. Related accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs.
B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-
Tension.
B. ASTM D448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction.
C. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
D. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers.
E. ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by
Impact.
F. ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane.
G. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
H. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.
I. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.
J. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association.
K. SPRI RP-4 - Wind Design Standard for Ballasted Single-Ply Roofing Systems; Single Ply
Roofing Institute (ANSI/SPRI RP-4).
L. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
M. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate with installation of associated counterflashings installed under other sections.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this
section.
C. Attendees:
10731 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00-1

1. Architect/Engineer.
2. Owner.
3. Project Superintendent.
4. Roofing Manufacturer's representative.
5. Roofing Contractor's Foreman and Project Manager.
6. Independent Testing Agency (ITA).
D. Review the following:
1. Roofing schedule including where project will start and how the installation will proceed.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review loading limitations of decking during and after roofing.
4. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that will affect roofing.
5. Review governing regulations and requirements for safety, fall protection, and covering of
roof openings.
6. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
7. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
8. Review debris removal and cleanup procedures.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, and
surfacing.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other
materials, mechanical fastener layout, and paver layout.
D. Samples of Aggregate: Submit one one lb. container of aggregate ballast.
E. Samples of Pavers: Submit one.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter
conditions requiring special attention.
G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, and
supplementary instructions given.
H. Maintenance Data: Submit a set of instructions detailing preventative maintenance and noting a
list of harmful substances which may damage the roofing membrane.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Classifications and Code Requirements:
1. Roofing system used on metal decks shall meet the requirements of FM Approved
Standard for Class I Insulated Steel Deck Roofs.
2. Non-ballasted roofs shall be designed for a wind uplift pressures required by current codes
and as calculated by ASCE-7.
C. UL Listing: Class A Fire Hazard Classification.
D. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.
10731 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00-2

2. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years experience and approved by manufacturer.
3. Roofing components shall be provided from a single manufacturer source or approved by
the manufacturer to assure compatibility and conformance to manufacturer's warranty
conditions.
4. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels
intact.
B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
C. Handle and store roofing materials and equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection or
damage of decking.
D. Flammable materials shall be stored in a cool, dry area away from sparks and open flames.
Follow all precautions as outlined in manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets.
E. Materials having been determined by the Architect to be damaged, shall be immediately
removed from the construction site and replaced at no cost to Hoffman or the Owner.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 32 degrees F or above 90
degrees F.
C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected
or occurring.
D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed the same day.
E. Maintain continuous temporary protection to interior of building prior to and during installation of
new roofing system.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty for Full Replacement Value (no dollar limit or NDL) of completed installation signed
by manufacturer warranting against water infiltration and defects of materials and workmanship
for a period of 10 years. Warranty shall be complete for labor, materials, repair of defects, and
other items necessary to obtain watertight roofing system for full specified time period.
D. Warranty is not intended to cover products specified under Section 07 62 00.
E. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. EPDM Membrane Manufacturer and Systems:
1. Product: Sure-Seal EPDM as manufactured by Carlisle SynTec Incorporated:
www.carlisle-syntec.com.
10731 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00-3

2. Product: Rubberguard FR EPDM as manufactured by Firestone Building Products Co:
www.firestonebpco.com.
3. Product: JM EPDM FR as manufactured by Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ROOFING - UNBALLASTED APPLICATIONS
A. Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered, over insulation.
B. Roofing Assembly Requirements:
1. Roof Covering External Fire-Resistance Classification: UL Class A.
2. Factory Mutual Classification: Class I and windstorm resistance of I-60, in accordance with
FM DS 1-28.
C. Water Diverters and Crickets:
1. Use tapered isocyanurate at minimum 1/2 inch per foot taper.
2.03 MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
A. Membrane: Ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM); non-reinforced; complying with
minimum properties of ASTM D 4637.
1. Thickness: 0.045 inch.
2. Thickness: 0.060 inch.
3. Sheet Width: 144 inch, minimum; factory-fabricate into largest sheets possible.
4. Color: White.
5. Tensile Strength: 1305 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D412.
6. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D412.
7. Tear Strength: 150 lbf/in, measured in accordance with ASTM D624.
8. Water Absorption: 4 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance with
ASTM D570, 24 hour immersion.
9. Water Vapor Permeability: 2.0 perm inch, measured in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
10. Brittleness Temperature: -75 deg F., measured in accordance with ASTM D746.
B. Seaming Materials: Three inch wide self-adhesive tape compatible with membrane.
C. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane; conforming to the following:
1. Thickness: 60 mil.
2. Maximum Perm Rate: 2.0.
3. Tensile Strength: 1,200 psi.
4. Elasticity: 50 percent with full recovery without set.
5. Color: Black.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same
material as membrane.
B. Termination Bar: 0.100" thick, 3003-H14, aluminum, pre-punched at 4" o.c. with slotted holes.
C. Termination Bar Anchors: Use stainless steel Zamac Nailin manufactured by the Rawlplug Co.
for anchoring SPM holding bars to concrete or masonry.
D. Membrane Adhesive: A VOC compliant, solvent based contact bonding adhesive as
recommended by membrane manufacturer.
E. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with
membrane.
F. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped type, size and configuration as required to suit
application.
G. Night Seal: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane
10731 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00-4

manufacturer.
H. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify deck is supported and secure.
C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped
and suitable for installation of roof system.
D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips
are in place.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Wood Deck Preparation
1. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with latex filler.
3.03 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Cut sheets to maximum size possible to minimize seams.
B. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching and
allow to relax.
C. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.
D. Install membrane as required to minimize wrinkles and bubbles.
E. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate at rate required by manufacturer . Fully
embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion
joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls.
F. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact tape, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently
waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
G. Continue membrane up vertical surfaces minimum 8 inches above top of cant or edge strip
unless otherwise noted. Fasten top of membrane with devices and at locations and frequency
as recommended by manufacturer.
3.04 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install flashings as indicated and recommended by manufacturer. Use longest pieces practical.
B. At intersections with vertical surfaces:
1. Extend membrane up a minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces.
2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips.
3. Secure flashing to nailing strips at 8 inches on center.
C. At gravel stops, extend membrane under gravel stop and to the outside face of the wall.
D. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with factory prefabricated pipe seals or field
fabricated pipe seals.
E. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings.
3.05 SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Apply authorized sealant(s) at locations as required by manufacturer and per project
10731 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00-5

equirements. Sealant(s) are to shed water.
B. Use primer when recommended by manufacturer.
3.06 TEMPORARY SEALS
A. At the end of each working day or at the sign of rain, install temporary, 100% watertight seals
where the completed new roofing adjoins the uncovered deck or existing roof surface.
B. If water is allowed to enter beneath the newly completed roofing, the affected areas shall be
removed and replaced at no additional expense.
C. Prior to the commencement of work, cut out and remove all contaminated membrane, insulation,
roof cement or sealant and properly dispose off site.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control
and inspection.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Notify manufacturer in timely manner to arrange for manufacturer's technical
representative's site visits to ensure proper installation, verify work is in accordance with
manufacturer's requirements, and warranty requirements have been met.
2. Manufacturer's Qualified Technical Representative: Monitor activities and advise applicator
of proper installation procedures and precautions.
3. Minimum Site Visits:
a. Pre-Installation meeting.
b. First week of roofing work on site including acceptance of substrate conditions.
c. Monthly during roofing installation.
d. Inspection and acceptance of completed roofing.
4. Submit reports; include site observations, instructions, and monitoring activities.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of
surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.
C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.
D. Remove all debris from roof and legally dispose of.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable
materials.
END OF SECTION
10731 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00-6

SECTION 07 61 00
SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sheet metal roofing, associated flashings, and underlayment.
B. Counterflashings.
C. Snow guards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Steel framing.
B. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Steel deck substrate.
C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers.
D. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
E. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealants and Caulking.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
C. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Finish Performance Requirements:
1. Color change and fade resistance: No cracking, peeling, blistering, or loss of adhesion
when tested in accordance with ASTM G 90; color change, after removal of surface
deposits such as dirt or chalk, maximum 5 NBS units.
2. Humidity resistance: No blistering, peeling, or loss of adhesion, after 1,000 hours testing in
accordance with ASTM D 2247.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for roof system, including each specified
component.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate products/materials required for construction activities of this section not supplied
by manufacturer of products of this section.
2. Plans: Dimensioned drawings indicating the following:
a. Indicate layout of panels and panel sizes, including custom-fabricated panels if
required.
b. Fastener types and locations.
c. Locations and spacings for snow hooks, including installation recommendations and
details.
d. Locations of gutters, downspouts, and connections to roof drainage piping; indicate
slopes for correct drainage.
10731 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00-1

e. Locations of trim and other sheet metal items.
3. Details: Dimensioned drawings indicating the following:
a. Profile of each type trim and other sheet metal item.
b. Interface of roof panel system with adjacent construction.
4. Selection Samples: Two sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of
available colors and finishes.
5. Verification Samples: Two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, of each selected color
and finish, representing actual color and finish of products to be installed.
6. Quality Assurance Submittals:
a. Design Data: Structural design calculations, bearing seal and signature of
professional structural engineer licensed to practice in State in which project is
located.
b. Test Reports: Certified reports documenting testing and compliance of roof panel
system to specified wind uplift requirements.
c. Certificates:
1) Contractor 's certification that manufacturer of roof panel system meets specified
qualifications.
2) Manufacturer's certification that installer is approved.
d. Manufacturer's Instructions: Printed installation instructions for each roof panel
system component, including product storage requirements.
7. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents specified in WARRANTY Article of PART 1 of
this section.
C. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise noted.
B. Underwriters Labratories (UL) wind uplift resistance classification: Roof assembly shall be
classified as class UL 90 as defined by UL 580 Specifications.
C. Field measurements will be taken prior to fabrication to assure symmetry.
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing sheet metal roof installations with
minimum 10 years of experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal
sheets to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Special Warranty:
1. Contractor shall warrant roof panel system, as installed, to be in accord with the Contract
Documents and free from leaks, faults, and defects in materials and installation for a period
of three years.
2. Have warranty countersigned by representative of roofing system manufacturer and
installer of work of this section.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's warranties against defects in products as follows:
1. Failure of roof panel due to rupture, structural failure, or perforation: 20 years.
2. Fluorocarbon paint finish: 25 years against blistering, peeling, cracking, flaking, checking,
or chipping; 20 years against color change in excess of 5 NBS units when tested in
10731 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00-2

accordance with ASTM D 2244, or chalking rating less than 8 when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 4214.
3. Water leakage: 10 year installed system warranty against water leakage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Roofing:
1. AEP Span: High Seam.
2. Copper Sales, Inc. Una-Clad.
3. Fabral.
4. MBCI.
5. Merchant and Evans, Inc.
6. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
7. Pac-Clad
8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Metal Roofing:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; 24 gage core
steel.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Sheet Metal Roofing: Field formed panels fabricated on site using portable roll former.
1. Profile: Standing seams at 16 inches on center with two minor stiffening beads, with
installed sealant or gasket at seam, similar to Snap-Clad Panels manufactured by
Pac-Clad.
2. Seam Height: 1-3/4" inches
3. Panel Seams: Continuous interlock.
4. Panel Length: As indicated on drawings, fabricated in one continuous length.
5. Texture: Smooth, dull matte specular gloss 25 to 35 percent at 60 degrees F.
6. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
7. Protective Film: Strippable vinyl film applied during panel fabrication and finishing.
B. Installation Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips for concealed securement of panels.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, non-penetrating type, as required to achieve uplift rating., with soft
neoprene washers.
B. Primer: Zinc molybdate type.
C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
D. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
E. Membrane Underlayment: Rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet polyethylene, 40 mil total
thickness, with strippable treated release paper.
F. Ice and Snow Hooks: As manufactured by Sno-Gem.
G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient;
ultraviolet and ozone resistant.
H. Sealants: Specified in Section 07900. Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with
installation of system; non-staining; color as selected.
I. Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
10731 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00-3

2.05 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, same gage as roofing sheet, minimum ____ inches
wide, interlockable with sheet.
C. Fabricate starter strips, interlockable with sheet.
D. Form pieces in longest practical lengths.
E. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with
sealant.
G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.
H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.
2.06 FACTORY FINISHING
A. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605;
multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.
B. Primer Coat: On coated sheets, finish concealed side of sheet with primer compatible with finish
system as recommended by finish system manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive sheet metal roofing. Notify the Architect in writing of any
deficiencies encountered.
B. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections,
properly sloped to drains.
C. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Verify joints in wood deck are solidly supported and
fastened.
D. Verify correct placement of wood nailers and insulation positioning between nailers.
E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
are in place, and nailing strips located.
F. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
G. Correct defective conditions before beginning work. Starting work shall constiture acceptance of
such conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Obtain field measurements prior to completion of fabrication and roll forming.
B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with
protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.
3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE (ICE DAM) PROTECTION
A. Apply eave protection sheet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install membrane over sheathing or insulation below all sheet metal roofing.
3.04 INSTALLATION - STANDING SEAM ROOFING
10731 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00-4

A. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans beginning at eaves.
B. Lock cleats into seams and flatten.
C. At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip.
D. Finish standing seams 1-3/4 inch high on flat surfaces
E. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree angle.
F. Terminate standing seams at ridge and hips by turning down with tapered fold.
3.05 INSTALLATION - FLASHINGS
A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
B. Cleat and seam all joints.
C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
E. Seal metal joints watertight.
3.06 INSTALLATION-ICE AND SNOW HOOKS
A. Contractor to install ice and snow hooks in pattern shown on approved shop drawings from
manufacturer of snow hook. Minimum design should include two rows of hooks centered on
each panel at ends.
B. Install hooks at middle of each roof panel per manufacturer's specifications using adhesive or
tape.
C. Color to match roof panels.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove strippable coating from panels and trim, when provided, and perform dry wipe-down
cleaning of panels as installed.
B. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces.
C. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water.
D. Remove all debris from roof and legally dispose of.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surface.
B. Replace products having damage other than minor finish scratches.
C. Repair minor finish scratches in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations;
replace panels that cannot be repaired so that no damage is visible from a distance of 5 feet.
D. Hoffman LLC shall be sole judge of acceptability of repair to damaged finishes; replace products
having rejected repairs.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Panel Width: , 6 inches +/- 1/8 inch.
B. Seam Height: 1-3/4" inches +/- 1/8 inch.
END OF SECTION
10731 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00-5

SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, and other items indicated in
Schedule.
B. Reglets and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Through-wall flashings in masonry.
B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers for roofing.
C. Section 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles: Flashings associated with shingle roofing.
D. Section 07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Roofing system.
E. Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.
F. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
C. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Material profiles and jointing patterns.
2. Jointing details, fastening methods and terminations.
3. All installation details.
4. Material gauges.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color and sheet metal
gauge.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Fabricate and install perimeter flashings and components in accordance with the most current
edition of FM 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheet.
C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of
10731 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-1

documented experience.
D. Field measurement shall be taken by the installer prior to fabrication.
E. Do not begin fabrication of sheet metal components until shop drawings have been submitted
and approved by Architect.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope
metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
C. Protect all materials and installations from damage by other trades.
D. Coping, fascia or gravel stop with strippable film shall not be exposed to direct sunlight or
extreme heat. All strippable film should be removed immediately after installation is complete.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Contractor shall warrant installed system to be free of leaks and free from defects in materials
and workmanship for two years.
D. Factory Finish: 20-year Warranty stating finish will be:
1. Free of fading or color change in excess of 5 Delta E units; ASTM D 2244.
2. Will not chalk in excess of numeral rating of 8 for colors and 6 for whites; ASTM D 4214.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02
inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.
1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA
2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.
2. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA
2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as selected from
manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Thickness: As scheduled, but not lighter than 24 gauge.
4. Texture: Smooth finish.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers where noted.
B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.
C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
D. Sealant: Type specified in Section 07 90 05.
E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate components to maximum extent possible to minimize site fabrication.
B. Fabricate to allow for adjustments in field for proper anchoring and joining.
C. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
10731 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-2

D. Fabricate cleats and starter strips interlockable with coping and counterflashing in accordance
with SMACNA or NRCA recommendations.
E. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
F. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
G. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
H. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with
sealant.
I. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 3/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.
J. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
in place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.
C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with plastic wedges. Seal flashings
into reglets with sealant.
B. Conform to standards set forth in the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manuals.
C. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and
base flashing.
D. Fabricate and install continuous cleats at all flashings, copings, and fascias.
E. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
F. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
G. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
H. Seal metal joints watertight.
I. Sheet metal joint covers shall be a minimum of 6 inches in width and set in two continuous
beads of sealant.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.
B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with
specified requirements.
10731 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-3

3.05 SCHEDULE
A. Through-Wall Flashing in Masonry:
1. Material: Prefinished galvanized steel.
2. Thickness: 24 ga.
B. Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge Flashings:
1. Material: Prefinished galvanized steel.
2. Thickness: 24 ga.
C. Counterflashings at Roofing Terminations (over roofing base flashings):
1. Material: Prefinished galvanized steel.
2. Thickness: 24 ga.
D. Counterflashings at Curb-Mounted Roof Items, including skylights and roof hatches:
1. Material: Prefinished galvanized steel.
2. Thickness: 24 ga.
E. Roofing Penetration Flashings, for Pipes, Structural Steel, and Equipment Supports:
1. Material: Prefinished galvanized steel.
2. Thickness: 24 ga.
F. Continuous Cleats:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Thickness: 22 ga.
END OF SECTION
10731 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-4

SECTION 07 71 23
MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pre-finished aluminum gutters and downspouts.
B. Precast concrete splash pads.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 33 41 11 - Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping: Connection of downspouts to storm
sewer.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric].
D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for sizing components for rainfall
intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years.
B. Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on prefabricated components.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to
drain.
B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pre-Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick.
1. Finish: Plain, shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.
2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Gutters: Profile as indicated. 6"
B. Downspouts: SMACNA Rectangular profile.
C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
10731 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07 71 23-1

1. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with CDA requirements.
2. Gutter Supports: Brackets.
3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
D. Fasteners: Aluminum, with soft neoprene washers.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days,
with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated.
B. Fabricate with required connection pieces.
C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of
distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.
D. Hem exposed edges of metal.
E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.
2.05 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally
cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.
B. Primer Coat: Finish concealed side of metal sheets with primer compatible with finish system,
as recommended by finish system manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective
backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Sheet Metal: Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to
downspouts and accessories.
C. Slope gutters 1/8 inch per foot.
D. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system. Seal connection watertight.
E. Set splash pads, specified in section 33 41 11 under downspouts.
END OF SECTION
10731 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07 71 23-2

SECTION 07 81 23
INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Thin-film intumescent fire-resistive coatings for exposed structural steel.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing.
B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field-applied paints matching intumescent fireproofing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property -- Durometer Hardness.
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
D. SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Performance characteristics and test results.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods.
C. Selection Samples: For decorative top coat, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of
available colors and sheens.
D. Test Reports: Published fire-resistive designs for structural elements of the types required for
the project, indicating hourly ratings of each assembly.
E. Certificates: Certify that intumescent fireproofing provided for this project meets or exceeds
specified requirements in all respects.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company that specializes in manufacturing the type of products
specified, with minimum of 10 years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Approved, certified, or supervised by manufacturer of intumescent
fireproofing, with not less than 5 years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers with identification labels and
testing agency markings intact and legible.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1. Store at temperatures not less than 50 degrees F in dry, protected area.
2. Protect from freezing, and do not store in direct sunlight.
3. Dispose of any materials that have come into contact with contaminants of any kind prior
to application.
C. Dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
10731 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 81 23-1

accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protect areas of application from windblown dust and rain.
B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1. Provide temporary enclosures as required to control environmental conditions.
2. Do not apply intumescent fireproofing when ambient temperatures are below 50 degrees F
without specific approval from manufacturer.
3. Maintain relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent in areas of application.
4. Maintain ventilation in enclosed spaces during application and for not less than 72 hours
afterward.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Intumescent Fireproofing:
1. Albi Manufacturing Division of StanChem Inc: www.albi.com.
2. Carboline Company; A/D Firefilm III: www.carboline.com.
3. Isolatek International; CAFCO SprayFilm WB5 5 (interior): www.isolatek.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Fireproofing: Provide intumescent thin-film fire-resistive coating systems tested by an
independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM E119 and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Provide assemblies listed by UL or FM.
B. Structural Steel Columns: Fire resistance rating of 1 hour.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Fire-Resistive Coating System: Thin film intumescent coating system for the fire protection of
structural steel.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84:
a. Flame Spread Index: 25, maximum.
b. Smoke Developed Index: 50, maximum.
2. For Interior Use:
a. Use only water-based products.
b. Hardness: 65, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240, Type D
durometer.
B. Sealers and Primer: As required by tested and listed assemblies, and as recommended by
fireproofing manufacturer to suit specific substrate conditions.
C. Reinforcement: Glass fiber fabric matching type used in tested and listed assemblies.
D. Labels: Red and white self-adhesive label.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to determine if they are in satisfactory condition to receive intumescent
fireproofing. Verify that they are clean and free of oil, grease, incompatible primers, or other
foreign substances capable of impairing bond to fireproofing system.
B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is
10731 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 81 23-2

the responsibility of another installer, notify Hoffman LLC of unsatisfactory preparation before
proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive fireproofing.
B. Repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and
thickness of fireproofing system. Remove minor projections and fill voids that could telegraph
through the finished work.
C. Cover or otherwise protect other work that might be damaged by fallout or overspray of
fireproofing system. Provide temporary enclosures as necessary to confine operations and
maintain required environmental conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case.
B. Apply manufacturer’s recommended primer to required coating thickness.
C. Apply fireproofing to full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Apply
coats at manufacturer’s recommended rate to achieve dry film thickness required for fire
resistance ratings designated for each condition.
D. Apply intumescent fireproofing by spraying to maximum extent possible. If necessary, complete
coverage by roller application or other method acceptable to manufacturer.
E. Achieve uniform finished appearance complying with approved samples.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00.
1. Arrange for testing of installed intumescent fireproofing by an independent testing
laboratory using magnetic thickness gage, in accordance with SSPC-PA 2.
2. Submit test reports promptly to Contractor and Hoffman LLC.
B. Repair or replace fireproofing at locations where test results indicate fireproofing does not meet
specified requirements.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Immediately after installation of fireproofing in each area, remove overspray and fallout from
other surfaces and clean soiled areas.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed intumescent fireproofing from damage due to subsequent construction
activities, so fireproofing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted
vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of
each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or
damage intumescent mastic system. Include the following information on labels:
1. The Words: "Warning - Intumescent Mastic Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage.
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Mastic firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
10731 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 81 23-3

5. System manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's Name.
END OF SECTION
10731 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 81 23-4

SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Firestopping systems.
B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant
assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Cutting and patching.
C. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
D. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry.
E. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.
F. Section 21 00 00 - Fire Suppression.
G. Section 22 00 00 - Plumbing.
H. Section 23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning.
I. Section 26 00 00 - Electrical.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated
construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and hot
gases through penetrations in, or construction joints between, fire rated wall and floor
assemblies.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
C. FM 4991 - Approval of Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.
D. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.
E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; www.aqmd.gov.
F. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of firestopping with other trades and construction.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the
work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required
with related work.
10731 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-1

1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,
and firestopping test or design number.
C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.
G. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit MSDS for each firestop product.
H. Shop Drawings: Show typical installation details for methods of installation. Indicate which
firestop materials will be used where.
I. Submit Manufacturer's engineering judgement identification number and drawing details when no
qualified tested system is available for an application. Engineering judgement must include both
project name and contractor's name who will install firestop system as described in document.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the specified fire ratings
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 and ASTM E 119.
1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL or FM will be considered
as constituting an acceptable test report.
2. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above
substantiation exists.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum five years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section who is
certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been
provided the necessary training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements and
meeting at least one of the following qualifications:
1. Approved by Factory Mutual Research under FM Standard 4991, Approval of Firestop
Contractors.
2. UL Approved Contractor.
3. Manufacturer Accredited Fire Stop Specialty Contractor.
4. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction.
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide firestop systems for all conditions from a single
manufacturer.
E. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having
local jurisdiction.
F. For those firestop applications that exist for which no qualified tested system is available
through a manufacturer, an Engineering Judgement (EJ) derived from similar qualified tested
system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their
review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgement documents must follow
requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.
1.08 MOCK-UP
A. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project.
1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall or floor
constructions, install one assembly for each different combination.
10731 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-2

2. Where firestopping is intended to fill a linear opening, install minimum of 1 linear ft.
B. Obtain approval of authority having jurisdiction, Architect or Field Quality Manager before
proceeding.
C. If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for the Work.
D. If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock-ups not
accepted.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during
and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after
installation of materials.
B. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos, as determined by the method
specified in 40 CFR Par 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
C. Firestopping shall be free of PCB's, ethylene glycol and lead.
D. Do not use any products containing solvents or that required hazardous waste disposal.
E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from
contaminating any adjacent surfaces.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver material in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with
manufacturers name, product identification, lot numbers, UL-Labels, and mixing and installation
instructions, as applicable.
B. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or packages, and under conditions
recommended by manufacturers.
C. Do not use damaged or expired materials.
D. All Firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration of shelf life.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes or cut openings to accommodate
through-penetration firestop systems.
C. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to
covering or concealing of openings.
D. Do not cover up firestopping installations until Architect or Authorities Having Jurisdiction have
examined each installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Any listed manufacturer is acceptable provided that the proposed
through-penetration fire stop system provided by the manufacturer is listed by Underwriters
Laboratories or Approved by Factory Mutual.
1. Hilti, Inc.
2. 3M Fire Protection Products.
3. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.
4. Tremco.
10731 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-3

5. Thermafiber, LLC
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL
A. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or FM or that has F Rating equal to fire rating of
penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified
requirements.
B. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions
of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
C. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use
only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified
testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
D. Firestopping Materials are either "cast-in-place" or "post installed". Provide cast-in-place
firestop devices prior to concrete placement.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)
content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
B. Latex Based Intumescent Sealant: Single component, intumescent, latex formulation,
conforming to the following:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of
0 and 10, as determined per ASTM E 84.
2. Formulation: No-sag, nonhalogen formula; fast drying, paintable.
C. Acrylic Latex Based Endothermic Sealant: Single component, intumescent, latex formulation,
conforming to the following:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of
0 and 5, as determined per ASTM E 84.
2. Formulation: High flow rate, no-sag formula, low shrinkage, paintable.
D. Intumescent Wrap Strip: Single component, elastomeric sheet with foil one side, re-enterable,
conforming to the following:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of
17 and 190, as determined per ASTM E 84.
E. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and
compatible silicone sealant; conforming to the following:
1. Material Description: Nonslump for floor and wall openings, self-leveling for floor openings.
2. Elongation: 15 to 31 percent.
3. Durability and Longevity: Permanent.
4. Color: Black, dark gray, or red.
5. Manufacturers:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
F. Firestopping Spray: Water based, capable of drying to a tough elastomeric coating, paintable.
1. Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 25% of original joint width.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
G. Foam Firestoppping: Multiple component foam compound; foams in place when mixed,
10731 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-4

conforming to the following:
1. Cure Time: 1 - 5 minutes to form an elastic compression seal.
2. Electrical Characteristics: No ampacity derating of cables.
3. Durability and Longevity: Permanent.
4. Manufacturers:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
H. Fiber Packing Material: Mineral wool fiber packing insulation; conforming to the following:
1. Density: 4.0 lb/cu ft.
2. Asbestos Content: None.
3. Moisture Absorption:

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and
suitable for required fire ratings.
B. Dam Material: Where a dam material will be a permanent part of the installation, use dam
material as required by the manufacturer or the tested assembly.
C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, straps, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and
other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
D. Labels: Red and white self-adhesive label.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
B. Examine the areas and conditions where firestops are to be installed and notify the Architect of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the contractor.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could
adversely affect bond of firestopping materials.
B. Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's
recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond. Do not allow spillage
and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
D. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
E. Mask or temporary cover adjacent areas to prevent soiling by firestopping materials.
3.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place Firestop Devices with trade responsible
for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete.
B. Responsible trades to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for installation of
cast-in-place firestop devices without interferences.
C. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical and other trades to assure that all pipe,
conduit, cable and other items that penetrate fire rated construction have been permanently
installed prior to installation of Firestops.
D. Schedule and sequence the work to assure that partitions and other construction is not erected
prior to the installation of Firestops.
3.04 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS
A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, completely closing openings.
B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Install labelling required by code.
3.05 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, completely closing openings.
10731 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-6

B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at a position required to
produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.
D. Install sealants using techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint
substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint.
E. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or
curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configurations indicated or required to produce
fire-resistance rating.
3.06 INSTALLING PERIMETER FIRE BARRIER SYSTEMS
A. Install fire barrier systems and other accessories in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions.
B. Install metal framing, curtain wall insulation, mechanical attachments, safing materials and
firestop materials as applicable within the system design.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing
areas.
B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or
penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.
3.08 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted
vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of
each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove
penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels:
1. The Words: "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage.
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Through-Penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Through-Penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's Name.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
B. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
or from damage resulting from construction operations.
C. Repair or replace any deteriorated or damaged firestopping as required to produce firestopping
complying with specified requirements.
3.11 SCHEDULE
10731 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-7

A. For use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and
electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable:
1. Intumescent firestop sealant.
2. Self-leveling firestop sealant.
3. Fire foam.
4. Flexible firestop sealant.
5. Elastomeric firestop sealant.
B. For use with sheet metal ducts, the following products are acceptable:
1. Intumescent firestop sealant.
2. Flexible firestop sealant.
3. Elastomeric firestop sealant.
C. For use with fire-rated construction joints and other gaps, the following products are acceptable:
1. Spray firestopping.
2. Self-leveling firestop sealant.
3. Flexible firestop sealant.
4. Elastomeric firestop sealant.
D. For use with flutes of metal deck profile and gap between top of wall and precast or metal deck
profile; as a backer for spray material, the following product is acceptable:
1. Pre-formed or batt mineral wool.
E. For use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including
insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the
following products are acceptable:
1. Intumescent firestop sealant.
F. For use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable:
1. Intumescent firestop sealant.
2. Firestop putty.
3. Fire foam.
4. Flexible firestop sealant.
5. Elastomeric firestop sealant.
G. For use with flexible cable or cable bundles, non-curing, re-penetrable, the following products are
acceptable:
1. Firestop putty.
H. For use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products
are acceptable:
1. Firestop putty.
I. For use with devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe (closed and open
piping systems), the following products are acceptable:
1. Firestop collar.
2. Firestop wrap strips.
J. For use with complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper
pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable:
1. Fire foam.
2. Fire pillows.
END OF SECTION
10731 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-8

SECTION 07 90 05
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sealants and joint backing.
B. Precompressed foam sealers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry
C. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
E. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.
F. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
E. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded
Rubber.
F. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam
(Closed-Cell).
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 3/8 x 4 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and
perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years experience.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with wall under provisions of Section 01 40 00.
10731 JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05-1

B. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted.
C. Locate where directed by Architect.
D. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Silicone Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Dow Corning Corp.
3. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
4. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
5. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.
6. Tremco, Inc.
7. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Polyurethane Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.
4. Sika.
5. Tremco, Inc.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C. Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C920):
1. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D. Butyl Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. Tremco, Inc.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
E. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.
4. Tremco, Inc.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 SEALANTS
A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide products having volatile organic compound (VOC)
content as specified in Section 01 61 16.
10731 JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05-2

B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M,
G, and A; single, or multi- component.
1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces as selected by Architect.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
C. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.
b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps.
c. Color: As selected by Architect.
D. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF
single component, paintable.
1. Color: NEMA LD 3, Style ________, Type ________, Grade ________, Class ________;
by Architect.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
E. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew
resistant.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.
F. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations: Permanently tacky non-hardening butyl sealant.
1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:
a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track
and floor.
G. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses
T, M and A; single component.
1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1-1/2 inches.
2. Color: Colors as selected by Architect.
3. Applications: Use for:
a. Expansion joints in floors.
H. Interior Floor Joint Filler: Semi-rigid, two-part epoxy, for joints up to 3/8 inches in width.
1. Applications: Use for construction and control joints in exposed concrete slabs.
2. Color: Colors as selected by Architect.
3. Product: Similar to Euco 700 as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company.
I. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M
and A; single component.
1. Color: Gray.
2. Product: Similar to Sikaflex - 1 CSL manufactured by Sika.
3. Applications:
a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
10731 JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05-3

compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces
and material installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck
dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H. Tool joints concave.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
10731 JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05-4

SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.
B. Steel frames for wood doors.
C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames.
D. Thermally insulated steel doors.
E. Steel glazing frames.
F. Accessories, including glazing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting: Masonry grout fill for hollow metal frames.
B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry.
C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
D. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
E. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
F. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
G. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
H. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council.
B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames.
D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
E. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames.
F. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
G. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;
The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
H. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
I. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
J. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
10731 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-1

B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation
instructions relating to this project.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer's.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Hardware Coordination: Coordinate with hardware supplier for the proper placement and
preparation for door hardware with door and frame fabrication. Secure necessary hardware
templates and hardware information from hardware supplier.
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.
D. The hollow metal supplier must be a member in good standing of the Door and Hardware
Institute (DHI), employing at least one Certified Door Consultant (CDC) currently participating in
DHI's continuing education program (CEP). The supplier shall assemble and supply products in
accordance with NAAMM standards, and complying with all fire labeling requirements of a third
party certification agency.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Marking: Mark each item with appropriate heading and door number in accordance with drawings
and approved shop drawings.
B. Inspection: Accept doors and frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
Minor damages may be repaired provided that the refinished items are equal in all respects to
new work and acceptable to Architect, otherwise, remove and replace damaged items.
C. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
1. Store doors at building site under cover on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking.
2. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which would create a humidity chamber.
3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide minimum
1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
D. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
1. Protect against damage in shipping.
2. If wrapped in plastic, break plastic seals on site to permit ventilation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Doors and Frames:
1. Assa Abloy Ceco or Curries: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
3. Windsor Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.
4. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.
5. Amweld Building Products: www.amweld.com
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
10731 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-2

1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.
4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as
indicated on drawings.
6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in
place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
7. Galvanizing Exterior doors and units in wet areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron
alloy-coated (galvannealed), A40/ZF120.
8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 STEEL DOORS
A. Exterior Doors:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 1, full flush.
2. Core: Polystyrene foam.
3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.
4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.
B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush.
2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb.
3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C
("positive pressure").
a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.
b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
3. Core: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Embossed Wood Grain Metal Doors.
E. 1. Match level and model for corresponding location as indicated above.
2.04 STEEL FRAMES
A. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except:
a. ANSI A250.8 Level 2 Doors: 16 gage frames.
b. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames.
c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8
for Level 2, 16 gage
2. Finish: Same as for door.
3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to
be grouted.
4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high
to fill opening without cutting masonry units.
5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head,
flush with top.
10731 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-3

B. Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded.
1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.
2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.
C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
1. Drywall slip-on type at drywall partitions.
D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type where allowed.
1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
2. Drywall slip-on type at drywall partitions.
E. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Fixed, except where removable is indicated, of profile similar to
jambs.
F. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match
door frames, and as indicated on drawings.
G. Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper
proof screws.
C. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 71 00.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Steel, shape as required to accomplish fire rating.
D. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner
pumpable grout is prohibited.
E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center
mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.06 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
HMMA 840.
B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that
pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.
E. Coordinate installation of hardware.
F. Coordinate installation of glazing.
10731 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-4

G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
3.05 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
10731 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-5

PART 1
1.01 SUMMARY
GENERAL
SECTION 08 11 17
PRE-FINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES
A. Section Includes: This Section specifies knocked down, site assembled, prefinished metal,
non-fire rated and fire-rated frames for:
1. Doors with wood trim.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.
2. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. ASTM A366 Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon (0.15
Maximum Percent) Cold-Rolled.
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
b. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit specified products as follows:
1. Manufacturer's product data.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Catalog pages illustrating products to be incorporated into project.
4. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate information on shop drawings as follows:
1. Frame elevations.
2. Details of frame anchorage.
3. Details of reinforcements.
4. Rough opening requirements.
5. Locations of hardware embosses.
6. Finishes.
7. Samples: Submit as follows:
a. Frame samples illustrating each finish specified.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Hardware Coordination: Coordinate with hardware supplier for the proper placement and
preparation for door hardware with door and frame fabrication. Secure necessary hardware
templates and hardware information from the hardware supplier.
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
10731 PRE-FINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES 08 11 17-1

1. Deliver material in accordance with in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging with identification labels intact and in
sizes to suit project.
3. Marking: Mark each item with appropriate heading and door number in accordance with
drawings and approved shop drawings.
4. Inspection: Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
Minor damages may be repaired provided that the refinished items are equal in all respects
to new work and acceptable to Architect, otherwise, remove and replace damaged items.
B. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature
conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit for Owner's acceptance manufacturer's standard warranty
document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to,
and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under other Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
A. Timely Industries, 10241 Norris Avenue, Pacoima, CA 91331-2218; Telephone: 800-247-6242;
Fax: 818-492-3530; E-mail: sales@timelyframes.com ;
Website: www.timelyframes.com .
1. Single Source Responsibility: Provide all frames from single manufacturer.
2. Substitution Limitations:
a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
2.02 FRAMES:
A. Frame Material:
1. Cold rolled steel to ASTM A366.
B. Frame Throat Opening: As indicated on drawings.
C. Size: As indicated on drawings.
D. Frame Profile:
1. “S” Series: Standard 0.9 mm (20 gauge) thick.
2. "P" Series: 1.2 mm (18 gauge) thick; for pocket door trim only.
E. Frame Casings:
1. Wood casings provided by Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.
F. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Fire-rated Frame Construction: Conform to ASTM E152, NFPA 252 and 10C.
2. Installed Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80.
G. Compatibility:
1. Ensure components and materials are compatible with specified accessories and adjacent
materials.
H. Fabrication:
1. Cut, notch and fabricate frames at manufacturer's facility.
2. Provide minimum 14 gauge hinge reinforcement plate, tapped for machine screws supplied
with hinges. Mechanically attach hinge plate to hinge emboss on frame.
3. Casing Clips: Fabricate frames with factory applied, heat treated clips to prevent deflection
in the clip upon application or removal of casing. Attachment clips may not be of same
material as frame.
10731 PRE-FINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES 08 11 17-2

4. Provide notches and tabs or stops (or both) for positive alignment of frame parts at all
corners.
5. Notch mullions to provide tight joints.
6. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion brackets for positive connection of frame and
mullion parts.
7. Prepare frames for ASA 4 7/8 inch (124 mm) strikes, where required. Provide minimum 1/4
inch (6.35 mm) depth of threads in factory tapped screw holes.
8. Provide corner alignment clips.
I. Finishes:
1. Steel, Colonial Steel and Galvanized Steel:
a. Standard Color: Primer Electro Galvanized.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Frame Reinforcements for Site Installation: Manufacturer's standard reinforcements for
hardware as indicated in Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware.
B. Adjustable strikes: Emboss frames for TA-1 strike for cylindrical lock. Provide TA-1 strike in
finish compatible with hardware finish.
C. Silencers: TA-5 vinyl, clear stick-on type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that conditions of substrates previously installed under other
sections or contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions prior to door frame installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate frame work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid
construction delays.
B. Install frame in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install frame plumb and level.
D. Accurately fit, align, securely fasten and install free from distortion or defects.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed product from damage during construction.
B. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by door frame installation.
END OF SECTION
10731 PRE-FINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES 08 11 17-3

SECTION 08 14 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.
B. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
C. Section 08 11 17 - Pre- finished Steel Door Frames.
D. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
E. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
F. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of doors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard.
B. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
C. AWI P-200 - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards; Architectural Woodwork Institute.
D. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code.
E. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood
Plywood & Veneer Association.
F. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc..
G. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
H. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association.
I. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
J. UL 10C - Standard for Positive PressureFiore Tests of Door Assemblies.
K. WDMA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics, styles and edge banding.
C. Specimen warranty.
D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts
required, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria,
identify cutouts for glazing and louvers.
E. Selection samples: Submit samples of door veneer, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating available wood
grain, stain color, and sheen.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
10731 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-1

G. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated,
Section 1300, Premium Grade.
B. Finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Section 1500.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum ten years of documented experience.
D. Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
E. The wood door supplier must be a member in good standing of the Door and Hardware Institute
(DHI) employing at least one Certified Dooe Consultant (CDC) participating in DHI's continuing
education program (CEP).
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252.
1. Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
Comply with recommendations of WDMA - NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish,
Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as manufacturer's instructions.
C. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
D. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with
tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
E. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used
on shop drawings for doors, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable markings.
F. Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been
stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of
construction period to comply with AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 "Moisture
Content".
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
D. Warranty shall include all doors provided by manufacturer for referenced project.
E. Warranty shall include reinstallation labor which may be required due to repair or replacement of
defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
10731 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-2

B. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.
3. VT Industries.
4. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DOORS
A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300.
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations except provide hollow core doors at Resident
Bathrooms.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with International
Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any visible seals when
door is open.
3. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and
faces as indicated above.
B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking
as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.
C. Hollow Core Doors: Type Standard (SHC/FSHC); plies and faces as indicated above.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Oak, veneer grade as specified by quality
standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, center balance assembly match; unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Vertical Edges: Same species as face veneer.
2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match single and pairs within 10 feet of each other when
doors are closed.
B. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Stops: Wood with metal clips for rated doors, mitered corners; prepared for countersink
style tamper proof screws.
1. Wood, of same species as door veneer
2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
C. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door.
D. Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge.
E. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face
edge, specifically for double doors.
F. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.
10731 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-3

1. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.
G. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles - Veneer Faces: Of same species as veneer facing. Minimum
5/16" thick
H. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.
I. Bond edge banding to cores.
J. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
K. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.
L. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS
A. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
B. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or
alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
B. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
C. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
D. Adjust width of non-rated doors by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
1. Trim fire-rated doors in strict compliance with fire rating limitations.
E. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm).
F. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements.
G. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
H. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
I. Coordinate installation of glazing.
J. Install door louvers plumb and level.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
C. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,
corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.
D. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to
10731 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-4

ottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.
E. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to
edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 SCHEDULE - See Drawings
END OF SECTION
10731 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16-5

SECTION 08 14 33
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood doors, stile and rail design.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Wood door frames.
B. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
C. Section 08 11 17 - Pre-Finished Steel Door Frames
D. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI P-200 - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards; Architectural Woodwork Institute.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Indicate stile and rail core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C. Specimen warranty.
D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts
required, special beveling, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for
glazing and louvers.
E. Selection samples: Submit samples of door veneer, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating available wood
grain, stain color, and sheen
F. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x 12 inch in size cut from top corner of
door.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
H. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. The wood door supplier must be a mamber in good standing of The Door and Hardware Insitute
(DHI) employing at least one Certified Door Consultant (CDC) participating in DHI's contiuing
education program (CEP).
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package, deliver and store doors.
B. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with
tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
10731 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08 14 33-1

B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Stile and Rail Wood Doors:
1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.
2. Maiman Company: www.maiman.com.
3. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
4. VTI Industries.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DOORS
A. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; solid lumber construction;
mortised and tenoned joints.
2.03 DOOR FACINGS
A. Interior Doors: Wood veneer, oak species, plain sliced, with book matched grain, for transparent
finish.
B. Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
2.04 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1400,
Premium grade.
B. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, veneer wrapped, overlapping and recessed at face edge,
specifically for double doors.
C. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Of same species as veneer facing.
D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.
E. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and
dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware.
F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.
2.05 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 -
Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:
B. Factory finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Section 1500:
1. Transparent Finish: Transparent catalyzed polyurethane, Custom quality, semi-gloss
sheen.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or
alignment.
10731 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08 14 33-2

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards
requirements.
B. Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch.
D. Machine cut for hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit, clearance, and joinery tolerances.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,
corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.
C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to
bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.
D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to
edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 SCHEDULE - See Drawings
END OF SECTION
10731 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08 14 33-3

SECTION 08 31 00
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Access door and frame units, fire-rated, non-fire-rated, and exterior, in wall, and ceiling locations.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Openings in masonry.
B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Cylinders.
C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in partitions.
D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
E. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Access doors in ductwork.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of
adjoining work.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Access Doors:
1. Milcor Inc.
2. Babcock-Davis, Inc.
3. JL Industries: www.jlindustries.com
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground
flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be
installed in. Prepare all units to receive mortise cylinder supplied by Section 08 71 00 - Door
Hardware.
B. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they
are to be installed.
C. Exterior panels: Weather-resistant flush access panel, 16 ga. frame, 2" thick insulated .040
aluminum door, locking.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
10731 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 31 00-1

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
10731 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 31 00-2

SECTION 08 36 13
SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Overhead sectional doors, electrically operated.
B. Operating hardware and supports.
C. Electrical controls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Rough wood framing for door opening.
B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and backup materials.
C. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Cylinders.
D. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Lock cylinders.
E. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit: Empty conduit from control units to door operator.
F. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring.
G. Section 26 10 00 - Electrical Distribution: Electrical service to disconnect located near door
operator.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
C. DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors;
Door & Access Systems Manufacturers' Association, International.
D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and size components to withstand dead loads and positive and negative wind loads of
design pressure of 20 lb/sq ft as measured in accordance with ASTM E 330.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection
details, anchorage method and spacing, hardware locations, installation details and schedule.
C. Product Data: Provide component construction and hardware.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project
conditions.
E. Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting.
F. Maintenance Data: Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication
frequency, and spare part sources.
10731 SECTIONAL DOORS 08 36 13-1

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years
of experience.
C. Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements.
D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for electric motor and transmission.
D. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for electric operating equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Overhead Door Corporation.
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Ceco/Windsor Door.
2. Raynor Garage Doors Company.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 STEEL DOOR COMPONENTS
A. Steel Doors: Flush steel, insulated; standard lift operating style with track and hardware;
complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application.
1. Door Nominal Thickness: 2 inches thick.
2. Exterior Finish: Pre-finished with baked enamel of color as selected.
3. Interior Finish: Pre-finished with baked enamel of color as selected.
4. Glazed Lights: Full panel width, one row; set in place with resilient glazing channel.
5. Operation: Electric.
B. Door Panels: Flush steel construction; outer steel sheet of 0.058 inch thick, flat profile; inner
steel sheet of 0.058 inch thick, flat profile; core reinforcement of 0.058 inch thick sheet steel roll
formed to channel shape, rabbeted weather joints at meeting rails; insulated.
C. Glazing: Type as specified for door orientation specified in Section 08 80 00.
2.03 DOOR COMPONENTS
A. Track: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.090 inch thick; 2 inch wide, continuous one piece per side;
galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch thick.
B. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized
steel; floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side.
C. Lift Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided galvanized steel lifting cables.
1. For Manual Operation: Requiring maximum exertion of 25 lbs force to open.
D. Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient hollow rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full
10731 SECTIONAL DOORS 08 36 13-2

length contact.
E. Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section full height of jamb, fitted with resilient
weatherstripping, placed in moderate contact with door panels.
F. Head Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full length.
G. Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length.
H. Lock: Inside center mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to retain
in locked or retracted position; interior and exterior handle.
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G60/Z180 coating,
stucco embossed surface.
B. Insulation: Rigid polyurethane, bonded to facing.
1. Same thickness as core framing members.
2.05 ELECTRICAL OPERATION
A. Electrical Characteristics:
1. 1/3 hp; manually operable in case of power failure, transit speed of 12 inches per second.
2. Refer to Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections.
B. Motor: Comply with requirements of Section 22 05 13.
C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.
E. Electric Operator: Side mounted on cross head shaft, adjustable safety friction clutch; brake
system actuated by independent voltage solenoid controlled by motor starter; enclosed gear
driven limit switch; enclosed magnetic cross line reversing starter; mounting brackets and
hardware.
F. Safety Edge: At bottom of door panel, full width; electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to
stop door upon striking object; hollow neoprene covered to provide weatherstrip seal.
G. Control Station: Standard three button (open-close-stop) momentary type control for each
electric operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
2. Surface mounted.
3. Locate at inside door jamb.
H. Radio Control Antenna Detector:
I. Hand Held Transmitter: Digital control, resettable. Qty. of four (4) per door.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are
within specified limits.
B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal.
B. Apply primer to wood frame.
10731 SECTIONAL DOORS 08 36 13-3

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.
C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members
only.
D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect
to unit components.
F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in
Section 07 90 05.
G. Install perimeter trim.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch.
C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge.
D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping.
B. Have manufacturer's field representative present to confirm proper operation and identify
adjustments to door assembly for specified operation.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.
B. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning.
END OF SECTION
10731 SECTIONAL DOORS 08 36 13-4

SECTION 08 42 29
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Automatic sliding doors, with frames.
B. Actuators and safety devices.
C. Handrails adjacent to doors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. BHMA A156.10 - American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Builders
Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.10).
B. BHMA A156.19 - American National Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated
Doors; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.19).
C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association.
E. UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
F. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate layout and dimensions; head, jamb, and sill conditions; elevations; components,
anchorage, recesses, materials, and finishes, electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
2. Identify installation tolerances required, assembly conditions, routing of service lines and
conduit, and locations of operating components and boxes.
C. Product Data: Provide data on system components, sizes, features, and finishes.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention, and manufacturer's hardware and component templates.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and
conduit.
F. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type
of hardware and operating component.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
10731 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-1

section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years of experience.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for motor and compressor and operating unit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
A. Automatic Sliding Door: Single leaf track-mounted, electric operation, extruded aluminum
glazed door, with frame, and operator concealed overhead.
1. Operation: Power open, spring close operation.
2. Actuator(s): As indicated on drawings.
3. "Outside" Side Actuator: Mat switch.
4. "Inside" Side Actuator: Mat switch.
5. Hold Open: Toggle switch at inside head of doors.
6. Door and Frame Finish: Anodized, _____.
2.02 DOOR OPERATORS
A. Door Operators - General Requirements: Comply with BHMA A156.10, BHMA A156.19, and UL
325, as applicable.
1. Select equipment to accommodate light pedestrian traffic and weight of doors.
2. Provide equipment capable of operating, holding open, and closing doors under positive and
negative wind pressures calculated in accordance with applicable code.
3. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 140 degrees F ambient.
4. Provide operators that are fully adjustable for opening and closing speeds, checking
speeds, and hold-open time.
5. Sliding Door Operators: Provide for manual open, close, and break-away operation of door
leaves in the event of power failure. Maximum Force for Break-Away Function: ____ lbf.
6. Conform to applicable code for automatic release of control drive unit to permit manual
opening of doors.
7. Finish exposed components to match door and door hardware finish.
2.03 ACTUATORS
A. Exit; Mat Switch Actuator: Surface hermetically sealed molded vinyl, 1/4 inch thick with two
plate contact sheet, low voltage operation.
1. Size: as indicated on plans.
2. Surface Mat: color as selected.
B. Entry; Photo-Electric Actuator: Horizontal multiple ray device, with aluminum housing for light
source and relay units.
2.04 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Electrical Characteristics:
B. Motors: NEMA MG 1.
C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.
10731 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-2

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Clips, Supports, and Steel Anchors: Galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that electric power is available and is of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of door and frame units and live and dead loads
that may be transmitted to operating equipment.
C. Provide for dimensional distortion of components during operation.
D. Coordinate installation of components with related and adjacent work; level and plumb.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door equipment for correct function and smooth operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protection, clean exposed surfaces.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication
requirements.
END OF SECTION
10731 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29-3

SECTION 08 43 13
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.
B. Aluminum-framed screened enclosure, with door.
C. Aluminum doors and frames.
D. Weatherstripping.
E. Perimeter sealant.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices.
B. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between glazing system and
adjacent construction.
C. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestop at system junction with structure.
D. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
E. Section 08 42 29 - Automatic Entrances.
F. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows:
G. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section.
H. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association.
B. AAMA 501 - Methods of Test for Exterior Walls; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association.
C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association.
D. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil
Engineers.
F. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
G. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
H. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
I. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric].
J. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
10731 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-1

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
K. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
L. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
M. ASTM E 1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.
N. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings.
O. SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type
I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this
section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements, as measured in
accordance with ASTM E 330:
1. Wind loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7.
2. Deflection normal to the plane of the wall: Test pressures required to measure deflection of
framing members normal to the plane of the wall shall be equivalent to the wind specified
above. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear span, when subjected to uniform load
deflection test.
3. Deflection parallel to the plane of the wall: Test pressures required to measure deflection of
framing members parallel to the plane of the wall shall be equal to 1.5 times the wind
pressures specified above. Deflection of any member carrying its full dead load shall not
exceed an amount that will reduce the edge clearance between the member and the fixed
panel, glass or other fixed member above to less than 1/8 inch. The clearance between the
member and an operable door or window shall be at least 1/16 inch.
B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of
lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
C. Thermal Resistance: Provide framing systems that have an overall U-value of not more than
0.65 BTU/(hr. x sq. ft. x deg. F) at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with
AAMA1503.1.
D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in
accordance with ASTM E 283.
E. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of not less than 45 when measured in accordance with
AAMA 1503.1.
F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure
difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft.
G. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water
entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring
within system.
H. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly,
10731 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-2

primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
I. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing
detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding
required.
D. Samples: Submit one 24 inch x 24 inch sample illustrating framing, glass and glazing materials
for each type specified.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision
of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at State in
which project is located.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems
with minimum five years of documented experience.
C. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years
of experience.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of store front system from one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
C. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete.
Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to
permit circulation of air.
D. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or
permanent damage.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement prior to fabrication. Show
recorded measurements on shop drawings.
B. Schedule: Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the
Work.
C. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this
10731 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-3

minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include
provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Aluminum storefront system; Kawneer North America Model 451T.
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Curtainwall Systems.
2. Efco.
3. Special-Lite, Inc.
4. Tubelite.
5. United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com.
6. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope: www.oldcastlebe.com.
C. Aluminum screened enclosure system equal to 'Riviera Screen Room' by Styeline.
www.styleline.biz.
D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 STOREFRONT
A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members
with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. Provide for flush glazing
store front from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop fabricate and
preassemble frame components where possible. Provide store front sections without exposed
seams.
1. Glazing Position: Front-set.
2. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: ____ lbf/sq ft.
3. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 1.57 psf.
4. Finish: Class I color anodized, white.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of
ASTM A123/A123M.
C. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members.
D. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick stainless steel or 0.026 inch thick minimum extruded
aluminum. Material shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible
other components.
E. Perimeter Sealant: Type specified in Section 07 90 05.
F. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123.
10731 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-4

H. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
I. Compression Weatherstripping: Standard replaceable compressible weatherstripping gaskets
of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287.
J. Sliding Weatherstripping: Standard replaceable weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or
nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2.
K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed
oil primer.
L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.
M. Screened Enclosure Framing Members: Aluminum extrusions: 6063-T5 or 6063-T6 members
complying with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). Dimensions: 1.75" wide by 1.75" depth, 1/8" wall
thickness.
1. Retainer shall be two piece polyurethane extruded vinyl frame. Back member with screen
spline reciever concealed and trim snap cover with concealed fasteners.
2. Fabricate framing with shear block corner joinery.
3. Insect Screens: Woven aluminum mesh; 14/18 mesh size. Color gray.
N. Screened Enclosure Door: Larson full lite screen door, Model 350-48, with bottom sweep and
locking hardware. Color as selected from manufacturers standard colors.
2.04 FINISHES
A. High Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 605.2; multiple coats, thermally cured fluoropolymer
system; color as scheduled.
B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar
metals with bituminous paint.
E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in
completed assemblies, including joint edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
10731 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-5

other irregularities.
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads
to sill flashing.
H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of
thermal barrier.
J. Set thresholds in a bed of sealant to provide for a weathertight construction.
K. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using glazing method required
to achieve performance criteria.
L. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05.
M. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,
whichever is less.
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection
requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
10731 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-6

SECTION 08 51 13
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. This specification section has USGBC LEED point ramifications. Contractor(s) will execute all
work in full compliance to LEED requirements associated with this and related specification
sections. The LEED project manual has been included as a part of the general and special
requirements of this specification and applies to this and all other sections of the specification.
Where discrepancies exist between specification references, the most stringent shall apply.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extruded aluminum windows with fixed sash, operating sash, and infill panels.
B. Factory glazing.
C. Operating hardware.
D. Insect screens.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel lintels.
B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Rough opening framing.
C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
D. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Operable sash within framing system.
E. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
F. Section 08 44 13 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: Operable sash within framing system.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and
Wood Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association.
B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association.
C. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association.
D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil
Engineers.
E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
G. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric].
H. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
I. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
10731 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13-1

J. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure
Difference.
K. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings.
L. SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type
I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings.
M. Design and size windows to withstand the following load requirements, as measured in
accordance with ASTM E 330:
1. Wind loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, information on glass and glazing, internal
drainage details, and descriptions of hardware and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, framed opening
tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage
locations, and installation requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning
requirements.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer's.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of residential
aluminum windows of types required, with not fewer than three years of experience.
B. Provide aluminum window units from one source and produced by a single manufacturer.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not
use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or
weather.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual openings in field prior to fabrication. Proceed with
fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure a proper
fit of window units.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
10731 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13-2

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include
provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Kawneer; Product 451T.
B. Aluminum Windows:
1. Curtainwall Systems; Product 4500T.
2. Traco; Product TR-7850.
3. Special-Lite; Product SL-450T.
4. United States Aluminum Corporation; Product 1T451.
5. Vistawall; Product HP-175
6. EFCO; Product 403T
7. Tubelite; Product VersaTherm.
8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 WINDOWS
A. Windows: Tubular aluminum sections, factory fabricated, factory finished, thermally broken,
vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Frame Depth: _______________.
2. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to ____ cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at a specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM
E283.
3. Water Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: pounds per square foot.
B. Fixed, Non-Operable Type:
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e; tempered.
3. Exterior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
4. Interior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
C. Outswinging Awning Type:
1. Screens: Aluminum.
2. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e; tempered.
3. Exterior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Frames: 2 inch wide x 4-1/2 inch deep profile; thermally broken with interior portion of frame
insulated from exterior portion; flush glass stops of snap-on type.
B. Reinforced Mullion: 2 inch profile of extruded aluminum with integral reinforcement of shaped
steel structural section.
C. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable
hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit.
D. Insect Screens: Woven aluminum mesh; 14/18 mesh size.
E. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to achieve effective
weather seal.
F. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
10731 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13-3

G. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
H. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 90 05.
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B. Concealed Steel Items: Profiled to suit mullion sections; galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A123/A123M.
2.05 HARDWARE
A. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock.
B. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings,
removable pivot clips for cleaning.
C. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with smallest possible clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly that will enable window installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices.
D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware.
F. Provide steel internal reinforcement in mullions as required to meet loading requirements.
G. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
H. Assemble insect screen frames with mitered and reinforced corners. Secure wire mesh tautly in
frame. Fit frame with four, spring loaded steel pin retainers.
I. Double weatherstrip operable units.
J. Factory glaze window units.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than
0.7 mils thick.
B. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed
oil primer.
C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive
aluminum windows.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install window assembly in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
C. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances
10731 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13-4

and other irregularities.
D. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and
alignment with adjacent work.
E. Install sill and sill end angles.
F. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack
fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor retarder materials.
H. Install operating hardware not pre-installed by manufacturer.
I. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08 80 00.
J. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with requirements specified in Section 07 90 05.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/8 inches
per 10 ft, whichever is less.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in
accordance with ASTM E1105 using uniform pressure and the same pressure difference as
specified for laboratory testing.
1. Test one window of each type, as directed by Hoffman LLC.
2. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense.
B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer;
rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant and window manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
10731 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13-5

SECTION 08 52 00
WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Factory fabricated plastic clad wood windows and doors with fixed, and operating sash.
B. Operating hardware.
C. Perimeter sealant.
D. Window flashings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Rough opening framing.
B. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between window frame and
adjacent construction.
C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
E. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing wood surfaces.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and
Wood Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association.
B. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil
Engineers.
C. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
D. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
E. ASTM F588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window
Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact.
F. WDMA I.S.4 - Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork; National
Wood Window and Door Association.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and size windows to withstand dead loads and positive and negative wind loads acting
normal to plane of wall calculated in accordance with local code as measured in accordance with
ASTM E 330.
B. Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing
materials.
C. Air Infiltration: Limit air leakage through assembly to of wall area, measured at a reference
differential pressure across assembly of as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283.
D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331.
E. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in
line with pane of glass inside and heel bead of glazing compound.
10731 WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 00-1

F. Forced Entry Resistance: Conform to ASTM F 588 requirements for performance level 10 for
window type A.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Show component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, and window
flashings.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, and installation
requirements. elevations of different types, operating hardware and standard details.
D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer's.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified
requirements.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing commercial wood windows
with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect factory finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane
dusting or misting, and replacement of same.
D. Warranty: Include coverage for:
1. Degradation of color finish.
2. Delamination or separation of finish cladding from window member.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Anderson Windows Corp.
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Pella Corp: www.pella.com.
2. Weather Shield Manufacturing, Inc: www.weathershield.com.
3. Marvin Windows and Doors: www.marvin.com.
C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 WOOD WINDOWS
10731 WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 00-2

A. Windows: Wood frame and sash, factory fabricated and assembled.
1. Performance Requirements: AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S. 2-97 R15
2. Exterior Finish: Unfinished, for transparent finish.
3. Interior Finish: Same as exterior.
4. Exterior Surfaces: Plastic clad, Color selected from standard colors.
5. Interior Surfaces: Unfinished, for transparent finish specified in Section 09 90 00.
6. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
7. Factory glazed; wet-dry glazing method.
8. Frame and Sash Members: Mortise and tenon joints. Glue and steel pin joints to hairline
fit, weather tight.
9. Weather Stop Flange: Continuous at perimeter of unit.
10. Clearances and Shim Spacing: Minimum required for installation and dynamic movement
of perimeter seal.
11. Internal Drainage of Glazing Spaces to Exterior: Weep holes.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Wood: Clear pine, clear preservative treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.4 using treatment
type suitable for transparent or opaque finish.
B. Plastic Cladding: Extruded PVC, low sheen surface, factory fit to profile of wood members.
C. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
D. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 90 05 .
2.04 HARDWARE
A. Double Hung Sash: Metal and nylon spiral friction slide cylinder, each sash, each jamb.
B. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized or stainless steel.
B. Insulating Foam Sealant: Low pressure, polyurethane window and door insulating foam sealant.
C. Straight Flashing - Self-Adhering: Self-adhering straight flashing tape, butyl adhesive, textured
polyethylene laminate barrier, 30 mil thickness, with 1 piece siliconized paper, width as required.
1. Similar to StraightFlash as manufactured by DuPont.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frame and sash members with doweled joints. Glue joints to hairline fit, weather tight.
B. Provide weather stop flange at entire perimeter of unit.
C. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet allowing installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
D. Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view.
E. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this
section.
B. Notify Architect in writing of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent
use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
10731 WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 00-3

3.02 INSTALLATION - WINDOWS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.
B. Attach frames and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
C. Align windows and doors plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances
and alignment with adjacent work.
D. Install sills and aprons.
E. Set head and jamb flanges in continuous bead of sealant, as required by window manufacturer.
F. Place interior seal around door perimeter to maintain continuity of building thermal and air barrier
using insulating-foam sealant.
G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
H. Install operating hardware.
I. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 00.
J. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07 90 05.
3.03 INSTALLATION - FLASHING
A. Non-Flanged Window:
1. Position air barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using straight flashing over the
45-degree seams.
2. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
B. Flanged Window:
1. Apply 4 inch wide strips of straight flashing at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange.
Extend jamb flashing 1 inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill
flashing.
2. Apply 4 inch wide strip of straight flashing as head flashing overlapping the mounting
flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings.
3. Position air barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using straight flashing over the
45-degree seams.
4. Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/8 inches
per 10 ft, whichever is less.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.
B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer;
rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant manufacturer.
D. Remove labels and visible markings.
3.07 PROTECTION
10731 WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 00-4

A. Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without
damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 00-5

SECTION 08 53 13
VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Factory fabricated tubular extruded plastic windows with fixed and operating sash.
B. Factory glazed including infill panels.
C. Operating hardware.
D. Insect screens.
E. Perimeter insulation and sealant.
F. Window flashings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
C. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and
Wood Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association.
B. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
C. ASTM F588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window
Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance Requirements: As specified in PART 2, with the following additional requirements:
B. Forced Entry Resistance: Conform to ASTM F588 requirements for performance level 10.
C. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by
pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of window.
1. Calculate design pressures in accordance with applicable code
2. Measure performance of units by testing in accordance with ASTM E330, using test
pressure equal to 1.5 times the design wind pressure and 10 second duration of maximum
load.
D. Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/200 of the longer dimension with full recovery of glazing
materials.
E. Assembly: To accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals,
movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel.
F. Vapor Seal: No vapor seal failure at interior static pressure of 1 inch, 72 degrees F, and 40
percent relative humidity.
G. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing
channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage
network.
H. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly,
10731 VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 13-1

primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. Position thermal
insulation on exterior surface of air barrier and vapor retarder.
I. Thermal Movement: Design sections to permit movement caused by thermal expansion and
contraction of plastic to suit glass, infill, and perimeter opening construction.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week week before starting work of this section.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal
drainage details.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work,
installation requirements.
D. Samples: Submit two sections, 24 x 24 inch in size, illustrating window frame section, mullion
section, and screen and frame.
E. Submit two samples of operating hardware.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified
requirements.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years of experience.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that
bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
B. Jig, brace, and box the window frame assemblies for transport to minimize flexing of members or
joints.
C. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters; provide 1/4 inch space between units to
promote air circulation.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane
dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
10731 VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 13-2

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tubular Plastic Windows:
1. Alside, Inc: www.alside.com.
2. Silver Line Building Products Corp: www.silverlinewindow.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Windows: Extruded, hollow, tubular, ultra-violet resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral
color; factory fabricated; with vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Performance Requirements: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 R15.
2. Configuration: Fixed, non-operable and double hung sash.
3. Color: White.
B. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable
hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit.
C. Insect Screens: Woven aluminum mesh; 14/18 mesh size.
1. Color: Black.
D. Operable Sash Weather Stripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather
seal.
E. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
2.03 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00 of Types described below:
2.04 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Perimeter Sealant and Backing Materials: Type as specified in Section 07 90 05.
2.05 HARDWARE
A. Double Hung Sash: Metal and nylon spiral friction slide cylinder, each sash, each jamb.
B. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized or stainless steel.
B. Insulating Foam Sealant: Low pressure, polyurethane window and door insulating foam sealant.
C. Straight Flashing - Self-Adhering: Self-adhering straight flashing tape, butyl adhesive, textured
polyethylene laminate barrier, 30 mil thickness, with 1 piece siliconized paper, width as required.
1. Similar to StraightFlash as manufactured by DuPont.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate framing, mullions and sash members with fusion welded corners and joints, in a rigid
jig. Supplement frame sections with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity.
B. Form sills and stools in one piece. Slope sills for wash.
C. Form snap-in glass stops, closure molds, weather stops, and flashings of extruded PVC for tight
fit into window frame section.
D. Form weather stop flange to perimeter of unit.
E. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
F. Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view.
10731 VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 13-3

G. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide
internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
H. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame and
secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers.
I. Double weatherstrip operable units.
J. Factory glaze window units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Installer shall verify that project conditions are acceptable before beginning installation of
products. Correct unacceptable conditions before proceeding with installation.
B. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this
Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION - WINDOWS
A. Install window units, window frames, glass and glazing, and hardware in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances
and other irregularities.
C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and
alignment with adjacent work.
D. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack
fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
F. Install operating hardware.
G. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, to glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
H. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07 90 05.
3.03 INSTALLATION - FLASHING
A. Non-Flanged Window:
1. Position air barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using straight flashing over the
45-degree seams.
2. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
B. Flanged Window:
1. Apply 4 inch wide strips of straight flashing at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange.
Extend jamb flashing 1 inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill
flashing.
2. Apply 4 inch wide strip of straight flashing as head flashing overlapping the mounting
flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings.
3. Position air barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using straight flashing over the
45-degree seams.
4. Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches
10731 VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 13-4

3.05 ADJUSTING
per 100 ft, whichever is less.
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces.
B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer;
rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
10731 VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 13-5

SECTION 08 62 23
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tubular skylights, consisting of skylight dome, reflective tube, and diffuser assembly;
configuration as indicated on the drawings.
B. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles: Flashing-in of skylight base.
B. Section 07 31 16 - Metal Shingles: Flashing-in of skylight base.
C. Section 07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Flashing-in of skylight base.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric].
C. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
D. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics.
E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
F. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
G. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
H. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
I. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
J. UL 790 - Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacture of tubular skylights for minimum of 10
years.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
10731 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS 08 62 23-1

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Skylights: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. DayLite, Natural Lighting Technologies: www.dayliteco.com.
B. Solatube International, Inc: www.solatube.com.
C. Tubular Skylight Inc: www.tubular-skylight.com.
D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
A. Tubular Skylights: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and curb, reflective tube, and
ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces.
1. All components made and assembled by one manufacturer.
2. Design to withstand the following loads without breakage or permanent damage to any
parts, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330:
a. Positive and negative wind load of 10 psf.
b. No permanent deflection in excess of 0.2 percent of span.
c. Live load of 100 psf on dome with safety factor of 3.
3. Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.10 cfm per foot of crack length at 6.24 psf pressure differential
when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
4. Water Resistance: No uncontrolled water leakage at 6.24 psf pressure differential with
water rate of 5 gallons/h/sf, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331; design to ensure
that water will not accumulate inside assembly.
5. Thermal Movement: Fabricate to allow for thermal movement resulting from temperature
differential from minus 30 to 180 degrees F.
6. Flammability: Non-metal parts complying with the following:
a. Roof-Top Components: Class B when tested in accordance with ASTM E108 or UL
790.
b. Self-Ignition Temperature: Greater than 650 degrees F, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D1929.
c. Smoke Developed Index: Maximum of 450, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E84; or maximum rating of 75, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2843.
d. Combustibility - Light Transmitting Parts: Burning extent of 1 inch or less (ICC Class
CC-1), when tested in accordance with ASTM D635 in the thickness intended for use.
e. Combustibility - Non-Light Transmitting Parts: Minimum 2.5 inches/min (ICC Class
CC-2), when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.
B. Roof Assemblies: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting
dome and top of tube.
1. Glazing: Polycarbonate plastic, 0.125 inch minimum thickness.
2. Dome Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch nominal thickness injection molded
high impact ABS; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and
10731 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS 08 62 23-2

channel condensed moisture out of tubing; weather seal of medium density pile weather
stripping.
C. Reflective Tube: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) aluminum sheet, thickness between 0.015 inch
and 0.020 inch.
D. Diffuser Assemblies: Supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube, with
compression seal to minimize condensation and bug or dirt infiltration.
1. Ceiling Ring: Edge trim for ceiling opening; injection molded high impact ABS.
2. Diffuser Trim: Edge and attachment trim for diffuser lens; injection molded high impact ABS.
3. Lens: Flush frosted lens.
4. Lens Material: Polycarbonate plastic
5. Visible Light Transmission: Minimum 90 percent.
6. Seal: Closed cell EPDM foam rubber
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal of
type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon.
B. Joint Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05..
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Hoffman LLC of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
3.04 .
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Seal joints exposed to weather using procedures specified in Section 07 90 05.
C. Conduct field test for water tightness; conduct water test in presence of Hoffman LLC. Correct
defective work and re-test until satisfactory.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS 08 62 23-3

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors.
B. Hardware for fire-rated doors.
C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware.
D. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections.
E. Thresholds.
F. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 62 00 - Finish Carpentry: Wood door frames.
B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
C. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
D. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
E. Section 08 14 33 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors.
F. Section 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors: Hardware for same, except cylinders; installation of
cylinders.
G. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: except cylinders; installation of cylinders.
H. Section 23 10 00 - Electrical: Power supply to electric hardware devices.
I. Section 28 31 05 - Fire Alarm System Equipment: Electrical connection to release magnetic
holders.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council.
B. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc. (ANSI/BHMA A156.1).
C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.2).
D. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).
E. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc. (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).
F. BHMA A156.5 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.5).
G. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).
H. BHMA A156.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.7).
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-1

I. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. (ANSI/BHMA A156.8).
J. BHMA A156.14 - American National Standard for Sliding & Folding Door Hardware; Builders
Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.14).
K. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder,
Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
(ANSI/BHMA A156.15).
L. BHMA A156.16 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.16).
M. BHMA A156.17 - American National Standard for Self Closing Hinges & Pivots; Builders
Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. (ANSI/BHMA A156.17).
N. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc. (ANSI/BHMA A156.18).
O. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.21).
P. BHMA A156.23 - American National Standard for Electromagnetic Locks; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc. (ANSI/BHMA A156.23).
Q. BHMA A156.24 - American National Standard for Delayed Egress Locks; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.24).
R. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames; Door and Hardware Institute.
S. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door
and Hardware Institute.
T. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
U. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire
Protection Association.
V. UBC Std 7-2, Part II - Test Standard for Smoke- and Draft-control Assemblies; International
Conference of Building Officials.
W. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association.
X. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware
will be installed.
B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products
requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.
C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.
D. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work
of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
E. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-2

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, vertical schedules,
catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and point to point
custom wiring diagrams.
2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
D. Project Record Documents:
1. Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit.
2. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code.
3. Key biting schedule.
E. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection
procedures related to preventative maintenance.
F. Hardware Schedules shall be kept currentwith all changes to the project. If changes occur,
project hardware schedules shall be maintained to reflect the changes as they are approved.
Omitted items shall be deleted from openings, added and replaced items shall be included.
Installation submittals shall be kept currentas changes occur. Upon request, a complete
updated hardware schedule shall be provided to the contractor. Supplemental submittals that
include only the changed openings wil not be acceptable.
G. Prior to final payment, provide a record copy of hardware schedules, including all revisions and
updates. All openings will be listed to reflect the final installed configuration only.
H. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
J. Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Lock Cylinders: One for each master keyed group.
3. Tools: One set of all special wrenches or tools applicable to each different or special
hardware component, whether supplied by the hardware component manufacturer or not.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements:
1. NFPA 101.
2. NFPA 80.
3. NFPA 252.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: The hardware supplier must be a corporate member, in good
standing, of The Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) employing at least one Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is currently participating in DHI's continuing education program
(CEP)..
D. Fire-Rated Door Asemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door
hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency for fire protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressureaccording to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated. Provide positive latching
and self closing , reguardless if specified in sets.
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-3

E. Items of hardware not definitely specified but neccessary for completion of the workshall be
provided. Such items shall be of type and quality suitable to the service required and compatible
to the adjacent hardware. Where size and shape of members is such as to prvent the use of
types specified, hardware shall be furnished of suitable types having as nearly as practical the
same operationand quality as the type specified.Sizes shall be adequate for the service required.
F. Include such nuances as strike type, strike lip length, raised barrel hinges, mounting brackets,
blade stop spacers, and coordination between conflicting products. All doors shall be provided
with a stop.
G.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
B. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to
match hardware schedule.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide ten year warranty for door closers.
C. Provide three year warranty for door locks and latches.
1.10 PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION
A. Upon completion of installation, instruct owner's designated personnel in the proper operation
and maintenance of all operating hardware. Train owner's personnel in procedures to follow in
identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions.
1. Coordinate date and time of instruction with construction manager.
2. Instruction to include recommended maintenance intervals and procedures on all hardware
with moving parts.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. Locksets and cylinders to be
"Best Lock", voluntary alternates will be accepted. All others hardware can be bid as specified
"or equal".
2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL
A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with
applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.
B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.
C. Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.
3. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-4

2.03 HINGES
4. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide
hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the
applicable code.
A. Hinges:
B. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.
1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers.
3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.
4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.
5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges.
2.04 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.
1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door.
2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.
3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to
have no outside trim.
4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to
have no locking or no outside trim.
B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.
1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.
C. Keying: Grand master keyed.
D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated
"push/pull" or "not required to latch".
2.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS
A. Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local codes.
2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities.
3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.
5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
6. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide
hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the
applicable code.
7. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
B. Finishes: Identified in Finishes paragraph.
2.06 CYLINDERS
A. Best interchangable core cylinders keyed per owners requirements.
B. Construct lock cylinder parts and keys from brass or bronze; stainless steel or nickel silver.
C. Furnish rim or mortise cylinders as required for access panels, special interior doors, and roll-up
doors.
2.07 KEYING
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-5

A. Door Locks: Comply with owner's instructions for keying. Verify all lock functions and keying
with owner's representative.
1. Include construction keying for each lock cylinder.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not
designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
3. Provide new master keying system.
B. Keys:
1. Supply keys in the following quantities:
a. 5 master keys.
b. 5 grand master keys.
c. 5 construction keys.
d. 2 control keys.
e. 3 change keys for each lock.
2. Permanently inscribe each key with manufacturer's key symbol lock number and notation:
DO NOT DUPLICATE.
3. Tag keys with room designation consisting of door number and name of room which door
enters into, as given in Room Finish Schedule, unless otherwise directed by Architect.
4. Keying to be done by lock manufacturer at factory and permanent keying records kept.
5. Provide keys of nickel silver only.
2.08 KEY CABINET
A. Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with cam type lock master
keyed to building system.
B. Cabinet Size: Size for project keys plus 10 percent growth.
C. Hooks for 200 keys.
D. Horizontal metal strips for key hook labelling with clear plastic strip cover over labels.
E. Finish: Baked enamel, color as selected.
2.09 FINISHES
A. In general, finish shall be satin Chrome 626; materials shall be as follows:
1. Locks and latches; 626.
2. Dead locks; 626.
3. Exit devices; 630.
4. Push, Pulls; 630.
5. Kick plates; 630.
6. Door Closers: Powder coat to match.
7. Door Butts: Nonferrous for exterior, toilet, bath, locker, and other wet areas; 630. Ferrous
for other doors; 652.
8. Door Stops and Holders: 626.
9. Miscellaneous Items: 626/630 as shown in sets.
2.10 LOCK, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard wrought box strike with curved lip to protect frame; finish to
match hardware set.
1. Recess type top strike for bolts locking into head frames.
2. Dust-proof strikes for foot bolts except where threshold provides non-recessed bolt strike.
B. Lock Throws: Provide the following:
1. 1/2 inch minimum throw for bored and preassembled lock types.
2. 5/8 inch minimum throw for pairs of doors.
3. 1 inch minimum throw for dead bolts.
4. Comply with UL requirements for rated assemblies.
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-6

C. Cylindrical Locks and Latch Sets; Trim Style:
1. Best Access Systems: 14D style lever.
D. Provide rabbeted front on lock/latch units and bolts where door stiles are rabbeted.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Best locks, a Stanley Security Solutions Company. No Substitutions
2.11 BUTT HINGES
A. Ball bearing, non-rising loose pin, flat button tip, unless otherwise specified.
B. Provide three butts per door (four for dutch doors and for door 7-6 up to 10-0 high).
C. Butt Size Requirements:
1. Interior doors up to 37 inches wide: 4-1/2 x 4-1/2.
2. Interior doors over 37 inches wide: 5 x 4-1/2.
3. Exterior doors: 5 x 4-1/2.
4. 2" thick doors: 5 x 5.
D. Door butt legend: (unless noted otherwise in Schedule):
1. Exterior doors: BB1199 NRP.
2. Interior Doors up to 37 inches wide: BB1279.
3. Interior doors 37 inches wide and over: BB1168.
E. Furnish UL approved butts on labeled doors.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies
2. Stanley Commercial Hardware.
3. Mckinney Hardware, an ASSA Abloy Company.
2.12 STOPS AND BUMPERS
A. Wall Stops: Rockwood 409 as indicated.
B. Coordination: Verify that wall stop locations have proper blocking in partition at wall attachment
location.
C. Roller Type: Provide roller bumper 272W or273W as required where two door swings interfere
with each other.
D. Application: Use wood screws for attachment into wood blocking behind wall finish.
2.13 PUSH/PULL UNITS AND PLATES
A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installations, thru
bolted only for matched pairs.
B. Plates: Provide 16 gauge (0.050 inch) plates, with beveled sides and countersunk screw holes
at intervals of not over 6 inches on all four sides. Provide stainless steel oval head screws.
C. Plate Legend: Provide Push / Pull plates and Pull bars in the following sizes:
1. Push Plates: 4" x 16".
2. Pull Plates: 4" x 16".
3. Pull Bars: 3/4" diameter on 8" centers.
D. Provide concealed fasteners and back-to-back mountings at all bar-type pushes and pulls.
E. Factory drill all push and pull plates as required for locks and cylinders.
2.14 CLOSURES AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Unit Size: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for
size of door control unit depending on the size of the door, exposure to weather, and anticipated
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-7

frequency of use:
1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than
recommended for use with standard arms.
B. Door Closers with Hold opens: Provide units to the following:
1. Designed to hold door in open position under normal usage when door is moved to 87
degrees open.
2. Hold open to release without undue effort to close door.
C. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Provide units to the following:
1. Designed to hold door in open position when door is moved to engage contact.
2. Hold open to release without undue effort to close door and to release and close door
automatically under fire conditions.
3. Provide an integral electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire
detectors, provided with normally closed switching contacts.
D. Adjustments: Provide key adjusting device on closers; provide six adjusting keys to owner.
E. Mounting: Mount to provide maximum door swing opening permitted by building construction
and equipment. Note on submittal schedule the maximum swing per location for other trades
involved in reinforcement and installation.
F. Exterior Doors: Provide the following:
1. Closers of full rack and pinion construction, including two speed closing adjustment,
adjustable hydraulic backcheck, and fully adjustable spring power plus reversible shoe
feature. Of type and function listed in the Hardware Schedule.
2. ALL WEATHER type fluid not subject to normal temperature changes.
3. Solid forged-type parallel arms.
G. Interior Vestibule Doors: Same as exterior doors.
H. Uniformity: Provide all door closers similar in design and appearance to those listed in
Hardware Schedule and, of one manufacturer. Furnish special arms and applications as
indicated in Hardware Schedule, as indicated by structural considerations, and as required by
local code requirements.
I. Labeling: Provide UL approved door closers at labeled fire doors. Provide thru-bolts to mineral
core doors.
J. Multiple Units: Provide each door leaf with closers, unless noted otherwise.
K. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Stanley Closers, a Stanley Security Solutions Company. No substitutions.
2.15 DOOR TRIM UNITS
A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of
either machine screws or self-tapping screws.
B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height
of protection plates.
C. Plate Legend: Provide kick, mop, and armor plates in the following sizes:
1. Kick Plate Height: 10".
2. Mop Plate Height: 6".
3. Armor Plate Height: 36".
D. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side, not
more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side, and by height indicated.
E. Factory notch all plates and edge trim as required for use with hinges, locks, and other door
hardware.
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-8

2.16 WEATHER STRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors; and smoke, light or sound
seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for
exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide units where resilient or flexible seal strip are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by the owner.
C. Weatherstripping at Heads and Jambs: Provide bumper-type, resilient insert and metal retainer
strips, surface applied, unless shown as mortised or semi-mortised, and of the following metal,
finish, and resilient bumper material, unless otherwise scheduled:
1. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish, 0.062 inch minimum thickness main walls
and flanges.
2. Brush pile insert of polypropylene or nylon woven pile and aluminum strip backing
complying with AAMA 701.2.
D. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contact-type resilient insert
and metal housing of design and size shown and of metal, finish, and resilient seal strip
matching jambs and head weatherstripping.
E. Weatherstrip Legend:
1. Jamb Seal: 160.
2. Sweep: 200N.
3. Rain Drip: 16AD.
4. Automatic door bottom: NGP 423N
5. Sound and smoke seal: 5050
2.17 THRESHOLDS
A. Provide standard 5 inch deep x 1/2 inch high metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as
shown or scheduled.
B. Set thresholds in continuous beads of sealant to weatherproof. Seal joints at mullions and/or
jambs.
C. Cope threshold around mullions as required.
2.18 DOOR SILENCERS
A. Provide 3 for single door; 2 for each leaf of double doors.
2.19 EXIT DEVICES
A. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike for device type; finish to match hardware set.
1. Recess type top strike for vertical rods locking into head frames.
2. Dust-proof strikes for bottom vertical rods except where threshold provides non-recessed
bolt strike.
B. Provide function as noted in hardware groups and specified in "locks, latches and bolts".
C. Additional requirements:
1. Vandal resistant breakaway lever.
D. Trim Style:
1. Provide lever to match lockset lever style.
E. Provide thru-bolts where required for proper application to wood doors. Function as noted in
hardware group schedule.
F. Coordinate wiring and interfacing of all electrical exit devices including alarm kit and electronic
latch retraction with other trades. Provide system wiring diagrams where required for proper
installation of systems.
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-9

G. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Precision Exit Devices, a Stanley Security Solutions Company. No substitutions.
2.20 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are
present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct
characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.
D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item:
1. Locksets: 40-5/16 inch.
2. Push/Pulls: 42 inch.
3. Dead Locks: 47 inch.
4. Exit Devices: 40-5/16 inch.
3.03 HARDWARE GROUPS
A. General: Schedule of hardware included at the end of this section shall be considered as a
guide only. Hardware supplier is responsible to furnish required hardware, including UL listed
hardware required to meet door and frame manufacturer's labeling requirements for labeled
doors.
B. Conflicts: Doors indicated by number on drawings but not included in the hardware schedule
shall be provided with hardware appropriate for that location, function, size, and labelling as
indicated on drawings.
C. Items of hardware not definitely specified herein but necessary for completion of the work shall
be provided. Such items shall be of type and quality suitable to the service required and
comparable to the adjacent hardware. Where size and shape of members is such as to prevent
the use of types specified, hardware shall be furnished of suitable types having as nearly as
practical the same operation and quality as the type specified. Sizes shall be adequate for the
service required. Include such nuances as strike type, strike lip, raised barrel hinges, mounting
brackets, fasteners, shims, and coordination between conflicting products. All doors shall be
provided with a stop.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-10

B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
3.07 SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-11

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
Manufacturer Abbreviations:
HAG – Hager Company
BES – Best; a Stanley Security Solutions Company
STA – Stanley; a Stanley Security Solutions Company
PHI – Precision; a Stanley Security Solutions Company
ROC – Rockwood Manufacturing; an ASSA Abloy Company
NGP – National Guard Products, Inc.
GLY – Glynn Johnson; an Ingersoll Rand Company
ACC – Accurate Lock and Hardware Company
SEC – Securitron; an ASSA Abloy Company
GE – General Electric
Hardware Finishes:
626 (US26D) – satin chrome
630 (US32D) – satin stainless steel
652 (US26D) – satin chrome
689 – aluminum painted
C – charcoal
CLR / AL – clear anodized
MIL – aluminum mill finish
WHT – white
SET 01
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK 73KC L x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 689 STA
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 02
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 EDA 689 STA
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 03
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 S 689 STA
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 04
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 12

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
SET 05
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
2 EA FLUSH BOLT 557 626 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
SET 06
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA PASSAGE LATCH 73KC N x 14D 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 07
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 SET POCKET TRACK SET PDC150N-00-48 AL STA
2 EA PULLS 111 630 ROC
* PULLS TO BE MOUNTED BACK-TO-BACK. DOOR WILL BE HELD OUT OF POCKET AT
LEAST 4”.
SET 08
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 SET POCKET TRACK SET PDC150N-00-36 AL STA
2 EA FLUSH CUP PULL 860 630 ROC
1 EA EDGE PULL 880 626 ROC
* PULLS TO BE MOUNTED BACK-TO-BACK.
SET 09
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 10
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224HD CLR HAG
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 2103 630 PHI
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA PULL BF158 630 ROC
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 EDA 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 13

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 160S AL NGP
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 MIL NGP
2 EA KEYPAD BY SECTION 27 52 23
1 EA DOOR POS. SWITCH BY SECTION 27 52 23
* INTERIOR KEYPAD WITH INTEGRAL SOUNDER, EXTERIOR KEYPAD, CENTRAL POWER
SUPPLY AND DOOR POSITION SWITCH PROVIDED UNDER SECTION 27 52 23.
* DOORS IN UNIT 14 ARE TO HAVE WANDER GUARD SYSTEM IN ADDITION TO THE
MATERIAL SPECIFIED ABOVE. THIS INCLUDES A DELAYED EGRESS MAGNETIC LOCK
AND POWER SUPPLY FURNISHED UNDER SECTION 27 52 23.
SET 11
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224HD x UL-STUD CLR HAG
2 EA EXIT DEVICE FL 2201 630 PHI
2 EA CLOSER D-4550 689 STA
2 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
4 EA ARMOR PLATE 36” x 1” LDW x UL 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
2 EA MAGNETIC LOCK BY SECTION 27 52 23
2 EA DOOR POS. SWITCH BY SECTION 27 52 23
2 EA KEYPAD BY SECTION 27 52 23
* DELAYED EGRESS MAGNETIC LOCK, POWER SUPPLY, DOOR POSITION SWITCH AND
KEYPAD TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF WANDER GUARD SYSTEM IN SECTION 27 52 23.
SET 12
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA DUMMY TOUCHBAR 671DR-4 630 PHI
1 EA PULL BF158 630 ROC
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 EDA 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
SET 13
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
SET 14
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 15
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 14

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 16
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA OFFICE LOCK 73KC AB x 14D 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
SET 17
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA OFFICE LOCK 73KC AB x 14D 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
SET 18
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA PASSAGE LATCH 73KC N x 14D 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
SET 19
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 689 STA
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 20
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA EXIT DEVICE FL 2203 x 4903 630 PHI
1 EA EXIT DEVICE FL 2201 630 PHI
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 630 BES
2 EA CLOSER D-4550 S 689 STA
2 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 1” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
1 SET ASTRAGAL 125N (SET) AL NGP
SET 21
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 x DROP PLATE 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 15

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 22
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 689 STA
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 23
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
1 SET FLUSH BOLT 1842 / 1942 630 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
2 EA CLOSER D-4550 x DROP PLATE 689 STA
1 EA COORDINATOR 1600-SERIES PC ROC
2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
2 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 1” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
1 SET ASTRAGAL 125N (SET) AL NGP
SET 24
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
* REMAINING HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER
SET 25
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224HD CLR HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 93K D x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 EDA 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 160S AL NGP
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 MIL NGP
SET 26
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 SET FLUSH BOLT 1842 / 1942 630 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 689 STA
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 x DROP PLATE 689 STA
1 EA COORDINATOR 1600-SERIES PC ROC
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
2 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 1” LDW 630 ROC
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 16

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
1 SET ASTRAGAL 125N (SET) AL NGP
SET 27
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
SET 28
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 H x DROP PLATE 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA ARMOR PLATE 36” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 29
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 x DROP PLATE 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 30
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
SET 31
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA OFFICE LOCK 73KC AB x 14D 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 32
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 33
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 17

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
SET 34
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 35
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA PASSAGE LATCH 73KC N x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 689 STA
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 36
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA OFFICE LOCK 73KC AB x 14D 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 37
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK 73KC L x 14D 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
SET 38
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
2 EA FLUSH BOLT 557 626 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
2 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
1 SET ASTRAGAL 125N (SET) AL NGP
SET 39
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
1 SET FLUSH BOLT 1842 / 1942 630 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
2 EA CLOSER D-4550 689 STA
1 EA COORDINATOR 1600-SERIES PC ROC
2 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
2 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 1” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
1 SET ASTRAGAL 125N (SET) AL NGP
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 18

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
SET 40
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
2 EA FLUSH BOLT 557 626 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
2 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
SET 41
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224HD CLR HAG
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 2103 630 PHI
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA PULL BF158 630 ROC
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 EDA 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 160S AL NGP
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 MIL NGP
SET 42
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
2 EA EXIT DEVICE FL 2208 x 4908 630 PHI
2 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
2 EA CLOSER D-4550 689 STA
2 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
2 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 1” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
1 EA ASTRAGAL 125N (SET) AL NGP
SET 43
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
2 EA FLUSH BOLT 555 626 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
SET 44
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA PASSAGE LATCH 73KC N x 14D 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
SET 45
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
2 EA FLUSH BOLT 557 626 ROC
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 19

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
SET 46
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
2 EA FLUSH BOLT 557 626 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
2 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
1 EA ASTRAGAL 125N (SET) AL NGP
SET 47
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK 73KC L x 14D 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROC
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
SET 48
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224HD CLR HAG
1 EA PUSH/PULL BF15847 630 ROC
1 EA AUTO. OPERATOR BY SECTION 08 71 14
2 EA ACTUATOR BY SECTION 08 71 14
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA MAGNETIC LOCK BY SECTION 27 52 23
1 EA DOOR POS. SWITCH BY SECTION 27 52 23
1 EA KEYPAD BY SECTION 27 52 23
* DELAYED EGRESS MAGNETIC LOCK, POWER SUPPLY, DOOR POSITION SWITCH AND
KEYPAD TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF WANDER GUARD SYSTEM IN SECTION 27 52 23.
* AUTOMATIC OPERATOR TO HAVE AN INTERLOCK COMPONENT WHEREBY THE
OPERATOR IS DISABLED WHEN THE WANDER GUARD SYSTEM IS ACTIVATED.
SET 49
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA COMM. LOCK 93K S x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 x DROP PLATE 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 160S AL NGP
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 MIL NGP
SET 50
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 SET POCKET TRACK SET PDC150N-00-36 AL STA
1 EA POCKET LOCK SD SET S – 2002-3 626 ACC
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
SET 51
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224HD CLR HAG
1 EA PUSH/PULL BF15847 630 ROC
1 EA AUTO. OPERATOR BY SECTION 08 71 14
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 20

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
2 EA ACTUATOR BY SECTION 08 71 14
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
SET 52
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224HD CLR HAG
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 2108 x 4908 630 PHI
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 EDA 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 160S AL NGP
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 MIL NGP
2 EA KEYPAD BY SECTION 27 52 23
1 EA DOOR POS. SWITCH BY SECTION 27 52 23
* INTERIOR KEYPAD WITH INTEGRAL SOUNDER, EXTERIOR KEYPAD, CENTRAL POWER
SUPPLY AND DOOR POSITION SWITCH PROVIDED UNDER SECTION 27 52 23.
SET 53
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224HD CLR HAG
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 2108 x 4908 630 PHI
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 EDA 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 160S AL NGP
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 MIL NGP
SET 54
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-224HD CLR HAG
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 2108 x 4908 630 PHI
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 EDA 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 160S AL NGP
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 MIL NGP
1 EA MAGNETIC LOCK BY SECTION 27 52 23
1 EA DOOR POS. SWITCH BY SECTION 27 52 23
1 EA KEYPAD BY SECTION 27 52 23
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 21

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
* DELAYED EGRESS MAGNETIC LOCK, POWER SUPPLY (FOR MAGNETIC LOCK), DOOR
POSITION SWITCH AND KEYPAD TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF WANDER GUARD
SYSTEM IN SECTION 27 52 23.
SET 55
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK 73KC L x 14D 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 S 689 STA
1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 630 ROC
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
SET 56
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 73KC D x 14D 626 BES
2 EA FLUSH BOLT 557 626 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
1 EA SEAL 5050 C NGP
1 SET ASTRAGAL 125N (SET) AL NGP
SET 57
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
EA HINGES AS SPECIFIED 652 HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 73KC R x 14D 626 BES
2 EA FLUSH BOLT 557 626 ROC
1 EA DUST STRIKE 570 626 ROC
2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 630 GLY
SET 58
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
* ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER
SET AL1
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x EPT PREP CLR HAG
1 EA POWER TRANSFER CEPT-10 630 SEC
1 EA EXIT DEVICE ELR CD 2403 630 PHI
2 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA PULL BF158 630 ROC
1 EA POWER SUPPLY ELR151 GRY PHI
1 EA AUTO. OPERATOR BY SECTION 08 71 14
2 EA ACTUATOR BY SECTION 08 71 14
1 EA KEY SWITCH 653-04-L2 630 SCH
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA DOOR POS. SWITCH 1076 WHT GE
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 AL NGP
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 22

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
* SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
* KEY SWITCH DEACTIVATES OUTSIDE ACTUATOR
SET AL2
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x EPT PREP CLR HAG
1 EA POWER TRANSFER CEPT-10 630 SEC
1 EA EXIT DEVICE ELR CD 2403 630 PHI
2 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA PULL BF158 630 ROC
1 EA POWER SUPPLY ELR151 GRY PHI
1 EA AUTO. OPERATOR BY SECTION 08 71 14
2 EA ACTUATOR BY SECTION 08 71 14
1 EA KEY SWITCH 653-04-L2 630 SCH
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 AL NGP
1 EA MAGNETIC LOCK BY SECTION 27 52 23
1 EA DOOR POS. SWITCH BY SECTION 27 52 23
1 EA KEYPAD BY SECTION 27 52 23
* DELAYED EGRESS MAGNETIC LOCK, POWER SUPPLY (FOR MAGNETIC LOCK), DOOR
POSITION SWITCH AND KEYPAD TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF WANDER GUARD
SYSTEM IN SECTION 27 52 23.
* AUTOMATIC OPERATOR TO HAVE AN INTERLOCK COMPONENT WHEREBY THE
OPERATOR IS DISABLED WHEN THE WANDER GUARD SYSTEM IS ACTIVATED.
* SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
* KEY SWITCH DEACTIVATES OUTSIDE ACTUATOR
SET AL3
Qty. Product Description Part Number Finish Manufacturer
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD CLR HAG
1 EA PUSH/PULL UNIT BF15847 630 ROC
1 EA DEADLATCH 4900 628 ADA
1 EA PADDLE 4591 628 ADA
1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 BES
1 EA CLOSER D-4550 EDA x DP x BSS 689 STA
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 630 GLY
1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425 MIL NGP
* SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
END OF SECTION
10731 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 23

SECTION 08 71 14
LOW-ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electro-mechanical low energy powered door operators, opening force not exceeding 8.5 lb-force.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts: Aluminum doors and frames.
B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Closers
C. Division 26 Electrical: 115 VAC, single-phase, 15 amp fused circuit to door headers, two 24
VAC Class II wires between door headers and remote activation devices, 1/2 inch (12 mm)
conduit and electrical boxes at activators.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. BHMA A156.19 - American National Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated
Doors; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.19).
B. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of operators and
interface with other products.
D. Operating and Maintenance Data: Operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists, and
wiring diagrams.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Factory-trained, with minimum 3 years of experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturer:
1. Dor-O-Matic
2. Stanley Magic-Access; www.stanleyworks.com
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C. Provide all door operators from a single manufacturer.
2.02 OPERATORS
A. Operators: Comply with BHMA A156.19 and UL 325.
1. Operation: Push button, push plate, switch actuator, manual or field programmable
manual/electric power assisted Push-N-Go opening with power boost closing and holding.
10731 LOW-ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS 08 71 14-1

2. Close and center door against stop after each cycle, and hold against drafts, winds, and
stack pressure.
3. Make door safely stop and reverse if an object is encountered in the opening or closing
cycle.
4. Manual opening force: 8.5 lb-force maximum.
5. Closing force: 5 lb-force.
6. Factory-set door hold-open voltage.
7. Manual "On-Off-Hold Open" switch.
8. Fail safe: In event of power failure, make door operate manually with controlled spring
close as though equipped with a manual door closer, without damage to operator
components.
9. Provide adjustment by microprocessor control for opening speed, back check, hold open,
from 5 to 30 seconds, closing speed, opening force (torque limiting), and acceleration
during opening and recycling, for soft start.
B. Equipment: Completely electro-mechanical; comply with BHMA A156.19 and UL 325.
1. Control box and motor/gear box: Contained in aluminum housing; precision-machined
gears and bearing seats and all-weather lubricant, mounted on vibration isolators.
2. Gears: Manufactured by operator manufacturer specifically for operators.
3. Motor: DC permanent magnet motor with shielded ball bearings. Stop motor when door
stops or is fully open and when break-away is operated.
4. Door operating arm: Forged steel, attached at natural pivot point of door; do not use slide
block in top of door.
5. "On-Off-Hold Open" switch: Three-position toggle or rocker type.
6. Control circuits for actuators and safeties: Low voltage, NEC Class II.
7. Service conditions: Satisfactory operation between minus 30 degrees F and 160 degrees F.
8. Power supply required: 115 VAC.
9. Microprocessor control: 115 VAC. Do not use microswitches. Mount control in snap-in
type control box.
C. Enclosure: Extruded aluminum header color to match door hardware, concealing all operating
parts except arms and manual control switches.
1. Provide bottom loading header for access to controls and removable components without
removal of door or operator.
2. No exposed fasteners.
3. Finish of Exposed Headers: Anodized aluminum.
4. Color: To match door.
2.03 ACTIVATORS
A. Jamb-Mounted Push Button Switch: No. 1211-900; two required per opening.
B. Push Plate: Formed metal plate, satin finish; approximately 5 inches square with depressed
marking; two required per opening.
1. Material: Stainless steel.
2. Marking: Handicapped symbol, filled blue.
2.04 MARKINGS
A. Decals: Visible from either side, instructing the user as to the operation and function of the door.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that door openings and doors are properly installed and ready for installation of door
operators.
B. Verify that electrical service is available, properly located, and of proper type.
10731 LOW-ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS 08 71 14-2

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; comply with BHMA A156.19.
B. Verify that electrical connections are made correctly and with dedicated grounding.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust door operators for proper operation, without binding or scraping and without excessive
noise.
END OF SECTION
10731 LOW-ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS 08 71 14-3

SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass.
B. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers.
B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.
C. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.
D. Section 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors.
E. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts.
F. Section 08 52 00 - Wood Windows and Doors: Glazed windows.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
C. ASTM C 669 - Standard Specification for Glazing Compounds for Back Bedding and Face
Glazing of Metal Sash.
D. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting
Blocks, and Spacers.
E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
G. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass.
H. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
I. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Methods for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
J. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
K. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings.
L. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.
M. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.
N. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this
section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
10731 GLAZING 08 80 00-1

B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inch of glass units, showing coloration and components.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Insulating Glass Units: One of each glass size and each glass type.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing
installation methods.
1. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR
Part 1201 for Category II materials.
2. Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those tested
according to ASTM E 152, labeled and listed by UL.
3. Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for Window Assemblies: Products identical to those
tested according to ASTM E 163, labeled and listed by UL.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain glass and glazing products from one source for each type
of product specified.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Protect glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, sun exposure, temperature
changes, or other causes.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or
when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal
failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
C. Laminated Glass: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for delamination,
including replacement of failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLAZING TYPES
A. Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing.
10731 GLAZING 08 80 00-2

1. Application(s): Units for typical view glazing and all non-shaded clerestory except north
facing.
2. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Gray.
3. Inboard Lite: Fully tempered float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Coating: Low-E type, on #3 surface.
4. Total Thickness: 1 inch.
5. Total Visible Light Transmittance: 18-25 percent, maximum.
6. Total Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.26 percent, maximum.
7. Winter U Value: Less than 0.36 at center glass.
8. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
B. Type IG-2 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing.
1. Application(s): Units for north facing clerestory and shaded clerestory.
2. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Coating: Low-E type, on #2 surface.
3. Inboard Lite: Fully tempered float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
4. Total Thickness: 1 inch.
5. Total Visible Light Transmittance: 35-40 percent, maximum.
6. Total Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.34 percent, maximum.
7. Winter U Value: Less than 0.36 at center glass.
8. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
C. Type IG-7 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Safety glazing:
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in exterior doors.
b. Glazed sidelights and panels next to doors.
c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Same as other vision glazing except use fully tempered float glass for both outboard
and inboard lites.
D. Type S-1 - Single Vision Glazing:
1. Applications: All interior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Annealed float glass.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
E. Type S-2 - Fire-Rated Safety Glazing:
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in fire doors.
b. Fire windows.
c. Sidelights, borrow lites, and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as having an
hourly fire rating.
d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Type: Glass-ceramic safety glazing.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
5. Glazing Method: As required for fire rating.
F. Type S-3 - Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated.
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors.
b. Sliding glass doors.
10731 GLAZING 08 80 00-3

c. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
d. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
e. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
G. Type S-1 - Glass Shelves:
1. Application: Locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Fully tempered float glass with ground edges and corners.
3. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads
acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with ________
code.
1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness.
2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery
of glazing materials.
3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.
B. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building
enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier:
1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.
2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier
and vapor retarder seal.
3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly
from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
C. Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal
movement, wind loading, and impact (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following:
1. Defective manufacture, fabrication, and/or installation.
2. Failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight.
3. Deterioration in glazing materials and other defects in construction.
D. Tinted and heat-absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated shall be the same
throughout the project.
E. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat treated glass, shall
be selected so that the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following:
1. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind
action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E
1300. For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness according to glass
manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM
E 1300 based on type of glass.
F. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing components. Base
engineering calculations on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain
and night time heat loss.
1. Temperature change (range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.03 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.afgglass.com.
2. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com.
10731 GLAZING 08 80 00-4

3. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na.
4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgglazing.com.
5. Viracon, Inc.
6. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind
load design regardless of specified thickness.
C. Glass-Ceramic Safety Glazing: UL- or WH-listed as fire-protection-rated glazing and complying
with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II without the use of a surface-applied film.
2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass.
2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
C. Insulated Glass Units for typical view glazing and all non-shaded clerestory except north
facing.: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal.
1. Outer pane of 1/4" glass, inner pane of 1/4" tempered glass.
2. Place low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit.
3. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E 2190.
4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
5. Total unit thickness of 1 inch.
6. light transmittance at center glass of 18-25 percent, solar heat gain coefficient of less than
0.26.
7. Winter U value at center glass of less than 0.36
D. Insulated Glass Units for lighter view glass and doors if desired: Double pane with glass to
elastomer edge seal.
1. Outer pane of 1/4" glass, inner pane of 1/4" tempered glass.
2. Place low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit.
3. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773, Class CBA.
4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
5. Total unit thickness of 1 inch.
6. light transmittance at center glass of 25-34 percent, solar heat gain coefficient of less than
0.32.
7. Winter U value at center glass of less than 0.36.
E. Insulated Glass Units for residential living units: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal.
1. Outer pane of 2mm or greater than 1/4" glass, inner pane of 2mm or greater than 1/4" glass.
2. Place low E coating on [ No.2 or No.3] surface within the unit.
3. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
4. Total unit thickness of 5/8 to 1 inch.
5. light transmittance at center glass of 30-50 percent, solar heat gain coefficient less than or
equal to 0.45. For large or extensive areas of east and west facing windows visual light
transmittance at center glass less than or equal to 30-40 percent, solar heat gain coefficient
10731 GLAZING 08 80 00-5

less than 0.40.
6. Winter U value at center glass of less than 0.36.
2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dow Corning Corp.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Butyl Sealant: Single component; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.
C. Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non-bleeding; cured Shore A hardness of 15
to 25; color as selected.
D. Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss
of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Norton Performance Plastics Corp.
2. Pecora Corp.
3. Tremco, Inc.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I.
Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet
space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
C. Edge Blocks: Neoprene of hardness required to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
D. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.
Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self
adhesive on one face.
E. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two
sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent, designed for compression of 25
percent to effect an air barrier and vapor retarder seal.
F. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
C864 Option I; black color.
G. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
10731 GLAZING 08 80 00-6

3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)
A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to
attain full contact.
C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)
A. Cut glazing spline to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing
junctions with butyl sealant.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full
contact.
D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
E. Trim protruding tape edge.
3.05 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their
products.
B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape and held away from
glass; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. Do not apply markers to glass
surface.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations
including weld splatter. If contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, alkali
deposits, or stains and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way,
including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during the construction period.
END OF SECTION
10731 GLAZING 08 80 00-7

SECTION 08 83 00
MIRRORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass mirrors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Metal-framed mirrors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
B. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
C. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.
D. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.
E. GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and
Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers
(http://www.mirrorlink.org/members/technical.htm).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods.
B. Provide products obtained from one source for each type of mirror indicated.
C. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with
recommendations of GANA (TIPS) "Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional
on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of
same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Mirrors:
10731 MIRRORS 08 83 00-1

2.02 MATERIALS
1. Binswanger Mirror/ACI Distribution: www.binswangerglass.com.
2. Carolina Mirror Co.
3. Lenoir Mirror Co: www.lenoirmirror.com.
4. Messer Industries.
5. Virginia Mirror Company., Inc.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
A. Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored
glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less.
B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q1 (mirror select);
silvering, protective coating and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503; 6.0 mm
minimum thick.
1. Beveled edge.
2. Size as indicated on drawings.
2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
B. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips.
C. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to
receive mirrors.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime
surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release sealants. Install
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations.
B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion.
C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or
backsplashes.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after work is complete.
C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.
10731 MIRRORS 08 83 00-2

B. Protect mirrored glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
C. Wash glass by methods recommended in NAMM document and by manufacturer. Use water or
glass cleaners free of deleterious substances capable of damaging mirror.
END OF SECTION
10731 MIRRORS 08 83 00-3

SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B. Metal channel ceiling framing.
C. Acoustic insulation.
D. Cementitious backing board.
E. Gypsum wallboard.
F. Joint treatment and accessories.
G. Textured finish system.
H. Acoustic sealant.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for support of wall mounted
components.
B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation.
C. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping and fire-rated joint sealants.
D. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.
B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units.
C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board.
D. ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board.
E. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood
Framing.
F. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
G. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
H. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness.
I. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application
of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
J. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
Veneer Base.
K. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate
Sheets.
10731 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-1

L. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
M. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
N. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
O. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
P. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
Q. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association.
R. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association.
S. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of openings with size, location and installation of
service utilities.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the
work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
C. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data and Sample: Provide data and sample on metal framing, gypsum board,
accessories, acoustical products, acoustical products, accessories, and joint finishing system.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing
compliance with requirements.
D. Samples: Submit five samples of gypsum board finished with proposed texture application, 12
by 12 inches in size, illustrating finish color and texture.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and
finishing, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain finishing products from same manufacturer of gypsum
board or panel products, or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the brand name and
product identification of manufacturer.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent
sagging off the ground of slab.
C. Stack gypsum board were directed by Hoffman representative. Space stacks across floor. Do
not exceed live load capacity of floor system.
D. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or
otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install or finish gypsum board unless environmental conditions comply with ASTM C 840
10731 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-2

or with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Ventilate spaces as required for drying joint and finish materials. Avoid drafts to prevent
finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B. Interior Partitions: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
C. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with applicable code.
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.
2. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com.
3. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com.
4. Unimast Inc.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
2. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.
3. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building
is enclosed and conditioned.
3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;
if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch.
b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.
5. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Board.
b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Brand XP Wallboard.
d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C. Backing Board For Wet Areas:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and
shower ceilings.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels with
glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or
10731 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-3

ASTM C1325.
a. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
b. Products:
1) Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
2) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Brand Cement Board.
3) USG Corporation; Durock Brand Cement Board.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;
sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Products:
a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board.
b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling.
c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; ToughRock CD Ceiling Board.
d. Lafarge North America Inc; Sagcheck.
e. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board.
f. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Ceiling Board.
g. Temple-Inland Inc; Span24 Ceiling Board.
h. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Sag-Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board.
i. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation - Interior Fire Rated Partition Walls: Mineral fiber blanket thermal insulation,
preformed, friction fit, unfaced rock wool, similar to Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blanket
(SAFB) as manufactured by Thermafiber, Inc.
1. Density: 2.5 pcf (nominal).
B. Acoustic Insulation - Interior Partition Walls: Mineral fiber blanket thermal insulation, preformed,
friction fit, unfaced rock wool, similar to Thermafiber FS 15 as manufactured by Thermafiber, Inc.
1. Density: 3.0 pcf (nominal).
C. Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M
and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning.
1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:
a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track
and floor.
D. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead
at exposed panel edges.
3. Manufacturers - Finishing Accessories:
a. Same manufacturer as framing materials.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
E. Trim Accessories: Paper faced metal bead and trim unless otherwise noted.
1. Corner Beads: Paper faced, similar to B1 series by USG.
2. Corner Reinforcement: Galvanized steel, similar to Dur-A-Bead manufactured by USG.
3. Control Joint: Bent zinc sheet formed with V shaped slot, covered with plastic tape, with
perforated flanges and complying with ASTM C 1047.
a. Width as required or detailed.
F. Trim: ASTM C 840; Bead type Bead type(s) as detailed.
G. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
10731 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-4

conditions.
1. Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners.
2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
3. Powder-type vinyl-based joint compound.
H. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to
take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.
I. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; Unaggregated texture coating.
J. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members,
and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior
locations.
K. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 Inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;
steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
L. Nails for Attachment to Wood Members: ASTM C514.
M. Hanger Wire: 8 gauge, galvanized wire.
N. Tie Wire: 18 gauge, galvanized wire.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Prepared spaces are sized and located in accordance with drawings.
2. Framing, reinforcement, and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in
accordance with shop drawings.
B. Installer's Examination:
1. Examine conditions under which installation is to be performed; submit written notification if
such conditions are unacceptable.
2. Installation activities before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is prohibited.
3. Installation indicates installer's acceptance of conditions.
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.
C. Door Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using
not less than double studs at jambs.
1. At all doors openings, install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise noted. One stud
each side shall be minimum 20 gauge.
2. For heavy doors 200 to 300 lbs and up to 48 inches in width, install two 20 gauge studs
each side of opening.
3. Design framing for door more than 48 inches wide, double doors, and extra heavy doors to
meet loading conditions.
4. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
D. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for
door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match
framing required above door heads.
E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more
than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate
channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.
10731 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-5

1. Orientation: Horizontal.
2. Spacing: At 24 inches on center, unless otherwise noted.
F. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over
framing members.
G. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600
requirements.
3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and
rough-in boxes.
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 840. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible
locations.
B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and
edges occurring over firm bearing.
C. Single-Layer Fire-Rated: Install gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over
firm bearing.
D. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of
assembly listing.
E. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members where indicated, in
accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.
F. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layer
of non-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination.
G. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing
authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows:
1. Single-Layer Applications: Screw attachment.
H. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior
gypsum soffit board with sealant.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Place control joints where noted on drawings or as follows:
1. Where partitions, furring, or column fireproofing abuts a structural element or dissimilar wall
or ceiling (except floors).
2. Ceiling or soffit abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition, or other vertical
penetration.
3. Not more than 30 feet for walls and partitions.
4. Not more than 50 feet in either direction for ceilings with perimeter relief, 30 feet without
relief.
5. At locations of control joints that occur in the building.
6. Wings of "L", "U", and "T" shaped ceilings areas that are common or joined.
7. Construction changes within the plane of a partition or ceiling.
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
10731 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-6

C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.
3.06 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint
compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive flat or eggshell paint finish or wall coverings, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Level 4: Walls to receive light textured wall finish.
3. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas
specifically indicated.
4. Level 1: Wall and fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in
the completed construction, unless a higher level of finish is needed.
5. Level 0: Temporary partitions and surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of project.
C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
D. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after
joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.
E. Tape and finish wallboard for a minimum of 6" above finish ceiling elevation.
F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim or accessories having
concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from occuring..
G. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.07 TEXTURE FINISH
A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and to match approved sample. Provide Spatter Knock-down for wall and ceiling as
indicated on drawings.
B. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not scheduled to receive texture
finishes. Cover with visqueen or other masking agents as required.
C. Finish shall extend a minimum of 6" above finish ceiling elevation.
D. Immediately remove finish materials from surfaces note scheduled to receive finish to prevent
damage.
3.08 CLEANUP
A. Cleanup, remove from the site, and legally dispose of all materials related to work in this section.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
in any direction.
END OF SECTION
10731 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16-7

SECTION 09 30 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tile for Floor & Wall applications
B. Tile Adhesives & Grout
C. Ceramic Accessories
TILING
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A108 Series/AII8 Series/A136.1 American National Standard Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile
B. TCA (HB) – Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of America, Inc.
C. Floor Tiles: Static coefficient of friction not less than 0.6 for level surfaces, per
ASTM C 1028.
1.03 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide 15 sq. ft. of each size and color of tile specified.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
B. Samples.
1. Full Size Tile and Trim Samples
2. Grout Color Samples
3. Sealant Color Samples
C. Maintenance Data: Include procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Use low VOC adhesives, grouts, and setting materials as recommended by the product
manufacturers and as required to meet LEED criteria for Indoor Environmental Quality Credit
low emitting materials; adhesives and sealants.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during tiling and
for a minimum of 7 days after completion.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years commercial tile installation experience
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation
B. Protect setting materials from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions
10731 TILING 09 30 00 - 1

C. Store tile and setting materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location and
protect from contamination, dampness, freezing or overheating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CERAMIC TILE
A. Ceramic tile that complies with standard grade requirements in ANSI A137.1, "Specifications
for Ceramic Tile."
B. FLOOR TILE: PORCELAIN TILE
1. Products: PT1/PTB1
a. American Olean; Unglazed Mosaics
2. Facial Dimensions:
a. PT1 - 2" x 2"
3. Thickness: 1/4 inches.
4. Color: As selected.
5. Trim/Base PTB1: MT6; 3 rows built-up 2x2 base, same as floor tile
C. FLOOR TILE: PORCELAIN TILE
1. Products: PT2/PTB2/WT1/WT2
a. Crossville: Vista Americana
2. Facial Dimensions:
a. PT2 - 12" x 12" (11 3/4" x 11 3/4" actual)
b. Accent Tile - 2"x2" mosaic tile, sheet mounted
3. Thickness: 3/8 inches.
4. Color: As selected.
5. Trim/Base PTB2: 6" x 12" Cove Base & 4" x 12" Bullnose
D. FLOOR TILE: PORCELAIN TILE
1. Products: PT3
a. TBD, Similar to PT2
2. Facial Dimensions:
a. PT3 - 12" x 12"
3. Thickness: 3/8 inches.
4. Color: As selected.
E. FLOOR TILE: QUARRY TILE
1. Products: QT/QTB
a. Dal: Quarry Tile
2. Facial Dimensions: 6" x 6"
3. Thickness: 1/2"
4. Color: As Selected
10731 TILING 09 30 00 - 2

5. Trim/Base: 5" x 6" Cove Base
F. WALL TILE: PORCELAIN TILE
1. Products: WT3, WT4
a. Crossville: Palais
2. Facial Dimensions: 12" x 12" (11 3/4" x 11 3/4" actual)
3. Thickness: 3/8"
4. Color: As selected.
5. Trim: 4" x 12" Bullnose
6. Accent Tile: Chair rail - 1 3/4" x 7 13/16" & Decorative Inserts - 4" x 4"
2.02 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Setting and Grouting Materials: Comply with material standards in ANSI's "Specifications for
the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to materials and methods indicated.
B. Products shall comply with LEED criteria for Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 4.1 low
emitting materials; adhesives and sealants and shall not exceed 65 g/l VOC Limit
a. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets for any products not specifically listed in this
specification for approval.
1. Thin-Set Mortar Type: Portland cement
a. Approved Products:
1) Mapei Ultraflex 2 Professional Grade Polymer-Modified Mortar
2) Mapei Ultracontact Premium Full Contact Tile Mortar
3) TEC Full Flex Latex Modified Thin Set Mortar
2. Grout Type: Standard cementitious grout (sanded and unsanded) is to be used throughout
per ANSI 118.6 with the exception of grout for commercial kitchen quarry tile which shall be;
Water-cleanable epoxy for kitchen quarry tile per ANSI 118.3.
a. Approved Products:
1) Cementitious Grout - Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout (sanded) & Hydroment
Dry Tile Grout (unsanded)
2) Epoxy Grout - Bostik EzPoxy Mortar & Grout
3. Grout Color: As selected
C. Setting-Bed Accessories: ANSI A108.1A.
D. Cementitious Backer Units: Complying with ANSI A118.9, of thickness indicated.
E. Waterproofing Membranes for Thin-Set Installations: ANSI A118.10
F. Tub & Shower Locations: Contractor is to caulk all perimeter edges and seal around
bathtubs and shower enclosures with Tub & Tile Caulk in colors coordinating with adjacent
wall, tile, and grout colors.
1. Approved Products: Bostik CeramaSeal Tub & Tile Caulk
G. Grout Sealer: Contractor is to Seal all standard cementitious grout joints with grout sealant
1. Approved Products: Aqua Mix Sealer's Choice Gold
10731 TILING 09 30 00 - 3

H. Silicone Caulk: Contracter is to seal all drains and plumbing penetrations with pure silicone
caulk.
1. Approved Products: Bostik Pure Silicone Caulk
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with tile installation standards in ANSI's "Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic
Tile" that apply to materials and methods indicated.
B. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."
C. Floor Tile Installation Methods:
1. Over Concrete Subfloors: Install in accordance with TCA Handbook method F112,
cement mortar bed bonded to concrete slab & F113, thin-set mortar bonded to concrete
slab.
2. Over Wood Subfloors: Install in accordance with TCA Handbook method F142, organic
adhesive over wood subfloor.
D. Wall Tile Installation Methods:
1. Over Gypsum Board on Wood or Metal Studs: Install in accordance with TCA Handbook
method W243, thin set with dry set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Over Cementitious Backer Units: Install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method
W223, organic adhesive.
E. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, provide cementitious backer units and treat joints to
comply with ANSI A108.11.
F. Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where adjoining tiles on floor,
base, walls, and trim are the same size.
G. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges
of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to
electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap
tile.
H. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.
I. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Keep
joints as narrow as possible with the larger tile sizes. Make joints watertight, without voids,
cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
J. Form internal angles coved, and external angles bullnosed.
K. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
L. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
N. Clean tile and grout surfaces and leave finished tile work clean and free of chipped, broken,
unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work.
O. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 7 days after installation.
END OF SECTION
10731 TILING 09 30 00 - 4

SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant.
C. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.
D. Section 21 13 00 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
E. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
F. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
G. Section 27 51 17 - Public Address Systems: Speakers in ceiling system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient
heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed,
tested, and approved.
B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning and junctions with other ceiling
finishes.
C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.
D. Samples: Submit two full size samples illustrating material and finish of acoustical units.
E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 24 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross
runner, and perimeter molding.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.
10731 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-1

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single
manufacturer.
B. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work
including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical
systems, electrical systems, and fire protection systems.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a
fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent
prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Celotex Corp.
3. USG Interiors, Inc.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
C. Acoustical Panels Type AT1: ASTM E 1264 Type III, Painted mineral fiber, conforming to the
following:
1. Size: 24 x 24 inches.
2. Thickness: 3/4 inches.
3. Composition: Water felted.
4. Light Reflectance: 86 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
5. NRC Range: 0.70 to 0.75, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
6. Sag Resistance: Provide 10 year warranty.
7. STC Range: 35 to 39.
8. Edge: Beveled.
9. Surface Color: White.
10. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.
11. Product: Cirrus Tegular by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
12. Suspension System: Exposed grid, 9/16 inches.
D. Acoustical Panels Type AT2: ASTM E1264 Type IV,Vinyl faced gypsum, conforming to the
following:
1. Size: 24 x 24 inches.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inches.
10731 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-2

3. Edge: Square.
4. Surface Color: White.
5. Surface Pattern: Embossed stipple pattern.
6. Product: Sheetrock, ClimaPlus by USG Interiors, Inc.
7. Suspension System: Exposed grid Type DX, 15/16".
E. Acoustical Panels Type AT3: ASTM E 1264 Type III, Painted mineral fiber, conforming to the
following:
1. Size: 24 x 24 inches.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inches.
3. Composition: Water felted.
4. Light Reflectance: 83 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264.
5. NRC Range: 0.50 to 0.55, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264.
6. Sag Resistance: Provide 10 year warranty.
7. STC Range: 30 to 34.
8. Edge: Square.
9. Surface Color: White.
10. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.
11. Product: Dune by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
12. Suspension System: Exposed grid, 15/16 inches.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation: www.chicagometallic.com.
4. USG: www.usg.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C635; die cut and interlocking components, with
stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.
C. Interior Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed galvanized steel, commercial quality cold
rolled; Intermediate-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 9/16 inch and 15/16 inch wide face.
2. Construction: Double web.
3. Finish: White painted.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic
requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid or the ceiling system specified.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
C. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and
painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by
manufacturer's printed recommendation.
10731 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-3

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and
manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.
B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
deflection of 1:360.
C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan, with a minimum 2" tile width at edges.
D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work.
E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to
exceed deflection capability.
H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or
support components independently.
I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with
other interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F. Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.
2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges.
G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.
H. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
3.05 CLEAN UP
A. Remove cut-offs and carton waste to dumpster or as designated. Leave rooms clean.
B. Replace damaged and broken panels.
10731 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-4

C. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge mouldings, and suspension
members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permananently eliminate evidence of damage.
D. Deliver extra stock to Owner at close-out.
END OF SECTION
10731 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-5

SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient sheet flooring
B. Resilient Base
C. Installation accessories
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of
Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method
B. ASTM D 2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor
Covering Materials.
C. ASTM D 3884 - Standard Guide for Abrasion Resistance of Textile Fabrics (Rotary Platform,
Double-Head Method), Abrasion Wheels- H18 with 1000grams load.
D. ASTM E 492 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Impact Sound
Transmission Through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine.
E. ASTM E 662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid
Materials.
F. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
G. ASTM E 989 - Standard Classification for Determination of Impact Insulation Class (IIC).
H. ASTM F 137 - Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials with Cylindrical
Mandrel Apparatus.
I. ASTM F 386 - Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat
Surfaces.
J. ASTM F 925 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring.
K. ASTM F 970 - Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit.
L. ASTM F 1514 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Heat Stability of Resilient Flooring by Color
Change.
M. ASTM F 1515 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring by Col
or Change.
N. ASTM F 1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile.
O. ASTM F 1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete
Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
P. ASTM F 1914 - Standard Test Methods for Short-Term Indentation and Residual Indentation of
Resilient Floor Covering.
Q. ASTM F 2055 - Standard Test Method for Size and Squareness of Resilient Floor Tile by Dial
Gage Method.
R. ASTM F 2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor
Slabs Using in situ Probes.
S. ASTM F 2199 - Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensional Stability of Resilient Floor
Tile after Exposure to Heat.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Test Response: Resilient tile has critical radiant flux classification of Class I, not less than
0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.
10731 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 1

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Samples.
B. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning and finishing.
C. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner at least 100 sq. feet, in roll form and in full roll width, for each
type and color of sheet vinyl floor covering installed.
D. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner at least 50 linear feet, of each type and color of resilient wall
base installed.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years commercial resilient flooring installation
experience
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Flooring material and adhesive shall be acclimated to the installation area for a minimum of 48
hours prior to installation.
C. Store cartons of tile products flat and squarely on top of one another, not on edge.
D. Protect all materials from damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING SV1 - SV5
A. Products:
1. Teknoflor Wood Grain Collection & Forestscapes as selected
2. Toli Mature
B. Color and Pattern: As selected
C. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering With Backing: ASTM F 1303, Type I, Grade 1.
1. Overall Thickness: 2.3mm
2. Backing Class: Class B.
D. Wearing Surface: Embossed.
E. Sheet Width: 6 ' wide
F. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
G. Adhesive: Use Epoxy Type Adhesive Appropriate for use with Hospital Beds and as
Recommended by Manufacturer in all Resident Rooms & Nurse's Stations. Standard adhesive
as recommended by Flooring Manufacturer can be used in all other areas.
10731 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 2

2.02 ALT BID VINYL FLOOR COVERING SV1 - SV5
A. Products:
1. Mannington: Nature's Paths Luxury Vinyl Plank
B. Color and Pattern: As selected
C. Vinyl Plank per ASTM F-1700, Class 3, Type B
1. Overall Thickness: .100"
D. Wearing Surface: Embossed.
E. Size: 3" x 36" Plank
F. Adhesive: Use Epoxy Type Adhesive Appropriate for use with Hospital Beds and as
Recommended by Manufacturer at all Resident Rooms & Nurses Stations. Standard
adhesive as recommended by Flooring Manufacturer can be used in all other areas.
2.03 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING SV6
A. Products:
1. Mannington: Assurance II
B. Color and Pattern: As selected
C. Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, .080” thick.
D. Wearing Surface: Embossed.
E. Sheet Width: 6 feet.
F. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
2.04 SOLID DECORATIVE VINYL TILE VT1
A. Products:
1. Amtico; Stone
2. Centiva; Event
B. Color and Pattern: As Selected
C. ASTM F 1700, Class III, Printed Film Vinyl Tile, Type B, Embossed Surface.
D. Thickness: 2.5mm
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
2.05 VINYL COMPOSITE TILE VCT1
A. Products:
1. Mannington: Essentials
B. Color and Pattern: As selected
C. Vinyl Composition Tile Floor Covering: ASTM F-1066, Class 2
1. Overall Thickness: 1/8”
D. Size: 12”x12”
10731 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 3

2.06 DECORATIVE WALL BASE RB1 - RB5
A. Products:
1. Johnsonite; Millwork Wall Art - Traditional Cove Base
B. Color: As selected.
C. ASTM F 1861, Type TP (thermoplastic).
D. Style: #WA-XX
E. Thickness: .125"
F. Height: 4"
G. Lengths: Cut lengths 8 feet long.
H. Outside Corners: field miter.
I. Inside Corners: field formed.
2.07 STANDARD WALL BASE RB6, RB7
A. Products:
1. Johnsonite; Standard Rubber Cove Base
B. Color: As selected.
C. ASTM F 1861, Type TS (thermoset rubber).
D. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid).
E. Style: Cove (with top-set toe).
F. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
G. Height: 4 inches.
H. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long.
I. Outside Corners: premolded.
J. Inside Corners: field formed.
2.08 RESILIENT ACCESSORY
A. Products:
1. Johnsonite
B. Color: As Selected.
C. Description:
1. SSR-XX-B Reducer at resilient to floor transitions
2. CTA-XX-H Wheeled Traffic Transition at 1/4" carpet to resilient flooring transitions
3. CTA-XX-J Wheeled Traffic Transition at 1/4" carpet to floor transitions
4. CTA-XX-H For Porcelain Tile to Resilient Transitions
5. SCC-XX-A Cove Cap for Coved Sheet Vinyl Base
D. Material: Vinyl.
10731 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 4

2.09 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowel-able Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- or blended
hydraulic cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: For Wood Sheet Vinyl & Plank Products (SV1-SV5) Flooring adhesive is to be
epoxy type as recommended by flooring manufacturer and suitable for use under hospital beds
in all resident rooms and nurse stations. For all other resilient flooring locations, use Solvent
Free, Low VOC, Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor
covering and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer.
1. Color: Match floor covering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. Verify that substrates are dry and free
of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
B. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction, and match edges for color shading at
seams.
C. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6
inches away from parallel joints in substrates.
D. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
E. Fit joints tightly and make vertical
F. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units (except for wall art base which
will all have to be mitered).
G. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
H. Adhesively install resilient wall base and accessories.
I. Install wall base in maximum lengths possible. Maintain minimum dimension of 18” between
joints. Apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or
areas where base is required.
J. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
K. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed.
L. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of doors, terminate flooring under centerline
of door.
M. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.
N. Clean and seal resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
O. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Wipe off any adhesive on floor as installation proceeds. Wait 48 hours before applying the
cleaning and maintenance products.
B. Clean, seal, and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
10731 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 5

3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation
END OF SECTION
10731 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 - 6

SECTION 09 68 00
CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpet, direct glued.
B. Carpet Tile, direct glued
C. Walk-Off Carpet
D. Accessories
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D 2859 Standard Test for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering
Materials.
B. ASTM E 648 – Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
C. CRI 104 Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floor Covering Materials; Carpet and
Rug Institute.
D. NFPA 253 – Standard Method of Text for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on specified products
1. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance
materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.
2. Provide Flame Spread Certificates.
B. Product Samples
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Use low VOC adhesives as recommended by the product manufacturers.
B. Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner full-width carpet equal to 5 percent of each type and color
carpet installed, packaged with protective covering for storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CARPET CPT1 & CPT3
A. Products:
1. Tandus; Watercourse 44044, Color: As Selected
B. Fiber Content: Dynex SD Nylon
10731 CARPETING 09 68 00 - 1

C. Dye Method: Solution Dye
D. Backing System: LifeLong acrylic polymeric backing
E. Size: 12' width
F. Gauge: 1/10"
G. Pattern Repeat: 12" wide x N/A long
H. Rep: Aimee Jackson (816) 678-8605
2.02 CARPET CPT2, CPT4, & CPT5
A. Products:
1. Tandus; Coastal 44045, Color: As Selected
B. Fiber Content: Dynex SD Nylon
C. Dye Method: Solution Dyed
D. Backing System: LifeLong acrylic polymeric backing
E. Width: 12’-0”
F. Gauge: 1/10”
G. Pattern Repeat: 12”W x 2'-0" L
H. Rep: Aimee Jackson (816) 678-8605
2.03 WALK-OFF CARPET TILE WF1
A. Products:
1. Lee's; Step Up DD763, Color: As Selected
B. Size: 24" x 24" Modular Tile, Install Quarter Turned
C. Fiber Content: Fortis Type 6,6 Nylon with Nylon 6,6 scraper yarn
D. Dye Method: Yarn Dyed
E. Yarn Weight: 38 oz./sq. yd.
F. Gauge: 5/32
G. Backing: Fiberglass Reinforced Thermoplastic Composite
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer
B. Adhesives: Low VOC, Compatible with materials being adhered and as recommended by
carpet manufacturer
C. Seam Adhesive: Low VOC, & as Recommended by manufacturer
D. Contact Adhesive: Low VOC, & as Recommended by manufacturer; releasable type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down.", & Section 10, "Attached Cushion."
10731 CARPETING 09 68 00 - 2

B. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
by carpet manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
C. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Apply trowel and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard
surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D. Install in accordance with manufacturer recommended methods and adhesives.
E. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in
closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
G. Locate seams in areas of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main traffic.
H. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
I. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesives from floor and wall surfaces without damage
B. Clean and Vacuum carpet surfaces
END OF SECTION
10731 CARPETING 09 68 00 - 3

SECTION 09 91 00 – PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface Preparation.
B. Field application of interior paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 16 – Standard Terminology for Paint, Coatings, Materials, and Applications.
B. ASTM D 4442 – Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of
Wood and Wood-Base Materials
1.3 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Summary: Paint exposed surfaces, new and existing, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint the back side of access panels.
2. Color-code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces.
3. Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and
labels, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
C. Mockups: Full-coat finish Sample of each type of coating, color, and substrate, applied
where directed.
D. Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from same manufacturer as
finish coats.
E. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner 1 gal. of each color and type of finish coat paint used
on Project, in containers, properly labeled and sealed. Include manufacturer’s name,
type, and color of paint on container labels.
F. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and
finishes.
10731 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 1

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Products supplied as part of the work in this section shall be V.O.C. compliant with
local, state, and federal regulations.
B. Products supplied as part of the work in this section shall meet requirements for LEED
Indoor Enviromental Quality, Credit 4.2 Low Emitting Materials, Paints and Coatings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT
A. Products:
1. Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams or Equal
2. Colors: As selected.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with
substrates.
C. Material Quality: Manufacturer's best-quality paint material of coating types specified
that are formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove hardware, lighting fixtures and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask
items that cannot be removed. Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete.
B. Clean and prepare all surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area.
Schedule painting so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to coating
manufacturer’s written instructions.
1. Spray paint door frames. Use brushes only where the use of other applicators is
not practical.
2. Use rollers or spray wall, then back roll for finish coat on interior walls and
ceilings.
B. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform appearance. Provide a finish free of cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
10731 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 2

C. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface
film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity,
brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
D. Painted woodwork should be cleaned and de-glossed prior to receiving paint.
E. Marks: Seal with shellac marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium
phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects
after repair.
H. Interior Wood Items to receive stained finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing,
seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks
after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats.
I. Fill nail holes on all trim components, including grilles for glass lites in doors and
windows.
J. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is
applied.
K. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before
next coat is applied.
L. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and paint separately.
M. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that
are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible
surfaces.
N. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets
to match face panels.
O. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
P. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers, and remove daily from site.
10731 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 3

3.3 PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Gypsum Board/Plaster Walls:
1. Eggshell Latex:
a. 1st coat Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC primer, min. 1.6 mils DFT,
min. VOC 0 g/l.
b. 2 nd coat Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC, eggshell finish, min. 1.7 mils
DFT per coat, min. VOC 0 g/l.
c. 3rd coat Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC 200, eggshell finish, min.
1.7 mils DFT per coat, min.
2. Eg-Shel Epoxy:
a. 1st coat Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC primer100% acrylic primer,
min. 1.2 mils DFT, min. VOC 0 g/l.
b. 2 nd coat pre-catalyzed water based epoxy, Sherwin Williams K-45 series,
eg-shel finish, 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT per coat, min. VOC 141 g/l.
c. 3rd coat pre-catalyzed water based epoxy, Sherwin Williams K-45 series,
eg-shel finish, 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT per coat, min.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Walls:
1. Eggshell Latex:
a. 1st coat over block filler Not Required
b. 2 nd coat over block filler Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC, eggshell
finish, min. 1.7 mils DFT per coat, min. VOC 0 g/l.
c. 3rd coat over block filler Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC, eggshell
finish, min. 1.7 mils DFT per coat.
2. Eg-Shel Epoxy:
a. 1st coat over block filler Not Required
b. 2 nd coat pre-catalyzed water based epoxy, Sherwin Williams K-45 series,
eg-shel finish, 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT per coat, min.VOC 141 g/l.
c. 3rd coat pre-catalyzed water based epoxy, Sherwin Williams K-45 series,
eg-shel finish, 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT per coat, min.
C. Gypsum Board/Plaster Ceilings:
1. Flat Latex:
a. 1st coat Sherwin Williams Harmony ProMar 200 0 VOC, min. 1.4 mils DFT,
min. VOC 0 g/l.
b. 2 nd coat Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC, flat finish, min. 1.2 mils DFT
per coat, VOC 0 g/l.
c. 3rd coat Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC, flat finish, min. 1.2 mils DFT
per coat, min.
2. Eg-Shel Epoxy:
a. 1st coat Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 0 VOC primer100% acrylic primer,
min. 1.2 mils DFT, min. 28% volume solids.
b. 2 nd coat pre-catalyzed water based epoxy, Sherwin Williams K-45 series,
eg-shel finish, 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT per coat, VOC 141 g/l.
10731 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 4

c. 3rd coat pre-catalyzed water based epoxy, Sherwin Williams K-45 series,
eg-shel finish, 2.5 – 3.0 mils DFT per coat, min.
D. Stained Woodwork:
1. Satin Finish:
a. 1 st Coat: V.O.C. compliant wiping stain Minwax 250 VOC 250 g/l.
b. 2 nd Coat: Sherwin Williams waterbourne wood classics A68 series
Polyurethane satin varnish, minimum 1.7 mils DFT per coat, VOC 309 g/l.
c. 3 rd Coat: Sherwin Williams waterbourne wood classics A68 series
Polyurethane satin varnish, minimum 1.7 mils DFT per coat.
E. Ferrous Metal:
1. Semi Gloss Acrylic:
a. 1 st Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66-310
Series under 100 g/l VOC
b. 2 nd Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro Classic Waterbourne Acrylic, Semi-gloss
finish B31 144 g/l VOC
c. 3rd Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro Classic Waterbourne Acrylic, Semi-gloss
finish B31 144 g/l VOC
F. Exterior Ferrous Metal:
1. Semi Gloss Acrylic:
a. 1 st Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66-310
Series under 100 g/l VOC
b. 2 nd Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic, Semi-gloss finish
B31 144 g/l VOC
c. 3rd Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic, Semi-gloss finish
B31 144 g/l VOC
END OF SECTION 09 91 00
10731 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 5

SECTION 101453
TRAFFIC SIGNAGE AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Traffic Signs
B. Pavement Markings
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
B. Wisconsin Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) – latest edition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shall conform to Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit color scaled drawings of each sign face and specifications of finish.
C. Submit product information and testing per WisDOT Section 646.2.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STORAGE
A. The Contractor is responsible for damage or vandalism to signage unit entire
project is completed and Owner takes over the site.
B. Signage shall be provided by a Manufacturer regularly engaged in work of this
type, magnitude, and scope for am minimum of 5 years.
C. Signage shall be designed for appropriate wind loading. Wind load calculations
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
D. Signage shall conform to all local ordinances.
1.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
10731 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 101453-1

PART 2
MATERIALS
2.1 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
A. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing sign panels and posts in
accordance with the applicable provisions of WisDOT Specifications.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install the signs listed on the drawings.
C. Each sign shall be in accordance with the latest State Standard Signs Manual
and with the State Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
D. All signs shall be "high intensity" grade reflective sheeting.
E. Each sign panel shall be installed at the location directed by the Engineer. The
approximate location of each sign is shown on the plan sheets.
F. Signs shall be mounted on flanged channel sign posts and shall be a minimum of
2.75 pounds per foot.
G. All flanged channel posts, round steel sign poles and mounting hardware shall be
primed and painted or the galvanized coating etched with an approved
compound designed for that purpose and painted.
2.2 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pavement markings shall be paint and conform to WisDOT Section 646.2.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. All pavement marking equipment shall conform to the applicable requirements of
WisDOT Section 646.3.2.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install signs in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the drawings.
Ensure the installation is proper so as to avoid warps, buckles, distortions,
opening up of joints or overstressing of welds and fasteners.
B. Install signs in accordance with WisDOT Section 653 – Signing.
C. Install pavement markings in accordance with WisDOT Section 646.3 and
WisDOT Section 647.3.
D. Protect fresh paint. Remove and replace all markings that are damaged.
10731 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 101453-2

3.2 CLEANING
A. At the completion of the project, clean all exposed surfaces in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
10731 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 101453-3

SECTION 10 21 13.13
METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal toilet compartments, floor-mounted, overhead braced.
B. Compartment door hardware.
C. Urinal screens, wall-mounted.
D. Installation hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.
B. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
C. FS RR-P-1352 - Partitions, Toilet, Complete; Federal Specifications and Standard 1989.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and
ceilings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Dimensioned plans, indicating layout of toilet compartments.
2. Dimensioned elevations indicating heights of doors, pilasters, separation partitions, and
other components; indicate locations and sizes of openings in compartment separation
partitions for toilet and bath accessories to be installed in partition; indicate floor and ceiling
clearances.
3. Details indicating anchoring components and methods for project conditions; indicate
components required for installation, but not supplied by toilet compartment manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store compartment components in unopened cartons in vertical position until installation, with
adequate support to ensure flatness and to prevent damage to prefinished surfaces.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not deliver materials or begin construction activities of this section until building is enclosed,
with complete protection from outside weather, and building temperature maintained at a
minimum of 60 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
10731 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.13-1

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Toilet Compartments:
1. Accurate Partitions Corp: www.accuratepartitions.com.
2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.
3. Global Steel Products Corp: www.globalpartitions.com.
4. Metpar.
5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Toilet Compartments: Powder coated steel, floor-mounted unbraced.
B. Toilet Compartments: FS RR-P-1352; Powder coated steel, floor-mounted headrail-braced.
C. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core,
formed and closed edges; corners made with corner clips or mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
1. Panel Faces: 22 gage.
2. Pilaster Faces: 20 gage.
3. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations
of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories.
D. Door and Panel Dimensions:
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
E. Core: Kraft honeycomb, impregnated with water-resistant resins.
F. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing.
G. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets, and floor-to-ceiling vertical upright
consisting of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high,
concealing floor fastenings.
1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with
pilaster.
B. Head Rails: Hollow anodized aluminum tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti-grip strips and cast
socket wall brackets.
C. Brackets: Polished chrome-plated non-ferrous cast metal.
D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type.
1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof.
E. Hardware: Polished chrome plated non-ferrous cast metal:
1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door.
2. Thumb turn or sliding door latch with exterior emergency access feature.
3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door
latch.
4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door.
5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors.
2.05 FINISHING
A. Powder Coated Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with
10731 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.13-2

a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats powder coat enamel.
B. Color: Single color as selected.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.
D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.
E. Installer's Examination:
1. Installer is to examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to
be performed, then submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable.
2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Hoffman LLC within 24 hours of receipt.
3. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been
corrected is prohibited.
4. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of
conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters.
C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.
D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines.
E. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16
inch.
B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging
doors to closed position.
C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
3.05 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Prevent damage to product finishes by subsequent construction activities.
B. Repair damaged finishes; replace components having damaged finish if repair is not possible.
C. Remove factory protective coverings and clean finish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions before final inspection.
END OF SECTION
10731 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.13-3

SECTION 10 21 23
CUBICLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface mounted overhead metal curtain track and guides.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended ceiling system to support track.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films;
National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for curtain fabric characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate a reflected ceiling plan view of curtain track, hangers and suspension
points, attachment details, schedule of curtain sizes.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
E. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods and materials and stain removal
methods.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept curtain materials on site and inspect for damage.
B. Store curtain materials on site and deliver to Owner for installation when requested.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cubicle Curtains:
1. C/S General Cubicle: www.c-sgroup.com/cubicle-track-curtains.
2. Imperial Fastener Co., Inc: www.imperialfastener.com.
3. Salsbury Industries.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 TRACKS AND TRACK COMPONENTS
A. Track: Extruded aluminum sections; one piece per cubicle track run; I-beam profile.
B. Track End Stop, Tees, Y's, and Switches: To fit track section.
C. Curtain Carriers: Nylon slider to accurately fit track; designed to eliminate bind when curtain is
pulled; fitted to curtain to prevent accidental curtain removal; 4 carriers per foot of track length.
D. Wand: Aluminum hollow section, attached to lead carrier, for pull-to-close action.
2.03 CURTAINS
A. All Curtain Materials:
10731 CUBICLES 10 21 23-1

B. Curtain: Close weave cotton; anti-bacterial, self deodorizing, sanitized, and preshrunk.
C. Curtain: Standard color as selected by Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and supports above ceiling are ready to receive work of this Section.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install curtain track to be secure, rigid, and true to ceiling line.
B. Install end cap and stop device.
C. Secure track to ceiling system.
D. Install curtains on carriers ensuring smooth operation.
END OF SECTION
10731 CUBICLES 10 21 23-2

SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Corner Guards
B. Hand Rails
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities.
B. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and
Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Product Data and material Samples.
1. Indicate physical dimensions, features, wall mounting brackets with mounted
measurements, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements.
2. Submit one section illustrating color and finish.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide impact-resistant finishes with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
25 or less and 450 or less, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84.
B. Provide components with a minimum impact resistance of 30.2 ft-lbf/in. of width when
tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer's:
1. In Pro Corporation
2. C/S Acrovyn
B. Extruded Plastic: Textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant, PVC
or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic; thickness as indicated; with a minimum impact
resistance of 30.2 ft-lbf/in. of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test
Method A.
10731 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10 26 00

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
D. Adhesive: Low V.O.C. type recommended by manufacturer for use with material on
the substrate indicated.
2.02 COMPONENTS - HANDRAIL
A. Handrail with continuous, 0.080-inch thick, extruded vinyl snap-on cover and 0.080-
inch thick, continuous extruded-aluminum retainer.
1. Products:
a. IPC : #800W Series
b. C/S Acrovyn: #HRB-4CN with faux wood finish
2. Size and Profile: 5 1/2" Ht.
3. Color: As selected.
4. Returns, Inside Corners, Outside Corners, & Brackets shall be made of injection
molded thermoplastics
5. Fasteners: All mounting system accessories appropriate for substrates indicated
on the drawings shall be provided.
2.03 COMPONENTS - CORNERGUARD, SURFACE MOUNTED
A. Wall Protection System Surface Mounted Corner guard with continuous, 0.080-inch
thick, extruded-aluminum retainer and 0.080-inch thick, extruded-plastic cover.
1. Products:
a. IPC: #G150 Series
b. C/S Acrovyn: #SM-20N
2. Size and Profile: 3” x 3” x 3’ Ht.
3. Colors: As selected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install components level, plumb, and true to line without distortions, secured rigidly in
position with wall framing members.
B. Install corner guards at all outside corners as indicated.
10731 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10 26 00

C. Install handrail at height indicated on the drawings.
D. Coordinate the work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking
or anchor devices.
E. Install rails in maximum practical lengths, with minimum single-piece length 12 inches;
form hairline splice joints.
F. Position corner guard above base.
G. Install corner guard in single-piece length for each location.
H. Coordinate installation of frame and cover.
I. At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's
clean-up and maintenance instructions.
END OF SECTION
10731 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10 26 00

SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, and utility rooms.
B. Grab bars.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00: Placement of reinforcement for backing plate reinforcement.
B. Section 08 83 00 - Mirrors: Other mirrors.
C. Section 10 21 13.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
B. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service.
C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
E. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus
Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.
F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
G. GSA CID A-A-3002 - Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration.
H. FS DD-M-411 - Mirrors, Glass; Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision C, 1990.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function,
attachment methods.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Toilet Accessories:
1. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.
4. GAMCO.
B. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.
10731 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-1

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete
with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
1. Grind welded joints smooth.
2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.
B. Keys: Provide 6 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316.
E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with
G60/Z180 coating.
F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective
and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.
G. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.
H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.
I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
B. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats
epoxy baked enamel.
C. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M; galvanize ferrous
metal and fastening devices.
D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. See Accessories Schedule on Drawings for items to be provided.
B. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror.
C. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/4 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness,
nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall
and inside of grab bar.
1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings.
2.05 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES
A. Folding Shower Seat: Wall-mounted recessed; welded tubular seat frame, structural support
members, hinges and mechanical fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel, L-shaped, right and left
hand seat.
1. Size: ADA compliant.
2.06 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel.
1. Holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders.
2. Length: Manufacturer's standard length for number of holders.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
10731 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-2

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
D. See Section 06100 for installation of blocking, reinforcing plates, and concealed anchors in walls.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on
drawings
1. Bottom of Mirrors: Reference drawings.
END OF SECTION
10731 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-3

SECTION 10 31 00
MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manufactured steel box fireplace.
B. Accessories, including Remote control and wall switch.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rouigh Carpentry: Framed opening for fire box.
B. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL 127 - Standard for Factory-Built Fireplaces; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Built-in electric firebox.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide fire box cabinet dimensions, clearances required from adjacent dissimilar
construction, applicable regulatory agency approvals, electrical characteristics of fan.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate fire box rough opening dimensions, components and trim.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and component installation
sequence, clearances and tolerances from adjacent construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufactured Fireplaces: At Living, Dining locations
1. Simplifyre See Through Electric Fireplace; Product 28".
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Fire Box: Formed insulated steel cabinet, triangular corner shaped interior, configured to
include, perimeter trim.
1. See plan for locations.
B. Exposed Cladding: Prepainted steel.
C. Fire Box Closure: Clear tempered glass doors in black steel frame, butt hinged, friction catch.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel type.
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Exposed to View Surfaces: Baked enamel; standard color as selected.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
10731 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 10 31 00-1

A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
indicated on drawings.
B. Verify that proper power supply and fuel source are available.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL requirements.
B. Install chimney plumb through prepared openings using fire stop spacers.
C. Secure chimney in opening framing with appropriate fasteners.
D. Carefully cut holes for fan wall switch and grilles.
E. Install roof flashings to ensure moisture is shed from chimney flue.
END OF SECTION
10731 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 10 31 00-2

SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Fire extinguisher cabinets, rated where required.
C. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher
ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:
1. Ansul Fire Protection.
2. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.
3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.
4. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.
5. Walter Kidde, Division of Kidde, Inc..
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
B. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Class B:C.
2. Size 10.
3. UL rating: 4A-60B:C
4. Finish: Baked enamel, color as selected.
C. Foam Type Fire Extinguishers: Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Class: A:B.
10731 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00-1

2. Finish: Baked enamel, color as selected.
3. Temperature range: 40 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.
B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.
1. Sized to accommodate accessories.
2. Trim: Rolled Edge 2 1/2" Projection
C. Door: Manufacturer's standard thickness, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors
for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide roller type catch.
D. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick tempered. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing.
E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.
F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
G. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, color as selected.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, galvanized and enamel finished.
B. Graphic Identification: Silk Screen or Thermal Die Cut.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 30 inches from finished floor to inside bottom
of cabinet.
C. Secure rigidly in place.
D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets, or on wall brackets as indicated on plans.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. See Plans for locations
END OF SECTION
10731 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00-2

SECTION 10 51 00
LOCKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Locker units with hinged doors.
B. Metal bases.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Layout and dimensions of metal lockers and benches. Indicate relationship to
adjoining surfaces. Show locker elevations and details, fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and
accessories. Include locker numbering sequence. Indicate installation and anchorage
requirements.
D. Maintenance Instructions: Instructions for cleaning lockers and for adjusting, repairing, and
replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Lockers:
1. Art Metal Products: www.artmetalproducts.com.
2. Penco Products, Inc: www.pencoproducts.com.
3. Republic Storage Systems Co: www.republicstorage.com.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 50 (340), G90/Z275 coating, stretcher leveled,
free of buckling, scale, and surface imperfections; to the following minimum thicknesses:
1. Body and Shelf: 24 gage, 0.024 inch tops, shelves, backs and vertical dividers.
2. Door Outer Face: 14 gage .0747 inch (..
3. Door Inner Face: 20 gage, 0.036 inch with welded vertical 18 ga. stiffener attached to hinge
side and inside face of door as well as top and bottom return bends.
4. Door Frame: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch with steel vertical channel welded to 16 ga. horizontal
channel members. Provide rubber bumpers.
5. Hinges: Steel, full-loop, 13 gage, 5- or 7-knuckle tight pin, 2 inches high minimum. Weld
to inside of frame and secure to door with not fewer than 2 factory-installed fasteners that
are completely concealed and tamperproof when door is closed.
6. Stainless Steel Recessed Pan: 1-1/8 inch deep handle to completely recess a padlock or
built-in lock. Provide full width stainless handle with heavy duty pull.
10731 LOCKERS 10 51 00-1

7. Latch: Single point, 12 gage with pry resistant lug. Provide zinc plated hardware.
8. Base: 20 gage, 0.036 inch.
9. Trim: 20 gage, 0.036 inch.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories For Each Locker: Three single prong wall hooks, hat shelf and rubber bumper.
2.04 FABRICATION - SCHEDULE
A. Locker Unit - Type L1:
1. Size:
a. Width: 12 inches.
b. Depth: 15 inches.
c. Height: 60 inches.
2. Configuration: two tier.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Base: Metal base.
a. Base Height: 4 inch.
5. Locking: Equipped for padlock hasps.
6. Ventilation Method: Door louvers.
7. Class: Quiet.
2.05 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Locker Body: Formed and flanged; with steel stiffener ribs; bolted.
B. Frames: Formed channel shape, bolted, welded to body, resilient gaskets and latching for quiet
operation.
C. Doors: Hollow double pan, sandwich construction with acoustic insulation fill, 1-3/16 inch thick;
welded construction, channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs, grind and
finish edges smooth.
D. Hinges: Two for doors under 42 inches high; three for doors over 42 inches high; rivet securely
to locker body and door.
E. Locking device supplied by Owner.
F. Number Plates: Provide oval shaped aluminum plates. Form numbers 1/2 inch high of block
font style with ADA designation, in contrasting color.
G. Provide ventilation openings at top and bottom of each locker.
H. Form recess for operating handle and locking device.
I. Finish edges smooth without burrs.
J. Fabricate sloped metal tops in addition to the flat top, 16 gage ends, and closure pieces.
K. Provide end panels and 18 gage filler strips.
2.06 FINISHING
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil,
grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if
present, from uncoated steel complying with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC
SP 8 (Pickling), and phosphatized.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard baked-enamel finish consisting of a thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint
manufacturer's instructions for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.1 mils (0.028 mm) on doors, frames, and legs, and 0.7 mil (0.018 mm) elsewhere.
10731 LOCKERS 10 51 00-2

C. Paint locker units as selected from standard colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration.
B. Verify bases and embedded anchors are properly sized.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install lockers plumb and square.
C. Place and secure on prepared base.
D. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb.
E. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.
F. Install end panels, filler panels, and sloped tops.
G. Install accessories.
H. Replace components that do not operate smoothly.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces.
END OF SECTION
10731 LOCKERS 10 51 00-3

SECTION 10 56 17
WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shelf standards, brackets, and accessories.
B. Closet rods for mounting on brackets.
C. Shelves.
D. See drawings for locations and configurations.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking in walls for attachment of standards.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Brackets: Ten of each size of standard straight bracket.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Shelf Standards and Brackets:
1. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Standard Duty Shelf Standards: Single-slotted channel standards for brackets adjustable in 1
inch increments along entire length of standard, drilled and countersunk for screws.
1. Acceptable Product: KV 80.
2. Load Capacity: Recommended by manufacturer for loading of 120 to 320 pounds per pair
of standards.
3. Face Width: 5/8 inch.
4. Lengths: As indicated on drawings.
5. Finish: Powder-coated, color as selected from manufacturers full line.
6. Brackets: 16 gage 0.06 inch steel, reinforced, locking into slots; size to suit shelves; same
finish as standards unless not available.
7. Bracket Quantity: Provide one bracket for each 12 inches of standard length.
B. Closet Rods: Steel tubing for wall mounting in flange fittings.
1. Length: As required for application, up to 12 feet.
2. Provide mounting fittings to suit application.
C. Wire Shelving: Factory-assembled coated wire mesh shelf assemblies for wall-mounting, with
10731 WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING 10 56 17-1

all components and connections required to produce a rigid structure that is free of buckling and
warping. For use in resident closets where custom shelving not used: See plans for locations,
EG Guest Room closets.
1. Construction: Cold-drawn steel wire with average tensile strength of 100,000 psi
resistance welded into uniform mesh units, square, rigid, flat, and free of dents or other
distortions, with wires trimmed smooth.
2. Coating: PVC or epoxy, applied after fabrication, covering all surfaces.
3. PVC Coating: 9 to 11 mils thick.
4. Epoxy Coating: Non-toxic epoxy-polyester powder coating baked-on finish, 3 to 5 mils thick.
5. Standard Mesh Shelves: Cross deck wires spaced at 1 inch.
D. Laminate Faced Shelves: Particleboard or medium density fiberboard covered with high
pressure decorative laminate on both sides. For use in storage rooms, janitor closets and as
indicated on plans.
1. Edge Finish: Matching laminate, all four edges.
2. Substrate Thickness: 3/4 inch, nominal.
3. Length: As indicated on drawings.
4. Laminate: NEMA LD 3 Type HGL.
5. Laminate Color and Pattern: To be selected later.
E. Fasteners: Screws as recommended by manufacturer for intended application or as otherwise
required by project conditions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Hoffman LLC of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mount standards to solid backing capable of supporting intended loads.
C. Install brackets, shelving, and accessories.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING 10 56 17-2

SECTION 10 75 00
FLAGPOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum Flagpoles.
B. Concrete foundation base.
C. Flagpole light adn adaptor truck assembly (Magniflood "Bayville" style luminaire).
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Sand for foundation sleeve.
B. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving: Concrete base and foundation construction.
C. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AASHTO M 36 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated, for Sewers
and Drains; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
B. ASTM B241/B241M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe
and Seamless Extruded Tube.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Flagpole With Flag Flying: Resistant without permanent deformation to 90 miles/hr wind
velocity; nonsafety design factor of 2.5.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pole, accessories, and configurations.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed dimensions, base details, anchor requirements, and imposed
loads.
D. Operation Data: Provide operating data for the controller.
E. Maintenance Data: Provide lubrication and periodic maintenance requirement schedules and
requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design flagpole foundation under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed State in which project is
located.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Spiral wrap flagpole with protective covering and pack in protective shipping tubes or containers.
B. Protect flagpole and accessories from damage or moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
10731 FLAGPOLES 10 75 00-1

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flagpoles:
1. American Flagpole: www.americanflagpole.com.
2. Concord Industries, Inc: www.concordindustries.com.
3. Magniflood Inc. (Lithgow Agency, 715-256-0313, lithgowagency@sbcglobal.com)
4. Pole-Tech Co., Inc: www.poletech.com.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FLAGPOLES
A. Flagpoles: Aluminum.
1. Design: Straight shaft.
2. Mounting: Ground mounted type.
3. Outside Butt Diameter: 6 inches.
4. Outside Tip Diameter: 3-1/2 inches.
5. Nominal Wall Thickness: 0.188 inches.
6. Nominal Height: 30 ft; measured from nominal ground elevation.
7. Mounting: Ground mounted type.
8. Design: Cone tapered.
9. Halyard: Interior type.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Flagpole With Flag Flying: Resistant without permanent deformation to ____ miles/hr wind
velocity; non-resonant, safety design factor of 2.5.
2. Flagpole Without Flag: Resistant without permanent deformation to ____ miles/hr wind
velocity; non-resonant, safety design factor of 2.5.
3. Halyard: Exterior using Magniflood twin pulley halyard adaptor.
2.03 POLE MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 241/B 241M, 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Finial Ball: Stainless steel, 6 inch diameter.
B. Truck Assembly: Cast aluminum; revolving, stainless steel ball bearings, non-fouling, Part No.
MF-2764-03.
C. Cleats: 9 inch size, aluminum with galvanized steel fastenings, two per halyard.
D. Halyard: 5/16 inch diameter polypropylene, braided, white.
E. Pole Top Light: Magniflood; Bayville Flaglighter L4M-175PS-L, Voltage 120V-277V
F. Concrete: Concrete as specified in Section 32 13 13.
2.05 MOUNTING COMPONENTS
A. Ground Sleeve: AASHTO M 36M, corrugated 16 gage steel, galvanized, minimum depth of 60
inches, with a steel base plate whose square dimension is at least the internal diameter of the
sleeve plus 4" with steel centering wedges. A setting plate 6" square shall be securely welded
to the ground spike at least 6" below the base plate. The ground spike shall be 3/4" diameter,
not less than 18" long.
2.06 FINISHING
A. Metal Surfaces in Contact With Concrete: Asphaltic paint.
B. Aluminum: Satin brushed finish.
10731 FLAGPOLES 10 75 00-2

C. Finial: Spun finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that concrete foundation is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coat metal sleeve surfaces below grade and surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials with
asphaltic paint.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Electrically ground flagpole installation.
C. Place concrete foundation per design and requirements of manufacturer.
D. Fill foundation tube sleeve with sand specified in Section 31 23 23 and compact.
E. Install foundation plate and centering wedges for flagpoles base set in concrete base and fasten.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1 inch.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating devices so that halyard and flag function smoothly.
END OF SECTION
10731 FLAGPOLES 10 75 00-3

SECTION 11 40 00
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This Section includes equipment for foodservice facilities indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
ADA
AGA
ASME
ASHRAE
CFSP
CM
EC
FEC
GC
HACCP
HVAC
ID
MC
NFPA
NSF
OD
OSHA
PC
UL
Americans with Disabilities Act
American Gas Association
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
Certified Food Service Professional
Construction Manager
Electrical Contractor
Food Service Equipment Contractor
General Contractor
Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor
Inside Diameter
Mechanical Contractor
National Fire Protection Association
National Sanitation Foundation
Outside Diameter
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
Plumbing Contractor
Underwriters Laboratories
1.3 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS
A. Construction Manager (CM) / General Contractor (GC)
1. Provide transit level recesses for walk-in cooler/ freezer floors and other depressions.
Provide finished flooring material and base inside and outside of walk-in coolers and
freezers. Refer to Food Service Plans for details.
2. Provide concrete pads or floors for walk-in cooler(s)/ freezer(s) and/ or compressor(s) to be
installed outside.
3. Furnish and install all flashing necessary to tie in walk-in cooler(s)/ freezer(s) to building.
4. Install floor trough(s) and drip pan(s) when furnished by FEC. Refer to Food Service Plans
for details.
5. Furnish and install all necessary wall backing of size, type and locations as indicated on
Food Service Plans.
6. Furnish and install necessary concrete pad(s) or roof curb(s) and associated penetrations
for refrigeration equipment.
B. Plumbing Contractor (PC)
1. Provide rough-in and final connections of all services per local code requirements.
2. Flush all lines of foreign debris before connecting fixtures.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 1

3. Provide all water supply lines, drain lines, drain fittings, floor drains, shut-off valves, traps
and tailpieces.
4. Provide all reduced pressure devices, pressure reducing valves and backflow prevention
devices except where included with equipment or furnished by FEC as part of item specs.
Also refer to Food Service Equipment Schedule.
5. Provide all grease traps; coordinate water usage data with FEC. Note local codes may
require grease (trap) interceptor for pot/ utensil wash sinks, dishmachines or drains for other
grease producing food service equipment. Flush inset or exterior grease traps are
recommended for all food service applications.
6. Install all faucets, pre rinse spray units, hose reel units, lever drains, vacuum breakers,
check valves, flow control valves, water inlets, traps, filters, strainers, PRV valves, T/P
gauges as furnished by FEC.
7. Make connections between sections of modular equipment such as range batteries, utility
distribution systems, chef’s tables, and exhaust hoods.
8. Provide condensate line piping for walk in cooler and freezer units. Note walk-in cooler
condensate lines shall not pass through walk-in freezer compartments. Condensate line
piping shall be trapped outside the cold room and installed per prevailing codes. PC shall
use 1” copper tubing for condensate lines.
9. Provide sleeves for refrigerant piping and condensate piping wherever it passes through the
walk in cooler or freezer wall, floor or ceiling. Pack sleeve with fiberglass and perma-gum
after installation. Sleeves through floor shall project min. 3” above the finished floor.
Sleeves through the walls shall be flush with walls.
10. Provide all conduit for beverage lines per local code requirements.
C. Electrical Contractor
1. Provide rough-in and final connections of all services per local code requirements.
2. Provide all outlets, receptacles, conduit, contactors, controllers, disconnects, switches,
starters, etc., unless furnished as standard with the equipment or specifically included with
the equipment in the itemized specifications.
3. Install electrical devices furnished with food service equipment. FEC must indicate such
devices on electrical rough-in plans.
4. Make electrical connections between sections of modular equipment such as utility
distribution systems; exhaust hoods, refrigeration systems, walk-in cooler and freezer units
or chef’s tables.
5. Where required by local codes, furnish and install shunt trips and/ or contactors with 120
Volt coils with contact ratings matching the electrical cooking appliance. EC to wire from the
micro switch relay on the fire control system head to the shunt trips/ contactors.
6. Walk-in cooler and freezer refrigeration systems:
a. Wire from cooler and freezer compressor time clocks to respective evaporator coils.
Note unless otherwise specified, time clocks shall be furnished for cooler and freezer
units.
b. Wire to door assembly junction box, light(s), heated air vents, condensate drain line
heaters (walk in freezer heat tape shall be applied under insulation) and audio/ visual
alarms.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 2

c. Mount and connect all light fixtures furnished with walk in cooler(s)/ freezer(s).
7. Wet areas such as sinks, disposers, or dishwashers shall be wired with Sealtite Type EF
conduit or equal, through water proof boxes.
D. Mechanical Contractor (MC)
1. Provide rough-in and final connections of all mechanical services.
2. Provide fans, ducts, dampers, starters, roof curbs, roof penetrations and sealing of
penetrations, etc., necessary for operation of grease extracting hoods and condensate
hoods.
3. Provide looped gas supply lines, gas pressure reducing and regulating valves for pressure
above 14” W.C.
4. FEC to provide gas fire/ fuel shut-off solenoid valve(s) as part of hood fire suppression
system to MC for installation.
5. Install all gas valves, gas hoses and gas pressure regulators furnished by FEC and
indicated on Food Service Equipment Schedule.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing food service equipment, who has completed installations similar in design
and extent to that indicated for this Project, and who has a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. FEC shall comply with all federal, state and local laws and regulations governing health, safety,
fire, mechanical and electrical requirements within the applicable jurisdiction.
C. When the Construction Documents call for higher standards or larger sizes than the regulations,
the Construction Documents shall govern. When the regulations require higher standards or
larger sizes than the Construction Documents, the regulations shall govern. Rulings and
interpretations of the enforcing agencies shall be considered part of the regulations. No additional
amounts shall be paid for compliance.
D. When the requirements of the drawings exceed the written specifications, the drawings shall
govern and vice versa.
E. If because of jurisdictional trade agreements or other conditions, any work specified in the
Construction Documents must be completed by others, sublet such work only to those who are
qualified to do such work or make other arrangements at the expense of the FEC, subject to
approval by the Architect.
1.5 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, each item of equipment shall comply with the latest current edition
of the following standards as applicable to the manufacturer, fabrication, and installation of the
work in this section. Comply with all Federal, State and Municipal regulations and notifications,
which bear on the execution of this work. Call to the attention of the Owner in writing any design
conflict with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) during the Bid Process
so resolution can be effected prior to the Contract Award.
1. NSF Standards: Comply with applicable National Sanitation Foundation Standards and
criteria and provide NSF “Seal of Approval” on each manufactured item and on major items
of custom-fabricated work.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 3

1.6 SUBMITTALS
2. UL/ ETL/ CSA Standards: For electrical components and assemblies, provide either UL/
ETL/ CSA listed products or, where no listing service is available, provide a complete index
of the components used as selected from the UL/ ETL/ CSA “Recognized Component
Index”. For fire extinguishing systems comply with UL 300.
3. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards for electrical-powered and gasburning
equipment; for piping to compressed-gas cylinders; and for plumbing fitting,
including vacuum breaker and air gaps, to prevent siphonage in water piping.
4. AGA/ CGA: All gas fired equipment shall be AGA/ CGA approved, equipped to operate on
type of gas available at the job site, and shall contain 100% automatic safety shut-off
devices.
5. NFPA Standards: Comply with NFPA Bulletin 96 for exhaust systems; with NFPA Bulletins
13, 17, 17A and 96 for fire extinguishing systems; and with NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas
Code and NFPA 70, National Electric Code.
6. ASME Code: Comply with ASME boiler code requirements for steam-generating and steamheated
equipment; provide ASME inspection, stamps, and certification of registration with
National Board.
7. SMACNA Guidelines: Where applicable provide seismic restraints for food service
equipment to comply with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association’s (SMACNA) “Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines”, appendix 1,
“Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment”, unless otherwise indicated.
8. ASHRAE: Provide mechanical refrigeration systems complying with the American Society of
Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration”.
A. Submit food service equipment plan, rough-in plans, shop drawings and six specification
brochure booklets within 30 days of award of contract or as required by Architect. Submit two
Xerox or blue line prints and one sepia or transparent reproducible of each page to Food Service
Consultant for review. Corrected documents will be returned to FEC for revision if necessary.
B. When drawings are approved, FEC shall submit assembled sets of plans as required by
Architect.
C. When specification brochure booklets are approved submit assembled copies in quantity
required by Architect. Each page is to be numbered and sequenced corresponding to the
itemized specifications. Brochures are to include accessories and components used with each
item.
D. Provide fully dimensioned rough-in plans at ¼” = 1’-0” scale showing all required services
including; electrical, plumbing, mechanical and any related special conditions.
1. Plans are to indicate location, elevation, sized and type of water supplies, drains, gas lines,
floor drains, site drains, electrical supplies, outlets, switches, ducts locations, exhaust and
supply CFM and static pressure, etc. Include on each page a legend of commonly used
symbols and abbreviations.
2. Special conditions shall include, but not be limited to, curbs, bases, recesses, sleeves,
refrigeration lines, concealed wall backing, pass through openings, trenches, etc.
3. FEC may not use rough-in plans prepared by the Food Service Consultant for submittal with
the required Construction Documents without permission from the Food Service Consultant.
When such plans are re-used for Construction Documents it shall be the responsibility of
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 4

FEC to verify all dimensions as well as electrical, plumbing and mechanical rough-ins and
prevailing codes as they relate to the project.
E. Submit shop drawings showing plans, elevations and details for all fabricated items drawn at
minimum ¾” scale.
F. After all drawings and buy out brochures have been approved and received by Owner &
Architect, fabrication may begin. Approvals shall not relive FEC of the responsibility for
conformance with the construction documents unless written approval is obtained from the
Owner & Architect. Also, approvals shall not relieve FEC from conformance to state and local
health code requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Except as may be specified otherwise under individual item specification in “Equipment List” or
“Equipment Schedule”, all items of standard manufactured equipment furnished shall be
complete in accordance with manufacturer’s standard specifications for specific unit or model
called for, including finishes, components, attachments, appurtenances, etc.
B. Qualified Custom Stainless Fabricators include:
1. Institutional Equipment Inc.
704 Veterans Parkway, Unit B
Bolingbrook, IL 60440
(630) 771-0990 ph.
2. Nationwide Fabrication Inc.
10923 Leroy Dr
Northglenn, CO 80233
(303) 853-0107 ph.
3. Nichols Custom Stainless Manufacturing
8500 NE Underground Drive
Pillar 107
Kansas City, MO 64161
(816) 413-0616 ph.
4. Eagle Group
100 Industrial Blvd.
Clayton, DE 19938
(800) 441-8440 ph.
5. Select Stainless
11145 Monroe Rd.
Matthews, NC 28105
(704) 841-1090
2.2 FABRICATION OF METALWORK
A. Sanitation Standards
1. All equipment shall be produced in accordance with the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
Standard 2 and bear the NSF seal.
B. Materials & Workmanship
1. All material shall be new, of prime quality and without flaws. The completed products shall be
delivered to the owner in an undamaged condition.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 5

2. Stainless Steel shall conform to American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
specification, Type 304, hardest workable temper, polished to a #4 satin finish on exterior and
rolled finish on interior. Working surfaces, including welds, shall be smooth, free of warps,
buckles, cracks, pits and scratches.
3. Steel other than stainless steel, where specified to body enclosures shall be prime grade,
with steel sheet bonderized and zinc coated.
4. Grain shall run in the same direction on all horizontal and all vertical surfaces; where table or
sink tops join at right angles, terminate the finish in a mitered edge; polish grain consistent in
direction throughout the length of the backsplash and sink compartment.
5. Sound Deadening - underside of all stainless steel top for tables, counters, sinks, dish tables
with angle or channel framework shall be coated with 1/8” thick water proof mastic material,
non-asphalt base and NSF approved.
6. Reinforce metal at locations of hardware, anchorages and accessory attachments; wherever
metal is less than 14 gauge or requires mortised application. Conceal reinforcements to the
greatest extent possible. Weld in place on concealed faces.
7. Welding and Soldering
a. Materials 18 gauge or heavier shall be welded.
b. Seams and joints shall be welded and soldered in field unless otherwise indicated in item
specifications.
c. Welds must be ground smooth and polished to match original finish.
d. Where galvanizing has been burned off, the weld shall be cleaned and touched up with
high-grade aluminum paint.
8. Provide removable panels for access to mechanical and electrical service connections, which
are concealed behind or within food service equipment, but only where access is not
possible.
9. Provide closures where ends of fixtures, back splashes, shelves, etc. are open. Fill by forming
the metal or welding sections if necessary to close off entire opening flush to walls or
adjoining fixtures.
10. Reinforce work surfaces 30 inches on center (vertical and horizontal), with galvanizing or
stainless steel concealed structural members. Reinforce members which are not selfreinforced,
by formed edges.
11. Metal tops shall be one-piece welded construction, including field joints. Secure to a full
perimeter channel frame and fasten top with stud bolts or tack welds.
12. Field Joints - for any field joints required because of size of fixture; butt joint, reinforce on
underside with angles of same material, bolt together with non-corrosive bolts and nuts, field
weld, grind and polish.
C. Metal and Gauges
1. Fabricate the following components in stainless steel from the gauge of metal as indicated:
a. Table and counter tops 14 gauge
b. Sinks and drainboards 14 gauge
c. Shelves 16 gauge
d. Front drawer and door panels 18 gauge (double pan type)
e. Single pan doors and drawer fronts 16 gauge
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 6

f. Enclosed base cabinets 18 gauge
g. Enclosed wall cabinets 18 gauge
h. Exhaust Hoods and Ventilators 18 gauge
i. Pan-type inserts and trays 16 gauge
j. Removable covers and panels 18 gauge
k. Skirts and enclosure panels 18 gauge
l. Closure and trim strips over 4” wide 18 gauge
m. Hardware reinforcement 12 gauge
n. Gusset plates 10 gauge
D. Pipe Bases
1. Construct pipe bases of 1 5/8” diameter, 16 gauge stainless steel tubing. Fit legs with
polished stainless steel adjustable bullet feet to provide adjustment of approximately 1-1/2”,
without exposed threads.
2. Space legs to provide ample support for tops, precluding any possibility of bucking or sagging
and in no case more than 6’-0” centers.
E. Legs and Crossrails
F. Shelves
1. Legs and crossrails shall be 1 5/8” diameter stainless steel tubing. All intersections of
rails and legs shall be welded and finished smooth. Bolts, screws or tack welds shall not
be acceptable.
2. Leg sockets shall be 2” outside diameter (OD) stainless steel with set screw to secure
the leg to the socket. They shall be welded to 14 gauge transverse top support
channels.
1. Construct solid shelves under pipe base tables of 16 gauge stainless steel, with 1 ½” turned
down and under edges on exposed sides, and 2” turn up against walls or equipment. Fully
weld to legs.
2. In fixtures with enclosed bases, turn up shelves on back and sides with ¼” minimum radius
and feather slightly to ensure a tight fit to enclosure panels.
G. Sinks and Drainboards
1. All sinks and drainboards shall be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel, unless otherwise
specified, with all joints welded, ground and polished so no evidence of welding appears.
2. All vertical and horizontal corners shall be rounded to a ¾” radius with intersections meeting
in spherical sections. Multiple compartment sinks shall be divided with double wall partitions
having fully rounded corners. All corners of drainboards shall be rounded on inside to ¾”
radius. All back and end splashes shall be rounded on inside to ¾” radius. Front corners of
rolled rim shall be fully rounded on outside roll and be concentric with inside of roll.
3. Front face of multiple sinks shall be one continuous piece with no overlapping joints or open
spaces between compartments.
4. Drainboards shall be pitched 1/8” x 12” toward sink compartments. Sinks and drainboards
shall have 10” high back splashes and end splashes where appropriate. Back splashes shall
be level and continuous and not follow pitch of drainboards.
5. Bottom of each compartment shall pitch to drain and be fitted with a cast brass 2” lever
operated waste outlet, provided with a stainless steel strainer plate. Set lever waste into
stamped recess in sink bottom to facilitate drainage.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 7

6. All sinks shall be 14” deep unless otherwise specified on drawings or in item specifications.
H. Sinks set into Work Table or Work Counter
1. Sinks shall be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel, unless otherwise specified, with all
joints welded, ground and polished so no evidence of welding appears.
2. Bottom of sink compartment shall have vertical and horizontal corners rounded to ¾” radius
and pitch to drain with size and type as indicated on plan and item specifications.
I. Dishtables
1. Top reinforcement and support shall consist of 14 gauge stainless steel transverse leg
support channels and 14 gauge stainless steel longitudinal reinforcing channel. Also refer to
2.2 Section B for reinforcement detail.
2. Where tables enter dishmachines or pot washing machines provide turn down into machine
as recommended by manufacturer and a flange at both the front and back splash forming a
water tight joint across bottom on up both sides to top edge of dishtable.
3. Provide sound deadening as directed in 2.2 Section B for underside of dishtables.
4. Follow construction details as directed in 2.2 Section G.
J. Work Tables
1. Top reinforcement and support shall consist of 14 gauge galvanized transverse leg support
channels and 14 gauge galvanized longitudinal reinforcing channel. Also refer to 2.2 Section
B for reinforcement detail.
2. Where stainless steel tops are specified furnish 14 gauge polished stainless steel, finished in
a #4 satin finish with all exposed edges rounded with no burrs. Tops shall be turned down 1
½” and under ½” in channel shape on all exposed sides unless otherwise specified.
3. Where tables are located at building walls, they shall have minimum 6” high by 1” returned at
90 degrees to wall and turned down 1” at 90 degrees with all exposed ends closed ground
and polished smooth. Provide heavy-duty “Z” clips for securing to building walls.
4. Provide sound deadening as directed in 2.2 Section B for underside of worktables.
K. Wood Table Tops
1. Where wood table tops are specified, top shall be 1 ¾” thick, sectional, hard rock, kiln dried
maple construction. Top shall have 5” by 1” thick coved maple riser on back and ends unless
otherwise indicated on plan or item specifications. Top shall be fully NSF approved.
2. Top shall be mounted on 14 gauge channels as indicated in 2.2 Section J.
L. Cabinet Base Construction
1. All cabinet type bases shall be of 16 gauge stainless steel, single wall, pan type, one piece
welded construction with no visible joints or screw attachments showing. Entire unit to be
braced with 14 gauge channels as indicated in 2.2 Section J.
M. Hinged Doors
1. Hinged doors for cabinet base counters shall be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel front
with 20 gauge stainless steel pan shaped backs, with all corners welded, ground and
polished.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 8

2. Unless otherwise specified all pull handles shall be Component Hardware, recessed door
pull, full grip type, Model No. P63-1012 or approved equal.
3. All doors to be furnished with chrome plated heavy duty type cylinder lock by Component
Hardware or approved equal.
4. All doors shall be provided with NSF approved stainless steel heavy duty lift off type hinges
and Cabinet Catch, Friction Type with spring action nylon rollers by Component Hardware,
Model No. M21-2580 or approved equal.
N. Drawer Assemblies
1. Drawer assemblies shall consist of removable drawer body mounted in a ball bearing slide
assembly with fully enclosed housing.
2. Slide assembly shall consist of one pair of 200 pound stainless steel roller bearing extension
slides, with side and back enclosure panels, front spacer angle, two drawer carrier angles,
secured to slides and stainless front.
3. Drawer bodies for general storage shall be 20” x 20” x 5” deep with 18 gauge stainless steel
or Royalite containers.
O. Over Shelves and Wall Shelves
1. Shelves shall be constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel with working sides turned down 1 ½”
and ½” under in channel shape with resulting corners welded, ground and polished.
2. Back of Wall Shelves shall be turned up 1 ½” and coved. When 1 ½” turn up is specified at
Back & Ends, Front edge of End splash shall be rounded and finished smooth.
3. Slant rack shelves used for dish racks shall have rolled front edge and 6” turn up at rear.
4. Brackets shall be 14 gauge stainless steel and be spaced to support shelf with its intended
contents.
P. Wall Cabinets
1. Wall cabinets shall be of length and depth as shown on plans or indicated in item
specifications. Cabinets to be 28” high, unless otherwise specified with sloped, dust proof
tops. Exterior bottoms shall be of flush type construction.
2. Cabinet shall be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel, all welded construction. Cabinet
interiors shall be fabricated with fixed bottom and intermediate shelf unless otherwise
specified.
3. Where specified doors shall be double wall construction with chrome plated pulls.
2.3 FABRICATION OF MILLWORK & CASE WORK
A. Counter Body shall be constructed of ¾” birch or fir. Particleboard may not be substituted for
plywood panels. All plywood to be glued with water resistant resin glue.
B. Plastic laminate finish of interior shall be standard grade laminate white in color unless otherwise
specified. All interior surfaces including underside of top shall be standard grade laminate
finished. Exterior plastic laminate finish shall be standard grade laminate as specified by
architect or owner. All exterior surfaces shall be plastic laminate finished including those units
that may have backs or ends against the wall. Plastic laminate to be applied with minimum
quantity seams based on use of largest sheet size available from manufacturer.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 9

C. Where large openings are required in counter body, such as for floor drains or beverage tubing,
fabricator shall provide stainless steel trim covers to conceal exposed plywood edge of counter
base.
D. Where seam is exposed provide with 1 ½” wide x ½” thick plastic laminate trim strip. Trim shall
be of height of counter base. Additional strips shall be provided so as to allow symmetrical
appearance on counter front even if not required to cover seam.
E. Doors shall be constructed of birch, fir or particle board with plastic laminate finish on all
surfaces. Provide chrome-faced locks all keyed alike. Provide Blum Mfg. concealed door
hinges unless otherwise specified. Where specified provide slotted doors to allow for equipment
ventilation. Each door shall have seven routed slots in door face ½” wide and painted to match
laminate color front. Provide chrome wire pulls unless otherwise specified.
F. Where specified in lieu of toe base, furnish 6” high NSF approved stainless steel legs with
adjustable bullet feet. Spacing shall be maximum 48” on center. Provide stainless steel backing
plates in counter base.
G. Where specified with stainless steel legs and adjustable feet, furnish toe base which shall be
removable ¾” thick birch or fir. Finish all surfaces with plastic laminate including front, back and
all edges. Provide in maximum lengths to accommodate all counters. End returns on exposed
counter sides shall be attached to front toe kick section to allow for one piece removal.
2.4 REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Refrigeration systems shall be installed by a knowledgeable, skilled and licensed refrigeration
contractor, who shall perform the work according to ASHARE standards and the conditions of the
contract documents. System shall be installed, charged, started, tested and fully operational.
B. Condensing units shall be securely mounted with adequate clearance for service. Condensing
units located outside the building shall be installed on a curb or pad provided by the CM/ GC with
refrigeration lines extending through a roof pitch pocket or wall sleeve provided by the CM/ GC.
All refrigeration lines in the pitch pocket or sleeve to be sealed by the CM/ GC. Coordinate size
of curb or pad with CM/ GC.
C. All systems shall be designed for thermostatic expansion valves and pressure switches shall
operate on specified refrigerant.
D. Refrigeration lines shall conform to ASHARE or National Board of Fire Underwriters standards,
whichever is greater. Piping shall be type “L” copper, cut with a tube cutter and sized. Use
braising rod of no less than 15% silver. Fittings shall be wrought copper.
E. Piping shall be fitted with hangers at no more than 10 foot intervals horizontally and 6 foot
intervals vertically. Provide an oil trap at the base of vertical risers in suction lines.
F. Insulate walk-in cooler/ freezer suction lines and freezer condensate lines with ¾” Armaflex. Walk
in cooler condensate lines shall not pass through walk in freezer compartments. Walk in freezer
heat tape shall be applied under the insulation.
G. Thermometers shall be installed on the exterior of each walk in cooler/ freezer near the door.
Refrigeration contractor shall calibrate thermometers after three days of operation. Extend
sensor capillaries away from the door and secure to the walls.
H. Furnish all specified lights in walk in cooler(s)/ freezer(s) for mounting and connection by EC.
Provide bulbs suitable for the specified ambient temperature. Fluorescent light fixtures shall be
surface mounted, NSF Listed, and UL Listed, suitable for wet and low temperature areas.
I. Clean, dehydrate and evacuate the system. Check the system for leaks over a 24 hour period at
a vacuum of 5000 or less microns with no appreciable pressure drop. Liquid lines shall be
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 10

pressurized according to prevailing refrigeration codes for 24 hours with a maximum decrease of
3 PSI.
J. 2009 EISA Compliance Conditions - For Walk In Units installed after Jan. 1, 2009 Walk In
Manufacturers shall include options/ accessories necessary to comply with HR6 – The Energy
Independence and Security Act. These include increased R-Value insulation, new lighting and
door hinging requirements, EC motors in evaporators and new requirements for glass doors or
windows (if applicable).
PART 3 – EXCECUTION
3.1 SUPERVISION
A. FEC shall have a competent supervisor present at all times during progress of the Contractors
work.
B. Verify the site conditions prior to installation and notify the Architect and/ or CM/ GC. in writing, of
unsatisfactory conditions for proper installation of food service equipment.
C. Verify wall, column, door, window and ceiling locations and dimensions prior to approval of shop
drawings. Fabrication and setting in place of custom equipment should not proceed until
dimensions and conditions have been coordinated with fabrication details.
D. Verify that wall backing has been provided and is correct for wall supported equipment.
Coordinate location for wall backing with CM/ GC. as required prior to installation of equipment.
E. Verify that ventilation ducts are of the correct characteristics and in the required locations as
indicated on food service plans.
F. Verify that all utilities are available, of the correct characteristics and in the proper locations for
final hook up of the equipment.
3.2 ASSEMBLY AND SETTING IN PLACE
A. Coordinate sequential setting in place and assembly of all equipment to ensure all utility
connections are achieved.
B. Coordinate work and cooperate with other trades working at site toward the orderly progress of
the project.
C. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish on a daily basis. Provide
and maintain coverings or other appropriate protection for finished surfaces and other parts of
equipment subject to damage during installation.
D. All food service equipment shall be assembled and set in place in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
E. Set non mobile items securely in place, leveled and adjusted to the correct height. Anchor to
finished floor and/ or wall where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use
without shifting or dislocation. Conceal anchorages wherever possible.
F. Complete field assembly joints by welding, bolting and gasketing, or similar methods as
specified. Grind welds smooth and polish.
G. Provide closure plates and strips where required as per health code requirements.
H. Provide access holes and/or ferrules on equipment for piping, drains, electrical outlets, conduits,
etc., as required to coordinate installation of kitchen and Food Service equipment work of the
other contractors on project.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 11

I. Provide sealants, Dow Corning 732 RTV or equal clear silicone around equipment to make joints
air tight, water proof, vermin proof and sanitary per health code requirements. Wipe excess out of
joint to fillet radius.
J. Repair of all damage to premises as result of this installation, and removal of all debris left by
those engaged in installation.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation in food service areas, remove protective coverings on equipment.
B. Collect any warranty cards and operation & maintenance manuals attached to or inside of
equipment and submit to CM/ GC as described in Section III, 3.5.
C. Have all Food Service equipment fixtures broom cleaned and ready for operation when building
is turned over to owner. All sanitizing of equipment shall be completed by owner unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTMENT, TESTING AND TRAINING
A. Test and adjust equipment, controls and safety devices to ensure proper working order and
conditions.
B. Repair or replace equipment which is found to be defective.
C. When cleaning, testing and adjusting have been completed, arrange for demonstration times at
Owner’s convenience, but during normal working hours. Demonstrations shall be done by
competent, trained personnel, thoroughly familiar with the operation, techniques of usage,
capacities and maintenance of the equipment.
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prior to demonstration of food service equipment the FEC shall submit three (3) set of Operation
and Maintenance manuals to CM/ GC or Architect for approval. Manuals shall be in hard cover
three ring binders and shall include replacement parts lists and a type written index sheet listing
name, addresses and phone numbers of all authorized service agencies for appropriate
equipment.
3.6 GUARANTEE
A. Equipment, parts and labor under this contract shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1)
calendar year from date of final invoice.
B. Condensing units shall be further warranted on a prorated basis for an additional four- (4) years,
exclusive of labor. Refrigeration warranties shall include replacement of refrigerant caused by a
fault or leak in the system.
PART 4 – ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Instructions to bidders:
• Food Service Equipment Contractor shall furnish itemized bid form at specified due date.
• Food Service Equipment Contractor to include cost to receive, deliver, uncrate and set in place all
new food service equipment specified for final hook-ups by others.
• Food Service Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for removal of all delivery packing material/
trash from site unless otherwise indicated by Owner & General Contractor.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 12

• Food Service Equipment Contractor shall utilize authorized Custom Stainless Fabricators as indicated
in General Specification Section 2.2. All other fabricators must be submitted for approval prior to bid
due date.
• Food Service Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for relocating Owners existing equipment to
new facility unless otherwise instructed.
MAIN PRODUCTION KITCHEN – ITEMS 1 - 116
Item # 1
Item # 2
DUNNAGE RACKS – EXISTING - RELOCATE
DRY STORAGE SHELVING – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 3
WALK IN FREEZER
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Leer or equal Kolpak or Thermalrite
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. OA Dim: 22’-1 ½” x 20’-2 ½” x 9’-3” High Cooler & Freezer Assembly with partition wall as shown
on plans.
2. Panel Construction:
a. Interior Finish - 26 Ga. Stucco Embossed Aluminum with pre-painted white ceilings.
b. Exterior Finish - 26 Ga. Stucco Embossed Aluminum.
3. Floor: Floorless box secured with 1 ½” vinyl screed. GC to provide insulation and topping as
shown on plans. Coordinate all shop drawings to match details. GC to provide finished flooring in
all cooler and freezer floor areas. FEC to provide and coordinate installation of channel and
insulated wall panels with GC.
4. Entrance Door: (2) 36” X 78” high doors to be hinged as per plans. Furnish strip curtains for door
assembly. Provide view port window in cooler and freezer door section.
5. Entry Door and door panel accessories:
a. Magnetic gasket, posi-seal door closure and latch, condensation and frost proof locks with
inside safety release. Door jamb to be made of F.R.P. plastic to form a thermal break.
b. An insulated low wattage heater covered by magnetically attracted st/st shall be fitted on to
jamb to prevent frost build up.
c. A solid state digital thermometer shall be included with each door section.
d. Heavy Duty locking door latch handle with a keyed cylinder lock. All door locks to be keyed
alike.
e. Door handles shall be capable of being locked with a pad lock.
f. Cooler & Freezer Doors to include Viewport Window.
g. 36” high aluminum diamond-tread kick-plates on door interior and exterior of cooler & freezer
door.
6. Lighting:
a. Door sections shall include an incandescent vapor proof light.
b. Cooler & Freezer to include additional fluorescent light fixtures, min. 10 foot candles of light,
in quantities as shown on Electrical Rough-In Plans. FEC shall include light bulbs for all
fixtures.
7. A/V Alarm System: Furnish Modularm #75 Temperature Alarm System for Cooler and Freezer
Units. These alarm systems will be installed in the door panels for each respective unit. Alarms
shall have contacts for connecting to building central alarm system.
8. Trim:
a. Trim the box to walls at exposed vertical junctures with walls and at space between the top of
the box and finished ceiling using matching stucco embossed aluminum at front of box.
9. Custom - Remote Refrigeration System to include:
a. Remote Cooler Compressor – Compressor to be located outdoors on roof above kitchen -
verify exact location with Architect. (1) Walk-In Cooler compressor @ 208V/ 1 ph. 2 hp. air
cooled, hermetic unit with R-404A Refrigerant.
b. Cooler Evaporator Blower Coil – Cooler blower coil @ 120V. / 1 ph.
c. Remote Freezer Compressor – Compressor to be located outdoors on roof above kitchen -
verify exact location with Architect. (1) Walk-In Freezer compressor @ 208V/ 3 ph. 4 hp. air
cooled, hermetic unit with R-404 Refrigerant.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 13

d. Cooler Evaporator Blower Coil – Cooler blower coil @ 208V. / 1 ph.
10. System Specialties and installation:
a. Factory installed receiver, sight glass, liquid line filter, drier, dual pressure controls,
headmaster valves, defrost time clock, contractors.
b. Time Clocks for Coolers to be time initiated and time terminated.
c. Time Clocks for Freezers to be time initiated and temperature terminated.
d. Heat Tape: Food Service Equipment Contractor shall furnish and run heat tape & insulation
for freezer drain line application for final hook ups by Electrical Contractor.
11. Refrigeration Piping:
a. Copper tubing, to be ACR grade copper, sized to maintain a maximum pressure drop of 2 PSI
in suction line. Suction line insulation to be ¾” wall for cooler application, 1” wall for freezer
application and insulated from evaporator to suction service valve. All suction risers to be
trapped.
12. Related Work by others:
a. Where applicable, all roof/ floor and wall penetrations and sealing of penetrations for
refrigeration and drain lines by others
b. Where applicable, all roof curbs by others.
c. All electrical inter-wiring by electrical contractor. This work includes; hardwiring each
compressor to its respective blower coil(s), inter-wiring of lights and door heater, inter-wiring
of thermostat and solenoid, inter-wiring of blower coil and time clock, providing receptacle for
drain line heater.
d. Cooler and Freezer drain lines to be run by plumbing contractor. Trap drains outside of box.
Refer to Plumbing Rough In Plan for additional information.
13. 2009 EISA Compliance Conditions
a. For Walk In Units installed after Jan. 1, 2009 Walk In Manufacturers shall include options/
accessories necessary to comply with HR6 – The Energy Independence and Security Act.
These include increased R-Value insulation, new lighting and door hinging requirements, EC
motors in evaporators and new requirements for glass doors or windows (if applicable).
Item # 4
WALK-IN SHELVING – EXISTING & NEW
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Focus or equal Eagle
Model
Epoxy Coated
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Relocate owner’s existing walk in shelving. In addition furnish new units as listed below.
2. Sixteen (16) Focus Foodservice Model FF2460G Shelf, Wire, 24"W x 60"L, green epoxy coated
finish
3. Sixteen (16) Focus Foodservice Model FG074G Post, 74"H, stationary, green epoxy coated with
SaniGard
Item # 5 & 6
SPARE NO.
Item # 7
WALK IN COOLER – REFER TO ITEM 3 SPECIFICATION
Item # 8
WALK-IN SHELVING
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Focus or equal Eagle
Model
Epoxy Coated
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Relocate owner’s existing walk in shelving. In addition furnish new units as listed below.
2. Twelve (12) Focus Foodservice Model FF2460G Shelf, Wire, 24"W x 60"L, green epoxy coated
finish
3. Twelve (12) Focus Foodservice Model FG074G Post, 74"H, stationary, green epoxy coated with
SaniGard
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 14

Item # 9
Item # 10
Item # 11 & 12
Item # 13
UTILITY CARTS – EXISTING - RELOCATE
MILK CREATE DOLLIES – EXISTING - RELOCATE
SPARE NO.
DRY STORAGE SHELVING – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 14
CART, FOOD TRANSPORT
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Cambro
Model
UPC1600131
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Nine (9) Model UPC1600131 Ultra Camcart® Food Pan Carrier, front loading, one-piece double
wall poly shell, foam insulation, holds 1/2 long & full size pans, approximately cap. 120 qt.,
molded-in handles, nylon latch, air-tight gasket, vent cap, 6" casters, dark brown, NSF
Item # 15
Item # 16
HEATED TRANSPORT CART – EXISTING - RELOCATE
HEATED PLATE DISPENER – EXISTING – RELOCATE
Item # 17
REFRIGERATED COUNTER, SANDWICH TOP
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer True Food Service Equipment
Model
TSSU-60-10
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model TSSU-60-10 Sandwich/Salad Unit, (10) 1/6 size (4"D) poly pans, stainless steel insulated
cover, 11-3/4"D cutting board, stainless steel top/front/sides, aluminum back, (2) full doors, (4)
shelves, white aluminum interior with 300 stainless steel floor, 5" castors, 1/3 hp, 115v/60/1-ph,
7.8 amps, 7' cord, NEMA 5-15P, cUL, NSF, CE, MADE IN USA
2. Self-contained refrigeration standard
3. Warranty - 5 year compressor.
4. 5" Castors, standard
Item # 18 & 19
SPARE NO.
Item # 20
FOOD PREP TABLE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless general specifications.
1. Food Prep Table w/ Sink, OA Dim: 10’-0”x30”x36” high. 14 ga. 304 S/S flat top, S/S cabinet base
construction with finished back and sides. S/S bottom and adjustable intermediate shelves. 6” legs
with adjustable flanged feet. Furnish two Component Hardware 120V. flush mount outlets on right
end for refrigerated prep table unit and heated plate dispenser.
2. T & S Brass Model B-0221 Deck Mixing Faucet, with swing nozzle, 12" swing nozzle, 8" centers
on deck faucet with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets, lever handles
3. T & S Brass Model B-3952 Twist Waste Valve, 3-1/2" sink opening, 2" drain outlet.
Item # 21
OVERSHELF ASSEMBLY
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless general specifications.
1. Table mounted Overshelf Assembly, OA Dim: 10’-0” x 12”, 16 ga. St/St construction, Secure to
item 20, Food Prep Table w/ Sinks as per plans. (2) Component Hardware #R58-1010 120V. / 1
ph cast aluminum outlets, single faced. Mount to underside of overshelf as per plans.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 15

Item # 22
DOUBLE STACK CONVECTION OVEN – EXISTING – RELOCATE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Blodgett
Model
EF111
Relocate Owner’s existing oven and provide the following.
1. Furnish new door hardware and provide start up for Owner’s existing convection oven as part of
relocation to new facility.
Item # 23
FRYER, FLOOR MODEL, GAS, FULL POT
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Pitco Frialator
Model
SG14S
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model SG14S Solstice Fryer, gas, heavy duty floor model, 40-50 lb. oil capacity, millivolt control,
s/s tank, front & sides, 110,000 BTU
2. Natural gas
3. Model B3901504 Casters, 9" adjustable (set of 4) non-lock rear & lock front casters
4. Model P6072145 Basket, (2) oblong/twin size, 13-1/2" x 6-1/2" x 5-1/2" deep, long handle, regular
mesh.
5. One (1) Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KITS48 Safety System Moveable Gas Connector Kit,
3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1
SnapFast QD, 1 SwivelMAX, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware,
limited lifetime warranty
Item # 24 – 26
SPARE NO.
Item # 27
GRIDDLE, COUNTER UNIT, GAS
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Vulcan
Model
48RRG
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model 48RRG Heavy Duty Gas Griddle, 110,000 BTU, 48"W x 24"D x 3/4" thick composite plate
with stainless steel cooking surface, solid state thermostat every 12", electronic spark ignition &
pilot protection, wire knob guards, countertop, low profile, stainless steel front, sides, front top
ledge, front grease trough, grease can, heavy gauge 4" back & tapered side splashes, 4"
adjustable legs, CSA, NSF, EnergyStar®
2. Natural gas.
3. 120v/60/1ph, with cord w/NEMA 5-15P
4. Model STAND/C-48 Equipment Stand, 49"W x 24"H, with marine edge, undershelf, stainless
steel, 5" casters
5. One (1) Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KITS48 Safety System Moveable Gas Connector Kit,
3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1
SnapFast QD, 1 SwivelMAX, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware,
limited lifetime warranty
Item # 28
CHARBROILER, GAS, COUNTER MODEL
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Vulcan
Model
VACB36
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model VACB36 Charbroiler, 108,000 BTU, 36-1/8"W, countertop, (6) cast iron 18,000 BTU
burners with standing pilots and cast iron radiants, manual gas valve controls, stainless steel
front, sides, top trim, backsplash & grease trough, cast iron top grates, 4" adjustable legs, CSA,
NSF
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 16

2. Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft.
3. Model STAND/C-36 Equipment Stand, 37"W x 24"H, with marine edge, undershelf, stainless
steel, 5" casters
4. One (1) Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KITS48 Safety System Moveable Gas Connector Kit,
3/4" inside dia., 48" long,covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1
SnapFast QD, 1 SwivelMAX, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware,
limited lifetime warranty
Item # 29
RANGE, 36" RESTAURANT, GAS
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Vulcan
Model
36S-6B
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model 36S-6B Endurance Restaurant Range, 36", gas, (6) 30,000 BTU burners with lift-off
burner heads, 27" deep standard oven base, s/s front, sides, backriser & lift-off high shelf, fully
mig welded chassis, 6" adjustable legs, 215,000 BTU, CSA, NSF
2. Natural gas
3. Model CASTERS RR4 Casters (set of 4)
4. One (1) Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KITS48 Safety System Moveable Gas Connector Kit,
3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1
SnapFast QD, 1 SwivelMAX, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware,
limited lifetime warranty
Item # 30
EXHAUST HOOD WITH FRONT MAKE UP AIR PLENUM
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Captive-Aire
Model:
6030-ND-2-PSP-F
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. OA Dim: 19’-0”” x 5’-0” x 24” high (Plus 12” fire suppression cabinet on left end), exhaust only,
canopy type, to be complete with UL Classified baffle type filters, duct collar, plenum, concealed
collection trough, and hanger brackets. Exhaust Only Hood shall be UL listed, NSF approved, in
compliance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 96, BOCA, ICBO (Uniform Mechanical Code) and SBCCI.
2. Hood to be fabricated in two 9’-6” long sections with a front perforated supply plenum.
3 One (1) EMSplus21_BACNET Modulating Energy Management System With Smart Controls for 2
Exhaust Fans and One Supply Fan. Includes VFDs, Duct Temperature Sensors in all risers, 1
Room Temperature sensor. Configurable through Touch Screen Interface. BACNET
Communication. INVERTER DUTY THREE PHASE MOTORS REQUIRED! Includes 4 EMS Duct
Thermostats. Note Control Panel to be wall mounted – verify exact location. One control panel for
two cooking line hoods – items 30 & 39.
4 Wall Fire Clearance – Provide a completely enclosed 3” air barrier between back of ventilator and
wall. Insulation by others.
5 Construction – hood shall be constructed of a min. 18 ga. #430 series S/S where exposed. All
external seams and joints to be welded and liquid tight; all exposed welds to be ground and
polished.
6 One (1) Set Captrate Solo Filters - S/S filters to be UL classified and in sufficient numbers and
sizes to ensure optimum performance. Filter housing to terminate in a pitched, full-length grease
trough, which drains into a removable ½ pint grease cup.
7 LED tube light fixtures, T8, warm white color 3300K, UL listed, pre-wired to J-box at top of hood
for field connection.
8 Closure Panels: furnish and install S/S closure panels (matching hood finish) from top of hood to
finished ceiling at front and ends.
9 Note: verify hood mounting height to conform to local codes and to ensure all cooking equipment
fits properly.
10 Provide (1) lot 430 20 Ga. #4 finish s/s paneling to run along the full length of cooking line. The
paneling shall extend from the top of the flooring base material to the bottom edge of the hood.
Joints between the panels shall be covered with Component Hardware Model J64-1450 strips.
Exposed edges of the panels shall be ground and polished smooth. Attach the exposed edges
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 17

with s/s flat head screws. Seal the panels with clear silicone. All panels shall be securely attached
with a generous amount of clear silicone on the full perimeter of each panel (blind caulking) and
on the rear surfaces in order to achieve a tight, flat, bonding of the panels to the walls. Also
include S/S end caps.
Item # 31
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Ansul
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. UL 300 Wet Chemical System for protection of cooking equipment, exhaust ducts and plenum.
2. Provide remote pull located in path of egress – verify exact location.
3. FEC shall furnish gas shut off valve to PC for installation. Verify size required.
4. EC to provide shunt trip relays for all electrical connections
Item # 32 & 33
SPARE NO.
Item # 34
SINK, HAND
Quantity Five (5)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
HSA-10-SPEC (No Faucet)
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Five (5) Model HSA-10-F Hand Sink, wall model, 14-3/4" x 18-7/8" with 7-1/2" backsplash,
stainless steel construction, basket drain, deep-drawn seamless design-positive drain, NSF
2. Five (5) Model 606396 Side Mount Wall Brackets, one pair
3. Five (5) Model -LRS Left and right side splashes
4. Five (5) T & S Brass Model EC-3101 Electronic Faucet, wall mount, rigid gooseneck with vandal
resistant aerator aerator, AC/DC control module, mixing tee
Item # 35
Item # 36 & 37
WASTE CONTAINERS – BY OWNER
SPARE NO.
Item # 38
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Ansul
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. UL 300 Wet Chemical System for protection of cooking equipment, exhaust ducts and plenum.
2. Provide remote pull located in path of egress – verify exact location.
3. FEC shall furnish gas shut off valve to PC for installation. Verify size required.
4. EC to provide shunt trip relays for all electrical connections
Item # 39
EXHAUST HOOD
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Captive-Aire
Model:
6030-ND-2-PSP-F
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. OA Dim: 19’-0”” x 5’-0” x 24” high (Plus 12” fire suppression cabinet on right end), exhaust only,
canopy type, to be complete with UL Classified baffle type filters, duct collar, plenum, concealed
collection trough, and hanger brackets. Exhaust Only Hood shall be UL listed, NSF approved, in
compliance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 96, BOCA, ICBO (Uniform Mechanical Code) and SBCCI.
2. Hood to be fabricated in two 9’-6” long sections with a front perforated supply plenum.
3 One (1) EMSplus21_BACNET Modulating Energy Management System With Smart Controls for 2
Exhaust Fans and One Supply Fan. Includes VFDs, Duct Temperature Sensors in all risers, 1
Room Temperature sensor. Configurable through Touch Screen Interface. BACNET
Communication. INVERTER DUTY THREE PHASE MOTORS REQUIRED! Includes 4 EMS Duct
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 18

Thermostats. Note Control Panel to be wall mounted – verify exact location. One control panel for
two cooking line hoods – items 30 & 39.
4 Wall Fire Clearance – Provide a completely enclosed 3” air barrier between back of ventilator and
wall. Insulation by others.
5 Construction – hood shall be constructed of a min. 18 ga. #430 series S/S where exposed. All
external seams and joints to be welded and liquid tight; all exposed welds to be ground and
polished.
6 One (1) Set Captrate Solo Filters - S/S filters to be UL classified and in sufficient numbers and
sizes to ensure optimum performance. Filter housing to terminate in a pitched, full-length grease
trough, which drains into a removable ½ pint grease cup.
7 LED tube light fixtures, T8, warm white color 3300K, UL listed, pre-wired to J-box at top of hood
for field connection.
8 Closure Panels: furnish and install S/S closure panels (matching hood finish) from top of hood to
finished ceiling at front and ends.
9 Note: verify hood mounting height to conform to local codes and to ensure all cooking equipment
fits properly.
10 Provide (1) lot 430 20 Ga. #4 finish s/s paneling to run along the full length of cooking line. The
paneling shall extend from the top of the flooring base material to the bottom edge of the hood.
Joints between the panels shall be covered with Component Hardware Model J64-1450 strips.
Exposed edges of the panels shall be ground and polished smooth. Attach the exposed edges
with s/s flat head screws. Seal the panels with clear silicone. All panels shall be securely attached
with a generous amount of clear silicone on the full perimeter of each panel (blind caulking) and
on the rear surfaces in order to achieve a tight, flat, bonding of the panels to the walls. Also
include S/S end caps.
Item # 40
COOK & HOLD OVEN – EXISTING – RELOCATE
Item # 41
COMBI OVEN, GAS, FULL SIZE (DOUBLE STACK)
Quantity Two (2)
Manufacturer Alto-Shaam Inc.
Model
7-14ESG/CT
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Two (2) Model 7-14ESG/CT CombiTherm® Oven, gas, countertop, boiler-free, CombiTouch
graphic based controls for steam, convection, combi & retherm, programmable menu, probe,
multi-shelf timer, 6 browning levels, CombiClean® automatic cleaning, HACCP, capacity (14) 12"
x 20" full-size pans or (7) full-size sheet pans, door hinged right, adjustable legs, 91,000 BTU,
EcoSmart®
2. Two (2) 12 month extended warranty to begin at end of std. warranty & continue for 12 additional
months
3. Two (2) Natural Gas Fired
4. Two (2) 120v/60/1, 5.3amps, .61kW, NEMA 5-20P, (20 MCA) standard
5. Mechanical start-up check
6. One (1) Stacking Kit
7. One (1) Combi Smoke includes sample bag of wood chips. Combi Smoke feature for one oven
only.
8. One (1) Model FI-23014 CombiGuard 10 Triple-Guard Water Filtration System, temperature
range 35°F to 100°F, 3/4" NPT, 125 psi maximum pressure (includes 1 filter cartridge), for 6.10,
10.10, 7.14 and 10.18 units
9. One (1) FI-28728 Filter Cartridge replacement, CG20
9. Two (2) Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KITS48 Safety System Moveable Gas Connector Kit,
3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1
SnapFast QD, 1 SwivelMAX, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware,
limited lifetime warranty
Item # 42
FLOOR TROUGH
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
ASFT-1836-SG
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 19

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Model ASFT-1836-SG Floor Trough, 18" x 36", subway-style stainless steel grating, 6" deep
14/304 stainless steel all-welded drain pan with anti-splash design, accommodates up to a 4"
diameter pipe, includes s/s removable perforated basket
Item # 43
KETTLE, ELECTRIC, TABLE TOP
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Groen
Model
TDB-40
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model TDB-40 Kettle, electric, table top, 40-quart capacity, 2/3 jacket, 304 s/s liner, hand tilt,
support console on right, s/s construction
2. 208v/60/3-ph, 10.8kw, 30.0 amps, std.
3. Model 005186 Kettle Lip Strainer, for 40 & 48 quart table top kettles
4. Model 139806 Cover and Holder, for 40 & 48 quart table top kettle
5. Model TS/9-124700 (TS/9-2) Support Stand, for TDB or TDBC, 20, 24, 40 or 48 quart electric
kettles bullet feet, open base, stainless steel, 28" x 28" x 18" high
6. Model 019652 Faucet, double pantry with swing spout (T&S B-201 or equal)
Item # 44 & 45
SPARE NO.
Item # 46
FLOOR TROUGH
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
ASFT-1836-SG
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Model ASFT-1836-SG Floor Trough, 18" x 36", subway-style stainless steel gratin, 6" deep 14/304
stainless steel all-welded drain pan with anti-splash design, accommodates up to a 4" diameter
pipe, includes s/s removable perforated basket
Item # 47
KETTLE, STATIONARY, GAS
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Groen
Model
AH/1E-40
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model AH/1E-40 Kettle, gas, 40-gallon capacity, 2/3 jacket, 316 s/s liner, s/s insulated body, 2"
TDO, 1/4" perforated strainer, #51 counterbalanced actuator cover, faucet bracket, bullet feet, 30
PSI, 100,000BTU
2. Natural gas
3. 115v/60/1-ph, 5.0 amps, std.
4. 3" Tangent draw-off in lieu of standard 2" draw-off (TDO)
5. Model 107123 Brush Set, 3", includes kettle brush, drain valve brush, and paddle, for table top &
floor model kettles
6. Etch marks, 5 gallon increments
7. Model 019652 Faucet, double pantry with swing spout (T&S B-201 or equal)
Item # 48
FLOOR TROUGH
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
ASFT-1836-SG
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Model ASFT-1836-SG Floor Trough, 18" x 36", subway-style stainless steel grating, 6" deep
14/304 stainless steel all-welded drain pan with anti-splash design, accommodates up to a 4"
diameter pipe, includes s/s removable perforated basket
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 20

Item # 49
Item # 50 & 51
TILTING BRASING PAN – EXISTING - RELOCATE
SPARE NO.
Item # 52
FOOD PREP TABLE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless general specifications.
1. Food Prep Table w/ Sink, OA Dim: 10’-0” x 60” x 34” high. 14 ga. 304 St/St top with 6” high back
splash/ plumbing chase as per plan. Open base construction with St/St legs, adjustable flanged
feet and fixed undershelf except below sinks. (2) 16” x 20” x 12” deep sink basins as per plan. (2)
20” x 20” x 5” deep NSF Utility Drawers. Note – item 52 table and item 62 are to be assembled
together – refer to drawings for additional information.
2. T & S Brass Model B-0231 Sink Mixing Faucet, with 12" swing nozzle, wall mounted, 8" centers
on sink faucet with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets, lever handles
3. T & S Brass Model B-3952 Twist Waste Valve, 3-1/2" sink opening, 2" drain outlet
Item # 53
MICROWAVE OVEN – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 54
FOOD PREP TABLE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless general specifications.
1. Food Prep Table w/ Sink, OA Dim: 8’-0” x 60” x 34” high. 14 ga. 304 St/St top with 6” high back
splash/ chase as per plan. Open base construction with St/St legs, adjustable flanged feet and
fixed undershelf. Two (2) 20” x 20” x 5” deep NSF Utility Drawers. Note – item 54 table and item
57 are to be assembled together – refer to drawings for additional information.
Item # 55
BLENDER – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 56
OVERSHELF ASSEMBLY
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless general specifications.
1. Table Mounted Overshelf Assembly, OA Dim: 8’-0” x 18”, 16 ga. St/St construction, Secure to
items 54 & 57 Food Prep Table as per plans. (3) Component Hardware #R58-1020 120V. / 1 ph
cast aluminum outlets, double faced. Mount to underside of overshelf as per plans.
Item # 57
FOOD PREP TABLE – REFER TO ITEM 54 SPECIFICATION
Item # 58
ICE CREAM MACHINE WITH STAND
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Lello
Model 5040
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Lello Commercial Batch Fiume Ice Cream Maker 5040. 115V. 1 ph. 560 W. 17" H x 16.5" D x
24.5" W.
2. One (1) Custom stainless fabricated equipment stand, OA Dim: 30”x30”x34” high, 14 ga. St/St flat
top, open base construction with bottom undershelf. One set 6” high total lock type casters.
Item # 59
Item # 60
SPARE NO.
BLENDER – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 61
OVERSHELF ASSEMBLY
Quantity One (1)
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 21

Manufacturer
Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless general specifications.
1. Table Mounted Overshelf Assembly, OA Dim: 10’-0” x 18”, 16 ga. St/St construction, Secure to
items 52 & 62 Food Prep Table as per plans. Two (2) Component Hardware #R58-1020 120V. / 1
ph cast aluminum outlets, double faced. One (1) Component Hardware #R58-1010 120V. / 1 ph
cast aluminum outlets, single faced – for microwave oven. Mount to underside of overshelf as per
plans.
Item # 62
Item # 63
Item # 64 & 65
Item # 66
FOOD PREP TABLE – REFER TO ITEM 52 SPECIFICATION
PAN RACKS – EXISTING - RELOCATE
SPARE NO.
FOOD PROCESSOR – EXISTING - REOCATE
Item # 67
DISPOSER
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Salvajor
Model
150-SA-6-MRSS
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model 150-SA-6-MRSS Disposer, with 6-1/2" sink assembly, 1-1/2 Hp motor, start/stop push
button manual reversing MRSS control, includes fixed nozzle, vacuum breaker, solenoid valve,
sink stopper and flow control, heat treated aluminum alloy housing
2. 208v/60hz/3-ph, 6.2 amps
3. T & S Brass Model B-0455 Vacuum Breaker Unit, 1/2" IPS piping, slip flanges for mounting on 45º
surface, 6" between piping
Item # 68
FOOD PREP TABLE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless general specifications.
1. Food Prep Table w/ Sinks. OA Dim: 10’-0” x 30” x 34” high. 14 ga. 304 St/St top with 6” high back
splash. Open base construction with St/St legs, adjustable flanged feet and rear cross bracing.
Partial fixed undershelf except below sinks. (2) 20” x 20” x 12” deep sink basins as per plan. One
(1) Disposer control bracket. , One (1) NSF 20”x20”x5” deep utility drawer. Also refer to
foodservice elevation drawings.
2. T & S Brass Model B-0231 Sink Mixing Faucet, with 12" swing nozzle, wall mounted, 8" centers
on sink faucet with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets, lever handles
3. T & S Brass Model B-3952 Twist Waste Valve, 3-1/2" sink opening, 2" drain outlet.
Item # 69
OVERSHELF, WALL-MOUNTED
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
WS1296-16/4
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Model WS1296-16/4 Shelf, Wall-Mounted, 16 gauge 430 stainless steel, 12"W x 8 feet long
Item # 70
Item # 71 & 72
Item # 73
Item # 74
UTILITY CARTS – EXISTING - RELCATE
SPARE NO.
EQUIPMENT STAND – EXISTING - RELOCATE
FOOD CUTTER – EXISTING - RELOCATE
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 22

Item # 75
Item # 76
Item # 77
Item # 78 & 79
EQUIPMENT STAND – EXISTING - RELOCATE
SLICER – EXISTING - RELOCATE
EYE WASH STATION – BY PLUMBER
SPARE NO.
Item # 80
PREP SINK – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Quantity One (1)
Relocate Owner’s existing and furnish the following new accessories:
1. One (1) T & S Brass Model B-0231 Sink Mixing Faucet, with 12" swing nozzle, wall mounted, 8"
centers on sink faucet with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets, lever handles
2. One (1) T & S Brass Model B-3952 Twist Waste Valve, 3-1/2" sink opening, 2" drain outlet
Item # 82
INGREDIENT BINS – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 83
OVERSHELF, WALL-MOUNTED
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
WS1272-16/4
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Model WS1272-16/4 Shelf, Wall-Mounted, 16 gauge 430 stainless steel, 12"W x 6 feet long
Item # 84
60 QT. MIXER – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 85
MOBILE WORKTABLE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless general specifications.
1. Mobile worktable, OA Dim: 8’-0” x 30”, 14 ga. 304 S/S flat top, open base construction with s/s
fixed undershelf, Two (2) 20”x20”x5” deep NSF utility drawers as per plan. (1) Set of six,, Colson
#22-5167-35-9 Total Lock type casters or approved equal.
Item # 86 & 87
Item # 88
Item # 89
SPARE NO.
STORAGE SHELVING – EXISTING - RELOCATE
REACH IN REFRIGERATOR – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 90
FREEZER, REACH-IN
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Traulsen
Model G1201-
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model G1201- Dealer's Choice Freezer, Reach-in, One-Section, self-contained refrigeration
w/Microprocessor control, s/s front & full height door (hinging to be determined), anodized
aluminum sides & interior, (3) epoxy coated shelves (factory installed), 6" high casters, UL & NSF
listed
2. 115v/60/1ph, 9.5 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard
3. 1 yr service/labor & 5 yr compressor warranty, standard
Item # 91
ICE MAKER, CUBE-STYLE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Hoshizaki
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 23

Model
KML-451MAH
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model KML-451MAH Ice Maker, Cube-Style, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, approximately
401-lb capacity per 24 hours, stainless steel finish, crescent cube style, R-404A refrigerant,
115v/60/1-ph, 10.3 amps, ENERGY
STAR® qualified
2. 3-Year parts & labor on entire machine
3. 5-Year parts & labor on evaporator
4. 5-Year parts on compressor & air-cooled condenser
5. Model B-500SF Ice Bin, top-hinged front-opening door, approximately 360-lb ice storage capacity,
for top-mounted ice maker, stainless steel exterior, painted legs included, protected w/H-GUARD
Plus Antimicrobial Agent
6. 2-Year parts & labor for bin
7. Model 9320-21H Water Filter Assembly, HC-H Filter with H-GUARD Plus Antimicrobial Agent,
Class 1 T & O, coarse filtration, for single
Item # 92 & 93
SPARE NO.
Item # 94
CART WASH ASSEMBLY
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Ecolab
Model J-6
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Cart Wash Assembly, J-6 (Part Number 9284-1121) Complete, Cart Wash Assembly to include
Mikro Spray power washer with 5/8” hoses.
Item # 95
FLOOR TROUGH
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
ASFT-1260-SG
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Model ASFT-1260-SG Floor Trough, 12" x 60", subway-style stainless steel grating, 6" deep
14/304 stainless steel all-welded drain pan with anti-splash design, accommodates up to a 4"
diameter pipe, includes s/s removable perforated basket
Item # 96
WASTE CONTAINERS – BY OWNER
Item # 97
RACK SHELF UNIT
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model 606642
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Model 606642 Rack Shelves, 21" x 42", slanted, drip tube on right side, stainless steel
Item # 98
DISPOSER
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Salvajor
Model
200-SA-6-MRSS
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model 200-SA-6-MRSS Disposer, with 6-1/2" sink assembly, 2 Hp motor, start/stop push
button manual reversing MRSS control, includes fixed nozzle, vacuum breaker, solenoid valve,
sink stopper and flow control, heat treated aluminum alloy housing
2. 208v/60hz/3-ph, 6.6 amps
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 24

3. T & S Brass Model B-0455 Vacuum Breaker Unit, 1/2" IPS piping, slip flanges for mounting on 45º
surface, 6" between piping
4. T & S Brass Model B-0131-B Prerinse Unit, 8" O.C. wall mounted faucet, union coupling
connections, 1/2" IPS female eccentric flanged inlets, gooseneck reaches 12" over sink at top,
26" riser, B-0107 spray valve, B-0020-H flexible stainless steel hose, 6" wall bracket
5. T & S Brass Model B-0156 Add-on Faucet, for Prerinse units, 12" nozzle, includes 3" nipple, for
Prerinse units
Item # 99
SOILED DISHTABLE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless general specifications.
1. Soiled Dishtable w/ Scrap Sink, OA Dim: 8'-0" x 30", 14 ga. 304 s/s top with 10" high back and left
end splash, open base construction with s/s legs, adjustable flanged feet and cross bracing. One
(1) 20”x20”x8” deep scrap sink with removable rack glides as per plan. One (1) s/s disposer
mounting bracket. Punch holes for faucets and vacuum breaker.
Item # 100 & 101
SPARE NO.
Item # 102
CONDENSATE HOOD
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Captive-Aire
Model
4830VHB-G
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model 4830VHB-G Condensate Hood, 4'-6" x 4'-0" x 24" high, full perimeter gutter, 304 s/s
construction, 12" dia. exhaust riser, closer panels as required.
Item # 103
DISHWASHER, DOOR HOOD TYPE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Meiko
Model DV 80.2T
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model DV 80.2T Dishwasher, door type, high temperature w/built-in booster, higher hood w/27"
clearance, approximately 54 racks/hour. capacity, corner or straight-thru, fully automatic
operation, Auto-Safe wash/rinse temperature control, Soft Start fine china & glassware protection
system, stainless steel construction, pumped drain & rinse, 2 hp wash pump
2. 208-230v/60/3 ph, 42.7/48.2 amps.
3. Internal detergent & rinse additive dispensing system
Item # 104
CLEAN DISHTABLE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless specifications and the following.
1. Clean Dishtable, OA dim: 5'-6" x 30", 14 ga. 304 s/s top with 10" high splash, open base
construction with s/s legs, adjustable flanged feet and partial undershelf.
Item # 105
OVERSHELF, WALL-MOUNTED
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
WS1236-16/4
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Model WS1236-16/4 Shelf, Wall-Mounted, 16 gauge 430 stainless steel, 12"W x 3 feet long
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 25

Item # 106 & 107
SPARE NO.
Item # 108
OVERSHELF, WALL-MOUNTED
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
WS12108-16/4
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Model WS12108-16/4 Shelf, Wall-Mounted, 16 gauge 430 stainless steel, 12"W x 9 feet long
Item # 109
3-COMPARTMENT SINK
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless specifications and the following.
1. 3-Compartment Pot & Pan Sink, OA Dim: 11’-6" x 33", 14 ga. 304 S/S top with 1 1/2" rolled rim
edge and 10" high backsplash. (3) 28" x 20" x 12" deep sink basins, (1) 36" soiled drain board
and (1) 24” clean drain board. S/S legs, adjustable flanged feet and cross bracing. Punch holes as
required for Hatco Sink Heater – item 110.
2. Two (2) T & S Brass Model B-0231 Sink Mixing Faucet, with 12" swing nozzle, wall mounted, 8"
centers on sink faucet with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets, lever handles
3. Three (3) T & S Brass Model B-3952 Twist Waste Valve, 3-1/2" sink opening, 2" drain outlet
Item # 110
SINK HEATER, ELECTRIC
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Hatco
Model
3CS-9
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model 3CS-9 Sink Heater, Electric, undersink design, electric operation, stainless steel front, for
over 21" square sink area, 9kw, 3-ph delta
2. 208v/50/60/1-ph, 43.0 amps
Item # 111
Item # 112 & 113
Item # 114
Item # 115
Item # 116
STORAGE SHELVING – EXISTING - RELOCATE
SPARE NO.
STORAGE SHELVING – EXISTING - RELOCATE
STORAGE SHELVING – EXISTING - RELOCATE
STORAGE SHELVING - EXISTING - RELOCATE
BISTRO EQUIPMENT – ITEMS 121 – 133
Item # 121 BACK SERVICE COUNTER
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 specifications and the following.
1. Back Service Counter. OA Dim: 11’-6” x 32” as per plan. Solid surface top with cut-outs as
required for drop in sink at right end. Millwork cabinet base construction clad with plastic laminate
panels. Hinged doors and openings for under counter equipment as per plans.
2. Refer to foodservice plan, elevations and details for additional spec information.
3. Refer to Architectural plans for solid surface material and laminate selection.
Item # 122 DROP-IN SINK
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 26

Model SR10-14-9.5-1 (No Faucet)
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model SR10-14-9.5-1 Sink Bowl, Drop-In, 1 compartment, 14"W x 10"L x 9-1/2"D, heavy gauge
stainless steel, 3-1/2" drain hole, basket drain, mounting hardware, NSF
2. Faucet hole punched on 4" centers, standard
3. Delete faucet
4. Model 300789 P-Trap, nickel-plated
5. One (1) T & S Brass Model B-0325 Mixing Faucet, deck mount, with swivel gooseneck, 11-3/4"H -
deck to top of gooseneck, 7-1/2" tip of nozzle to deck, lever handles, 4" center with 1/2" IPS
eccentric flanged female inlets
6. Two (2) T & S Brass Model B-WH4 Wrist Action Handle
Item # 123
COFFEE MAKER – BY OTHERS
Item # 124
REFRIGERATOR, UNDERCOUNTER, REACH-IN
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer True Food Service Equipment
Model
TUC-48
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model TUC-48 Under counter Refrigerator, 33-38° F, (4) shelves, s/s top & sides, white aluminum
interior with 300 stainless steel floor, (2) s/s doors, 5" castors, front breathing, 1/5 HP, 115v/60/1-
ph, 5.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, MADE IN USA
2. Self-contained refrigeration standard
3. Warranty - 5 year compressor (self-contained only)
4. Doors hinged as per plan.
5. 3" Castors, set of 4, in lieu of 5" castors
Item # 125
TOASTER, POP-UP
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Hatco
Model
TPT-120
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model TPT-120 Pop-Up Toaster, (4) 1-1/2" wide self centering slots, individual progressive color
controls, removable crumb tray, stainless steel construction.
2. 120v/60/1-ph, 1800w, 15.0 amps, 6' cord w/NEMA 5-15P
Item # 126
FOOD WARMER COOKER RETHERMALIZER, COUNTERTOP
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Wells
Model
HW/SMP
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model HW/SMP Cook 'N Hold Warmer, countertop, electric, one 12" x 20" pan opening, for wet
operation, thermostatic controls, stainless steel construction, with 4" legs
2. Model 20969 120v/60/1-ph, 1800w, 15.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P
3. Model 20176 Adapter Top, to convert 12" x 20" square corner warmer to hold (2) 7 qt insets
4. Model 20587 Round Inset, 7 quart, with lid, fits 8-1/2" opening
Item # 127
TURBO CHEF OVEN – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 128
FREEZER, UNDERCOUNTER, REACH-IN – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Beverage Air
Model
UCF27
Relocate owner’s existing equipment and provide the following new accessories:
1. One (1) set low profile casters for owner’s existing Beverage Air under counter freezer. Unit to fit
below back service counter.
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 27

Item # 129
Item # 130
Item # 131
Item # 132
SPARE NO.
HEATED HOLDING CABINET – EXISTING - RELOCATE
POINT OF SALE COUNTER – EXISTING - RELOCATE
POINT OF SALE REGISTER – EXISTING - RELOCATE
Item # 133
SERVICE/SELF-SERVICE AMBIENT/REFRIG. MERCHANDISER
Quantity One (1)
Manufacturer Structural Concepts
Model
C3Z3667
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Model C3Z3667 Oasis® Service/Self-Service Ambient/Refrigerated Merchandiser, 36"L, upper:
non-refrigerated, straight front, (1) glass shelf with light & sliding rear doors; lower: self-service
refrigerated base with Breeze refrigeration system, shelf, top & shelf light, black interior & trim,
laminated end panels
2. NOTE: 43" minimum entry door clearance required (w/out shipping skid)
3. 5 yr. compressor warranty, standard
4. 120v/60/1ph, 15.82 amps, cord w/NEMA 5-20P
5. NOTE: Compressor air intake from rear and out front panel, front panel cannot be blocked
6. NOTE: Units are supplied w/levelers extended 1-1/4" and MUST be adjusted during installation to
ensure unit is level for operation
7. Verify exterior finish – laminate with Architect.
HOUSEHOLD KITCHENS (9 REQUIRED) – ITEMS 201 – 228
Item # 201
WASTE CONTAINERS – BY OWNER
Item # 202
SINK, HAND
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model
HSAND-10-F-SPEC
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Nine (9) Model HSAND-10-F Hand Sink, wall model, 19-5/8" x 12" x 14-1/4", 18/304 stainless
steel construction, no faucet, deep-drawn seamless design-positive drain, NSF
2. Nine (9) Model 607560 Skirt Assembly (for HSANT-FS)
3. Nine (9) Model -LS Left side splashes for hand sink
4. Nine (9) T & S Brass Model EC-3100 Electronic Faucet, deck mount, rigid gooseneck with vandal
resistant aerator, AC/DC control module, mixing tee
Item # 203
DISPOSER
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Salvajor
Model
100-SA-3-MRSS
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Nine (9) Model 100-SA-3-MRSS Disposer, with 3-1/2" sink assembly, 1 Hp motor, start/stop push
button manual reversing MRSS control, includes fixed nozzle, vacuum breaker, solenoid valve,
sink stopper and flow control, heat treated aluminum alloy housing
2. Nine (9) 208v/60hz/3-ph, 4.9 amps
3. Nine (9) T & S Brass Model B-0455 Vacuum Breaker Unit, 1/2" IPS piping, slip flanges for
mounting on 45º surface, 6" between piping
4. Nine (9) T & S Brass Model B-0131-B Prerinse Unit, 8" O.C. wall mounted faucet, union coupling
connections, 1/2" IPS female eccentric flanged inlets, gooseneck reaches 12" over sink at top, 26"
riser, B-0107 spray valve, B-0020-H flexible stainless steel hose, 6" wall bracket
5. Nine (9) T & S Brass Model B-0156 Add-on Faucet, for Prerinse units, 12" nozzle, includes 3"
nipple, for Prerinse units
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 28

Item # 204
DISHTABLE W/ SCRAP SINK
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Custom Fabricated
Furnish and set in place per 11400 custom stainless specifications and the following:
1. Custom fabricated Dishtable w/ Scrap Sink - OA Dim: 5’-3” x 30” x 36” high, 14 ga. 304 St/St top
with 1 ½” rolled edge and 10” high back splash, (1) 20” x 20” x 8” deep scrap sink with removable
rack glides, St/St open base construction St/St legs, adjustable flanged feet and cross bracing,
Pre cut holes for pre rinse spray and vacuum breaker. One (1) S/S disposer mounting bracket.
Item # 205
SPARE NO.
Item # 206
DISHWASHER, UNDERCOUNTER
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Meiko
Model FV 40.2
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Nine (9) Model FV 40.2 Undercounter Dishwasher, high temperature w/built-in booster, fully
automatic operation, approximately 37 racks/hour capacity, 0.66 gals./rack, Auto-Safe wash/rinse
temperature control, Soft Start fine china & glassware protection system, double wall stainless
steel construction, pumped drain & rinse, 3/4 hp wash pump, standard liquid detergent and rinse
aid pumps, ENERGY STAR®
2. Nine (9) 208-230v/60/3 ph, 32.1/34.9 amps, std.
3. Nine (9) Power cord kit
4. Nine (9) Internal detergent & rinse additive dispensing system
Item # 207
RACK SHELVES
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Eagle Group
Model 605380
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.
1. Nine (9) Model 605380 Sorting Shelf, 21" x 21", slanted, wall mount, drip tube on left side,
stainless steel
Item # 208
REFRIGERATOR, REACH-IN
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Traulsen
Model
G10011
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Nine (9) Model G10011 Dealer's Choice Refrigerator, Reach-in, One-Section, self-contained
refrigeration w/Microprocessor control, s/s front & full height door (hinged left), anodized aluminum
sides & interior, (3) epoxy coated shelves (factory installed), 6" high casters, UL & NSF listed
2. Nine (9) 115v/60/1ph, 7.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P
3. Nine (9) 5 yr compressor warranty
Item # 209
BUS CART
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Lakeside Manufacturing
Model 610
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Nine (9) Model 610 Bussing Cart, enclosed back and sides, 3 shelf, shelf size 15-1/2" x 24",
stainless steel angle frame w/push handle, 300 lb. capacity
2. Nine (9) Group 1 vinyl finish:
3. Nine (9) Group 1 vinyl finish: Walnut
4. Nine (9) Casters, 3-1/2" swivel
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 29

Item # 210
SHELVING, WIRE
Quantity Seventy-Two (72)
Manufacturer Focus Foodservice or equal Eagle
Model
Chrome Plated
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Seventy-Two (72) Model FF1860C Shelf, Wire, 18"W x 60"L, chromate finish
2. Thirty-Six (36) Model FF1842C Shelf, Wire, 18"W x 42"L, chromate finish
3. One Hundred Eight (108) Model FG074C Post, 74"H, stationary, chromate finish
4. Note each pantry shall have two 18x60 units each with four posts and four shelves. And one
18x42 unit each with four posts and four shelves. Also refer to plans.
Item # 211
Item # 212
Item # 213
Item # 214
Item # 215
Item # 216
Item # 217
Item # 218
SPARE NO.
BACK SERVICE COUNTER – BY OTHERS
WALL CABINETS – BY OTHERS
RESIDENTIAL REFRIGERATOR – FREEZER – BY OWNER
BACK SERVICE COUNTER – BY OTHERS
WALL CABINETS – BY OTHERS
RESIDENTIAL MICROWAVE OVEN – BY OWNER
COFFEE MAKER – BY OWNER
Item # 219
ICE MAKER WITH BIN, CUBE-STYLE
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Hoshizaki
Model
AM-50BAE
Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Nine (9) Model AM-50BAE Ice Maker With Bin, Cube-Style, air-cooled, self-contained condenser,
approximately 55-lb production/24 hours, Top Hat style full cube, 22 lb. storage bin capacity,
115v/60/1-ph, 3.4 amps
2. Nine (9) 2-Year parts & labor on entire machine
3. Nine (9) Model 9320-21H Water Filter Assembly, HC-H Filter with H-GUARD Plus Antimicrobial
Agent, Class 1 T & O, coarse filtration, for single
Item # 220
Item # 221 & 222
Item # 223
Item # 224
Item # 225
Item # 226
Item # 227
DROP IN SINK – BY PLUMBER
SPARE NO.
ISLAND SERVICE COUNTER – BY OTHERS
DROP IN SINK – BY PLUMBER
RESIDENTIAL ISLAND HOOD – BY OWNER
RESIDENTIAL RANGE - CONVECTION OVEN – BY OWNER
TOASTER – BY OWNER
Item # 228
DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELL UNIT, ELECTRIC
Quantity Nine (9)
Manufacturer Atlas Metal
Model
WIH-3
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 30

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:
1. Nine (9) Model WIH-3 Hot Food Drop-In Well Unit, electric, individual pan design, wet or dry type,
three-pan size for 12" x 20" pans, control panel with individual thermostatic controls, s/s top &
wells, galvanized outer liner, with fiberglass insulation
2. Nine (9) NOTE: Drains are optional
3. Nine (9) 208v/60/1-ph, 3.0kw, 1000w elements
4. Nine (9) Model DM-3 Individual Drain, for each well with manifold to single valve, for drop-in units
5. Nine (9) Model AF Automatic Water Fill
6. Nine (9) NOTE: DM-3 must be added when AF is selected
END OF SECTION
10731 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 - 31

SECTION 12 35 30
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Kitchen type cabinets.
B. Vanity cabinets.
C. Casework hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 20 00 - Finish carpentry.
B. Section 11 31 00 - Residential Appliances.
C. Section 12 36 00 - Countertops.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, large scale plans, elevations, clearances required,
rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances, and include layout of units with
relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows, and other building components..
C. Samples:
1. Wood-veneered plywood panels (cabinet cases) with transparent finish, 8-inches by
10-inches, for each species.
2. Solid wood (drawer and door front) with transparent finish, 50 square inches, for each
species.
3. Exposed hardware, for each type of item.
4. One full-size, 16-inches wide, finished base casework complete with hardware, doors, and
drawers but without countertop. [Sample will be returned to Contractor for use on Project.]
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products: Complying with KCMA A161.1.
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of casework that fail in materials or
workmanship within 1 year from Substantial Completion.
B. Warranty shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of
Contract Documents and will be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Residential Casework:
1. Merillat Cabinets, style, 'Pemberton II', stain color to be selected.
2. KitchenCraft
3. Kraftmaid Cabinetry, Inc: www.kraftmaid.com.
10731 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 35 30-1

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet Construction: Softwood lumber framing and particle board, tempered hardboard gables.
B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
C. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln-dried to 7 percent moisture content, used for exposed materials. Select
materials for compatible color and grain. Do not use two adjacent exposed surfaces that are
noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings. Use clear hardwood
lumber of species indicated, free of defects.
D. The term "plywood" in the subparagraph below refers to a wood-based panel with veneers
applied to both faces; the core may be made up of veneers or glued-up lumber. Low-emitting
materials are required for LEED, while the product specified below prohibits use of added urea
formaldehyde.
E. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made with bonding adhesive containing no added urea
formaldehyde (NAF). Hardwood plywood with Grade A face veneer of species matching
hardwood lumber,
2.03 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.
1. Hinges: Concealed European-style self-closing clip-on hinges, minimum 107 degree
opening, six-way adjustable.
2. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent
rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers, 100-lb. capacity and
full extension.
B. Cabinet Locks: Lock with 4 pin cylinder and 2 keys per lock.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture
could accumulate.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Exposed To View Surfaces: Stain, seal, and varnish of color as selected.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of support framing.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function
smoothly.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware.
10731 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 35 30-2

3.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.
END OF SECTION
10731 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 35 30-3

SECTION 12 36 00
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork.
B. Countertops for manufactured casework.
C. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.
D. Sinks molded into countertops.
E. Grommets.
F. Sills.
G. Support Brackets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework.
B. Section 12 35 30 - Residential Casework.
C. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard.
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Quality Standard Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.
D. ISSFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface
Fabricators Association.
E. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Specimen warranty.
C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of
cabinets and casework specified in other sections.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's
full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.
F. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
G. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and
repair of countertop surfaces.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
10731 COUNTERTOPS 12 36 00-1

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.
1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGP, for postforming,
0.039 inch nominal thickness.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,
maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. NSF approved for food contact.
c. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear
Grade requirements for wear resistance.
d. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface.
e. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
f. Surface Color and Pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's full line.
g. Manufacturers:
1) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
2) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.
3) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Postformed laminate; front edge substrate built up to minimum
1-1/4 inch thick with raised radiused edge, integral coved backsplash with radiused top
edge.
3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.
4. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Premium Grade.
B. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting self-supporting over
structural members. With integral bowls.
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum.
2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD
3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and
capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface
coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,
maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. NSF approved for food contact.
c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
d. Color and Pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's full line.
e. Manufacturers:
1) Dupont: www.corian.com.
2) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
3) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
10731 COUNTERTOPS 12 36 00-2

4) Meganite: http://meganite.com
5) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.
4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; edge profile as indicated
on drawings.
5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high.
6. Skirts: As indicated on drawings.
C. Window Sills:
1. Solid Surface material as specified about.
D. Support Brackets:
1. As indicated on plans
2. Countertop Supports: Brackets, legs and miscellaneous metal parts shall be furniture
steel, welded, degreased, cleaned, treated and powder painted in color as selected.
3. Solid surface overhange support: COUNTERBalance IslandBracket Overhang Support
24" Long, 2 Piece T-Bar Construction, Rounded Corners, Laser Cut 7GA HRPO Steel with
Black Powder Coat Finish.
4. Other profiles and dimensions as indicated.
5. Mechanically fasten to base cabinets (where applicable) and to countertop.
6. Mechanically fasten to wall at stud locations (where applicable) and to countertop.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Wood-Based Components:
1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B. Particleboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2, 45 pcf minimum density;
minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.
C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
materials being joined.
D. Grommets: PVC 3" dia., color as selected.
E. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against
cabinet or wall.
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
D. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,
finished to match.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
10731 COUNTERTOPS 12 36 00-3

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Hoffman LLC of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets
are installed in proper locations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;
shim where required.
B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board
of 5/8 inch.
C. Attach wood countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8
inch.
D. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 COUNTERTOPS 12 36 00-4

SECTION 21 00 00
FIRE PROTECTION INDEX
SECTION 21 05 00 - GENERAL FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 21 05 10 - FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
SECTION 21 13 13 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SECTION 21 13 16 - DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 00 00 - 1

SECTION 21 05 00
GENERAL FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 01 – General Conditions shall govern work under this
section.
B. The scope of work Includes, but is not limited to the engineering, fabrication, installation,
testing, and certification of a wet pipe sprinkler system and a dry pipe sprinkler system as
outlined on the drawings and in the specifications.
C. It is the intent of this specification to completely protect the entire building with automatic
sprinklers per the most recent edition of NFPA 13 and NFPA 13R.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 – General Conditions shall govern work under this
section.
B. Section 21 05 10 – Fire Protection Piping
C. Section 21 13 13 – Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following abbreviations are used throughout all mechanical work sections.
1. AHJ ..... Auth Having Jurisdiction
2. amp ..... ampere
3. bhp ..... brake horsepower
4. Btu ...... British Thermal Unit
5. c to c .... center to center
6. cfm ...... cubic ft. per minute
7. hr ......... hour
8. ID ......... inside diameter
9. in. or " .. inch
10. ips ........ iron pipe size
11. kw ........ kilowatt
12. lb.......... pound
13. max ..... maximum
14. min ...... minimum
15. OD ....... outside diameter
16. deg ...... degree (angle)
17. F .......... degree Fahrenheit
18. fpm ...... feet per minute
19. gal........ gallon
20. ft. ......... foot
21. gph ...... gallons per hour
22. gpm ..... gallons per minute
23. hp ........ horsepower
24. wwp ..... water working press.
25. os & y .. outside screw & yoke
26. oz ......... ounce
27. rpm ...... revolutions per minute
28. psi ........ pounds per square inch
29. sec ....... second
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 00 -1

1.4 REFERENCES
30. std ....... standard
31. temp .... temperature
32. piv ........ post indicator valve
A. References to standards, codes or specifications shall mean the latest edition of such
publication adopted and published at date of invitation to submit proposals, unless noted
otherwise.
B. References to technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies is
made in accordance with the following abbreviations:
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute
2. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
3. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
4. BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators
5. CS Commercial Standard
6. NBS National Bureau of Standards
7. AWS American Welding Society
8. MSS Manufacturer's Society For Standardization of the Valve & Fitting Industry
9. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
10. OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
11. PFI Pipe Fabrication Institute
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are definitions of terms and expressions used in mechanical work Sections:
1. Provide - means furnish and install in place.
2. Herein - means contents of a particular section where this term appears.
3. Indicated - means indicated on contract drawings.
4. Section - denotes "trade section" or basic unit of work.
5. Division - denotes a group of related sections. All Mechanical Work falls into
Division 15.
6. Concealed - means any pipe, duct, conduit or accessories hidden from sight as in
trenches, chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts or hung ceilings.
7. Exposed - means they are "not concealed" as defined herein above.
8. Piping - includes in addition to pipe, fittings, valves, hangers and accessories.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7 CODES
A. All products and materials used shall be new, undamaged, clean, and in good condition.
B. Materials and equipment shall be of the make, type, size, and quality specified. See
Instructions for Bidders for bidding procedure.
C. Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration,
dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated on the contract
documents, the contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the
equipment or accessories into the system and for obtaining the intended performance
from the system into which these items are placed.
A. Comply with the requirements of the International Building Code, NFPA Standards, the
Authority Having Jurisdiction, and the Local Fire Chief or Marshal regarding design,
materials, and installation. Where codes conflict, the most stringent shall apply.
1.8 CERTIFICATES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Obtain and pay for all required inspections. Deliver originals of these certificates to the
Division’s construction representative. Include copies of the certificates in the Operation
and Maintenance Manuals.
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 00 -2

1.9 RELATED WORK OF OTHER TRADES
A. The following tabulation of items of work are not all inclusive but are set forth to establish
a pattern to be maintained should items occur which are not specifically covered in the
various divisions of the work.
1. Painting of fire lines shall be provided by Fire Protection Contractor.
2. Incoming water service and required drains for system drainage shall be provided
by Plumbing Contractor and Site Utility Contractor.
3. Wiring of detectors and system shall be provided by Electrical Contractor.
1.10 HOLES AND SLEEVES
A. See cutting and patching requirements in Division 1.
1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
A. Sealing and firestopping of sleeves/openings between piping, etc. and the sleeve or
structural opening shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose work penetrates the
opening. The contractor responsible shall hire individuals skilled in such work to do the
sealing and fireproofing. These individuals hired shall normally and routinely be employed
in the sealing and fireproofing occupation.
1.12 OPERATING TEST
A. General:
1. Equipment shall be complete with all components connected before making tests.
2. Make adjustments, repairs, and alterations, as required to meet specified test
results. Correct defects disclosed by tests or inspection; replace defective parts
when directed.
3. In replacing defective parts use only new materials; in case of pipe, replace with
same length as defective piece.
4. Caulking of screwed joints or peening of welds will not be permitted.
1.13 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings as outlined below in a quantity as required in Division 1 –
Submittals. Sprinkler pipe plans shall show all hydraulic reference points, piping layouts,
pipe materials, pipe sizing, hanger locations and types, and sprinkler head manufacturer
and model. These plans shall be coordinated with other trades, and be coordinated with
the established ceiling grid.
1. Hydraulic calculations
2. Sprinkler pipe plans
3. Sprinkler heads
4. Pipe and fittings
5. Pipe labels
6. Sprinkler head cabinet
7. All valves
8. Air compressor
9. Siamese connection
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 00 -3
10. Pipe Supports
11. Backflow preventor
12. Water flow alarm
13. Pumps and controllers
14. Flow switches
15. Alarm bells
16. Gauges
17. Test header
18. Maintenance manuals
B. Submittal shall be in portfolio form and each item shall indicate its intended use, or be
referenced to Contract Documents. If more than one model number appears on the
same sheet, the one specified shall be conspicuously highlighted and checked.
C. Contractor shall submit to all AHJ’s, including but not limited to Owners Insurance
Representative and all State Fire and Local Fire Inspectors and Chiefs. Upon approval by
the AHJ’s, this Contractor shall provide a copy of the approval letter (s) and approved
plans to the Architect and the Owner.
1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Maintenance manuals shall be prepared covering the Fire Protection systems.

B. These manuals shall include the following information:
1. Name and address and telephone number of installing Contractor and
Subcontractors.
2. Description of systems.
3. Copies of all test reports.
4. Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies.
5. Valve identification charts.
6. All equipment cut sheets and manufacturers maintenance data.
7. General operating instructions.
8. Manufacturer’s wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment.
9. Warranties.
10. Maintenance Instruction: These shall include manufacturer's maintenance for all
equipment and one copy of NFPA 25 - Inspection, testing, and maintenance of
water based fire protection systems. These shall also include maintenance
instructions for the clean agent system.
11. Name, address and phone number of vendor supplying the equipment.
12. Record as-built drawings.
a) All deviations in installation from the shop drawings shall be noted on
record drawings. Special attention shall be given to underground
installation. Indicate accurately all piping runs using dimensions from
adjacent building columns.
C. Submit manuals in the quantity and format as specified in Division 1.
1.15 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. Instruct Owner’s personnel in the proper operation, maintenance, and testing of systems
and equipment provided as part of this project. Using the Operation and Maintenance
Manual and record drawings during this instruction. Demonstrate testing, startup, and
shutdown procedures for all equipment.
1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. See Division 1 for requirements.
B. Two (2) complete sets of mechanical drawings with one (1) complete set of hydraulic
calculations shall be provided as record drawings.
C. Record drawings shall be submitted to and approved by all AHJ’s and submitted to
Architect with maintenance manuals prior to final payment request.
1.17 CAD FILES
A. CAD files may be made available to the Contractor by requesting from the architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFICATION
A. Pipe:
1. Identify equipment and piping as set forth below. All piping shall be color-coded
using legend markers and directional arrows after piping has been covered (if
specifications call for insulation) and after piping has been painted.
2. Use pressure sensitive pipe markers with arrows as manufactured by Seton
Name Plate Corp., Craftsmark, Panduit, W. H. Brady or equal.
3. Install markers as recommended by the manufacturer.
4. All identification shall conform to ANSI A13.1-1981
a) Sprinkler - Fire Red
b) Sprinkler - Drain Red - Yellow
B. Valves:
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 00 -4

1. Provide 18 gauge steel on aluminum sign on each valve labeling purpose of the
valve. Sign shall be permanently attached to the valve.
2. Provide Seton Name Plate Company Style 250 BL brass valve tags, 1-1/2"
diameter, 1/2" numbers, 1/4" letters, with size No. 6 nickel-plated bead chains for
fastening to each valve stem as required.
3. Identify valves with consecutive numbers on tags as required by Owner.
4. Abbreviations are as follows:
a) Automatic Sprinklers - SPKLRS
C. Risers: On each riser provide hydraulic calculation sign indicating location of system,
name of system, design basis, and system demand.
D. Each Contractor shall furnish Seton Name Plate Company A-11 P valve identification
charts in a satin-finish self-closing aluminum frame, size 9-1/2" x 12".
1. Contractor shall complete chart showing contractor's name and address, name of
system, number, location, and purpose of each valve tagged.
2. Mount enclosed chart in mechanical room by risers or as directed by Architect.
3. Provide two (2) copies of charts and place in Maintenance Manual. Applicable
provisions of Division 1 – General Conditions shall govern work under this
section.
2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS
A. For each piece of electrically operated equipment, provide motors, starters, disconnects
and all necessary control devices as specified in General Electrical Requirements. If
starters and disconnects are called out in motor control centers, then the starters and
disconnects are provided as work of Electrical Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT ACCESS
A. Install all piping and accessories to permit access to equipment for maintenance.
Coordinate the exact location of wall and ceiling access panels with the Construction
Manager, making sure that access is available for all equipment and specialties.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate all work with other contractors prior to installation. Any work that is not
coordinated and that interferes with other contractor’s work shall be removed or relocated
at the installing contractor’s expense.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify interior piping mains not less than once every 25 feet, no less than once in each
room, adjacent to each access door or panel, and on both sides of the partition where
exposed piping passes through walls or floors. Place flow directional arrows at each pipe
identification location.
B. Identify valves with signs per NFPA rulings.
3.4 SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING
A. Install approved product in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions where a pipe
penetrates a fire/smoke rated surface. When pipe is insulated, use a product that
maintains the integrity of the insulation and vapor barrier.
B. Where firestop mortar is used to infill large fire-rated floor openings that could be required
to support weight, provide permanent structural forming. Firestop mortar alone is not
adequate to support substantial weight.
3.5 EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATION AND PROTECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 00 -5

A. Erect equipment in neat professional manner, align, level and adjust for satisfactory
operation; install for easy maintenance, inspection, operation, and replacement. Minor
deviation from indicated arrangements may be made as approved.
B. Mechanical equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration. Piping shall
be provided with flexible couplings to prevent noises or vibration transmission.
C. Provide for care and protection of work and equipment until installation is complete and
accepted by Architect.
D. Provide valves as required for construction phasing requirements or for minimizing the
shutdown time of existing services.
3.6 CLEANING & FLUSHING
A. Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water
feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire
sprinkler-piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service,
flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure
as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure
that debris has not clogged sprinkler.
B. Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for a
period of two (2) hours, at not less than 200 psi. Check system for leakage of joints.
Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested.
C. Document all flushing and testing actions. Provide documentation to Architect and
Owner.
D. After all tests are made and the installed work found satisfactory, go over work to clean all
equipment, piping, conduit and leave all in a clean and complete working condition.
Remove from site all debris that accumulate during installation of the work.
E. All equipment specified with factory applied finish shall be wiped clean. If painted surface
is scuffed or marred, touch up with paint approved for this service.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 00 -6

SECTION 21 05 10
FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe, fittings, hangers, valves, and connections for Fire Protection Systems.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Applicable provisions of Division 01—General Conditions shall govern work under this
section.
B. Section 21 05 00 - General Fire Protection Requirements.
C. Section 21 13 13 – Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems.
D. Section 21 13 16 – Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All sprinkler work shall conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 13R.
B. All welding materials and procedures shall conform to ASME Code.
C. Piping shall bear the name or the trademark of the manufacturer, type, metal or alloy
designation number, temper, size, and name of supplier.
D. Valves shall bear the UL and FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and
pressure rating marked on valve body.
E. Use only new material, free of defects, rust, and scale, and meeting the latest version of
ASTM specifications.
F. All piping systems and valves shall be constructed for the highest system pressures and
temperatures, but shall not be less than 175 psig.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 21 05 00.
B. Submittals shall indicate ANSI/ASTM specification number of the proposed pipe as well
as its type and grade Sufficient information shall also be provided to indicate the type and
rating of fittings for each service.
1.5 WELDER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Before any welding is begun, each Contractor shall submit Photostats of qualification
tests of welders they will use on this project.
1.6 HANGERS
A. Provide all supporting devices as required for the installation of mechanical equipment
and materials. All supports and installation procedures shall conform to the latest
requirements of the ANSI code for building piping and NFPA 13.
B. Do not hang any mechanical item directly from a metal deck or run piping so it rests on
the bottom chord of any truss or joist.
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 10 -1

C. Fasteners depending on soft lead for holding power or requiring explosive powder
actuation will not be accepted.
D. Support apparatus and material under all conditions of operation to prevent excess
stress, and to allow for proper expansion and contraction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Black steel pipe welded and seamless, Type F, Grade A, ASTM A53; black welded and
seamless steel pipe for fire protection use, Type F, ASTM A795; electric resistance
welded steel pipe, Grade A, ASTM A135; UL listed with rated working pressure of 300 psi
and UL Corrosion Resistance Rating (CRR) of 1.00, minimum.
1. Finish: Hot dipped zinc coated (galvanized) finish on piping and fittings shall be
used in dry sprinkler or combined pipe systems, preaction systems, piping
exposed to weather, and piping exposed to corrosive environments where
indicated. Thread or groove hot dipped zinc coated pipe ends for fitting
connections. Indoor dry standpipe systems supplied by a Fire Department
connection only may be black steel piping and fittings.
B. Copper tube meeting ASTM B75 or ASTM B88 and approved for Fire Sprinkler
application.
C. All piping to water motor-operated devices shall be galvanized or brass or other corrosionresistant
material, not less than ¾” in size, with a strainer.
D. Piping shall conform to NFPA requirements for sprinkler piping and be approved for
occupancy listing by UL or FM.
E. FlexHead flexible piping connections are allowed up to 6’ lengths, 304 stainless steel
braided. Provide with galvanized steel ceiling bracket. Maunfacturer: FlexHead Industries,
Inc.
2.2 PIPE FITTINGS
A. All fittings must be suitable for pressures to 175 psi, and comply with NFPA 13.
B. Fittings shall be manufactured for pipe material selected and recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
2.3 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions: Class 150 malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping.
B. Dielectric Unions - Manufactured by Watts Regulator:
1. Threaded iron to copper - No. 3001 Series (Female) to 2”.
2. Threaded iron to copper - No. 3005 Series (Male) to 3/4”.
3. Flanges iron to copper - No. 3100 Series to 4”.
4. Use at junction of all dissimilar piping. All gasket material shall be GA to 150° F.,
GB above 150° F.
C. Flanges: Class 150 forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping.
D. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,
designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shaped
composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for
galvanized pipe.
2.4 GATE VALVES
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 10 -2

A. Outside screw and yoke shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double disc, parallel seat,
U.L./FM approved gate valve, as manufactured by Mueller Co., Central Sprinkler Corp. or
an approved equal.
2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly valves shall be slow-close UL/FM approved butterfly valve with built-in
supervision and tamper switch, as manufactured by Milwaukee Valve, Central Sprinkler
Corporation or approved equal.
2.6 CHECK VALVES
A. Check valve shall be iron body, bronze mounted, full opening, UL/FM approved check
valve as manufactured by Central Sprinkler Corp., Mueller Co. or an approved equal.
2.7 HANGERS
A. Component of hanger assembly shall be UL listed or FM approved per NFPA 13.
Acceptable manufacturers include B-Line, Grinnell, Pate, Piping Technology, or approved
equal.
B. All hanger assemblies shall be sized per NFPA 13.
C. Hangers shall be of a type approved for use with the pipe or tube involved. Sprinkler
piping should be supported by approved clevis type adjustable hangers for 3" size and
larger and strap type hangers for 2-1/2" and smaller.
D. Approved C-type hangers are acceptable for use on steel beams when provided with a
cup-pointed setscrew with locknut.
E. For trapeze hangers, the minimum size of steel angle or pipe span between purlins or
joists shall be as shown in NFPA Pam. No. 13.
F. Top beam clamps shall be used in lieu of C-clamps when hanging 3" and larger pipe from
top chord of joist to provide even distribution of weight over both angles of the top chord.
2.8 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for pipes through non-fire rated floors: Form with 18 gauge galvanized steel.
Sleeves shall extend a minimum of 1” above finished floor.
B. Sleeves for pipes through non-fire rated walls and potentially wet floors: Form with steel
pipe. Coordinate with structural drawings.
2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR
A. Furnish backflow preventor as scheduled on drawings to Plumbing Contractor for
installation. Coordinate placement and orientation of backflow preventor with Plumbing
Contractor.
B. Verify backflow preventor installation is acceptable prior to connecting Fire Protection
System to piping.
C. If a reducer is required prior to backflow preventor, this Contractor shall furnish this to the
Plumbing Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL PRESSURE PIPING SPECIFICATION
A. The following piping practice shall be followed in installing all steel piping.
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 10 -3

B. Full length of pipe shall be used wherever possible; short lengths of pipe with couplings
will not be permitted.
C. All pipe shall be cut to exact measurements and shall be installed without forcing or
springing so as not to cause excess stress in valves or equipment.
D. All branch connections shall be made into top of mains unless otherwise noted on
drawings.
E. All changes in direction shall be made by using pipe and fittings or by shop fabricated pipe
bends. Field pipe bends are prohibited.
F. Unions, flanges or mechanical couplings shall be installed in all pipe connections to
equipment, control valves, controllers and wherever necessary to facilitate the dismantling
of piping and removal of other items requiring maintenance.
G. All piping shall be neatly arranged, straight, run parallel, and at right angles to walls and
shall be assembled so the entire system can be drained.
H. Install pipe anchors and expansion bends or swing connections where required.
I. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of doors or windows,
shall not encroach on aisle passageways and equipment, and shall not interfere with the
servicing or maintenance of any equipment.
3.2 GENERAL PRESSURE PIPING JOINT SPECIFICATION
A. Screwed:
1. Cut pipe to length using pipe cutting machine.
2. Ream inside for removal of burrs formed by cutting.
3. Remove cuttings and foreign materials and apply a Teflon tape to male threads.
4. Care shall be exercised in using pipe wrenches to tighten joints to prevent
unnecessary tool marks.
B. Mechanical Groove:
1. Couplings and fittings shall conform to ASTM A536.
2. All mechanical grooved pipe material including gaskets, couplings, fittings, and
flange adapter to be from the same manufacturer.
3. Gaskets shall be EPDM, ASTM D2000.
C. Welded Fusion by Arc or Oxyacetylene Method:
1. Pipe with wall thickness 3/16” and over shall be manufactured with beveled ends
for welding.
2. Prepare joints for welding by machine unless ends are factory beveled for fittings.
3. Clean edges and surfaces.
4. Tack weld joints in two or more places to maintain alignment. Provide sufficient
separation in butt joints for weld metal.
5. Welding shall be continuous around joint when possible. Welding puddle shall
take up entire width of vee as it is carried around joint.
6. Backhand or forehand technique may be used.
7. Welds shall be thoroughly fused to joint edges and shall be reinforced a minimum
of 10% at the center of the weld with no point on the surface or edge of weld
below that of the pipe.
8. All slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding shall be removed before laying
down the next successive bead.
9. Remove by clipping or grinding any cracks or blowholes on surface of weld.
10. Use Oxyacetylene welding for piping 1-1/2” and less in diameter; electric arc for
all other sizes.
11. Contractor shall state in their proposal if they are not able to fabricate by welding.
Welded work shall be in accordance with the American National Standard
Institute Code for pressure piping, ANSI B31.1 and in accordance with
procedures of the SAME or National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 10 -4

3.3 ABOVE GROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Threaded Pipe Joint: Cut threads clean, remove burrs, ream ends to full inside bore, and
apply pipe joint compound to male threads. Apply red lead on any exposed threads after
joint has been pulled up tight.
B. Mechanical Grooved Pipe Joints: Apply lubricant, slide gasket over pipe end, joint pipe
and/or fitting, mate the two coupling sections, insert bolts and tighten nuts uniformly.
C. Screwed fittings or mechanical grooved pipe fittings shall be used except where noted
otherwise. Use specified pipe cut to length and threaded or grooved.
D. All piping shall be installed per NFPA 13.
E. Joint compound shall be applied to the threads of the pipe, not in the fitting. Other types
of joints must be made or installed in accordance with the requirements of the listing
thereof by a nationally recognized testing and inspection agency.
F. Brazed joints for the connection of pipe or tube and fittings may be used subject to the
following restriction: Installations in other than unoccupied buildings of non-combustible
construction the method of making the joints shall not employ any torch or flame
(induction heating is an acceptable method).
G. Sections of branch lines, cross mains, feed mains, or risers may be shop welded if done
in accordance with NFPA Pam. No. 13 and accepted by the authority having jurisdiction
over the project.
H. The connection between the system piping and underground piping should be made with
a properly strapped cast iron flange piece.
I. Where copper or steel piping is embedded in masonry or concrete, provide protective
sleeve covering of elastomeric pipe insulation.
3.4 DRAINAGE FACILITIES
A. All sprinkler pipe and fittings shall be so installed that the system may be thoroughly
drained. Where possible, all piping should be arranged to drain to the main drain valve.
Trapped piping shall be drained by an auxiliary drain.
B. Pipe shall be straightened before installation to prevent pockets that would interfere with
proper drainage.
C. Install piping so that system can be drained. Where possible, slope to main drain valve.
Slope dry pipe and preaction systems subject to freezing at a minimum of ¼”/10’ on
mains and ½”/10’ on branches. Where piping not susceptible to freezing cannot be fully
drained, install nipple and cap for drainage of less than 5 gallons or ball valve with hose
thread outlet and cap for drainage over 5 gallons. Pipe main drain valve to hub drain
provided by the plumbing contractor.
D. Drain sizes shall be per NFPA 13.
E. All sectional control valves shall have a drain valve of suitable size so located as to drain
that portion of the system controlled by the cut-off valve. Test valves may be used as the
main drain valves.
3.5 TESTING FACILITIES
A. Test pipes not less than 1" diameter shall be provided to permit flowing tests to be made
to ascertain whether water supplies and connections are in order. Such test pipes should
be not less than the sizes specified in NFPA Pam. No. 13 and equipped with a shutoff
valve.
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 10 -5

B. At or near each test pipe a pressure gauge shall be installed with a connection not smaller
than 1/4" made to the main pipe. This gauge connection shall be equipped with a shut-off
valve and with provision for draining. A plugged outlet 1/4" in size should be located
between each valve and gauge, for the purpose of installing the inspector's gauge.
C. Pressure gauges shall be of approved type maximum limit not less than twice the normal
working pressure at the point installed.
3.6 HANGERS & PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Location of hangers shall conform to NFPA Pam. No. 13, except that no mains, parallel to
joists shall be supported from a single joist. Mains parallel to joists shall be supported
from a trapeze hanger and positioned equally between two joists. The trapeze hangers
shall be positioned to load the joists at the panel points only.
B. Install sway bracing as outlined and indicated in NFPA Pam. No. 13.
C. Tops of risers shall be secured against movement in any direction. Lateral bracing shall
withstand a force equal to 50% of the weight of piping and fittings.
D. Do not hang loads from metal or wood deck or joist bridging. Hang loads only from joists,
beams, girders, concrete slabs, or precast plank.
E. Do not drill holes through any structural member without first receiving written
authorization from the Structural Engineer.
F. Use anchors rated to carry the loads supported from them. Comply with the
manufacturer’s recommendations for installation, including reduced load ratings for close
spacing and edge distances. Use special anchors for loads subject to dynamic vibratory
or fatigue loadings.
G. Hang mechanical or piping loads from the joist top chord panel points or from auxiliary
members furnished by the Contractor hanging the loads. Where concentrated loads or
auxiliary members are not located at a joist panel point, the contractor hanging the
concentrated load shall install additional joist web reinforcement, as directed by Architect.
H. For loads exceeding that listed above, spread out piping runs to unloaded joists or
support directly from the girder.
3.7 SLEEVES
A. Piping is not allowed to run through beams, columns, or footings, unless provisions for
such installation are provided on structural drawings.
B. Do not place openings or penetrations within the area below a beam bearing described by
a line sloping downward at a 45-degree angle from the bottom edges of the bearing plate.
C. Piping passing through a wall shall be sleeved or cored and a soft joint provided. This
may require sheet metal collars on each side of the wall. If the pipe is hung from the
structure before it passes through the wall, allow for 1 ½” vertical movement in a
conventional building and 3” in a pre-engineered building.
3.8 TESTS AND FLUSHING
A. All piping inside of buildings should be tested hydrostatically.
B. An operating test should be made of the system when completed, and all defects
remedied.
C. The flushing operations should be continued for a sufficient time to insure thorough
cleaning.
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 10 -6

END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 05 10 -7

SECTION 21 13 13
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Design and installation of a wet-pipe sprinkler system.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Applicable provisions of Division 01 – General Conditions shall govern work under this
section.
B. Section 21 05 00 - General Fire Protection Requirements.
C. Section 21 05 10 - Fire Protection Piping.
D. Division 26 – Electrical for fire alarm controls and wiring related to work of this section.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Install a wet pipe sprinkler system to provide coverage for the entire building.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design and installation shall conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 13R.
B. All equipment shall bear the UL and FM marking.
C. Fire protection system components shall be rated for a minimum operating pressure of
175 psig.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND APPROVALS
A. This Contractor, conforming to Architect’s layout, which has tentative approval, shall
prepare shop drawings of the entire automatic sprinkler system. Contractor shall submit
drawings and calculations for approval to show compatibility with other building
components.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 21 05 00.
C. No work shall commence until all approvals have been granted.
D. Shop drawings shall include all accessories listed in this section pertaining to this project
as well as the plans and calculations.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 21 05
00.
B. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and
Record Drawings.
1.7 CONTRACT TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS
A. After sprinkler installation is finished, the Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be
approved prior to final payment request.
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 13 13 - 1

1.8 TESTS
A. Complete all hydrostatic tests along with any test required by NFPA or by the authority
having jurisdiction over the project.
B. Test all alarms installed as a part of this contract to insure proper operation.
C. Submit test result in triplicate to Architect.
1.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Conform to requirements set forth in Section 21 05 00. Any deviations from these
specifications must conform to prior agreement with Architect's representative.
1.10 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A. All relays, wire, conduit, pushbuttons, pilot lights, and other devices required for the
control of motors or electrical equipment are furnished by the Electrical Contractor, except
as specifically noted elsewhere in this division of the specifications.
B. Electrical drawings and/or specifications show number and horsepower rating of all
motors furnished by this contractor. Should any change in size, horsepower rating, or
means of control be made to any motor or other electrical equipment after contracts are
awarded, Contractor is to immediately notify the Electrical Contractor of this change and
pay any costs due to this change.
C. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power and control wiring.
D. Furnish wiring diagrams to the Electrical Contractor for all equipment and devices
indicated to be wired by Electrical Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
A. See Section 21 05 10 for piping specifications.
2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Sprinkler heads shall be as specified on drawings. Acceptable manufacturers include
Central, Viking, Star, Reliable, or approved equal.
B. Sprinkler heads submitted other than as scheduled on drawings should have same
aesthetic and working characteristics as noted on schedule.
2.3 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Provide a flush type siamese pumper connection. Pumper connection shall be Potter
Roemer 5022, 2 ½” x 2 ½” x 4” marked “Automatic Sprinklers” or approved equal. Verify
compatibility with the local fire department.
B. Install pumper connections in accordance with NFPA Pam. No. 13, with check valve and
automatic drip.
2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR FULL FLOW TEST CONNECTION
A. Provide a flush type outlet test connection similar to Potter Roemer Model 5862-2-6.
Connection shall be marked “BFP Flow Test Conn.” Outlet shall be sized to be capable of
flow entire system demand plus a reasonable safety factor.
2.5 VALVE CONTROL
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 13 13 - 2

A. Elkhart Brass Company #164 valve control for use with standard N.R.S. gate valve.
Provide a #480 tee handle in fire hose cabinet to operate valve.
B. Note: Gate valve should include a ball drip to drain hydrant pipe.
2.6 SPRINKLER ALARMS
A. Sprinkler alarms shall be provided in accordance with NFPA Pam. No. 13 using the
following equipment:
1. Alarm Check Valve: Alarm check valve with retard chamber, water motor gong,
gauges, test valves, etc., as manufactured by The Viking Corporation or
approved equal.
2. Waterflow Alarm Indicator: Potter Electric Model VSR-F to fit riser with adjustable
pneumatic retard to 90 second delay; dust proof and tamper proof housing;
saddle casting for direct connection to riser piping; with inductive rating of 15.0
amps, 125/250 VAC.
3. Alarm Signal: Viking electric bell a minimum of 8" diameter installed in area of
the riser. Electrical Contractor shall install wiring between waterflow alarm
indicator and alarm signal. Bell shall have a rating of 120 volts A.C.
4. Tamper Switch:
a) Potter Electric Model PCVS or approved equal single pole double throw
(SPDT) tamper switch operated by the OPEN/SHUT target indicator of a
PIV gate valve or the operating mechanism of the butterfly valve. Unit
shall be corrosion resistant. Switch shall have rating of 120 volts A.C.
b) Potter Electric Model OSYSU or approved equal single pole double throw
(SPDT) tamper switch operated by an OS&Y valve. Unit shall be
corrosion resistant. Switch shall have rating of 120 volts A.C.
2.7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. No fire alarm system, other than each riser alarm, will be included in this contract. Any
supervisory system will be by Electrical Contractor.
2.8 SPARE HEADS AND CABINETS
A. Provide spare sprinkler heads per table below of each type and rating installed in a metal
cabinet equipped with hinged cover, wall mounted. One sprinkler wrench of each type
used shall also be provided. Mount cabinet on wall near main riser.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Quantity of Sprinklers Installed
Minimum Number of Spare Heads
< 300 Sprinklers 6
300 - 1000 Sprinklers 12
1000 > Sprinklers 24
A. Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades and provide any information
necessary to permit work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily with the least possible
interference or delay.
B. Where work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to work of other trades,
the Contractor shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory
adjustment.
C. If the Contractor installs their work before coordinating it with other trades or so as to
cause interference with work of other trades, the Contractor shall make necessary
changes in their work to correct the condition without extra charge.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 13 13 - 3

A. Locate Fire Department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or
adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.
B. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall.
C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
D. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
E. Fire Protection Contractor shall coordinate their work with other trades.
F. System drains, inspector test connections, etc., must drain either to the outside of the
building or to the building’s waste pipe system per the Plumbing Code.
G. Locate sprinkler heads as indicated on plans maintaining minimum clearances from
obstructions, ceilings, and walls. Install sprinkler heads level in locations not subject to
spray pattern interference. Provide fire sprinkler head installations below ductwork,
soffits, etc.
H. Provide a valved pressure gauge in main fire protection riser and at the top of each piping
riser.
I. Properly align piping before installing valves. Do not support weight of piping system on
valve ends. Mount valves in locations that allow access for operation, servicing, and
replacement. Install all valves with the stem in the upright or horizontal position. Valves
installed with the stems down will not be accepted. Provide a riser shutoff valve and a
capped hose thread drain valve at the bottom of each riser. Provide capped hose thread
drain valves to allow draining of each portion of piping.
J. Fire Department and Backflow Preventor Test Connection shall be mounted on wall.
Support from structure independent of piping. Locate 18” to 36” above grade. Fill wall
penetration with insulation and caulk exterior and interior face of wall opening weather
tight.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter per Section 21 05 00.
3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
A. Hydrostatically test the entire system per Section 21 05 00.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 21 13 13 - 4

SECTION 21 13 16
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Design and installation of dry pipe sprinkler system.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 21 05 00 - General Fire Protection Requirements.
B. Section 21 05 10 - Fire Protection Piping.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Install a dry pipe sprinkler system to provide coverage for areas indicated on Contract
Documents.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design and installation to conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 13R.
B. All equipment must bear the UL an FM markings
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS & APPROVALS
A. Shop drawings of the entire automatic sprinkler system shall be prepared by this
Contractor, conforming to Architect's layout, which has tentative approval. The Contractor
shall submit drawings and calculations for approval to show compatibility with other
building components.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 21 05 00.
C. No work shall commerce until all approvals have been granted.
D. Shop drawings shall include all accessories listed in this Section pertaining to this project
as well as the plans and calculations.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section
15300A.
B. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements and
record drawings.
1.7 CONTRACT TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS
A. After sprinkler installation is finished, the Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be
approved prior to final payment request.
1.8 TESTS
Dunn County – Housing Units
21 13 16-1

A. Complete all hydrostatic test indicated along with any test required by NFPA or by the
authority having jurisdiction over the project.
B. Test all alarms installed as a part of this contract to insure proper operation.
C. Submit test results in triplicate to Architect.
1.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Conform to requirements set forth in Section 21 05 10. Any deviations from these
specifications must conform to prior agreement with Architect's Representative.
B. Record Drawings: See Section 21 05 10. All deviations in installation from the shop
drawings shall be noted on record drawings. Special attention shall be given to
underground installation. Indicate accurately all piping runs using dimensions from
adjacent building columns.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
A. See Section 21 05 10 for piping specifications.
2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Sprinkler heads shall be as specified on drawings. Additional manufacturers that may be
acceptable include Viking, Star, and Reliable.
B. Sprinkler heads submitted other than as scheduled on drawings shall have same
aesthetic and working characteristics as noted on schedule.
2.3 SPRINKLER ALARMS
A. Sprinkler alarms shall be provided in accordance with NFPA Pam. No. 13 using the
following equipment.
1. Dry Pipe Valve: Provide dry pipe valve and trim. Trim package shall include
necessary valves, gauges, fittings and nipples to provide an air supply
connection, priming water connection drain connections, alarm connection,
accelerator connections and alarm test bypass. Dry pipe valve and trim shall be
from the same manufacturer, Central Sprinkler Corporation or approved equal.
2. Water Motor Alarm: Provide water motor gong mounted to the exterior of building
at location indicated on documents. Gong shall be Central Sprinkler Model F-1
with red enamel finish, or approved equal.
3. Waterflow Alarm Indicator: Provide waterflow switch on dry pipe alarm valve per
valve manufacturer recommendations. Switch shall be Potter Model WFSB.
2.4 AIR MAINTENANCE
A. Provide automatic heavy-duty air compressor and air receiver tank. Connect to dry pipe
valve per manufacturer recommendations. Compressor shall be sized per NFPA 13. Air
receiver tank shall maintain a pressure of 10 to 15 psi above air pressure demand of dry
system.
B. Provide automatic air pressure maintenance device between dry pipe valve and air
compressor. Provide low-pressure switch Potter Model PS40A on system side of air shut-
Dunn County – Housing Units
21 13 16-2

off and check valve. Air maintenance device shall be Central Sprinkler Model D-1, or
approved equal.
2.5 DRY PIPE VALVE ACCELERATOR
A. Provide accelerator and trim with anti-flooding device for dry pipe valve. Accelerator shall
be manufactured by same manufacturer of dry pipe valve. Central Sprinkler Model A or
approved equal.
2.6 SPRINKLER ALARM SYSTEM
A. No sprinkler alarm system, other than each riser alarm, will be included in this contract.
Any supervisory system will be by Owner.
2.7 SPARE HEADS AND CABINETS
A. Provide spare sprinkler heads per table below of each type and rating installed in a metal
cabinet equipped with hinged cover, wall mounted. One sprinkler wrench of each type
used shall also be provided. Mount cabinet on wall near main riser.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Quantity of Sprinklers Installed
Minimum Number of Spare Heads
< 300 Sprinklers 6
300 - 1000 Sprinklers 12
1000 > Sprinklers 24
A. Coordinate all work in this Section with all other trades.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall.
B. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
C. Fire Protection contractor shall coordinate the work with other trades.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
A. Test Pressure: All systems including yard piping shall be tested hydrostatically at not less
than 200 pounds per square inch pressure for two hours or at 50 pounds per square inch
in excess of the maximum static pressure when the maximum static pressure is in excess
of 150 pounds.
B. Measurement of Leakage: The amount of leakage in underground piping should be
measured at the specified test pressure by pumping from a calibrated container.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units
21 13 16-3

SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING INDEX
SECTION 22 05 00 - GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 22 05 03 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
SECTION 22 05 23 - VALVES
SECTION 22 05 29 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
SECTION 22 07 00 - PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 10 00 - PIPING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 10 01 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 30 00 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
Dunn County - Housing Units 22 00 00 - 1

SECTION 22 05 00
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
1.02 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 00 govern work under this section.
A. This section includes information common to two or more technical plumbing specification
sections or items that are of a general nature, not conveniently fitting into other technical
sections.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as
follows:
ABMA
ACPA
AGA
AMCA
ANSI
ARI
ASME
ASPE
ASSE
ASTM
AWWA
AWS
CISPI
CGA
CS
EPA
FS
GAMA
IAPMO
IEEE
ISA
MCA
MICA
MSS
NBS
NEC
NEMA
NFPA
NSF
PDI
SMACNA
American Boiler Manufacturers Association
American Concrete Pipe Association
American Gas Association
Air Movement and Control Association
American National Standards Institute
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society of Plumbing Engineers
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Water Works Association
American Welding Society
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Compressed Gas Association
Commercial Standards, Products Standards Sections, Office of Eng.
Standards Service, NBS
Environmental Protection Agency
Federal Specifications, Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government
Printing Office
Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association
International Association of Plumbing & Mechanical Officials
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Instrument Society of America
Mechanical Contractors Association
Midwest Insulation Contractors Association
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve & Fitting Industry, Inc.
National Bureau of Standards
National Electric Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
National Sanitation Foundation
Plumbing and Drainage Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. Inc.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 00 - 1

STI
UL
Steel Tank Institute
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Division 00, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions.
B. All products and materials used are to be new, undamaged, clean and in good condition.
C. Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration,
dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated on the contract
documents, the contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the
equipment or accessories into the system and for obtaining the intended performance
from the system into which these items are placed.
1.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES
A. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements, Protection of Finished Surfaces.
1.06 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
A. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements, Sleeves and Openings.
1.07 SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING
A. Sealing and firestopping of sleeves/openings between piping, etc. and the sleeve or
structural opening shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose work penetrates the
opening. The contractor responsible shall hire individuals skilled in such work to do the
sealing and fireproofing. These individuals hired shall normally and routinely be employed
in the sealing and fireproofing occupation.
1.08 OFF SITE STORAGE
1.09 CODES
A. Prior approval by the A/E will be needed. The contractor shall submit Storage Agreement
Form for consideration of off site materials storage. Generally, sleeves, pipe/pipe fittings
and similar rough-in material will not be accepted for off site storage. No material will be
accepted for off site storage unless shop drawings for the material have been approved.
A. Comply with requirements of State Codes, including local and health department codes.
1.10 CERTIFICATES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Refer also to Division 00, General Conditions, Permits, Regulations, Utilities and Taxes.
B. Obtain and pay for all required State installation inspections except those provided by the
Architect/Engineer in accordance with State and Local authorities. Deliver originals of
these certificates to the Owner's Project Representative. Include copies of the certificates
in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01, General Conditions, Submittals.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 00 - 2

B. Not more than two weeks after award of contract but before any shop drawings are
submitted, contractor to submit the following plumbing system data sheet. List piping
material type for each piping service on the project, ASTM number, schedule or pressure
class, joint type, manufacturer and model number where appropriate. List valves and
specialties for each piping service, fixture and equipment with manufacturer and model
number. The approved plumbing system data sheet(s) will be made available at the job
site for their use on this project.
Plumbing System Data Sheet
Item Pipe Service/Sizes Manufacturer/Model No. Remarks
Pipe
Fittings
Unions
Valves:
Ball
Butterfly
Balancing
Check
Other
Pipe Specialties:
Thermometers
Pres Gauges
Strainers
Building Penetrations
Hangers & Supports
Insulation
Plbg. Specialties:
Floor/Roof Drains
Cleanouts
Water Hammer Arrestors
Backflow Preventers
Wall Hydrants
Hose Bibbs
Trap Primers
Hydrants
Wash Machine Boxes
Plbg. Fixtures
Plbg. Equipment
C. Shop drawing submittals are to be bound, labeled, contain the project manual cover page
and a material index list page showing item designation, manufacturer and additional
items supplied with the installation. Submit for all equipment and systems as indicated in
the respective specification sections, marking each submittal with that specification
section number. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items
being submitted and proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as
indicated in the contract documents. Include wiring diagrams of electrically powered
equipment.
D. Submit sufficient quantities of data sheets and shop drawings to allow the following
distribution:
1. Operating and Maintenance Manuals 2 copies
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 00 - 3

2. Architect 1 copy
3. Engineer 1 copy
1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements, Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
B. Assemble material in three-ring or post binders, using an index at the front of each
volume and tabs for each system or type of equipment. In addition to the data indicated in
the General Requirements, include the following information:
1. Copies of all approved shop drawings.
2. Manufacturer's wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment
3. Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements
4. Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies
5. Parts lists for fixtures, equipment, valves and specialties.
6. Manufacturer’s installation, operation and maintenance recommendations for
fixtures, equipment, valves and specialties.
7. Valve schedules
8. Lubrication instructions, including list/frequency of lubrication
9. Warranties
10. Additional information as indicated in the technical specification sections
1.13 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. Instruct user agency personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of systems and
equipment provided as part of this project. Include not less than 2 hours of instruction,
using the Operating and Maintenance manuals during this instruction. Demonstrate
startup, operation and shutdown procedures for all equipment. All training to be during
normal working hours. Videotape all instructions and provide Owner with copy.
1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements, Record Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
A. Lay-In Ceilings: Removable lay-in ceiling tiles in 2 x 2 foot or 2 x 4 foot configuration
provided under Section 09500 are sufficient; no additional access provisions are required
unless specifically indicated.
B. Plaster Walls and Ceilings: 16 gauge frame with not less than a 20 gauge hinged door
panel, prime coated steel for general applications, stainless steel for use in toilets,
showers, and similar wet areas, concealed hinges, screwdriver operated cam latch for
general applications, key lock for use in public or secured areas, UL listed for use in fire
rated partitions if required by the application. Use the largest size access opening
possible, consistent with the space and the item needing service; minimum size is 12" by
12".
2.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Stencils: Not less than 1-inch high letters/numbers for marking pipe and equipment.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 00 - 4

B. Engraved Name Plates: White letters on a black background, 1/16-inch thick plastic
laminate, beveled edges, screw mounting, Setonply Style 2060 by Seton Name Plate
Company or Emedolite Style EIP by EMED Co., or equal by W. H. Brady.
C. Snap-Around Pipe Markers: One-piece, preformed, vinyl construction, snap-around or
strap-around pipe markers with applicable labeling and flow direction arrows, ¾" min. size
for lettering. Provide nylon ties on each end of pipe markers equal to Seton Setmark.
D. Valve Tags: Round brass tags with ½inch numbers, ¼-inch system identification
abbreviation, 1¼-inch minimum diameter, with brass jack chains, brass "S" hooks or one
piece nylon ties around the valve stem, available from EMED Co., Seton Name Plate
Company, or W. H. Brady.
E. Underground Warning Tape: Detectable underground warning tape, 5.0 mil overall
thickness, 6" width, .0035" thick aluminum foil core with polyethylene jacket bonded to
both sides. Color code tape and print caution along with name of buried service in bold
letters on face of tape. Thor Enterprises Magnatec or equal by Carlton, MSI Marking
Services, Seton.
2.03 SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING
A. Fire and/or Smoke Rated Penetrations:
1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M
b. Hilti
c. Rectorseal
d. STI/SpecSeal
e. Tremco, or approved equal.
2. All firestopping systems shall be provided by the same manufacturer.
3. Fire stop systems shall be UL listed or tested by an independent testing
laboratory approved by the Department of Commerce.
4. Submittals: Contractor shall submit product data for each firestop system.
Submittals shall include product characteristics, performance and limitation
criteria, test data, MSDS sheets, installation details and procedures for each
method of installation applicable to this project. For non-standard conditions
where no UL tested system exists, submit manufacturer's drawings for UL system
with known performance for which an engineering judgment can be based upon.
5. Use a product that has a rating not less than the rating of the wall or floor being
penetrated. Reference architectural drawings for identification of fire and/or
smoke rated walls and floors.
6. Use firestop putty, caulk sealant, intumescent wrapstrips, intumescent firestop
collars, firestop blocks, firestop mortar or a combination of these products to
provide a UL listed system for each application required for this project. Provide
mineral wool backing where specified in manufacturer's application detail.
B. Non-Rated Penetrations:
1. In exterior wall openings below grade, use a modular mechanical type seal
consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the
annular space between the uninsulated pipe and the cored opening or a waterstop
type wall sleeve. The operating bolts of the mechanical type seal shall be
accessible from the interior of the building.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 00 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE WORK
2. At pipe penetrations of interior partitions, floors and exterior walls, use urethane
caulk in annular space between pipe insulation and sleeve.
A. Cast-in-place concrete within the building will be performed by the Division 03 Contractor
unless otherwise noted. Provide all layout drawings, anchor bolts, metal shapes, and/or
templates required to be cast into concrete or used to form concrete for support or
installation of plumbing piping, fixtures, specialties and equipment. Coordinate locations of
equipment, pipe penetrations in wet areas, etc. with the Division 03 Contractor.
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements, Cutting and Patching.
B. Plumbing related cast-in-place concrete on the exterior of the building to be provided by
this Contractor in conformance with requirements of 03. This includes piping thrust
restraints, pipe supports, hydrant supports, manholes, catch basins, grease traps, septic
tanks, distribution boxes, valve pits, meter pits, cleanout cover pads, yard hydrant pads,
etc.
3.03 BUILDING ACCESS
A. Arrange for the necessary openings in the building to allow for admittance or removal of
all apparatus. When the building access was not previously arranged and must be
provided by this contractor, restore any opening to its original condition after the
apparatus has been brought into the building.
3.04 EQUIPMENT ACCESS
A. Install all piping, conduit, and accessories to permit access to equipment for maintenance.
Coordinate the exact location of wall and ceiling access panels and doors with the
Construction Manager, making sure that access is available for all equipment and
specialties. Where access is required in plaster walls or ceilings, furnish the access doors
to the Drywall Contractor.
3.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate all work with other contractors prior to installation. Any work that is not
coordinated and that interferes with other contractor's work shall be removed or relocated
at the installing contractor's expense.
B. Verify that all devices are compatible for the type of construction and surfaces on which
they will be used.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify equipment in mechanical equipment rooms by stenciling equipment number and
service with one coat of black enamel against a light background or white enamel against
a dark background. Use a primer where necessary for proper paint adhesion.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 00 - 6

B. Where stenciling is not appropriate for equipment identification, engraved name plates
may be used.
C. Identify interior piping not less than once every 30 feet, not less than once in each room,
adjacent to each access door or panel, and on both side of the partition where accessible
piping passes through walls or floors. Place flow directional arrows at each pipe
identification location. Use one coat of black enamel against a light background or white
enamel against a dark background.
D. Identify all exterior buried piping for entire length with underground warning tape except
for sewer piping which is routed in straight lines between manholes or cleanouts. Place
tape 6"-12" below finished grade along entire length of pipe. Extend tape to surface at
building entrances, meters, hydrants and valves.
E. Identify valves with brass tags bearing a system identification and a valve sequence
number. Valve tags are not required at a terminal device unless the valves are greater
than ten feet from the device, located in another room or not visible from device. Provide
a typewritten valve schedule and pipe identification schedule indicating the valve number
and the equipment or areas supplied by each valve and the symbols used for pipe
identification; locate schedules in mechanical room and in each Operating and
Maintenance manual. Schedule in mechanical room to be framed under clear plastic.
3.07 LUBRICATION
A. Lubricate all bearings with lubricant as recommended by the manufacturer before the
equipment is operated for any reason. Once the equipment has been run, maintain
lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions until the work is accepted
by the Owner. Maintain a log of all lubricants used and frequency of lubrication; include
this information in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals at the completion of the
project.
3.08 SLEEVES
A. Provide galvanized sheet metal sleeves for pipe penetrations through interior and exterior
walls to provide a backing for sealant or firestopping. Patch wall around sleeve to match
adjacent wall construction and finish. Grout area around sleeve in masonry construction.
In finished spaces where pipe penetration through wall is exposed to view, sheet metal
sleeve shall be installed flush with face of wall. In existing poured concrete walls where
penetration is core drilled, pipe sleeve is not required.
B. Pipe sleeves in new poured concrete construction shall be schedule 40 steel pipe, cast in
place.
C. In all piping floor penetrations, fire rated and non-fire rated, top of sleeve shall extend ¾-
inch above the adjacent finished floor. In existing floor penetrations, core drill sleeve
opening large enough to insert schedule 40 sleeve and grout area around sleeve with
hydraulic setting, non-shrink grout. If the pipe penetrating the sleeve is supported by a
pipe clamp resting on the sleeve, weld a collar or struts to the sleeve that will transfer
weight to existing floor structure.
3.09 SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING
A. Fire and/or Smoke Rated Penetrations:
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 00 - 7

1. Install approved product in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions where
a pipe penetrates a fire/smoke rated surface. When pipe is insulated, use a
product which maintains the integrity of the insulation and vapor barrier.
2. Where firestop mortar is used to infill large fire-rated floor openings that could be
required to support weight, provide permanent structural forming. Firestop mortar
alone is not adequate to support substantial weight.
B. Non-Rated Partitions:
1. In exterior wall openings below grade, assemble rubber links of mechanical seal
to the proper size for the pipe and tighten in place, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
2. At all interior partitions and exterior walls, pipe penetrations are required to be
sealed. Apply sealant to both sides of the penetration in such a manner that the
annular space between the pipe sleeve or cored opening and the pipe or
insulation is completely blocked.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 00 - 8

SECTION 22 05 03
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
1.02 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 00 govern work under this section.
A. This section contains specifications for plumbing pipe and pipe fittings for this project.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as
follows:
ANSI B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ANSI B16.29 Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage
Fittings - DWV
ASTM A74 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A888 Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
ASTM B32 Solder Metal
ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM B280 Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field
Service
ASTM B306 Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)
ASTM B813 Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering Applications of Copper and Copper
Alloy Tube
ASTM C564 Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D1785 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe
ASTM D2466 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2657 Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2665 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D2729 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2774 Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic
Pressure Piping
ASTM D2855 Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D3034 Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D3212 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric
Seals
ASTM D3311 Drain, Waste and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fitting Patterns
ASTM F656 Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C104 Cement Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 1

AWWA C105
AWWA C110
AWWA C111
AWWA C151
AWWA C153
AWWA C600
AWWA C651
CISPI 310
NFPA 54
Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water
Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 In. Through 48 In., for Water and
Other Liquids
Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings
Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds
for Water or Other Liquids
Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 In. Through 48 In., for Water and Other
Liquids
Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances
Disinfecting Water Mains
Couplings For Use In Connection With Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe And
Fittings For Sanitary And Storm Drain, Waste And Vent Piping
Applications
National Fuel Gas Code
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Schedule from the contractor indicating the ASTM, AWWA or CISPI specification number
of the pipe being proposed along with its type and grade if known at the time of submittal,
and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating of fittings for each service.
B. Statement from manufacturer on his letterhead that pipe furnished meets the ASTM,
AWWA or CISPI specification contained in this section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Order all copper, cast iron, steel, and PVC pipe with each length marked with the name or
trademark of the manufacturer and type of pipe; with each shipping unit marked with the
purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper, size, and name of supplier.
B. Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with
material that meets these specifications without additional cost to the State.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Promptly inspect shipments to insure that the material is undamaged and complies with
specifications.
B. Cover pipe to prevent corrosion or deterioration while allowing sufficient ventilation to
avoid condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe, tube, and
fitting ends so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, take
precautions so the caps remain in place. Protect fittings, flanges, and unions by storage
inside or by durable, waterproof, above ground packaging.
C. Offsite storage agreements will not relieve the contractor from using proper storage
techniques.
D. Storage and protection methods must allow inspection to verify products.
1.07 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale, and meeting the latest revision of
ASTM, AWWA or CISPI specifications as listed in this specification.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 2

B. Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system.
C. Non-metallic piping will be acceptable only for the services indicated. It will not be
acceptable in ventilation plenum spaces, including plenum ceilings.
D. Where weld fittings or mechanical grooved fittings are used, use only long radius elbows
having a centerline radius of 1.5 pipe diameters.
E. Where ASTM A53 type F pipe is specified, Grade A type E or S, or grade B type E or S
may be substituted at Contractor's option. Where the grade or type is not specified,
Contractor may choose from those commercially available.
F. Where ASTM B88, type L H (drawn) temper copper tubing is specified, ASTM B88, type K
H (drawn) temper copper tubing may be substituted at Contractor's option.
1.08 WELDER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators for all building service piping to be in
accordance with certified welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding
Bureau and Section 927.5 of ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping or AWS 10.9
Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. Before any
metallic welding is performed, Contractor to submit his Standard Welding Procedure
Specification together with the Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section
927.6 of ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping.
B. Before any polyethylene fusion welding is performed, Contractor to submit certification
that the welders to be used on this project have successfully demonstrated proper
welding procedures in accordance with the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Part
192, Section 192.285.
C. The Architect or Engineer reserves the right to test the work of any welder employed on
the project, at the State's expense. If the work of the welder is found to be unsatisfactory,
the welder shall be prevented from doing further welding on the project and all defective
welds replaced.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DOMESTIC WATER
A. Above Ground:
1. Type L copper water tube, H (drawn) temper, ASTM B88; wrought copper
pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22; lead free (

1. Ductile iron pipe, mechanical or push on joint, thickness Class 52, AWWA C151;
with standard thickness cement mortar lining, AWWA C104; ductile iron or gray
iron mechanical joint cement mortar lined fittings, Class 250, AWWA C110;
ductile iron mechanical joint compact fittings, Class 350, AWWA C153; rubber
gasket joints with non-toxic gasket lubricant, AWWA C111. Provide 8 mil tube or
sheet polyethylene encasement of iron pipe and pipe fittings, AWWA C105.
D. Hydrant Leads: Ductile iron pipe, restrained mechanical joint, thickness Class 52, AWWA
C151; with standard thickness cement mortar lining, AWWA C104; ductile iron or gray
iron restrained mechanical joint cement mortar lined fittings, Class 250, AWWA C110;
ductile iron restrained mechanical joint compact fittings, Class 350, AWWA C153; rubber
gasket joints with non-toxic gasket lubricant, AWWA C111. Provide 8 mil tube or sheet
polyethylene encasement of iron pipe and pipe fittings, AWWA C105.
E. Thrust Restraints: 2500 psi concrete; retainer glands; restrained joint fittings; steel rods,
ASTM A575; steel clamps and straps, ASTM A506; steel bolts, ASTM A307; malleable
iron rod couplings, ASTM A197; cast iron washers, ASTM A307; bitumastic anti-corrosion
coating.
2.02 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT
A. Interior Above Ground:
1. Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings, ASTM A888; with no-hub couplings, CISPI
310.
2. Type M copper water tube, H (drawn) temper, ASTM B88; with cast copper
drainage fittings (DWV), ANSI B16.23; wrought copper drainage fittings (DWV),
ANSI B16.29; lead free (

1. Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings, ASTM A888; with no-hub couplings, CISPI
310.
2. Type M copper water tube, H (drawn) temper, ASTM B88; with cast copper
drainage fittings (DWV), ANSI B16.23; wrought copper drainage fittings (DWV),
ANSI B16.29; lead free (

fittings with 10 mil polyethylene tape, ANSI A21.5, double layer, half-lapped. Minimum
dielectric strength exceeding 12 KV. Use a compatible primer below polymer film or
polyethylene tape.
2.05 DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Watts Regulator Company, Lochinvar, Wilkins or EPCO Sales, Inc., dielectric unions 2"
and smaller; dielectric flanges 2" and larger; with iron female pipe thread to copper solder
joint or brass female pipe thread end connections, non-asbestos gaskets, having a
pressure rating of not less than 175 psig at 180 degrees.
2.06 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Unions, flanges and gasket materials to have a pressure rating of not less than 150 psig
at 180 degrees.
B. 2" and Smaller Steel: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats.
Use black malleable iron on black steel piping and galvanized malleable iron on
galvanized steel piping. Use unions of a pressure class equal or higher than that specified
for the fittings of the respective piping service but not less than 250 psi.
C. 2" and Smaller Copper: ANSI B16.18 cast bronze union coupling or ANSI B15.24 Class
150 cast bronze flanges.
D. 2½" and Larger Steel: ASTM 181 or A105, grade 1 hot forged steel flanges of threaded,
welding neck, or slip-on pattern and of a pressure class compatible with that specified for
valves, piping specialties and fittings of the respective piping service. Flanges smaller
than 2 ½” may be used as needed for connecting to equipment and piping specialties.
Use raised face flanges ANSI B16.5 for mating with other raised face flanges on
equipment with flat ring or full face gaskets. Use ANSI B16.1 flat face flanges with full
face gaskets for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment. Gasket material to be
non-asbestos and suitable for pressures and temperatures of the piping system.
E. 2½" and Larger Copper: ANSI B15.24 Class 150 cast bronze flanges with full face
gaskets.
2.07 MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings, ASTM F1476, as manufactured by
Victaulic, ITT Grinnell or Gustin-Bacon may be used with cut groove galvanized steel
pipe, cut groove ductile iron pipe or roll groove copper pipe where noted. Mechanical
grooved components and assemblies to be rated for minimum 250 psi working pressure.
B. All mechanical grooved pipe material including gaskets, couplings, fittings and flange
adapters to be from the same manufacturer.
C. Couplings to be malleable iron, ASTM A47, or ductile iron ASTM A536 with painted finish.
Reducing couplings are not acceptable.
D. Fittings used on galvanized steel pipe to be malleable iron, ASTM A47, or ductile iron
A536, with galvanized finish, ASTM A153. Fittings used on ductile iron pipe to be cement
mortar lined ductile iron with coal tar coating, ASTM A536; conforming to requirements of
AWWA C110/C153 and AWWA C606. Fittings used on copper pipe to be copper.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 6

E. Gaskets to be EPDM, ASTM D2000. Gaskets for hot water systems and dry pipe systems
to be flush seal design. Heat treated carbon steel oval neck track bolts and nuts, ASTM
A183, with zinc electroplated finish ASTM B633.
F. Flange adapters to be ductile iron, ASTM A536; except at lug type butterfly valves where
standard threaded flanges shall be used.
G. Credit for the inherent flexibility of mechanical grooved pipe connections when used for
expansion joints or flexible connectors may be allowed upon specific application by the
Contractor. Three flexible couplings at first three connection points both upstream and
downstream of pumps may be used in lieu of flexible connectors. Request for expansion
joints shall be made in writing and shall include service, location, line size, proposed
application and supporting calculations for the intended service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with reference standards, manufacturers
recommendations and recognized industry practices.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Cut pipe ends square. Ream ends of piping to remove burrs. Clean scale and dirt from
interior and exterior of each section of pipe and fitting prior to assembly.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct
any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop
in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. Coordinate
locations of plumbing piping with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades
to allow sufficient clearances. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe
spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before
installing piping.
B. Where copper or steel piping is embedded in masonry or concrete, provide protective
sleeve covering of elastomeric pipe insulation.
C. Install underground warning tape 6"-12" below finished grade above all exterior below
ground piping. Where existing underground warning tape is encountered, repair and
replace.
D. Maintain piping in clean condition internally during construction.
E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, access to valves and piping specialties.
F. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints and/or expansion loops so that piping may
expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building.
G. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panelboards, or
switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is
serving this equipment
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 7

H. Install all valves and piping specialties, including items furnished by others, as specified
and/or detailed. Provide access to valves and specialties for maintenance. Make
connections to all equipment, fixtures and systems installed by others where same
requires the piping services indicated in this section.
3.04 COPPER PIPE JOINTS
A. Remove all slivers and burrs remaining from the cutting operation by reaming and filing
both pipe surfaces. Clean fitting and tube with metal brush, emery cloth or sandpaper.
Remove residue from the cleaning operation, apply flux and assemble joint to socket
stop. Apply flame to fitting until solder melts when placed at joint. Remove flame and feed
solder into joint until full penetration of cup and ring of solder appears. Wipe excess
solder and flux from joint.
3.05 WELDED PIPE JOINTS
A. Make all welded joints by fusion welding in accordance with ASME Codes, ANSI B31, and
State Codes where applicable. "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" may be used for branch
takeoffs up to one-half (½) the diameter of the main.
3.06 THREADED PIPE JOINTS
A. Use a thread lubricant or teflon tape when making joints; no hard setting pipe thread
cement or caulking will be allowed.
3.07 PROPRESS PIPE FITTINGS
A. Copper and copper alloy fitting shall conform with NSF 61 and ASME B16.18 or ASME
B16.22. Sealing elements for press fitting shall be EPDM. Install per manufacturers
recommendations.
3.08 SOLVENT WELDED PIPE JOINTS
A. Install in accordance with ASTM D2855 "Making Solvent Cemented Joints With PVC Pipe
and Fittings". Saw cut piping square and smooth. Tube cutters may be used if they are
fitted with wheels designed for use with PVC/CPVC pipe that do not leave a raised bead
on pipe exterior. Support and restrain pipe during cutting to prevent nicks and scratches.
Bevel ends 10-15 degrees and deburr interior. Remove dust, drips, moisture, grease and
other superfluous materials from pipe interior and exterior. Check dry fit of pipe and
fittings. Reject materials which are out of round or do not fit within close tolerance. Use
heavy body solvent cement for large diameter fittings.
B. Maintain pipe, fittings, primer and cement between 40 and 100 degrees during application
and curing. Apply primer and solvent using separate daubers (3" and smaller piping only)
or clean natural bristle brushes about ½ the size of the pipe diameter. Apply primer to the
fitting socket and pipe surface with a scrubbing motion. Check for penetration and reapply
as needed to dissolve surface to a depth of 4-5 thousandths. Apply solvent cement to the
fitting socket and pipe in an amount greater than needed to fill any gap. While both
surfaces are wet, insert pipe into socket fitting with a quarter turn to the bottom of the
socket. Solvent cement application and insertion must be completed in less than 1
minute. Minimum of 2 installers is required on piping 4" and larger. Hold joint for 30
seconds or until set. Reference manufacturers recommendations for initial set time before
handling and for full curing time before pressure testing.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 8

3.09 MECHANICAL HUBLESS PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Place the gasket on the end of one pipe or fitting and the clamp assembly on the end of
the other pipe or fitting. Firmly seat the pipe or fitting ends against the integrally molded
shoulder inside the neoprene gasket. Slide the clamp assembly into position over the
gasket. Tighten fasteners to manufacturers recommended torque.
3.10 MECHANICAL JOINT PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with AWWA C600/C605 installation requirements. Clean pipe end and socket.
Clean and lubricate pipe end, socket and gasket with soapy water or gasket lubricant.
Place gland and gasket, properly oriented, on pipe end. Insert pipe end fully into socket
and press gasket evenly into recess keeping joint straight. Press gland evenly against
gasket, insert bolts and hand tighten nuts. Make joint deflection prior to tightening bolts.
Evenly tighten bolts in sequence to recommended torque.
3.11 PUSH-ON GASKETED PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Clean pipe end, bell, gasket seat and gasket of dirt or debris. Coat end of pipe and gasket
with gasket lubricant. Insure pipe is supported off the ground so lubricant does not pick up
dirt. Push spigot end into gasket bell with levered pipe joining tool recommended by pipe
manufacturer. Large diameter exterior mains may be joined by pushing end of pipe
section with backhoe against wood blocking over pipe end. Insert to fully seated position
or to reference mark on pipe.
3.12 MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Use pipe factory grooved in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications or
field grooved pipe in accordance with the same specifications using specially designed
tools specially designed for the application. Lubricate pipe and coupling gasket, align pipe,
and secure joint in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications.
3.13 DOMESTIC WATER
A. Maintain piping system in clean condition during installation. Remove dirt and debris from
assembly of piping as work progresses. Cap open pipe ends where left unattended or
subject to contamination.
B. Install exterior water piping below predicted frost level in accordance with State
recognized historic data, but in no case less than 6' bury depth to top of pipe. Maintain
minimum of 8' horizontal distance between 2½" and larger water piping and sanitary
sewer piping. Maintain minimum of 30" horizontal and 12" vertical distance, water on top,
between 2" and smaller water piping and sanitary sewer piping. Where water piping
crosses a sanitary sewer, provide minimum 18" vertical clearance and waterproof PVC
water pipe sleeve (reference sanitary sewer materials) sealed at both ends for distance of
10' from sewer in both directions.
C. Provide thrust restraints for 3" and larger exterior water piping joints, hydrants, caps,
plugs, fittings and bends of 22½ degrees or more. Pour concrete thrust blocks against
compacted or undisturbed soil. Where soil bearing capacity is less than 2000 psf or
adjacent construction may affect soil bearing capacity, use both concrete thrust blocks
and strapped/rodded restraints or restrained joints. Field apply continuous anti-corrosion
coating to strapped and rodded restraint components. Protect mechanical joints, nuts and
bolts from concrete cover.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 9

D. Install interior water piping with drain valves where indicated and at low points of system
to allow complete drainage. Install shutoff valves where indicated and at the base of risers
to allow isolation of portions of system for repair. Do not install water piping within exterior
walls.
E. Prior to use, isolate and fill system with potable water. Allow to stand 24 hours. Flush
each outlet proceeding from the service entrance to the furthest outlet for minimum of 1
minute and until water appears clear. Fill system with a solution of water and chlorine
containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Alternately a solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine may be used and
allowed to stand for 3 hours. Flush system with potable water until chlorine concentration
is no higher than source water level.
F. Wait 24 hours after final flushing. Take samples of water for lab testing. The number and
location of samples shall be representative of the system size and configuration and are
subject to approval by Engineer. Test shall show the absence of coliform bacteria. If test
fails, repeat disinfection and testing procedures until no coliform bacteria are detected.
Submit test report indicating date and time of test along with test results.
3.14 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT
A. Verify invert elevations and building elevations prior to installation. Install exterior piping
pitched to drain at indicated elevations and slope. Install interior piping pitched to drain at
minimum slope of ¼" per foot where possible and in no case less than ⅛" per foot for
piping 3" and larger.
B. Install exterior piping below predicted frost level and not less than 5' bury depth to top of
pipe wherever possible. Where piping is located above predicted frost level, provide frost
protection in accordance with State Code.
C. Flush piping inlets (floor drains, hub drains, mop basins, fixtures, etc.) with high flow of
water at completion of project to demonstrate full flow capacity. Remove blockages and
make necessary repairs where flow is found to be impeded.
3.15 STORM AND CLEARWATER WASTE
A. Verify invert elevations and building elevations prior to installation. Install exterior piping
pitched to drain at indicated elevations and slope. Install interior piping pitched to drain at
minimum slope of ⅛" per foot where possible and in no case less than 1/16" per foot for
piping 3" and larger.
B. Install exterior piping below predicted frost level and not less than 5' bury depth to top of
pipe wherever possible. Where piping is located above predicted frost level, provide frost
protection in accordance with COMM 82.30(11)(c).
3.16 NATURAL AND LP GAS
A. Entire gas piping installation shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the
AGA, NFPA 54 – National Fuel Gas Code, State, and Local Codes.
B. Permissible Assemblies for Welding Piping Systems:
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 10

1. The following specification covers permissible assemblies for welded pipe lines
for all services operating at 160 psig or less.
2. Mitered tees will not be permitted in welded lines. Connections shall be made with
welding tees. The use of lines provided they are installed in prefabricated
assemblies and the pipe interior is cleaned of slag. Field installation of weldolets
will be permitted in lines 5” and larger if the installation is cleaned inside after
welding.
3. The use of mitered elbows in welded lines will not be permitted. Welding elbows
shall be used for bends.
4. Mitered reducers will not be permitted in welded lines.
5. The pipe ends in tees, laterals, and reducers shall be carefully prepared to
provide for proper weld penetration.
6. Steel and iron piping, 2-1/2” in size and larger, shall have joints welded, except
joints obviously intended to be connected by means of bolted flanges. End to end
joints of the same size pipe sizes 3/4”through 1” may be butt welded provided that
an internal welding ring is used.
7. Do not install gas piping below a building or its foundation.
8. Gas piping shall be installed with plugged drip pockets at low points.
9. Valves, gas cocks, and unions shall be installed on inlet pipe to equipment
including safety valves where required or noted to be installed.
10. Connect gas piping to gas meter provided by local gas company.
11. All gas piping in inaccessible areas and piping 2 ½” and larger shall have welded
joints. Provide pre-weld type fittings. Paint welded areas with primer.
12. Pitch horizontal piping down 1 inch in 60 feet in the direction of flow. Install full
size dirt leg at the bottom of each vertical run and at each appliance. When
installing mains and branches, cap gas tight each tee or pipe end which will not
be immediately extended. All branch connections to the main shall be from the
top of the main.
13. Prime coat and apply rust resistant finish enamel coat to all gas piping exposed to
weather. Paint gas piping to blend in with adjacent wall or roof color. Color is
subject to approval by architect.
14. Install all underground pipe in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations
and local gas utility company regulations and specifications.
15. Polyethylene pipe installers shall be properly trained and certified in procedure for
joining polyethylene pipe.
16. Provide 24 inch minimum steel pipe between vertical rise of riser and end of
polyethylene line if anode-less riser is not used. Use plastic-to-steel transition or
compression fitting between end of polyethylene line and steel meter riser.
Provide cathodic protection for steel riser or use anode-less riser.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 11

17. Place tracer wire along side of polyethylene pipe from meter to point where pipe
rises inside building.
18. Place 4 inches of sand around gas line buried underground.
19. Gas piping shall be installed with swing joints to relieve thrust on the pipe at point
where it pierces building wall. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve,
where pipe pierces building walls, shall be grouted airtight with an elastomeric
compound.
20. Gas Pressure Regulator: Provide and install as required, regulators sized per
loads of equipment being served. Regulators shall be of diaphragm, spring
operation type with cast iron body, aluminum diaphragm case and vent valve with
which are equipped with leak limiter venting may be used in lieu of the
atmosphere venting type. Regulators by Maxitrol, Equimeter, Rockford or Fisher
are acceptable. See schedule on drawings.
3.17 DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Install dielectric unions or flanges at each point where a copper-to-steel pipe connection is
required in domestic water systems.
3.18 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Install a union or flange at each connection to each piece of equipment and at other items
which may require removal for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Where a valve is
located at a piece of equipment, locate the flange or union connection on the equipment
side of the valve. Concealed unions or flanges are not acceptable.
3.19 PIPING SYSTEM LEAK TESTS
A. Isolate or remove components from system which are not rated for test pressure. Perform
final testing for medical and lab gas with all system components in place. Test piping in
sections or entire system as required by sequence of construction. Do not insulate or
conceal pipe until it has been successfully tested.
B. If required for the additional pressure load under test, provide temporary restraints at
fittings or expansion joints. Backfill underground water mains prior to testing with the
exception of thrust restrained valves which may be exposed to isolate potential leaks.
C. For hydrostatic tests, use clean water and remove all air from the piping being tested by
means of air vents or loosening of flanges/unions. Measure and record test pressure at
the high point in the system.
D. For air or nitrogen tests, gradually increase the pressure to not more than one half of the
test pressure; then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test
pressure until the required test pressure is reached. Examine all joints and connections
with a soap bubble solution or equivalent method. System will not be approved until it can
be demonstrated that there is no measurable loss of test pressure during the test period.
E. Inspect system for leaks. Where leaks occur, repair the area with new materials and
repeat the test; caulking will not be acceptable.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 12

F. Entire test must be witnessed by the Owner’s representative. All pressure tests are to be
documented on forms provided to the contractor. Form to include the following
information:
Test Initial Test Final Test
System Medium Pressure Duration Pressure Duration
*Below Ground Domestic Water Water N/A 200 psig 2 hr
Above Ground Domestic Water Water N/A 100 psig 8 hr
Above Ground Non-potable Water Water N/A 100 psig 8 hr
Below Ground Non potable Water Water N/A 100 psig 8 hr
Sanitary Waste and Vent Water N/A 10' water 2 hr
Storm and Clearwater Waste Water N/A 10’ water 2 hr
Natural and LP Gas Air N/A 100 psig 24 hr
* Leakage on exterior mains 3" and larger may not exceed leakage calculated as follows:
GPH Allowable Leakage = (Feet of Pipe) (Inches Dia. of Pipe) (Test Pressure) .5 133,200
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 03 - 13

SECTION 22 05 23
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
1.02 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 00 govern work under this section.
A. This section includes valve specifications for all Plumbing systems except where
indicated under Related Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Division 00, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of all valves indicating type of service, dimensions, materials of construction,
and pressure/temperature ratings for all valves to be used on the project. Temperature
ratings specified are for continuous operation.
1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. ANSI Z21.22 - Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply
Systems.
B. Where valve types (ball, butterfly, etc.) are specified for individual plumbing services (i.e.
domestic water, gas, etc.), each valve type shall be of the same manufacturer unless prior
written approval is obtained from the Owner.
C. Valves to be line size unless specifically noted otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER SYSTEM VALVES
A. All water system valves to be rated at not less than 125 water working pressure at 240
degrees F unless noted otherwise.
B. Ball Valves: 3" and smaller: Two or three piece bronze body; sweat ends, chrome plated
bronze ball; glass filled teflon seat; teflon packing and threaded packing nut; blowoutproof
stem; 600 psig WOG. Provide valve stem extensions for valves installed in piping
with vapor barrier type insulation. Apollo 70-200, Grinnell 3700, Hammond 8511,
Milwaukee BA250, Nibco S580-70, Watts B-6001.
C. Butterfly valves:
1. 2½" and larger: Cast or ductile iron body; stainless steel shaft; bronze, copper or
teflon bushings; EPDM resilient seat; EPDM seals; bronze, aluminum-bronze,
EPDM encapsulated ductile iron or stainless steel disc. 200 psig WOG through
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 23 - 1

12", 150 psig WOG through 24". Valve assembly to be bubble tight to 175 psig
with no downstream flange/pipe attached. Use tapped lug type valves with stud
bolts or cap screws, or grooved end connection valves, permitting removal of
downstream piping while using the valve for system shutoff. Centerline LT series,
DeZurik 632, Grinnell Series 8000, Hammond 6200 Series, Milwaukee M or C
Series, Nibco LD2000/LC2860, Victaulic 300/608/700/709, Watts BF-03.
2. Provide 10 position locking lever handle actuators for valves 6" and smaller.
Provide worm gear operators with external position indication for valves 8" and
larger.
D. Swing check valves:
1. 3" and smaller: Bronze body, sweat ends, Y-pattern, regrindable bronze seat,
renewable bronze disc, Class 125, suitable for installation in a horizontal or
vertical line with flow upward. Crane 1342, Grinnell 3300SJ, Hammond IB941,
Nibco S413B, Watts CVYS.
2. 4" and larger: Cast iron body, flanged ends, bronze trim, bolted cap, renewable
bronze seat and disc, Class 125, non-asbestos gasket, suitable for installation in
a horizontal or vertical line with flow upward. Crane 373, Grinnell 6300A,
Hammond IR1124, Milwaukee F2974, Nibco F918B, Watts Series 411.
E. Spring loaded check valves:
1. 2" and smaller: Bronze body, sweat or threaded ends, bronze trim, stainless steel
spring, stainless steel center guide pin, Class 125, teflon seat unless only bronze
available. ConBraCo 61 series, Grinnell 3600SJ, Mueller 203BP, Nibco S480Y,
Val-Matic S1400 series.
2. 2½" and larger: Cast or ductile iron body, wafer or globe type, bronze trim, bronze
or EPDM seat, stainless steel spring, stainless steel stem if stem is required,
Class 125. APCO 300 or 600 series, Centerline CLC with full body option,
Hammond IR9354, Milwaukee 1800 series, Mueller Steam 101AP or 105AP,
Nibco W910 or F910, Val-Matic 1400 or 1800 or 8000 series.
F. Stop & Waste Valves: 1” and smaller, Bronze body, sweat or threaded ends, 400 psi
WOG, stainless steel ball and stem, full port ball valve, with threaded drain cap, Watts B-
6300/6301 SS series. Apollo, Grinnell, Hammond, Milwaukee or Nibco manufacturer.
G. Balance valves: 2" and smaller: Two or three piece bronze body ball valve, sweat or
threaded ends, chrome plated brass ball, glass filled teflon seat, threaded packing nut,
with adjustable memory stop position indicator and extended handle stem, suitable for
400 psig water working pressure at 240 degrees F. Watts CSM-61-M1 Apollo, Grinnell,
Hammond, Milwaukee Or Nibco manufacturer.
H. Drain Valves: ¾-inch ball valve with integral threaded hose adapter, sweat or threaded
inlet connections, with threaded cap and chain on hose threads, Watts B-6000-CC/B-
6001-CC series.
2.05 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
A. Shut-Off Valves:
1. 4" and smaller: Ball or eccentric plug valve, bronze or cast iron body, 2" and
under threaded ends, 2½" and over flanged ends, chrome plated bronze ball,
bronze or nickel plated cast iron plug, TFE or Hycar seats and seals, lever
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 23 - 2

handle, 175 psi W.O.G., U.L listed for use as natural gas shut-off. Apollo 80-100,
DeZurik 425.
B. Exterior Below Grade Shut-Off Valves: Plug or ball valve, body of same polyethylene type
as piping system, pipe stub ends, high strength plastic stem and operating nut, position
indicator, polyethylene plug or polypropylene ball, Buna-N seats and double stem seals,
rated for 96 psi natural gas service (150 psi non-lethal service).
C. Gas Pressure Regulators: 2" and smaller: Cast iron body, aluminum spring and
diaphragm, Nitrile diaphragm, threaded ends, 150 psi W.O.G., -20 degrees F to 150
degrees F.
2.06 SPECIALTY VALVES AND VALVE ACCESSORIES
A. Gauge Valves: Use ¼" ball valves. Needle valves and gauge cocks will not be accepted.
B. Safety Relief Valves: Bronze body, temperature and pressure actuated, stainless steel
stem and spring, thermostat with non-metallic coating, test lever, suitable for 125 psig
water working pressure at 240 degrees F, sized for full BTUH input and operating
pressure of equipment, with valve capacity on metal label. For equipment less than or
equal to 200,000 BTUH input, provide AGA, UL or ASME listed and labeled valve. Provide
ASME listed and labeled valve for larger equipment. Bell & Gossett, A. W. Cash,
Conbraco, Watts, Wilkins. Temperature and pressure relief valve shall be sized per AGA
rating for BTUH input, Re: COMM 82.40(5)(d).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Properly align piping before installation of valves. Install and test valves in strict
accordance with valve manufacturer's installation recommendations. Do not support
weight of piping system on valve ends.
B. Mount valves in locations which allow access for operation, servicing and replacement.
C. Install all valves with the stem in the upright or horizontal position. If possible, install
butterfly valves with the stem in the horizontal position. Valves installed with the stems
down will not be accepted.
D. Prior to flushing of piping systems, place all valves in the full-open position.
3.02 SHUT-OFF VALVES
A. Install shut-off valves at each piece of equipment, at each branch take-off from mains for
isolation or repair and elsewhere as indicated.
3.03 BALANCING VALVES
A. Install where indicated on the drawings and details for balancing of pumped systems.
B. Upon project completion, adjust each valve and set position stop. Balance system to
minimum flow in return piping branches needed to maintain even supply water
temperature throughout building.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 23 - 3

3.04 DRAIN VALVES
A. Provide drain valves for complete drainage of all systems. Locations of drain valves
include low points of piping systems, downstream of riser isolation valves, equipment
locations specified or detailed, other locations required for drainage of systems and
elsewhere as indicated.
3.05 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
A. Install a spring loaded check valve in each circulating pump discharge line and elsewhere
as indicated.
3.06 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Install swing check valves in recirculation branch lines and elsewhere as indicated.
3.07 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES
A. Install relief valves on all pressure vessels and elsewhere as indicated. Inlet and outlet
piping connecting to valves must be the same size as valve connections or larger. Pipe
discharge to drain where indicated or to floor.
3.08 GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. When the gas pressure regulator is equipped with a vent connection, run a connection
size vent to outside air in accordance with codes. Use a larger size vent when required by
the manufacturer's installation instructions.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 23 - 4

SECTION 22 05 29
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
1.02 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 00 shall govern work under this section.
A. This section includes specifications for supports of all plumbing equipment and materials
as well as piping system anchors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as
follows:
MSS SP-58
MSS SP-69
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Division 00, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions.
1.05 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all supporting devices as required for the installation of mechanical equipment
and materials. All supports and installation procedures are to conform to the latest
requirements of the ANSI Code for building piping.
B. Do not hang any mechanical item directly from a metal deck or run piping so its rests on
the bottom chord of any truss or joist.
C. Fasteners depending on soft lead for holding power or requiring powder actuation will not
be accepted.
D. Support apparatus and material under all conditions of operation, variations in installed
and operating weight of equipment and piping, to prevent excess stress, and allow for
proper expansion and contraction.
E. Protect insulation at all hanger points; see Related Work above.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Schedule of all hanger and support devices indicating attachment methods and type of
device for each pipe size and type of service.
1.07 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Materials and application of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS
Standard Practice SP-58 and SP-69 unless noted otherwise.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 29 - 1

B. Piping connected to pumps, compressors, or other rotating or reciprocating equipment is
to have vibration isolation supports for a distance of one hundred pipe diameters or three
supports away from the equipment, whichever is greater. Standard pipe
hangers/supports as specified in this section are required beyond the 100 pipe
diameter/3 support distance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line
2. Grinnell
3. Pate
4. Piping Technology
5. Roof Products & Systems or approved equal
2.02 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
A. Provide all supporting steel required for the installation of mechanical equipment and
materials, including angles, channels, beams, etc. to suspended or floor supported tanks
and equipment. All of this steel may not be specifically indicated on the drawings.
2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½" Through 2":
1. Carbon steel, adjustable swivel ring. B-Line B3170NF, Grinnell 69 or 70.
2. Carbon steel, adjustable clevis, standard. B-Line B3100, Grinnell 260.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2" and Larger:
1. Carbon steel, adjustable clevis, standard. B-Line B3100, Grinnell 260.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers:
1. Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
D. Wall Support:
1. Carbon steel welded bracket with hanger. B-Line 3068 Series, Grinnell 194
Series.
2. Perforated, epoxy painted finish, 16-12 gauge, min., steel channels securely
anchored to wall structure, with interlocking, split-type, bolt secured, galvanized
pipe/tubing clamps. B-Line type S channel with B-2000 series clamps, Grinnell
type PS 200 H with PS 1200 clamps. When copper piping is being supported,
provide flexible elastomeric/ thermoplastic isolation cushion material to
completely encircle the piping and avoid contact with the channel or clamp, equal
to B-Line B1999 Vibra Cushion or provide manufacturers clamp and cushion
assemblies, B-Line BVT series, Grinnell PS 1400 series.
E. Floor Support:
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 29 - 2

1. Carbon steel pipe saddle, stand and bolted floor flange. B-Line B3088T/B3093.
F. Copper Pipe Supports:
2.04 PIPE HANGER RODS
1. All supports, fasteners, clamps, etc. directly connected to copper piping shall be
copper plated or polyvinylchloride coated. Where steel channels are used,
provide isolation collar between supports/clamps/fasteners and copper piping.
A. Steel Hanger Rods:
2.05 BEAM CLAMPS
1. Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded, complete with
adjusting and lock nuts.
2. Size rods for individual hangers and trapeze support as indicated in the following
schedule.
3. Total weight of equipment, including valves, fittings, pipe, pipe content, and
insulation, are not to exceed the limits indicated.
Maximum Load (Lbs.) Rod Diameter
(650°F Maximum Temp.) (inches)
610 ⅜
1130 ½
1810 ⅝
2710 ¾
3770 ⅞
4960 1
8000 1¼
A. MSS SP-69 Types 19 & 23 malleable black iron clamp for attachment to beam flange to
0.62-inches thick with a retaining ring and threaded rod of ⅜, ½, and ⅝-inch diameter.
Furnish with a hardened steel cup point set screw. B-Line B3036L/B3034, Grinnell 86/92.
B. MSS SP-69 Type 28 or Type 29 forged steel jaw type clamp with a tie rod to lock clamp
in place, suitable for rod sizes to 1½-inch diameter. B-Line B3054, Grinnell 228.
2.06 ANCHORS
A. Use welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to secure piping to the structure.
2.10 ROOF MOUNTED PIPE ROLLER SUPPORT
A. Minimum height of support to be 14" above roof deck.
B. Constructed of not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel reinforced so it is structurally
capable of supporting the intended load with no penetrations through the curb flashing,
inside and outside corner sections that are mitered and continuously welded, filled with 3
pound density insulation, integral deck mounting flange, nominal two-inch wood nailer,
galvanized steel counterflashing with attached galvanized steel channel track for securing
pipe roller and roller support. Do not use built-in metal base flashings or cants.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 29 - 3

2.11 CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE COATINGS
A. Factory coat supports and anchors used in corrosive atmospheres with hot dip
galvanizing after fabrication, ASTM A123, 1.5 ounces/square foot of surface each side.
Mechanical galvanize threaded products, ASTM B695 Class 50, 2.0 mil coating. Field
cuts and damaged finishes to be field covered with zinc rich paint of comparable
thickness to factory coating.
B. Corrosive atmospheres include the following locations:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
1. Exterior locations
2. Food service/kitchen areas
3. Walk-in coolers/freezers
A. Size, apply and install supports and anchors in compliance with manufacturers
recommendations.
B. Install supports to provide for free expansion of the piping system. Support all piping from
the structure using concrete inserts, beam clamps, ceiling plates, wall brackets, or floor
stands. Fasten ceiling plates and wall brackets securely to the structure and test to
demonstrate the adequacy of the fastening.
C. Coordinate hanger and support installation to properly group piping of all trades.
D. Where piping can be conveniently grouped to allow the use of trapeze type supports, use
standard structural shapes or continuous insert channels for the supporting steel. Where
continuous insert channels are used, pipe supporting devices made specifically for use
with the channels may be substituted for the specified supporting devices provided that
similar types are used and all data is submitted for prior approval.
E. Size and install hangers and supports, except for riser clamps, for installation on the
exterior of piping insulation. Where a vapor barrier is not required, hangers may be
installed either on the exterior of pipe insulation or directly on piping.
F. Perform welding in accordance with standards of the American Welding Society.
3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING
A. Install hangers to provide minimum ½-inch space between finished covering and adjacent
work.
B. Place a hanger within 12-inches of each horizontal elbow, valve, strainer, or similar piping
specialty item.
C. Use hangers with 1½-inch minimum vertical adjustment.
D. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
E. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 29 - 4

F. Adjust hangers to obtain the slope specified in the piping section of these specifications.
G. Space hangers for pipe as follows:
Pipe Material Pipe Size Max. Horiz. Spacing Max. Vert. Spacing
Cast Iron 2" and larger 5'-0" 15'-0"
Copper ½" through ¾" 5'-0" 10'-0"
Copper 1" through 1¼" 6'-0" 10'-0"
Copper 1½" through 2½" 8'-0" 10'-0"
Copper 3” 10’-0” 10’-0”
Copper 4” and larger 12’-0” 10’-0”
Ductile Iron All 10’-0” 00’-0”
Steel ½” through 1¼” 7’-0” 15’-0”
Steel 1½” through 6” 10’-0” 15’-0”
Steel 8” through 12” 14’-0” 20’-0”
Steel 14” and over 20’-0” 20’-0”
Plastic Drain and Vent 4'-0" 10'-0"
3.03 ANCHORS
A. Install where indicated on the drawings and details. Where not specifically indicated,
install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs
between expansion loops. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to
accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.
3.04 ROOF MOUNTED PIPE ROLLER SUPPORT
A. Secure bottom of support flat on roof deck. Apply two coats of zinc rich paint to cut edges
of all galvanized steel elements. Flashing and counter flashing by the Roofing Contractor.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 05 29 - 5

SECTION 22 07 00
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
1.02 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 00 govern work under this section.
A. This section includes insulation specifications for plumbing piping and equipment.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as follows:
ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM C165 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulations
ASTM C177 Heat Flux and Thermal Transmission Properties
ASTM C195 Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement
ASTM C240 Cellular Glass Insulation Block
ASTM C302 Density of Preformed Pipe Insulation
ASTM C303 Density of Preformed Block Insulation
ASTM C449 Mineral Fiber Hydraulic Setting Thermal Insulation Cement
ASTM C518 Heat Flux and Thermal Transmission Properties
ASTM C534 Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation
ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation
ASTM C552 Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
ASTM C591 Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation
ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
ASTM C921 Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C1136 Flexible Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation
ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
MICA National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards
NFPA 225 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Division 00, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions.
B. Label all insulating products delivered to the construction site with the manufacturer's
name and description of materials.
1.05 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install all insulating materials and accessories as specified or as required for
a complete installation. The following types of insulation are specified in this section:
1. Pipe Insulation
2. Equipment Insulation
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 07 00 - 1

B. Install all insulation in accordance with the latest edition of MICA (Midwest Insulation
Contractors Association) Standard and manufacturer's installation instructions.
Exceptions to these standards will only be accepted where specifically modified in these
specifications, or where prior written approval has been obtained from the Engineer.
1.06 DEFINITIONS
A. Concealed: shafts, furred spaces, space above finished ceilings, utility tunnels and crawl
spaces. All other areas, including walk-through tunnels, shall be considered as exposed.
1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit a schedule of all insulating materials to be used on the project, including
adhesives, fastening methods, fitting materials along with material safety data sheets and
intended use of each material. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating
density, thermal characteristics, jacket type, and manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials or accessories containing asbestos will not be accepted.
B. Use composite insulation systems (insulation, jackets, sealants, mastics, and adhesives)
that have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less,
with the following exceptions:
1. Insulation which is not located in an air plenum may have a flame spread rating
not over 25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 150.
2.02 INSULATION AND JACKETS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Certainteed Manson
2. Childers
3. Dow
4. Extol
5. Halstead
6. H.B. Fuller
7. Imcoa
8. Knauf
9. Owens-Corning
10. Pittsburgh Corning
11. Schuller or approved equal
B. Insulating materials shall be fire retardant, moisture and mildew resistant, and vermin
proof. Insulation shall be suitable to receive jackets, adhesives and coatings as indicated.
C. Rigid Fiberglass Insulation:
1. Minimum nominal density of 3 lbs. per cu. ft., and thermal conductivity of not
more than 0.23 at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 25 PSF at
10% deformation, rated for service to 450 degrees F.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 07 00 - 2

2. White kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier all service jacket, factory applied to
insulation with a self-sealing pressure sensitive adhesive lap, maximum
permeance of .02 perms and minimum beach puncture resistance of 50 units.
D. Elastomeric Insulation:
1. Flexible closed cell, minimum nominal density of 5.5 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal
conductivity of not more than 0.27 at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive
strength of 4.5 psi at 25% deformation, maximum water vapor transmission of
0.17 perm-inch, maximum water absorption of 6% by weight, rated for service
range of -20 degrees F to 220 degrees F on piping and 180 degrees F where
adhered to equipment.
E. Phenolic Insulation:
1. Rigid closed cell, minimum nominal density of 2.2 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal
conductivity of not more than 0.13 at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive
strength of 31 psi parallel and 18 psi perpendicular, maximum water vapor
transmission 0.117 perm-inch, maximum water absorption of .5% by volume,
rated for service range of -290 degrees F to 250 degrees F.
2. Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier laminate all service jacket, factory applied to
insulation with a self-sealing pressure sensitive adhesive lap, maximum
permeance of .02 perms and minimum beach puncture resistance of 50 units.
F. Fireproofing Insulation:
1. Mineral fiber with nominal density of 8 lbs. per cu. ft., flame spread index of 15,
fuel contribution index of 0, and smoke developed index of 0, thermal conductivity
of not more than 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Jacket material shall be the same as jacket for adjacent insulation.
G. PVC Fitting Covers And Jackets:
1. White PVC film, gloss finish one side, semi-gloss other side, FS LP-535D,
Composition A, Type II, Grade GU.
H. Metal Jackets:
1. .016-inch thick aluminum or .010-inch thick stainless steel with safety edge.
2.03 INSULATION INSERTS AND PIPE SHIELDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line
2. Pipe Shields
3. Value Engineered Products
B. Construct inserts with calcium silicate, minimum 140 psi compressive strength. Piping 12”
and larger, supplement with high density 600 psi structural calcium silicate insert. Provide
galvanized steel shield. Insert and shield to be minimum 180 degree coverage on bottom
of supported piping and full 360 degree coverage on clamped piping. On roller mounted
piping and piping designed to slide on support, provide additional load distribution steel
plate.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 07 00 - 3

C. Where contractor proposes shop/site fabricated inserts and shields, submit schedule of
materials, thicknesses, gauges and lengths for each pipe size to demonstrate equivalency
to pre-engineered pre-manufactured product described above. On low temperature
systems, extruded polystyrene may be substituted for calcium silicate provided insert and
shield length and gauge are increased to compensate for lower insulation compressive
strength.
D. Precompressed 20# density molded fiberglass blocks, Hamfab or equal, of same
thickness as adjacent insulation may be substituted for calcium silicate inserts with one
1”x 6” block for piping through 2½” and three 1” x 6” blocks for piping through 4”. Submit
shield schedule to demonstrate equivalency to pre-engineered/pre-manufactured product
described above.
E. Wood blocks will not be accepted.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied,
and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which they are
applied.
B. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation
manufacturer for applications specified.
C. Insulation bands to be ¾-inch wide, constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Minimum
thickness to be .015-inch for aluminum and .010-inch for stainless steel.
D. Tack fasteners to be stainless steel ring grooved shank tacks.
E. Staples to be clinch style.
F. Insulating cement to be ANSI/ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral wool.
G. Finishing cement to be ASTM C449.
H. Fibrous glass or canvas fabric reinforcing shall have a minimum untreated weight of 6
oz./sq. yd.
I. Bedding compounds to be non-shrinking and permanently flexible.
J. Vapor barrier coatings to be non-flammable, fire resistant, polymeric resin.
K. Fungicidal water base coating (Foster 40-20 or equal) to be compatible with vapor barrier
coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation, jackets and accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions
and under ambient temperatures and conditions recommended by manufacturer.
Surfaces to be insulated must be clean and dry.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 07 00 - 4

B. Do not insulate systems or equipment which are specified to be pressure tested or
inspected, until testing, inspection and any necessary repairs have been successfully
completed.
C. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids
will not be accepted. Cover and seal exposed fiberglass insulation when insulation is
terminated, no raw fiberglass insulation is allowed. Provide neat and coated terminations
at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates.
Install with longitudinal joints facing wall or ceiling.
D. Seal off raw ends of insulation and butt joints with vapor barrier mastic at intervals of not
more than 20 feet of piping requiring a vapor barrier.
E. Install fabric reinforcing without wrinkles. Overlap seams a minimum of 2-inches.
F. Use full-length material (as delivered from manufacturer) wherever possible. Scrap
piecing of insulation or pieces cut undersize and stretched to fit will not be accepted.
G. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and openings. Vapor barriers shall be
maintained continuous through all penetrations.
H. Provide a complete vapor barrier for insulation on the following systems:
1. Cold water
2. Storm Water
3. Equipment with a surface temperature below 65 degree F.
3.02 PIPING, VALVE, AND FITTING INSULATION
A. General:
1. Install insulation with butt joints and longitudinal seams closed tightly. Provide
minimum 2” lap on jacket seams and 2” tape on butt joints, firmly cemented with
lap adhesive. Additionally secure with staples along seams and butt joints. Coat
staples with vapor barrier mastic on systems requiring vapor barrier.
2. Water supply piping insulation shall be continuous throughout the building and
installed adjacent to and within building walls to a point directly behind the fixture
that is being supplied.
3. Install insulation continuous through pipe hangers and supports with hangers and
supports on the exterior of insulation. Where a vapor barrier is not required,
hangers and supports may be attached directly to piping with insulation
completely covering hanger or support and jacket sealed at support rod
penetration. Where riser clamps are required to be attached directly to piping
requiring vapor barrier, extend insulation and vapor barrier jacketing/coating
around riser clamp.
B. Insulation Inserts and Pipe Shields: Provide insulation inserts and pipe shields at all
hanger and support locations. Inserts may be omitted on ¾” and smaller copper piping
provided 12” long 22 gauge pipe shields are used.
C. Fittings and Valves: Fittings, valves, unions, flanges, couplings and specialties may be
insulated with factory molded or built up insulation of the same thickness as adjoining
insulation. Cover insulation with fabric reinforcing and mastic or where temperatures do
not exceed 150 degrees, PVC fitting covers. Secure PVC fitting covers with tack fasteners
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 07 00 - 5

and 1½” band of mastic over ends, throat, seams or penetrations. On systems requiring
vapor barrier, use vapor barrier mastic.
D. Elastomeric and Polyolefin: Where practical, slip insulation on piping during pipe
installation when pipe ends are open. Miter cut fittings allowing sufficient length to prevent
stretching. Completely seal seams and joints for vapor tight installation. For elastomeric
insulation, apply full bed of adhesive to both surfaces. For polyolefin, seal factory preglued
seams with roller and field seams and joints with full bed of hot melt polyolefin glue to
both surfaces.
E. Pipe Insulation Schedule:
1. Provide insulation on new and existing remodeled piping as indicated in the
following schedule:
Service
Insulation
Types 1” and 1¼” 2½” 5” 8” and
Smaller to 2” to 4” to 6” larger
Hot Water Supply Rigid Fiberglass 1” 1” 1” 1.5” 1.5”
Hot Water Circulating Rigid Fiberglass 1” 1” 1”
Cold Water Rigid Fiberglass 0.5” 0.5” 1” 1” 1”
Non-Pot. Cold Water Rigid Fiberglass* 0.5” 0.5” 1” 1” 1”
Horiz. Storm & Roof Rigid Fiberglass 0.5” 0.5” 0.5” 0.5” 0.5”
Drain Bodies
*=Elastomeric and Phenolic types are acceptable
2. The following piping and fittings are not to be insulated:
a. Chrome plated exposed supplies and stops (except where specifically
noted).
b. Water hammer arrestors.
c. Piping unions and flanges for systems not requiring a vapor barrier.
3.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Do not insulate over equipment access manholes, fittings, nameplates or ASME stamps.
Bevel and seal insulation at these locations.
B. Elastomeric/Polyolefin: Apply full cover coat of adhesive to surface to be insulated,
insulation and edge butt joints. Place insulation with edge joints firmly butted pressing to
surface for full adhesion. Seal seams and joints vapor tight.
C. Equipment Insulation Schedule: Provide equipment insulation as follows:
Equipment Insulation Type Thickness Remarks
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 07 00 - 6

Water Meter Elastomeric ½” Sheet type, fabricated for ease of
removal and replacement when
service is required.
Water Softener Elastomeric ½" Sheet type, fabricated for ease of
removal and replacement when
service is required.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 07 00 - 7

SECTION 22 10 00
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
1.02 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 00 govern work under this section.
A. This section contains specifications for plumbing piping specialties for all piping systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as
follows:
ASTM B650
Electrodeposited Engineering Chromium Coatings on Ferrous Substrates
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Required for all items in this section. Include materials of construction, dimensional data,
ratings/capacities/ranges, approvals, test data, pressure drop data where appropriate,
and identification as referenced in this section and/or on the drawings.
1.06 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All piping specialties are to be rated for the highest pressures and temperatures in the
respective system in accordance with ANSI B31, but not less than 125 psig unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ashcroft
2. Marsh
3. Taylor
4. H. O. Trerice
5. U. S. Gauge
6. Weiss
7. Weksler
B. Stem Type: Cast aluminum case, nine-inch scale, clear acrylic window. adjustable angle
brass stem with stem of sufficient length so the end of the stem is near the middle of a
pipe without reducing the thickness of any insulation, red indicating fluid, black lettering
against a white background, with scale ranges as follows:
Service
Hot Water
Scale Range, °F 30 - 180
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 10 00 - 1

Increment, °F 2
2.02 THERMOMETER SOCKETS
A. Brass with threaded connections suitable for thermometer stems and temperature control
sensing elements in pipeline. Furnish with extension necks for insulated piping systems.
2.03 TEST WELLS
A. Similar to thermometer sockets except with a brass cap that threads into the inside of the
test well to prevent dirt from accumulating. Secure cap to body with a short chain. Furnish
with extension necks, where appropriate, to accommodate the pipeline insulation.
2.04 TEST PLUGS
A. Brass threaded pressure and temperature test plug with neoprene self-closing valve,
valve retainer, brass threaded cap, rated for 150 psi and 0-200 degrees F.
2.05 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ametek/U. S. Gauge Division
2. Ashcroft
3. Marsh
4. Taylor
5. H. O. Trerice
6. Weiss
7. Weksler
B. Cast aluminum case of not less than 4.5-inches in diameter, double strength glass
window, black lettering on a white background, phosphor bronze bourdon tube with
bronze bushings, recalibration from the front of the dial, 99% accuracy over the middle
half of the scale, 98.5% accuracy over the remainder of the scale, with scale range as
follows:
Service Hot Water Cold Water Compressed Air
Scale Range, psig 0-100 0-100 0-200
Increment, psig 1 1 2
C. Pressure Snubbers: Bronze construction, 300 psig working pressure, 1/4" size.
D. Gauge Valves: Use ball valves as specified in Section 15100 - Valves.
2.06 STRAINERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong
2. Illinois
3. Keckley
4. Metraflex
5. Mueller Steam
6. Sarco
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 10 00 - 2

7. Watts
B. Y type; cast bronze body, ASTM B62; 20 mesh stainless steel screens; bolted or threaded
screen retainer tapped for a blowoff valve; sweat, threaded or flanged body rated at not
less than 150 psi WOG.
C. Y type; cast iron body, ASTM A126; 20 mesh stainless steel screens; bolted or threaded
screen retainer tapped for a blowoff valve; threaded or flanged ends; rated at not less
than 150 psi WOG.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 THERMOMETERS
A. Stem Type: Install in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and/or details using a
separable socket in each location.
3.02 THERMOMETER SOCKETS
A. Install at each point where a thermometer or temperature control sensing element is
located in a pipeline.
3.03 TEST WELLS
A. Install in piping systems wherever provisions are needed for inserting a thermometer at a
later date.
3.04 TEST PLUGS
A. Install in piping systems wherever provisions are needed for short-term measurement of
pressure or temperature.
3.05 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Install in locations where indicated on the drawings and/or details, with scale range
appropriate to the system operating pressures.
B. Pressure Snubbers: Install in gauge piping for all gauges used on water services.
C. Gauge Valves: Install at each gauge location as close to the main as possible and at each
location where a gauge tapping is indicated.
3.06 STRAINERS
A. Install all strainers where indicated allowing sufficient space for the screens to be
removed. Install a ball valve in the tapped screen retainer.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 10 00 - 3

SECTION 22 10 01
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
1.02 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 00 shall govern work under this section.
A. This section includes specifications for floor drains, roof drains, cleanouts, backflow
preventers, water hammer arrestors and other miscellaneous plumbing specialties.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as
follows:
ANSI A112.21.1
Floor Drains.
ANSI A112.21.2
Roof Drains
ANSI A112.26.1/PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arrestors.
ASSE 1001
Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers.
ASSE 1010
Water Hammer Arrestors.
ASSE 1011
Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
ASSE 1012
Backflow Preventers with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent.
ASSE 1013
Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers.
ASSE 1019
Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining, Anti-
Backflow Type.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Division 00, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions.
B. Plumbing products requiring approval by the State of Wisconsin Dept. of Commerce must
be approved or have pending approval at the time of shop drawing submission.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Include data concerning dimensions, capacities, materials of construction, ratings,
certifications, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's
performance limitations, and appropriate identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Josam
2. Smith
3. Wade
4. Zurn
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 10 01 - 1

B. FD-1: 3" min. enameled cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping adjustable collar, adjustable 6” dia. polished nickel-bronze
strainer with threaded collar, bottom outlet.
C. FD-2: 4" min. enameled heavy duty cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange,
weep holes, internal trap with bronze cleanout plug, heavy duty 12x12 square coated cast
iron grate strainer, with sediment bucket, side outlet.
2.02 HUB DRAINS
A. HD-1: 4” hub section up 2” min. above floor level, with full-sized deep seal P-trap.
2.03 ROOF DRAINS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Josam
2. Smith
3. Wade
4. Zurn
B. RD-1: 4" min. bottom outlet roof drain, enameled cast iron body with flashing collar and
gravel stop, cast iron dome strainer, adjustable extension, underdeck clamp, 15”
diameter.
2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Josam
2. Smith
3. Wade
4. Zurn
B. Interior Concrete Floor Areas: Enameled cast iron body with round or square adjustable
scoriated polished nickel bronze cover, tapered threaded PVC closure plug.
C. Interior Ceramic Tile Floor Areas: Enameled cast iron body with square adjustable
scoriated nickel bronze cover, tapered threaded PVC closure plug.
D. Interior Vinyl Tile Floor Areas: Enameled cast iron body with round adjustable scoriated
nickel bronze cover, tapered threaded PVC closure plug.
E. Interior Carpeted Floor Areas: Enameled cast iron body with round adjustable scoriated
nickel bronze cover and secured carpet marker, tapered threaded PVC closure plug.
F. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type cleanout tee with tapered threaded PVC cleanout
plug, round polished stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
G. Interior Exposed Vertical Stacks: Line type cleanout tee with tapered threaded PVC
closure plug.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 10 01 - 2

H. Interior Horizontal Lines: Cast iron hub with tapped ferrule and tapered threaded ABS or
PVC closure plug, or no-hub coupling and blind plug.
I. Exterior Paved Areas: Cast iron hub or plug with tapered threaded ABS or PVC closure
plug, cast iron frost sleeve and cover set in 24" square by 4" min. thick reinforced
concrete pad top or surrounding pavement, crowned for drainage.
J. Exterior Unpaved Areas: Cast iron hub or plug with tapered threaded ABS or PVC closure
plug, cast iron or PVC frost sleeve and cover set in 24” square by 4” min. thick reinforced
concrete pad top.
2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Manufacturer:
1. PPP Industries
2. Sioux Chief
3. Watts
B. ANSI A112.26.1, ASSE 1010; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged piston
type constructed of hard drawn Type K copper, threaded brass adapter, brass piston with
o-ring seals, FDA approved silicone lubricant, suitable for operation in temperature range
35 to 150 degrees F, maximum 250 psig working pressure, 1500 psig surge pressure.
Watts series 15.
2.07 MIXING VALVES
A. Manufacturer:
1. Lawler
B. MV-1: ASSE 1017 and CSA B125.3 approved; high-low thermostatic mixing valve, one
piece single body valve with liquid filled thermostat, stainless steel piston and liner. Valve
shall come equipped with union end stop and check inlets with removable stainless steel
strainers. Valve alarm per state code.
C. MV-2: ASSE 1016 approved; point of use mechanical mixing valve, bronze body valve
and integral back flow checks. Mixing valve shall have compression fittings and a means
to adjust the outlet temperature.
2.08 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Beeco
2. Cla-Val
3. Conbraco
4. Febco
5. Watts
6. Wilkins
B. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, brass or bronze construction, EPDM
diaphragm and seat, rated for 125 psig and 180°F.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 10 01 - 3

C. Dual Check With Atmospheric Vent For CO 2 POST MIX Vending Machines: 3/8”,
stainless steel body and parts, dual check with third ball check outlet, rated for 150 psig
and 140°F.
D. Intermediate Atmospheric Vented Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1012, same size as pipe,
with intermediate atmospheric vent between independent check valves, bronze body with
union ends, stainless steel springs, rated for 175 psig and 210°F.
E. Reduced Pressure ZONE Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013 reduced pressure zone
backflow assembly complete with inlet strainer, inlet and outlet ball or butterfly isolation
valves. Constructed of bronze or epoxy coated cast iron body with bronze and plastic
internal parts, stainless steel springs, non-threaded vent outlet, 4 test cocks, rated for 175
psig and 210°F, with air gap apparatus on drain.
2.09 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Josam
2. Smith
3. Wade
4. Woodford
5. Zurn
B. WH-1: Freezeproof automatic draining wall hydrant with exposed chrome plated bronze
wall plate, ¾" inlet, ¾" hose thread ASSE 1019-93 backflow preventer outlet, copper or
bronze casing, loose key operator.
2.10 SAFING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Noble
2. Oatey
B. Chlorinated polyethylene sheeting, 40 mils thick, ASTM D4068, with CPE solvent; or 3
lb./sq.ft. sheet lead.
2.11 VENT FLASHINGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Semco
2. Oatey
B. Galvanized with elastomeric collar: one piece construction, 24 gauge steel.
C. Single Ply Membrane Roofs: Flashing boot of material compatible with roofing membrane
with base flange for adhering to membrane and stainless steel drawband for securing to
vent pipe.
2.12 WASHING MACHINE WALL BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 10 01 - 4

1. Guy Gray
2. Oatey.
B. Fire-rated plastic or epoxy coated steel recessed wall box with face flange, overflow lip,
fastening tabs, ½" hot and cold bronze washing machine angle shutoff valves rated for
125 psi and 180 degrees F, long shank valve fittings for replacement of valves within box,
2" drain outlet fitting.
2.13 ICE MAKER WALL BOXES
C. Manufacturers:
3. Guy Gray
4. Oatey.
D. Plastic or epoxy coated steel recessed wall box with face flange, overflow lip, fastening
tabs, ½" cold bronze shutoff valves rated for 125 psi with 6’ stainless steel braided hose.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate location and setting of plumbing specialties with adjacent construction. Install
in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
B. Set floor drains, roof drains and cleanouts level and plumb adjusted to finished floor
elevation, roof elevation or finished wall location. Locate where serviceable. Allow
minimum of 18" clearance around cleanouts for rodding. Lubricate threaded cleanout
plugs with graphite and oil, teflon tape or waterproof grease. Provide deep seal traps on
floor drains.
C. Install water hammer arrestors where indicated and at quick closing valve installations.
D. Install backflow preventers in accordance with Wis. Dept. of Commerce requirements
maintaining minimum clearance distances for servicing and testing. Provide indirect waste
piping with air gap installation from relief opening to above hub drain or floor drain.
E. Where backflow preventers requiring Dept. of Commerce registration are installed,
provide initial registration, testing and report filing required by Dept. of Commerce. List the
name and address of the building that the backflow preventer installations occur in.
F. Mount wall hydrants recessed in exterior wall construction with valve plug extended
beyond interior side of building insulation. Slope to drain to exterior. Install so discharge is
18” min. above finished grade. Set wall box in grout or caulk and fill exterior wall
penetration with insulation. .
G. Flash vent penetrations through roof. Turn down top of lead flashings into vent pipe.
Tighten drawband of membrane boot to vent pipe. Adhere base flashing to deck or
membrane. Provide waterproof patch around penetration on existing roofs.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 10 01 - 5

H. Install washing machine boxes in wall construction, secured to structure, directly behind
proposed washing machine location. Provide water hammer arrestors in supply piping.
Mount box a min. of 36” above floor.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 10 01 - 6

SECTION 22 30 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
1.02 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 00 shall govern work under this section.
A. This section includes specifications for water heaters, water softeners, pumps and other
equipment used for plumbing applications.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Division 00, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions.
B. Plumbing products requiring approval by the State Department must be approved or have
pending approval at the time of shop drawing submission.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Include data concerning dimensions, capacities, materials of construction, ratings,
certifications, weights, pump curves with net positive suction head requirements,
manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and
appropriate identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HIGH EFFICIENCY COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATER
A. Manufacturers:
1. State
2. A.O. Smith
3. Lochinvar
B. Type: Gas fired sealed combustion commercial water heater, minimum 96% thermal
efficiency. Design to be AGA certified with 3 year warranty.
C. Heat Exchanger: Copper construction tubes, copper, copper-nickel or glass lined cast iron
headers rated for 150 psi operating pressure complete with temperature and pressure
relief valve.
D. Burner: Stainless steel construction with main gas pressure regulator.
E. Controls: 120 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz controls consisting of junction box, 24 volt transformer,
intermittent spark or hot surface ignition with low gas pressure switch, high and low air
pressure switches, water flow switch, low water cutoff. Operating and diagnostic panel to
include water temperature gauges, adjustable high limit, adjustable thermostat with
adjustable differential, operating and warning lights.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 30 00 - 1

F. Vent: AL29-4C or 316L stainless steel with intake, outlet and wall penetration fittings.
2.02 WATER SOFTENERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Brauch
2. Bruner
3. Capital
4. Hellenbrand
5. Lakeside Water Treatment
B. Tanks: Fiberglass reinforced mineral tank constructed of molded high density
polyethylene inner shell reinforced by exterior fiberglass winding and epoxy resin. NSF
approved and rated for 150 psig. Mount slotted or lateral hub PVC distributor in tank with
underbedding gravel.
C. Mineral: High capacity ion exchange mineral, FDA approved, Sybron/Ionac, Rohm &
Haas, Resintech or Puralite. Uniform beads rated for removal of 30,000 grains of
hardness as calcium carbonate when regenerated with 15 lbs. of salt. Design for
minimum 50% resin bed freeboard.
D. Valve: Top mount brass valve with motor drive, hydraulically balanced piston, seal and
spacers, adjustable brine flow control, backwash flow control, adjustable capacity and
regeneration settings. Provide bypass ball valve arrangement.
E. Controls: Factory wired and tested controls with transformer and labeled terminal block
for twin alternating consisting of the following:
1. Electronic Meter and 480 Microprocessor with LED Display for Delayed
Regeneration.
F. Brine Tank: High density polyethylene brine tank with high salt platform, PVC brine
measuring and float valve, PVC injector. Contractor to provide initial salt fill.
G. Ratings: Maximum 10 MG/L hardness leakage, 110°F maximum operating temperature,
30-100 psig operating pressure, 120/60/1 electrical.
2.03 WATER FILTER SYSTEM
H. Manufacturers:
1. Hellenbrand
I. Tank: Fiberglass reinforced mineral tank constructed of molded high density polyethylene
inner shell reinforced by exterior fiberglass winding and epoxy resin. NSF approved and
rated for 150 psig.
J. Media: Anthracite, Filter Sand, Garnet and Support Bed.
K. Multi-Media Filter.
2.04 INTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTER
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 30 00 - 2

A. Manufacturer:
1. Schier
B. Seamless, rotationally-molded high density polyethylene intercepter with minimum 3/8”
uniform wall thickness. Intercepter shall be furnished for below grade installation.
Intercepter shall be built in accordance with ASME A112.14.3 (type C), with internal flow
control, built-in test caps, and three-outlet options. Intercepter capacity shall be at least
three times its rated flow. Cover shall be gasketed and constructed of high density
polyethylene with minimum 500 lb load capacity.
2.05 EXTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTER
C. Manufacturer:
2. Schier
D. Concrete grease intercepter with inlet and outlet baffle, tank capacity and loading design
per plans.
2.06 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Bell and Gossett
2. ITT
3. Grundfos
4. Taco
5. Armstrong
B. Type: Horizontal single stage oil lubricated in-line pumps, 125 psig maximum working
pressure at operating temperature of 225°F. continuous. The manufacturer shall certify all
pump ratings. All pumps to operate without excessive noise or vibration.
C. Casing: Bronze or stainless steel; flanged suction and discharge connection.
D. Impeller: Brass or bronze, keyed to the shaft, single suction enclosed type, hydraulically
and dynamically balanced.
E. Bearings: Oil lubricated bronze sleeve or ball bearings.
F. Shaft: Stainless steel or carbon steel with stainless steel or bronze sleeve, integral thrust
collar.
G. Seal: Mechanical type, carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, 225°F maximum
continuous operating temperature.
H. Drive: Flexible coupling.
I. Motor: Provide pump with open dripproof motor with built-in thermal overload protection
sized for non-overloading over the entire pump curve. Furnish each pump and motor with
a nameplate giving the manufacturer's name, serial number of pump, capacity in GPM
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 30 00 - 3

and head in feet at design condition, horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed and full load
current.
J. Provide with Aquastat.
2.07 EXPANSION TANKS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Amtrol
2. Bell and Gossett
3. Wessels
4. Armstrong
B. Vertical steel precharged hydro-pneumatic expansion tank, 125 psi ASME labeled
construction, complete with replaceable flexible butyl rubber bladder, system connection
fitting, Schrader type air charge fitting, steel base ring stand, factory prime and enamel
painted exterior finish, ASME relief valve. Materials exposed to water to be NSF or FDA
approved for potable water service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing equipment where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Coordinate equipment location with piping, ductwork, conduit and
equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances. Locate equipment and arrange
plumbing piping to provide access space for servicing all components.
B. Set commercial water heaters and commercial water softeners on concrete housekeeping
pads. Adjust and level equipment.
C. Connect equipment to water and drain piping using unions or flanges and isolation valves.
D. Pipe temperature and pressure relief valves to floor drain or floor as indicated.
E. Startup and test equipment adjusting operating and safety controls for proper operation.
F. Cycle softeners and adjust for specified exchange rate, regeneration time, consumption,
backflow rate, etc. Provide initial salt fill of brine tank.
G. Lubricate pumps before startup. Adjust pumps for rated flow. Clean and blowdown
strainers after 8 hours of operation.
H. Adjust compression tank precharge to scheduled minimum operating pressure prior to
connecting to system.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 30 00 - 4

SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
1.02 SCOPE
A. Applicable provisions of Division 00 shall govern work under this section.
A. This section includes specifications for plumbing fixtures, faucets and trim.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as
follows:
ANSI A112.6.1M-88 Supports for Off-the Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
ANSI A112.18.1-94 Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
ANSI A112.19.2M-82 Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
ANSI A112.19.5-79 (R1990) Trim for Water Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals.
ARI-1010-94
Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerate
Drinking Water Coolers.
ASSE 1011-93 Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
ASSE 1014-90 Handheld Showers.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Division 00, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions.
B. Plumbing products requiring approval by the State Department must be approved or have
pending approval at the time of shop drawing submission.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Include data concerning sizes, utility sizes, rough in-dimensions, capacities, materials of
construction, ratings, weights, trim, finishes, manufacturer's installation requirements,
manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Manufacturers: Fixture descriptions establish fixture type, quality, materials, features and
size. Products of the following manufacturers determined to be equal by the
Architect/Engineer will be accepted.
1. Water Closets, Urinals and Lavatories - American Standard, Crane, Kohler.
2. Water Closet Seats - Bemis, Olsonite, Kohler.
3. Faucets - Chicago Faucet, Kohler, Speakman, Symmons, T&S Brass, Zurn.
4. Drains - Chicago Faucet, Engineered Brass Co., Kohler, McGuire.
5. Stops and Supplies - Chicago Faucet Co., T&S Brass, McGuire.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 40 00 - 1

6. Flush Valves - Coyne & Delany, Sloan, Zurn.
7. Traps - Kohler, McGuire, Dearborn, Engineered Brass Co. (17 gauge Min.)
8. Carriers and Supports - Josam, Smith, Wade, Watts Drainage, Zurn.
9. Sinks - American Standard, Elkay, Just, Kohler.
10. Laundry Trays - Fiat, Mustee.
11. Mop Basins - Fiat, Mustee, Stern-Williams.
12. Showers - Leonard, Powers, Speakman, Symmons, Kohler.
13. Bathtubs - American Standard, Crane, Kohler.
14. Molded Tub and Shower Units - Aker, Aqua Glass, Fiat, Kohler, Lasco.
15. Drinking Fountains - Elkay, Halsey Taylor, Haws, Filtrine, Oasis, Sunroc.
16. Electric Water Coolers - Elkay, Halsey Taylor, Haws, Filtrine, Oasis, Sunroc.
B. Water Closets:
C. Urinals
1. WC-1 - Floor mount bottom outlet white vitreous china siphon jet close coupled
tank type water closet with elongated bowl, 2¼" passageway, 16½" barrier free
height, insulating tank liner and 1.6 gallon flush. ADA compliable.
1. U-1 - Wall mount white vitreous china washout urinal with ¾" top inlet spud, 2"
outlet, removable strainer and 0.5 gallon flush. Manual flush valve, ADA
compliant.
D. Flushing Rim Sink:
1. FR-1 – Floor mounted siphon jet vitreous china bowl with stainless steel rim
guards, 1-1/2” top spud, china bolt caps. Exposed chrome flush valve with
bedpan washer assembly, diaphram type oscillating handle, escutcheon, integral
screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker. Wall mount faucet with Watts 8A vacuum
breaker.
E. Lavatories
1. L-1 - Self-rimming counter mount white vitreous china lavatory with 4" on center
faucet openings. ADA approved. Gooseneck faucet with wristblade handles.
ASSE 1016 mixing valve at each fixture.
2. L-2 - Wall mount white vitreous china lavatory with 4" on center faucet openings.
ADA approved. Gooseneck faucet with wristblade handles. ASSE 1016 mixing
valve at each fixture.
F. Sinks
1. S-1 & S-2- Counter mounted 18 ga type 302 stainless steel single compartment
sink with 3 faucet openings 4" on center. Gooseneck faucet with wristblade
handles. ASSE 1016 mixing valve at each fixture.
2. KS-1 - Counter mounted 18 ga. type 302 stainless steel double compartment sink
with 3 faucet openings 4" on center. Single lever faucet with sidespray. ASSE
1016 mixing valve at fixture.
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 40 00 - 2

3. KS-2 - Counter mounted 18 ga. type 302 stainless steel single compartment sink
with 3 faucet openings 4" on center. Single lever faucet with sidespray. ASSE
1016 mixing valve at fixture.
4. SS-1 – Belvedere shampoo sink, enameled bowl, vacuum breaker, whiz sprayer,
neckrest, backflow preventer and hair trap. ASSE 1016 mixing valve at fixture.
G. Laundry Trays
1. LT-1 – Molded polyester resin and stone counter-mount single compartment
laundry tray. Gooseneck faucet with wristblade handles. ASSE 1016 mixing valve
at fixture.
2. LT-2 - Floor mounted molded polyester resin and stone double compartment
laundry tray with wall bracket and painted steel legs, with waste outlet.
Gooseneck faucet with wristblade handles. ASSE 1016 mixing valve at fixture.
H. Mop Sink
1. MS-1 and MS-2 - Floor mounted molded polyester resin and stone mop basin,
24" x 24" x 10" H, with 3" drain, stainless steel strainer and vinyl bumper guards.
Wall mount faucet with pail hook and bracing. Watts 8A vacuum breaker.
I. Showers
1. SH-1 - Pressure balanced shower valve with ceramic valving, check stops,
adjustable temperature limit stop and volume control, Lever handle operated.
With lever operated diverter valve, stationary shower head and hand-held
adjustable head with 44" slide bar, 72" hose, in-line vacuum breaker and supply
elbow . ADA compliable. 3” floor drain.
2. TS-1 - One piece acrylic molded tub and shower unit, non-slip floor finish, grab
bar and pop-up drain. Pressure balanced shower valve with ceramic valving,
check stops, adjustable temperature limit stop and volume control, Lever handle
operated. With lever operated diverter valve, stationary shower head and handheld
adjustable head with 44" slide bar, 72" hose, in-line vacuum breaker and
supply elbow . ADA compliant.
J. Electric Water Coolers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
1. EWC-1 - Dual level, wall mounted, barrier free and standard height, stainless
steel finish water cooler/drink fountain station with front pushbar operators. Single
recessed steel mounting box with refrigeration system and stainless steel
removable front grille for access. Rated for 8.0 GPH at 80 degree inlet water at
90 degree ambient temperature and 50 degree outlet water. 1/5 HP compressor,
380 watt, 120/60/1. Mount so upper unit spout is at 40" above floor.
A. Install plumbing fixtures in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Set level and
plumb. Secure in place to counters, floors and walls providing solid bearing and secure
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 40 00 - 3

mounting. Bolt fixture carriers to floor and wall. Secure rough-in fixture piping to prevent
movement of exposed piping.
B. Install each fixture with trap easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Install fixture
stops in readily accessible location for servicing.
C. Install barrier free fixtures in compliance with COMM 52, 69 and Federal ADA
Accessibility Guidelines. Install barrier free lavatory traps parallel and adjacent to wall and
supplies and stops elevated to 27" above floor to avoid contact by wheelchair users.
D. Provide unions at water connections to drinking fountains and electric water coolers.
E. Each fixture shall have a stop valve installation to control the fixture. Stop valves shall be
heavy duty type with brass stems and screwed or sweat inlet connections. Compression
type inlets are not acceptable.
F. Cover pipe penetrations with escutcheons. Exposed traps, stops, piping and escutcheons
to be chrome plated brass, same items in concealed locations may be of rough brass
finish.
G. Set floor mounted water closets, floor mounted service sinks; counter mounted lavs and
sinks; lav and sink faucets and drains with full setting bed of flexible non-staining
plumber's putty. Cover exposed water closet bolts with bolt covers.
H. Set mop basins to floor and wall with grout or silicone sealant.
I. Seal openings between walls, floors and fixtures with mildew-resistant silicone sealant
same color as fixture.
J. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation. Replace malfunctioning units or
components. Adjust valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise
or overflow. Adjust shower valve temperature limit stops to 110 degree maximum outlet
temperature.
K. Protect fixtures during construction. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and trim using
manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials.
L. Foodservice Equipment: Provide rough-in piping, traps, tailpieces, indirect waste lines and
make final and necessary connections for foodservice equipment. Install faucets, spray
units, drains, lever drains, vacuum breakers, solenoid valves, check valves, flow control
valves, water inlet fittings, filters, strainers, pressure reducing valves and gas valves
furnished by foodservice equipment contractor. Provide condensate drain piping from
cooler and freezer evaporators. Make all final and necessary plumbing connections.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County – Housing Units 22 40 00 - 4

MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL:
SECTION 23 00 00
SECTION 23 05 00
SECTION 23 05 03
SECTION 23 05 14
SECTION 23 05 15
SECTION 23 05 23
SECTION 23 05 29
SECTION 23 05 48
SECTION 23 05 93
SECTION 23 07 00
SECTION 23 07 01
SECTION 23 09 00
SECTION 23 20 00
SECTION 23 31 00
SECTION 23 33 00
SECTION 23 34 13
SECTION 23 37 00
SECTION 23 52 34
SECTION 23 72 00
SECTION 23 81 07
SECTION 23 81 43
SECTION 23 82 00
SECTION 23 84 15
MECHANICAL INDEX
GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PIPING AND FITTINGS
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
PIPING SPECIALTIES
VALVES
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
VIBRATION ISOLATION
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
DUCTWORK INSULATION
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
HVAC PUMPS
DUCTWORK
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
BOILERS
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
ROOFTOP HEATING, COOLING AND MAKE-UP AIR UNIT (GAS-FIRED)
HEAT PUMP UNITS
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
HUMIDIFIERS
Dunn County Housing Units 23 00 00 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00
GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install a complete building HVAC system as per drawings and enclosed
specifications. Provide a competent supervisor, foreman, etc. to expedite all phases of
the HVAC Project. HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all demolition, cutting,
patching, coring, sealing, fire caulking and finishing necessary for execution of the HVAC
work as shown on the MH drawings and included in the specification. HVAC Contractor
must refer to general project specifications and Section 01 10 00 for all additional project
requirements and coordination issues.
B. Requirements specified herein shall govern applicable portions of all mechanical work
sections, whether so stated therein or not. Where items specified in mechanical work
sections conflict with requirements in this specification, the former shall govern.
C. Job site to be seen to ascertain existing field conditions. Failure to visit the job site does
not limit the contractual responsibility of any aspect of the HVAC project.
D. Items To Include:
1. Scope
2. Abbreviations
3. References
4. Definitions
5. Quality Assurance
6. Shop Drawings, Wiring Diagrams and Descriptive Data
7. Substitution of Equipment and Materials
8. Related work of Mechanical Trades
9. Electrical Requirements and Provisions
10. Coordination
11. Temporary Services
12. Codes, Permits and Fees
13. Transportation, Storage and Protection of Equipment and Materials
14. Materials and Equipment Installation
15. Sleeves, and Openings
16. Flashing
17. Sealing and Fire stopping
18. Cutting and Patching, Holes and Sleeves
19. Equipment Access
20. General Pressure Piping Specification
21. Painting
22. Inspection and Tests
23. Cleaning and Flushing
24. Operating Test
25. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
26. Record Drawings
27. Identification
28. Testing and Balancing
29. HVAC System Commissioning
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following abbreviations are used throughout all mechanical work sections.
amp ampere
bhp brake horsepower
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 1

Btu British Thermal Unit
c to c center to center or on center
cfm cubic feet per minute
deg degree (angle)
F degree Fahrenheit
fpm feet per minute
ft. foot
gal gallon
gph gallons per hour
gpm gallons per minute
hp horsepower
hr hour
in. or " inch
ID inside diameter
ips iron pipe size
kw kilowatt
max maximum
min minimum
oz ounce
OD outside diameter
os & y outside screw & yoke
lb. pound
psi pounds per square inch
rpm revolutions per minute
sec second
std standard
sp static pressure
temp temperature
wwp water working pressure
1.3 REFERENCES
A. References to standards, codes or specifications shall mean the latest edition of such
publication adopted and published at date of invitation to submit proposals.
B. References to technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies are
made in accordance with the following abbreviations.
1. AFI Air Filter Institute
2. AGA American Gas Association, Inc.
3. ANSI American National Standards Institute
4. ASHRAE Amer. Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning
Engineers
5. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
6. AMCA Air Moving & Conditioning Association, Inc.
7. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
8. AWWA American Water Works Association
9. BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators
10. CS Commercial Standard
11. FM Factory Mutual
12. IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiator Manufacturers
13. IRI Industrial Risk Insured
14. ISOW Insurance Services of Wisconsin
15. NAFM National Association of Fan Manufacturers
16. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
17. NBS National Bureau of Standards
18. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 2

1.4 DEFINITIONS
19. SBI Steel Boiler Institute
20. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Nat’l Assoc. Inc.
21. UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
The following are definitions of terms and expressions used in mechanical work Sections.
A. Provide means furnish and install in place.
B. Herein means contents of a particular section where this term appears.
C. Indicated means indicated on contract drawings.
D. Section denotes "trade section" or basic unit of work.
E. Division denotes a group of related sections. All Mechanical Work falls into Div. 23.
F. Concealed means any pipe, duct, conduit or accessories hidden from sight as in
trenches, chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts or hung ceilings.
G. Exposed means they are "not concealed" as defined herein above.
H. Piping includes in addition to pipe, fittings, valves, hangers and accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
Should instructions conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
B. Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration,
dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated in the contract
documents, the contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the
equipment or accessories into the system and for obtaining the performance from the
system into which these items are placed. This may include changes found necessary
during the testing, adjusting and balancing phase of the project.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS, WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DESCRIPTIVE DATA
A. Submit shop drawings, wiring diagrams and descriptive data on all equipment, apparatus,
fixtures and specialties to be provided. Manufacturer shall prepare these drawings or his
franchised dealer for this specific installation unless equipment is stock design then
standard shop drawing may be submitted. Drawings shall show all physical sizes and
required services, installation instructions, description of operation including
recommended testing and adjusting procedures shall be included.
1.7 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Assume all responsibility for any and all changes made to the HVAC system due to
substitutions. Manufacturers listed first in the Specifications were used in preparing the
drawings. Other Manufacturers listed are considered substitutions, but may be submitted
for approval as potentially equal to the initial manufacturer identified. Manufacturers not
listed in the Specification will not be considered "As Equal" to the design equipment or
material.
B. Notify all Contractors of substitutions made prior to their involvement with the substitution
installation. Provide all modifications to ductwork and other Construction necessary due
to substitutions. Equipment must be accessible for servicing filters, bearings, motors,
belts, etc.
1.8 RELATED WORK OF MECHANICAL TRADES
The following tabulation of items of work is not all inclusive but is set forth to establish a pattern to
be maintained should items occur which are not specifically covered in the various divisions of the
work.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 3

A. Plumbing - Any equipment provided by other trades requiring water, compressed air or
drainage piping thereto shall have these services provided by that other Trade. Provide a
gate valve or stop valve and union at point of connection to such equipment. Provide
traps and vents or open sight drains to satisfy drainage requirements of equipment.
B. Heating - Any equipment provided by other trades requiring hot water, or condensate
thereto shall have these services provide by that other Trade.
1. If regulators or mechanical devices for control of services are necessary,
Contractor supplying equipment for installation by this Contractor shall furnish
these items.
2. Gas piping shall be completed by the heating contractor. Contractor whose
scope of work includes gas piping will serve all equipment requiring gas. Special
valves, pressure-regulators, etc., if required, will be provided with equipment.
C. Ventilating and Air Conditioning - Provide sheet metal vents or ducts on any equipment
furnished by other trades making final connection thereto using flexible connectors in
case of ductwork only. Install pre-heat and/or re-heat coils furnished by others. Install
temperature control dampers.
D. Refrigeration - Provide piping to cooling coils.
E. Temperature Controls - Any equipment provided by other trades requiring temperature
control work shall be provided by this Contractor unless specifically exempted in
specifications. Provide schematic diagrams as specified and include pneumatic or
electrical work necessary to connect all components to function as a complete system.
The Temperature Controls Contractor shall wire control wiring specified in Temperature
Control Section.
1.9 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS
A. For electrically operated equipment provide all motors. Starters, controllers, and
disconnects which are an integral part of unit equipment shall be provided with that
equipment. Starters, controllers and disconnects which are not included as part of the
equipment shall be provided as a separate item as part of the electrical work of Division
26, unless otherwise indicated. All control devices and sensors associated with the
electrically operated equipment shall be provided as part of the work of Division 23,
unless otherwise indicated.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Verify that all devices are compatible for the surfaces on which they will be used. This
includes, but is not limited to, diffusers, registers, grilles and recessed or semi-recessed
heating and/or cooling terminal units installed in/on architectural surfaces.
B. Coordinate all work with other contractors prior to installation. Any installed work that is
not coordinated and that interferes with other contractor’s work shall be removed or
relocated at the installing contractor’s expense.
1.11 TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. Whenever temporary services are required to maintain operation of equipment, it is
understood that the Contractors responsible for final connections to permanent services
shall do this temporary work. All temporary material shall be removed after it has served
its use. See Special Conditions for temporary services required during construction of
project.
1.12 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 4

A. All Mechanical work shall conform with all Federal, State and Local Codes and
regulations. If codes or regulations conflict, the most stringent shall apply. Permits and
inspection fees are to be secured in fulfilling the requirements of these Specifications.
1.13 TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Transport and handle equipment by methods to avoid damage. Promptly inspect
shipments to assure that equipment complies with requirements, quantities are correct
and equipment is undamaged.
B. Cover equipment and materials to eliminate rust and corrosion while allowing sufficient
ventilation to avoid condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe,
tube and fitting ends to avoid damage.
C. Provide access for inspection of all stored equipment. Periodically inspect to assure
equipment is undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.
D. Offsite storage agreements will not relieve contractor from using proper storage
techniques.
1.14 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Materials and equipment shall be new and of the make, type, size and quality specified.
See Instructions for Bidders for bidding procedure.
B. Erect equipment in neat workmanlike manner, align, level and adjust for satisfactory
operation; install for easy maintenance, inspection, operation, and replacement. Minor
deviation from indicated arrangements may be made as approved.
C. Mechanical equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration. Ductwork
and piping shall be provided with flexible couplings to prevent noises or vibration
transmission.
1.15 SLEEVES, AND OPENINGS
A. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Provide galvanized sheet metal sleeves for pipe penetrations through interior
walls to provide a backing for sealant or firestopping.
2. Provide schedule 40 steel pipe for pipe penetrations through exterior walls, nonrated
beams, footings and potentially wet applications to provide backing for
sealant and firestopping.
3. Sleeves for piping in new poured concrete construction shall be schedule 40 steel
pipe, cast in place.
4. In all piping floor penetrations, fire rated and non-fire rated, top of sleeve shall
extend 1” above the adjacent floor. Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor
plate.
a) Sleeves in non-rated floor penetrations shall be 18 gauge galvanized
steel.
b) Sleeves in rated floor penetrations shall be UL listed prefabricated sleeve
including seals.
c) If the pipe penetrating the sleeve is supported be a pipe clamp resting on
the sleeve, weld a collar or struts to the sleeve to transfer weight to floor
structure.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 5

5. In finished spaces where pipe penetration through wall is exposed, provide
chrome plated steel escutcheons installed flush with face of penetrated surface.
6. Size sleeves large enough to allow for expansion and contraction. Provide for
continuous insulation wrapping.
B. Duct Sleeves:
1. Duct sleeves are not required in non-rated floors or partitions.
2. Provide sleeve required for fire dampers in fire-rated partitions and floors. Install
sleeve per manufacturer’s recommendation.
C. Openings:
1. Any opening over 12” in width penetrating masonry or concrete construction
requires additional structural support. Mechanical contractor shall be responsible
for creating and sealing all openings.
1.16 FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate
weather or waterproofed walls, floors and roofs.
B. Flash pipes projecting 3” minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch
minimum into hub, 8” minimum clear on sides with 24x24 sheet size. For pipes through
outside walls, turn back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash and seal.
C. Provide welded curbs for mechanical roof installation 12” minimum high above roofing
surface. Flexible sheet flash and counterflash with sheetmetal; seal watertight.
D. Metal Flashing: 26-gauge galvanized steel.
E. Lead Flashing: 5 lbs./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; one lb./sq. ft (5 kg/sq. m) sheet
lead for soundproofing.
F. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
G. Caps: Steel, 22-gauge minimum; 16-gauge at fire resistant elements.
1.17 SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING
A. Sealing and Fire stopping of sleeves/openings between ductwork, piping, etc. and the
sleeve, structural or partition opening shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose
work penetrates the opening. The contractor responsible shall hire individuals skilled in
such work to do the sealing and fireproofing. Coordinate with Hoffman, LLC for fire
caulking products and requirements.
B. FIRE AND/OR SMOKE RATED PENETRATIONS:
1. Provide material and perform work in compliance with the following:
a) Wisconsin Administrative Code
b) Provide materials tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
c) Provide materials which have been tested in accordance with ASTM
E814-88: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration
Firestops.
d) Materials shall have been tested to provide fire rating at least equal to
that of the construction being penetrated and shall comply with the T-
ratings as required by applicable building code.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 6

2. Contractor shall submit product data for each firestop system in accordance with
Div 07 section 07 84 00 – Firestopping.
3. Contractor shall use firestop putty, caulk sealant, intumescent wrapstrips,
intumescent firestop collars, firestop mortar or a combination of these products to
provide a UL listed system for each application required for this project. Provide
mineral wool backing where specified in manufacturer’s application detail. Use
product that has a rating not less then the rating of the wall or floor being
penetrated.
4. Install approved product in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions where
the pipes and ductwork penetrate a fire/smoke rated surface. When pipe or
ductwork is insulated, use a product which maintains the integrity of the insulation
and vapor barrier.
C. NON-RATED PENETRATIONS
1. Pipe Penetrations Through Below Grade Walls: In exterior wall openings below
grade, use a modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the uninsulated
pipe and the wall sleeve.
2. Pipe Penetrations: At pipe penetrations of non-rated interior partitions, floors and
exterior walls above grade, use urethane caulk in annular space between pipe
and insulation and sleeve.
3. Duct Penetrations: Annular space between duct (with or without insulation) and
the non-rated partition or floor opening shall not be larger than 2”. Where existing
openings have and annular space larger than 2”, the space shall be patched to
match existing construction to within 2” around the duct. Coordinate with the
General Contractor for this work.
4. Where shown or specified, pack annular space with fiberglass batt insulation or
mineral wool insulation. Provide sheet metal escutcheon around duct on both
sides of partition or floor to cover annular space.
5. In finished spaces where duct penetrations are exposed, pack annular space with
fiberglass batt insulation or mineral wool insulation. Patch annular space to
match adjacent construction for a finished appearance. Coordinate with
Hoffman, LLC for this work.
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING, HOLES AND SLEEVES
A. It shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor to cut, core and patch all openings
where required for installing the mechanical work. All dimensions must be verified with
equipment shop drawings.
B. All required core drilling of holes in floors or walls necessary to install piping and conduit is
the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor. All core drilled holes must be drilled carefully
as to avoid spalling, and unnecessary damage or weakening of structural members.
Avoid chopping or breaking out.
1.19 EQUIPMENT ACCESS
A. Install all piping, conduit, ductwork, and accessories to permit access to equipment for
maintenance and service.
1.20 GENERAL PRESSURE PIPING SPECIFICATION
The following piping practice shall be followed in installing all steel or copper piping:
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 7

A. Full length of pipe shall be used wherever possible; short lengths of pipe with couplings
will not be permitted.
B. All pipes shall be cut to exact measurements and shall be installed without forcing or
springing so as not to cause excess stress in valves or equipment.
C. All piping shall slope a minimum of 1" in 50'-0" in the direction of flow unless otherwise
noted on drawings.
D. All branch connections shall be made into top of mains unless otherwise noted on
drawings.
E. All changes in direction shall be made by using pipe and fittings or by shop fabricated pipe
bends. Field pipe bends are prohibited.
F. Unions shall be installed in all pipe connections to equipment, control valves, controllers,
steam traps, and wherever necessary to facilitate the dismantling of piping and removal of
other items requiring maintenance.
G. Exposed piping shall be neatly arranged, straight, run parallel, and at right angles to walls
and shall be so graded that the entire system can be drained. Drain valves shall be
installed at low points of piping.
H. Install pipe anchors and expansion bends or swing connections where so indicated on
drawings.
I. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of doors or windows,
shall not encroach on aisle passageways and equipment, and shall not interfere with the
servicing or maintenance of any equipment.
J. When pipe size is reduced, reducing fittings are required. No bushings shall be used.
1.21 PAINTING
A. Structural iron HVAC equipment supports and piping exposed to the outdoors shall be
given one coat of Rustoleum or equivalent rust-free type paint. Galvanized supports are
not paint required.
1.22 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. See Section 23 05 03 – Pipe and Fittings
B. Testing and Balancing:
1. Provide the services of a qualified independent firm engaged in the business of
air balance to adjust and balance ventilating systems as specified in Division 23.
C. Refrigeration:
1. Test refrigeration equipment under 100% load conditions, artificial if necessary,
before Owner operates equipment, as specified in Division 23.
1.23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Maintenance manuals shall be prepared covering the HVAC systems of the building,
including refrigeration and temperature controls.
B. Submit manuals in the quantity and format as specified in Division 01 Section Contract
Closeout.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 8

C. These manuals shall include the following information:
1. Name and address and telephone number of installing Project Manager and
Subcontractors.
2. Description of Systems
3. Test results and reports
a) Installation checks on fans and related equipment
b) Air balance
c) Results of all pressure tests with witness signature, data made, etc
d) Water treatment test results, including tests for absence of bacteria in
domestic water system
e) Valve identification charts
4. General Operating Instructions: Instructions shall include locations of equipment
or controls, which will require periodic adjustment.
5. Maintenance Instruction: These shall include manufacturer's maintenance for all
equipment.
D. The above information including equipment shop drawings, fixture cuts, etc. shall be
placed in three ring loose-leaf hard cover binders with section tabs labeled with project
name and contents. Submit to Architect prior to final billing.
1.24 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit to Architect/Engineer a complete layout of piping and duct systems
as actually installed showing location, size changes, and elevations for permanent record
drawings. Drawings must be provided in AutoCad .dwg format for reproduction along with
(1) hard copy.
1.25 IDENTIFICATION
A. General:
B. Pipe:
1. Do not label equipment such as cabinet heaters, convectors, radiation, ceiling
fans or any other equipment in occupied spaces.
1. All piping shall be color-coded using legend markers and directional arrows after
piping has been covered (if specifications call for insulation) and after piping has
been painted.
2. Use Setmark System pipe markers with arrows as manufactured by Seton Name
Plate Corp. Pipe stencils are not acceptable.
3. Install markers as recommended by the manufacturer.
4. Locate pipe identification as follows:
a) Within 1’-6” of each valve
b) Within 3’-0” of each 90° elbow
c) Within 3’-0” of piping connection to equipment
d) Within 3’-0” of where pipe enters shafts and penetrates floor and outside
walls.
e) Maximum 20’-0” intervals along all piping (exposed and concealed). Not
less than one label shall be installed per room.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 9

f) Within 1’-6” of any access door or panel
g) At all tees within 3’-0” of both mains and branch piping.
h) Where new piping meets existing piping, place one additional label on
existing piping as specified in items ‘a’ through ‘f’.
i) On remodeling projects, contractor shall include in bid, one extra (case or
roll) of all ordered system colors and/or bands to turn over to owner.
j) Stenciling of piping is not acceptable.
C. Valves:
1. After piping work is complete and pipe insulation is finished, tag valves on all
piping. Valve tags are not required at a terminal device unless the valves are
greater than ten feet from the device or located in another room not visible from
the terminal unit. Indentify valves with consecutive numbers on tags.
2. Provide Seton Name Plate Company Style M4506 brass valve tags, 1-1/2"
diameter, black filled characters, 1/2" numbers, 1/4" letters, with size No. 6 nickelplated
bead chains for fastening to each valve stem as required.
3. Abbreviations are as follows:
a) Ventilating VNTG
b) Plumbing PLBG
c) Heating HTG
d) Refrigeration REF
4. Furnish Seton Name Plate Company 37411 valve identification charts in a satinfinish
self-closing aluminum frame, size 9-1/2" x 12".
5. Complete chart showing contractor's name and address, name of system,
number, location, and purpose of each valve tagged.
6. Mount enclosed chart in Mechanical Room or Boiler Room, or as directed by the
owner.
7. Provide two (2) copies of charts and place in Maintenance Manual.
D. Exterior Mounted Equipment:
1. Identify exterior mounted mechanical equipment by stenciling equipment number
with black enamel against a light background or white enamel against a dark
background. Use a primer where necessary for proper paint adhesion.
2. Whenever possible, paint equipment number so it is visible from point of roof
access.
E. Interior mounted equipment:
1. Provide Seton Seatonflex Style M1771 Name Plate for all equipment such as air
handling equipment, pumps, package air conditioners, starters, and disconnects.
Plates shall bear name of equipment as noted in drawings and specifications i.e.,
Supply Fan #1. Plates shall be 2-1/2" x 3/4" multi-layered acrylic, white
characters with a black background.
F. Submit a list of plates for Architect's approval before ordering.
1.26 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A. See requirements in Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
B. Include the complete cost of air and hydronic system testing and balancing in the Bid.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 10

C. T & B procedures, methods and instrumentation shall be in strict accordance with the
established standards of the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or the
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
D. Provide the services of a qualified independent NEBB or AABC certified firm engaged in
the business of air balance to adjust and balance ventilating systems as specified in
Division 23.
E. Mechanical Contractor shall assume the responsibility for the following:
1. Purchase and installation of any replacement component of equipment drive
assemblies as directed by the Test and Balance Contractor.
2. Filter replacement and installation.
3. Adjustment of isolation devices.
4. Equipment conformity to sound level requirements.
5. Purchase and replacement of motor starter heater elements, as directed.
6. Removal, cleaning or replacement of hydronic system strainers.
7. Draining, filling and venting of hydronic systems.
8. Proper adjustment and calibration of temperature control instruments and
devices.
9. Water treatment if specified, system cleaning and general equipment
housekeeping.
10. Leak testing of ductwork and piping.
11. Installation of volume dampers where shown, or where required as directed by
the Test and Balance Contractor.
12. Instruction to owner on system operation.
13. Furnishing of ladders and or scaffolding as directed by the Test and Balance
Contractor.
14. Furnish the Test and Balance Contractor with one set of “As-built” drawings and
one complete set of certified shop drawings at least two weeks prior to
commencement of work.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 00 - 11

SECTION 23 05 03
PIPING AND FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Heating and Indoor Geothermal Water Piping
B. Vents and Relief Valves
C. Unions and Flanges
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 29 - Supports and Anchors
B. Section 23 07 01 - Piping Insulation
C. Section 23 05 15 - Piping Specialties
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
B. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications
C. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
D. ANSI/ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage
Fittings - DWV
E. ANSI B31.1 - Code for power piping (over 125 psig)
F. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping
G. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal
H. ANSI Z49.1 - Safety in Welding and Cutting
I. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless
J. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and
Seamless, for Ordinary Uses
K. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures
L. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal
M. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube
N. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder Qualifications:
1. Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators for all building service piping
and steam piping less than or equal to 15 psig to be in accordance with certified
welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.
2. Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators for all steam system piping
at service pressures above 15 psig to be qualified complying with the provisions
of the latest revision of ANSI/ASME B31.1 Power Piping or Section IX of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for boiler external piping.
3. Before any metallic welding is performed, Contractor to submit his/her Standard
Welding Procedure Specification together with the Procedure Qualification
Record as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
and/or the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 03 - 1

1.6 SUBMITTALS
4. Before any polyethylene fusion welding is performed, Contractor to submit
certification that the welders to be used on this project have successfully
demonstrated proper welding procedures in accordance with the Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 49, Part 192, Section 192.285.
5. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to test the work of any welder employed
on the project, at the Contractor’s expense. If the work of the welder is found to
be unsatisfactory, the welder shall be prevented from doing further welding on the
project.
6. Note: In addition to requirements described above, contractor shall submit the
following information to architect/engineer for review:
a) Provide a project summary listing contractors’ standard welding
procedure specification.
b) List all welders scheduled to work on the project.
c) List all pipe sizes to be welded.
d) Provide continuity record of each welder for every six month interval after
passing the qualification test.
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 HEATING AND GEOTHERMAL PIPING WATER PIPNG
A. 2” and smaller: ASTM A53, type F, standard weight (schedule 40) black steel pipe with
ASTM A126/ANSI B16.4, Class 125, standard weight cast iron threaded fittings or ASTM
B88 seamless, type L, hard temper copper tube with ANSI B16.22 wrought copper solderjoint
fittings. Install brass ball valve at junction of dissimilar piping.
B. 2 ½” and larger: ASTM A53, standard weight (schedule 40) black steel pipe with ASTM
A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon steel weld fittings.
C. Contractor may use ASTM B88 seamless, type L, hard temper copper tube with ANSI
B16.22 wrought copper solder-joint fittings in lieu of steel pipe for pipe sizes 2” and
smaller. For pipe sizes 2 ½” and larger, contractor may use grooved pipe and matching
fittings as manufactured by Victaulic or equal. Grooved fittings and pipe must be installed
in strict accordance with manufacturers requirements and recommendations.
2.2 VENTS AND RELIEF VALVES
A. Use pipe and pipe fittings as specified for the systems to which the relief valve or vent is
connected.
2.3 COOLING COIL CONDENSATE
A. ASTM B88, type L, hard temper copper tubing with ASTM B145/ANSI B16.23 cast red
bronze or ASTM B75/ANSI B16.29 wrought solder type drainage fittings.
2.4 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. 2” and smaller: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use
black iron on black steel piping. Use unions of a pressure class equal or higher than that
specified for the fittings of the respective piping service but not less than 250 psi.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 03 - 2

B. 2 ½” and larger: ASTM 181 or A105, grade 1 hot forged steel flanges of threaded,
welding neck, or slip-on pattern and of a pressure class compatible with that specified for
valves, piping specialties and fittings of the respective piping service. Flanges smaller
than 2 ½” may be used as needed for connecting to equipment and piping specialties.
Use raised face flanges ANSI B16.5 for mating with other raised face flanges on
equipment with flat ring or full face gaskets. Use ANSI B16.1 flat face flanges with full
face gaskets for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment. Gasket material to be
non-asbestos and suitable for pressures and temperatures of the piping system.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install all piping plumb and parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights
which do not obstruct any portion of windows, doorways, stairways, or passage
ways. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as
required to clear such interferences
2. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
3. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints,
or connected equipment.
4. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings.
5. Do not route piping through transformer vaults, or above transformers, panel
boards, or switchboards including the required service space for this equipment,
unless the piping is serving this equipment.
6. Do not route piping through elevator equipment rooms unless piping is serving
equipment in this room.
7. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and
location of access doors.
8. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers
to maintain bottom of pipe level.
9. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
10. Install air traps, vents, and drains on all water mains and terminal units where
shown and as required. Air vents shall be located at all high points and at those
points at which there is a possibility of collecting air. Air vents shall be vent cocks
and must be extended with 1/8" copper tubing for easy access.
11. Welding is required on all black piping 2 ½” and larger except where the
contractor may opt to use grooved pipe and fittings as allowed.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 03 - 3

12. Copper piping may be used for heating water service in lieu of Schedule 40 Black
on piping 2” and smaller. Install brass ball valve at junction of dissimilar piping.
B. Welded Pipe Joints:
1. Make all welded joints by fusion welding in accordance with ASME Codes, ANSI
B31, and State Codes where applicable.
C. Threaded Pipe Joints:
1. Use a thread lubricant or Teflon tape on threaded pipe joints; no hard setting pipe
thread cements or caulking is allowed.
D. Copper Pipe Joints:
1. Remove all slivers and burrs remaining from the cutting operation by reaming and
filing both pipe surfaces. Clean all fittings and tube with emery cloth or
sandpaper. Remove residue from the cleaning operation, apply flux and
assemble joints. Use 95-5 solder or brazing to secure joint as specified for the
specific piping service.
E. Hot Water System Piping
1. Main branches and run outs to terminal equipment may be made at the side of
mains only where shown on drawings.
2. Use a minimum of two elbows in branch line to a piece of terminal equipment to
provide flexibility for expansion and contraction of the piping system.
3. Use eccentric fittings for changes in horizontal pipe sizes with the fittings installed
for proper condensate drainage. Concentric fittings may be used for changes in
vertical pipe sizes.
F. Vents and relief valves
1. Install vent and relief valve discharge lines as indicated n the drawings, as
detailed, and as specified for each specific valve or piping system.
G. Unions and Flanges
1. Install unions and flanges as required at each automatic control valve and at each
piping specialty or piece of equipment which may require removal for
maintenance, repair, or replacement. Where a valve is located at a piece of
equipment, locate the flange or union connection on the equipment side of the
valve.
H. Leak Testing
1. Verify that the piping system being tested is fully connected to all components
and that all equipment is properly installed, wired and ready for operation. If
required for additional pressure load under test, provide temporary restraints at
expansion joints or isolate them during test.
2. Do not insulate piping systems until system has been properly tested and
repaired. If leaks are found, repair area with new materials and repeat test.
Caulking of leaks is not acceptable.
3. For hydrostatic testing, use clean water and remove all air from the system being
tested.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 03 - 4

4. For air tests, gradually increase pressure to not more than one half of test
pressure and increase pressure in steps of approximately one tenth of the test
pressure until test pressure is reached.
5. Heating water piping: Subject to hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig. Maintain test
pressure for 8 hours.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 03 - 5

SECTION 23 05 14
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install variable frequency drives serving the energy
recovery ventilator units and pumps where indicated on equipment schedules.
B. Power wiring connecting to the variable frequency drives and related motors shall be work
of Division 26.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC Requirements
B. Section 23 09 00 – Temperature Controls
C. Section 26 00 10 – General Electrical Requirements
1.3 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
C. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
D. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish shop drawing, materials, specifications, performance and
descriptive data, electrical wiring diagrams and proof of certifications for the variable
frequency drive and all accessories as specified in this section.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
B. Danfoss / Graham
C. Rockwell Automation
D. A.B.B.
F. Saftronics
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Adjustable Speed Drive:
1. The variable frequency drive shall be a microprocessor based, fully transistorized
with a three-phase full wave diode bridge input and a Sine-coded Pulse Width
Modulated (PWM) output. The drive shall have an allowable frequency
fluctuation of +/- 5% and an allowable voltage fluctuation of +/- 10%.
2. The VFD shall convert three-phase, 60 Hz power to adjustable voltage and
frequency, three phase power for stepless motor speed control from 10% to
100% of the motor’s 60 Hz speed.
3. The VFD shall include a converter and an inverter section. The converter shall
convert fixed frequency and voltage AC utility power to DC voltage. The VFD
shall include input line reactors.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 14 - 1

4. The inverter section of the VFD shall invert the DC voltage into a quality output
waveform, with adjustable voltage and frequency for stepless motor speed
control. The VFD shall maintain a constant V/Hz ratio.
5. The drive shall be complete with main fusing, contactor bypass, motor overload
relay, and a door-interlocked, lockable drive/off/line/test transfer switch, all
located in a NEMA 1 enclosure with hinged and key-latched access door. The
entire assembly shall be UL-listed and mounted on a structural channel type floor
stand which shall be supplied by the drive manufacturer. The stand shall be
attached to the wall and bolted to the floor.
6. The VFD and options shall be tested to ANSI/UL Standard 508. The complete
drive, including all specified options, shall be listed by UL.
7. Power line noise shall be limited to a voltage distortion factor and line notch depth
as defined in IEEE Standard 519-1992, Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive
Compensation of Static Power Converters. The total voltage distortion shall not
exceed 5%.
8. The VFD shall not emit radiated RFI in excess of the limitations set forth in the
FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15 for Class A computing devices. The VFD
shall carry a FCC compliance label. PWM type drives shall include RFI filters.
9. Motor noise as a result of the VFD shall be limited to three dB over across the line
operation, measured at 3’ from the motor’s centerline.
10. The VFD’s full load amp rating shall meet or exceed NEC Table 430-150.
B. The VFD shall, as a minimum have the following features:
1. Operational codes shall be spelled out in English words.
2. A minimum generation of 8,000 pulses per swine at all frequencies to minimize
noise and low speed cogging.
3. The efficiency shall be minimum 95% throughout the load range.
4. Solid state ground fault protection to protect both motor and drive at all
frequencies.
5. Trip point shall be adjustable from 40% to 100% of drive amperage rating.
6. Driver operations shall be switch selectable and include as a minimum the
following functions:
a) Acceleration/deceleration selector switch set for time range (2 to 300
seconds).
b) Hand-Off-Auto.
c) Electronic thermal overload protection.
d) The drive shall provide the following operational features:
d) Automatic speed holding if control signal is lost.
e) Automatic voltage reduction with load reduction.
f) Speed search transfer.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 14 - 2

g) Adjustable current limit threshold.
h) Multiple restart upon fault trip.
i) Minimum 40.1 frequency control range.
j) Minimum 0.2 second power loss ride-through without drive trip or loss of
programming.
7. The following fault conditions shall cause the drive to trip and shall be indicated
by LED indicators on the panel front:
a) Overvoltage
b) High line
c) Phase loss
d) Bus overvoltage
e) Overcurrent
f) Ground fault
g) Overload
h) Overtemperature
i) External fault
j) Output open
8. The drive shall attempt to restart a minimum of five times with a ten-second
pause between attempts after tripping. A dry contact shall close after the fifth
unsuccessful restart.
9. Provide the unit with a digital operator interface with the following features:
a) The keypad display interface shall offer the modification of AC Drive
adjustments via a touch keypad. All electrical values, configuration
parameters, I/O assignments, application and activity function access,
faults, local control, adjustment storage, self-test and diagnostics shall be
in plain English. There will be a standard selection of four (4) additional
languages built-in to the operating software as standard.
b) The display will be a high resolution, LCD back-lit screen capable of
displaying graphics such as bar graphs as well as six lines of 21
alphanumeric characters.
c) The keypad display shall consist of programmable function keys that
allow both operating commands and programming options to be preset
by the operator. A hardware selector switch shall allow the terminal
keypad to be locked out from unauthorized personnel.
d) Hand-Off-Auto test switch.
10. Start-up service shall be provided by a factory certified service technician. The
start-up service shall include checking for verification of proper operation and
installation of all features of the drive and a written start-up report submitted to the
Engineer. The service shall also include instruction of the (UCDMC) personnel in
operation of the drive.
11. The VFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36 months. The
warranty shall include all costs incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory
authorized on-site service.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 14 - 3

SECTION 23 05 15
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Thermometers
B. Pressure Gauges
C. Expansion Loops
D. Strainers
E. Air Vents
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 29 - Supports and Anchors
B. Section 23 07 01 - Piping Insulation
C. Section 23 05 03 – Pipe and Fittings
D. Section 23 05 23 – Valves
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
B. ANSI B31.1 Code for power piping over 150 psig
C. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
1.7 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All piping specialties are to be rated for the highest pressures and temperatures in the
respective system in accordance with ANSI B31, but not less than 125 psig unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOMETERS
A. Stem type, 9” scale, cast aluminum case, clear acrylic window, adjustable aluminum stem
with sufficient length so end of stem is near the middle of the pipe without reducing the
thickness of any insulation, red indicating fluid, black lettering against a white background.
Provide separable socket or extension neck if installed in an insulated line.
1. Scale ranges to be as follows:
a) Hot Water Heating 30° to 240° F.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 15 - 1

2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES
2. Manufacturers: Trerice model A005 thru A008 or approved equal
A. Cast aluminum case of not less than 4.5 inches in diameter, double strength clear glass
window, black lettering on a white background, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, silver
brazed to forged brass socket, stainless steel rotary type movement. ASME B40.1,
Grade 2A – 0.5% of scale accuracy.
B. All pressure gauges shall be graduated to twice the normal working pressure of the fluid
in the system.
C. Manufacturers: Trerice series 500X or approved equal
2.3 EXPANSION LOOPS
A. Provide expansion loops as indicated on drawings.
2.4 STRAINERS
A. Water systems
2.5 AIR VENTS
1. Pipe sizes 4” and under: Y Type, cast iron body, stainless steel screens, bolted
or threaded screen retainer tapped for a blow-off valve, threaded body in sizes
through 2” and rated at not less than 175 psi WOG. Flanged body for sizes over
2” and rated at not less than 125 psi WOG at 240° F. Screen to be 20 mesh for
lines sizes 2” and less, and 0.125” perforations for line sizes 2 ½” through 4”.
A. Manual Key Type Vents: Bronze body with nonferrous internal parts, screwdriver
operated, designed to relieve air from the system when vent is opened, rated at not less
than 125 psig at 220° F.
1. Bell and Gossett Model 4V; Eaton/Dole Model 9, 9B, or 14A.
B. Manual Air Vents: Provide 1/4” ball valves for manual venting of air handling unit coils
and where indicated elsewhere on drawings and details.
C. Automatic Air Vents: Cast iron body with nonferrous internal parts, designed to vent air
automatically with float principle without allowing air to enter the system, rated at not less
than 125 psig at 220° F.
1. Amtrol/Thrush Model 720, Bell and Gossett Model 107A, Watson McDaniel Model
830. Provide at Rolairtrol separators only.
2.6 FLOW SENSING DEVICE
A. For water flow sensing devices 2” and smaller, use balance valves as specified in Section
23 05 23 – Valves
B. Provide Dieterich Standard/Annubar or Preso Pitot tube flow sensors where shown on the
drawings.
C. Multi-port averaging type flow sensor designed to sense the velocity of a fluid flowing in a
pipe and produce a pressure output that is proportional to the fluid velocity. Sensor to
consist of a Type 316 stainless steel probe with a diamond or elliptical shape of sufficient
length to sense flow completely across the pipe section and to accommodate the
insulation specified for the pipeline; brass body gate, needle, or ball instrument
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 15 - 2

connection valves with appropriate fitting for connection to a meter; single forged steel
weld type installation fitting for pipe sizes through 6”, double forged steel weld type
installation fittings for use on opposite ends of the sensor for larger pipe sizes if
recommended by the manufacturer for the application; accurate within 2% of the actual
flow with a turndown ratio of 10:1 or better; permanently stamped nameplate attached to
the sensor indicating the flow/differential pressure characteristics of the sensor; suitable
for use on systems to 150 psig at 250° F.
D. Include one differential pressure meter kit that includes a 6” diameter gauge having an
accuracy of 3% of full scale or better and suitable for the differential pressures of the
valves supplied for this project, color coded hoses not less than 10’ in length with brass
connectors suitable for connection to the low and high pressure connections on the
balance valves, instrument valving so meter can be vented and drained, pressure and
temperature rating at least equal to that of the valves. Provide meter and all accessories
in a durable case with carrying handle.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to permit intended
performance.
3.2 THERMOMETERS
A. Install in piping systems as indicated on the drawings.
B. Install thermometer sockets at each point where a thermometer or temperature control
sensing element is located in a pipe.
3.3 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Install in locations where indicated on drawings, including any gauge piping, with scale
range appropriate to the system operating temperatures.
B. Provide pressure snubbers on water systems, coil siphons and steam systems, and
gauge valves at gauge locations as close to the main as possible and at each location
where a gauge tapping is indicated.
3.4 EXPANSION LOOPS
A. Install where indicated on drawings including required anchors and guides.
3.5 STRAINERS
A. Water Systems: Install ball valve or drain valve in the tapped screen retainer. Valve to be
the same size as the tapping.
3.6 AIR VENTS
A. Manual Key Type Air Vents: Install at all high points where air may collect and not be
carried by the system fluid. Use a soft Type L copper "pigtail" so the vent can be
positioned for venting and collecting any water that might escape.
B. Manual Ball Valve Air Vents: Install on air handling coils and where indicated elsewhere
as shown on drawings and details.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 15 - 3

C. Automatic Air Vents: Install on the top of air separators on systems using bladder type
expansion tanks. Install at other locations as indicated on the drawings or details. All
locations to have a ball valve installed upstream of the vent for maintenance purposes.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 15 - 4

SECTION 23 05 23
VALVES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Water system valves
B. Specialty valves and valve accessories
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 29 - Supports and Anchors
B. Section 23 07 01 - Piping Insulation
C. Section 23 05 15 - Piping Specialties
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
B. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications
C. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
D. ANSI/ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage
Fittings - DWV
E. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping
F. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal
G. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless
H. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and
Seamless, for Ordinary Uses
I. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures
J. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal
K. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B. Welder Qualifications:
1. Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators for all building service piping
and steam piping less than or equal to 15 psig to be in accordance with certified
welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.
2. Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators for all steam system piping
at service pressures above 15 psig to be qualified complying with the provisions
of the latest revision of ANSI/ASME B31.1 Power Piping or Section IX of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for boiler external piping.
3. Before any metallic welding is performed, Contractor to submit his/her Standard
Welding Procedure Specification together with the Procedure Qualification
Record as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
and/or the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 23 - 1

1.6 SUBMITTALS
4. Before any polyethylene fusion welding is performed, Contractor to submit
certification that the welders to be used on this project have successfully
demonstrated proper welding procedures in accordance with the Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 49, Part 192, Section 192.285.
5. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to test the work of any welder employed
on the project, at the Contractor’s expense. If the work of the welder is found to
be unsatisfactory, the welder shall be prevented from doing further welding on the
project.
6. Note: In addition to requirements described above, contractor shall submit the
following information to architect/engineer for review:
a) Provide a project summary listing contractor’s standard welding
procedure specification.
b) List all welders scheduled to work on the project.
c) List all pipe sizes to be welded.
d) Provide continuity record of each welder for every six month interval after
passing the qualification test.
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Contractor shall submit a schedule of all valves indicating type of service, dimensions,
materials of construction, and pressure/temperature ratings for all valves to used on
project.
C. Contractors desiring to use any valve other than those specified must submit a listing of
specified valve numbers with corresponding number of substituted manufacturer. This list
must be approved prior to valve installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER SYSTEM VALVES
A. Ball Valves
1. 2” and smaller: Two piece bronze body; threaded or soldered ends, as
appropriate to the pipe material; stainless steel or hard chrome plated
brass/bronze ball; full port; glass or carbon filled Teflon seat; threaded packing
gland follower; blowout-proof stem; 600 psig WOG. Provide valve stem
extensions if needed for valves installed in insulated piping.
2. 2 ½” and larger: Use butterfly valves, ball valves will not be accepted in pipes
sizes over 2”.
3. Nibco model T-585/S-585 or Milwaukee model BA425/BA455
B. Butterfly Valves
1. 2” and smaller: Use ball valves, butterfly valves will not be accepted in pipe sizes
under 2 ½”
2. 2 ½” and larger: Drilled and tapped lug style cast iron body; stainless steel shaft;
Teflon, nylatron, or acetal bearings; EPDM resilient seat. Disk to be aluminumbronze.
Valve assembly to be bubble tight to 175 psig with no downstream
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 23 - 2

flange/pipe attached. Provide valve stem extension so valve operators clear
insulation when installed on insulated piping. Use lug type valves for all
applications, permitting removal of downstream piping while using the valve for
system shutoff.
3. Provide ten-position lever actuators for valves 6” and smaller. Provide worm gear
operators for valves 8” and larger.
4. Where butterfly valves are indicated or specified to be installed at the location of a
flow sensing device, provide the butterfly valves with a memory stop.
5. Nibco LD series or Milwaukee CL series
C. Check Valves
1. 2” and smaller: Non-slam silent check valve. Bronze body, stainless steel stem
and spring and Teflon seat and disc. All suitable for 250 psi SWP.
a) Nibco model T-480/S-480 or Milwaukee
2. 2 ½” and larger: Non-slam wafer type silent check valve Iron body, renewable
bronze seat and disc and stainless steel spring. Suitable for 250 psi WOG and
125 SWP.
D. Triple Duty Valves
a) Nibco model W-960 or Milwaukee model 1400
1. 1 ½” and smaller: Straight pattern, heavy duty cast iron body with NPT
connections. 175 psi operating pressure, non-slam check valve with bronze seat,
replaceable bronze disc with EPDM seat insert, brass stem and stainless steel
spring, and calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation.
a) Bell & Gosset or Taco
2. 2” and larger: Straight or angled patter, heavy duty flanged cast iron body with
bolt on bonnet for 175 psi operating pressure, non-slam check valve with bronze
seat, replaceable bronze disc with bronze seat insert, brass stem (stainless steel
for 14” valves) and stainless steel spring, and calibrated adjustment permitting
flow regulation.
E. Balance Valves
a) Bell & Gosset or Taco
1. Balancing valves to be calibrated ball valve type units with locking indicator dial
and insulated housing/cover.
2. Manufacturers: Bell & Gosset circuit setters or approved equal.
3. Minimum Ratings: Devices with sweat or NPT connections: 400 PSIG at 250° F.
Devices with flanged connections: 400 PSIG at 250° F.
4. Provide a portable readout meter kit by the manufacturer of the balancing
devices. The meter shall be permanently mounted in a durable case complete
with two 10’ color coded hoses with shut-off valves at the end that connects to the
balance valve so that water does not drain out between readings.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 23 - 3

F. Drain Valves
1. ¾”: Two piece bronze body, screwed connections, lever operated handle and
stop, chrome plated bronze ball, reinforced Teflon seats and Teflon packing.
Suitable for 600 psi WOG and 150 psi SWP. Fitted with hose thread adapter and
cap.
2. Nibco model T-587-70 or Milwaukee model BA-425
G. Gauge Valves
1. ¼”: Bronze body, union bonnet, Teflon seal, renewable seat and disc, packing
gland and handwheel. Suitable for 300 psi WOG and 150 psi SWP.
2. Nibco model t-235Y or Milwaukee model 590
2.2 SPECIALTY VALVES AND VALVE ACCESSORIES
A. Gauge Valves
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
1. Use ½” needle valves of brass, bronze, or steel construction, 500 psig at not less
than 300° F.
A. Properly align piping before installation of valves in an upright position; operators installed
below the valves will not be accepted.
B. Install valves in strict accordance with valve manufacturer's installation recommendations.
Do not support weight of piping system on valve ends.
C. Install all temperature control valves.
D. Install all valves with the stem in the upright position. Valves may be installed with the
stem in the horizontal position only where space limitations do not allow installation in an
upright position or where large valves are provided with chain wheel operators. Where
valves 2-1/2" and larger are located more than 12'-0" above mechanical room floors,
install valve with stem in the horizontal position and provide a chain wheel operator.
Valves installed with the stems down, will not be accepted.
E. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location
of access doors with General Contractor.
F. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
G. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped systems. Sweat solder
adapters to pipe.
H. Prior to flushing of piping systems, place all valves in the full-open position.
3.2 SHUT-OFF VALVES
A. Install shut-off valves at all equipment, at each branch take-off from mains, and at each
automatic valve for isolation or repair.
B. Water system: Butterfly valves installed at the location of flow sensing devices are to
have a memory stop.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 23 - 4

3.3 BALANCING VALVES
A. Provide balancing valves for all major equipment, individual terminal equipment, each
major branch take-off, where indicated on drawings, and as required for complete
balancing of system.
3.4 DRAIN VALVES
A. Provide drain valves for complete drainage of systems. Locations of drain valves include
low points of piping systems, equipment locations as specified or detailed, at main shutoff
valves, including reheat coils, and other locations required for drainage of systems.
Pipe to nearest drain.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 23 - 5

SECTION 23 05 29
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors
B. Equipment bases and supports
1.3 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish hanger and support inserts to General Contractor for placement into formwork.
1.4 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration Isolation
B. Section 23 07 01 – HVAC Piping Insulation
C. Section 23 05 03 – Piping and Fittings
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. MANUFACTURERS
1. Grinnell
2. B-Line
3. Mason
4. Michigan Hanger
5. Unistrut
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2” to 1-1/2”: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2” to 4”: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3” (76 mm): Cast iron hook.
F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4” and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4” and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe
saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 29 - 1

I. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
J. Shield for Insulated Piping 2” and Smaller: 18 gauge galvanized steel shield over
insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12” long at pipe support.
K. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2” and Larger: Pipe covering protective saddles.
L. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2” and Larger: Hard block non-conducting
saddles in 90 degree segments, 12” minimum length, and block thickness same as
insulation thickness.
M. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
2.2 HANGER RODS
A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
B. Size rods for individual hangers and trapeze support as indicated below:
PART 3 Rod Diameter
Max. Load (Lbs.)
2.1 BEAM CLAMPS
610 3 / 8”
1130 1 / 2”
1810 5 / 8”
2710 3 / 4”
3770 7 / 8”
4960 1”
8000 1-1 / 4”
Total weight of equipment, including valves, fittings, pipe, pipe content and insulation are
not to exceed the limits indicated. Provide rods complete with adjusting and lock nuts.
A. Malleable black iron clamp for attachment to beam flange to 0.62” thick with a retaining
ring and threaded rod of 3/8”, 1/2”, and 5/8” diameter. Furnish with a hardened steel cup
point set screw.
2.2 INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with
lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to
suit threaded hanger rods.
2.3 ANCHORS
A. Use welding steel shapes, plates and bars to secure piping to structure.
2.4 FABRICATION
2.5 FINISH
A. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
B. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 29 - 2

A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
2.6 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS
A. Provided by Mechanical Contractor.
2.7 EQUIPMENT STANDS
A. Use contractor fabricated stand consisting of structural steel members supported by pipe
supports. All steel exposed to the weather to galvanized, painted or stainless steel.
2.8 EQUIPMENT CURBS, EQUIPMENT RAILS AND PIPE CURB ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers
1. Pate
2. Roof Products
3. ThyCurb
4. Vent Products
5. Custom Curb
6. Equipment manufacturer’s curbs constructed to match their equipment is
acceptable if curb is approved by the National Roofing Contractors Association.
B. Roof curbs shall be constructed of not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel reinforced so it
is structurally capable of supporting the intended load with no penetrations through the
curb flashing, inside and outside corner sections that are mitered and continuously
welded, lined minimum 1 ½” thick, 3 lb. density insulation, integral deck mounting flange,
nominal 2” wood nailer, and galvanized steel counter flashing. Roof curbs to be internally
reinforced. Curb heights shall be as indicated on drawings. Top of roof curbs shall be
level, with pitch built into curb when deck slopes ¼” of an inch per foot or greater.
C. Roof mounted equipment rails shall be constructed of not less than 18 gauge galvanized
steel reinforced so it is structurally capable of supporting the intended load, with welded
corners, fully mitered cant with continuously welded seams. Rails shall be internally
reinforced and have 2x4 or 2x6 wood nailer and galvanized steel counter flashing. Rail
heights shall be minimum 8” above roof deck or as indicated on drawings. Rail length
shall span a minimum of two roof joists or added structural support as indicated on
drawings and shall not cantilever more than 12” Support shall be level at the top with
pitch built-in when deck slopes 1/4 “ per foot or greater.
D. Pipe curb assemblies shall be constructed of not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel
reinforced so it is structurally capable of supporting the intended load, inside and outside
corner sections that are mitered and continuously welded, lined with a minimum 1 ½”
thick, 3 lb. density insulation, integral deck mounting flange, nominal 2” thick wood nailer,
laminated acrylic clad thermoplastic cover with graduated step boots to accommodate
size and quantity of pipes, fasten screws for cover, and stainless steel clamps for
securing boots around piping. Curb heights shall be as indicated on drawings. Top of roof
curbs shall be level, with pitch built into curb when deck slopes ¼” of an inch per foot or
greater.
E. Roof curbs, equipment rails, and pipe curb assemblies mounted on standing seam metal
roofing systems shall be by the roof manufacturer unless indicated otherwise on
drawings.
PART 4 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSERTS
A. Provide inserts to General Contractor for placement in concrete formwork.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 29 - 3

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4”.
3.2 PIPE HANGERS SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS:
A. Support horizontal piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER
1/2” to 1-1/4” 6'-6" 3/8"
1-1/2” to 2” 10'-0" 3/8"
2-1/2” to 3” 10'-0" 1/2"
4” to 6” 10'-0" 5/8"
8” to 12” 14'-0" 7/8"
14” and Over 20'-0" 1"
Nat. Gas Pipe (1/2”) 6’-0” 3/8”
Nat. Gas Pipe (3/4”) 8’-0” 3/8”
Nat. Gas Pipe (1” and over) 10’-0” 3/8”
PVC (All Sizes) 6'-0" 3/8"
Copper Pipe
(1/2" to 1-1/4") 5’-0” 3/8"
Copper Pipe
(1-1/2" & Over) 10'-0" 1/2"
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2” space between finished covering and adjacent
work.
C. Use hangers with 1-1/2” minimum vertical adjustment.
D. Support vertical piping with clamps secured to the piping and resting on the building
structure at each floor. Piping 5” or greater, of lengths exceeding 30 feet, shall be
additionally supported on base elbows secured to the building structure, with flexible
supporting hangers provided at the top of riser to allow for expansion and contraction.
E. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
F. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Do not hang piping directly from a metal deck or run piping so it rests on the bottom cord
of any truss or joist.
H. Install hangers and supports to provide for free expansion of the pipe system. Support all
piping from the structure using concrete inserts, beam clamps, ceiling plates, wall
brackets or floor stands. Fasten ceiling plates and wall brackets securely to the structure.
I. Install anchors where indicated on drawings. Where not specifically indicated, install
anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between
expansion loops.
J. Support natural gas piping across roof with 6x6x12 redwood or cedar block laid
perpendicular to piping, 6” minimum to 12” maximum height above roof. Attach piping to
blocks with Elcen Fig. 43 or equal, hold down pipe clamps with galvanized screws. Install
wearing pads under all wood blocks.
3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 29 - 4

B. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
C. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
D. Do not hang equipment directly from a metal deck.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 29 - 5

SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable to this Section of Work.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE - Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load
condition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Indicate vibration isolator locations, with static and dynamic load on each, on shop
drawings and described on product data.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
1.5 CERTIFICATES
A. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 23 05 00 that isolators are
properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 DESCRIPTION
A. Isolate all motor driven mechanical equipment from the building structure and from the
systems which they serve to prevent equipment vibrations from being transmitted to the
structure. Consider equipment weight distribution to provide uniform isolator deflections.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use materials that will retain their isolation characteristics for the life of the equipment
served. Use industrial grade neoprene for elastomeric materials.
B. All isolators shall be treated to resist corrosion. For isolation devices exposed to the
weather or used in high humidity areas, hot dip galvanize steel parts, apply neoprene
coating on all steel parts, or use stainless steel parts; include limit stops to resist wind.
C. Use isolators with a ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness not less than 1.0 or greater than
2.0.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Mason Industries
2. Krueger Manufacturing
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 48 - 1

3. Peabody
4. Tech Products
B. Type A: Neoprene Pad
1. Neoprene waffle pad, 40 durometer with 16 gauge shims between layers
2. Mason Type W, WM or WMW
C. Type B: Neoprene Pad
1. Double deflection neoprene mount having a minimum static deflection of 0.35
inches. Cover all metal surfaces with neoprene to resist corrosion. Include
friction pads on both top and bottom surfaces so mounts need not be bolted to
the floor, but include bolt holes for those areas where bolting is required. For
equipment such as close coupled pumps, include steel rails for use between the
isolator and the equipment to accommodate equipment overhang.
2. Mason Type ND or DNR
D. Type C: Unhoused Spring with Neoprene
1. Combination freestanding, unhoused spring and neoprene with rib molded
antifriction base. Include leveling bolts for securing to the equipment. Springs to
be laterally stable under load and selected so they have an additional travel to
solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Use height saving brackets when
appropriate to the application.
2. Mason Type SLF
E. Type D: Restrained spring with neoprene
1. Combination spring and neoprene with rib molded base similar to type C, but with
a housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when
weight is removed such that the installed and operating heights are the same.
Maintain a minimum clearance of ½” around restraining bolts, and between the
housing and the spring, so as not to interfere with the spring action. Design
isolator so limit stops are out of contact during normal operation. Use height
saving brackets when appropriate to the application.
2. Mason type SLR
F. Type E: Spring Hanger with neoprene
1. Vibration hanger with steel spring and 0.3” deflection neoprene element in series.
Use neoprene element molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through
the hanger box. Select spring diameters and size hanger box lower holes large
enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before
contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Select springs so they have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
2. Mason type 30N
G. Type F: Precompressed spring hanger with neoprene
1. Vibration hanger similar to type E but precompressed to the rated deflection to
keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. Hanger shall
have release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and
the hanger is subjected to full load.
2. Mason type PC30N
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 48 - 2

H. Type H: Horizontal Thrust Restraint
1. Spring element in series with a neoprene pad
2. Thrust restraints to be used when air thrust exceeds 10% of equipment weight.
3. Mason type WB
2.3 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Mason, Flexonics, or Metraflex
B. Suitable for pressure, temperature and fluid involved.
C. Minimum pressure rating shall be 125 psig at the design temperature of the fluid.
D. Use minimum 12” length or length required to absorb ¾” lateral movement, whichever is
greater.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PERFORMANCE
A. Select vibration devices as indicated below or to provide not less than 95% isolation
efficiency, whichever is greater.
Equipment Type
-----------------------Floor span or Column Spacing ---------------------
On Grade Up to 20 Feet 20 to 30 feet 40+ Feet
Type
Min.
Defl.
In.
Type
Min.
Defl.
In.
Type
Min.
Defl.
In.
Type
Min.
Defl.
In.
Boilers - - - - A 0.10 D 0.75 D 1.50
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide flexible piping connections for all piping to rotating or reciprocating equipment
mounted on vibration isolators. Flexible pipe connections are not required on any type of
gas piping or with inline pumps.
B. Any piping connected to a coil which is in an assembly mounted on vibration isolators is to
have flexible piping connections and piping vibration hangers. Piping connected to a coil
which is in an assembly where the fan is separately isolated by means of vibration
isolators and/or duct flexible connections does not require flexible piping connectors or
piping vibration hangers.
C. Install vibration isolation devices to motor driven equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
D. Do not allow installation practices to short circuit or bind any isolation device.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 48 - 3

SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
Division 01 – General Conditions and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable
to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air and water side of heating, ventilating and air
conditioning systems. Testing , adjusting and balancing of geothermal loop filed pumps
and branch circuits.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Wisconsin Administrative Code – Chapter Comm 64.53
B. AABC – National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning Systems
C. NEBB – Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing or Environmental
Systems
D. ASHRAE Handbook, 1999 HVAC Applications, Chapter 36, Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing
1.4 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide total mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements
include the balance of air and water distribution, adjustment of new and or existing
systems to provide design quantities indicated on drawings, electrical measurement and
verification of performance of all equipment, all in accordance with standards published by
AABC or NEBB and in accordance with Wisconsin Administrative Code – Chapter Comm
64.53.
B. Test, adjust, and balance all air and hydronic systems so that each room, piece of
equipment or terminal device is using quantities indicated on the drawings and in the
specifications.
C. Accomplish testing, adjusting and balancing work in a timely manner with completion of
work in the time stated in the Instruction to Bidders and in accordance with the completion
schedule established for this project.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit (4) sets of testing, adjusting and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature
of the NEBB or AABC Certified Test and Balance Supervisor to Architect’s office. The
reports to be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced in
accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the
systems have been installed and are operating; and are an accurate record of all final
quantities measured to establish normal operating values of the systems.
B. Provide the following information, forms and data:
1. General Information: Inside cover sheet identifying Test and Balance Contractor,
Mechanical Contractor, and Project Name. Include addresses, contact names
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 93 - 1

and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and
signature of the Test and Balance Supervisor.
2. Provide full air system and hydronic system test results.
3. Summary: Provide summary sheet describing mechanical system deficiencies.
Describe objectionable noise or drafts found during testing, adjusting and
balancing. Provide recommendation for correcting unsatisfactory performances
and indicate whether modifications required are within the scope of the contract,
are design related or installation related. List instrumentation used during testing,
adjusting and balancing procedures.
4. Forms: Provide appropriate standard NEBB or AABC forms for each respective
item and system. Fill out forms completely. Where information cannot be
obtained or is not applicable, indicate same.
C. PRODUCTS
1. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements. Application
of instruments and accuracy of instruments and measurements to be in
accordance with the requirements of NEBB or AABC Standards and Instrument
manufacturer’s specifications.
1.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES
A. Test and Balance contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any applicable construction
addendums, construction bulletins, applicable change orders and approved shop
drawings pertaining to this work.
B. Check all filters for cleanliness, dampers and valves for correct positioning, equipment for
proper rotation and belt tension, temperature controls for completion of installation and
hydronic systems for proper charge and purging of air.
C. Do not proceed until systems are fully operational with all components necessary for
complete testing, adjusting and balancing. Installing contractors are required to provide
personnel to check and verify system completion, readiness for balancing and assist
Testing and Balancing Contractor in providing specified system performance.
D. In areas containing ceilings, remove ceiling tile to accomplish testing and balancing work;
replace all tile when work is complete and provide new tile to any tile damaged by this
procedure.
E. Cut insulation, ductwork and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent
necessary for adequate performance of procedures. Patch using materials identical to
those removed, maintaining vapor barrier integrity and pressure rating of systems.
F. Contact the temperature control contractor for assistance in operation and adjustment of
controls. Cycle controls and verify operation and set points. Include in report description
of temperature control operation and deficiencies found.
G. Permanently mark equipment settings, including damper and valve positions, control
settings, and similar devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock all memory
stops.
H. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors and
electric boxes, and restoring temperature controls to normal operating settings.
1.7 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 93 - 2

A. Air System Balancing:
1. Identify each mechanical fan system by tag and location.
2. Identify each terminal device by tag and as to location and fan system
3. In air systems employing filters, blank off sufficient filter area to simulate a
pressure drop that is midway between that of a clean filter and that of a dirty filter.
4. Measure, adjust and record fan speed to design requirements.
5. Measure and record motor full load amperage and calculated BHP.
6. Measure and record static air pressure conditions across fans, coils and filters.
7. Measure, adjust and record all main supply air ducts, return air ducts and zones
to proper design airflows.
8. Measure and record all air temperatures; supply air, return air, mixed air, and
outside air including dry and wet bulb temperatures.
9. Adjust outside air, return air and relief air dampers for design conditions at both
the minimum and maximum settings and record both sets of data.
10. Balance variable air volume systems at full cooling flow rate, minimum flow rate,
and heating flow rate; record all data.
11. Balance all modulating dampers at extreme conditions and record both sets of
data.
12. Adjust grilles, diffusers and registers to achieve proper air distribution patterns
and uniform space temperatures free from objectionable noise and drafts with the
capabilities of the installed system.
13. Provide fan and motor drive sheave adjustments necessary to obtain design
performance. Include in scope of services cost of new sheaves and belts if it
becomes necessary to attain design performance.
14. Adjust fan drives, dampers, terminals and controls to maintain pressure
relationships in areas or rooms designed to maintain positive, negative or neutral
air pressures with respect to adjacent spaces, as indicated by the design air
quantities.
15. The Contractor shall include in the bid the cost of new sheaves and belts if it
becomes necessary to change the drives during balancing of system.
16. Final air system measurements to be within the following range of specified cfm:
a) Fans 0% to +10%
b) Supply grilles, registers, diffusers 0% to +5%
c) Return/exhaust grilles 0% to -5%
d) Room pressurization air -5% to +5%
NOTE: Airside of system must be balanced completely before starting water balance.
B. Water System Balancing:
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 93 - 3

1. Preparation of System:
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
a) Open all valves to full flow position.
b) Remove and clean all strainers.
c) Make sure system water is clean and treated.
d) Check pump rotation.
e) Check expansion tanks.
f) Check air vents and vent system completely.
g) Set all temperature controls to call for full cooling.
h) Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
i) Coordinate with geothermal contractor for locations of branch circuit
balancing valves (in outdoor, below grade vaults). Three branch circuits
for each of the three geothermal loop fields.
2. Test and balance procedure:
a) Identify all pumps, heat pump units, and coils as to tag and location as
well as all geothermal main loop umps and balance valves and all
outdoor underground vault branch circuit balancing valves. Coordinate
exact location and quantity of branch loop circuit balancing valves with
geothermal contractor.
b) Set all pumps to design GPM rates.
c) Provide pump curves with actual operating point indicated.
d) Adjust flow of water through boilers and chillers.
e) Check entering and leaving water temperatures and pressure drop
through boilers and chiller. Reset to correct design temperatures.
f) Measure and record GPM, RPM, BHP of all pumps.
g) Measure and record entering and leaving water and air temperatures of
all coils, entering and leaving air temperatures of all reheat coils with
individual room thermostats on a call for full heating and pressure drops
at all units.
h) All coils with three way valves shall be adjusted so that pressure drop
across bypass valve equals coil pressure drop at full flow.
A. All work performed under this Section shall be under the direction of the supervisor who is
designated and qualified under the certification requirements of NEBB and/or AABC.
B. Coordinate system balancing requirements with Section 23 09 23, 23 09 00 and Division
26.
C. Acceptable Contractors:
1. Balco Balancing, Inc.
2. NEW TAB of GREEN BAY, INC.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 05 93 - 4

SECTION 23 07 00
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Materials
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 00 - Supports and Anchors
B. Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation
B. ANSI/ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
C. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
D. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation application with three years
minimum experience.
B. Materials: UL listed; flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating in accordance
with NFPA 255, max. flamespread rating of 25, max. smoke developed rating of 50.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS – For all types, verify density required to meet minimum R-values as required in 3.3
Schedule – provide alternate density or thickness as required to meet minimum R-value. All duct
insulation must be in strict accordance with applicable state codes.
A. Type A: Flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612; commercial grade; 1.0 lb./cu. ft. density;
'k' value of 0.29 at 75° F mean temperature, 0.002” foil scrim facing.
B. Type B: Rigid glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612, Class 1; 3.0 lb./cu. ft. density; 'k' value of
0.24 at 75° F mean temperature, 0.002” foil scrim facing.
C. Type C: Rigid glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612, Class 1; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75° F and in
addition apply heavy brush coat of Benjamin Foster 30-36 Sealfas. Imbed glass cloth and
while still wet apply brush coat of Benjamin Foster 30-36 Sealfas over glass cloth.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 07 00 - 1

D. Type D: Interior Duct Lining (Low Velocity):
1. Internal duct liner shall not be used on the project..
E. Type E: Rigid Closed Cell Poly-Isocyanurate 2.05 lb./cu. ft. density; ‘k’ value of 0.19 at
75° F mean temperature; 24 lb./sq. in. compressive strength, wrapped with 28 gauge
aluminum jacket. Seal and caulk all seams with a silicone sealant.
F. Adhesives: Waterproof, fire-retardant type.
G. Impala Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gauge, and self-adhesive pad.
H. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.
I. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gauge.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install materials after ductwork has been tested and approved.
B. Clean surfaces for adhesives.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE: Contractor shall verify with manufacturer the proper initial 'Heat-Up' method for
curing of binders in high temperature insulation.
B. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below ambient
temperature.
C. Exterior Insulation (Type A or Type B) Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor
barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. Apply glass fabric jacket between coats
of weather barrier mastic, providing a smooth outside finish.
2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical
fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Seal vapor barrier penetrations
by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop and point insulation
around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing
wrapping.
D. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
3.3 SCHEDULE
DUCTWORK TYPE TYPE THICKNESS FINISH
Exhaust Ductwork within 20 ft. of
exterior opening.
A 2” FSK
Outside Air Ductwork within 20 ft. of A 2” FSK
Dunn County Housing Units 23 07 00 - 2

exterior opening.
Ducts in attic space
A
2” (Min. R-8)
FSK
Mixed Air Ductwork
A
1 ½”
FSK
Equipment Casings
Factory Insulated
Return,Exhaust, OA - Concealed A 1” (Min. R-4) - -
Supply Ductwork - Concealed A 1 ½” - -
Supply Ductwork - Exposed
Not Insulated unless located in non-ambient conditions
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 07 00 - 3

SECTION 23 07 01
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Materials
B. Insulation
C. Jackets
D. Insulation Inserts and Pipe Shields
E. Fittings
F. Flanges and Valves
G. Vapor Barrier
H. Accessories
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 00 – General HVAC Requirements
B. Section 23 05 29 – Supports and Anchors
C. Section 23 05 03 – Pipe and fittings
D. Section 23 05 23 – Valves
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement
B. ANSI/ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation
C. ANSI/ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
D. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement
E. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with three (3) years’
minimum experience.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials or accessories containing asbestos are not acceptable for use on this project.
B. Flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating in accordance with NFPA 255,
max. flame spread rating of 25, max. smoke developed rating of 50.
2.2 INSULATION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 07 01 - 1

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Armstrong, Owens-Corning, Certainteed, Manville or Knauf
B. Materials shall be fire retardant, moisture and mildew resistant, and vermin proof.
Insulation shall be suitable to receive jackets, adhesives and coatings as indicated.
C. Type A: Glass fiber insulation; ANSI/ASTM C547 'k' value of 0.24 at 75° F mean
temperature, noncombustible. Insulation shall have an all service jacket with self-sealing
lap.
D. Type B: Flexible closed-cell elastromeric thermal insulation, black in color, AP Armaflex
25/50 rated as tested by ASTM E 84. Insulation shall have a 'k' factor of 0.27 at 75° F
mean temperature.
E. Type CI: Block and pipe covering insulation
1. Hydrous calcium silicate, ASTM C533, Type I, suitable for temperatures to 1,200
deg. F. Material to be visually coded or marked to indicate it is asbestos free.
Thermal conductivity shall not be more than 0.44 at 300° F., with dry density 12.5
lbs. per cu. ft. minimum.
2. Provide jacket of 6 oz. per sq. yd. fiberglass cloth embedded in two (2) coats of
weatherproof mastic.
F. Type CII:
1. Hydrous calcium silicate, ASTM C533, Type II, suitable for temperatures to 1,800
deg. F. Material to be visually coded or marked to indicate it is asbestos free.
Thermal conductivity shall not be more than 0.44 at 300° F., with dry density 12.5
lbs. per cu. ft. minimum.
2. Provide jacket of 6 oz. per sq. yd. fiberglass cloth embedded in two (2) coats of
weatherproof mastic.
G. Type D: Expansion joint insulation
2.3 JACKETS
1. Ceramic wool, 1” thick, 6 lb. density, thermal conductivity shall not be more than
0.50 at 400° F. mean temperature.
2. The jacket shall be silicone coated fiberglass cloth of 15 oz. per sq. yd. with a 4
harness satin weave and 0.069 Kevlar thread. Fabric shall meet the
requirements of MIL-Y-1140H.
A. Interior Applications:
1. Piping Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing
adhesive joints.
2. Fitting PVC Jackets: One piece, pre-molded type, Zeston pre-molded Hi-Lo
temperature PVC insulation fitting.
B. Exterior Applications
1. Provide .016” thick aluminum or .010 inch thick stainless steel with safety edge
on all piping exposed to the weather.
2.4 INSULATION INSERTS AND PIPE SHIELDS
Dunn County Housing Units 23 07 01 - 2

A. Provide insulation inserts and pipe shields at all hanger and support locations. Inserts
may be omitted on 2” piping or smaller provided 12” long 22 ga. pipe shields are used.
B. Construct inserts with calcium silicate, minimum 140 psi compressive strength. Piping
12” or larger, supplement with high density 600 psi structural calcium silicate inserts.
Provide galvanized steel shields. Insert and shield to be minimum 180 degree coverage
on bottom supported piping and full 360 degree coverage on clamped piping. On roller
mounted piping and piping designed to slide on support, provide additional load
distribution steel plate.
C. Shop fabricated inserts and shields may be used provided contractor submits schedule of
materials, thicknesses, gauges and length for each pipe size to demonstrate equivalency
to pre-engineered/pre-manufactured products described above.
D. Wood blocks will not be accepted.
2.5 FITTINGS
A. All fittings shall be insulated with molded or pre-fabricated type insulation. Insulation for
fittings shall be of same type materials and equal in thickness to the adjacent pipe
insulation. Provide jackets of same type materials as adjacent pipe insulation.
B. Fittings should be carefully fitted and firmly wired in place. Wire must be looped as many
times as necessary to make the installation secure.
C. Insulating cement shall be used to point up the insulation and to fill voids and cracks.
2.6 FLANGES AND VALVES
A. All flanges and valves shall be insulated in all hot water, steam and anti-sweat
applications. Insulation shall be same as specified for fitting insulation. Insulation on
flanges shall extend at least 2” over adjacent pipe insulation. Valve bodies shall be
insulated up to the packing gland. The insulation shall not interfere with the adjustment or
removal or packing glands and shall be sealed to valve body with sealer.
2.7 Vapor Barrier
A. All piping, fittings, flanges and valves in anti-sweat applications must have a vapor barrier
seal. A coat of vapor barrier mastic shall be applied with inforcing cloth tightly stretched
over the insulation and thoroughly embedded in the wet coating. Joints shall overlap a
minimum of 2”. Total dry thickness of both coats of mastic shall not be less then 1/16”
thickness. The finish coat of mastic shall fully cover the membrane fabric so there are no
voids.
B. Any molding of finished insulation within the first year after acceptance will warrant
rejection. Contractor shall bear all costs to replace affected insulation.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied,
and shall be suitable of use at operating temperatures of the systems to which they are
applied.
B. Adhesives, sealants and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation
manufacturer for applications specified.
C. Tack fasteners to be stainless steel ring grooved shank tacks.
D. Staples to be clinch style.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 07 01 - 3

E. Insulating cement to be ANSI/ASTM C449, hydraulic setting mineral wool.
F. Finishing cement to be ASTM C449
G. Fibrous glass or canvas fabric reinforcing shall have a minimum untreated weight of 6
oz./sq. yd.
H. Bedding compounds to be non-shrinking and permanently flexible.
I. Vapor barrier coatings to be non-flammable, fire resistant.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation, jackets and accessories in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions
and under ambient temperatures and conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
Surfaces to be insulated must be clean and dry prior to installation of insulation.
B. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
C. Do not insulate over equipment nameplates.
D. Install insulation continuous through pipe hangers and supports with hangers and
supports on the exterior of insulation. Where riser clamps are required to be attached
directly to piping requiring vapor barrier, extend insulation and vapor barrier
jacketing/coating around riser clamp.
E. Install insulation with butt joints and longitudal seams closed tightly. Provide minimum 2”
lap on jacket seams and 2” tape on butt joints, firmly cemented with lap adhesive.
Additionally secure with staples along seams and butt joints. Coat all staples with vapor
barrier mastic on systems requiring vapor barrier.
F. Do not insulate systems or equipment which are specified to be pressure tested or
inspected, until testing, inspecting and necessary repairs have been successfully
completed.
G. Install insulation with smooth even surfaces. Provide neatly beveled and coated
terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation
terminates.
H. All AP Armaflex insulation butt joints and seams are to be sealed with Armstrong 520
adhesive. Both surfaces to be joined shall be coated with adhesive.
I. On outdoor applications, a weather-resistant protective finish shall be applied.
J. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
K. Jackets:
1. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient
temperature shall have white all-service jackets, with or without vapor barrier,
factory-applied or field-applied. PVC jackets may be used.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 07 01 - 4

2. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated dual-temperature pipes or pipes
conveying fluids below ambient temperature shall have vapor barrier jackets,
factory-applied or field-applied. PVC jackets may be used.
3. Indoor, Exposed Applications: For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms
or in finished spaces, insulate as for concealed applications. Finish with white allservice
jacket; size for finish painting. PVC jackets may be used.
3.3 INSULATION SCHEDULE
Piping Type Pipe Size (inches)
Insulation
Thickness
(inches)
Heating Water Supply and Return A ½” and larger 1 ½”
Heating Water Supply and Return Branch
Piping run in wall cavity
B ½” thru 1 ¼” 1”
Refrigerant Suction B 1” and smaller 1”
1 ¼” and larger 1 ½”
Boiler Feed Water A 1” and larger 1 ½”
Boiler Blow Down CI 1” and larger 1”
Air Separator (Hot Water) A - - 1 ½”
Expansion Joints D - - 1”
1. The following piping and fittings are not to be insulated:
a) Hot water piping inside finned tube radiation, convectors or cabinet unit
heaters
b) Piping unions for systems not requiring a vapor barrier.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 07 01 - 5

SECTION 23 09 00
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Complete system of automatic controls
B. Control devices, components, wiring and material
C. Instructions for Owners
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 20 00 - HVAC Pumps
B. Section 23 52 23 - Boilers
C. Section 23 82 00 - Terminal Heat Transfer Units
D. Section 23 34 13 - Power Ventilators
E. Section 23 33 00 - Ductwork Accessories
F. Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Provide complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed
operational description of sequences, and description and engineering data on each
control system component. Include sizing as requested.
C. At completion of work, submit report of checkout of automatic control system.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Delta Controls
B. Siemens Controls
C. Trane Controls
2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Temperature Controls Contractor shall be a sub-contractor to the HVAC Contractor.
HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all temperature controls and equipment
operating sequences and shall include all costs for same in his bid. The base bid system
shall include a portion of electric controls with stand alone thermostats as indicated on the
drawings and as described in the sequence of operation. The remainder of the system
shall be a local DDC controls system without provisions for network interfaces or external
communication of any kind. The DDC portion of the system to be provided with local
controls panels in each building mechanical room complete with required controllers and
a graphical user interface (GUI) for purpose of setting, revising and monitoring of
setpoints and status.
B. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, operators, indicating
devices, interface equipment, and other apparatus required to operate mechanical system
and to perform functions specified.
C. Provide materials and fieldwork necessary to connect control components factory
supplied as part of equipment controlled, unless specified otherwise. Generally, self-
Dunn County Housing Units 23 09 00 - 1

contained valves, filter gauges, and similar instruments, are not to be installed under this
Section.
D. Unless specified otherwise, provide fully proportional components.
E. All work shall be installed by mechanics directly employed by this manufacturer who shall
be responsible for the proper installation and operation of the control equipment.
2.3 WIRING
A. All low voltage wire shall be plenum rated thermostat wire clipped neatly in place and run
concealed. All line voltage wiring to be run concealed in thin wall conduit. Line voltage
and low voltage in conduit wiring must comply with the electrical specifications. The
Control Contractor shall install all electric wiring required for the control system.
B. Division 16 shall make only a single power connection at each control panel. All required
control devices and all interlocks between units shall be provided by the Control
Contractor. A complete list of requirements must be obtained from the unit manufacturer.
2.4 VALVES
A. All control valves shall be constructed with cast-brass bodies and stainless steel stems.
All valves 2-1/2" and over are to be the flange type, valves 2" and smaller can be either
screwed or union connections as required. All valves for this control system shall be
suitable for the medium being controlled.
B. Where valves are operated in sequence with other valves or dampers, they are to be
equipped with pilot positioners with adjustable ranges for both throttling range and starting
point. All control valves shall be furnished by the automatic temperature control
subcontractor but shall be installed by the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Contractor.
C. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to
exceed 3 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs.
2.5 GAUGES
A. Provide and install air pressure gauges where required, to indicate at all times the position
of the equipment to be controlled. The gauges shall be furnished in each line connection
for all duct and insertion thermostats. The gauge faces shall be marked with the range of
the units being controlled.
2.6 THERMOSTATS AND CONTROLLERS
A. Capillary temperature transmitters shall be one-pipe instruments with external restrictions
incorporating pneumatic feedback and a proportional relationship between the measured
temperature and transmitted signal.
B. Liquid filled capillaries shall be supplied with bulb type elements for measuring liquids and
averaging type elements for measuring airflow. Airflow averaging type elements shall be
long enough to be strung across the entire air stream in order to obtain an average air
flow temperature.
C. Pressure transmitters shall be one pipe instrument with external restrictions incorporating
pneumatic feedback and a proportional relationship between the measured pressure and
transmitted signal.
D. All room thermostats shall be of the two-pipe, non-bleed or "relay" type design. They shall
be fully proportional with adjustable throttling range and tamper-proof locking settings.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 09 00 - 2

Thermostats shall be single or dual temperature, direct acting or reverse acting as
detailed in the sequence of operations. Thermostats shall have Fahrenheit scale and set
point indication.
1. For checkout and observation purposes either quick-connect test plug for
checking branch pressure (accessible by removal of the thermostat cover) or
permanently mounted pressure gauges at each control device supplied by the
thermostat branch signal.
2. Covers shall be metal or high impact plastic satisfactory for institutional use.
3. Provide opaque plastic sun shields where thermostats are mounted directly in
sunrays.
4. Furnish the required number of thermostats and locate as directed by Architect.
Relocate any thermostat, without cost to the Owner, if conflict with other
equipment or room finish occurs.
E. Pressure and temperature indicators in 2-1/2" and 3-1/2" sizes shall provide continuous
visual indication of the pressure or temperature of its associated transmitter. The
indicator shall have a re-calibration screw on the face of the dial and the range shall be
sized to incorporate only the span of the temperature being measured. Ranges shall be
as necessary for required services.
F. Local Control Panels:
1. To be totally enclosed, made of extruded aluminum alloy with fluted surfaces. All
corners shall be securely riveted and supported on an internal angle bracket. The
cabinet face panel and the inside sub- panel shall be removable from the cabinet
for each in mounting of equipment. The face panel and sub-panel shall be made
of aluminum bounded on both sides with a marine plywood core. A piano type
hinge shall run the entire length of the cabinet to support the door.
2. Provide a key locking latch on the door for security purposes.
3. Each panel shall have all instruments and indicators clearly identified by means of
removable bakelite engraved name plates.
4. Where electrical equipment shall be mounted in the control panel, it shall be UL
approved.
5. All controls inside of panels are to be tagged with plastic tape to match control
drawings identification numbers.
2.7 SEQUENCE OF CONTROL
A. General: Facility is mostly a 24 hour facility – outside air and supply fan operations to be
continuous, except where indicated for spaces that are business type use and infrequent
nursing facility use – such spaces shall have motorized dampers in outside air and
exhaust duct branches that will close when spaces are allowed to be unoccupied. VFD
controls of energy recovery ventilator exhaust and outside air fans shall modulate
respective fans speeds accordingly.
B. Equipment controls shall be as scheduled with setpoints and temperatures being
adjustable for tuning and as described below in the sequences of operation:
1. Water Source Water-to-Air heat pumps:
Dunn County Housing Units 23 09 00 - 3

2. Electric Cabinet Heaters:
3. Electric Wall Heaters:
4. Electric Radiant Ceiling Panels:
5. Electric Wall Heaters:
6. Residential Range Hoods:
7. Energy Recovery Ventilators:
8. Electric Steam Humidifiers:
9. Boiler pumps:
10. Boilers:
11. Water Source Water-to-Water Heat Pumps:
12. Residential Neighborhood Low Temperature Circulating Pumps:
Dunn County Housing Units 23 09 00 - 4

13. Core Building Low Temperature Loop Circulating Pumps:
14. Dual Arm Main Loop Pumps:
15. Dual Arm Geothermal Loop Field Pumps:
16. MAU-1:
17. Kitchen equipment (Roof exhaust fans, hoods and MAU-1):
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Check and verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation. Locate thermostats 48” above floor or in accordance
with ADA height requirements.
B. At completion of the control system installation, the Temperature Control Contractor shall
provide a minimum of two (2) 4-hour instruction periods for operating personnel. The
Control Contractor shall provide an audio video taped presentation of the HVAC system’s
start-up, operation and maintenance procedure training with Owner’s maintenance
personnel.
C. The Temperature Control Contractor shall provide the services of a Temperature Control
Technician to be on the job site and work with the Air Balancing Contractor to start and
set-up the building HVAC system. This service shall include, but not be limited to,
adjusting air quantities and control of air handling units, VFD speeds and sensor
setpoints, fan interlocks, damper positions, boiler sequencing, pump and fan operation.
After the HVAC system has been commissioned, the Temperature Control Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer, an itemized list of all HVAC equipment and devices that
have been adjusted in accordance with the Temperature Control Specification. This
HVAC Building Commissioning Certification shall state that the HVAC system has been
installed and is in compliance with the intent of the design parameters of the HVAC
Specification.
D. Provide for complete service of controls system, including callbacks, for one (1) year
running concurrent with connection period.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 09 00 - 5

SECTION 23 20 00
HVAC PUMPS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
Division 01 – General Conditions and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable
to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Base-mounted Centrifugal Pumps
B. In-line Centrifugal Pumps
C. Condensate Pumps
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 03 - Piping and Fittings
B. Section 23 05 13 - Motors
C. Section 23 05 15 - Piping Specialties
D. Section 23 05 23 - Valves
E. Section 23 05 29 - Supports and Anchors
F. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration Isolation
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of
pumps with minimum five years experience.
B. Alignment: Base mounted pumps shall be aligned by qualified millwright and alignment
certified.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system
operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions and replacement
parts list.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Dunn County Housing Units 23 20 00 - 1

A. Pump sizes, capacities, pressures and operating characteristics shall be as scheduled.
Pumps shall be suitable for operating temperatures of the system.
B. Provide all pumps with motors, impellers, drive assemblies, bearings, coupling guard, and
other accessories as specified. All rotating parts are to be statically and dynamically
balanced. Provide flanged connections an all pumps unless specified otherwise. Service
of base mounted pumps shall not require breaking piping connections or removal of
motor.
C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25%
of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
D. Provide pump with a motor sized for non-overloading over the entire pump curve. Motor
rpm shall be as scheduled.
E. Furnish all pumps and pump motors with a nameplate, including the manufacturer’s
name, serial number of pump, capacity in GPM, head in feet at design condition,
horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed and full load current.
F. Test all pumps to operate without excessive noise or vibration
G. After completion of balancing, provide replacement of impellers, or trim impellers to
provide specified flow at actual pumping head, as installed.
H. Provide on spare seal and casing gasket for each pump to the owner.
I. Test all pumps, clean and paint before shipment. Manufacturer shall certify all pump
ratings.
2.2 BASE MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, end suction, split casing, 174 psig working pressure
at operating temperature of 225° F. continuous, 250° F. intermittent.
B. Casings: Cast iron with suction and discharge gauge ports, renewable bronze wear rings,
vent and drain plugs, flanged suction and discharge connections.
C. Impeller: Bronze, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed and locked to pump
shaft, and protected by replaceable bronze shaft sleeve.
D. Bearings: Oil or grease lubricated ball or roller bearings.
E. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze or stainless steel shaft sleeve.
F. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, 225° F. maximum continuous
operating temperature.
G. Drive: Flexible spacer type coupling or coupling with extended hub to allow for pump
service. Provide guard for shaft/coupling assembly.
H. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim.
I. Manufacturers: Bell and Gossett Series 1510 or Taco Series FE
2.3 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Dunn County Housing Units 23 20 00 - 2

A. Type: Single stage, direct connected, resiliently mounted motor for in-line mounting, oil
lubricated, 175 psig max working pressure at operating temperature of 225° F continuous,
250° F. intermittent.
B. Casing: Cast iron, flanged suction and discharge connection with taps for vent, drain and
suction and discharge gauges.
C. Impeller: Brass or bronze, keyed to the shaft, single suction enclosed type, hydraulically
and dynamically balanced.
D. Bearings: Two, oil lubricated bronze sleeves or ball bearings capable of being greased.
E. Shaft: Stainless steel or carbon steel with stainless steel or bronze sleeve, integral thrust
collar.
F. Seal: Mechanical type, carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, 225° F
maximum continuous operating temperature.
G. Drive: Flexible coupling.
H. Manufacturers: Bell and Gossett Series 80 or Taco series VI
2.4 CONDENSATE PUMPS
A. Units shall be [simplex], [duplex], [base], [basin] mounted as scheduled.
B. Base mounted pumps shall be centrifugal type, bronze fitted with cast iron casing,
stainless or carbon steel shaft, mechanical seals, close-coupled with the pump motor.
C. Vertical basin mounted pumps shall have cast iron casing, oilless sleeve bearings below
floor level, bronze impeller, stainless steel shaft and bronze wearing rings. Provide vapor
tight seals where shaft and float rod pass through receiver coverplate.
D. Receivers for floor-mounted units shall be cast iron of 3/16” galvanized steel, with taps or
openings for pump suction, condensate inlet, vent drain, float assembly, thermometer,
and gauge glass.
E. Receivers for vertical basin mounted pumps shall be constructed of cast iron. Provide
receiver cover with taps or openings for condensate inlet, discharge, vent, overflow, and
float assembly. Steel cover plate on duplex units shall permit removal of one pump
assembly while maintaining operation of the second pump.
F. Provide simplex units with UL listed NEMA 1 control panel with combination magnetic
starter, fusible disconnect and overload protection. Control panels shall be internally
wired at the factory and shipped separate from receiver/pump units. Furnish complete
wiring diagrams with units.
G. Provide duplex units with UL listed NEMA 1 control panel with combination magnetic
starters, fusible disconnect switches, fusible disconnects, and float operated mechanical
alternator. Control panels shall be internally wired at factory and shipped separate from
receiver/pump units. Furnish complete wiring diagrams with units.
H. On duplex units, float operated mechanical alternator and level control shall start second
pump if one pump cannot handle the load.
I. Both pumps shall be automatically operated if one pump cannot handle the load.
J. Where duplex pumps are indicated, capacity scheduled is with one pump operating.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 20 00 - 3

K. Provide three phase overload protection for three phase motors. Single phase motors to
have built in overload protection.
L. Manufacturers: Aurora, Peerless, Sterling or Hoffman
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Access/service space
around pumps shall not be less than minimum space recommended by pump
manufacturer.
B. Provide pressure gauge piped and valved for measuring both suction and discharge
pressure of differential pressure, complete with shutoff ball valves.
C. Decrease from line size with suction diffusers (where specified), long radius reducing
elbows or concentric reducers in vertical piping, and eccentric reducers for horizontal
piping. Install eccentric reducers with top of the pipe level.
D. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings.
E. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction.
F. Lubricate pumps before start-up.
G. Basemounted Pumps:
1. Set base mounted pumps on concrete bases or concrete inertia base when
specified, level and bolt down prior to grouting. Fill entire base with non-shrinking
grout when required by manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2. Align all flexible coupled base-mounted pumps in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
3. Provide supports for elbows on pump suction and discharge piping 4” and larger.
4. Provide air vent and drain valve on horizontal pump casings.
5. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to floor drain.
H. Condensate Pumps
1. Mount base-mounted pump/receiver units on concrete equipment pad.
2. Mount control panel to wall or unistrut to maintain code required clearance.
Division 16 shall wire panel to pump motor and combination float switch and
alternator.
3. Provide balance valves and pressure gauges on discharge piping from pumps.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 20 00 - 4

23 21 14 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements, Division
01 – General Conditions and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable to this Section
of Work.
B. This section includes the requirements for installing the ground loop heat exchanger system
including all excavation, trenching, drilling, casing, pumping, backfilling, testing, purging and all
other work to be performed by the Geothermal Contractor to provide a fully functioning system.
The Geothermal Contractor is also responsible for routing the exterior piping mains into the
mechanical room to enable connection by the Mechanical Contractor to the interior piping system.
C. The ground heat exchanger consists of polyethylene heat fusion-joined piping formed into vertical
loops. The loops are connected using prefabricated headers and prefabricated U-bend
assemblies.
D. There are three geothermal fields, one for each building. The geothermal field for Building 1, the
center building, will have 3 circuits of 15 vertical loops (total of 45 vertical loops). The geothermal
field for Building 2, the west building, will have 3 circuits of 11 vertical loops (total of 33 vertical
loops). The geothermal field for Building 3, the east building, will have 3 circuits of 11 vertical
loops (total of 33 vertical loops).
E. All circuits are routed to the header pit vault as indicated on the drawings. Supply and return
mains are routed from the vault to the building as indicated on the drawings.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Earthwork Specifications
B. Mechanical Specifications
1.03 REFERENCES
A. IGSHPA 1997 Closed Loop / Geothermal Heat Pump Systems Design and Installation Standards
B. IGSHPA 1991 Grouting Procedures for Geothermal Heat Pump Systems
C. ASHRAE 1995 Commercial / Institutional Ground Source Heat Pump Engineering Manual
D. National Ground Water Association’s Guidelines for the Construction of Vertical Boreholes for
Closed Loop Heat Pump Systems
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit all shop drawings, product data and all other documentation required in accordance with
this specification section and as required by the General Conditions sections of these
specification documents.
B. The Contractor shall not fabricate materials or order equipment until corresponding submittals
have been approved.
C. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Before geothermal heat exchanger construction begins, the
Contractor must submit shop drawings to the Design Engineer. No substitutions will be allowed
without authorization from the Design Engineer.
1. The shop drawings shall include all applicable installer qualifications, installer certifications,
labor warranties, part warranties, approved copy of Wisconsin’s Department of Natural
Resources (WI DNR) closed loop well application, manufacturer’s materials specifications,
material safety data sheets for all pipes, pipe fittings, U-bend assemblies, header pit vault,
grout, valves, thermometers, gauges, PT ports, warning tape, locating wire, locating wire
access box, survey markers, heat transfer fluid, sand/bedding material, and testing and
flushing procedures.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 1

2. Provide evidence of WI DNR approval certification for the heat transfer fluid to be used in the
system.
3. The Geothermal Contractor shall also submit documentation showing that appropriate local
unit of government has been contacted. The Geothermal Contractor and the local unit of
government shall identify the locations of any municipal well systems in the area and
determine if the borefield is within a wellhead protection plan area.
4. Geothermal Contractor to also notify Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) of geothermal
installation and obtain all necessary FAA permits for the installation of the geothermal field
prior to installation. Geothermal Contractor to meet all FAA requirements during installation.
Proof of coordination with FAA to be provided with the shop drawing submittals.
D. Qualification Data:
1. The Geothermal Contractor shall provide the names and addresses of 3 similar projects that
each person working on the project has experience within the last 5 years.
2. The Geothermal Contractor shall use only certified well contractors registered in the state of
Wisconsin and in accordance with Wisconsin DNR regulations.
3. Submit a copy of the Geothermal Contractor personnel’s certification for polyethylene pipe
fusion techniques from IGSHPA or similar approved authority.
E. Warranty:
1. The Geothermal contractor shall provide a 100% parts and labor warranty for the functional
integrity of the outside piping system for a period of 5 years. Provide a copy of all warranties
related to the geothermal system as required per the specifications.
2. Provide a 50 year extended warranty on piping materials, including fittings, both inside and
outside the header pit vault.
F. Submit the test results of grout mixture samples for the geothermal borefield per the specification
sections below. Report shall indicate date sample was taken, date lab received sample, date of
test, and certification of results.
G. Submit test records for the geothermal piping system prepared during pressure/leak testing,
indicating date of test, identification of piping system tested, test media, test pressure, and
certification of results.
H. Submit the test results of sand bedding material used to backfill trenches. Report shall indicate
date sample was taken, date lab received sample, date of test, and certification of results.
1.05 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. A clean, full size contract site plan shall be used by the geothermal contractor to indicate field
changes. All field changes are to be incorporated on the red-lined drawings (pipe routing, bore
locations, dimensions, sizes, header pit vault location, notes, etc.). All changes must be shown
clearly.
B. The scaled site plan shall show the location and sizes of all the horizontal and vertical piping
measured from a permanent fixture such as the corner of a building or fire hydrant. Include GPS
coordinates of each corner of the bore field. Also include GPS coordinates for each vertical
borehole. For each vertical bore identified on the drawings, include information on depth, size,
and bore reference number. Bore locations shall be individually surveyed after drilling is
complete, but prior to horizontal trenching.
C. Provide GPS coordinates of each corner of the bore field.
D. The geothermal contractor shall submit the completed red-lined drawings to the design engineer
for review. Hard copy originals must be provided by the contractor. Electronic versions (.dwg,
.pdf) may be accepted in addition to the hard copy originals.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 2

E. If the submitted red-lined drawings are found to be incomplete or inaccurate by the design
engineer, the drawings shall be returned to the geothermal contractor for corrections and
resubmittal.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Geothermal Contractor shall have a minimum of 5 years experience of installing vertical ground
heat exchangers for ground-coupled heat pumps.
B. The supervisor overseeing the geothermal work shall have been regularly employed by a
company performing geothermal work for a minimum of 5 years.
C. The supervisor overseeing the geothermal work and any other person(s) performing the thermal
fusion shall be certified by a recognized certification agency and shall have field experience in
forming thermally fused joints. These persons must also have completed a polyethylene heat
fusion class in which each participant had performed a heat fusion procedure under the direct
supervision of an IGSHPA accredited heat fusion technician or as part of an IGSHPA approved
manufacturing certification program. Certified technicians must attend a re-training school
annually.
D. The ground loop heat exchange system shall be installed in accordance with the rules and
regulations for all federal, state, and local regulatory authorities. The Geothermal Contractor will
be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits to perform the work, including but not limited
to, any drilling permits required by the WI DNR.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. A Pre-Drilling Geothermal Construction Meeting to occur on site before any work commences.
The required attendees of the Pre-Drilling Meeting include the Geothermal Design Engineer, the
Geothermal Contractor, and the General Contractor. Additional attendees may attend but are not
required, including; a WI DNR representative, the Local Municipal Engineer, the Owner’s
Representative, the Site/Civil Engineer, the Site/Civil Contractor, the Mechanical Contractor,
and/or the Architect.
B. Provide written notification of proposed date and time of all tests as required in this specification
to the Architect/Engineer at least 2 days before starting these tests.
C. All cleaning and testing work must be performed in the presence of the Architect/Engineer or
agreed site representative.
D. Remove all gauges, controls, caps, and accessories that are not designed to withstand test
pressures during testing. Replace after all testing is complete.
1.08 WATER, SILT AND SOIL CONTAINMENT AND REMOVAL
A. The Geothermal Contractor shall be responsible for containing and removing all run-offs created
by the vertical bore drilling and piping installation.
B. The Geothermal Contractor shall meet all required city, county, and state erosion control
requirements. The Geothermal Contractor shall obtain a site erosion control plan and shall make
all his personnel working on the project aware of the details of the plan. All elements of the plan
shall be strictly adhered to unless written permission for exceptions is provided by the site Civil
Engineer.
C. Prior to starting all work, the Geothermal Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary
construction fence around the area of the bore field.
1.09 DISPOSAL OF EXISTING MATERIALS
A. All excess excavated material shall be removed from the site, including but not limited to, drilling
spoils, asphalt and other surface materials.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 3

1.10 EXISTING FORMATION RESULTS
A. A formation and thermal conductivity test was performed on January 16-18, 2012 by GO Loop of
Randolph, WI at a GPS location of N 44° 53' 18.7" (latitude), W 91° 53' 26.6" (longitude). The drill
results are as follows:
1. Formation:
a. 0’–38’ – Sand/Gravel
b. 38’–58’ – Yellow Caving Sandstone
c. 58’–75’ – Blue Shale
d. 75’–240’ – Hard Firm Yellow Sandstone
e. 240’–285’ – Hard Firm White Sandstone
f. 285’–300’ – Hard Firm Green Sandstone
2. Drilling Notes: Air rotary drilling used during test bore installation. Mud rotary drilling may be
used at the discretion of the driller.
3. Fracture Notes: No major fractions noted during drilling.
4. Temporary Casing Notes: Temporary casing was installed to 40’ below grade.
5. Grouting Notes: Typical amount of grouting used during installation. A little settling due to air
rotary, would not expect any loss if mud rotary was used.
6. Estimated Minimum Formation Thermal Conductivity = 1.61 Btu/hr-ft-°F
7. Estimated Minimum Formation Thermal Diffusivity = 1.02 ft²/day
8. Estimated Minimum Undisturbed Soil Temperature = 49.5°F
B. The Geothermal Contractor is to review Wisconsin DNR well logs recorded in the immediate area
of the bore-field to get a firm understanding of drilling conditions. No allowances will be made for
additional cost requests due to ground conditions that have not been identified in the formation
test or on Wisconsin DNR well logs. Test bore information is to be used as a guide only.
C. The Geothermal Contractor shall contact the appropriate local unit of government and request
locations of any municipal well systems in the area, and determine if the borefield is within a
wellhead protection plan area.
D. The Geothermal Contractor shall, if practical, integrate the test bore(s) into the geothermal field.
If the bore(s) are used, a credit shall be provided to the Owner based on the cost to install [[xx]]
bore(s). The base bid shall not include the re-use of these bores
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ground Loop Heat Exchanger Piping and Fittings:
1. Pipe and pipe fittings shall be as manufactured by Centennial Plastics LLC, Vanguard
Plastics Co., Charter Plastics, Inc., CPCHEM Performance Pipe or McElroy Manufacturing
Co.
2. Pipe to comply with IGSHPA Standard I.C.3 for polyethylene with a minimum cell
classification of PE345434C per ASTM D3350. Pipe shall be marked with the manufacturer’s
name and product name, nominal size, ASTM dimensional standard, PPI material
classification, cell classification, sequential footage and manufacturer’s data code. Print line
shall repeat every two feet.
3. A 50-year warranty must be provided by the pipe manufacturer.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 4

4. Fittings shall be compatible with the pipe material or from the same material as the pipes.
Each fitting shall be identified with the manufacturer’s name, nominal size, pressure rating,
relevant ASTM standard and date of manufacturer.
5. Joints shall be thermally fused or mechanically joined per IGSHPA standards. No joints in
vertical tubing other than factory installed U-bend with anti-buoyancy port.
6. The piping and fittings shall be packaged, handled and stored in accordance with the
approved manufacturer’s general guidance and recommendations.
2.02 MODULAR WALL SEALS FOR PIPING
A. Mechanical seals similar to Link Seal by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. or approved equal.
2.03 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Pre-manufactured wall sleeves similar to Century by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. or approved
equal.
2.04 THERMAL GROUT
A. High-solids, thermally enhanced bentonite grout similar to Thermal Grout Lite manufactured by
Black Hill Bentonite LLC or approved equal.
B. The thermal grout shall have the following properties:
1. Thermal Conductivity of at least 1.0 Btu/hr.ft F
2. Permeability less than 6.9 x 10E-8 cm/sec
3. Percentage of Solids at 65%
4. Grout Weight of 13.3 lb/gal
5. Linear Shrinkage Potential of 40-11%
6. Unit Yield of 17-34.7 gal/unit
C. Grouting materials shall be pre-manufactured and packaged prior to delivery to the job site.
D. Engineer will obtain grout samples for testing to confirm conductivity. See the related grouting
section below.
2.05 VALVES AND FITTINGS AT POINT OF ENTRY TO BUILDING
A. Isolating valves at point of entry to building to be butterfly valves constructed of lug type/level with
cast or ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc, EPDM seat, 416 stainless steel stem, rated at
200 psi.
B. Globe style balancing valves to be provided on return circuits. Valves to have cast or ductile iron
body, aluminum bronze disc, EPDM seat, 416 stainless steel stem, rated 200 psi.
C. Purge valves at point of entry to building to be butterfly valves constructed of lug type/level with
cast or ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc, EPDM seat, 416 stainless steel stem, rated at
200 psi.
D. All pipe and pipe fittings coming to the building shall be high-density polyethylene (HDPE) and
shall comply with the requirements of this specification section.
E. Flange locating holes or tapered holes shall be as per ANSI 125/150.
F. Wrench / lever operated valves shall be available in sizes ½” through 10”.
G. Valves shall have a position indicator.
H. Valves shall be suitable for use at temperatures of 0 F to 140º F, and shall be suitable for
pressures and vacuums compatible with the piping.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 5

2.06 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT
A. Pressure/temperature ports shall be brass and have a dual seal core of Nordel, rated to 350°F for
water and shall be capable of zero leakage from vacuum to 1,000 psig. Plug shall be capable of
receiving a 1/8” pressure or temperature probe.
2.07 THERMOMETERS
A. Furnish industrial type thermometers with separable sockets and provide extension necks on
thermometrs and sockets for piping with 2” or thicker insulation.
B. Pipeline mounted thermometers – 9” scale cast aluminum case and frame, clear acrylic plastic
window front, permanently stabilized glass tube with non-mercury oil-based indicating fluid, black
etched figures and graduations, adjustable angle stem, and compatible with brass construction
sockets.
C. Range of thermometer shall be at least 0°F to 100°F with 1°F increment.
2.08 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Furnish gauges with a minimum face diameter of 4-1/2”, with cast aluminum case with black finish
and black finish case ring, glass or acrylic plastic window, white background and black figures on
dial face, bronze bushing movement, and ¼”NPT forged brass socket.
B. Range of pressure gauge shall be at least 0 psig to 100 psig with 1 psig increment.
2.09 HEADER PIT VAULT
A. The HDPE structure shall be a HDPE profile wall cylinder with a nominal ID of at least 72” as
manufactured by ISCO Industries, Forrer Supply, or approved equal.
B. HDPE Material – The internal HDPE piping material supplied under this specification shall be high
density, high molecular weight as supplied by ISCO Industries, Forrer Supply, or approved equal.
The HDPE material shall conform to ASTM D 3350-07 with minimum cell classification values of
345464C.
C. The end-cap thickness shall be no less than 1-1/2” and of the same material as the structural
cylinder. The inlets and outlets shall be extrusion welded on the outside of the structure using
good welding practice. All external connections to structure shall be butt fusion welded or
electrofusion welded. Flanged connections will not be allowed.
D. Structures shall be factory tested with a 1 psi Air Test for no less than 30 minutes, with no leaks.
The Piping system shall be hydrostatically tested to 90 psi with water for no less than 30 minutes,
with no leaks (no more than 4 psi reduction in pressure). Data showing the structure to be leakfree
to be provided to the Engineer as part of the submittals. The owner or Engineer may request
to observe the test.
E. The interior walls of the vault shall be painted yellow.
F. Entry Way
1. Man-way
a. The man-way shall be constructed of the same material as specified for the cylinder wall.
b. The man-way shall be attached by means of extrusion welding to outside wall of the
structure.
c. The minimum ID of the man-way cylinder shall be no less than 28”.
G. Ladder
1. The entry ladder shall conform to current OSHA guidelines.
2. Ladders constructed from HDPE Pipe shall not be allowed.
3. The first rung of the entry ladder shall be no less than 2” from bottom of man-way.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 6

H. Top of the man-way shall be built to the requirements of the drawings. Flanged tops or man ways
are required. A reinforced concrete pad around the HDPE man-way will be required when HDPE
structures are used in traffic areas. A traffic rated frame and cover will be required along with 12”
minimum cover above the top of the HDPE structure. A professional engineer shall approve the
design of the concrete pad, and all calculations shall be included in the submittal. Zinc plated
carbon steel nuts to be spot welded to a cylindrical metal plate. Metal plate to be fastened to the
underside of the flanged manway entrance.
I. Anti-buoyancy calculations are to be provided as part of the submittal package, specifying the
amount of concrete needed, if applicable, at the ends of the structure to anchor the HDPE Vault.
J. Valves
1. Provide isolation shut-off valves on supply lines of all circuits and provide balancing valves on
the return lines of all circuits. Provide all other valves as noted on the drawings.
2. All valves suitable for buried service applications.
3. Body shall be Cast Iron, Wafer or Lug Style.
4. Disc shall be aluminum bronze with 416 stainless steel stem.
5. Flange locating holes or tapered holes shall be as per ANSI 125/150.
6. Elastomeric sealing members of valves shall be made of EPDM or Buna-N material selected
for use in water service.
7. Wrench / lever operated valves shall be available in sizes ½” through 10”. Gear operated
valves shall be available in sizes 10” and above.
8. Valves shall have a position indicator.
9. Valves shall be suitable for use at temperatures of 0 F to 140º F, and shall be suitable for
pressures and vacuums compatible with the piping.
10. Purge Valves shall be quarter-turn type ball valves. The valves shall provide positive stops at
the full-open and full closed positions.
K. Pressure Temperature (P/T) Test Ports
1. Test ports shall be suitable for use in geothermal applications. Test ports shall be located per
project drawing. At a minimum, (1) Test port shall be located on the Return main piping, and
(1) Test port on each of the Circuit piping with flow coming from the bore field.
2. Test ports shall be capable of receiving a thermometer probe with a minimum diameter of
1/16” and a maximum diameter of 1/8”.
3. The test ports shall be capable of allowing the injection/extraction of liquids through an
inducement probe not to exceed 1/8” in diameter.
4. The test ports outer body shall be of all brass construction including a 9/16” knurled cap with
a plastic retainer.
5. Test ports shall have a dual seal core design of Nordel allowing sealing of the system before
complete removal of any probe, good up to 350º F for water.
6. Core membrane shall be of a design that maintains proper alignment for increase ease when
inserting probes.
7. Test ports shall be rated zero leakage from full vacuum to 1000 PSIG.
L. All geothermal piping interior to the vault shall be factory insulated with 1” Rubatex R-180-FS
insulation or approved equal.
M. Provide labeling with directional arrows on header pipes and individual loops on outside of
insulation as required in the mechanical specifications. Provide labeling of circuits with circuit
number.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 7

N. Valves shall be accompanied with a valve identification tag as required in the mechanical
specifications.
2.10 WARNING TAPE
A. Provide warning tape above all underground piping.
B. Warning tape shall be of the type specifically manufactured for marking and locating underground
utilities. The tape shall be directly installed 36” above the pipe as shown in the drawings or at a
depth that allows for detection by an appropriate metal detector as recommended by the tape
manufacturer. The tape shall be acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film, 6 inches wide with
minimum thickness of 5.0 mils and shall have a minimum strength of 4200 psi lengthwise with an
elongation factor of 80 percent. Tape shall be brightly colored and shall bear a continuous
printed inscription describing the geothermal piping buried below. Tape shall have a solid metal
core to enable detection. The metallic core shall be encased in a protective jacket or provided
with other means to protect it from corrosion.
2.11 LOCATING WIRE
A. In addition to the warning tape, provide either a #10 braided locating wire or soft annealed copper
conductor suitable for operations at 600 volts as specified in the National Electric Code,
manufactured for the purpose of locating buried water pipes.
B. Insulation material shall be heat and moisture resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC), over which
abrasion, moisture, gasoline, and oil resistant nylon (polyamide) or UL-Listed equal jacket is
applied. Insulation print shall be factory applied to the insulation surface to repeat at a minimum
interval of every foot.
C. All locating wire to be terminated in a location so as to be easily accessible by locating contractor.
Wire terminations shall be located where exterior geothermal piping enters building. Additional
wire terminations exterior to the building may be required per the manufacturer. Locating wire
access points shall in general be no more than five-hundred (500) feet.
D. Locations of wire access points are to be reviewed by Engineer or Engineer’s site representative.
Each locating wire access point to be installed with an approved locating wire access box above
grade. Access box to have lockable capability.
E. The locating wire shall be installed above all horizontal piping in the circuit trenches around the
edge of the bore field. The locating wire shall also be installed above the main geothermal supply
and return pipes from the building to the geothermal vault.
F. The locating wire shall further be installed 12” below final grade around the perimeter of the bore
field so that all vertical bores and horizontal piping is enclosed within the locating wire.
2.12 SURVEY MARKERS
A. Permanent, corrosion-resistant, flat disc type survey markers shall be provided at the corners of
the bore field. The survey markers shall be capable of being installed in flexible pavement,
bituminous treated surfaces, and/or turf areas within the right-of-way for preserving permanent
survey markers.
B. The survey cap shall have a diameter of at least 2” and may be compromised of aluminum, brass,
or plastic specifically designed for surveying applications.
C. The face of the survey cap shall be identified in a manner that describes the geothermal borefield
buried below.
D. All survey marekers shall be placed ¼” below the final surface.
2.13 HEAT TRANSFER SYSTEM FLUID
A. The inhibitor-based heat transfer fluid must be the same as specified in the mechanical
specification.
B. The heat transfer fluid shall be a dyed translucent mixture.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 8

C. The propylene glycol based fluid must be mixed to a concentration of 25% by volume and only
de-ionized water may be used for dilution of the fluid.
D. The fluid must be approved by the WI DNR for the application of ground-coupled closed-loop
geothermal heat exchange systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All excavation, trenching, drilling, casing, pumping, backfilling, testing, purging and all other work
specified shall be performed by the Geothermal Contractor.
B. The vertical boreholes shall be drilled at a minimum spacing according to construction drawings
(15 feet in one direction, 15 feet in the other). In case of wet holes, bores are to be held open by
appropriate casing so that the pipe can be adequately inserted. Loops must be installed from a
mechanical device specifically designed for this application so as to prevent contact with the
ground. The Geothermal Contractor may locate the vertical boreholes in locations other than
shown on the drawings to avoid conflicts with other utilities or trades provided prior to approval
has been obtained from the Architect/Engineer.
C. The Geothermal Contractor is to perform the first two boreholes under supervision of the
Engineer and/or Engineer’s site representative. The locations of these boreholes are to be
determined by the Engineer. After the drilling and grouting is installed, the Contractor shall
provide a report outlining the methodology for drilling and grouting of each hole and provide a
detailed plan of how they intend to execute the project. See also additional submittal
requirements above.
D. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. The pipe and fittings must
be joined using the butt, socket, electrofusion or fusion process. No other method is acceptable.
The vertical loop take off tee fittings may be made using tees or the saddle fusion process on
header piping 1-1/4” and above. Exercise extreme caution to completely remove the cut-out of
saddle tees. Bell reductions shall be used at all pipe reductions to eliminate trapped air.
E. Use reducing socket tees when fabricating socket type reducing headers. Consult with
manufacturer for available fittings and fabrication headers.
F. The connection at the borehole seal shall be made with fusion elbows. Elbows must be lower
than all remaining piping on the system to remove air at the elbow.
G. Avoid sharp bends in piping. Consult pipe manufacturer for minimum bend radius.
H. The piping should be supported before and after backfilling with a suitable means of support to
prevent undue stresses on the pipe and pipe fittings.
1. For supply and return piping in the main trench, the pipes shall be separated by at least 36”
clear at all locations. Refer also to details on drawing GO.2.
2. For supply and return piping in the circuit trench, the pipes shall be separated by at least 24”
clear at all locations. Refer also to details on drawing GO.2.
3. When routing groups of all return piping or all supply piping in the trenches maintain at least
6” between each return pipe or each supply pipe. Refer also to details on drawing GO.2.
I. Floor penetrations through slab-on-grade to use a pre-manufactured sleeve and sealant device
and be located as shown in the drawings. Prior to placement of sleeve, verify with Structural
Engineer that location will not affect structural integrity.
J. All pipe and pipe fittings interior to the building shall be insulated in accordance with the specified
insulation requirements.
K. All pipe to be properly supported according to the mechanical specifications.
L. All thermometers and pressure gauges shall be installed in a location readable by a person
standing on the floor.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 9

M. Protection of Existing Utilities: Identify and protect the existing or newly installed utilities shown
on the drawings, or the locations of which are known prior to excavation, from damage during
excavation and backfilling of trenches. If damaged, repair them at no expense to the owner. All
repairs shall be performed under the supervision of the utility concerned.
N. A minimum distance of 2’ vertical separation must be maintained for all instances where
geothermal work crosses an underground utility. Only one lateral main geothermal trench to be
unexcavated at any given time.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Perform all excavation work in accordance with OSHA and all other applicable regulations.
B. Coordinate with the site landscaping contractor the area of geothermal bore field to be stripped of
topsoil or aggregate material for temporary storage and replaced when work is complete.
C. Provide all shoring and sheeting that is required to protect the excavation and to safeguard
employees in accordance with OSHA. Widen excavation to provide space occupied by shoring
and sheeting.
D. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavation. Prevent surface water and subsurface water
from flowing into excavations.
E. During excavation, deposit material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner at a sufficient
distance from the excavation banks to avoid over-loading and to prevent slides or cave-ins.
Dispose of material unsuitable for backfill as directed by the Architect/Engineers site
representative.
F. Grade as necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into the trenches or other excavations,
and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping or by other acceptable method.
G. Excavate true-to-line to an elevation of at least 2 feet above the top pipe to provide a clear space
on either side of pipe to facilitate bedding.
H. Where the bottom of trench is found to be unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable
or organic matter, or large pieces of inorganic material, which in the judgment of the
Architect/Engineers site representative should be removed, excavate and remove such material
to a minimum depth of 12 inches below the pipe.
I. Backfill the trench with approved bedding material and compact to provide uniform and
continuous bearing for the pipe.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Opened ends of all pipes shall be sealed to prevent entry of contaminants until final connections
are made.
B. Every vertical bore loop piping installation shall be filled with water and pressure tested after
grouting is finished. Air pressure testing is not permitted. Pressure testing is not required prior to
installing the vertical loop pipes, but is recommended.
1. The water pressure test shall not begin until 24 hours has passed since the final grouting of
the bore has been completed.
2. Test pressure shall be 90 psi and must be maintained for 4 hours without pressure falling
more than 4 psi.
C. Prior to backfilling, each circuit shall be filled with water and pressure tested at 90 psi and must
be maintained for 4 hours without pressure falling more than 4 psi.
D. Following backfilling, the entire exterior system shall be filled with water and pressure tested at 90
psi and must be maintained for 4 hours without pressure falling more than 4 psi.
E. The ground loop heat exchanger system will be further tested during the start-up and acceptance
procedure of the complete system (interior and exterior). Each contractor shall be responsible for
testing the piping that was installed under their contract as delineated on the drawings. All testing
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 10

work is to be coordinated with the Mechanical Contractor and also witnessed by the
Architect/Engineer or the Engineer’s site representative.
F. Results of all tests shall be supplied to the Architect/Engineer upon completion of the project. All
final tests shall be witnessed by and report signed by the Engineer’s site representative.
G. Provide a minimum of 2 working days advance notice prior to any pressure testing.
H. Repair leaks found when testing by cutting the damages section and replacing it with an
approved socket or butt-fused piece. System shall then be tested as per above.
I. The ground loop heat exchanger shall be balanced to achieve the required flow rates at the
balancing valves installed on each circuit. Each 15 bore circuit (3 circuits total) is to be balanced
for a maximum flow of 60 gpm (180 gpm total). Each 11 bore circuit (6 circuits total) is to be
balanced for a maximum flow of 50 gpm (150 gpm per field). Geothermal contractor to
coordinate with mechanical contractor and controls contractor to allow for interior pumping
system and control valving to be temporarily set to provide maximum flow rate to bore field during
balancing. Balancer shall permenantly mark the initial settings on the balancing valves.
J. Vertical boreholes shall be grouted in adherence with all state and local requirements. See the
other thermal grouting sections for more information.
K. Use temporary casings to support unstable soils.
L. Notify Engineer immediately of unexpected subsurface conditions.
M. During piping installation, the Engineer or Engineer’s agreed representative has the option to test
the depth of up to ten holes or 10% of the holes (whichever is greater) at random. If the length is
as specified, the piping may be tested and covered. If shorter than the length specified, the heat
exchanger field or the individual heat exchanger shall be increased as specified. In addition, all
heat exchanger holes must be uncovered and have their lengths verified along with vertical and
horizontal tolerances verified. At the Engineer’s option, the heat exchanger field will be required
to be increased to the specified lengths or replaced.
N. All required safety precautions for vault installation are the responsibility of the contractor.
O. The HDPE vault structure shall be installed on a stable base consisting of 12” of Class I, graded
or crushed stone materials, compacted to 95% standard proctor density per ASTM F1759.
P. Backfill shall extend at least 3.5 feet beyond the edge of the structure for the full height of the
structure and extend laterally to undisturbed soils. Compaction shall be to 95% proctor density.
Q. The HDPE vault shall be sufficiently cleaned of all debris prior to substantial completion.
Geothermal Contractor to use bleach or similar solution to disinfect vault and all interior
components. Vault to be dehumidified to remove moisture prior to substantial completion. Vault
gasket to be cleaned in a similar fashion and installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. At
the Engineer’s discretion, the HDPE vault will be field air tested at 1 psi for a period of 30 minutes
to ensure leak free installation
3.04 GROUTING
A. The drilled vertical bores shall be grouted in accordance with IGSHPA standards and applicable
WI DNR regulations.
B. The thermal grouting material shall be mixed according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
C. The Geothermal Contractor shall monitor the grouting operation to ensure grout is properly mixed
and the viscosity is adequately maintained for pumping.
D. If problems with the grout are observed, notify Engineer before proceeding further.
E. Contractor to provide up to 3 grout mixture samples to the Engineer at different random intervals
during construction. Intervals will be determined by the Engineer. These samples will be
forwarded by the Contractor to an approved grout testing authority to determine thermal
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 11

conductivity. All costs associated with this testing, including container costs, shipping, etc., shall
be borne by this Contractor.
F. Contractor will allow the Engineer, or Engineer’s representative, to take additional grout mixture
samples at the Engineer’s discretion.
G. Grouting shall immediately follow the drilling and installation of the vertical heat exchanger piping.
No more than four boreholes shall be un-grouted at any one time and no borehole shall remain
un-grouted for more than 24 hours. The Engineer shall be notified immediately if exceptions to
these requirements are felt necessary.
H. The Geothermal contractor will employ an approved method of grouting to ensure that there are
no air voids forming as a result of the bentonite placing.
I. The grout shall be mixed by a paddle type mixing device or by manufactured portable grouting
unit specifically designed for the vertical ground heat exchanger industry. Jet-mixing and
recirculation are not allowed.
J. The Geothermal Contractor shall maintain a ready supply of spare grout pipes, hoses and fittings
on the site.
K. Grout material shall be pressure pumped through a 1”, 1-1/4” or 1-1/2” inside diameter tremie
pipe and placed in the bore column from the bottom to top. Completed grouted surfaces shall be
placed at ground level to ensure complete fill of the bore column. A positive displacement pump
shall be used for placing the grout in the borehole. Minimum pump suction and discharge lines
shall be 3 inches and 1-1/2” respectively.
L. Drilling fluids shall be confined to the site and disposed of in accordance with the local
environmental regulations.
M. Since some setting may occur after the placement of the grout material, the Geothermal
Contractor shall monitor each borehole and continue adding grout as required for a period of no
less than 30 minutes and no longer than 6 hours.
3.05 FLUSHING AND PURGING
A. Perform the flushing and purging of the exterior geothermal piping up to the point of entry into the
building. The piping interior to the building will be flushed and purged by the Mechanical
Contractor in accordance with the Mechanical Piping specifications.
B. Engineer or agreed-to-Engineer’s representative to witness flushing and purging process. Notify
the Architect/Engineer 2 days prior to flushing and purging operation.
C. Flush all lines as required per the mechanical specifications to remove dirt and contaminants
within the piping system with potable water. If no requirements are specified, contractor to flush
lines using a 25 micron filter until filter is clean. Flush lines in both directions to remove dirt and
contaminants and any possible obstructions. Contractor shall not use a cleaning agent to flush
the lines.
D. Purge air from system, or sections of system, by maintaining a minimum of 2 feet per second
through all pipes. Purge until no air bubbles are observed leaving the system.
E. Perform the flushing and purging of the exterior geothermal piping with the piping interior to the
building isolated from the ground heat exchanger using shut-off valves.
F. After purging has been completed on the full system, the Geothermal Contractor will add the
required amount of propylene glycol to the system for the portion of the system exterior to the
building. The Geothermal Contractor shall coordinate all filling with the Mechanical Contractor to
ensure that the propylene glycol solution concentration shall contain only those inhibitors that are
approved by the Wisconsin DNR.
3.06 BACKFILL
A. Do not backfill trenches until all required inspections are made and tests are performed.
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 12

B. Backfill horizontal trenches with earth or similar material to replace all material excavated during
construction. Broken concrete or other sharps shall not be used as backfill material.
C. When piping is routed under a paved surface the Geothermal Contractor shall use structural fill as
required in the earthwork specifications.
D. No backfilling shall take place in freezing weather and no backfill shall be made with frozen
material.
E. Reopen any trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, to the depth req uired
for proper compaction, refill and compact accordingly.
F. The bedding material for the pipes shall be a granular fill that includes clean sands with little or no
fines.
G. Bedding material shall be free of ice, clay, organic matter or other objectionable material, and
shall conform to the following standards or approved equal:
1. Gradation per ASTM C136 (Sieve Size – Percent by Weight Passing Sieve):
a. 3/8” – 100
b. #4 – 90-100
c. #50 – 10-40
d. #100 – 3-20
e. #200 – 0-15
2. Sand Equivalent per ASTM D2419: 25 minimum.
3. Plasticity Index per ASTM D4318: Non Plastic.
4. Moisture - Density per ASTM D1557: Maximum +2% of optimum, Minimum -5% of optimum.
5. Sand meeting the requirements of “Bedding Sand”, as defined in the most current
Wisconsin’s Standard Specifications for Sewer and Water Construction, is also acceptable.
H. Any pipe sand bedding material retained on a #4 sieve, shall not contain angular material as
described in ASTM D2488. Pipe sand bedding material which contains subangular, subrounded
or rounded material and conforms to the standards above is acceptable.
I. Deposit bedding material around the pipe in 6 inch layers and thoroughly compact to 95% density
per ASTM D1557. Perform backfilling on both sides of the pipe. For the remainder of the trench,
deposit suitable backfill material in layers not exceeding 6 inches in loose depth and thoroughly
compact each layer. Surface condition to be level and appropriate for final grading and planting
by the landscaping contractor. Geothermal Contractor to coordinate with landscaping contractor
prior to and regularly during installation of all geothermal.
J. Adjust the moisture content of the backfill material if required for proper compaction.
End Section 23 21 14
10731 GROUND LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM 23 21 14 - 13

SECTION 23 31 00
DUCTWORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Metal ductwork
B. Flexible ductwork
C. Duct cleaning
D. Duct leak testing
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 29 - Supports and Anchors: Sleeve
B. Section 23 07 00 - Duct Insulation
C. Section 23 33 00 - Ductwork Accessories
D. Section 23 37 00 - Air inlets and Outlets
E. Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE – HVAC Systems and Equipment Handbook; Chapter 16 – Duct Construction
B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles
C. ASTM A167 – Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet and Strip
D. ASTM A 366 – Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, and Commercial Quality
E. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process
F. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming
Quality
G. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
H. NBS PS15-69 – Standard for Construction and Testing for Products Intended for use in
Aggressive Chemical Environments
I. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
J. NFPA 96 – Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations
K. SMACNA – HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
L. SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible
M. SMACNA – Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual
N. UL 181 – Factory Made Air ducts and Connectors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
Dunn County Housing Units 23 31 00 - 1

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Indicate types of flexible ductwork to be used. Include data sheets and
installation instructions.
2. Provide manufacturer’s data sheets for factory-fabricated ductwork and fittings.
Include information on materials of construction, wall thickness, fitting
construction, pressure class, joint construction, sealing, and assembly and
installation instructions.
3. Provide manufacturer’s data sheets for proprietary duct connection system
components. Include information on flange construction, duct wall gauge
requirements, fastening hardware, gasketing, fittings, and assembly and
installation instructions.
A. Galvanized Steel Ductwork: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lockforming
quality, having G90 zinc coating of 1.25 oz./sf. Total for two (2) sides in
conformance with ASTM A90.
B. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum connectors
and Bar Stock; Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
C. Flexible Ductwork:
1. Return or Exhaust Applications:
a) UL 181, Class 1 air duct material constructed of impregnated/coated
woven fiberglass cover permanently bonded to a coated spring wire helix
or flat steel bands.
b) Pressure Rating: 16” WG positive and 2.0” WG negative.
c) Temperature Range: 0° F to 200° F continuous.
d) Manufacturer: Thermaflex S-TL or approved equal.
2. Low Pressure Supply Air Applications (Downstream of VAV Units):
a) UL 181, Class 1 air duct material constructed of a vinyl or polymeric inner
duct permanently bonded to a coated spring wire helix or flat steel bands.
b) Insulation: 1” thick, 1 lb. Density, flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed
by a seamless, fiberglass reinforced, aluminized vapor barrier jacket.
Insulation K value of 0.23 or less at 75° F.
c) Pressure Rating: 10” WG positive and 1.0” WG negative.
d) Temperature Range: 0° F to 200° F continuous.
e) Manufacturer: Thermaflex M-KE or approved equal.
D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
E. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials;
liquid used alone, with tape, or with heavy mastic.
F. Ductwork Support Materials:
Dunn County Housing Units 23 31 00 - 2

1. Hot-dipped galvanized fasteners, anchors, hanger rods, straps, trim and angles
shall be used to support ductwork.
2. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously
threaded.
3. Support stainless steel ductwork with matching stainless steel support materials.
4. Support aluminum ductwork with aluminum support materials or with materials
electrolytically isolated from the ductwork.
2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards –
Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and
sealing for operating pressures indicated. Exposed galvanized metal ductwork shall be
constructed of paintable sheet metal.
B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide [air foil]
turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated
metal with glass fiber insulation.
C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two (2) gauges heavier than
duct gauges indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4” cemented slip
joint, continuous welded, or spot-welded and sealed. Prime coat welded joints.
E. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye or 90 degree conical tee fittings at branch
connections to round duct mains. Provide 45-degree entry or conical fittings at branch
connections to rectangular duct mains.
2.3 TRANSVERSE JOINT DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEMS
A. Rectangular, round, or oval ductwork systems using proprietary slid-on flanges as
manufactured by Ductmate may be used at Contractor’s option. Rectangular ductwork
with side dimensions of 24” or larger shall be joined with a Ductmate System.
B. Transverse joints shall be constructed per SMACNA, non-proprietary, T-22 reinforcement
standards, Type “J” rigidity class. System includes 20 gauge roll formed slid-on flange
with integral sealant, gasketing, cleats, and corner clips.
C. Rectangular transverse joint duct connection systems utilizing proprietary formed on
flanges (formed from the ends of the duct walls) may be used at Contractor’s option on
rectangular ductwork with side dimensions of 23” or smaller. Formed on flange joints
shall be limited to ductwork systems constructed for 2” maximum static pressure (positive
or negative).
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and seal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
standards – Metal and Flexible.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 31 00 - 3

B. Fibrous glass ductwork may "not" be substituted for internally or externally insulated or
uninsulated low pressure sheet metal ductwork.
C. Do not install duct sealant when temperature is less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.
D. Verify dimensions at the site, making field measurements and drawings necessary for
fabrication and erection. Check plans showing work of other trades and consult with
Architect/Engineer to resolve interferences.
E. Seal ductwork joints, seams and duct wall penetrations, of systems located external to
conditioned spaces, in accordance with SMACNA seal class recommended for pressure
class indicated.
F. All ductwork serving general exhaust systems shall be sealed with Sure-Bond No. 188
Clear Silicone.
G. Construct and install ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
H. Duct sizes indicated on the drawings are inside clear dimensions.
I. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by prior approval of
Architect/Engineer. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance
with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.
J. Provide frames constructed of angles or channels for coils, filters, dampers or other
devices to be installed in the duct systems. Make all connections to such equipment,
including equipment furnished by others. Install sheet metal close-off fabrications to
prevent air bypass around channel mounted equipment. Fasten close-off sheets to
interior plenum or casing wall and equipment support channels.
K. Set plenum or casing doors 6” to 12” above floor. Arrange door swing so that fan static
pressure holds door in closed position.
L. Provide supplementary auxiliary steel members required to support ductwork. Attach to
building structure. Attach steel members by or clamping.
M. Install all motor operated dampers and connect to or install all duct-mounted equipment
furnished by other trades.
N. Branch ductwork shall be provided for all air outlets and inlets and shall be constructed
with sufficient length to contain the grille plus any damper, in fully open position, without
obstructing main duct air flow.
O. Round or oval ductwork exposed in occupied finished areas shall be free from dents and
scratches, and duct sealant applied shall have a smooth, finished appearance.
P. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and
controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete
with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where
openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
Q. Where ductwork penetrates interior partitions, floors, and exterior walls, pack the annular
space with insulation and conceal the space between opening and duct or duct insulation
with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Where ducts pass through fire-rated
floors, walls or partitions, provide fire stopping between duct and opening.
R. Ductwork connecting to louvers shall pitch toward the louver and drain outside the
building. Solder or seal duct seams near the louvers to form watertight joints.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 31 00 - 4

S. Blank off all unused portions of louvers with 1-1/2” rigid insulation. Provide galvanized
sheet metal backing on both sides of insulation. Paint sheet metal backing visible through
the louver matte black.
T. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
U. Do not install ductwork through dedicated electrical or elevator equipment rooms or
spaces unless the ductwork is serving the room or space.
V. Pitch exhaust ductwork serving high moisture areas or moisture generating equipment to
drain back to the exhaust grille or equipment served.
W. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
X. Connect terminal units to supply ductwork directly with rigid spiral ductwork.
Y. Connect diffusers to ductwork with 5’ maximum length of flexible duct.
Z. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with stainless steel draw bands and per ductwork
manufacturers written instructions.
AA.
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
3.2 CLEANING
A. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
3.3 LEAK TESTING
A. Test all ductwork indicated in accordance with test methods defined in the SMACNA
HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Do not insulate ductwork until it has been
successfully tested. Test pressure shall be equal to the duct pressure class. Repair and
reseal leaking ductwork or fittings and retest.
B. Test the following duct systems (maximum allowable leakage rate):
1. Supply air upstream of VAV units (1% of system air quantity).
2. Constant volume supply (5% of system air quantity).
C. Submit a signed report to the Owner’s representative indicating test apparatus used,
leakage test results, and remedial work done to bring duct systems into compliance with
specified leakage rates.
3.4 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL PRESSURE CLASS
Constant Volume Supply Galvanized Steel, Aluminum 4.0”
Supply Downstream of VAV Units Galvanized Steel, Aluminum 2.0”
Supply Upstream of VAV Units Galvanized Steel 4.0”
Return and Relief Galvanized Steel, Aluminum 4.0”
General Exhaust Galvanized Steel, Aluminum 2.0”
Shower or Dishwasher Exhaust Aluminum 2.0”
Combustion Air Galvanized Steel, Aluminum 2.0”
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 31 00 - 5

SECTION 23 33 00
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Volume control dampers.
B. Curtain fire dampers.
C. Combination fire/smoke dampers.
D. Smoke dampers.
E. Backdraft dampers.
F. Automatic control dampers.
G. Air turning devices.
H. Flexible duct connections.
I. Duct access doors.
J. Duct test holes.
K. Acoustic flexible duct.
L. Access panels.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork.
B. Section 23 37 00 - Air outlets and inlets.
C. Section 23 09 00 – Temperature Controls.
D. Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 503-93 - Fire, Ceiling and Smoke Dampers Application Manual.
B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
C. NFPA 92A - Smoke Control Systems.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible.
E. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
F. UL 181 - Factory Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
G. UL214 - Tests for Flame Propagation of Fabrics and Films.
H. UL 555 - Fire Dampers an Ruskin d Ceiling Dampers.
I. UL 555C - Ceiling Radiation Dampers
J. UL 555S - Smoke Dampers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00:
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
1. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, general
construction, component connections and details, anchorage methods, hardware
location, and installation details.
2. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions. Provide
UL listed installation instructions for all fire dampers and smoke dampers.
2.1 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS FOR ACCESSIBLE CEILING
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:, Greenheck, Ruskin, Cesco, and Air Balance.
B. Provide manual balancing dampers in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction
Standards except where the following requirements are more stringent.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 33 00 - 1

C. Provide single bladed dampers for damper sizes less than 36” wide by 12” high. Frames
for single bladed dampers shall be galvanized steel minimum 20 gauge.
D. Provide opposed blade dampers with maximum blade size of 48” wide by 6” high.
Frames for multi-blade dampers shall meet or exceed SMACNA thickness requirements
and shall have blade linkage concealed in the jamb.
E. Damper blades shall meet or exceed SMACNA thickness requirements and shall be
reinforced.
F. Except in round balancing dampers, 12” diameter and under, provide oil impregnated end
bearings.
G. Provide vinyl end bearings in all round dampers 12” diameter and under.
H. Provide manual locking, indicating hand quadrant. On dampers wider than 30”, provide a
hand quadrant at each end. On insulated ducts mount hand quadrant on a formed
standoff bracket.
2.2 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS FOR UN-ACCESSIBLE CEILING.
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Young Regulator.
B. Provide manual balancing dampers in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction
Standards except where the following requirements are more stringent.
C. Provide round duct dampers constructed of heavy duty galvanized steel spiral frame.
D. Damper blades shall be “V” style 20 gauge galvanized steel blade secured with ½”
diameter steel shaft and Teflon bushings that require no lubrication.
E. Include all necessary hardware to ensure compatibility with Bowden remote cable control
system.
F. Provide damper controller and cable to allow damper operation from occupied space.
Cable to consist of Bowden cable .054” stainless steel control wire encapsulated in 1/16”
flexible galvanized spiral sheath.
G. Control kit shall include 2-5/8” diameter die cast aluminum housing with 3” diameter zinc
plated cover, 14 gauge steel rack and pinion gear drive. Cover is to be painted to match
ceiling.
2.3 CURTAIN FIRE DAMPERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin, Air Balance, and Prefco.
B. Provide dampers that meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and are tested and listed in
accordance with UL 555.
C. Dampers shall have a UL 555 fire rating of 1.5 hours when penetrating fire rated
construction with a fire resistance rating less than 3 hours. When a duct penetrates fire
rated construction with a fire resistance rating of 3 hours or more, provide a damper with
a UL 555 fire rating of 3 hours.
D. Fire dampers shall be dynamic rated for closure under airflow in horizontal and vertical
installations as indicated on the drawings. Dampers shall be rated for closure under
maximum plan airflow and 8” w.g. maximum differential pressure across the closed
dampers.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 33 00 - 2

E. Dampers shall be curtain type with galvanized steel interlocking blades. Closure springs
and closure latches shall be stainless steel.
F. For dampers 12” high and smaller, provide blades out of air stream (Type B), otherwise
provide dampers with blades in air stream (Type A).
G. Dampers shall be manufactured with integral roll formed, 16” long, 20 gauge sleeve.
H. Fusible links shall separate at 165° F 212° F.
2.4 COMBINATION FIRE / SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin, Air Balance, and Prefco.
B. Provide dampers that meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and are tested and listed in
accordance with UL 555.
C. Dampers shall have a UL 555 fire rating of 1.5 hours when penetrating fire rated
construction with a fire resistance rating less than 3 hours. When a duct penetrates fire
rated construction with a fire resistance rating of 3 hours or more, provide a damper with
a UL 555 fire rating of 3 hours. Dampers shall be of low leakage design qualified to UL
555S Leakage Class I.
D. Each damper shall be supplied with a properly sized UL listed actuator provided by the
damper manufacturer. Actuator must be either factory mounted or in a field mounting kit.
Coordinate actuator manufacturer with the Temperature Controls Contractor. Actuators
must be specifically listed for use with each specific damper size by UL 555 and UL 555S.
E. Damper blades shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel with three (3) longitudinal
vee type grooves for reinforcement. Blade linkages shall be concealed in the frame of the
damper. Blade and bearings shall be stainless steel.
F. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and have a flame spread rating less than 25
and a smoke developed rating less than 50. Seals shall provide a tighter seal against
leakage as pressure across the damper increase.
G. Damper frame shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel formed into a hat channel with
reinforced corners. A low profile head and sill must be incorporated on all dampers less
than 17” high. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type.
H. Fusible links shall separate at 165° F 212° F.
2.5 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin, Cesco, and Air Balance.
B. Provide dampers that the requirements of NFPA 92A and are tested and tested in
accordance with UL 555S.
C. Dampers shall be of low leakage design qualified to UL 555S Leakage Class I.
D. Each damper shall be supplied with a properly sized UL listed actuator provided by the
damper manufacturer. Actuator must be either factory mounted or in a field mounting kit.
Coordinate actuator manufacturer with the Temperature Controls Contractor. Actuators
must be specifically listed for use with each specific damper size by UL 555S. Smoke
dampers that are to be used as control dampers must have an actuator that is rated with
the damper for 100,000 cycles of operation.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 33 00 - 3

E. Damper blades shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel with three (3) longitudinal
vee type grooves for reinforcement. Blade linkages shall be concealed in the frame of the
damper. Blade and bearings shall be stainless steel.
F. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and have a flame spread rating less than 25
and a smoke developed rating less than 50. Seals shall provide a tighter seal against
leakage as pressure across the damper increases.
G. Damper frame shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel formed into a hat channel with
reinforced corners. A low profile head and sill must be incorporated on all dampers less
than 17” high. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type.
2.6 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS.
A. Acceptable manufacturer: Greenheck, Cesco, and Ruskin.
B. Provide gravity counterbalanced backdraft dampers; size as indicated on the drawings.
C. Damper blades shall be 6063T5 extruded aluminum, .050” wall thickness, with extruded
vinyl blade seals. Blade linkages shall be aluminum. Blade end bearings shall be nylon.
D. Damper frame shall be 6063T5 extruded aluminum.
2.7 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Air Balance, Cesco, and Ruskin.
B. Provide opposed blade control damper of the 100% shut-off type. Maximum leakage at a
differential pressure of 4” w.g. across the damper shall be 10 CFM per square foot of
damper area.
C. Damper blades shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel with three (3) longitudinal
vee type grooves for reinforcement. Blade linkages shall be concealed in the frame of the
damper. Blade end bearings shall be oil-impregnated bronze [stainless steel].
D. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and have a flame spread rating less than 25
and a smoke developed rating less than 50. Seals shall provide a tighter seal against
leakage as pressure across the damper increases.
E. Damper frame shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel formed into a hat channel with
reinforced corners. A low profile head and sill must incorporated on all dampers less than
17” high. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type.
F. Damper actuator will be by the Temperature Control Contractor.
2.8 AIR TURNING DEVICES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Aero Dyne, Anemostat, and Hart & Cooley.
B. Shop fabricated turning vanes are not acceptable.
C. Use only steel or aluminum airfoil type vanes and construct in accordance with SMACNA
Fig. 2-3 and Fig. 2-4.
D. Construct vanes for short radius elbows and elbows where one dimension changes in the
turn in accordance with SMACNA Fig. 2-5 and Fig. 2-6.
2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ventfabrics or an approved equal.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 33 00 - 4

B. Provide connections that are fire retardant, UL214 listed, and meet all requirements of
NFPA 90A.
C. Connection shall be constructed of a glass fiber fabric with a 3” minimum width. This
fabric shall be manufacturer supplied connected airtight to two 3” minimum width metal
edging strips.
D. Flexible connections installed in interior non-corrosive applications shall be double coated
with Neoprene (polychloroprene) and shall be suitable for temperatures ranging from –10°
F to 200° F. Fabric shall have a nominal weight of 30 oz. per square yard.
E. Flexible connections installed in exterior non-corrosive applications shall be double
coated with DuPont Hypalon (chlorosulfurated polyethylene) and shall be suitable for
temperatures ranging from –10° F to 275° F. Fabric shall have a nominal weight of 26 oz.
per square yard.
F. Flexible connections installed in interior or interior or exterior corrosive environments shall
be coated with DuPont Teflon and shall be suitable for temperatures ranging from –20° F
to 500° F. Fabric shall have a nominal weight of 14 oz. per square yard. Do not use
flexible connections on kitchen exhaust systems.
2.10 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide access doors constructed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards Figs. 2-12 and 2-13 except where the following is more restrictive.
B. Construction of doors shall be suitable for the pressure class of the duct in which they are
to be installed. Materials of construction to be identical to adjacent ductwork. All access
doors shall be sealed with a material that has a flame spread rating less than 25 and a
smoke developed rating less than 50.
C. Provide minimum 1” thick insulated doors when installed in insulated ductwork. Insulation
shall be completely covered with door metal.
D. Access doors smaller than 12” square may be secured with cam sash locks. Access
doors larger than 12” square must be provided with continuous piano hinge and two (2)
cam sash locks for sizes up to 24” x 36”. Provide additional dual acting handles for larger
sizes.
E. Shop fabricated access doors and doors constructed with sheet metal screw fasteners
are not acceptable.
2.11 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene
plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap.
Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
2.12 ACOUSTIC FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Clevaflex Type DB and Thermaflex Type MK-E.
B. Provide factory fabricated UL 181 Class I flexible duct with a flame spread rating of 25 or
less and a smoke developed rating of 5o or less.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 33 00 - 5

C. Provide ductwork with a minimum 1” fiberglass insulation blanket with a minimum density
of ¾ lb. per cubic foot and a vapor barrier jacket of polyethylene or metalized reinforced
film laminate. Maximum vapor transmission rating or vapor barrier jacked to be 0.1 perm.
D. Ductwork shall be capable of maintaining a round shape without sagging or drooping.
2.13 ACCESS PANELS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milcor and Cesco.
B. Provide 24” x 24” access panels where indicated with extruded aluminum frame, .060”
thick, suitable for the adjacent wall or ceiling construction.
C. Access door shall be galvanized bonderized steel panel. Panel shall be locked with a key
lock closure to prevent tampering.
D. Provide fire rated panels, listed by UL, in all masonry shafts or walls requiring fire rated
enclosures.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. All dampers shall be installed square and free from racking. Check to insure unrestricted
range of motion with no binding.
C. Provide balancing dampers in low pressure supply, return, and exhaust ductwork at points
where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Provide splitter
dampers only where indicated.
D. Provide balancing dampers on medium and high pressure systems where indicated.
E. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated on the drawings and where ducts and outlets
pass through fire rated construction as required by code. Install dampers per the
manufacturer’s specific UL listed installation instructions using the required sleeves,
perimeter mounting angles and breakaway connections. Contractor may substitute
manufacturer’s picture frame mounting angles in lieu of shop fabricated angles.
F. Provide spare fusible links to demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having
jurisdiction and Owner’s representative.
G. Provide combination fire and smoke dampers at locations indicated on the drawings and
where ducts pass through fire and smoke rated construction, as required by code. Install
dampers per the manufacturers specific UL listed installation instructions using the
required sleeves, perimeter mounting angles, and break-away connections.
H. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and
where indicated. Adjust counter balance weights to provide proper operation.
I. Provide ductwork flexible connections immediately adjacent to fans and motorized
equipment in ductwork. Connect to sheet metal ductwork as directed by the
manufacturer. Seal connections to SMACNA Leakage Class C.
J. Provide ductwork access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils,
fans, automatic dampers, fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide largest
square access panel possible in ductwork, but provide a minimum 8” x 8” size for hand
access, 18” x 18” size for shoulder access, and other sizes as indicated.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 33 00 - 6

K. Provide duct test holes where indicated on the drawings and where required for testing
and balancing purposes.
L. Provide access panels to proper Contractors for their accurate installation prior to the
start of construction.
M. Seal all openings made in the ductwork to accommodate the installation of any accessory
to SMACNA Leakage Class C. Verify that the sealants used have a flame spread rating
of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with
UL 214.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 33 00 - 7

SECTION 23 34 13
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Roof exhausters
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 13 - Motors
B. Section 23 09 00 - Temperature Controls
C. Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork
D. Section 23 33 00 - Duct Accessories: Automatic control dampers, backdraft dampers
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices
D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices
E. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating
Seal.
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Provide product data on roof exhausters.
C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Furnish and install centrifugal roof ventilator of sizes, types and capacities as indicated on
Plans. All power roof ventilators shall be for kitchen use. Where indicated to be for
grease exhaust hood use, fans shall be provided with all necessary labeling and
construction for removal of smoke and grease laden vapors. Where fan is indicated to be
for dishwasher hood use, provide fan capable of removal of heat and moisture associated
with dishwasher exhaust hood use.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Captive Aire
Dunn County Housing Units 23 34 13 - 1

PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure roof exhausters with lag screws to roof curb.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 34 13 - 2

SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 Scope
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
Division 01 - General Conditions and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable
to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Grilles and Diffusers
B. Wall Louvers
C. Intake, Exhaust and Relief Hoods
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
B. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets
C. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Provide product data for items required for this project.
C. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise
level.
D. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to
submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Grilles and Diffusers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Titus
2. Price
3. MetalAire
4. Tuttle and Bailey
B. Louvered Face Ceiling Diffusers
Engineer Note: (delete when editing spec) The following is based on Titus Model TDC)
1. Square or rectangular louvered face ceiling diffusers shall consist of an outer
frame assembly with an integral square or rectangular inlet. A transition piece
shall facilitate attachment of a round duct.
2. An inner core assembly consisting of fixed deflection louvers shall be available in
1, 2, 3, or 4-way horizontal discharge patterns. Diffuser shall be constructed of
Dunn County Housing Units 23 37 00 - 1

22 gauge steel or aluminum. Refer to schedule on drawings for material
construction type.
3. Unless specified otherwise, finishes shall be #26 white. Finish shall be an anodic
acrylic paint, baked at 315° F. The finish must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 water
immersion test. The finish must also pas the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact
Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
4. Provide T-bar mounting panel for lay-in mounting requirements. Provide surface
mount border for applicable surface mounting requirements when required.
5. In special space restricted circumstances and only with Engineers approval, a
heavy gauge damper, mounted in the diffuser core may be used. Damper must
be operable from the face of the diffuser.
6. The manufacturer shall submit published performance data for the diffuser at the
conditions specified and scheduled. The manufacturer shall submit published NC
values at the conditions specified and scheduled. The diffuser shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
C. FIXED DEFLECTION PLENUM SLOT DIFFUSERS
Engineer Note: (delete when editing spec) The following is based on Titus Model T-Slot-In)
1. Fixed deflection Plenum Slot Diffusers shall be of the sizes and mounting type as
shown on the drawings and schedule.
2. Slot diffusers shall have a ¾” slot width and shall be available with [__] parallel
slots. The discharge deflectors shall be fixed in 1-way or 2-way blow directions.
3. Units shall be constructed of 24 gauge steel and shall have a plenum height of 9”.
The plenum shall be factory insulated with [external] [internal] insulation.
4. Unless specified otherwise, finishes shall be #26 white. Finish shall be an anodic
acrylic paint, baked at 315° F. The finish must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 water
immersion test. The finish must also pas the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact
Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
5. The plenum shall be drawn from the plenum wall to eliminate leakage. Provide a
minimum of 1” inlet for duct connections.
6. Provide cross notch for T-bar installation when required. Provide additional
mounting t-bars and filler clips to allow installation on non-standard ceiling grids
when required.
7. Provide factory furnished plaster frames when required.
8. The manufacturer shall submit published performance data for the diffuser at the
conditions specified and scheduled. The manufacturer shall submit published NC
values at the conditions specified and scheduled. The diffuser shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
D. Adjustable Modulinear Plenum Slot Diffusers
Engineer Note: (Delete when editing spec) The following is based on Titus Model TBDI-30 which
is for T-bar ceiling mounting. For surface mounting use Titus Model ML. Edit as required
for Model ML.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 37 00 - 2

1. Adjustable Modulinear Plenum Slot Diffusers shall be of the size and mounting
type shown on the drawings and schedule.
2. Diffusers shall be of length, number of slots and widths as indicated on drawings.
3. Units shall be constructed of 24 gauge steel and shall have a plenum height of
11”. The plenum shall be factory insulated with [internal] [external] insulation.
4. Unless specified otherwise, finishes shall be #26 white. Finish shall be an anodic
acrylic paint, baked at 315° F. The finish must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 water
immersion test. The finish must also pas the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact
Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
5. The plenum shall be drawn from the plenum wall to eliminate leakage. Provide a
minimum of 1 1/8” inlet for duct connections.
6. Provide unit with [2] [3] [4] slots with a slot width of [1/2”] [1/4”] [1”]. Factory
mounted T-bars shall be provided for ceiling compatibility as required.
7. Each slot shall be provided with a two-element pattern controller capable of not
only 180° air pattern, but also air volume control for final balancing. All
adjustments shall be accessible from the face of the diffuser. The pattern
controllers shall have a center divider with two independently adjustable pattern
controller in each slot. Installing contractor shall consult with Engineer for
configuration of pattern controllers to provide desired air flow pattern.
8. The manufacturer shall submit published performance data for the diffuser at the
conditions specified and scheduled. The manufacturer shall submit published NC
values at the conditions specified and scheduled. The diffuser shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
E. SIDEWALL MOUNTED SUPPLY GRILLES
Engineer Note: (delete when editing spec) The following is based on Titus Model 300RS
1. Sidewall mounted supply grilles shall be size and mounting type shown on the
drawings and schedule.
2. Grilles shall have double-deflection blades and shall be parallel to the short
dimension of the grille.
3. Construction shall be of [steel] [aluminum] [stainless steel] with a 1 ¼” wide
border on all sides. Screw holes shall be countersunk for neat appearance.
4. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested crosssection
to meet published performance data. Blades shall be spaced on ¾”
centers. Blades shall be of same material as the grille. Blades shall have friction
pivots on both sides to allow individual blade adjustment without loosening or
rattling. Plastic blade pivots are not acceptable.
5. When specified on the drawings, the opposed blade volume damper shall be
constructed of heavy gauge material that is the same material as the grille
construction. The damper must be operable from the face of the grille.
6. Unless specified otherwise, finishes shall be #26 white. Finish shall be an anodic
acrylic paint, baked at 315° F. The finish must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 water
immersion test. The finish must also pas the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact
Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 37 00 - 3

7. The manufacturer shall submit published performance data for the diffuser at the
conditions specified and scheduled. The manufacturer shall submit published NC
values at the conditions specified and scheduled. The diffuser shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
F. SIDEWALL MOUNTED SUPPLY GRILLES – AIRFOIL TYPE BLADES
Engineer Note: (delete when editing spec) The following is based on Titus Model 122RS – 2”
spacing or Model 132RS – 3” spacing
1. Sidewall mounted supply grilles shall be size and mounting type shown on the
drawings and schedule.
2. Grilles shall have double-deflection blades and shall be parallel to the short
dimension of the grille.
3. Construction shall be of [steel] [aluminum] [stainless steel] with a 1 ¼” wide
border on all sides. Screw holes shall be countersunk for neat appearance.
4. Deflection blades shall be constructed of heavy-duty material to match grille
construction and shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested airfoil
cross-section to meet published performance data. Hollow blades are not
acceptable. Blades shall be spaced on [2”] [3”] centers. Blades shall extend
completely through the side frame on each side to ensure stability. Blades shall
be individually adjustable without loosening or rattling and shall be securely held
in place with tension wire.
5. When specified on the drawings, the opposed blade volume damper shall be
constructed of heavy gauge material that is the same material as the grille
construction. The damper must be operable from the face of the grille.
6. Unless specified otherwise, finishes shall be #26 white. Finish shall be an anodic
acrylic paint, baked at 315° F. The finish must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 water
immersion test. The finish must also pas the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact
Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
7. The manufacturer shall submit published performance data for the diffuser at the
conditions specified and scheduled. The manufacturer shall submit published NC
values at the conditions specified and scheduled. The diffuser shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
G. EGGCRATE GRILLES
Engineer note: (delete when editing spec) The following is based on Titus Model 50F
1. Egg crate grilles shall be size and mounting type shown on drawings and
schedule.
2. Grilles shall have a minimum free area of 90%.
3. Outer border construction shall be of extruded aluminum with a min. thickness of
0.040” and shall have countersunk screw holes for a neat appearance. Grid
shall be aluminum construction and shall have a grid spacing of ½” x ½” x ½”.
Provide lay-in panel where required.
4. When specified on the drawings, the opposed blade volume damper shall be
constructed of heavy gauge material that is the same material as the grille
construction. The damper must be operable from the face of the grille.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 37 00 - 4

5. Unless specified otherwise, finishes shall be #26 white. Finish shall be an anodic
acrylic paint, baked at 315° F. The finish must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 water
immersion test. The finish must also pas the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact
Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
6. The manufacturer shall submit published performance data for the diffuser at the
conditions specified and scheduled. The manufacturer shall submit published NC
values at the conditions specified and scheduled. The diffuser shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
H. SIDEWALL RETURN OR EXHAUST GRILLES
Engineer note: (delete when editing spec) The following is based on Titus Model 350 - ¾” blade
spacing or Model 355 – ½” blade spacing
1. Sidewall return or exhaust grilles shall be size and mounting type shown on
drawings and schedule.
2. Grilles shall have fixed deflection blades and shall be parallel to the [long] [short]
dimension of the grille.
3. Construction shall be of [steel] [aluminum] [stainless steel] with a 1 ¼” wide
border on all sides. Screw holes shall be countersunk for neat appearance.
4. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested crosssection
to meet published performance data. Blades shall be spaced on [3/4”]
[1/2”] centers. Blades shall be of same material as the grille. Blades shall be
firmly held in place by mullions from behind the grille and fixed to the grille by
welding in place. Blade deflection shall be [0°] [38°]
5. When specified on the drawings, the opposed blade volume damper shall be
constructed of heavy gauge material that is the same material as the grille
construction. The damper must be operable from the face of the grille.
6. Unless specified otherwise, finishes shall be #26 white. Finish shall be an anodic
acrylic paint, baked at 315° F. The finish must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 water
immersion test. The finish must also pas the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact
Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
7. The manufacturer shall submit published performance data for the diffuser at the
conditions specified and scheduled. The manufacturer shall submit published NC
values at the conditions specified and scheduled. The diffuser shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
I. HEAVY DUTY BAR RETURN OR EXHAUST GRILLE
Engineer note: (delete when editing spec) The following is based on Titus Model 33R - 0°
deflection or Model 30R – 38° deflection.
1. Heavy duty bar return or exhaust grilles shall be size and mounting type shown on
drawings and schedule.
2. Grilles shall have fixed deflection blades and shall be parallel to the [long] [short]
dimension of the grille.
3. Construction shall be of 16 gauge steel with a 1 ¼” wide border on all sides.
Screw holes shall be countersunk for neat appearance.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 37 00 - 5

4. Deflection blades shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel, reinforced by
perpendicular, steel support bars spaced on max. 6” centers. Blades shall be
spaced on [3/8”] [1/2”] centers. Blades shall be of same material as the grille.
Blade deflection shall be [0°] [38°]
5. When specified on the drawings, the opposed blade volume damper shall be
constructed of heavy gauge material that is the same material as the grille
construction. The damper must be operable from the face of the grille.
6. Unless specified otherwise, finishes shall be #26 white. Finish shall be an anodic
acrylic paint, baked at 315° F. The finish must pass a 250-hour ASTM-870 water
immersion test. The finish must also pas the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact
Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
7. The manufacturer shall submit published performance data for the diffuser at the
conditions specified and scheduled. The manufacturer shall submit published NC
values at the conditions specified and scheduled. The diffuser shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
J. HEPA FILTER CEILING DIFFUSERS
Engineer Note: (delete when editing spec.) The following is based on CRI Model SAM 24
Microsound CRF.
1. HEPA filter ceiling diffusers shall be of size and mounting type shown on the
drawings and schedule.
2. Construction shall be 20 gauge steel, two piece assembly consisting of a plenum
and filter housing. The assembly shall have a white powder coated finish.
3. Prefilter shall be pleated type rated at 30% ASHRAE efficiency. The prefilter shall
be provided with a side load frame with [10”][12”] duct collar.
4. Final filter shall be HEPA, 99.99% efficient at 0.3 micron or larger. HEPA Filters
shall be scan tested at the factory, and leak tested in accordance with IES-RP-
CC001.3.
5. Blower shall be direct drive, forward curved, and with thermal overload protection.
6. Each fan/filter module shall be equipped with a solid state variable speed control
with RFI suppression, a safety switch, and a 2” x 4” junction box mounted to the
prefilter frame.
7. Provide diffuser with anodized aluminum diamond perforated grille which is
hinged to open. Removal of the HEPA filter shall be from room side without
removing the complete unit from the ceiling.
8. The unit shall be tested by an independent testing company. The highest noise
level shall not exceed 50 dba when tested at 90 FPM.
2.2 WALL LOUVERS
OR
Engineers Note: (delete when editing spec) Louvers can be provided by the General Contractor
under the architectural specifications or by the HVAC Contractor; coordinate with the
architectural specifications and drawings and edit this section and the execution section
accordingly.
A. Louvers are specified in Section 10210 - Wall Louvers
Dunn County Housing Units 23 37 00 - 6

B. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. American Warming and Ventilating, Series LE-31
2. Vent Products, Model 2850
3. Ruskin
4. Greenheck
C. Furnish louvers as shown on the plans. General Contractor shall install louvers.
Coordinate with General Contractor for sizes and locations of louvers
D. All louvers shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for both air performance and water
penetration, having a free area no less than 58% bases on a 48” x 48” section, a water
penetration equal to or less than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. at 1250 feet per minute, and an intake
pressure drop equal to or less than 0.21 in. wg. at 1250 feet per minute.
E. Louvers shall be extruded aluminum alloy not less than .081” thick, 6063-T5 frame.
Blades shall be .081” thick 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy. Blades shall be 35° fixed,
drainable type. Frame shall have drain spout to which blade gutters will drain.
F. Provide ½” removable expanded aluminum bird screen, located on interior.
G. Louver finish shall be [anodized] [Kynar 500 ®] in a [standard] [custom] color to be
selected by the Architect. Furnish sufficient paint in the same color as the louver to paint
the outer surface of panel over unused portions of louvers.
2.3 INTAKE, EXHAUST AND RELIEF HOODS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Greenheck
2. Cook
3. JenncoFan
B. Gravity roof hoods shall be constructed of heavy gauge [galvanized steel] [aluminum].
Hoods shall be constructed of precision formed, arched panels with interlocking seams.
Hoods shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction
Standards.
C. Bases shall be constructed so that the curb is a min. of 8” larger than the throat size.
D. Base height shall be [standard 5”] [12”].
E. Hood support members shall be constructed of same materials as hood and fastened so
that the hood can be removed from the base.
F. Provide roof hoods with bird screens constructed of ½” material same as hood
construction. Screen shall be mounted horizontally across the intake/discharge area of
the hood.
G. Make hood outlet area minimum of twice throat area
H. Provide hoods with baked enamel finish; color to be selected by the Architect.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 37 00 - 7

B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
D. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
E. Install roof hoods in location indicated on drawings. Coordinate roof openings location
and size with the General Contractor.
F. Furnish louvers for the General Contractor for mounting in exterior walls. Connect
ductwork to the louver, sealing all connections air and watertight.
G. Provide bird screen on inside of active louver area where non is provided with louver.
Where louvers are equipped with bird screen, remove screen at all locations where duct
connections are not made
H. Install insulated metal panel on unused portion of louver. Panels must be sealed weather
tight to louver assembly with flashing as required for proper drainage to outside of
building. Paint outside surface of panel to match louver prior to installation. Where
ductwork is visible through louver when viewed from outside the building, paint inside of
duct to match louver color.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 37 00 - 8

SECTION 23 52 34
HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All work in this section is subject to the provisions of the General HVAC Requirements,
Division 01 – General Conditions and all other parts of the Contract Documents applicable
to this Section of Work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Boiler
B. Controls and boiler trim
C. Hot water connections
D. Fuel burning system and connection
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 03 – Piping and Fittings
B. Section 23 05 15 – Piping Specialties
C. Section 23 09 00 – Temperature Controls
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AGA - Directory of Certified Appliances and Accessories
B. ANSI/AGA Z21.13 - Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers
C. ANSI/AGA Z223.1 - National Fuel Gas Code
D. ANSI/ASME SEC1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code - Rules for Construction of Power
Boilers
E. ANSI/ASME SEC4 - Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code - Rules for Construction of
Heating Boilers
F. ANSI/ASME SEC8D - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code - Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels
G. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
H. HI (Hydronics Institute) - Testing and Rating Standard for Cast Iron and Steel Heating
Boilers
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Submit data indicating general layout, assembly, components, controls, safety controls,
wiring diagrams, and service connection location and sizes.
C. Wiring diagram shall be a composite drawing showing burner controls, operating controls,
safety controls, and terminal locations for building temperature controls wiring.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 52 34 - 1

B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, cleaning procedures,
replacement parts list, and maintenance and repair data.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC1 SEC4 and SEC8D and ANSI/AGA Z21.13 Code ANSI/UL
726 for construction of boilers.
B. Units: AGA certified. UL labeled.
C. Conform to applicable ANSI/NFPA 70 code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide standard manufacturer's warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of entire package.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Submit maintenance materials under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 BOILER MANUFACTURERS:
A. IBC
2.2 BOILER
A. Furnish natural gas fired high efficiency boilers of sizes, types and capacities as
scheduled.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide factory tests to check construction, controls, and start-up operation of unit.
B. Provide authorized boiler inspection prior to shipment and submit copy of inspection
report to Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide vent piping from boiler fuel train to the outdoors in accordance with the
requirements of the National Fuel Gas Code and local codes. In addition, where boiler
fuel train includes a normally open vent valve, vent separately from other devices which
require venting.
C. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Section 26 05 03.
D. Natural gas piping and supply by Plumbing Contractor.
E. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 52 34 - 2

3.2 SERVICES
A. Boiler Manufacturer shall provide services of a field representative for the purpose of
starting the unit and instructing operation personnel. Service shall not exceed one day.
B. Submit a written report to the Engineer with the following information.
1. Fuel input (BTU/hr.) to boiler
2. Flue gas temperature
3. Percent Co 2 in flue gas
4. Boiler efficiency (100% load)
5. Low water cut-off check
6. Electrical safety controls check
7. Pilot interruption safety check
C. Contractor shall provide one (1) year free service for the boiler. Submit a letter to the
Engineer from boiler manufacturer or authorized service agency stating contract for
service is in force.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 52 34 - 3

SECTION 23 72 00
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 23 07 00 - Ductwork Insulation
B. Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork
C. Section 23 33 00 - Ductwork Accessories
D. Section 23 37 00 - Air Inlets & Outlets
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of General Conditions.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating assembly, required clearances, and location and size of
field connections.
C. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data,
and wiring diagrams.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly and installation
instructions.
1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation data under provisions of General Conditions.
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation
instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) shall be a packaged unit as manufactured by
RenewAire and shall transfer both heat and humidity using static plate core
technology.
2.2 Energy Recovery Modules
A. The energy recovery cores used in these products shall be third party Certified by
AHRI under its Standard 1060 for Energy Recovery Ventilators. AHRI published
certifications shall confirm manufacture’s published performance for airflow, static
pressure, temperature and total effectiveness, purge air (OACF) and exhaust air
leakage (EATR). Products that are not currently AHRI Certified will not be
accepted.
B. Manufacturer shall be able to provide evidence of independent testing of the core
by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), verifying a maximum flame spread index (FSI)
of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 50 thereby meeting NFPA
Dunn County Housing Units 23 72 00 - 1

90A and NFPA 90B requirements for materials in a compartment handling air
intended for circulation through a duct system. The method of test shall be UL
Standard 723.
C. Unit shall be Listed under UL 1812 Standard for Ducted Air to Air Heat
Exchangers. Some exceptions to UL Listing may apply.
D. The ERV core shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to
retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a
period of ten years from the date of purchase. The balance-of-unit shall be
warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional
characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of two years
from the date of purchase.
E. The ERV shall be capable of transferring both sensible and latent energy
between airstreams. Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished by direct water
vapor transfer from one airstream to the other, without exposing transfer media in
succeeding cycles directly to the exhaust air and then to the fresh air.
F. The ERV core shall perform without condensing or frosting under normal
operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above -10°F and inside
relative humidity below 40%). Occasional more extreme conditions shall not
affect the usual function, performance or durability of the core. No condensate
drains will be allowed.
G. The ERV core shall perform without condensing or frosting under normal
operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above -10°F and inside
relative humidity below 40%). Occasional more extreme conditions shall not
affect the usual function, performance or durability of the core. No condensate
drains will be allowed.
H. Water vapor transfer shall be through molecular transport by hydroscopic resin
and shall not be accomplished by “porous plate” mechanisms. Exhaust and fresh
airstreams shall travel at all times in separate passages, and airstreams shall not
mix.
I. Airflow through the ERV core shall be laminar over the products entire operating
airflow range, avoiding deposition of particulates on the interior of the energy
exchange plate material.
J. The energy recovery component shall be of fixed-plate cross-flow construction,
with no moving parts.
K. No condensate drain pans or drains shall be allowed and unit shall be capable of
operating in both winter and summer conditions without generating condensate.
L. The unit case shall be constructed of G90 galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with
lapped corners and zinc plated screw fasteners.
M. Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, ERV cores, and filters. Doors
shall have an airtight compression seal using closed cell foam gaskets. Pressure
taps, with captive plugs, shall be provided allowing cross-core pressure
measurement allowing for accurate airflow measurement.
N. Case walls and doors shall be insulated with 1 inch, 4 pound density, foil/scrim
faced, high-density fiberglass board insulation, providing a cleanable surface and
eliminating the possibility of exposing the fresh air to glass fibers, and with
minimum R-value of 4.3 (hr·ft2·°F/BTU).
Dunn County Housing Units 23 72 00 - 2

O. The ERV cores shall be protected by a MERV-8 rated, 2” nominal, pleated,
disposable filter in both airstreams.
P. Unit shall have single-point power connection and a single-point 24 VAC
contactor control connection.
Q. Blower motors shall be Premium Efficiency, EISA compliant for energy efficiency.
The blower motors shall be totally enclosed (TEFC).
R. Blowers shall be quiet running, forward curve type and be belt drive. Belt drive
motors shall be provided with adjustable pulleys and motor mounts allowing for
blower speed adjustment, proper motor shaft orientation and proper belt
tensioning.
1. The unit electrical box shall include a factory installed, non-fused disconnect
switch and a 24 VAC, Class II transformer/relay package.
A. The ERV shall be provided “inverter-ready” allowing for applications of inverters supplied
and installed by others.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that proper power supply is available for units.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Locate and orient unit to provide the shortest and most straight duct connections.
Provide service clearances as indicated on the plans. Locate units distant from sound
critical occupancies.
C. Provide a structurally suitable support for the base of any wall mounted or hung units.
D. Provide rubber or spring type isolators appropriately sized for corner weights of the
specific unit.
E. Provide flexible duct connections at unit duct flanges
F. All ductwork shall be designed, constructed, supported and sealed in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and pressure classifications.
G. At a minimum all duct runs to the outdoors shall be thermally insulated at levels
appropriate to the local climate. A continuous vapor barrier shall also be provided on
warm surface of the insulation.
H. Test and Balancing may not begin until 100% of the installation is complete and fully
functional.
3.3 WARRANTY
A. Five (5) years from date of startup of unit.
3.4 SEE PLANS FOR EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE OF CAPACITIES
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 72 00 - 3

PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
SECTION 23 81 07
ROOFTOP HEATING, COOLING AND MAKE-UP AIR UNIT (GAS FIRED)
A. Packaged rooftop heating, cooling and make-up air unit
B. Controls
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 09 00 - Temperature Controls
B. Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork
C. Section 23 33 00 - Ductwork Accessories
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ARI 210 - Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of UL, E.T.L., A.G.A. Certified, and applicable codes.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00 showing
dimensions, connections, arrangement, accessories, and controls.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and
repair data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty on complete unit under provisions of Section
23 05 00.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.2 TYPE
A. Reznor
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 for requirements
A. Furnish and install a packaged, roof-mounted gas fired heating, electric cooling, 100%
outside air make-up air unit of size and capacity noted on the drawings. Capacity and
energy efficiencies shall not be less than scheduled. Total unit weight shall not exceed
the weight scheduled. The unit shall be indirect natural gas-fired type provided with a
power-vented gas furnace. Provide 5 psig inlet to 12” w.c. gas pressure regulator.
B. Cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel with minimum gauge thickness of:
Bases - 16 gauge; corner posts and tops - 18 gauge; access panels - 20 gauge. The
interior of the evaporator air side is to be insulated with 1” thick fiberglass insulation. A
Dunn County Housing Units 23 81 07 - 1

closed cell neoprene liner is to be installed on the underside of the base pan for noise
reduction and weather seal to the roof curb. The unit shall be mounted on a factory
provided full perimeter insulated roof curb. Provide motorized outside air damper and
weatherproof in-take hood with birdscreen. All exterior parts shall be zinc-phosphate
coated and sealed with chromic rinse. Entire unit shall have a baked-on rust resistant
finish minimum 1 mil. thick. All exterior hardware including nuts, bolts, screws and
washers shall be stainless steel type 304. The entire unit shall be factory assembled and
wired and thoroughly leak and safety tested.
C. The refrigerant system shall include the compressor with crank case heater, air-cooled
condenser coil, evaporator coil, thermal expansion valve, filter-dried, sight glass moisture
indicator, suction line accumulator and refrigerant pressure service valves. The
evaporator and condenser coils are to be copper tuber-aluminum plate fin. The
manufacturer shall warrant the refrigerant compressor for five (5) years from date of
installation.
D. Furnace shall be indirect gas fired heating. 80% efficient. Unit shall be equipped for use
with natural gas and include an integral power vent system and spark ignition. Gas
control system shall be electronic modulation (option AG8) with factory mounted duct
thermostat.
E. The heat exchanger and burners shall be constructed of 409 stainless steel.
F. The direct drive condenser fans shall be designed for vertical air discharge (with guards)
and are to be driven by sealed ball bearing fan motors. The 100% outside air evaporator
supply blower shall be a forward curved type DIDW mounted on a solid steel shaft
supported in sealed ball bearings designed to obtain specified air delivery and static
pressure. Both the blower and housing are to be galvanized steel. Blower drive shall be
belt type with adjustable pulley.
G. Filters shall be 1” metal mesh cleanable type filters and are to be mounted behind the
outside air intake panel.
H. The condensate drain pan shall be constructed from G-90 steel and overcoated with an
asphalt based mastic. The bottom shall be insulated with 1” fiberglass insulation. The
drain pan shall be furnished with drain fittings exposed to the exterior of the cabinet.
I. Controls shall be factory configured for the design application with both the required
hardware, operating parameters, default setpoints, control transformer, and all required
safety and limit controls meeting E.T.L. and A.G.A. certification. Control panel shall be
factory mounted o the unit and shall be prewired to the unit sensors and actuators.
J. Unit shall be complete with the following factory installed options: Hot gas reheat, nonfused
disconnect and power through curb sleeve.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units as shown on the drawings with duct and gas connections. Provide complete
installation in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.
B. The Mechanical Contractor shall receive, unload, inspect unit for hidden damages, and
store with proper protection.
C. The Mechanical Contractor shall install the rooftop unit on the pre-fab curb and installed
by the General Contractor. Unit shall be installed watertight to prevent any water leaks
around the units. Units shall be mounted level on curb base.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 81 07 - 2

D. The Mechanical Contractor shall check, test, and start-up the heating cycle and cooling
cycle of each rooftop unit.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 81 07 - 3

SECTION 23 81 43
HEAT PUMP UNITS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water-to-Air Units
B. Water-to-Water Units
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 23 05 13 – Motors
B. Section 23 07 01 – HVAC Piping Insulation
C. Section 23 09 00 – Temperature Controls
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME – Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code
B. ANSI/NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum)
C. ANSI/NFPA 90A – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
D. ASHRAE 52 – Air Cleaning Device used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter
E. FS TT-C-490 – Cleaning Method and Pretreatment of Ferrous Surfaces for Organic
Coatings
F. UL – Underwriters Laboratories
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A for the installation of heat pump units.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies
required for this project.
C. Indicate condensate, water, drain, electrical and refrigeration rough-in connections on
shop drawings or product data.
D. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Include manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation
instructions and maintenance and repair data.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide 1 year manufacturer’s warranty under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Dunn County Housing Units 23 81 43 - 1

A. Provide 2 sets of filters for the water-to-air heat pump units.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. ClimateMaster or equal as provided on an equal basis only.
2.2 HEAT PUMP UNITS
A. Furnish and install heat pump units of sizes, types and capacities as shown on the plans.
Air conditioning units shall be U.L. approved and carry the U.L. label.
B. Units shall include the optional extra-quiet construction package. Access panels shall be
provided for access to electric components and to blower motor. Unit must be
serviceable from one side, rear and bottom only. The unit manufacturer shall provide a
flexible braided stainless steel hose kit with each unit for connection to the loop piping.
This package shall include shut-off ball valves and all necessary fittings.
C. Unit shall include all contactors, relays, control transformers, etc., and shall be provided
for both control and power connections.
2.3 PERFORMANCE
A. See Schedule
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that proper power supply is available.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install unit in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 81 43 - 2

SECTION 23 82 00
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Electric Cabinet Unit Heaters
B. Booster Coils
C. Fin Tube Radiation
D. Electric Wall Heaters
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 13 - Motors
B. Section 23 09 00 - Temperature Controls
C. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Furnish and install cabinet unit heaters of the size, capacity and arrangement shown on
the plans.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Q-Mark or equal.
2.2 DUCT TYPE BOOSTER COILS
A. Provide preheat and reheat coils as manufactured by USA Coil and Air and listed on
schedule. Coils using hot water shall be provided with supply and return on same end.
HVAC Contractor shall install coils within duct work.
B. Coils shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. Provide piping
specialties on heating media supply and return per detail on drawings.
C. Coils or ductwork on each side of coils shall be securely fastened to the building structure
so that the weight of the reheat coil piping is not transferred to the ductwork.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers: USA Coil and Air or equal.
2.3 FIN TUBE RADIATION
A. Furnish and install finned tube radiation where shown on the plans. Size and type shall
be as specified. Elements shall be of copper/aluminum construction and ratings shall be
I.B.R. approved.
B. Support all radiation on slide cradle hangers.
C. Provide all accessories, including trim strips, corners, telescoping fill in sections, and
joiners to finish complete.
D. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 82 00 - 1

E. Enclosures shall be 14-gauge and shall be reinforced. Enclosure shall have factory
applied baked enamel finish of color selected by Architect from standard colors (minimum
of 6). Enclosures shall not be installed until the room painting has been finished.
F. Enclosures shall be supported at top with a continuous mounting channel with multiple
bends for rigidity.
G. Provide access doors in cabinets at each end for access to balancing, isolation and
control valves.
H. Acceptable Manufacturers: Sterling, Vulcan.
2.4 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS
A. Assembly: UL listed and labeled.
B. Heating Elements: Use corrosion resistant heating elements, designed for even
distribution of air across the heating element, and installed to prevent noise of expansion
and contraction.
C. Provide units with necessary overheat protection, reset devices and contactors.
D. Fan powered units must be provided with integral thermostat and controls to maintain fan
operation until residual heat in the heating elements has been dissipated. The fans and
motors shall be balanced and mounted for vibration free operation.
E. Construct cabinets of 18 gauge steel, furnished exposed cabinets with a baked enamel
finish in one of the manufacturer's standard color.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Qmark, Berko, Markel or approved substitute.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install cabinet unit heaters and convectors as indicated. Coordinate to assure correct
recess size for recessed units.
C. Electrical Contractor shall furnish power to the unit as indicated on the plans.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 82 00 - 2

SECTION 23 84 15
HUMIDIFIERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Self-contained, electronically controlled steam generating humidifiers. Humidistat and
controls connections
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 09 00 – Temperature Controls
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Units shall be product of manufacturer, regularly engaged in production of such units
issuing complete catalog data on such products, and providing local service personnel.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Neptronic
2.2 PERFORMANCE
A. Electric Humidifiers shall be for use on 208 volts, 60 hz, 3 phase power. The humidifiers
shall be UL listed and CSA certified.
B. Steam shall be generated from tap water in a factory sealed cylinder containing
electrodes. Cylinders shall not require setting of electrode spacing, cleaning or
maintenance and shall be of the disposable type.
C. The humidifiers shall include an automatic drain cycle controlled electronically to
maximize energy efficiency. Drain cycle shall adapt to variations in water conditions and
not require manual setting.
D. Humidifiers shall include overcurrent protection as an integral function of the solid-state
circuit board. In the event of overcurrent, the humidifier shall signal that a fault condition
exists by flashing an abnormal light. Overcurrent protection shall be resettable by
operating the drain switch. Replaceable type fuses are not acceptable.
E. Humidifiers shall include a door interlock safety switch to disconnect power to the steam
cylinders when cabinet door is opened.
F. Steam distribution system and dispersion tubes shall be as shown on drawings and as
scheduled.
G. The system shall include flexible hose and insulated rigid copper pipe to connect the
steam cylinders to the steam distributor pipes. The provided hose shall only be used in
small sections as couplings to rigid piping. A separate condensate return line shall return
condensate to the humidifier for reuse to minimize energy consumption.
H. The humidifier cabinets shall be constructed a minimum of 18 gauge galvanized steel
protected by enamel finish for corrosion resistance. The cabinet door shall be hinged and
provided with a lock and key. A steam output meter calibrated in pounds of steam per
hour, indicator lights and on-off-drain switch shall be accessible with the cabinet door
closed.
Dunn County Housing Units 23 84 15 - 1

I. The humidifiers shall be controlled by a humidistat which operating through the solid state
circuit board opens a contactor to immediately disconnect power to the steam cylinder
when the humidistat is satisfied. Humidifiers shall incorporate terminals for connection of
humidistat, air flow switch and high limit humidistat.
1. Provide the following controls:
a) High limit duct mounted humidistat
b) Paddle type air flow switch
c) Duct mounted humidistat, proportional control
J. The fill water line shall include a strainer to remove sediment from incoming water and a
flow regulating control to automatically compensate for water pressures from 20-120 psi.
K. Humidifiers shall include an abnormal operation light, which shall signal whenever the
output of the unit is less than 50% of the desired rate. The light shall be visible with the
cabinet door closed.
L. The humidifiers electronic circuit shall include automatic controls to compensate for
varying water conditions without changing cylinders or electrode spacing. The control
shall activate the fill and drain solenoid valves to automatically maximize efficiency.
M. The humidifiers shall include a high water probe to prevent overfilling and loss of water.
Abnormal light shall signal if high water level reduces output to less than 50% of the
desired level.
N. The fill solenoid valve shall open whenever the drain solenoid valve is activated to prevent
discharge of boiling water into drainage system. Abnormal light shall indicate that switch
is in drain position.
END OF SECTION
Dunn County Housing Units 23 84 15 - 2

ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISIONS 26, 27, & 28 - ELECTRICAL:
SECTION 26 00 00
SECTION 26 00 10
SECTION 26 00 20
SECTION 26 05 00
SECTION 26 05 03
SECTION 26 05 19
SECTION 26 05 33
SECTION 26 09 23
SECTION 26 13 44
SECTION 26 24 16
SECTION 26 27 15
SECTION 26 27 26
SECTION 26 28 19
SECTION 26 50 00
SECTION 28 31 00
ELECTRICAL INDEX
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
TEMPORARY SERVICE
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
WIRING CONNECTIONS
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
RACEWAY AND BOXES
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
COMMUNICATIONS DISTRIBUTION
PANELBOARDS
ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES
WIRING DEVICES
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
LUMINAIRES
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
10-034 26 00 00 - 1

SECTION 26 00 10
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1.2 SCOPE
A. Basic electrical requirements specifically applicable to all Division 26 Sections, in addition
to Division 1 - General Requirements. All sections shall conform to this section whether
stated in the individual sections or not.
A. All work included in this division of the work shall incorporate all the requirements and
conditions set forth in other divisions and sections of the specifications, and associated
drawings wherever applicable to the electrical work.
B. The intent and object of these specifications and drawings is to include a complete wiring
system from service entrance to each and every load indicated or specified, including
connecting all electrical devices and/or equipment furnished by the owner or other
contractors.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The work covered by this division of the specification includes the furnishing of all labor,
materials, tools, transportation, permits, certificates, temporary protection and storage
required to complete the electrical work.
B. These specifications apply specifically to the Electrical Contractor unless specifically
noted otherwise.
C. The contractor shall read the entire specification including "Notice to Contractors",
"Information for Bidders" and the "General and Special Conditions" and the "Contract
Form", all of which contain provisions equally applicable to the successful bidder and their
subcontractors. The contractor shall also thoroughly examine all the project plans and
the proposed construction site as they will be required to do all of the work belonging to
this branch of the work whether or not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the
electrical plans.
D. It shall be the Electrical contractor’s responsibility to notify other contractors to arrange
clearances and access openings for all large electrical equipment.
E. The successful bidder will not be allowed any extra compensation when a site
investigation or review of the entire set of plans or specifications would have revealed the
work in question.
F. It shall be understood that the act of submitting a bid by the contractor carries with it the
agreement to all items and conditions referred or indicated or implied on the drawings and
the specifications and no consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding
of materials to be furnished for work to be done.
G. Electrical equipment delivered to the job site sectionalized for shipping purposes shall be
assembled according to manufacturer's instructions.
H. The Electrical contractor shall be responsible for unloading, placing into storage if
necessary, removal from storage and setting in place all equipment and material required
10-034 26 00 10-1

for completion of the electrical installation. Responsibility for protection of electrical
materials/equipment is solely the Electrical Contractor’s.
I. Contractor shall be responsible for any installation alternatives required to avoid
interference with other systems or work under other divisions of these specifications.
contractor shall thoroughly review the documents of related trades to meet this requirement.
J. Where material substitutions have been accepted by the Engineer/Architect and it is later
found that material substitutions alter the design or space requirements indicated on the
plans or in the specifications, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the cost
involved to revise both the design and construction including the cost of all other trades
involved.
K. The electrical contractor, in order to submit a bid, shall have a licensed master electrician
supervising the bidding, so that the bid will reflect any required changes to meet code.
L. All questions during bidding are to be faxed. The question form shall reference the
question in sufficient detail to be answered without discussion. The fax shall list the
project name, date and time of fax, phone and fax number of person sending the fax,
company sending the fax with address including zip code, and the name of the person
sending the fax.
M. Questions answered over the phone must have a follow up fax to be binding to the
engineer/owner.
N. Many times, the electrical drawings are produced from electronic files and we will not
become aware of any issues regarding print quality in a timely manner. If the electrician
received drawings that are unclear due to print quality, or any other reason, or if the
electrician has any questions regarding the intent of the drawings, the electrician must
contact the engineer for a clarification. No additional compensation shall be sought by the
electrician due to uncertainty of the intent of the drawings when no request was made for
a clarification.
1.4 DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS
A. All work called for in these specifications, or shown on the drawings, or that which is
necessary for complete and proper execution of the work is required and shall be performed
as though it were specifically outlined or described.
B. Any conflict between drawings and specifications, or the electrical drawings and the
mechanical and/or architectural drawings, or between the electrical specifications and the
mechanical and/or general specifications shall be deemed to have been estimated the
more expensive way of doing the work, unless the contractor asks and receives a
decision in writing as to which shall govern, prior to submitting the bid.
C. The drawings which constitute a part of the contract are diagrammatic in nature and
indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, location of switches, panelboards
and other work, but 100% accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all locations
and dimensions is directed.
D. Find all dimensions required for laying-out and installing the work. Any information
involving accurate measurements of the building shall be taken from the architectural and
structural drawings, or at the building.
E. Generally, outlets shall be located as required for proper installation of equipment or to
meet Code requirements. Locations of equipment required to be wired shall be coordinated
with contractors of other trades. The contractor shall consult the engineer/ architect
10-034 26 00 10-2

and refer to all details, sections, elevations and equipment plans and the plans of other
trades for exact location.
F. The engineer/architect reserves the right to make reasonable changes in the location of
outlets, apparatus, or equipment up to the time of roughing-in. Such changes as directed
shall be made by the contractor without additional compensation.
G. Double check the drawings for typographical errors. Compare schedules to code
requirements. Compare the information shown on the drawings and in the specifications
of other trades to those shown on the electrical drawings. When there is a conflict,
contact the engineer for a written clarification or submit a bid based on the greater
amount of work.
1.5 CLEANUP & PAINTING
A. The Electrical contractor shall periodically remove from the site all debris and rubbish
accumulating as a result of the electrical installation. Upon completion of the project,
shall dispose of all debris and rubbish and shall:
1. Leave electrical equipment rooms broom clean.
2. Clean interior of all panel cabinets, pull boxes, and other equipment enclosures.
3. Wash and wipe clean all lighting fixtures, lamps and other electrical equipment
which may have become soiled during the installation.
4. Repair any installations where paint overspray has affected electrical equipment.
B. If during the installation, the finish of any electrical equipment has deteriorated or has
been damaged, the Electrical contractor shall restore its condition and appearance to the
satisfaction of the owner.
1.6 FINAL TESTS & DEMONSTRATIONS
A. Provide 4 hours of instruction to owner’s representative on all electrical systems.
Selection of the system to be determined by owner.
B. Test all electrical work and all equipment installed by contractor, to ensure its proper and
safe operation in accordance with the true intent of the drawings and specifications.
Check all interlocking and automatic control sequences, and test the operation of all
safety and protective devices. Rectify all defects, cooperate in this work with the Power
Company, supplier's representatives and all other persons as directed by the owner or
their representatives, in order to achieve the proper and intended operation of all equipment.
C. Test and adjust operating voltages, at each system level before energizing branch circuit.
Transformer taps must be adjusted to obtain as near as possible nominal system
voltage. Where transformer is under utility jurisdiction, obtain services of utility to correct
voltage. The contractor shall be responsible for replacement of all devices and equipment
damaged due to failure to comply with this requirement.
D. Balance the load among feeder conductors at each panelboard, switchboard or
substation and shall reconnect loads as may be necessary to obtain a reasonable
balance of load on each phase. Electrical unbalance shall not exceed 10%.
E. Provide all instruments and equipment necessary to perform required tests.
F. All checks and tests shall be permanently recorded and turned over to the engineer in a
typed format prior to engineer/architect’s final review. The tests shall include:
1. System Grounding.
2. Phase balancing on distribution equipment.
3. Typed circuit directory for each panel.
10-034 26 00 10-3

G. Upon request demonstrate proper operation of all electrical systems and equipment in the
presence of the engineer/architect.
H. Operate each motor and associated equipment, as nearly as possible, under normal
operating conditions for length of time sufficient to demonstrate correct alignment,
temperature rise, speed and satisfactory operation. Load motors to full capacity or as
near as possible.
I. Operate switches, circuit breakers and control devices to verify correct and satisfactory
operation.
J. Perform all required manufacturer's factory tests of individual items.
K. The contractor shall check and test all transformers, power panels, feeders, power and
control cables and connections, and motors to assure correct phase sequence and
rotation. Phase sequence shall be A-B-C as follows:
1. Top to bottom, left to right, and front to rear, when facing protective or disconnecting
mechanism.
L. After wires and cables are in place and connected to devices and equipment, the system
shall be tested for short circuits, improper grounds and other faults. If fault condition is
present, the trouble shall be rectified, then re-tested.
M. Phase conductors, if shorted, grounded or at fault, shall be removed, replaced and then
re-tested.
N. A voltage test shall be made at the last outlet on each circuit. If drop in potential exceeds
2%, the contractor shall correct the condition by locating the ground or high resistance
splice or connection and re-test.
O. Upon completion of the electrical work, place the entire installation in operation, test for
proper function, and show systems and equipment to be free of defects
P. Engineer will conduct such tests as may be required to any part of the equipment to
determine if it is installed in accordance with specifications. Contractor shall extend to the
engineer all facilities to this end and shall furnish skilled or unskilled help required. All test
results shall be given to the engineer promptly upon completion of a test.
Q. Provide assistance to the various equipment manufacturers'field engineers, as required
in the testing and adjusting of the electrical power and control equipment. Cooperation of
the contractor must be such that a minimum of time is required for equipment testing.
R. Any faults or failures in the work performed by this contractor or in materials or equipment
furnished by this contractor shall be corrected or replaced promptly by this contractor at
their own expense. Any faults in materials or equipment furnished by the contractor,
which are the result of careless, incompetent or improper handling or installation by this
contractor, shall be corrected or replaced promptly by this contractor at their own
expense.
S. All tests shall be made at the contractor’s expense and certification of the tests shall be
submitted to the engineer.
T. Wire & Cable Testing (600 Volts)
1. The 600 volt insulated wires and cables shall be factory tested prior to shipment
in accordance with ICEA Standards for the insulation specified.
10-034 26 00 10-4

1.7 GUARANTEES
A. Contractor shall leave the entire electrical system in good working order and shall at their
expense repair, rebuild, remodel and make good and acceptable all defective labor and
materials that may develop within one (1) year after substantial completion and final
acceptance of the work .
1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Scope
1. It is the intent of this section that all wiring systems included in the project be fully
documented. This includes all electrical devices and equipment furnished by the
Electrical contractor, other contractors, or the owner. Such documentation shall
consist of "record drawings ". These shall be provided to the engineer/architect
prior to final acceptance.
B. Record Drawings
1. Two sets of Record drawings shall consist of marked-up plans and shall contain
the following information:
a. Conduit number, 2½-inch conduits and larger.
b. Conduit routing, 2½-inch conduits and larger.
c. Conduit routing, of any size, in or below slab
d. Routing of voice and data wiring
e. Routing of fire alarm conduits
f. Routing of all conduits and wiring in conduits below grade (site).
g. Location of:
1) Pull boxes and junction boxes, 12” x 12” and larger.
2) Equipment enclosures.
3) Light switches and receptacles.
4) Grounding electrode
5) Any revisions to any equipment/devices shown on the drawings
6) Information as specified elsewhere in this division.
2. Prior to final review, the contractor shall submit one (1) complete, clear, concise,
and clean set of marked-up prints, which shall also reflect changes in actual
construction from the construction documents. This set will be sent to the
engineer for the engineer to review prior to the final punchlist. This set will be
used for the final punchlist and will be kept by the engineer.
3. Prior to final payment, the contractor shall submit one (1) complete, clear,
concise, and clean set of marked-up prints, which shall also reflect revisions
resulting from engineer/architect final review.
1.9 WIRE AND CABLE JACKET RATING
A. All wire and cables which are not run in conduit shall be plenum rated unless specifically
noted and accepted (must be written) as part of the contract that the wiring does not need
to be plenum rated. This includes, but is not limited to: low voltage switching system
wiring, occupancy sensor wiring, fire alarm system wire and cable (which is not routed in
conduit), phone and data wiring, low voltage switching wiring, controls wiring, access
control wiring, and the following wiring systems when provided by the electrical contractor:
low voltage control and interlock wiring and temperature control wiring.
1.10 MOTOR WIRING & WIRING FOR OTHER TRADES
A. The Electrical contractor shall check the drawings and specifications of all other divisions
of work, such as Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, Plumbing, Mechanical Equipment,
etc., for equipment and work which must be included in order to provide a complete
electrical installation.
10-034 26 00 10-5

B. Prior to energizing any equipment, whether installed by them or not, the contractor shall
first make a thorough inspection of it, and remove all packing, braces and shipping
supports, and thoroughly blow out all dirt and debris with compressed air.
C. The contractor shall extend all applicable circuits from the source of supply to the
associated motor starter and from the motor starter to the motor terminal box, including all
necessary and required intermediate connections.
D. Final connections at motors shall be made with flexible metal conduit.
E. All motor control wiring less than 120 volts associated with heating, ventilating, air
conditioning, plumbing and mechanical equipment shall be considered "low voltage wiring"
and shall be done by others, unless noted otherwise on plans or in specifications.
The Electrical contractor shall extend and supply power to the primary circuit of associated
low voltage control transformers and shall be responsible for all low voltage wiring
associated with building service motors, such as door operators, alarm, instrumentation,
etc. Wiring shall be in full compliance with the plans and specifications established under
architectural, heating, ventilating and mechanical equipment divisions of the project.
F. All motor control wiring 120 volts and greater shall be considered "line voltage wiring" and
shall be furnished, installed, wired and connected by the Electrical contractor.
G. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical contractor to obtain manufacturer's wiring
diagrams of all electrical equipment furnished by other contractors and shall not proceed
to wire the equipment without this information.
H. The Electrical contractor shall check all drawings and specifications to determine the
requirements for motor disconnect switches. Whether or not specifically indicated on the
drawings or in the specifications, the Electrical contractor shall be responsible for
furnishing motor disconnect switches to conform with Code requirements.
I. Thermostats/Temperature Sensors: Conduit and boxes for these mechanical systems
shall be provided and installed by the electrical contractor.
1.11 ALTERNATES
A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the owner’s
option. Accepted alternates will be identified in owner-contractor Agreement.
B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required.
C. Schedule of Alternates: Refer to drawings and Division 1.
1.12 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 and the specific sections of Division 26.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related
systems, products and accessories in a single submittal.
C. Submitted shop drawings shall be in brochure form complete with an index sheet covering
all items included, with specific models indicated.
D. Review of manufacturer's drawings constitutes acceptance of general design only and will
not release the contractor from fulfilling the terms and intent of the plans and specifications.
10-034 26 00 10-6

E. Prior to submitting shop drawings to the engineer, check the requirements of each
section, verify that the equipment meets the requirements of other trades, including
clearances and electrical load needs.
F. Prior to submitting shop drawings, contractor shall review and stamp them approved, with
date indicated. Shop drawings will not be reviewed by the engineer without this stamp.
G. In addition to the quantity of drawings required by other divisions, provide one additional
copy for the engineer.
1.13 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All work under this division shall conform to the latest edition of the following codes and
regulatory requirements.
1. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. ANSI/NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
3. ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.
4. "Safety Standards for Electrical Systems" as contained in the Code of Federal
Regulations Title 29, Part 1910, Subpart S-Electrical.
5. Applicable State electrical codes.
6. Applicable Local Electrical Code.
7. Applicable State and Local Building Codes.
B. The Electrical contractor shall not assume that any drawing or specification forming a part
of the contract documents authorizes the violation of any Code, regulation or standard.
Where conflicts arise, it shall be deemed that the contractor has estimated the cost of all
work to be completed in accord with the prevailing Code.
C. The Electrical contractor shall be licensed to perform electrical work in the municipality in
which the project is located.
D. The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits for electrical work and shall pay all
required fees and sales or use tax as applicable to this branch of work.
E. Upon completion of the work, the contractor shall deliver to the owner without cost all
required certificates of inspection and approval.
1.14 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install work in locations shown on drawings, unless prevented by project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions,
including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
1.15 SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING
A. Construct work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 if project is constructed in
sequences (construction phases). Electrical contractor shall be responsible for all
temporary electrical required (ie: feeders, panels, branch circuits etc) to maintain existing
building areas in operation during construction and/or to maintain new areas of
construction in operation before the final completion of the project if the construction
schedule deems this necessary.
10-034 26 00 10-7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers shall have a minimum five (5) years continuous experience in the
manufacture of products specified under this Division.
B. Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by manufacturer,
brand name, type or catalog number, such designation is to establish standards of
desired quality and style and shall be the basis of the bid.
C. Where "Acceptable Manufacturers" are listed, the list is for general acceptance only.
Actual product used must still conform to plans and specifications and be of equivalent
quality and grade as the specified manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number, if
so specified.
2.2 LISTING OR LABELING
A. Materials and equipment of the types for which there are National Board of Fire
Underwriters (UL) listings and label service, shall be so labeled and shall be used by the
contractor.
B. Listed or labeled equipment shall be used or installed in accordance with any instructions
included in the listing or labeling.
2.3 MATERIALS USED
A. All materials used for the electrical installation shall be new and unused, except as
otherwise specifically noted, and shall be uniform in type and manufacture for the entire
electrical installation.
B. All materials shall be suitable for the conditions and duties imposed upon them in service
and shall be the latest standard catalog products of reputable manufacturers.
2.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions of products referenced in the plans and specifications is acceptable, with the
following policy:
1. Catalog cut sheets are to be faxed to the Engineer/Architect no later than six (6)
working days prior to bid due date.
2. The cut sheets will be preliminary reviewed for quality and general conformance
to the plans and specifications.
3. Approved substitutions will be listed in an addendum.
B. Approval of substitution does not relieve contractor of the submittal requirements as found
in these specifications.
C. Review each section for additional requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 00 10-8

SECTION 26 00 20
TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for installation of a 200
amp, 120/240 volt, single-phase, temporary service to each of the three buildings at the
job site. Provide 120 volt outlets and lighting, where required, for all trades to execute
their work. Any other power required by other trades shall be the responsibility of that
trade requiring such power. All temporary power shall be in accordance with OSHA
standards.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall make all arrangements with the local utility company for
metered electrical service, pay for the installation of all temporary service to utility point of
termination and upon completion of project, pay for removal of temporary service.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall provide meter base and wiring to point of utility termination,
provide main fused service switch, and fused or breaker distribution panels(s). The
Electrical trade shall also provide, at no cost to others, all lamps, wiring, switches, sockets
and similar equipment required for temporary system until substantial completion. Upon
completion of the project, the Electrical Trade shall remove the temporary system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of temporary service shall be coordinated with the utility company, as well as
other trades for this location.
B. It shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to verify and coordinate provisions for
temporary power with the owner and other contractor. Avoid obstructing corridors and
other areas as much as practical. All temporary wiring shall be installed in a manner so
as not to create any hazardous situations in the facility.
C. The temporary system shall consist of temporary lighting sufficient to enable all trades to
complete their work and to enable the Engineer/Architect and its On-Site Representative
to check all work as it is being done in each and every room of the building. Illumination
in all areas shall meet or exceed State Code Requirements. Provide at least one (1)
outlet for each 400 square feet of floor space, 120 volt single-phase. Circuits shall be 20
amp single pole.
D. In accordance with the latest issue of the National Electric Code (NEC), all temporary
electrical circuits for construction purposes shall be equipped with combination ground
fault interrupter and circuit breakers meeting the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories
(UL) for Class A, Group 1 devices. The ground fault interrupter portion shall be solid
state type, insulated and isolated from the breaker mechanism. A test button shall be
provided for checking the device. The breaker mechanism shall provide overload and
short circuit protection and shall be operated by a toggle switch with overcenter switching
mechanism so that contact cannot be held closed.
10-034 26 00 20-1

E. The Electrical Contractor shall make arrangements for temporary power for construction
purposes when the service change-over occurs (via generator or power company
pigtails).
F. The temporary lighting system shall be sufficient to enable all trades to safely complete
their work and to enable the Architect/Engineer to check all work as it is being done.
Illumination shall be 5 foot-candles minimum in all areas and, in addition, shall meet or
exceed the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.56 Illumination (OSHA regulations).
G. If a Contractor contemplates the use of equipment that requires a different voltage or
greater capacity than that specified, then that Contractor must arrange with Utility for this
additional service and pay for installation of the service and the necessary additional
switches and wiring required.
H. Any Trade that has a temporary office shall provide and pay for installation of temporary
service for lighting of such temporary office.
I. All Trades shall furnish their extension cords and lamps other than those furnished for
general lighting.
J. All Trades and other separate Contractors shall be allowed to use the service provided for
general lighting and fractional horsepower hand tools at no cost.
K. After Substantial Completion of the permanent electrical system and building wiring,
permanent receptacles may be used during finishing work. Permanent wiring for lighting
fixtures, switches, and receptacles shall be installed only after all masonry and plastering
has been completed, but this wiring shall not be used for motors larger than fractional HP
or for welding equipment. Circuits for larger motors and welding equipment may be
provided with special circuits to mains of electrical panels at the expense of those trades
requiring them.
3.2 ENERGY CHARGES
A. The owner shall pay for the cost of power consumed from the temporary service when the
project is a remodel/new addition. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for the cost of
power consumed from the temporary service when the building is all new construction.
See General Conditions, Division 1, of the general construction specifications for further
information.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 00 20-2

SECTION 26 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding electrodes and conductors; equipment grounding conductors;
bonding methods and materials; conduit and equipment supports; anchors and fasteners;
nameplates and labels; wire markers; raceway markers; and underground warning tape.
B. Section includes sealing and fireproofing of sleeves/openings between conduits, cable
trays, wireways, troughs, cable bus, busduct, etc. and the structural or partition opening
shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose work penetrates the opening. The
contractor responsible shall hire individuals skilled in such work to do the sealing and
fireproofing. These individuals hired shall normally and routinely be employed in the
sealing and fireproofing occupation.
C. The electrical specifications are not stand alone. The remainder of the specifications
must be reviewed for additional work. Connection to door hardware, HVAC systems, and
other miscellaneous systems is a part of the electrical contract. Review the entire
specifications for your scope of work.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) - Standard of Installation.
B. NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
C. NFPA 99 (National Fire Protection Association) - Health Care Facilities.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes:
1. Metal underground water pipe.
2. Metal frame of the building.
3. Concrete-encased electrode.
4. Metal underground gas piping system.
5. Rod electrode.
B. Electrical products are anchored and fastened to building elements and finishes as
follows:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, and
preset inserts.
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and
hollow wall fasteners.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
C. Electrical components are identified as follows:
1. Nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
2. Label for identification of individual receptacles, control device stations, clocks,
fire alarm equipment, speakers, and phone/data devices.
3. Wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and
junction boxes and each load connection.
10-034 26 05 00 - 1

4. Raceway marker for each raceway longer than 6 feet (2 M)
5. Underground warning tape along length of each underground raceway or cable.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Select materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners, and supports to carry the loads
of equipment and raceway, including weight of wire and cable in raceway.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Product Data: Submit grounding electrodes and connections; for fastening components;
and nameplates, labels, and markers.
C. Samples: Submit two nameplates, illustrating materials and engraving quality.
D. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding
electrodes
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100
miles of project.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ROD ELECTRODES
A. Material: Copper.
B. Diameter: 3/4" (19 mm)
C. Length: 10 feet (3000 mm)
2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in
configurations required for particular installation.
2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
10-034 26 05 00 - 2

2.4 WIRE
A. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and
making permanent field connections between grounding system components.
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Foundation Electrodes: 2/0 AWG.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductor.
2.5 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
A. Materials and Finishes: Corrosion resistant.
2.6 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Description: Galvanized or Painted steel.
2.7 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Panelboard Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic. For general distribution
panels, branch circuit panels and main panels, use white letters on black background.
For all distribution and branch circuit panels powered by an emergency generator, use
white letters on red background.
B. Information to be included on all panel nameplates (main panel, distribution panels, and
branch circuit panels):
1. Panel name.
2. Quantity, size and type of conductors feeding panelboard (ie: 4#3/0 THHN, 1#6G)
3. Size of conduit feeding panel.
C. Letter Size:
1. 1/8-inch (3 mm) letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. 1/4-inch (3 mm)letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16-inch (5 mm) white letters on black
background.
2.8 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Cloth tape type wire markers.
B. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated.
2.9 CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Description: Split-tube type.
B. Color:
1. 208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background.
2. Fire Alarm System: Red lettering on white background.
3. Telephone System: Blue lettering on white background.
4. Data System: Blue lettering on white background.
C. Legend:
1. 208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.
10-034 26 05 00 - 3

2. Fire Alarm System: FIRE ALARM.
3. Telephone System: TELEPHONE.
4. Data System: DATA.
2.10 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: 4-inch (100 mm) wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with
suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
2.11 SEALING AND FIREPROOFING
A. Fire and/or Smoke rated Surfaces:
1. 3M CP 25N/S or CP25S/L caulk, 3M FS 195 wrap/strip with restricting collar, 3M
CS 195 composite sheet, Pipe Shields Inc. series F fire barrier kits, Proset
systems fire rated floor and wall penetrations, Insta-Foam Products Insta-Fire
seal Firestop Foam, Dow Corning Fire Stop System, or an approved equal.
2. All products must be UL listed or tested by an independent testing laboratory.
Use a product that has a rating not less than the rating of the wall or floor being
penetrated.
3. Provide fire stopping for ceiling openings to meet the ceiling fire rating, as a
system.
B. Non-Rated Surfaces:
1. Use stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor/ceiling
plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed.
2. In exterior wall openings below grade, use a modular mechanical type seal
consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the
annular space between the conduit and the cored opening or a water-stop type
wall sleeve.
3. At interior wall or floor openings use Tremco Dymonic, Sika Corp. Sikaflex la,
Sonneborn Sonolastic NPI, or Mameco Vilken 116 urethane caulk or approved
equal to effect the seal.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
C. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding and Bonding Installation:
1. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to
ground.
2. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in
foundation footing. Bond steel together.
3. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
4. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
5. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within
each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug,
bus, or bushing.
6. Locate and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA
"Standard of Installation".
7. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
8. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
10-034 26 05 00 - 4

9. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
B. Supports:
1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members. Rigidly weld
members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate
strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
2. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
3. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and
panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall.
4. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and
panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
C. Identification Components:
1. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
2. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
3. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive.
4. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in
finished locations.
5. Conduit Marker Spacing: 20 feet (6 m) on center.
6. Identify underground conduits using one underground warning tape per trench at
3 inches (75 mm) below finished grade.
D. Raceway Painting: Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Division 9.
1. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet (2000 mm).
E. Paint bands 20 feet on center.
1. Color:
a) 208 Volt System: Yellow.
b) Fire Alarm System: Red.
c) Telephone/Data System: Green.
F. Fire Rated Surface:
1. When the opening is through a fire rated wall, floor, ceiling or roof the opening
must be sealed by installing a steel sleeve, minimum 12 gauge., through the
opening and extending beyond a minimum of 1 inch. Further, the sleeve shall be
large enough to allow a minimum of a 1 inch void between the sleeve and the
item of penetration. The void shall be packed with an approved backing material
and the ends of the sleeve sealed with a minimum of 1 inch of a listed fireresistive
silicone compound to a depth required to meet the fire rating of the
structure penetrated.
2. When installing electrical equipment in a rated ceiling, wall, or floor assembly,
provide fire stopping to meet the requirements of the assembly.
3. Install approved product in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions where
a pipe (i.e. cable tray, bus, cable bus, conduit, wireway, trough, etc.) penetrates a
fire rated surface.
G. Non-Rated Surfaces:
1. When the opening is through a non-fire rated wall, floor, ceiling or roof the
opening must be sealed using an approve type of material.
2. Use galvanized sheet metal sleeves in hollow wall penetrations to provide a
backing for the sealant. Grout area around sleeve in masonry construction.
3. Install escutcheons or floor/ceiling plates where pipe, penetrates non-fire rated
surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces for this paragraph include only
those rooms with finished ceilings and the penetration occurs below the ceiling.
4. In exterior wall openings below grade, assemble rubber links of mechanical seal
to the proper size for the pipe and tighten in place, in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
5. At interior partitions, pipe penetrations are required to be sealed for all clean
rooms, laboratories, most hospital spaces, computer rooms, tele/data/com rooms
and similar spaces where the room pressure or odor transmission must be
10-034 26 05 00 - 5

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
controlled. Apply sealant to both sides of the penetration in such a manner that
the annular space between the pipe sleeve and the pipe is completely filled.
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services; Division 1 - Execution
Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 05 00 - 6

SECTION 26 05 03
WIRING CONNECTIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WD 1 (National Electrical Protection Association) - General Purpose Wiring Devices.
B. NEMA WD 6 (National Electrical Protection Association) - Wiring Devices - Dimensional
Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions,
configurations, and construction.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Submittal procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment
connections.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Division 1- Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and
manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
C. Determine connection locations and requirements.
D. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.
E. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CORD AND PLUGS
A. Attachment Plug Construction: Verify with trade providing equipment.
B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.
C. Cord Construction: Verify with trade providing equipment. If no specific requirement is
expressed by trade providing equipment, then use Type SO (Extra hard usage) multi-conductor
flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
10-034 26 05 03 - 1

D. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit
overcurrent protection.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1- Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
C. Verify equipment served, voltage, configuration, load and all other electrical requirements
needed to activate the equipment. Review the shop drawings of other trades to meet this
requirement prior to purchase/rough-in.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Make electrical connections to all equipment, whether shown on plans or not. It is the
contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with all trades involved in project.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit
with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered.
D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Division 1- Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and
starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide
personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and
configurations.
3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULE
A. See plans for list known at time of design.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 05 03 - 2

SECTION 26 05 19
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes building wire and cable; service entrance cable; metal clad cable; and
wiring connectors and connections.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) - Standard of Installation.
B. NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.3 WIRING METHODS AND PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Requirements: Use products as indicated and as follows:
1. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
2. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
3. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
4. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
5. Use minimum 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer
than 75 feet.
6. Do not share neutrals or grounds on circuits serving computers, electronic
ballasts, or any other equipment producing harmonic distortion.
B. Wiring Methods: Use wiring methods indicated and as follows:
1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway. MC cable permitted.
2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway. MC cable permitted.
3. Exam, Patient Care and other medical Areas: Use only building wire, type
THHN/THWN insulation, in metallic raceway with additional redundant ground.
MC cable with redundant ground permitted. Note: Patient Care area shall, at a
minimum, encompass the entire room that contains the patient bed or
medical/exam table/area, and including any bathroom within that space.
4. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation,
in raceway. MC cable permitted.
5. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway.
6. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
7. Underground Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
8. Service entrance conductors: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway.
C. Conductor sizes are based on copper. Aluminum conductors are not allowed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Provide manufacturer’s specification sheets for each size wire used.
10-034 26 05 19 - 1

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements are as indicated.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact
routing and lengths required.
C. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. Include wire and
cable lengths within 20ft of length shown.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rome Cable Co.
2. General Cable Co.
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C. Conductor: Copper.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
E. Insulation: NFPA 70; Type THHN/THWN insulation for feeders and branch circuits.
2.2 METAL CLAD CABLE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rome Cable Co.
2. General Cable Co.
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
F. Armor Material: Aluminum or steel.
G. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.
10-034 26 05 19 - 2

H. Jacket: Where required.
2.3 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Split Bolt Connectors:
1. Thomas & Betts
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Solderless Pressure Connectors:
1. Thomas & Betts
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
C. Spring Wire Connectors:
1. Thomas & Betts
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
D. Compression Connectors:
1. Thomas & Betts
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
C. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
E. Verify all equipment served to be sure of its ampacity requirements prior to roughin/purchase.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project conditions.
B. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation."
C. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
D. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 00. Identify each
conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
E. Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway:
1. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
2. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
F. Special Techniques--Wiring Connections:
1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise.
10-034 26 05 19 - 3

3.4 WIRE COLOR
3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent
of insulation rating of conductor.
4. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and
larger.
5. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor
splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
6. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor
splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
7. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
8. Stranded conductors may be used for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
However, if stranded conductors are in lieu of solid, then fork terminals shall be
crimped on for all device terminations. Bare stranded conductors shall not be
placed directly under the screws.
A. General
1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller - wire shall be colored as indicated below.
2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger - identify wire with colored tape at all terminals,
splices and boxes. Colors to be as indicated below.
3. Use black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts, use black, red, and
blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase.
B. Neutral Conductors: White. Where there are two or more neutrals in one conduit, each
shall be individually identified with the proper circuit. Each computer, electronic ballasted,
or other harmonic producing circuit must have a separate neutral.
C. Branch Circuit Conductors: Three or four wire home runs shall have each phase uniquely
color coded.
D. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Each phase shall be uniquely color coded.
E. Ground Conductors: Green for 6 AWG and smaller. For 4 AWG and larger, identify with
green tape at both ends and all visible points included in all junction boxes.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services; Division 1 - Execution
Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 05 19 - 4

SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes conduit and tubing, wireways, outlet boxes, and pull and junction boxes.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSI C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
D. NECA (National Electrical Contractor’s Association) - "Standard of Installation"
E. NEMA FB 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes,
and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
F. NEMA OS 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes,
Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
G. NEMA OS 2 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes,
Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
H. NEMA TC 2 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Electrical Plastic Tubing
(EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
I. NEMA TC 3 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - PVC Fittings for Use with
Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
J. NEMA 250 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Raceway and boxes located as shown on Drawings, and at other locations where
required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with
regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless
dimensioned. Provide raceway as required to complete wiring system.
B. Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Use schedule 40 nonmetallic
conduit. Use cast metal or non-metallic boxes, per drawings.
C. Underground Within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit. Use cast metal
or nonmetallic boxes.
D. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use schedule 40 nonmetallic conduit.
E. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid galvanized steel. Use cast metal outlet, pull,
and junction boxes.
F. In Slab Above Grade: Use schedule 40 nonmetallic conduit.
10-034 26 05 33 - 1

G. Wet and Damp Locations: Use schedule 40 nonmetallic conduit where concealed, use
rigid galvanized steel where exposed. Use cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and
pull boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
H. Concealed Dry Locations: Use electrical metallic tubing. Use sheet-metal boxes. Use
flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Use hinged enclosure for large pullboxes.
I. Exposed Dry Locations: Use electrical metallic tubing. Use sheet-metal boxes. Use
flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Use hinged enclosure for large pullboxes.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Product Data: Submit for the following Products:
1. Flexible metal conduit.
2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3. Nonmetallic conduit.
4. Raceway fittings.
5. Conduit bodies.
6. Wireway.
7. Pull and junction boxes.
8. Handholes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and
installation of Product.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents:
1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch trade size.
2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Division 1 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above
counters, benches, and backsplashes.
10-034 26 05 33 - 2

PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon Electrical Products
2. Thomas & Betts Corp.
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.2 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon Electrical Products
2. Thomas & Betts Corp.
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon Electrical Products
2. Thomas & Betts Corp.
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon Electrical Products
2. Thomas & Betts Corp.
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel set screw type.
2.5 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon Electrical Products
2. Thomas & Betts Corp.
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
10-034 26 05 33 - 3

C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.6 OUTLET BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon Electrical Products.
2. Hubbell Wiring Devices.
3. Steel City.
4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment
supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.
2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
D. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.
E. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.
F. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.
2.7 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon Electrical Products.
2. Hubbell Wiring Devices.
3. Steel City.
4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
C. Verify the relevant mounting heights, conflicts with building elements, size required by
other trades, and any special connection conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Voice, data, television, and all other low voltage wiring must be installed in rigid raceway
when concealed or penetrating in fire rated walls. Flexible conduit is not permitted.
Coordinate with I.T. drawings for locations of conduits.
B. Where spare conduits and boxes are shown, the conduits must be rigid when concealed
in walls when it’s for a device requiring power. Flexible conduit is permitted when it’s
shown on the I.T. drawings for future low voltage installation. Install raceway and boxes
in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation.”
C. When the installation of MC cable is allowed in Section 26 05 19, MC cable shall be used
only for final connections from j-boxes installed on a hard piped conduit distribution
10-034 26 05 33 - 4

system down to the final device j-box. MC cable shall not be used for main conduit
distribution runs and shall be used for branch circuit conductors rated 20A or less.
D. Ground and bond raceway and boxes under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
E. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes under provisions of Section 26
05 00.
F. Identify raceway and boxes under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
G. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
3.3 INSTALLATION-RACEWAY
A. Raceway routing that is shown is in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as
required to complete wiring system.
B. Install conduit.
C. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers,
clevis hangers, and split hangers.
E. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel
specified in Section 26 05 00; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.
F. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary supports.
G. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
H. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 00.
I. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
J. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
L. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch. Do not cross conduits in slab
larger than 1/2-inch trade size (DN 13).
M. Maintain adequate clearance between raceway and piping.
N. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding
104 degrees F.
O. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe-cutter; de-burr cut ends.
P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
Q. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe
nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire
area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
R. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and
wet locations and to cast boxes.
10-034 26 05 33 - 5

S. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit
bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot
bender to fabricate or factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch in size.
T. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit
system.
U. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway
crosses seismic, control and expansion joints.
V. Provide suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
W. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
X. Surface Raceway: Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to
surfaces; mount plumb and level. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at
connections to outlets and corner fittings.
Y. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.
3.4 INSTALLATION-BOXES
A. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated or
specified in Section 26 27 26 or on plans. Carefully review the drawings and
specifications of other trades for conflicts.
B. Adjust box location up to 2 feet prior to rough-in if required to accommodate intended
purpose.
C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.
D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas
only.
E. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
F. Locate flush mount box in masonry wall as to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
G. Do not install flush mount box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches
separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
H. Install boxes with a minimum of 24” horizontal separation when installed on both sides of
a rated wall or partition, and in the same stud space. Where this requirement cannot be
met, provide fire stopping on the boxes. Under no circumstances are the boxes to have a
projected area that overlaps.
I. Secure flush mount box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for
surface finish thickness.
J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
10-034 26 05 33 - 6

M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
N. Support boxes independently of conduit.
O. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional
box.
P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods under the provisions of Division 1.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack
with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified under Division 1.
C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 05 33 - 7

26 09 23
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Contractor’s work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware,
sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery,
installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control
system, as described herein.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Manufacturer shall demonstrate conformance to this specification by supplying the
necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations from this
specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted.
C. Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications indicating
compliance to the specification.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Products supplied shall be from a manufacturer that has been continuously involved in
the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years.
B. All components shall be U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all state and
local applicable code requirements.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor
based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after a reasonable
time delay when a room or area vacated by the last person to occupy the room or area.
B. Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be
undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the
specification. The supplier’s obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing
without charge to the owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be
damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier. The warranty shall
commence upon the owner’s acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a
minimum period of one (1) year.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. All products shall be Watt Stopper product numbers as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Dual Technology sensors shall be corner mounted to avoid detection outside the
controlled area when doors are left open.
10-034 26 09 23 - 1

C. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp
systems and rated motor loads.
D. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No
automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or
heating fans.
E. In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor.
When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall
switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.
F. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled to within plus or minus 0.005%
tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk.
G. All sensors shall provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being detected
during testing and that the unit is working.
H. Each power pack shall have a set of auxiliary contacts for interface with HVAC control
systems.
2.2 CONTROL WIRING
A. Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG,
stranded U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in
plenums, where applicable. Control wiring need not be in conduit.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location
required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of
controlled areas per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Rooms shall have ninety (90)
to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to
accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within
the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are
diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The
contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover
the respective room.
B. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best
possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space
limitations or interference of structural components. The contractor shall also provide, at
the owner’s facility, the training necessary to familiarize the owner’s personnel with the
operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing
devices and systems.
C. Verify that the equipment being served by the sensors is compatible with the device prior
to installation or purchase.
D. Provide 10 feet of extra low voltage cable, coiled above ceiling at each sensor.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 09 23 - 2

SECTION 26 13 44
COMMUNICATIONS DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes arrangement with Telecommunications Utility Company for telecommunication service
and provision of supporting equipment to prepare building for information technology
telecommunications contractor.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. EIA/TIA 568 (Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industries Association) -
Commercial Building Telecommunication Wiring Standard.
B. EIA/TIA 569 (Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industries Association)-
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
C. NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing Specifications for
Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Service entrance from Telecommunications Utility Company.
B. Service Entrance Pathway: Empty raceway from point of Telephone Utility connection at property line
to building service terminal backboard.
C. Entrance Wiring: By Utility Company.
D. Backbone Wiring: By IT contractor.
E. Horizontal Wiring: By IT contractor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1- Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with the IT installation contractor and the IT drawings. Conduits and sleeves and electrical
systems required on the IT drawings is the responsibility of the electrical contractor.
B. Contact the utility company as to any charges related to the service installation. Bill any charges
directly to the owner.
C. The utility charges for service installation will be paid by the Owner and are not a part of this contract.
10-034 27 13 44 - 1

PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS
A. Material: Fire retardant Plywood.
B. Size: 4 x 8 feet, 3/4 inch thick.
2.2 RACEWAYS
2.3 BOXES
A. Electrical metallic tubing, ¾” size, unless otherwise indicated on the IT drawings.
B. 4” square with raised cover flush-mounted in walls, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 OUTLET CONNECTORS
B. By IT contractor.
2.5 CABLING
A. By IT contractor.
2.6 FACEPLATES
A. By IT contractor.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install pathways in accordance with EIA/TIA 569.
B. Finish paint termination backboards with durable white enamel under the provisions of Division 1 prior
to installation of telephone equipment.
C. Install termination backboards plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner.
D. Install polyethylene pulling string in each empty telephone conduit over 10 feet in length or containing a
bend.
E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 00. Mark all backboards
with the legend "TELEPHONE."
F. Ground and bond pathways, cable shields, and equipment under the provisions of Section 26 05 00.
Grounding is under the electrical contract, not the owner’s telecommunications contractor’s contract.
Provide Ground Bar, per telecommunications contractor’s requirements, at the main distribution frame.
Route a ground from the bar to the main service ground, sized by the telecommunications contractor.
G. Provide service conduit from building telecommunications backboard to property line, using 4" Sch. 40
PVC or as directed by the Telephone Utility Company.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services; Division 1- Execution
Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
END OF SECTION
10-034 27 13 44 - 2

26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes main distribution and branch circuit panelboards.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) -Standard of Installation
B. NEMA AB 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Molded Case Circuit
Breakers.
C. NEMA KS 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Enclosed and
Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
D. NEMA PB 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Panelboards.
E. NEMA PB 1.1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Instructions for Safe
Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
F. NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus
ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker arrangement and sizes.
C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Closeout Submittals: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual
circuiting arrangements.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of
replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and
intervals.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
10-034 26 24 16 - 1

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements; Division 1 - Operation and Maintenance Data:
Requirements for maintenance products.
B. Provide two of each panelboard key.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MAIN AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square-D
2. Cutler-Hammer
B. Product Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type panelboard.
C. Panelboard Bus: Copper current carrying components, ratings as indicated. Provide
copper ground bus in each panelboard.
D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 or 208
volt distribution panelboards; 42,000 amperes rms symmetrical for main distribution
panelboards, or as indicated on drawings. Provide series rated breakers to series rate
downstream equipment to 10kAIC, assuming no distance. Breakers in panels serving
downstream equipment must be rated for the equipment served.
E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type
HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
F. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated.
G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
H. Cabinet Front: Surface type, hinge mounted, finished in manufacturer's standard gray
enamel.
2.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square-D
2. Cutler-Hammer
B. Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboard.
C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated. Provide
copper ground bus in each panelboard; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.
D. For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics provide 200% rated, plated copper,
solid neutral.
E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt
panelboards, or as indicated on drawings.
10-034 26 24 16 - 2

F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits,
Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit
breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
H. Cabinet Box: Nominal 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide.
I. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface (as indicated on drawings) cabinet front with hinge cover,
concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify type of load with panelboard being used. All panelboards serving isolated ground
receptacles shall have a 200% rated neutral (see above). Do not purchase panelboards,
breakers, or rough in feeders without verifying the loads that the panelboard is serving.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of
Installation."
B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
C. Coordinate with the concrete contractor for the installation of a 4” concrete housekeeping
pad under all main and distribution panelboards that are floor mounted.
D. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no
more than 4 inches above floor.
E. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
F. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to
reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
G. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 00.
H. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above
ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.
I. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 00. Connect
equipment ground bars of panels as required by NEC Article 250.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services; Division 1 - Execution
Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.
10-034 26 24 16 - 3

D. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
E. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements; Division 1 - Starting and Adjusting: Requirements
for starting and adjusting.
B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain
proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 24 16 - 4

SECTION 26 27 15
ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes arrangement with Utility Company for permanent electric service;
service provisions; and utility metering equipment.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Review utility rule book on installation of new services and metering.
B. Coordinate with utility representative for all work. The utility representative is the authority
on equipment to be installed. This specification is a summary of conversations with this
representative and can be revised by that representative. Any revisions, however, require
owner knowledge and acceptance.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical System Characteristics: 120/208 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz.
B. Service Entrance: Underground.
C. Underground Service Provisions: Underground service entrance to building service
entrance equipment.
1. Utility Raceway Connection: At Utility Company's pad-mounted transformer.
2. Utility Service-Entrance Conductor Connection: At. Metering/CT equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Submit Utility-Company-prepared drawings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements are as on Utility Company drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with utility company, the relocation of any overhead or underground lines
interfering with the construction. Where power lines are to be relocated, bill utility costs, if
any, directly to the Owner.
B. The utility charges for service installation will be paid by the Owner and are not a part of
this contract.
10-034 26 27 15 - 1

PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 UTILITY METERS
A. Meters will be furnished by Utility Company.
2.2 UTILITY METER BASE
A. Product Description: Provide meter base per utility requirements.
2.3 METERING CURRENT TRANSFORMER CABINET
A. Product Description: Provide current transformer cabinet per utility requirements.
2.4 TRANSFORMER PAD
A. Product Description: cast-in-place concrete transformer pad with cable pit sized per utility
requirements.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and energized.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install service entrance conduits to building service entrance equipment. Connect service
lateral conductors to service entrance conductors.
B. Provide cast-in-place concrete pad for Utility Company transformer, under the provisions
of Division 1.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 27 15 - 2

SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; and device plates and
decorative box covers.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) - Standard of Installation.
B. NEMA WD 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - General Requirements for
Wiring Devices.
C. NEMA WD 6 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Wiring Device --
Dimensional Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors,
and configurations.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of each wiring device and wall plate illustrating materials,
construction, color, and finish.
D. Device color will be selected by the architect/owner during this review phase.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Supply two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Pass & Seymour Model 20AC1
2. Hubbell Model 1221
3. Bryant Model 4901
4. Cooper Model 2221
5. Leviton Model 1221-2
6. Substitutions: Under Provisions of Division 1.
B. Provide 2 pole, 3-way, 4-way, pilot lighted, keyed, momentary, etc. to match the
manufacturer series as indicated above.
10-034 26 27 26-1

C. Description: NEMA WD 1, Specification grade, AC only heavy duty snap switch meeting
UL Federal Specification, WS-896.
D. Body and Handle: Plastic with toggle handle.
E. Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; color lens.
F. Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch; color handle.
G. Ratings:
1. Voltage: 120 or 277 volts, AC as indicated on drawings.
2. Current: 20 amperes.
H. Color of devices and plates will be selected by the architect/owner during the shop
drawing submittal.
2.2 WALL DIMMERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Pass & Seymour
2. Hubbell
3. Leviton
4. Substitutions: Under Provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: NEMA WD 1; Semiconductor dimmer for incandescent lamps,
Type as required for load served.
C. Body and Handle: Plastic with linear slide.
D. Voltage: 120 volts.
E. Power Rating: Match load shown on drawings; 600 watts minimum.
F. Power Rating: As indicated in schedule.
G. Accessory Wall Switch: Match dimmer appearance.
H. Color of devices and plates will be selected by the architect/owner during the shop
drawing submittal.
2.3 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Pass & Seymour Model 5362A
2. Hubbell Model 5362
3. Cooper Model 5362
4. Leviton Model 5362
5. Substitutions: Permitted Under Provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty general use receptacle meeting UL
Federal Specification, WC-596.
C. Device Body: Plastic, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
E. Convenience Receptacle: 20A, 120V, with ground.
10-034 26 27 26-2

F. Hospital Grade Receptacle: 20A, 120V, with ground in areas required by code.
G. .050” solid brass mounting strip with non riveted, integral one piece grounding system.
H. TAMPER RESISTANT Receptacle: Leviton 16262-SGI, or equal. Plastic inserts are not
acceptable.
I. Color of devices and plates will be selected by the architect/owner during the shop
drawing submittal.
2.4 GFI RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bryant Model GFR53FT
2. Cooper Model XGF20
3. Leviton Model 8899
4. Substitutions: Permitted Under Provisions of Division 1.
B. GFI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to
meet UL 943 Class A, 2003 revised standards.
C. Product Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty general use receptacle meeting UL
Federal Specification, WC-596.
D. Device Body: Plastic, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
E. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
F. Convenience Receptacle: 20A, 120V, with ground.
G. Hospital Grade Receptacle: 20A, 120V, with ground in areas required by code.
H. Color of devices and plates will be selected by the architect/owner during the shop
drawing submittal.
2.5 WALL PLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Match device served.
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Decorative Cover Plate: Nylon.
C. Jumbo Cover Plate: Nylon.
D. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Stainless steel plate with hinged and gasketed device cover.
Weatherproof rating to remain when in use.
E. Color of devices and plates will be selected by the architect/owner during the shop
drawing submittal.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
10-034 26 27 26-3

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection
to wiring devices.
E. Verify that the device is compatible with the load being served prior to installation or
purchase.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install devices plumb and level.
C. Install switches with OFF position down.
D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging
as instructed by manufacturer.
E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch
circuit equipment grounding conductor.
H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Stranded
conductor may be used for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. However, if stranded
conductors are used in lieu of solid, then fork terminals shall be crimped on for all device
terminations. Bare stranded conductors shall not be placed directly under the device
screws.
J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,
above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33 to obtain mounting
heights specified and indicated on drawings.
B. Install wall switch 44 inches above finished floor.
C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
D. Install convenience receptacle 4 inches above counter or back splash of counter.
E. Install dimmer 44 inches above finished floor.
10-034 26 27 26-4

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services; Division 1 - Execution
Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
D. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
F. Test each GFI receptacle device for proper operation.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 27 26-5

SECTION 26 28 19
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fusible and nonfusible switches.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) -Standard of Installation.
B. NEMA FU1 (National Electrical Contractors Association).- Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
C. NEMA KS 1 (National Electrical Contractors Association)- Enclosed and Miscellaneous
Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
D. NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International
Electrical Testing Association).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches and ratings of
installed fuses.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square-D
2. Cutler-Hammer
B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD (Heavy Duty) with externally operable handle
interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load
interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.
10-034 26 28 19 - 1

D. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, as required to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel
finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. In environments where corrosion is a
concern (such as kitchens), use stainless steel.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
3. Industrial Locations: Type 4X.
4. Food Service – Kitchens: Type 4X.
E. Service Entrance: Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for
this application. Provide solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar.
F. Switches shall have all copper current carrying parts.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square-D
2. Cutler-Hammer
B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD (Heavy Duty) with externally operable handle
interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load
interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, as required to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel
finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. In environments where corrosion is a
concern (such as kitchens), use stainless steel.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
3. Industrial Locations: Type 4X.
4. Food Service – Kitchens: Type 4X.
D. Switches shall have all copper current carrying parts.
2.3 SWITCH RATINGS
A. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC and/or DC as required by the equipment being
supplied by the switch. Verify with the trade supplying the equipment, in all cases.
B. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used
with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 ampere); 200,000 rms symmetrical
amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses (30-600 ampere
switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes); 200,000 rms symmetrical
amperes when used with or protected by Class L fuses (800-1200 ampere).
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Carefully review the shop drawings of all other trades to determine if the disconnect is
included with their equipment. Provide a suitable disconnect for the load served based on
the shop drawings. Do not purchase/install switches without first verifying the exact
requirement.
10-034 26 28 19 - 2

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle.
D. Locate and install engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 00.
E. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and
size installed.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services; Division 1 - Execution
Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 28 19 - 3

SECTION 26 32 13
ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes engine generator set, heat exchanger, exhaust silencer and fittings,
transfer switches, fuel fittings, remote control panel, remote emergency stop station, load
bank, battery, and charger.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NEMA AB 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Molded Case Circuit
Breakers.
B. NEMA ICS 10 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Industrial Control and
Systems: AC Transfer Switch Equipment.
C. NEMA MG 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Motors and Generators.
D. NEMA 250 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum.)
E. NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association)- Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
F. NFPA 30 (National Fire Protection Association) - Flammable and Combustible Liquids
Code.
G. NFPA 99 (National Fire Protection Association) - Health Care Facilities.
H. NFPA 110 (National Fire Protection Association) - Emergency and Standby Power
Systems.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Description: Engine generator assembly and accessories to provide source of power in
accordance with NFPA 110, and conforming to NFPA 99.
B. Capacity: As indicated in this section, continuous rating using specified engine cooling
scheme.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Show
plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel
consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements,
electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams.
C. Product Data: Submit data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points,
and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, transfer switches,
10-034 26 32 13 - 1

emote emergency stop station, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer
and vibration isolators.
D. Test Reports: Indicate results of performance testing.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate inspections, findings, and recommendations.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions and service manuals for normal
operation, routine maintenance, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and
emergency maintenance procedures.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within
100miles of project.
B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of engine generator and transfer switches for one year
from Date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Supply one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator
system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box.
C. Supply two of each fuel, oil and air filter element.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 ENGINE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Onan
2. Kohler
3. Caterpillar
4. Generac Industrial Products Division
5. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
10-034 26 32 13 - 2

B. Product Description: Four-stroke cycle or two-stroke cycle, internal combustion engine.
C. Rating: Sufficient to operate under 10 percent overload for one hour.
D. Fuel System: Natural gas.
E. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure,
overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer.
F. Engine Starting: DC starting system with positive engagement, number and voltage of
starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Include remote starting
control circuit, with MANUAL-OFF-REMOTE selector switch on engine-generator control
panel.
G. Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostatic
control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90 degrees F, and suitable for operation
on 120 volts AC.
H. Engine Mounted Radiator: Radiator using glycol coolant, with blower type fan, sized to
maintain safe engine temperature in ambient temperature of 110 degrees F.
I. Engine Accessories: Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, fuel transfer
pump, fuel priming pump, gear-driven water pump. Include fuel pressure gage, water
temperature gage, and lube oil pressure gage on engine/generator control panel.
J. Mounting: Provide unit with suitable spring-type vibration isolators and mount on
structural steel base.
2.2 GENERATOR
A. Manufacturers:
1. Onan.
2. Kohler
3. Caterpillar
4. Generac Industrial Products Division
5. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Product Description: NEMA MG1, three phase, reconnectable brushless synchronous
generator with brushless exciter.
C. Rating: 250 and 350kW, at 0.8 power factor, 208Y/120 volts, 60 Hz.
D. Insulation Class: F.
E. Temperature Rise: 130 degrees C Standby.
F. Enclosure: NEMA MG1, open drip proof.
G. Voltage Regulation: Include generator-mounted volts per hertz exciter-regulator to match
engine and generator characteristics, with voltage regulation plus or minus 1 percent from
no load to full load. Include manual controls to adjust voltage droop, voltage level (plus or
minus 5 percent) and voltage gain.
10-034 26 32 13 - 3

2.3 GOVERNOR
A. Product Description: Governor sized to maintain engine speed within 0.5 percent, steady
state, and 5 percent, no load to full load, with recovery to steady state within 2 seconds
following sudden load changes. Equip governor with means for manual operation and
adjustment.
2.4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (TWO REQUIRED PER GENERATOR)
A. Product Description: NEMA ICS 10, automatic transfer switch.
B. Configuration: Electrically operated, mechanically held transfer switch.
C. Interrupting Capacity: 125 percent of continuous rating.
D. Withstand Current Rating: 42k rms symmetrical amperes, when used with molded case
circuit breaker.
E. Control Features and Functions:
1. Indicating Lights: Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCE
AVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, switch position.
2. Test Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source.
3. Return to Normal Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to initiate manual transfer
from alternate source to normal source.
4. Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: 1 normally open; 1 normally closed.
5. Normal Source Monitor: Monitor each line of normal source voltage and
frequency; initiate transfer when voltage drops below 85 percent or frequency
varies more than 3 percent Hertz from rated nominal value.
6. Alternate Source Monitor: Monitor alternate source voltage and frequency; inhibit
transfer when voltage is below 85 percent or frequency varies more than 3
percent Hertz from rated nominal value.
7. In-Phase Monitor: Inhibit transfer until source and load are within one electrical
degrees.
8. Switched Neutral: Non-Overlapping contacts.
F. Automatic Sequence of Operation:
1. Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: Upon initiation by
normal source monitor.
2. Time Delay To Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: 0 to 5 seconds,
adjustable.
3. Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon initiation by normal source
monitor and permission by alternate source monitor.
4. Time Delay Before Transfer to Alternate Power Source: 0 to 5 seconds,
adjustable.
5. Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source
monitor.
6. Time Delay Before Transfer to Normal Power: 0 to 15 minutes, adjustable;
bypass time delay in event of alternate source failure.
G. Time Delay Before Engine Shut Down: 0 to 30 minutes, adjustable, of unloaded
operation.
H. Engine Exerciser: Start engine every 30 days; run for 30 minutes before shutting down.
Bypass exerciser control if normal source fails during exercising period.
10-034 26 32 13 - 4

I. Alternate System Exerciser: Transfer load to alternate source during engine exercising
period.
J. Enclosure:
1. Enclosure: ICS 10, Type 1.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Exhaust Silencer: Critical grade type silencer, with muffler companion flanges and flexible
stainless steel exhaust fitting, sized in accordance with engine manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Batteries: Heavy duty, diesel starting type lead-acid storage batteries, 170 ampere-hours
minimum capacity. Match battery voltage to starting system. Include necessary cables
and clamps.
C. Battery Tray: Treated for electrolyte resistance, constructed to contain spillage.
D. Battery Charger: Current limiting type designed to float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize
at 2.33 volts per cell. Include overload protection, full wave rectifier, DC voltmeter and
ammeter, and 120 volts AC fused input. Provide wall-mounted enclosure to meet NEMA
250, Type 1 requirements.
E. Line Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, molded case circuit breaker on generator output with
integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Include battery-voltage
operated shunt trip, connected to open circuit breaker on engine failure. Unit mount in
enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements in quantities and sized per the
electrical drawings.
F. Engine-Generator Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 1 generator-mounted control panel
enclosure with engine and generator controls and indicators. Include provision for
padlock and the following equipment and features:
1. Frequency Meter: 45-65 Hz. range.
2. AC Output Voltmeter: 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch.
3. AC Output Ammeter: 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch.
4. Output voltage adjustment.
5. Push-to-test indicator lamps, one each for low oil pressure, high water
temperature, overspeed, and overcrank.
6. Engine start/stop selector switch.
7. Engine running time meter.
8. Oil pressure gage.
9. Water temperature gage.
10. Auxiliary Relay: 3PDT, operates when engine runs, with contact terminals
prewired to terminal strip.
11. Additional visual indicators and alarms as required by NFPA 110.
12. Remote Alarm Contacts: Pre-wire SPDT contacts to terminal strip for remote
alarm functions required by NFPA 110.
G. Remote Annunciator Panel: Surface or Flush mounted panel (verify with architect and
owner) with painted finish, white color. Provide alarm horn, and indicators and alarms as
follows (required to meet NFPA 110):
1. High battery voltage (alarm).
2. Low battery voltage (alarm).
10-034 26 32 13 - 5

3. Low fuel (alarm).
4. System ready.
5. Anticipatory-high water temperature.
6. Anticipatory-low oil pressure.
7. Low coolant temperature.
8. Switch in off position (alarm).
9. Overcrank (alarm).
10. Emergency stop (alarm).
11. High water temperature (alarm).
12. Overspeed (alarm).
13. Low oil pressure (alarm).
14. Line power available.
15. Generator power available.
16. Lamp test and horn silence switch.
H. Weather-protective Enclosure: Reinforced steel housing allowing access to control panel
and service points, with lockable doors and panels. Include fixed louvers, battery rack,
and silencer.
I. Load Banks: Complete load bank for pacing resistive load on generator and mounted to
the generator. 208 volts 3 phase 75kw for 250kw generator, and 100KW for 350kw
generator. Complete with transfer switches, disconnect, controller, ventilation fans and
enclosure as required. Provide circuit breaker as shown on plans or as directed by
manufacturer for powering the load bank.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly.
B. Make completed engine-generator assembly available for inspection at manufacturer’s
factory prior to packaging for shipment. Notify Owner at least seven days before
inspection is allowed.
C. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer’s test facility. Notify
Owner at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Ground and bond generator and other electrical system components under the provisions
of Section 26 05 00.
C. Provide necessary conduits and circuits for power and control to the generator. Verify
requirement with the generator manufacturer. If panel space is not available, advise the
engineer.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services and Division 1 -
Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing].
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
10-034 26 32 13 - 6

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturer’s field services.
B. Prepare and start up engine-generator assembly.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed to meet specified ratings.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Provide 8 hours of instruction each for two persons, to be conducted at project site with
manufacturer's representative.
B. Describe loads connected to emergency and standby system and restrictions for future
load additions.
C. Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate that system
operates to provide emergency and standby power.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 32 13 - 7

SECTION 26 50 00
LUMINAIRES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications.
B. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps
(Multiple Supply Type).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 26 00 10 – Shop Drawing Requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a
standard product of the manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
D. Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch in size illustrating luminaire finish color where
indicated in luminaire schedule.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Provide two of each plastic lens type.
C. Projects with less than 100 total light fixtures, provide:
1. Two replacement lamps for each lamp type installed.
2. Two of each electronically ballast type ballast, and one of each HID type ballast.
D. Projects with greater than 100 total light fixtures, provide:
1. Six replacement lamps for each lamp type installed.
2. Ten of each electronically ballast type ballast, and two of each HID type ballast.
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions are permitted as voluntary alternates. Base bid must reflect the specified
equipment. If substitutions are made without the architect’s/engineer’s written approval,
shop drawings will not be reviewed without proper compensation. Submit a $500 retainer
along with the shop drawings. The shop drawings will then be reviewed at a billable rate
of $85.00 per hour until the complete retainer is expended. A refund of the unused
portion of the shop drawing approval payment may be requested by the electrical
10-034 26 50 00 - 1

contractor at the end of the project. If the entire $500 amount is not used, a refund will be
provided for the unused portion.
B. A product must go through the following process before being approved as a substitution:
1. A list of substitutions shall be provided to the owner as an attachment to the bid
form. Submit along with the list of substitutions catalog cut sheets, photometric
reports, and a point by point of each space showing the footcandle levels
achieved with the substitute fixture, and the amount saved by using each fixture
type.
2. The list will be reviewed by the owner and the engineer to determine whether the
fixtures meet the project needs. A $500 retainer will be submitted with the list of
voluntary alternates to cover this meeting. If the owner and engineer agree that
this meeting is not required, then the $500 will be returned to the contractor.
3. The retainer is for evaluation of the alternate. The retainer is to be used to cover
the time spent in this evaluation. The fee will be collected based on time spent in
evaluation, not on whether the alternate is accepted. All unused portions will be
returned to the contractor with an invoice marked “paid” by the engineer,
architect, and/or owner.
C. When a substitute product is submitted, the time requirement to review the shop drawings
is approximately one month. Make sure the project schedule can absorb the additional
time.
D. Along with any substitution, include the base bid fixture cutsheet for the owner’s and
architect’s reference. State on the cut sheet that the fixture is “included for reference and
represents the base bid fixture specification”.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and
accessories as scheduled.
B. Refer to Division 1 - Product Requirements for product options.
2.2 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A. Product Description: Complete exterior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and
accessories as scheduled.
B. Provide the following accessories:
1. Handhole.
2. Anchor bolts.
3. Anchor bolt covers.
2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTS AND EXIT SIGNS
A. Product Description: Self-contained incandescent emergency lighting unit.
B. Battery: Voltage as scheduled, nickel-cadmium type, with 1.5 hour capacity.
C. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to
full charge within twelve hours.
D. Lamps: As scheduled with unit.
E. Remote Fixtures: As scheduled.
F. Housing: White Plastic.
10-034 26 50 00 - 2

G. Indicators: Lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING.
H. TEST switch: Transfers unit from external power supply to integral battery supply.
I. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection.
J. Input Voltage: 120 or 277 volts, to match general ambient lighting where installed.
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. Manufacturers:
1. As scheduled.
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 26 50 00.
B. Product Description: Exit sign fixture suitable for use as emergency lighting unit.
C. Housing: As scheduled.
D. Face: As scheduled.
E. Directional Arrows: As indicated with Universal type for field adjustment.
F. Mounting: Universal, for field selection.
G. Battery: 6 volt, nickel-cadmium type, with 1.5 hour capacity.
H. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to
full charge within twelve hours.
I. Lamps: LED.
J. Input Voltage: 120 or 277 volts, to match adjacent ambient lighting where installed.
2.5 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Magnetech
2. Osram/Sylvania
3. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B. Product Description: Rapid start electronic ballast less than 20% THD, suitable for lamps
specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage. Ballasts for similar fixtures shall come
from the same batch to allow for greatest consistency in installation. The manufacturer
shall provide a quality control statement assuring that the ballasts are in proper working
order.
2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bodine
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 26 50 00.
B. Product Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast
compartment of fluorescent luminaire.
C. Lamp Ratings: One or two 32W T8 lamps providing 3000 lumens, minimum for 2 lamp
luminaires and three 32W T8 lamps providing 3000 lumens for 3 lamp luminaires. Bodine
B30 and B33, respectively. For compact fluorescent lamps, use B84CG (1250 lumens)
emergency ballast.
10-034 26 50 00 - 3

D. Battery: Sealed Nickel-Cadmium type, rated for 10 year life.
E. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from
the outside of an assembled luminaire.
2.7 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Magnetech
2. Osram/Sylvania
3. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B. Product Description: ANSI C82.4, metal halide and high pressure sodium lamp ballast,
suitable for lamp specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage. Ballasts for similar
fixtures shall come from the same batch to allow for greatest consistency in installation.
The manufacturer shall provide a quality control statement assuring that the ballasts are
in proper working order.
C. For remote ballasts, carefully adhere to the manufacturer’s recommendations on distance
limitations.
2.8 FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Advance Mark VII or
2. Ballast selected by dimming system or fixture manufacturer as suitable for
system or fixture. Ballast shall not hum and shall contain the warranty as listed in
Part 3 – Execution.
3. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B. Product Description: Electrical assembly of control unit and ballast to provide smooth
dimming of fluorescent lamps.
C. Control Unit: Linear slide type, volts. Refer to drawings for lower wattage units.
D. Ballast: Selected by dimming system manufacturer as suitable for operation with control
unit and suitable for lamp type and quantity specified for luminaire. Ballasts for similar
fixtures shall come from the same batch to allow for greatest consistency in installation.
The manufacturer shall provide a quality control statement assuring that the ballasts are
in proper working order.
2.9 INCANDESCENT LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Sylvania
2. Phillips
3. Substitutions: Division 1 - Product Requirements.
B. Lamps of the same type will be from the same batch to provide maximum consistency in
color output.
2.10 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Sylvania
2. Phillips
3. Substitutions: Division 1 - Product Requirements.
10-034 26 50 00 - 4

B. Lamps of the same type will be from the same batch to provide maximum consistency in
color output.
2.11 HID LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Sylvania
2. Phillips
3. Substitutions: Division 1 - Product Requirements.
B. All HID lamps are to have a burn in period of 150 hours prior to installation. All lamps not
within 2% of listed Chromaticity (or Lamp Color, measured in degree Kelvins) or CRI are
to be replaced from another batch to assure proper color.
C. Metal Halide Lamps: Indoor lamps shall be coated, with a chromaticity range of 3300K to
3700K and a CRI of 70 to 75. Outdoor lamps shall be coated or clear, with a chromaticity
range of 3700K to 4200K and a CRI of 65 to 70.
D. Lamps of the same type will be from the same batch to provide maximum consistency in
color output.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaries.
B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified.
C. Examine excavation and concrete foundation for lighting poles.
D. Examine lamps, ballasts and light output after installation. If the fixture is not operating
properly, or if the lamp color is not normal, then investigate the lamp and ballast batch
with the manufacturer. Provide new lamps and ballasts as required to obtain optimum
performance as determined by the engineer/architect.
E. Lamps provided with fixtures shall be “burned in” at time of delivery to the project site with
the above requirements met.
F. Verify foundations are ready to receive site lighting fixtures.
G. Verify that the fixtures specified will fit in the areas where they are to be installed prior to
purchase/rough-in.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install suspended luminaires using aircraft cable. Provide cable length required to
suspend luminaire at indicated height.
B. Support luminaires independent of ceiling framing.
C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with
each other. Secure to prevent movement.
E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
F. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and fire-stopping materials to meet
regulatory requirements for fire rating
10-034 26 50 00 - 5

G. When non-IC rated fixtures are installed in an IC application, the surrounding area shall
be boxed out such that the insulation does not come in contact with the fixture.
H. When recessed fixtures penetrate the building envelope between conditioned and nonconditioned
spaces, the penetration shall be properly sealed to eliminate air movement
from a conditioned space to a non-conditioned space.
I. Install grid clips to secure recessed luminaires to ceiling grid.
J. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height as indicated. If no height is indicated, contact
engineer and request information.
K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
L. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 05 33 using
flexible conduit.
M. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaire.
N. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
O. Ground and bond interior luminaires with branch circuit grounding conductor under the
provisions of Section 26 05 00.
P. Provide concrete bases for lighting poles at locations indicated, under the provisions of
Division 1.
Q. Install poles plumb. Provide double nuts to adjust plumb. Grout around each base.
R. Install lamps in each luminaire.
S. Bond and ground luminaries, metal accessories and metal poles under the provisions of
Section 26 05 00. Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole.
T. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide
pendant length required to suspend sign at indicated height.
U. Install wall-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs at 6” below ceiling.
V. Install accessories furnished with each emergency lighting unit and exit sign.
W. Connect emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under
Section 26 05 33 as indicated.
X. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within unit.
Y. Ground and bond emergency lighting units and exit signs under the provisions of Section
26 05 00.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services; Division 1 - Starting
and Adjusting: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection
and operation.
10-034 26 50 00 - 6

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated. Upon completion, demonstrate operation of
aimed luminaires to owner and adjust as directed by owner’s representative.
C. Adjust exit sign arrows as indicated or as directed by the authority having jurisdiction.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work.
B. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps, or lamps that do not meet the chromaticity
requirements, at Substantial Completion.
C. Replace all ballasts that are not operating correctly at end of project. Continue to replace
ballasts that are not operating correctly for a period of two (2) years, with no additional
cost to owner for labor or materials.
END OF SECTION
10-034 26 50 00 - 7

SECTION 27 05 11
REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section, Requirements for Communications Installations, applies to all sections of
Division 27.
B. Furnish and install communications cabling, systems, equipment, and accessories in
accordance with the specifications and drawings.
1.02 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
A. References to industry and trade association standards and codes are minimum installation
requirement standards.
B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where
requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as
one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this
project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.
B. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or
trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within
eight hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of
service organizations.
1.04 INITIAL COORDINATION MEETING
A. Prior to beginning work, schedule an initial coordination meeting with the Owner’s IT
Department.
B. At this meeting review the following:
1. Your understanding of rack layout and utilization.
2. Your understanding of identification requirements.
3. Contact information for Western Wisconsin Telephone, Aufderworld Corporation, the
Owner’s IT staff. Identify your own staff and provide email and cell phone information.
4. Scheduling of removal of existing TV system components.
5. Your understanding of the Owner’s requirements for labeling, color coding,
termination style, etc.
1.05 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical
damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:
1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective
devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and
be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and
repainting if required.
2. Damaged equipment shall be placed in first class operating condition or be returned to
the source of supply for repair or replacement.
3. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality
REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION
27 05 11-1

1.06 WORK PERFORMANCE
SECTION 27 05 11
REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION
of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not
obvious.
A. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.
B. Coordinate location of equipment and pathways with other trades to minimize interferences.
See the GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.07 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.
B. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for
operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as
directed at no additional cost.
1.08 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and
maintenance of equipment.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved
lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates
that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of
identification is herein specified, are exceptions.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A. Delivery, storage, or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval
will not be permitted at the job site.
B. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings, and
other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and
materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall
be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.
C. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one
item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals
will not be considered for approval.
D. The submittals shall include the following:
E. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's
name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings,
pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.
F. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems,
control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified
on wiring diagrams.
G. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.
H. Manuals:
1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment
specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders,
(manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete
REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION
27 05 11-2

1.10 TRAINING
SECTION 27 05 11
REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION
manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to
performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to
contract completion.
A. Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each
associated specification.
B. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the
Construction Manager at least 30 days prior to the planned training.
END OF SECTION
REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION
27 05 11-3

SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Section Includes: Equipment, materials, labor, and services to provide telephone and data
distribution system including, but not limited to:
1. Raceway, boxes, and cable tray
2. Telephone and data cabling terminations
3. Telecommunications outlets
4. Terminal blocks
5. Equipment racks and cabinets
6. System testing
7. Documentation and submissions
B. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, and services, not specifically mentioned or shown,
which may be necessary to complete or perfect all parts of the installation. Ensure that they
are in compliance with requirements stated or reasonably inferred by the contract documents.
C. Existing Systems
D. Work not included:
1. The following work will be done by the Owner:
a. Off-site services.
b. Providing data concentrators, hubs, servers, computers, and other active
devices.
c. Providing telephones, including weatherproof housings for exterior phones.
2. The following work will be done by DIV 26:
a. Provide conduit stubs and boxes for TV, nurse call and perimeter alarm,
voice/data, and resident phones.
b. Providing conduits between buildings and to exterior.
c. Providing line voltage connections to equipment requiring them.
d. Providing ground buses, cables and lugs.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Design, manufacture, test, and install telecommunications cabling networks per
manufacturer’s requirements and in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code®),
state codes, local codes, requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and particularly the
following standards:
1. ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568 -- Standard for Installing Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling
2. ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards
a. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 1: General Requirements
b. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components
c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 -- Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
d. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A -- Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-1

SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
e. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) -- The Administration Standard for the
Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
f. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607(A) -- Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
g. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 -- Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-
Mode Fiber Cable Plant
h. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A -- Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed
Multimode Fiber Cable Plant
i. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758(A) -- Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Cabling Standard
B. Install cabling in accordance with the most recent edition of BICSI® publications:
1. BICSI -- Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
2. BICSI -- Cabling Installation Manual
3. BICSI -- LAN Design Manual
4. BICSI – Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual
C. Federal, state, and local codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances governing the work, are as
fully part of the specifications as if herein repeated or hereto attached. If the contractor should
note items in the drawings or the specifications, construction of which would be code
violations, promptly call them to the attention of the owner's representative in writing. Where
the requirements of other sections of the specifications are more stringent than applicable
codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances, the specifications shall apply.
1.03 PERMITS, FEES, AND CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL
A. Obtain all permits necessary for work under this contract.
B. As prerequisite to final acceptance, supply to the owner certificates of inspection from an
inspection agency acceptable to the owner and approved by local municipality and utility
company serving the project.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. A telecommunications cabling system consists of telecommunications outlets in each
workstation, wall telephones in common and mechanical areas, telecommunications rooms
(TRs) located in each building, and the equipment room (ER) located in the Large Core. Rate
demarcation point (RDP) is located in the Large Core.
B. The typical work area consists of a single-gang plate with three standards compliant work
area outlets.
1. All three work area outlets consist of four-pair data Category 5e cables, installed from
work area outlet to the TR. Terminate all cables on wall /rack mounted modular patch
panels located in the appropriate TR.
2. One outlet blank to cover unused opening (for future use).
C. Horizontal copper backbone cabling consists of multiple pair unshielded twisted-pair installed
from the main cross-connect (MC) to the horizontal cross-connect (HC) and/or from the MC to
the intermediate cross-connect (IC) to the HC. This backbone will be utilized for resident
voice telecommunications service.
D. Horizontal fiber backbone cabling will be provided under separate contract by Western
Wisconsin Telephone Company.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-2

1.05 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
A. Submit to the engineer/designer shop drawings, product data (including cut sheets and
catalog information), and samples required by the contract documents. Submit shop
drawings, product data, and samples with such promptness and in such sequence as to
cause no delay in the work or in the activities of separate contractors. The engineer/designer
will indicate approval of shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted to the engineer
by stamping such submittals "APPROVED" with a stamp. Submitted shop drawings shall be
initialed or signed by the contractor, showing the date and the contractor's legitimate firm
name.
1. By submitting shop drawings, product data, and samples, the contractor represents
that he or she has carefully reviewed and verified materials, quantities, field
measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto. It also represents that
the contractor has checked, coordinated, and verified that information contained within
shop drawings, product data, and samples conform to the requirements of the work
and of the contract documents. The engineer/designer remains responsible for the
design concept expressed in the contract documents as defined herein.
2. The engineer’s/designer’s approval of shop drawings, product data, and samples
submitted by the contractor shall not relieve the contractor of responsibility for
deviations from requirements of the contract documents, unless the contractor has
specifically informed the engineer/designer in writing of such deviation at time of
submittal, and the engineer/designer has given written approval of the specific
deviation. The contractor shall continue to be responsible for deviations from
requirements of the contract documents not specifically noted by the contractor in
writing, and specifically approved by the engineer in writing.
3. The engineer’s/designer’s approval of shop drawings, product data, and samples shall
not relieve the contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in such shop
drawings, product data, and samples.
4. The engineer’s/designer’s review and approval, or other appropriate action upon shop
drawings, product data, and samples, is for the limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and design concept expressed in the contract
documents. The engineer’s/designer’s review of such submittals is not conducted for
the purpose of determining accuracy and completeness of other details such as
dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or
performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the
contractor as required by the contract documents. The review shall not constitute
approval of safety precautions or of construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures. The engineer’s/designer’s approval of a specific item shall
not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.
B. Perform no portion of the work requiring submittal and review of shop drawings, product data,
or samples, until the engineer/designer has approved the respective submittal. Such work
shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
C. Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples as a complete set within thirty (30) days of
award of contract.
1. For initial submission and for resubmission required for approval, submit four (4)
copies of each item. The engineer/designer will only return two copies. Make
reproductions as required for your use and distribution to subcontractors.
2. Illegible submittals will not be checked by the engineer.
D. General: Submit the following:
1. Bill of materials, noting long lead time items
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-3

SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
2. Project schedule including all major work components that materially affect any other
work on the project
E. Shop drawings: Submit the following:
1. Backbone (riser) diagrams.
2. System block diagram, indicating interconnection between system components and
subsystems.
3. Interface requirements, including connector types and pin-outs, to external systems
and systems or components not supplied by the contractor.
4. Fabrication drawings for custom-built equipment.
F. Product Data -- Provide catalog cut sheets and information for the following:
1. Wire and cable
2. Outlets, jacks, faceplates, and connectors
3. All metallic and nonmetallic raceways, including surface raceways, outlet boxes, and
fittings
4. Terminal blocks and patch panels
5. Enclosures, racks, and equipment housings
6. Over-voltage protectors
7. Splice housings
G. Project record drawings:
1. Submit project record drawings at conclusion of the project and include:
a. Approved shop drawings
b. Plan drawings indicating locations and identification of work area outlets,
nodes, telecommunications rooms (TRs), and backbone (riser) cable runs
c. Telecommunications rooms (TRs) and equipment room (ER and/or MC)
termination detail sheets.
d. Cross-connect schedules including entrance point, main cross-connects,
intermediate cross-connects, and horizontal cross-connects.
e. Labeling and administration documentation.
f. Warranty documents for equipment.
g. Copper certification test result printouts and diskettes.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following manufacturer’s cabling systems are approved for the work of this section:
1. Hubbell, Ortronics, Panduit or other approved equal.
2. Berk-Tek
3. Belden
4. Mohawk
5. Commscope
6. Superior Essex
7. Optical Cable Corporation
B. The contractor shall be a certified installer.
C. The contractor shall have worked satisfactorily for a minimum of five (5) years on systems of
this type and size.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-4

SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
D. Equipment and materials of the type for which there are independent standard testing
requirements, listings, and labels, shall be listed and labeled by the independent testing
laboratory.
E. Where equipment and materials have industry certification, labels, or standards (i.e., NEMA -
National Electrical Manufacturers Association), this equipment shall be labeled as certified or
complying with standards.
F. Material and equipment shall be new, and conform to grade, quality, and standards specified.
Equipment and materials of the same type shall be a product of the same manufacturer
throughout.
G. Subcontractors shall assume all rights and obligations toward the contractor that the
contractor assumes toward the owner and engineer/designer.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Unconditionally guarantee in writing the materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period
of not less than fifteen (15) years from date of acceptance by the owner. The owner shall
deem acceptance as beneficial use.
B. Transfer manufacturer's warranties to the owner in addition to the General System Guarantee.
Submit these warranties on each item in list form with shop drawings. Detail specific parts
within equipment that are subject to separate conditional warranty. Warranty proprietary
equipment and systems involved in this contract during the guarantee period. Final payment
shall not relieve you of these obligations.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect equipment during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, theft, soiling, and
misalignment. Coordinate with the owner for secure storage of equipment and materials. Do
not store equipment where conditions fall outside manufacturer's recommendations for
environmental conditions. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace
damaged equipment with new equipment.
1.09 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
A. Submit schedule for installation of equipment and cabling. Indicate delivery, installation, and
testing for conformance to specific job completion dates. As a minimum, dates are to be
provided for bid award, installation start date, completion of station cabling, completion of riser
cabling, completion of testing and labeling, cutover, completion of the final punch list, start of
demolition, owner acceptance, and demolition completion.
1.10 USE OF THE SITE
A. Use of the site shall be at the owner's direction in matters in which the owner deems it
necessary to place restriction.
B. Access to building wherein the work is performed shall be as directed by the owner.
C. The owner will occupy the premises during the entire period of construction for conducting his
or her normal business operations. Cooperate with the owner to minimize conflict and to
facilitate the owner's operations.
D. Proceed with the work without interfering with ordinary use of streets, aisles, passages, exits,
and operations of the owner.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. See article 1.06A.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate custom-made equipment with careful consideration given to aesthetic, technical,
and functional aspects of equipment and its installation.
2.03 SUITABILITY
A. Provide products that are suitable for intended use, including, but not limited to environmental,
regulatory, and electrical.
2.04 BACKBONE CABLE
A. VOICE/DATA TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE BACKBONE CABLE
1. Solid copper, 24 AWG, 100 W balanced twisted-pair (UTP) backbone cable, in sizes
as indicated on the drawings, with mechanical and transmission performance
specifications that meet or exceed ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2
a. Listed Type CMR.
B. Multimode and single mode optical fiber will be provided under separate contract by Western
Wisconsin Telephone Company.
2.05 STATION CABLE
A. VOICE TELECOMMUNICATIONS STATION CABLE
1. Solid copper, 24 AWG, 100 W balanced twisted-pair (UTP) Category 5e cables with
four individually twisted-pairs, which meet or exceed the mechanical and transmission
performance specifications in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 up to 100 MHz.
a. Listed Type CMR.
b. Cable jacket to be blue.
B. DATA STATION CABLE
1. Solid copper, 24 AWG, 100 W balanced twisted-pair (UTP) Category 5e cables with
four individually twisted-pairs, which meet or exceed the mechanical and transmission
performance specifications in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 up to 100 MHz.
a. Listed Type CMR.
b. Cable jacket to be blue.
C. WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLE
1. Solid copper, 24 AWG, 100 W balanced twisted-pair (UTP) Category 5e cables with
four individually twisted-pairs, which meet or exceed the mechanical and transmission
performance specifications in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 up to 100 MHz.
a. Listed Type CMR.
b. Cable jacket to be GRAY.
2.06 UNDERGROUND TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE (COPPER)
A. Solid copper, 24 AWG 100 W balanced twisted-pair, gel-filled duct cable, in sizes as indicated
on the drawings, which meet or exceed the mechanical and transmission performance
specifications listed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-758(A).
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-6

SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
2.07 WORK AREA OUTLETS
A. VOICE/DATA – COPPER WORK AREA OUTLETS
1. Single-gang mounting plate with four (4) openings containing the following devices:
a. One Voice Outlet - 8-pin modular, category 5e, unkeyed, ivory, pinned to either
T568 (A or B) standards.
b. Two Data Outlets - 8-pin modular, category 5e, unkeyed, black, pinned to either
T568 (A or B) standards.
c. One dust cover.
B. WALL VOICE OUTLETS
1. Single-gang stainless steel faceplate with six-conductor jack and wall telephone
mounting lugs.
C. DATA ONLY WORK AREA OUTLET
1. Single-gang faceplate with 8-pin modular, category 5e, unkeyed, black data jack,
pinned to either T568 A standards.
2.08 TERMINATION BLOCKS
A. Product(s) as approved by the engineer/designer: Wiring blocks are to be in following
configurations:
1. List dimensional configurations
2. ER – List pairs connectorized for PBX portion of ER and pairs field terminated for
backbone and CO portion of ER
B. Provide wiring troughs between ER frame sections.
2.09 PATCH PANELS
A. 19 in. rack mountable, 48 and 24-port 8-pin modular to insulation displacement connector
(IDC) meeting Category 5e performance standards, and pinned to T568A standards. Typical
examples of IDC connections are the 110, BIX, and Krone.
2.10 RACK MOUNTED OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATION PANEL
A. Allow room in rack for termination panel furnished by Western Wisconsin Telephone
Company.
2.11 SPLICE TRAYS
A. Allow room in rack for splice trays furnished by Western Wisconsin Telephone Company.
2.12 OPEN FRAME EQUIPMENT RACK
A. Open frame, 19 in. equipment rack, 7 foot 6 in. overall height with flange base, mounting rails
drilled front and back and tapped to EIA standards, and a front-rack mountable 10 outlet
multiple outlet electrical strip
B. The 19 in. equipment rack shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. 77 in. (44 rack spaces) of panel space
2. Welded frame construction
3. Adjustable front and back equipment mounting rails drilled and tapped to EIA
standards
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-7

4. 10 position electrical outlet strip
2.13 LISTED BUILDING ENTRANCE PROTECTORS
SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
A. Building entrance terminal utilizing a two (2) foot fuse link between the outside cable plant
splice and the protector module with IDC type input and output terminals, capacity per
drawings, equipped with 230 volt solid state protector modules. Provide sufficient protector
modules to completely populate all building entrance terminals.
2.14 CABLE TRAY
A. Furnish all labor, material, supports and services to install a complete cable tray system as
shown and or indicated on the drawings. The cable tray system is defined to include, but not
limited to sections of wire basket type, cable tray, bends, tees, elbows, drop-outs, supports
and all other related accessories necessary for a complete installation.
B. Cable tray to be Cablofil EZ Tray, Wiremold Fieldmate basket or approved equivalent.
C. Description: Continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management system.
D. Material: Carbon steel wire ASTM A 510 Grade 1008.
E. Finish: ASTM A 123, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
F. Inside Width: 18”
G. Inside Depth: 4 inches.
H. Mesh: 2 inches by 4 inches.
I. Wire diameter 0.177 inches.
J. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates,
blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps.
K. Provide two barrier strips in each run of tray to create these segments:
1. Voice/data cabling, including fiber optic backbone.
2. Nurse call cabling.
3. Other low-voltage cabling.
L. WARNING SIGNS
1. Engraved Nameplates: ½ inch high black letters on yellow laminated plastic
nameplate, engraved with the following wording: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE
TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL
SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!
2.15 SPARES
A. Furnish the following spare equipment and parts:
1. Terminal block connectors, if required
2. Test set cords, if required
3. Install one test cord set in each telecommunications closet
4. Five (5) percent of base bid quantity of each type of jack shall be provided
5. Five (5) percent of base bid quantity of each type of outlet
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-8

PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION SITE SURVEY
A. Prior to start of systems installation, meet at the project site with the owner's representative
and representatives of trades performing related work to coordinate efforts. Review areas of
potential interference and resolve conflicts before proceeding with the work. Facilitation with
the General Contractor will be necessary to plan the crucial scheduled completions of the
equipment room and telecommunications closets.
B. Examine areas and conditions under which the system is to be installed. Do not proceed with
the work until satisfactory conditions have been achieved.
3.02 HANDLING AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Be responsible for safekeeping of your own and your subcontractors' property, such as
equipment and materials, on the job site. The owner assumes no responsibility for protection
of above named property against fire, theft, and environmental conditions.
3.03 PROTECTION OF OWNER'S FACILITIES
A. Effectively protect the owner's facilities, equipment, and materials from dust, dirt, and damage
during construction.
B. Remove protection at completion of the work.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Receive, check, unload, handle, store, and adequately protect equipment and materials to be
installed as part of the contract. Store in areas as directed by the owner's representative.
Include delivery, unloading, setting in place, fastening to walls, floors, ceilings, or other
structures where required, interconnecting wiring of system components, equipment
alignment and adjustment, and other related work whether or not expressly defined herein.
B. Install materials and equipment in accordance with applicable standards, codes,
requirements, and recommendations of national, state, and local authorities having
jurisdiction, and National Electrical Code® (NEC) and with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
C. Adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and
sidewall pressure when installing cables.
1. Where manufacturer does not provide bending radii information, minimum-bending
radius shall be 15 times cable diameter. Arrange and mount equipment and materials
in a manner acceptable to the engineer and the owner.
D. Penetrations through floor and fire-rated walls shall utilize intermediate metallic conduit (IMC)
or galvanized rigid conduit (GRC) sleeves and shall be firestopped after installation and
testing, utilizing a firestopping assembly approved for that application.
E. Install station cabling to the nearest telecommunications room (TR), unless otherwise noted.
F. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines:
1. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices
2. Neat and uncluttered wire termination
G. Attach cables to permanent structure with suitable attachments at intervals of 48 to 60 inches.
Support cables installed above removable ceilings.
H. Install adequate support structures for 10 foot of service slack at each TR.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-9

SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
I. Support riser cables every three (3) floors and at top of run with cable grips.
1. Limit number of four-pair data riser cables per grip to fifty (50)
J. Install cables in one continuous piece. Splices shall not be allowed except as indicated on the
drawings or noted below:
K. Provide overvoltage protection on both ends of cabling exposed to lightning or accidental
contact with power conductors.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Grounding shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA 607(A) - Commercial Building Grounding and
Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, National Electrical Code®,
ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568 and manufacturer's grounding requirements as minimum.
B. Bond and ground equipment racks, housings, messenger cables, and raceways.
C. Connect cabinets, racks, and frames to single-point ground which is connected to building
ground system via #6 AWG green insulated copper grounding conductor.
3.06 LABELING
A. Labeling shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) standards. In addition, provide the following:
1. Label each outlet with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum 3/16 in. high
characters.
2. Label each cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1/8 in. high
characters, in the following locations:
a. Inside receptacle box at the work area.
b. Behind the communication closet patch panel or punch block.
c. Use labels on face of data patch panels. Provide facility assignment records in
a protective cover at each telecommunications closet location that is specific to
the facilities terminated therein.
d. Use color-coded labels for each termination field that conforms to
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) standard color codes for termination blocks.
e. Mount termination blocks on color-coded backboards.
f. Labels shall be machine-printed. Hand-lettered labels shall not be acceptable.
g. Label cables, outlets, patch panels, and punch blocks with room number in
which outlet is located, followed by a single letter suffix to indicate particular
outlet within room, i.e., S2107A, S2107B. Indicate riser cables by an R then
pair or cable number.
h. Mark up floor plans showing outlet locations, type, and cable marking of cables.
Turn these drawings over to the owner two (2) weeks prior to move in to allow
the owner's personnel to connect and test owner-provided equipment in a
timely fashion.
i. Three (3) sets of as-built drawing shall be delivered to the owner within four (4)
weeks of acceptance of project by the owner. A set of as-built drawings shall
be provided to the owner in magnetic media form (3.5” floppy disks) and
utilizing CAD software that is acceptable to the owner. The magnetic media
shall be delivered to the owner within six (6) weeks of acceptance of project by
owner.
3.07 TESTING
A. Testing shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 standard. Testing shall be accomplished
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-10

using level IIe or higher field testers.
SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
B. Test each pair and shield of each cable for opens, shorts, grounds, and pair reversal. Correct
grounded, and reversed pairs. Examine open and shorted pairs to determine if problem is
caused by improper termination. If termination is proper, tag bad pairs at both ends and note
on termination sheets.
1. Perform testing of copper cables with tester meeting ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1
requirements.
2. If copper backbone cable contains more than one (1) percent bad pairs, remove and
replace entire cable.
3. If horizontal cable contains bad conductors or shield, remove and replace cable.
C. Testing of fiber optic cable will be by Western Wisconsin Telephone.
D. Where any portion of system does not meet the specifications, correct deviation and repeat
applicable testing at no additional cost to the owner.
E. Testing of the Transmission Performance of station cables (Category 5e) shall include the
following:
1. Length
2. Attenuation
3. Pair to Pair NEXT Loss (new limits)
4. PSNEXT Loss
5. Pair to Pair ELFEXT Loss (Equal Level Far End Cross-talk)
6. PSEFEXT Loss
7. Propagation Delay
8. Delay Skew
9. Return Loss
F. Cables shall be tested to the maximum frequency defined by the standards covering that
performance category. Transmission Performance Testing shall be performed using a test
instrument designed for testing to the specified frequencies. Test records shall verify "PASS"
on each cable and display the specified parameters - comparing test values with standards
based "templates" integral to the unit.
G. Category 5e testing shall be per ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.1Permanent Link test configurations and
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.1 Category 5e.
H. Category 6 testing shall be per ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.2 Permanent Link test configurations and
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.2 Category 6.
I. The maximum length of station cable shall not exceed 90 meters which allows 10 meters for
equipment and patch cables. Worst case performance at 20°C, based on a Horizontal Cable
length of 90 meters and Equipment Cord length of 4 meters, shall be as follows:
Category 5e Test Parameters:
Category 5e Cable
Permanent Link Test
TIA/EIA 568B.1 TIA/EIA 568B.1 TIA/EIA 568B.1 TIA/EIA 568B.1
Insertion Loss Next Pair to Pair PSNEXT ELFEXT
TIA/EIA 568B.1
PSELFEXT
TIA/EIA 568B.1
Return Loss
Frequency Attenuation Coupling Worst Case Worst Pair to Loss Worst Pair
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-11

SECTION 27 10 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Loss Pair Loss
Mhz Max. dB dB DB dB dB dB
1.00 2.1 >60.0 >57.0 58.6 55.6 19.0
4.00 3.9 54.8 51.8 46.6 43.6 19.0
8.00 5.5 50.0 47.0 40.6 37.5 19.0
10.00 6.2 48.5 45.5 38.6 35.6 19.0
16.00
20.00
7.9
8.9
45.2
43.7
42.2
40.7
34.5
32.6
31.5
29.6
19.0
19.0
25.00 10.0 42.1 39.1 30.7 27.7 18.0
31.25
62.50
11.2
16.2
40.5
35.7
37.5
32.7
28.7
22.7
25.7
19.7
17.1
14.1
100.00 21.0 32.3 29.3 18.6 15.6 12.0
J. Propagation Delay
1. The maximum propagation delay determined in accordance with the TIA/EIA –568B.1
for a Permanent Link configuration shall be less than 498-ns measured at 10MHz.
(Note: In determining the permanent link propagation delay, the propagation delay
contribution of connecting hardware is assumed to not exceed 2.5 ns from 1 MHz to
100MHz).
K. Delay Skew
1. The difference in propagation delay between the fastest and slowest pair in a cable
shall not exceed the parameters below. Delay skew shall be measured in accordance
with annex D of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2. Category 5e 44ns between 1 MHz and 100MHz
L. In order to establish testing baselines, cable samples of known length and of the cable type
and lot installed shall be tested. The cable may be terminated with an 8-position Category 5e
Modular plug (8-pin) to facilitate testing. Net Propagation Velocity (NPV) and nominal
attenuation values shall be calculated based on this test and be utilized during the testing of
the installed cable plant. This requirement can be waived if NPV data is available from the
cable manufacturer for the exact cable type under test.
M. In the event results of the tests are not satisfactory, the Contractor shall make adjustments,
replacement and changes as are necessary, and shall then repeat the test or tests which
disclosed faulty or defective material, equipment or installation method, and shall make
additional tests as the Engineer deems necessary at no additional expense to the project or
user agency.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Employ job superintendent or project manager during the course of the installation to provide
coordination of work of this specification and of other trades, and provide technical information
when requested by other trades.
B. Installation personnel shall meet manufacturer’s training and education requirements for
implementation of extended warranty program.
END OF SECTION
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00-12

SECTION 27 41 00
TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. All requirements of Division 1 govern work under this Section.
B. Furnish and install a complete and operable RF distribution system extending DirecTV to all
residents. Provide sleeves to facilitate the installation.
C. The Aufderworld Corporation installed the SMATV distribution system in the present Dunn
County Nursing Home and services it now. Retain them to assist with the removal and
reinstallation of the existing system components in the new nursing home. Contact Bob
Hanson at 763.233.7730 or bhanson@aufderworld.com.
1.02 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
A. The system shall provide for reception of color TV transmission (at every outlet) equal to or
superior to that obtainable on a single standard receiver connected directly to the system
antennas. Feed shall be obtained from DirecTV satellite source. Distribute the (39)
channels distributed in the current facility.
B. System shall distribute announcements to resident and public area televisions programmed
by the Owner via an existing Magic Box.
C. System shall distribute programming from an existing DVD player.
D. System shall broadcast services originating in the Main Chapel in the Large Core and the
two other chapels in the Small Cores.
1.03 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The Contractor shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing
adequate inspection and service, including replacement parts.
B. Any new components of the system installed by the successful bidder shall be warranted by
the successful bidder for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance to meet all
performance requirements outlined herein. No charges shall be made by the installer for
any labor, equipment or transportation during this period to maintain functions.
C. The Contractor's submission shall contain engineering drawings of the system with
specification sheets covering all component parts of the system.
D. After completion of the work under this contract, the Contractor shall furnish one complete
set or operating instructions including circuit diagrams and other information necessary for
proper operation and maintenance of system components.
E. One complete set of as-built drawings shall include all pertinent signal levels throughout the
system as they were at the system acceptance date.
F. All basic electronic equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall be
products from manufacturers of established reputation and experience.
G. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment, labor, and installation materials,
whether specified or not, to provide a complete system.
H. The following work is to be performed by this contractor:
1. Relocate existing dish to roof of Large Core. Electrical Contractor will provide sleeves
through roof.
2. Relocate existing head end rack to Large Core IT room.
TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
27 41 00-1

SECTION 27 41 00
TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
3. Provide cable from dish to the SMATV head-end.
4. Provide cables from head end to Small Cores and thence to outlets.
5. Install splitters and amplifiers as required, reusing those removed from the existing
nursing home.
6. Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor. Provide all required work not covered as
part of the Electrical Contract.
I. Manufacturer and model numbers are given throughout these specifications with the
intention of establishing a standard of quality and operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be new.
1. Jerrold and/or Blonder-Tongue distribution equipment shall be considered as meeting
these specifications.
2.02 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
A. All outlets in the system shall provide a minimum level of +3 dBmV and a maximum level of
+12dBmV.
2.03 AMPLIFIERS
A. The amplifier shall be a broadband amplifier capable of passing frequencies between 49-860
MHz.
B. Provide associated filters and converters to accomplish System Specifications.
C. Amplifier shall be of the Blonder-Tongue BIDA System or equivalent.
2.04 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
A. Tapoffs (Flush Mounted):
1. Wall-type tapoffs shall be provided at each location shown on the plans.
2. The tapoff isolation network shall be of the backmatched-type design, using high
quality torroid ferrite transformer circuits to allow for ghost-free ETV origination.
B. Signal Splitters:
1. Signal splitters shall be provided in the system as required. Splitters shall have a
frequency response over the entire wideband from 2 MHZ to 2150 MHZ and be
DirecTV SWiM compatible.
2. Splitters shall be DirecTV Model SPLITX-Z or approved equal.
C. Cable:
1. The cable used shall be low loss type coaxial cable. Center conductor shall be a
minimum of 18 GA. solid copper. The dielectric material shall be of a cellular
polyethylene material. The cable shall be double shielded by both aluminum braid.
Each reel of cable used in the system shall be sweep tested by manufacturer.
Attenuation shall not exceed the following:
a. .57 dB/100 ft. at 7 MHZ
b. 1.6 dB/100 ft. at 54 MHZ
c. 3.2 dB/100 ft. at 216 MHZ
d. 4.5 dB/100 ft. at 470 MHZ
TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
27 41 00-2

SECTION 27 41 00
TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
e. 6.6 dB/100 ft. at 890 MHZ
2. Cable shall be run in continuous lengths except for terminations and no splices shall
be permitted in any conduit run. Cables shall be installed to avoid sharp bends or
physical distortion. All cables terminating at amplifiers or splitters shall be tagged as
to function and destination.
3. Cable shall be Belden Model 9114. Cables may be run concealed without conduit
above accessible ceilings, in concealed conduit or wiremold elsewhere.
D. Connectors shall be Perfect 10 part number PV6UE or approved equal.
2.05 CHAPEL ORIGINATION EQUIPMENT
A. Modulator:
1. Modulator shall be AWC model PDI CMC or approved equivalent.
B. Multiplexers:
1. A sub-channel multiplexer shall be provided at the head-end to separate returning
origination signals and at each sub-channel modulator as a frequency selective
splitter for the local TB receiver to prevent overload.
2. Sub-channel multiplexers shall be Blonder-Tongue Model MAVM.
C. Miscellaneous:
1. (1) Honeywell fixed camera with lens, power supply and mount
2. (1) RDL high gain microphone pre amplifier with power supply
3. (1) Handheld microphone with desk stand and 50’ microphone cable
4. (1) Aufderworld (AWC) saw filtered micro modulator
5. (1) Lot assembly, test, and training
D. Intent is to enable origination of programming from each chapel with broadcasting to resident
rooms over designated internal channel.
2.06 OMISSION
A. As it is not practical to enumerate in these specifications all details of fittings and accessory
equipment required for proper operation of the system herein described, it is understood that
they will be supplied by the contractor without extra compensation.
2.07 SYSTEM PROOF OF PERFORMANCE
A. Upon completion of the system installation, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to
perform the necessary adjustments and balancing of all signals and amplifier level controls
to insure proper system operation.
B. The system shall be physically inspected by an authorized representative of the customer to
assure that all equipment is installed in a neat and workmanlike manner as called for by the
plans and specifications.
2.08 HEAD-END TESTS
A. System balance test shall employ a Jerrold Model 727 Field Strength Meter or approved
equivalent. Measurements shall be made at the combined output of the head-end system.
The level of each channel's picture and sound carrier shall be measured and recorded.
B. All levels shall be within +3 dB from design levels specified. In no case shall the levels
measured exceed the maximum output rating for the head-end amplifier(s) employed.
C. Using a field strength meter, measure the signal level at the last outlet on each feeder line
TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
27 41 00-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 27 41 00
TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
and other randomly selected outlets. The signal level on each channel shall not read less
than 3 dBmV, nor more than 12 dBmV.
3.01 INSTALLATION PRACTICES
A. All equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and to the satisfaction of
an authorized representative.
B. Cable shall be adequately supported, and connectors specifically designed for the type cable
in use shall be installed.
C. Amplifier input cables shall not be bundled with output cables. Physical separation between
input and output cables shall be maintained as much as possible.
D. All equipment except in-line pads shall be suitably mounted in cabinets or other solid
support. Equipment suspended by its coaxial connection is not acceptable.
END OF SECTION
TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
27 41 00-4

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS/WORK
A. All requirements of Division 1 govern work under this Section.
B. Note that the Wireless Emergency Call provisions of this Section are under Alternate Bid.
C. For Base Bid Emergency Call requirements, see Section 27 52 24 which describes a hardwired
system.
D. Perimeter Alarm/Wander Monitoring provisions of this Section are Base Bid. Note that
monitoring of certain doors changes from “local only” to “local and via pagers” under
Alternate Bid.
E. Provide a complete operating system listed under UL 1069, Edition 7.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The system shall offer the residents a means of summoning a caregiver when they need
assistance. The wireless call system shall create an open environment of care while
assuring staff that residents who need help are assisted. The system collects emergency call
information and displays information on computers, quick look displays, and pagers. The
wireless call system shall allow residents to call for assistance simply by pressing a button
on a pendant or by pulling a string on the pull cord. Alarms must be reset at the device
location monitored area to assure staff attention.
B. Provide a complete and fully operational Wandering Management System (WMS). The
purpose of the WMS is to create an open environment of care while assuring staff that
residents who wander the area are secure. The system monitors doors with options
configured to accommodate specific needs. The anti-tailgate feature prevents a wanderer
from following a visitor or staff member through an authorized exit. Alarms must be reset at
the monitored area to assure staff attention.
C. The system is to provide coverage for throughout all locations where initiating devices are
shown.
1.03 BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EMERGENCY CALL
A. Install one wireless pull cord between the toilet and shower in each resident unit bathroom
and tub room. Recess the pullcord back box in the wall allowing the cover plate to be
mounted flush on the wall. The signal transmitted when the pullcord is pulled is recognized
by the emergency call system and is associated with a specific location in the building.
B. The emergency call messages are transmitted to the staff via alphanumeric pagers and
quick look displays. Provide (11) pagers. Provide quick look displays per the drawings.
C. Each alarm will be continuously transmitted to the staff pagers until the staff manually resets
the alarming device. Resetting the alarming device shall also transmit a message to the
staff pagers.
D. Each alarm will be continuously transmitted to the quick look displays until the staff manually
resets the alarming device. Resetting the alarming device shall also clear the alarm
message off of the Quick Look Display.
E. The staff can transmit additional messages across the pagers using the system computer.
F. Additional wireless devices (pull cords, call buttons, etc.) can be added in the future as
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-1

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
needed without new wiring. The transmitter is ordered, secured in place and the system
computer is updated with the new information.
G. Each of the wireless pull cord and pushbutton alarm transmitters shall be battery powered.
The system computer shall monitor the batteries and alert the staff when replacement of
batteries is required.
H. Provide routers to increase the range and signal strength of the Quick Response
Transmitters by re-broadcasting their wireless signals back to the Quick Response Serial
Receiver at the computer location. Provide sufficient routers for complete coverage. Those
shown on the drawings are the minimum.
I. The Perimeter Security System alarm messages shall be broadcast across the staff pagers.
J. The system computer shall be operating WINDOWS XP or higher.
K. A secondary Quick Response workstation shall be available consisting of a client computer
unit that shall allow a secondary nurse station to view alarms on the main PC system. A
user at the secondary workstation can interact with the system just like a user at the main
Server PC. The system shall allow up to a total of 9 client computers.
L. See the drawings for specific equipment locations.
M. This Contractor shall provide all equipment required for perimeter alarm system including
control devices, conduit and cabling, and programming necessary to create Wandering
Management system alarms.
N. Provide complete system design, materials, labor, and all equipment for a complete Wireless
Call System for the facility.
O. Electrical Contractor shall provide all necessary 120V power connections to system security
devices, power supplies, control equipment, CPUs, and system accessories.
1.04 BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – WANDERING MANAGEMENT
A. The system is to provide coverage for doors as indicated on the floor plans.
B. See the riser diagram and floor plans for specific equipment locations.
C. This Contractor shall provide all equipment required for security system including control
devices, conduit and cabling, interfacing into the access control system and programming
necessary to create Wandering Management system alarms.
D. Provide complete system design, materials, labor, and all equipment for a complete
Wandering Management System for the facility.
E. System shall utilize a water-resistant, wireless radio transmitter that can be attached to a
resident’s wrist or ankle for monitoring purposes. Provide (40).
F. If the system determines that a potential elopement is possible the system alarm shall be
sounded. The system shall activate magnetic door locks and other security hardware.
G. System shall utilize wired antennas and receivers located near points of exit for detection of
the transmitter.
H. System shall utilize magnetic locks for door lockdown at perimeter doors of coverage area.
I. Contractor shall meet with facility staff members and shall provide services for all necessary
design for complete coverage of area.
J. The system shall be capable of activating magnetic door locks and transmitting alarms to
staff pagers and Quick-Look stations.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-2

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
K. Contractor shall provide all interface required to the system from the fire alarm system such
that all locks shall be disabled under a fire alarm condition.
L. Electrical Contractor shall provide all necessary 120V power connections to system security
devices, power supplies, control equipment, CPUs, and system accessories.
M. Delayed egress magnetic locks provided for security area shall be compliant with NFPA
101and applicable Wisconsin State Building Code.
1.05 BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – PERIMETER DOORS WITHOUT WANDERING MANAGEMENT
A. The system is to provide coverage for additional doors as indicated on the floor plans.
These doors shall alarm when opened if not bypassed by interior or exterior keypads.
B. Under Base Bid, the alarm shall be local and audible-only.
C. Under Alternate Bid for enhanced nurse call, the alarm shall be local AND remote via
pagers.
D. Note that certain units are designated on the drawings to be inactive between 9PM and
6AM. Provide an internal programmable clock to lock these out. When locked out, these
keypads will be unable to bypass the associated door alarms.
E. Devices shall be powered from a central power supply.
F. See the riser diagram and floor plans for specific equipment locations.
G. This Contractor shall provide all equipment required for security system including control
devices, conduit and cabling, interfacing into the access control system and programming.
H. Provide complete system design, materials, labor, and all equipment for a complete system.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data, including installation instructions, and individual
system component specifications.
B. Ratings and performance data.
C. Operating and maintenance data.
D. Submit manufacturer’s training program, including training aids and training duration.
E. Submit non-warranty service costs, including trip charge, response time, hourly rate, per
diem expense and itemized major system component price list.
F. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical characteristics and connection
requirements for each component. Include quantities of each component. Provide system
riser diagram to show wiring requirements.
1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of emergency call system outlets,
routers, receiver and head end equipment.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for adjusting, operating, and
extending the system, and repair procedures and spare parts documentation.
D. Maintenance Contract: Submit maintenance contract for the system. Service is provided by
emergency call system supplier/installer as part of a maintenance contract on a time and
material basis. Service shall be available by modem or on site, as required.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
A. Code Alert® as manufactured by RF Technologies, Inc., Brookfield, WI (262) 790-1771.
B. Roam Alert – by Stanley Senior Technologies.
C. Secure Care – by Secure Care Products.
2.02 EQUIPMENT – EMERGENCY CALL
A. The wireless call system specified herein shall have an alarm and reporting capabilities.
B. All manufactured products to comprise the wireless call system shall be manufactured within
the U.S.A.
C. Products listed herein shall consist of, but are not limited, to Transmitters, Routers, a system
device network with associated devices and cabling, a server computer operating Quick
Response® Wireless Call Software capable of outputting alarm event information to the
access control system, and client computers capable of receiving and transmitting data from
other locations at the facility.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers must have been established in the business for a minimum of ten
years and completed five previous projects of similar installations.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers shall provide On Call technical support 24/7.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers shall provide references of previous installations, which have
been in place for three years.
2.03 EQUIPMENT – PERIMETER ALARM
A. The wandering resident system specified herein shall have an alarm and delayed egress
capabilities.
B. All manufactured products to comprise the wandering resident system shall be manufactured
within the U.S.A.
C. All manufactured products shall meet with all required federal requirements.
D. D. All manufactured products shall be UL294 Listed.
E. Products listed herein shall consist of, but are not limited to, adult transmitters (worn on the
resident’s ankle or wrist), Exit Alarm Control Units (located at each exit location to provide
local alarm, means of alarm reset, exit status, authorized escort of monitored residents
without alarm, and electro-magnetic lock controller), Antenna/Receivers (two for each exit
location), Single Zone Staff Alert Panels (providing audible indication of events in the
departments), a system device network with associated devices and cabling, a server
computer operating Wandering Management Software capable of outputting alarm event
information to the access control system, client computers capable of receiving and
transmitting data from other locations at the facility, and Central Power Supplies.
2.04 BASIC SYSTEM OPERATION
A. EMERGENCY PULL CORDS
1. Plastic off-white waterproof cover plate and large red switch, red pull cord, twoposition
switch – maintained. Wireless transmitter installed on switch contacts with
battery. Battery shall be replaced in field without the replacement of the entire
transmitter. The transmitter uses a 3V lithium battery that will last 4-5 years
depending on use.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-4

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
2. The Emergency Pull cord shall be Code Alert part numbers:
a. Quick Response Pull cord Station (SURFACE) 1000-7147K
b. Quick Response Pull cord Station (FLUSH) 1000-7147
B. KEYPADS
1. Certain doors are monitored and will alarm if the proper code is not keyed in. Under
Base Bid, the alarm will be local only. Under the Alternate Bid for Enhanced Nurse
Call, the alarm will be local and also will appear on staff pagers and Quick Look
displays.
2. Where called for on the drawings, certain of these doors are to be able to be
accessed by the keypad only before 9PM and after 6AM. These times shall be as
programmed by the system. Other doors will be able to be accessed at any time.
2.05 PAGERS
A. Alphanumeric pagers shall display the system messages. The pager will beep or vibrate to
alert staff of alarms and resets of Quick Response wireless devices. In addition, it will display
alarms and resets of wireless devices on an alphanumeric display. Staff member must
manually delete messages from pagers.
B. Personal carrying case and a belt clip shall be furnished with each pager to allow them to be
carried hands-free and easily accessed.
C. Pagers shall be capable of utilizing alternate frequencies if the preset frequency encounters
interference.
D. The pagers shall be Code Alert part number 1000-5214K
2.06 PAGING TRANSMITTER BASE
A. 2 watt rating. A higher rated transmitter or external antenna shall be furnished if the 2-watt
model is not capable of reaching all areas of all the buildings.
B. The Paging System shall be a frequency of 457.575MHz .The transmitter shall be capable of
utilizing alternate frequencies if the preset frequency encounters interference.
C. The system shall include an interface paging transmitter base with the emergency call
system computer and “Back-up Console”. The Paging System shall initiate a page when a
Quick Response alarm, reset, or missing event is received.
D. The paging transmitter shall be Code Alert part number: 1000-5055K
2.07 WIRELESS EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM COMPUTER (SERVER PC)
A. The computer shall contain the program for the emergency call system. The program shall
be self-monitoring. A separate hardware “Back-up Console” shall be provided that notifies
the staff if the computer is turned off, the operating system locks up, or the emergency call
system program is closed.
B. The computer shall monitor the messages that are received from the individual alarm
transmitters and send the associated alarm message to the selected notification device as
well as display the message on the computer display.
C. Each of the individual alarm transmitters check-in to the system and are supervised for
proper operation and battery life by the computer. If a transmitter does not check-in within a
specified period of time, a message shall be transmitted to the selected notification device
and also is displayed on the computer screen. If a transmitter has a low battery, a message
is sent to the computer and displayed in a report. The Back-up Interface also transmits this
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-5

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
information in the case of computer failure.
D. The computer shall have the capability to send custom messages across the pagers.
E. The system supplier/installer shall be able to monitor and modify the system program via a
modem or VPN network connection to the computer.
F. An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) shall be provided with the computer to protect it
against power outages and power transients.
G. The computer shall be an All-In-One design with integrated 17” LCD Monitor, stereo
speakers, and CD-ROM. The operating system shall be WINDOWS XP or higher.
H. The software system shall have the ability to record and archive the history of all active
transmitters on hard disk. In lieu of software a paper trail shall be generated. Such an
archive shall include transmitter identification, alarm status, location and reset information.
I. The software shall have the ability to require users to enter unique, personal passwords in
order to perform system actions including: moving residents to ancillary departments,
discharging residents from the system, clearing alarms and changing system settings. An
optional card reader unit may be used to eliminate redundant keystrokes.
J. The software shall support the use of a “touch-screen” monitor to minimize the use of a
traditional keyboard and mouse. The software shall be designed with large easy-to-touch
on-screen buttons as well as a pop-up virtual keyboard for data entry.
K. The wireless emergency call system computer shall be Code Alert part number 9450-5021.
L. In addition to the emergency call system computer, the vendor shall provide part numbers
for the Back Up Console, the Uninterruptible Power Supply, the Quick Response Serial
Receiver, the Software, the appropriate Software Licenses, and the Paging Base.
2.08 WANDERING MANAGEMENT SERVER PC
A. A computer and software program (server PC) shall display all alarms on screen. The
facility’s floor plan will be incorporated to notate alarm location and a pop-up box shall
provide: resident’s name, transmitter number, group/floor and room number as well as space
to include pertinent information such as medical condition, dietary information, photograph,
etc. A box may be selected if the resident is known to be a wanderer risk.
B. The main system shall not be dependent upon computer use to constitute a fully working
system.
C. The software shall have the ability to require users to enter unique, personal passwords in
order to perform system actions including: moving residents to ancillary departments,
discharging residents from the system, clearing alarms and changing system settings.
D. An optional card reader unit may be used to eliminate redundant keystrokes.
E. The software shall support the use of a “touch-screen” monitor to minimize the use of a
traditional keyboard and mouse. The software shall be designed with large easy-to-touch
on-screen buttons as well as a pop-up virtual keyboard for data entry.
F. The software system shall have the ability to record and archive the history of all active
transmitters on hard disk. In lieu of software a paper trail shall be generated. Such an
archive shall include transmitter identification, alarm status, location and reset information.
G. The System shall support modular expansion, be easily moved, supportable by facility
personnel with the assistance of an 800# hotline. Training sessions can be purchased from
RF Technologies, Inc. These sessions will cover the basic functions within the system
(admitting residents, resetting devices, etc.). Sessions will cover 1st, 2nd, and 3rd shifts.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-6

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
H. The System shall generate an alarm whenever a transmitter signal enters the alarm area of
an open door. It shall identify the specific transmitter number and the door location. Passive
infrared sensors or door contacts connected to the door Management antennae assure that
alarms are only generated when a transmitter enters the area while a door is open or the
sensor is activated.
I. The System shall also have the ability to generate alarms under the following conditions:
1. An authorized exit has occurred but the resident has not returned to the facility within
a certain time period
2. An authorized exit has occurred and a second resident tries to “piggyback” through
the protected exit
J. The server PC shall be of an All-In-One compact design that is extra slim to save desk
space. To ensure reliable long-term operation, the entire computer shall be located on
desktop or mounted to a wall with a VESA mounting bracket – No PC tower on the floor
where dust and dirt can damage it. It shall be a modern silver color that brings a Hi-Tech
look to security station and hides dirt. To reduce the number of connections and separate
devices, the All-In-One PC shall have an integrated 17” TFT LCD Touch Screen Display is
equivalent in viewable area to a 19” CRT and integrated stereo sound speakers in the unit.
2.09 INTEGRATED EVENT NOTIFICATION
A. A separate PC-based system that allows multiple, disparate systems to be displayed on a
single wireless communication device. Alerts and event activities from low-voltage systems
such as Code Alert wandering management, Quick Response Emergency call and Fire
Alarm systems can be routed to wireless paging, nurse call, telephone, PDAs, cellular
service providers, e-mail and receiving systems including SpectraLink, Cisco, and Avaya
creating an environment of "anytime, anywhere" communications.
B. Once a resident call is placed, the patient request or alarm is sent from the resident room to
the nurse call system, which then interprets the data to determine who should receive the
information. Once identified, the information is then routed from the Nurse Call Gateway to
triage the data and then instantly route the alarm or event to the appropriate device.
Room/Bed Number and Priority Level are displayed on the mobile device, detailing resident
information for the caregiver. The nurse can then choose to accept or escalate the call, or
with the touch of a button, automatically connect to the Patient Station. Call types, custom
pages, staff requests and other information can be sent as well.
C. The system shall first route unanswered calls to nurse’s stations and associated pagers in
adjacent neighborhoods. If still unanswered after a selected period, the call shall be routed
to off-site administrator pagers.
D. Events such as facility alarms from Access Control systems and Fire Alarm systems can
automatically be sent to supervisors or others to immediately notify them of emergencies.
E. In addition to the computer, the vendor shall provide part numbers for the Software, the
appropriate Software Licenses, and any cabling or interconnection devices necessary to
interconnect to the other building and notification systems.
F. The Integrated Event Notification system shall be Code Alert part number:
Middleware Nurse Call Gateway Package 1000-7750
2.10 STANDARD QUICK LOOK DISPLAY
A. The Standard Quick Look Display shall include the Quick Look Interface with a built-in
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-7

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
audible alarm, a mounting base, an 8" freestanding post for use on countertops and ceilings,
and a 4" wall-mount bracket.
B. The display shall be easy to install and ensures staff are informed of all alarm events in a
timely fashion.
C. The display shall be installed in the facility corridors in a manner that allows staff to readily
notice alarms that occur.
D. The display shall have a swivel rotation of 330 degrees and a title adjustment that reclines to
a maximum of 90 degrees.
E. Vacuum fluorescent (Aqua), 2 lines, and 20 characters per line.
F. The case dimensions shall be 3.6" x 11" x 1.8", the display dimensions shall be 8 ¾"L x 1
¼"H.
G. The display shall consist of 2 lines of up to 20 characters. Longer lines shall scroll or split at
a separation between words.
H. Multiple alarm messages that appear on the display shall toggle back and forth so that all
messages are shown in a rotation cycle. When one alarm is reset, the display will continue
to show and cycle the remaining alarm messages.
I. The Quick Look Display Interface (QLI) is used to receive the alarm messages from the
Server computer. It translates the messages into the data protocol used by the display,
provides an audible alarm sound via a buzzer as well as relay contacts to support additional
alarm notification. The QLI case dimensions shall be 6.7”W x 1.3”D x 3.25”H. The display
shall have 2 Form C Relays to support additional buzzers, strobes or CCTV activation.
J. The display shall have 5 volume levels (full, high, medium, low, and off).
K. The QLI requires 14-18 V DC or AC power. The Central Power Supply shall power the
display.
L. When used in a wired configuration, a CAT5e cable needs to run from the QLI to the server
computer or Serial Terminal Server.
M. The Display(s) shall be Code Alert part number:
N. Code Alert Standard Quick Look Display & QLI 9450-0420K
2.11 WIRELESS EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM SAMPLE MESSAGES
A. Message transmitted when a bathroom pull cord is pulled:
1. Alarm, Patient Name/Transmitter #
2. Phone Number, Bathroom
3. Building, Locator Name
B. Message transmitted when a bedroom pull cord is pulled:
1. Alarm, Patient Name/Transmitter #
2. Phone Number, Pull cord
3. Building, Locator Name
C. Message transmitted when a public pull cord is reset:
1. Location /Transmitter #
2. Phone Number, Transmitter Type
3. Building, Locator Number
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-8

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
D. Message transmitted when a transmitter is in low battery:
1. Low Batt
2. Transmitter #
E. Message that is transmitted when a serial receiver is disconnected:
1. Inactive Check
2. Conn. Or Reset Comp.
2.12 ROUTERS
A. Provide Routers to increase the range and signal strength of the Quick Response
Transmitters by re-broadcasting their wireless signals to the Gateway.
B. The Router shall be a 2.4 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum receiver/transmitter and
shall operate in a 2.405 – 2.475 GHz frequency range with a transmit power of +14dBm.
C. The Router shall be weatherproof.
D. The Router shall be powered by the Central Power Supply.
E. The Router shall include a 3.7 VDC lithium ion rechargeable battery back-up.
F. The Router shall send a supervisory message to the Central Display Unit to indicate
functionality status.
G. Routers shall employ mesh networking to extend coverage and increase reliability
H. Routers shall be compliant with IEEE 802.15.4 and Zigbee protocol.
I. The Router shall be dimensions: 4.5”H x 2.7”W x 0.56”D.
2.13 CODE ALERT WANDERING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM EXIT ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall receive data from the system Receive Antenna’s and issue
audible alarms if the door is opened.
B. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall have a keypad that is used to reset alarms and bypass the
Exit Alarm Control Unit.
C. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall be capable of triggering CodeLock electromagnetic door
locks to secure the monitored door when a transmitter is within the detection zone.
D. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall be capable of operating as a Delayed Egress device that
can utilize a trigger mechanism to determine when an exit door that is equipped with an
Electro-magnetic lock is having an unauthorized egress attempt. The exit alarm control unit
shall comply with NFPA-101 Life Safety Code (Model 60/70/80) or ICC/BOCA National
Building Codes (Model 81).
E. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall be capable of triggering an alarm at an optional Staff Alert
Panel and/or an announcement at an optional CA316 Voice Alarm or computer(s).
F. Three LED indicators shall be located on the Exit Alarm Control Unit. They shall be: a red
LED to indicate power to the system; a yellow LED to indicate that the exit alarm control unit
has received a signal from the receivers; and a green LED which shall be lit when the unit’s
status is in the bypass mode.
G. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall have an “anti-tailgate” feature; the bypass interval shall end
when the door closes to prevent a monitored person from following the bypass exit.
H. The exit alarm control unit shall have a steel faceplate that is capable of being surface or
flush mounted.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-9

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
I. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall be UL294 listed as an Access Control System.
J. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall provide the capability of changing bypass codes by
reprogramming through its keypad.
K. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall communicate to a server PC via an RS-485 communication
method over standard Category 5 UTP cabling. This communication shall be two-way and
allow for supervision of the controller, notification of resident transports and automatic
locking down of the doors.
2.14 CODE ALERT WANDERING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 66KHZ OR 262K RECEIVER ANTENNA
A. The Code Alert Wandering Management Systems include an Exit Alarm Control Unit, (2)
Receive Antennas, two normally closed reed switches, 94V-O PVC raceway and ABS
fittings, and wire.
B. Each opening up to 8’ requires (2) Receive Antennas, one on each side of the opening, as
instructed in the Installation Manual. The Receive Antennas receive the RF signal from the
Wandering Management Transmitter, and indicate to the Exit Alarm Control Unit when there
is a transmitter is in the area.
C. The Model 60/70/80 Exit Alarm Control Unit shall monitor the detection zone around the
doorway, hallway or stairwell where it is mounted.
D. The Receiver shall receive the radio frequency signal sent by the Transmitters and send the
signal to the Exit Alarm Control Unit.
E. The Receiver shall have a LED located inside the enclosure, which will pulse when a
Transmitter is in the monitored zone. The LED is visible through a clear lens on the cover.
F. The Receiver shall be encased in flame resistant material.
G. The Receiver shall receive signals at 262 kHz. The receiver shall be able to be switched
over (in the field by the installer) to the 66kHz frequency.
H. The Receiver shall be powered via the Exit Alarm Control Unit.
I. The Receive Antenna shall be dimensions 12.2” L x 1.77” W x 1.3” D.
J. Code Alert DuoLink Receive Antenna: 9450-0165K
2.15 CODE ALERT MODEL 80 WANDERING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ADULT TRANSMITTER
A. Provide 2-year Transmitters.
B. Other than cosmetic, the Transmitter shall not be damaged or malfunction after a drop onto
a tiled, concrete floor from a height of five (5) feet.
C. The Transmitter shall be easily cleaned using a soft-bristle brush with mild disinfectant soap
in compliance with facility’s disease control protocol.
D. The Transmitter shall emit a radio frequency signal that is recognized by the system
receivers.
E. The Transmitter shall be worn on either the wrist or the ankle.
F. The Transmitter shall have a single use band that is replaceable.
G. The Transmitter shall have smooth, rounded edges and no moving parts that could pinch the
resident or cause dermal abrasions.
H. The Transmitter shall be attached to the resident using a single-use, disposable, reinforced
nylon band material that does not contain latex. The band shall have two pairs of one-time
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-10

metal closures.
SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
I. The Transmitter shall be water-resistant.
J. The Transmitter shall be powered with a 3.5 V Lithium battery and have a 1 or 2 year battery
life.
K. The Transmitter shall operate at 66kHz or 262kHz.
L. The server computer as a three-digit identification number shall recognize the Transmitter,
which is an indication of the Transmitter number that is at the zone’s location.
M. The dimensions for this transmitter are: 2”w x 1.5”h x 5/8”d.
N. The Transmitter shall be Code Alert part numbers.
1. CA9120/Model 80 2 Year 262kHz Transmitter with ID: 9000-0124
2. CA9120/Model 80 2 Year 66kHz Transmitter with ID: 9000-0114
3. Gray Bands (Package of 10): 3000-0217K
4. Navy Bands (Package of 10): 3000-0213K
2.16 CODE ALERT WANDERING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TRANSMITTER TESTER FOR MODEL
60, 70 AND 80 SYSTEMS
A. The Transmitter Tester shall be used to verify proper operation of system Transmitters.
B. The Transmitter Tester shall have a pushbutton that is depressed when testing the
Transmitter.
C. When tested, if the Transmitter is functioning properly, the green LED will blink and a tone
will sound once per second. The Transmitter tester shall be compatible with the Model 60,
70, and 80 transmitters at both the 66KHz and 262KHZ frequencies.
D. One 9 V battery will power the Transmitter Tester.
E. The Transmitter Tester shall be Code Alert part number: 9000-1000
2.17 15V, 9A CENTRAL POWER SUPPLY
A. Upon activation of the fire alarm, the Central Power Supply shall deactivate all Code Alert
magnetic CodeLocks while continuing to power the Wandering Management System.
B. The Central Power Supply shall be a Class II UL Listed as a Releasing Device (49XM) and
shall meet NFPA Standard 72 Fire-Protective Signaling Service requirements.
C. The Central Power Supply shall be housed in a Steel Cabinet w/locking door and keyed
power on/off switch.
D. The Central Power Supply enclosure shall be painted to prevent corrosion and shall be gray
in color.
E. The Central Power Supply dimensions shall be 6"w x 16"h x 16"d (15cm x 41cm x 41cm).
F. The Central Power Supply shall weigh 30 lbs. (14kg).
G. The Central Power Supply shall have conduit knockouts on all 4 sides to permit conduit
connection for hardwiring of the AC power.
H. The Central Power Supply shall have over current protection from both AC Input and DC
Output with fuses: 3.5A, 250V (AC) and 15A, 32V (DC).
I. The power requirements of the Central Power Supply are Input: 120V AC, 3 Amp Max
Single-Phase Power and Output: 15V DC, 9 Amp.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-11

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
J. The Central Power Supply shall be Code Alert’s part numbers: 9450-0555
K. Provide quantity of Central Power Supplies as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be installed specifically in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Where cabling is not run in conduit above dropped ceilings and may penetrate rated smoke
or firewalls, furnish and install approved empty conduit sleeve and bushings. Conduit and
rated wall penetrations shall be sealed with approved fire resistant caulking or sealant.
3.02 TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
A. Training sessions can be purchased from RF Technologies, Inc. These sessions will cover
the basic functions within the system (admitting residents, resetting devices, etc.). Sessions
will cover 1st, 2nd, and 3rd shifts.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring shall be installed in accordance with Article 3.04 FREE AIR CABLING.
B. Install Wireless Emergency Call System in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install system at locations as required. Modification of devices to provide complete system
coverage area shall be provided at no cost to Owner.
D. Connect system to a grounded, 120 VAC Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
E. Electrical Contractor will provide outlet for UPS system from emergency power system.
F. Determine proper location of all system equipment.
G. A pre-installation meeting will be held with the installers for the wiring, security systems
equipment, telephone systems equipment and emergency call system equipment prior to
any of the work for these systems commencing. The system/supplier/installer will arrange
the meeting and the Owner’s construction representative shall be invited to attend this
meeting.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the deep (2-1/2” - 22 Cubic Inches) single
gang plastic back boxes (or a install 4" square, plastic, 20 cubic inch extra deep, flush back
boxes with single gang plaster ring) for the pull cords in the resident unit bathrooms,
common area toilet rooms and elsewhere. The back boxes shall be installed 48” above
finished floor. The system supplier/installer shall install the wireless pull cords in these back
boxes. Where required by fire rating, Electrical Contractor will provide putty pads or other
acceptable means of maintaining fire rating.
I. The system supplier/installer shall install the wireless pull cords and surface mounted back
boxes adjacent to the beds prior to the building’s opening. If the location of the bed is not yet
known, the Pull cord shall be tested and then left on the kitchen counter in the apartment
and installed by the building maintenance person after the first resident moves into the
apartment.
J. The Division 27 Contractor shall install an analog telephone line where designated on the
drawings. The computer shall be connected to one of the direct modem/fax lines in this
office to allow remote diagnostics and program modifications. The modem/fax line may be
shared with other equipment.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-12

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
K. The Division 27 Contractor shall install category 5e UTP cable run from the local server PC
to the client PC location. The cable shall be installed and terminated per TIA/EIA T568-A
standards for CAT5e. This cabling may consist of two cable runs that are cross-connected
to each other in the telecommunications closet. The cable is sending Ethernet and should
go through a switch or hub.
L. The Division 26 contractor shall provide an 110V, 20A, convenience duplex outlet at the
Quick Response computer location, at the High Visibility display location(s) and at the
Remote client PC location. This outlet shall be connected to a dedicated 120v emergency
circuit.
M. Code Alert system routers are surface mounted above the drop ceiling in the hallways. If
drop ceiling does not exist at the location, provide access panels at that location. Minimum
size: 12” x 12”.
3.04 FREE AIR WIRING
A. All wiring shall be run “free-air”, in conduit or in surface raceway. "Free-air" wiring is allowed
where it can be completely concealed. If wiring cannot be concealed, it shall be installed in
wire mold in finished areas and in conduit in unfinished areas.
B. Where installed “free-air”, comply with the following:
1. Cable shall run at right angles and be kept clear of other trades work.
2. Cables shall be supported according to code utilizing bridle rings anchored to ceiling
concrete, piping supports or structural steel beams. Rings shall be designed to
maintain cables bend to larger than the minimum bend radius (typically 4 x cable
diameter).
3. Supports shall be spaced at a maximum 4-foot interval unless limited by building
construction. If cable "sag" at mid-span exceeds 12-inches, another support shall be
used.
4. Cable shall never be laid directly on the ceiling grid.
5. Cables shall not be attached to or supported by, existing cabling, plumbing or steam
piping, ductwork, ceiling supports or electrical or communications conduit.
6. A coil of 2 feet in each cable shall be placed in the ceiling at each “free-air” wired
device. These "service loops" shall be secured at the last cable support before the
cable reaches the device and shall be coiled from 100% to 200% of the cable
recommended minimum bend radius.
7. Devices wired with conduit shall be provided with an 8-inch wire tail at each device
box.
8. To reduce or eliminate EMI, the following minimum separation distances from ≤480V
Power lines shall be adhered to:
a. Twelve (12) inches from power lines of

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
should remain where excess length of the cable tie has been cut.
11. All vertical cable extensions to fire alarm devices located below the finished ceiling
shall be in conduit.
C. Contractor shall furnish all required installation tools to facilitate cable pulling without
damage to the cable jacket. Such equipment is to include, but not limited to, sheaves,
winches, cable reels, cable reel jacks, duct entrance tunnels, pulling tension gauge and
similar devices. All equipment shall be of substantial construction to allow steady progress
once pulling has begun. Makeshift devices, which may move or wear in a manner to pose a
hazard to the cable, shall not be used.
D. All cable shall be pulled by hand unless installation conditions require mechanical
assistance. Where mechanical assistance is used, care shall be taken to insure that the
maximum tensile load for the cable as defined by the manufacturer is not exceeded. This
may be in the form of continuous monitoring of pulling tension, use of a “break-away” or
other approved method.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test after installation is complete to verify system is properly installed and operating.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust system as required to perform properly.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of on-site training by manufacturer or manufacturer’s
representative, in three separate sessions
B. In addition provide a standard in-service manual and in-service DVD to familiarize new staff
members with the basic operation of the Code Alert system to aid in new employee
orientation.
C. Demonstrate system to Owner’s personnel.
D. Train Owner’s personnel in proper operation and maintenance.
E. Supply to the facility a minimum of one (1) complete user manual, which shall provide for the
proper use, maintenance, and operation of the system by staff members after the initial
training period.
END OF SECTION
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-14

SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. All requirements of Conditions of Contract and Division 1 govern work under this Section.
B. This hard wired Emergency Call system is under Base Bid.
1.02 GENERAL
A. Provide a new Cornell Nurse Call System throughout this project.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. UL 1069 Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment, Edition 7.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Provide nurse call equipment, which has been manufactured and installed to maintain
performance criteria started by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submit listed submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Submittal Procedures Section.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit product data, including manufacturer’s product sheet, for specified products.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including
anchorage and accessories. Include cabling diagrams, wiring diagrams, station
installation details, and equipment cabinet details.
D. Quality Assurance Submittals:
1. Submit the following:
2. Test Reports:
a. Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics.
3. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
a. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data:
a. Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with
Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data:
Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions
against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and
performance. Include troubleshooting guide, wiring terminal identification and
equipment parts list.
2. Warranty:
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-1

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
a. Warranty documents specified herein.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in
installation of work similar to that required for this project.
B. Pre-installation Meetings:
1. Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions,
manufacturer’s installation instructions, and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
Comply with division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings)
Section.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General:
1. Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.
B. Ordering:
1. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
C. Delivery:
1. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
D. Storage and Protection:
1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at
temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty:
1. Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty:
1. Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document
executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to,
and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
a. Warranty Period:
i. 1 year commencing on the Date of Substantial Completion.
1.08 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION
A. Instruct the Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of installed units. Provide
manufacturer’s installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for installed units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Cornell.
B. Jeron.
C. Tektone.
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-2

D. Or other approved.
SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Nurse Call Master shall be a Cornell A4060-AT-SE flush wall mounted enclosure. LED as
required shall be mounted on an anodized aluminum faceplate. A hi-low tone switch, LED
power indicator, and lamp test switch shall be provided.
B. The control module shall be a Cornell NC-102A for up to three call status capabilities. The
module shall provide a steady voltage for operation of signal lamps during normal calls, a
flashing voltage during emergency calls and a pulsing voltage for priority calls. Audible
tones shall be sounded at all duty stations and at the annunciator panel whenever a call is
placed. Priority calls take precedence over emergency calls and emergency calls take
precedence over normal calls. The module shall derive its operating voltage from the
Cornell P-5243 Power Supply.
C. Power supply shall be a Cornell P-5243.
D. Corridor dome lamps shall be Cornell L102 dual lamp.
E. Toilet Stations shall be Cornell E-104 with nylon pull-for-help cords.
F. Bedside Stations shall be as follows:
1. One Bed Station – Cornell Blll
G. Staff Duty Station shall be a Cornell D-lll
H. Push for Help Emergency Station to be a Cornell E101
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance:
1. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins,
product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:
1. Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections,
are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Nurse Call Equipment Installation:
1. Wiring Method:
a. Install wiring in raceway as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Separation of Wires:
a. Provide separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
3. Splices, Taps and Terminations:
a. Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction,
pull and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures.
4. Identification of Conductors and Cables:
a. Retain color-coding of conductors, and apply wire and cable marking tape to
designated wires an cables so all media are identified in coordination with
system wiring diagrams. Label stations, controls and indications using
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-3

SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
approved consistent nomenclature.
B. Grounding:
1. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard.
a. Signal Ground Terminal:
i. Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and
equipment grounding except at connection to main building ground bus.
b. Grounding Provisions:
i. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Electrical, Grounding Section.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Site Tests (Post Installation Testing):
1. Comply with the Following:
a. Schedule Tests:
i. Schedule tests a minimum of 7 days in advance of performance of tests.
b. Report:
i. Submit a written record of test results.
c. Operational Test:
i. Perform an operational system test to verify compliance of system with
these specifications. Perform tests that include originating station-tostation
and all-call messages and pages at each nurse call station.
Verify proper routing, volume levels, and freedom from noise and
distortion.
d. Retesting:
i. Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work
affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total
system meets these specifications and complies with applicable
standards. Report Results in writing.
B. Inspection:
1. Verify that units and controls are labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are
identified in accordance with NFPA and UL 1069 requirements.
C. Manufacturer’s Field Services:
1. Upon Owner’s request, provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product us4e
recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from
project site and legally dispose of debris.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Project installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.
3.07 FREE AIR WIRING
A. All wiring shall be run “free-air”, in conduit or in surface raceway. "Free-air" wiring is allowed
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-4

SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
where it can be completely concealed. If wiring cannot be concealed, it shall be installed in
wire mold in finished areas and in conduit in unfinished areas.
B. Where installed “free-air”, comply with the following:
1. Cable shall run at right angles and be kept clear of other trades work.
2. Cables shall be supported according to code utilizing bridle rings anchored to ceiling
concrete, piping supports or structural steel beams. Rings shall be designed to
maintain cables bend to larger than the minimum bend radius (typically 4 x cable
diameter).
3. Supports shall be spaced at a maximum 4-foot interval unless limited by building
construction. If cable "sag" at mid-span exceeds 12-inches, another support shall be
used.
4. Cable shall never be laid directly on the ceiling grid.
5. Cables shall not be attached to or supported by, existing cabling, plumbing or steam
piping, ductwork, ceiling supports or electrical or communications conduit.
6. A coil of 2 feet in each cable shall be placed in the ceiling at each “free-air” wired
device. These "service loops" shall be secured at the last cable support before the
cable reaches the device and shall be coiled from 100% to 200% of the cable
recommended minimum bend radius.
7. Devices wired with conduit shall be provided with an 8-inch wire tail at each device
box.
8. To reduce or eliminate EMI, the following minimum separation distances from ≤480V
Power lines shall be adhered to:
a. Twelve (12) inches from power lines of

SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
D. All cable shall be pulled by hand unless installation conditions require mechanical
assistance. Where mechanical assistance is used, care shall be taken to insure that the
maximum tensile load for the cable as defined by the manufacturer is not exceeded. This
may be in the form of continuous monitoring of pulling tension, use of a “break-away” or
other approved method.
END OF SECTION
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-6

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS/WORK
A. All requirements of Division 1 govern work under this Section.
B. Note that the Wireless Emergency Call provisions of this Section are under Alternate Bid.
C. For Base Bid Emergency Call requirements, see Section 27 52 24 which describes a hardwired
system.
D. Perimeter Alarm/Wander Monitoring provisions of this Section are Base Bid. Note that
monitoring of certain doors changes from “local only” to “local and via pagers” under
Alternate Bid.
E. Provide a complete operating system listed under UL 1069, Edition 7.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The system shall offer the residents a means of summoning a caregiver when they need
assistance. The wireless call system shall create an open environment of care while
assuring staff that residents who need help are assisted. The system collects emergency call
information and displays information on computers, quick look displays, and pagers. The
wireless call system shall allow residents to call for assistance simply by pressing a button
on a pendant or by pulling a string on the pull cord. Alarms must be reset at the device
location monitored area to assure staff attention.
B. Provide a complete and fully operational Wandering Management System (WMS). The
purpose of the WMS is to create an open environment of care while assuring staff that
residents who wander the area are secure. The system monitors doors with options
configured to accommodate specific needs. The anti-tailgate feature prevents a wanderer
from following a visitor or staff member through an authorized exit. Alarms must be reset at
the monitored area to assure staff attention.
C. The system is to provide coverage for throughout all locations where initiating devices are
shown.
1.03 BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EMERGENCY CALL
A. Install one wireless pull cord between the toilet and shower in each resident unit bathroom
and tub room. Recess the pullcord back box in the wall allowing the cover plate to be
mounted flush on the wall. The signal transmitted when the pullcord is pulled is recognized
by the emergency call system and is associated with a specific location in the building.
B. The emergency call messages are transmitted to the staff via alphanumeric pagers and
quick look displays. Provide (11) pagers. Provide quick look displays per the drawings.
C. Each alarm will be continuously transmitted to the staff pagers until the staff manually resets
the alarming device. Resetting the alarming device shall also transmit a message to the
staff pagers.
D. Each alarm will be continuously transmitted to the quick look displays until the staff manually
resets the alarming device. Resetting the alarming device shall also clear the alarm
message off of the Quick Look Display.
E. The staff can transmit additional messages across the pagers using the system computer.
F. Additional wireless devices (pull cords, call buttons, etc.) can be added in the future as
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-1

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
needed without new wiring. The transmitter is ordered, secured in place and the system
computer is updated with the new information.
G. Each of the wireless pull cord and pushbutton alarm transmitters shall be battery powered.
The system computer shall monitor the batteries and alert the staff when replacement of
batteries is required.
H. Provide routers to increase the range and signal strength of the Quick Response
Transmitters by re-broadcasting their wireless signals back to the Quick Response Serial
Receiver at the computer location. Provide sufficient routers for complete coverage. Those
shown on the drawings are the minimum.
I. The Perimeter Security System alarm messages shall be broadcast across the staff pagers.
J. The system computer shall be operating WINDOWS XP or higher.
K. A secondary Quick Response workstation shall be available consisting of a client computer
unit that shall allow a secondary nurse station to view alarms on the main PC system. A
user at the secondary workstation can interact with the system just like a user at the main
Server PC. The system shall allow up to a total of 9 client computers.
L. See the drawings for specific equipment locations.
M. This Contractor shall provide all equipment required for perimeter alarm system including
control devices, conduit and cabling, and programming necessary to create Wandering
Management system alarms.
N. Provide complete system design, materials, labor, and all equipment for a complete Wireless
Call System for the facility.
O. Electrical Contractor shall provide all necessary 120V power connections to system security
devices, power supplies, control equipment, CPUs, and system accessories.
1.04 BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – WANDERING MANAGEMENT
A. The system is to provide coverage for doors as indicated on the floor plans.
B. See the riser diagram and floor plans for specific equipment locations.
C. This Contractor shall provide all equipment required for security system including control
devices, conduit and cabling, interfacing into the access control system and programming
necessary to create Wandering Management system alarms.
D. Provide complete system design, materials, labor, and all equipment for a complete
Wandering Management System for the facility.
E. System shall utilize a water-resistant, wireless radio transmitter that can be attached to a
resident’s wrist or ankle for monitoring purposes. Provide (40).
F. If the system determines that a potential elopement is possible the system alarm shall be
sounded. The system shall activate magnetic door locks and other security hardware.
G. System shall utilize wired antennas and receivers located near points of exit for detection of
the transmitter.
H. System shall utilize magnetic locks for door lockdown at perimeter doors of coverage area.
I. Contractor shall meet with facility staff members and shall provide services for all necessary
design for complete coverage of area.
J. The system shall be capable of activating magnetic door locks and transmitting alarms to
staff pagers and Quick-Look stations.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-2

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
K. Contractor shall provide all interface required to the system from the fire alarm system such
that all locks shall be disabled under a fire alarm condition.
L. Electrical Contractor shall provide all necessary 120V power connections to system security
devices, power supplies, control equipment, CPUs, and system accessories.
M. Delayed egress magnetic locks provided for security area shall be compliant with NFPA
101and applicable Wisconsin State Building Code.
1.05 BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – PERIMETER DOORS WITHOUT WANDERING MANAGEMENT
A. The system is to provide coverage for additional doors as indicated on the floor plans.
These doors shall alarm when opened if not bypassed by interior or exterior keypads.
B. Under Base Bid, the alarm shall be local and audible-only.
C. Under Alternate Bid for enhanced nurse call, the alarm shall be local AND remote via
pagers.
D. Note that certain units are designated on the drawings to be inactive between 9PM and
6AM. Provide an internal programmable clock to lock these out. When locked out, these
keypads will be unable to bypass the associated door alarms.
E. Devices shall be powered from a central power supply.
F. See the riser diagram and floor plans for specific equipment locations.
G. This Contractor shall provide all equipment required for security system including control
devices, conduit and cabling, interfacing into the access control system and programming.
H. Provide complete system design, materials, labor, and all equipment for a complete system.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data, including installation instructions, and individual
system component specifications.
B. Ratings and performance data.
C. Operating and maintenance data.
D. Submit manufacturer’s training program, including training aids and training duration.
E. Submit non-warranty service costs, including trip charge, response time, hourly rate, per
diem expense and itemized major system component price list.
F. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical characteristics and connection
requirements for each component. Include quantities of each component. Provide system
riser diagram to show wiring requirements.
1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of emergency call system outlets,
routers, receiver and head end equipment.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for adjusting, operating, and
extending the system, and repair procedures and spare parts documentation.
D. Maintenance Contract: Submit maintenance contract for the system. Service is provided by
emergency call system supplier/installer as part of a maintenance contract on a time and
material basis. Service shall be available by modem or on site, as required.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
A. Code Alert® as manufactured by RF Technologies, Inc., Brookfield, WI (262) 790-1771.
B. Roam Alert – by Stanley Senior Technologies.
C. Secure Care – by Secure Care Products.
2.02 EQUIPMENT – EMERGENCY CALL
A. The wireless call system specified herein shall have an alarm and reporting capabilities.
B. All manufactured products to comprise the wireless call system shall be manufactured within
the U.S.A.
C. Products listed herein shall consist of, but are not limited, to Transmitters, Routers, a system
device network with associated devices and cabling, a server computer operating Quick
Response® Wireless Call Software capable of outputting alarm event information to the
access control system, and client computers capable of receiving and transmitting data from
other locations at the facility.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers must have been established in the business for a minimum of ten
years and completed five previous projects of similar installations.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers shall provide On Call technical support 24/7.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers shall provide references of previous installations, which have
been in place for three years.
2.03 EQUIPMENT – PERIMETER ALARM
A. The wandering resident system specified herein shall have an alarm and delayed egress
capabilities.
B. All manufactured products to comprise the wandering resident system shall be manufactured
within the U.S.A.
C. All manufactured products shall meet with all required federal requirements.
D. D. All manufactured products shall be UL294 Listed.
E. Products listed herein shall consist of, but are not limited to, adult transmitters (worn on the
resident’s ankle or wrist), Exit Alarm Control Units (located at each exit location to provide
local alarm, means of alarm reset, exit status, authorized escort of monitored residents
without alarm, and electro-magnetic lock controller), Antenna/Receivers (two for each exit
location), Single Zone Staff Alert Panels (providing audible indication of events in the
departments), a system device network with associated devices and cabling, a server
computer operating Wandering Management Software capable of outputting alarm event
information to the access control system, client computers capable of receiving and
transmitting data from other locations at the facility, and Central Power Supplies.
2.04 BASIC SYSTEM OPERATION
A. EMERGENCY PULL CORDS
1. Plastic off-white waterproof cover plate and large red switch, red pull cord, twoposition
switch – maintained. Wireless transmitter installed on switch contacts with
battery. Battery shall be replaced in field without the replacement of the entire
transmitter. The transmitter uses a 3V lithium battery that will last 4-5 years
depending on use.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-4

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
2. The Emergency Pull cord shall be Code Alert part numbers:
a. Quick Response Pull cord Station (SURFACE) 1000-7147K
b. Quick Response Pull cord Station (FLUSH) 1000-7147
B. KEYPADS
1. Certain doors are monitored and will alarm if the proper code is not keyed in. Under
Base Bid, the alarm will be local only. Under the Alternate Bid for Enhanced Nurse
Call, the alarm will be local and also will appear on staff pagers and Quick Look
displays.
2. Where called for on the drawings, certain of these doors are to be able to be
accessed by the keypad only before 9PM and after 6AM. These times shall be as
programmed by the system. Other doors will be able to be accessed at any time.
2.05 PAGERS
A. Alphanumeric pagers shall display the system messages. The pager will beep or vibrate to
alert staff of alarms and resets of Quick Response wireless devices. In addition, it will display
alarms and resets of wireless devices on an alphanumeric display. Staff member must
manually delete messages from pagers.
B. Personal carrying case and a belt clip shall be furnished with each pager to allow them to be
carried hands-free and easily accessed.
C. Pagers shall be capable of utilizing alternate frequencies if the preset frequency encounters
interference.
D. The pagers shall be Code Alert part number 1000-5214K
2.06 PAGING TRANSMITTER BASE
A. 2 watt rating. A higher rated transmitter or external antenna shall be furnished if the 2-watt
model is not capable of reaching all areas of all the buildings.
B. The Paging System shall be a frequency of 457.575MHz .The transmitter shall be capable of
utilizing alternate frequencies if the preset frequency encounters interference.
C. The system shall include an interface paging transmitter base with the emergency call
system computer and “Back-up Console”. The Paging System shall initiate a page when a
Quick Response alarm, reset, or missing event is received.
D. The paging transmitter shall be Code Alert part number: 1000-5055K
2.07 WIRELESS EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM COMPUTER (SERVER PC)
A. The computer shall contain the program for the emergency call system. The program shall
be self-monitoring. A separate hardware “Back-up Console” shall be provided that notifies
the staff if the computer is turned off, the operating system locks up, or the emergency call
system program is closed.
B. The computer shall monitor the messages that are received from the individual alarm
transmitters and send the associated alarm message to the selected notification device as
well as display the message on the computer display.
C. Each of the individual alarm transmitters check-in to the system and are supervised for
proper operation and battery life by the computer. If a transmitter does not check-in within a
specified period of time, a message shall be transmitted to the selected notification device
and also is displayed on the computer screen. If a transmitter has a low battery, a message
is sent to the computer and displayed in a report. The Back-up Interface also transmits this
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-5

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
information in the case of computer failure.
D. The computer shall have the capability to send custom messages across the pagers.
E. The system supplier/installer shall be able to monitor and modify the system program via a
modem or VPN network connection to the computer.
F. An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) shall be provided with the computer to protect it
against power outages and power transients.
G. The computer shall be an All-In-One design with integrated 17” LCD Monitor, stereo
speakers, and CD-ROM. The operating system shall be WINDOWS XP or higher.
H. The software system shall have the ability to record and archive the history of all active
transmitters on hard disk. In lieu of software a paper trail shall be generated. Such an
archive shall include transmitter identification, alarm status, location and reset information.
I. The software shall have the ability to require users to enter unique, personal passwords in
order to perform system actions including: moving residents to ancillary departments,
discharging residents from the system, clearing alarms and changing system settings. An
optional card reader unit may be used to eliminate redundant keystrokes.
J. The software shall support the use of a “touch-screen” monitor to minimize the use of a
traditional keyboard and mouse. The software shall be designed with large easy-to-touch
on-screen buttons as well as a pop-up virtual keyboard for data entry.
K. The wireless emergency call system computer shall be Code Alert part number 9450-5021.
L. In addition to the emergency call system computer, the vendor shall provide part numbers
for the Back Up Console, the Uninterruptible Power Supply, the Quick Response Serial
Receiver, the Software, the appropriate Software Licenses, and the Paging Base.
2.08 WANDERING MANAGEMENT SERVER PC
A. A computer and software program (server PC) shall display all alarms on screen. The
facility’s floor plan will be incorporated to notate alarm location and a pop-up box shall
provide: resident’s name, transmitter number, group/floor and room number as well as space
to include pertinent information such as medical condition, dietary information, photograph,
etc. A box may be selected if the resident is known to be a wanderer risk.
B. The main system shall not be dependent upon computer use to constitute a fully working
system.
C. The software shall have the ability to require users to enter unique, personal passwords in
order to perform system actions including: moving residents to ancillary departments,
discharging residents from the system, clearing alarms and changing system settings.
D. An optional card reader unit may be used to eliminate redundant keystrokes.
E. The software shall support the use of a “touch-screen” monitor to minimize the use of a
traditional keyboard and mouse. The software shall be designed with large easy-to-touch
on-screen buttons as well as a pop-up virtual keyboard for data entry.
F. The software system shall have the ability to record and archive the history of all active
transmitters on hard disk. In lieu of software a paper trail shall be generated. Such an
archive shall include transmitter identification, alarm status, location and reset information.
G. The System shall support modular expansion, be easily moved, supportable by facility
personnel with the assistance of an 800# hotline. Training sessions can be purchased from
RF Technologies, Inc. These sessions will cover the basic functions within the system
(admitting residents, resetting devices, etc.). Sessions will cover 1st, 2nd, and 3rd shifts.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-6

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
H. The System shall generate an alarm whenever a transmitter signal enters the alarm area of
an open door. It shall identify the specific transmitter number and the door location. Passive
infrared sensors or door contacts connected to the door Management antennae assure that
alarms are only generated when a transmitter enters the area while a door is open or the
sensor is activated.
I. The System shall also have the ability to generate alarms under the following conditions:
1. An authorized exit has occurred but the resident has not returned to the facility within
a certain time period
2. An authorized exit has occurred and a second resident tries to “piggyback” through
the protected exit
J. The server PC shall be of an All-In-One compact design that is extra slim to save desk
space. To ensure reliable long-term operation, the entire computer shall be located on
desktop or mounted to a wall with a VESA mounting bracket – No PC tower on the floor
where dust and dirt can damage it. It shall be a modern silver color that brings a Hi-Tech
look to security station and hides dirt. To reduce the number of connections and separate
devices, the All-In-One PC shall have an integrated 17” TFT LCD Touch Screen Display is
equivalent in viewable area to a 19” CRT and integrated stereo sound speakers in the unit.
2.09 INTEGRATED EVENT NOTIFICATION
A. A separate PC-based system that allows multiple, disparate systems to be displayed on a
single wireless communication device. Alerts and event activities from low-voltage systems
such as Code Alert wandering management, Quick Response Emergency call and Fire
Alarm systems can be routed to wireless paging, nurse call, telephone, PDAs, cellular
service providers, e-mail and receiving systems including SpectraLink, Cisco, and Avaya
creating an environment of "anytime, anywhere" communications.
B. Once a resident call is placed, the patient request or alarm is sent from the resident room to
the nurse call system, which then interprets the data to determine who should receive the
information. Once identified, the information is then routed from the Nurse Call Gateway to
triage the data and then instantly route the alarm or event to the appropriate device.
Room/Bed Number and Priority Level are displayed on the mobile device, detailing resident
information for the caregiver. The nurse can then choose to accept or escalate the call, or
with the touch of a button, automatically connect to the Patient Station. Call types, custom
pages, staff requests and other information can be sent as well.
C. The system shall first route unanswered calls to nurse’s stations and associated pagers in
adjacent neighborhoods. If still unanswered after a selected period, the call shall be routed
to off-site administrator pagers.
D. Events such as facility alarms from Access Control systems and Fire Alarm systems can
automatically be sent to supervisors or others to immediately notify them of emergencies.
E. In addition to the computer, the vendor shall provide part numbers for the Software, the
appropriate Software Licenses, and any cabling or interconnection devices necessary to
interconnect to the other building and notification systems.
F. The Integrated Event Notification system shall be Code Alert part number:
Middleware Nurse Call Gateway Package 1000-7750
2.10 STANDARD QUICK LOOK DISPLAY
A. The Standard Quick Look Display shall include the Quick Look Interface with a built-in
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-7

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
audible alarm, a mounting base, an 8" freestanding post for use on countertops and ceilings,
and a 4" wall-mount bracket.
B. The display shall be easy to install and ensures staff are informed of all alarm events in a
timely fashion.
C. The display shall be installed in the facility corridors in a manner that allows staff to readily
notice alarms that occur.
D. The display shall have a swivel rotation of 330 degrees and a title adjustment that reclines to
a maximum of 90 degrees.
E. Vacuum fluorescent (Aqua), 2 lines, and 20 characters per line.
F. The case dimensions shall be 3.6" x 11" x 1.8", the display dimensions shall be 8 ¾"L x 1
¼"H.
G. The display shall consist of 2 lines of up to 20 characters. Longer lines shall scroll or split at
a separation between words.
H. Multiple alarm messages that appear on the display shall toggle back and forth so that all
messages are shown in a rotation cycle. When one alarm is reset, the display will continue
to show and cycle the remaining alarm messages.
I. The Quick Look Display Interface (QLI) is used to receive the alarm messages from the
Server computer. It translates the messages into the data protocol used by the display,
provides an audible alarm sound via a buzzer as well as relay contacts to support additional
alarm notification. The QLI case dimensions shall be 6.7”W x 1.3”D x 3.25”H. The display
shall have 2 Form C Relays to support additional buzzers, strobes or CCTV activation.
J. The display shall have 5 volume levels (full, high, medium, low, and off).
K. The QLI requires 14-18 V DC or AC power. The Central Power Supply shall power the
display.
L. When used in a wired configuration, a CAT5e cable needs to run from the QLI to the server
computer or Serial Terminal Server.
M. The Display(s) shall be Code Alert part number:
N. Code Alert Standard Quick Look Display & QLI 9450-0420K
2.11 WIRELESS EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM SAMPLE MESSAGES
A. Message transmitted when a bathroom pull cord is pulled:
1. Alarm, Patient Name/Transmitter #
2. Phone Number, Bathroom
3. Building, Locator Name
B. Message transmitted when a bedroom pull cord is pulled:
1. Alarm, Patient Name/Transmitter #
2. Phone Number, Pull cord
3. Building, Locator Name
C. Message transmitted when a public pull cord is reset:
1. Location /Transmitter #
2. Phone Number, Transmitter Type
3. Building, Locator Number
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-8

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
D. Message transmitted when a transmitter is in low battery:
1. Low Batt
2. Transmitter #
E. Message that is transmitted when a serial receiver is disconnected:
1. Inactive Check
2. Conn. Or Reset Comp.
2.12 ROUTERS
A. Provide Routers to increase the range and signal strength of the Quick Response
Transmitters by re-broadcasting their wireless signals to the Gateway.
B. The Router shall be a 2.4 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum receiver/transmitter and
shall operate in a 2.405 – 2.475 GHz frequency range with a transmit power of +14dBm.
C. The Router shall be weatherproof.
D. The Router shall be powered by the Central Power Supply.
E. The Router shall include a 3.7 VDC lithium ion rechargeable battery back-up.
F. The Router shall send a supervisory message to the Central Display Unit to indicate
functionality status.
G. Routers shall employ mesh networking to extend coverage and increase reliability
H. Routers shall be compliant with IEEE 802.15.4 and Zigbee protocol.
I. The Router shall be dimensions: 4.5”H x 2.7”W x 0.56”D.
2.13 CODE ALERT WANDERING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM EXIT ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall receive data from the system Receive Antenna’s and issue
audible alarms if the door is opened.
B. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall have a keypad that is used to reset alarms and bypass the
Exit Alarm Control Unit.
C. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall be capable of triggering CodeLock electromagnetic door
locks to secure the monitored door when a transmitter is within the detection zone.
D. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall be capable of operating as a Delayed Egress device that
can utilize a trigger mechanism to determine when an exit door that is equipped with an
Electro-magnetic lock is having an unauthorized egress attempt. The exit alarm control unit
shall comply with NFPA-101 Life Safety Code (Model 60/70/80) or ICC/BOCA National
Building Codes (Model 81).
E. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall be capable of triggering an alarm at an optional Staff Alert
Panel and/or an announcement at an optional CA316 Voice Alarm or computer(s).
F. Three LED indicators shall be located on the Exit Alarm Control Unit. They shall be: a red
LED to indicate power to the system; a yellow LED to indicate that the exit alarm control unit
has received a signal from the receivers; and a green LED which shall be lit when the unit’s
status is in the bypass mode.
G. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall have an “anti-tailgate” feature; the bypass interval shall end
when the door closes to prevent a monitored person from following the bypass exit.
H. The exit alarm control unit shall have a steel faceplate that is capable of being surface or
flush mounted.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-9

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
I. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall be UL294 listed as an Access Control System.
J. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall provide the capability of changing bypass codes by
reprogramming through its keypad.
K. The Exit Alarm Control Unit shall communicate to a server PC via an RS-485 communication
method over standard Category 5 UTP cabling. This communication shall be two-way and
allow for supervision of the controller, notification of resident transports and automatic
locking down of the doors.
2.14 CODE ALERT WANDERING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 66KHZ OR 262K RECEIVER ANTENNA
A. The Code Alert Wandering Management Systems include an Exit Alarm Control Unit, (2)
Receive Antennas, two normally closed reed switches, 94V-O PVC raceway and ABS
fittings, and wire.
B. Each opening up to 8’ requires (2) Receive Antennas, one on each side of the opening, as
instructed in the Installation Manual. The Receive Antennas receive the RF signal from the
Wandering Management Transmitter, and indicate to the Exit Alarm Control Unit when there
is a transmitter is in the area.
C. The Model 60/70/80 Exit Alarm Control Unit shall monitor the detection zone around the
doorway, hallway or stairwell where it is mounted.
D. The Receiver shall receive the radio frequency signal sent by the Transmitters and send the
signal to the Exit Alarm Control Unit.
E. The Receiver shall have a LED located inside the enclosure, which will pulse when a
Transmitter is in the monitored zone. The LED is visible through a clear lens on the cover.
F. The Receiver shall be encased in flame resistant material.
G. The Receiver shall receive signals at 262 kHz. The receiver shall be able to be switched
over (in the field by the installer) to the 66kHz frequency.
H. The Receiver shall be powered via the Exit Alarm Control Unit.
I. The Receive Antenna shall be dimensions 12.2” L x 1.77” W x 1.3” D.
J. Code Alert DuoLink Receive Antenna: 9450-0165K
2.15 CODE ALERT MODEL 80 WANDERING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ADULT TRANSMITTER
A. Provide 2-year Transmitters.
B. Other than cosmetic, the Transmitter shall not be damaged or malfunction after a drop onto
a tiled, concrete floor from a height of five (5) feet.
C. The Transmitter shall be easily cleaned using a soft-bristle brush with mild disinfectant soap
in compliance with facility’s disease control protocol.
D. The Transmitter shall emit a radio frequency signal that is recognized by the system
receivers.
E. The Transmitter shall be worn on either the wrist or the ankle.
F. The Transmitter shall have a single use band that is replaceable.
G. The Transmitter shall have smooth, rounded edges and no moving parts that could pinch the
resident or cause dermal abrasions.
H. The Transmitter shall be attached to the resident using a single-use, disposable, reinforced
nylon band material that does not contain latex. The band shall have two pairs of one-time
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-10

metal closures.
SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
I. The Transmitter shall be water-resistant.
J. The Transmitter shall be powered with a 3.5 V Lithium battery and have a 1 or 2 year battery
life.
K. The Transmitter shall operate at 66kHz or 262kHz.
L. The server computer as a three-digit identification number shall recognize the Transmitter,
which is an indication of the Transmitter number that is at the zone’s location.
M. The dimensions for this transmitter are: 2”w x 1.5”h x 5/8”d.
N. The Transmitter shall be Code Alert part numbers.
1. CA9120/Model 80 2 Year 262kHz Transmitter with ID: 9000-0124
2. CA9120/Model 80 2 Year 66kHz Transmitter with ID: 9000-0114
3. Gray Bands (Package of 10): 3000-0217K
4. Navy Bands (Package of 10): 3000-0213K
2.16 CODE ALERT WANDERING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TRANSMITTER TESTER FOR MODEL
60, 70 AND 80 SYSTEMS
A. The Transmitter Tester shall be used to verify proper operation of system Transmitters.
B. The Transmitter Tester shall have a pushbutton that is depressed when testing the
Transmitter.
C. When tested, if the Transmitter is functioning properly, the green LED will blink and a tone
will sound once per second. The Transmitter tester shall be compatible with the Model 60,
70, and 80 transmitters at both the 66KHz and 262KHZ frequencies.
D. One 9 V battery will power the Transmitter Tester.
E. The Transmitter Tester shall be Code Alert part number: 9000-1000
2.17 15V, 9A CENTRAL POWER SUPPLY
A. Upon activation of the fire alarm, the Central Power Supply shall deactivate all Code Alert
magnetic CodeLocks while continuing to power the Wandering Management System.
B. The Central Power Supply shall be a Class II UL Listed as a Releasing Device (49XM) and
shall meet NFPA Standard 72 Fire-Protective Signaling Service requirements.
C. The Central Power Supply shall be housed in a Steel Cabinet w/locking door and keyed
power on/off switch.
D. The Central Power Supply enclosure shall be painted to prevent corrosion and shall be gray
in color.
E. The Central Power Supply dimensions shall be 6"w x 16"h x 16"d (15cm x 41cm x 41cm).
F. The Central Power Supply shall weigh 30 lbs. (14kg).
G. The Central Power Supply shall have conduit knockouts on all 4 sides to permit conduit
connection for hardwiring of the AC power.
H. The Central Power Supply shall have over current protection from both AC Input and DC
Output with fuses: 3.5A, 250V (AC) and 15A, 32V (DC).
I. The power requirements of the Central Power Supply are Input: 120V AC, 3 Amp Max
Single-Phase Power and Output: 15V DC, 9 Amp.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-11

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
J. The Central Power Supply shall be Code Alert’s part numbers: 9450-0555
K. Provide quantity of Central Power Supplies as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be installed specifically in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Where cabling is not run in conduit above dropped ceilings and may penetrate rated smoke
or firewalls, furnish and install approved empty conduit sleeve and bushings. Conduit and
rated wall penetrations shall be sealed with approved fire resistant caulking or sealant.
3.02 TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
A. Training sessions can be purchased from RF Technologies, Inc. These sessions will cover
the basic functions within the system (admitting residents, resetting devices, etc.). Sessions
will cover 1st, 2nd, and 3rd shifts.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring shall be installed in accordance with Article 3.04 FREE AIR CABLING.
B. Install Wireless Emergency Call System in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install system at locations as required. Modification of devices to provide complete system
coverage area shall be provided at no cost to Owner.
D. Connect system to a grounded, 120 VAC Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
E. Electrical Contractor will provide outlet for UPS system from emergency power system.
F. Determine proper location of all system equipment.
G. A pre-installation meeting will be held with the installers for the wiring, security systems
equipment, telephone systems equipment and emergency call system equipment prior to
any of the work for these systems commencing. The system/supplier/installer will arrange
the meeting and the Owner’s construction representative shall be invited to attend this
meeting.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the deep (2-1/2” - 22 Cubic Inches) single
gang plastic back boxes (or a install 4" square, plastic, 20 cubic inch extra deep, flush back
boxes with single gang plaster ring) for the pull cords in the resident unit bathrooms,
common area toilet rooms and elsewhere. The back boxes shall be installed 48” above
finished floor. The system supplier/installer shall install the wireless pull cords in these back
boxes. Where required by fire rating, Electrical Contractor will provide putty pads or other
acceptable means of maintaining fire rating.
I. The system supplier/installer shall install the wireless pull cords and surface mounted back
boxes adjacent to the beds prior to the building’s opening. If the location of the bed is not yet
known, the Pull cord shall be tested and then left on the kitchen counter in the apartment
and installed by the building maintenance person after the first resident moves into the
apartment.
J. The Division 27 Contractor shall install an analog telephone line where designated on the
drawings. The computer shall be connected to one of the direct modem/fax lines in this
office to allow remote diagnostics and program modifications. The modem/fax line may be
shared with other equipment.
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-12

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
K. The Division 27 Contractor shall install category 5e UTP cable run from the local server PC
to the client PC location. The cable shall be installed and terminated per TIA/EIA T568-A
standards for CAT5e. This cabling may consist of two cable runs that are cross-connected
to each other in the telecommunications closet. The cable is sending Ethernet and should
go through a switch or hub.
L. The Division 26 contractor shall provide an 110V, 20A, convenience duplex outlet at the
Quick Response computer location, at the High Visibility display location(s) and at the
Remote client PC location. This outlet shall be connected to a dedicated 120v emergency
circuit.
M. Code Alert system routers are surface mounted above the drop ceiling in the hallways. If
drop ceiling does not exist at the location, provide access panels at that location. Minimum
size: 12” x 12”.
3.04 FREE AIR WIRING
A. All wiring shall be run “free-air”, in conduit or in surface raceway. "Free-air" wiring is allowed
where it can be completely concealed. If wiring cannot be concealed, it shall be installed in
wire mold in finished areas and in conduit in unfinished areas.
B. Where installed “free-air”, comply with the following:
1. Cable shall run at right angles and be kept clear of other trades work.
2. Cables shall be supported according to code utilizing bridle rings anchored to ceiling
concrete, piping supports or structural steel beams. Rings shall be designed to
maintain cables bend to larger than the minimum bend radius (typically 4 x cable
diameter).
3. Supports shall be spaced at a maximum 4-foot interval unless limited by building
construction. If cable "sag" at mid-span exceeds 12-inches, another support shall be
used.
4. Cable shall never be laid directly on the ceiling grid.
5. Cables shall not be attached to or supported by, existing cabling, plumbing or steam
piping, ductwork, ceiling supports or electrical or communications conduit.
6. A coil of 2 feet in each cable shall be placed in the ceiling at each “free-air” wired
device. These "service loops" shall be secured at the last cable support before the
cable reaches the device and shall be coiled from 100% to 200% of the cable
recommended minimum bend radius.
7. Devices wired with conduit shall be provided with an 8-inch wire tail at each device
box.
8. To reduce or eliminate EMI, the following minimum separation distances from ≤480V
Power lines shall be adhered to:
a. Twelve (12) inches from power lines of

SECTION 27 52 23
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
should remain where excess length of the cable tie has been cut.
11. All vertical cable extensions to fire alarm devices located below the finished ceiling
shall be in conduit.
C. Contractor shall furnish all required installation tools to facilitate cable pulling without
damage to the cable jacket. Such equipment is to include, but not limited to, sheaves,
winches, cable reels, cable reel jacks, duct entrance tunnels, pulling tension gauge and
similar devices. All equipment shall be of substantial construction to allow steady progress
once pulling has begun. Makeshift devices, which may move or wear in a manner to pose a
hazard to the cable, shall not be used.
D. All cable shall be pulled by hand unless installation conditions require mechanical
assistance. Where mechanical assistance is used, care shall be taken to insure that the
maximum tensile load for the cable as defined by the manufacturer is not exceeded. This
may be in the form of continuous monitoring of pulling tension, use of a “break-away” or
other approved method.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test after installation is complete to verify system is properly installed and operating.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust system as required to perform properly.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of on-site training by manufacturer or manufacturer’s
representative, in three separate sessions
B. In addition provide a standard in-service manual and in-service DVD to familiarize new staff
members with the basic operation of the Code Alert system to aid in new employee
orientation.
C. Demonstrate system to Owner’s personnel.
D. Train Owner’s personnel in proper operation and maintenance.
E. Supply to the facility a minimum of one (1) complete user manual, which shall provide for the
proper use, maintenance, and operation of the system by staff members after the initial
training period.
END OF SECTION
EMERGENCY CALL AND PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
27 52 23-14

SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. All requirements of Conditions of Contract and Division 1 govern work under this Section.
B. This hard wired Emergency Call system is under Base Bid.
1.02 GENERAL
A. Provide a new Cornell Nurse Call System throughout this project.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. UL 1069 Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment, Edition 7.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Provide nurse call equipment, which has been manufactured and installed to maintain
performance criteria started by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submit listed submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Submittal Procedures Section.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit product data, including manufacturer’s product sheet, for specified products.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including
anchorage and accessories. Include cabling diagrams, wiring diagrams, station
installation details, and equipment cabinet details.
D. Quality Assurance Submittals:
1. Submit the following:
2. Test Reports:
a. Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics.
3. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
a. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data:
a. Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with
Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data:
Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions
against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and
performance. Include troubleshooting guide, wiring terminal identification and
equipment parts list.
2. Warranty:
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-1

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
a. Warranty documents specified herein.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in
installation of work similar to that required for this project.
B. Pre-installation Meetings:
1. Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions,
manufacturer’s installation instructions, and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
Comply with division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings)
Section.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General:
1. Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.
B. Ordering:
1. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
C. Delivery:
1. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
D. Storage and Protection:
1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at
temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty:
1. Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty:
1. Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document
executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to,
and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
a. Warranty Period:
i. 1 year commencing on the Date of Substantial Completion.
1.08 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION
A. Instruct the Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of installed units. Provide
manufacturer’s installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for installed units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Cornell.
B. Jeron.
C. Tektone.
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-2

D. Or other approved.
SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Nurse Call Master shall be a Cornell A4060-AT-SE flush wall mounted enclosure. LED as
required shall be mounted on an anodized aluminum faceplate. A hi-low tone switch, LED
power indicator, and lamp test switch shall be provided.
B. The control module shall be a Cornell NC-102A for up to three call status capabilities. The
module shall provide a steady voltage for operation of signal lamps during normal calls, a
flashing voltage during emergency calls and a pulsing voltage for priority calls. Audible
tones shall be sounded at all duty stations and at the annunciator panel whenever a call is
placed. Priority calls take precedence over emergency calls and emergency calls take
precedence over normal calls. The module shall derive its operating voltage from the
Cornell P-5243 Power Supply.
C. Power supply shall be a Cornell P-5243.
D. Corridor dome lamps shall be Cornell L102 dual lamp.
E. Toilet Stations shall be Cornell E-104 with nylon pull-for-help cords.
F. Bedside Stations shall be as follows:
1. One Bed Station – Cornell Blll
G. Staff Duty Station shall be a Cornell D-lll
H. Push for Help Emergency Station to be a Cornell E101
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance:
1. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins,
product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:
1. Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections,
are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Nurse Call Equipment Installation:
1. Wiring Method:
a. Install wiring in raceway as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Separation of Wires:
a. Provide separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
3. Splices, Taps and Terminations:
a. Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction,
pull and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures.
4. Identification of Conductors and Cables:
a. Retain color-coding of conductors, and apply wire and cable marking tape to
designated wires an cables so all media are identified in coordination with
system wiring diagrams. Label stations, controls and indications using
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-3

SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
approved consistent nomenclature.
B. Grounding:
1. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard.
a. Signal Ground Terminal:
i. Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and
equipment grounding except at connection to main building ground bus.
b. Grounding Provisions:
i. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Electrical, Grounding Section.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Site Tests (Post Installation Testing):
1. Comply with the Following:
a. Schedule Tests:
i. Schedule tests a minimum of 7 days in advance of performance of tests.
b. Report:
i. Submit a written record of test results.
c. Operational Test:
i. Perform an operational system test to verify compliance of system with
these specifications. Perform tests that include originating station-tostation
and all-call messages and pages at each nurse call station.
Verify proper routing, volume levels, and freedom from noise and
distortion.
d. Retesting:
i. Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work
affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total
system meets these specifications and complies with applicable
standards. Report Results in writing.
B. Inspection:
1. Verify that units and controls are labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are
identified in accordance with NFPA and UL 1069 requirements.
C. Manufacturer’s Field Services:
1. Upon Owner’s request, provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product us4e
recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from
project site and legally dispose of debris.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Project installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.
3.07 FREE AIR WIRING
A. All wiring shall be run “free-air”, in conduit or in surface raceway. "Free-air" wiring is allowed
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-4

SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
where it can be completely concealed. If wiring cannot be concealed, it shall be installed in
wire mold in finished areas and in conduit in unfinished areas.
B. Where installed “free-air”, comply with the following:
1. Cable shall run at right angles and be kept clear of other trades work.
2. Cables shall be supported according to code utilizing bridle rings anchored to ceiling
concrete, piping supports or structural steel beams. Rings shall be designed to
maintain cables bend to larger than the minimum bend radius (typically 4 x cable
diameter).
3. Supports shall be spaced at a maximum 4-foot interval unless limited by building
construction. If cable "sag" at mid-span exceeds 12-inches, another support shall be
used.
4. Cable shall never be laid directly on the ceiling grid.
5. Cables shall not be attached to or supported by, existing cabling, plumbing or steam
piping, ductwork, ceiling supports or electrical or communications conduit.
6. A coil of 2 feet in each cable shall be placed in the ceiling at each “free-air” wired
device. These "service loops" shall be secured at the last cable support before the
cable reaches the device and shall be coiled from 100% to 200% of the cable
recommended minimum bend radius.
7. Devices wired with conduit shall be provided with an 8-inch wire tail at each device
box.
8. To reduce or eliminate EMI, the following minimum separation distances from ≤480V
Power lines shall be adhered to:
a. Twelve (12) inches from power lines of

SECTION 27 52 24
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
D. All cable shall be pulled by hand unless installation conditions require mechanical
assistance. Where mechanical assistance is used, care shall be taken to insure that the
maximum tensile load for the cable as defined by the manufacturer is not exceeded. This
may be in the form of continuous monitoring of pulling tension, use of a “break-away” or
other approved method.
END OF SECTION
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
27 52 24-6

SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE ALARM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire alarm control panels, manual fire alarm stations, automatic smoke
and heat detectors, fire and smoke dampers, fire alarm signaling appliances, and auxiliary
fire alarm equipment and power and signal wire and cable.
B. The supplier, or contractor with a successful bid, shall be responsible for preparing the
AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction) submittals and submitting them to the state and any
local agencies as detailed in the Submittal portion of this section.
C. Related Sections (review entire specification for related work):
1. Door Hardware: Door closers, electric locks, electric releases.
2. Building Automation and Control.
3. Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Flow detection and alarm devices.
4. Dry-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Flow detection and alarm devices.
5. Deluge Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Flow detection and alarm devices.
6. Standpipes and Hoses: Flow detection and alarm devices.
7. Duct Accessories: Fire and smoke dampers.
8. Building Wire and Cable.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 72 (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Protective Signaling Systems.
B. NFPA 72E (National Fire Protection Association) - Automatic Fire Detectors.
C. NFPA 72G (National Fire Protection Association) - Notification Appliances for Protective
Signaling Systems.
D. NFPA 72H (National Fire Protection Association) - Guide for Test Procedures for
Protective Signaling Systems.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72, automatic local fire alarm system with connections to
municipal system.
B. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device causes the following system
operations:
1. Local fire alarm signaling devices sound and display with steady time signal.
2. Non-coded signal transmits to municipal connection via parallel phone line.
3. Location of alarm device indicates on fire alarm control panel and on remote
annunciator panel.
4. Signal transmits by address to building smoke removal system.
5. Signal transmits to building elevator control panel, initiating return to main floor or
alternate floor and lockout for fire service.
6. Signal transmits to building mechanical controls, shutting down fans and
operating dampers.
7. Signal transmits to close fire and smoke dampers.
8. Signal transmits by zone to release door hold-open devices.
9. Signal releases magnetic door hold opens.
10. Signal releases electric door locks.
10-034 28 31 00 - 1

C. Drill Sequence of Operation: Manual drill function causes alarm mode sequence of
operation.
D. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuit trouble causes the following system
operations:
1. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicates by device location at fire alarm control
panel.
2. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicates at remote annunciator panel.
3. Trouble signal transmits to municipal connection.
E. Zoning: Addressable system, each device has unique address.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring
connection; indicate annunciator layout, and design calculations.
C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection.
E. The supplier, or contractor with a successful bid, shall be responsible for preparing the
AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction) state and local submittals in accordance with NFPA
72 and the State of Wisconsin requirements. Submittal of these documents to the State of
Wisconsin for their approval and any local agencies is the responsibility of the supplier or
contractor. Any costs associated with the submittals is the responsibility of the agency
submitting the plans for approval. Upon request, the engineer will provide the successful
contractor with CAD floor plans (Autocad 2008) for their use in preparing the submittals.
The submittals must include all of the information required for the state review, including
but not limited to:
1. Wiring Diagrams.
2. Voltage Drop Calculations.
3. Battery Calculations.
4. Sequence of Operations.
F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site, adverse findings, and
recommendations.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of fire alarm equipment.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard operating and
maintenance instructions.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100
miles of project.
B. Installer: Certified fire alarm installer with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
10-034 28 31 00 - 2

C. Design fire alarm under direct supervision of a professional engineer experienced in
design of this Work and licensed at the place where the Project is located.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of fire alarm equipment for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Supply three of each type of automatic smoke detector without base.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL PANEL
A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex Model 4010
2. Edwards Model EST-QS1-1G-1
3. Radionics Model D9124
4. Notifier Model NFS-640
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: Modular fire alarm control panel with surface wall-mounted
enclosure.
C. Power supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote
annunciators, smoke dampers, relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include batteryoperated
emergency power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode for
24 hours followed by alarm mode for 10 minutes.
D. System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in trouble mode.
E. Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised module with alarm and trouble indication;
occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not
disable that circuit from initiating an alarm.
F. Indicating Appliance Circuits: Supervised steady time signal module, sufficient for signal
devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit
in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from signaling an alarm.
G. Municipal Trip Circuit: Output connections for connection to parallel telephone circuit.
Include municipal trip DISCONNECT switch.
H. Auxiliary Relays: Sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each detection address to
provide accessory functions specified.
2.2 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex Model 2099
2. Edwards Model EST-SIGA-270
10-034 28 31 00 - 3

3. Radionics Model D462
4. Notifier Model NOT-BG12LX
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: Manual single-action station with break-glass rod.
C. Mounting: Semi-Flush.
D. Type: Non-coded.
E. Backbox: Manufacturer's standard.
2.3 STANDARD 135 DEGREE FIXED SPOT HEAT DETECTOR
A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex Model 4098-9732
2. Edwards Model EST-SIGA-HFS
3. Radionics Model D254
4. Notifier Model FST-751
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: Dual contact, fixed temperature, spot heat detector.
C. Temperature Rating: 135 degrees F.
D. Provide suitable base per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.4 CEILING PHOTOELECTRONIC SMOKE DETECTOR
A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex Model 4098-9701
2. Edwards Model EST-SIGA-PS
3. Radionics Model D282
4. Notifier Model FSP-751
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: NFPA 72E, photoelectric type ceiling smoke detector with the
following features:
1. Adjustable sensitivity.
2. Plug-in base.
3. Auxiliary relay contact.
4. Visual indication of detector actuation.
C. Mounting: 4 inch outlet box.
D. Furnish two-wire detector with common power supply and signal circuits.
E. Furnish four-wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits for door hold
open and other applications requiring 4 wire detectors.
F. Smoke detectors at elevator landings, machine rooms, and shafts shall be dual contact
type.
G. Provide suitable base per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR
A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex Model 4098-9714
2. Edwards Model EST-SIGA-DH
10-034 28 31 00 - 4

3. Radionics Model D300
4. Notifier Model FSD-751RP
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: NFPA 72E, photoelectric type with the following features:
1. Auxiliary spdt relay contact.
2. Key-operated normal-reset-test switch.
3. Duct sampling tubes extending width of duct.
4. Visual indication of detector actuation.
5. Duct-mounted housing.
C. Furnish two-wire detector with common power supply.
2.6 EXTERIOR ALARM BELLS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex Model
2. Radionics Model D443
3. Notifier Model
4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: NFPA 72G, vibrating, electric bell with the following features:
1. Operating mechanism behind dome.
2. Integral strobe lamp and flasher with red lettered "FIRE" on white lens.
3. Size: 10 inch (250 mm).
4. Sound Rating: 92 dB at 10 feet (3 M).
5. Painted with high gloss red enamel.
6. Weatherproof back box
7. Steel dome with aluminum base.
2.7 SIGNALLING DEVICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex Model 4904 (Strobe), 4903 (Horn/Strobe)
2. Edwards Model EST-G1-V (Strobe), EST-G1-HOV (Horn/Strobe)
3. Radionics Model D446A (Strobe), D455A (Horn/Strobe)
4. Notifier Model RSS-24MCW-FR(Strobe),
ET70-24MCW-FR(Speaker/Strobe)
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Horn/Strobe Combination
1. Description: Audio and visual signaling flush mounted device.
2. Sound Rating: 87 dB at 10-feet.
3. Red housing, xenon strobe in clear glass enclosure to yield 100 candela,
minimum. Glass enclosure shall have the word “FIRE” in red lettering to meet
ADA requirements.
4. Mounting: Mount to center-line the lower 8-inches below ceiling, or 80-inches
above finished floor or surface mounted to ceiling system or building structure.
C. Strobe Only
1. Description: Visual signaling flush mounted device.
2. Red housing, xenon strobe in clear glass enclosure to yield 100 candela,
minimum. Glass enclosure shall have the word “FIRE” in red lettering to meet
ADA requirements.
3. Mounting: Mount to center-line the lower 8-inches below ceiling, or 80-inches
above finished floor or surface mounted to ceiling system or building structure.
4. Lower candella may be used in areas per manufacturer’s recommendations and
if acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
2.8 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
10-034 28 31 00 - 5

A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex Model 4606-9101
2. Edwards Model EST-GS1-CPU-1
3. Radionics Model D1256
4. Notifier Model LCD-80
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: Supervised remote annunciator including audible and visual
indication, via LCD readout, of fire alarm by device address and location, and audible and
visual indication of system trouble.
C. Mounting: Factory mounted in flush wall-mounted enclosure.
2.9 DOOR RELEASE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex Model 2088
2. Edwards Model EST-1504-AQ
3. Radionics Model
4. Notifier Model FM-996
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
B. Product Description: Magnetic door holder with integral diodes to reduce buzzing.
C. Coil voltage: 24 VDC
2.10 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Product Description: Refer to manufacturer’s requirements.
B. Plenum Cable: All cable shall be installed in conduit. Fire alarm wiring in exposed areas
shall be run in a listed raceway. It is acceptable to route fire alarm wiring in free space in
non exposed areas if: 1) this is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, 2) the
proper cabling/wiring is used that is listed to be installed not within a raceway with the
correct plenum/non-plenum jacket rating for the installation environment.
C. Fire alarm circuit conductors have insulation color or code as follows:
1. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white.
2. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red.
3. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown.
4. Signal Device Circuit: Black, red.
5. Door Release: Blue, White
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify products and systems receiving devices are ready for installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install manual station with operating handle 4 feet above floor.
B. Install audible and visual signal devices 80 inches above finished floor, or 8” below ceiling,
whichever is lower.
10-034 28 31 00 - 6

C. Install 14 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and 12 AWG minimum
size conductors for signal circuit conductors in conduit.
D. Mount end-of-line device box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in
circuit.
E. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force.
F. Connect conduit and wire to door release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve
tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, and duct smoke detectors.
G. Wire all fire and smoke dampers indicated on HVAC drawings.
H. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72E.
I. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 00.
J. Ground and bond fire alarm equipment and circuits under the provisions of Section 26 05
00.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services; Division 1 - Execution
Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72H and local fire department requirements.
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturer’s field services.
B. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final
connections, and system testing.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Provide 8 hours of instruction each for two persons, to be conducted at project site with
manufacturer's representative.
END OF SECTION
10-034 28 31 00 - 7

SECTION 311000
SITE CLEARING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Clearing and Grubbing
B. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 - Earth Moving
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1. Section 201 - Clearing and Grubbing
2. Section 213 - Finishing Roadway
3. Section 625 - Topsoil and Salvaged Topsoil
1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
PART 2
MATERIALS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Perform clearing and grubbing in accordance to WisDOT Section 201.3 except
as modified or supplemented herein.
1. Protect existing trees and other vegetation outside the clearing limits or
indicated to remain in place. All damaged trees shall be trimmed and
repaired.
10731 SITE CLEARING 311000-1

2. The Contractor shall not remove any trees which are designated to be
saved or which are not required to be removed to perform the work.
3. All roots, stumps, and other vegetation shall be removed to a point at
least 12 inches below original ground elevation in fill areas, and to at least
12 inches below sub-grade elevation in cut areas.
4. Trees which are left in place, but which overhand the street shall be
trimmed as directed by the Engineer.
5. Dispose of all materials off-site, unless otherwise noted, and in
accordance with applicable authorities having jurisdiction. Do burn or
bury this material on-site. If disposal is permitted on the site, disposal
shall be by burial in such a manner to eliminate possible settlements.
3.2 SALVAGING TOPSOIL
A. Strip all topsoil from areas to be affected by the proposed excavations. Stockpile
a sufficient quantity of topsoil for turf establishment. The remaining topsoil, if
any, shall be stockpiled in a location selected by the Owner for future use by
County. Stockpile will be on-site or adjacent to the site.
END OF SECTION
10731 SITE CLEARING 311000-2

SECTION 312000
EARTH MOVING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Rough, fine and finish grading
B. Subgrade preparation
C. Excavation
D. Dewatering
E. Backfill and compaction
F. Trenching and backfilling
G. Embankments
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 311000 - Site Clearing
B. Section 312500 - Erosion and Sediment Control
C. Section 321123 - Aggregate Base Courses
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1. Section 205 - Roadway and Drainage Excavation
2. Section 206 - Excavation for Structures
3. Section 207 - Embankment
4. Section 208 - Borrow
5. Section 209 - Granular Backfill
6. Section 210 - Structural Backfill
7. Section 211 - Preparing the Foundation
8. Section 213 - Finishing Roadway
10731 EARTH MOVING 312000-1

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Submit gradation test and sample for borrow material.
C. Submit gradation test for sand base when specified.
1.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
PART 2
MATERIALS
2.1 GRANULAR BACKFILL
A. Granular backfill shall be in accordance with WisDOT Section 209 except as
modified or supplemented herein.
1. Areas below the water table, the gradation of the granular backfill shall
not have more than 5% of material passing the #200 sieve.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The contractor shall be responsible for utility notification to locate and mark
utilities prior to starting construction.
B. Site excavation and foundation requirements shall conform to the applicable
section of the Geotechnical Exploration Report.
C. Items in this section shall include all excavating, grading, backfilling, compacting,
borrow, subgrade preparation, foundation preparation, dewatering, trucking,
respreading and finishing of topsoil, disposal of all excess material and all other
related work necessary to complete the project.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Excavation shall be in accordance to WisDOT Sections 205.3 and 208.3.
B. Embankment construction shall be in accordance to WisDOT Sections 207.3
except as modified or supplemented herein.
1. The grades shown on the plans are finished grades; the Contractor shall
grade to sub-grade elevations allowing for topsoil, pavements and other
construction.
10731 EARTH MOVING 312000-2

2. All embankments shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% of the
Standard Proctor Density, or the minimum densities established in the
Geotechnical Exploration Report, whichever is greater. The Contractor
shall schedule this grading and turf establishment work to coordinate with
the work of others and to minimize wind and water erosion.
3. Rocks or other material used in the construction of embankments shall
not be any larger than 6 inches in the greatest diameter except with the
Engineer's approval.
4. The hydraulic method of placing fills shall not be permitted.
C. Foundation preparation shall be in accordance to WisDOT Section 211 except as
modified or supplemented herein.
1. The foundation shall be graded to the required grade and cross section
and compacted to the required density and stability. The "required
stability" is such that when the foundation is test rolled by a simulated 9
ton axle, no rutting or displacement of material occurs.
2. The preparation of foundation shall meet the following tolerances:
D. EXCESS MATERIAL
a. Sub-grade below aggregate base course: +0.05 feet
- 0.10 feet
b. Sub-grade below pavement courses: +0.05 feet
- 0.05 feet
c. See Section 02730 for base aggregate tolerances
1. All excess excavated material shall be stockpiled in a location identified
by the Owner for future use by the County. Stockpile location will be onsite
or adjacent to the site.
END OF SECTION
10731 EARTH MOVING 312000-3

SECTION 312500
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Erosion control systems including mats and blankets, ditch checks, silt and
sediment fences, construction entrance, and other erosion control devices.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 – Earth Moving
B
Section 329200 – Turfs and Grasses
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Section 628 - Erosion Control
A. Shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Certification and Sampling:
1. Furnish a manufacturer’s certification stating that the materials supplied
conforms to the requirements of this Section. The certification shall
include or have attached typical results of tests for the specified
properties, representative of the materials supplied.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the stormwater and all
other permits required for this project.
B. Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and Engineer of fines or assessments
resulting from the Contractor’s failure to comply with regulatory agency erosion
control requirements.
1.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
10731 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 312500-1

PART 2
MATERIALS
2.1 SILT FENCE
A. Machine Sliced Silt Fence:
2.2 EROSION MAT
1. Material shall be listed on the current WisDOT Product Acceptability List
(PAL).
2. Geotextile Fabric: Shall conform to WisDOT Section 628.2.6. The
supporting fence for reinforced silt fence shall be strong enough to support
trapped sediment or ponded water at the full height of the fence.
3. Posts: 2-inch by 2-inch wood. 48-inch minimum length with 24-inch
minimum embedment and 6-foot maximum spacing.
A. Material shall be listed on the current WisDOT Product Acceptability List (PAL).
B. Material shall conform to WisDOT Section 628.2.2. The class and type of
matting is identified on the drawings. If the class and type of mat is not identified
on the drawings then the material shall be Class 1, Type B.
C. Wire staples. The length and placement of the wire staples shall be as specified
by the manufacturer for each type of mat and its application for optimum
performance.
2.3 BALE CHECKS
A. Bales shall meet the requirements of WisDOT Section 628.2.4.
B. Stakes shall meet the requirements of WisDOT Section 628.2.5.
2.4 INLET PROTECTION
A. Material shall be listed on the current WisDOT Product Acceptability List (PAL).
B. Material shall conform to WisDOT Section 628.2.12 - Inlet Protection.
2.5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE
A. Rock Construction Entrance:
1. Three (3) inch size (minimum) washed river rock.
2. Geotextile: Conform to WisDOT Section 645, Type SAS.
10731 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 312500-2

PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Silt fence, and rock entrance shall be installed prior to starting construction. All
other systems shall be installed as soon as the phases of work are completed to
minimize the potential for erosion.
B. Install all erosion control systems per manufactured recommendations.
C. Silt fence shall be placed around all material stockpiles and other areas of
disturbance as necessary to prevent sediment transport.
D. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining all systems throughout the duration
of the project and warranty period. The Contractor is responsible for removing
silt fence and other temporary erosion control systems when other means of
permanent erosion control, such as turf and other vegetation, become effective
or until this responsibility has been assumed in writing by the Owner.
E. A copy of the erosion control plan shall be made available upon request for
inspection by State and local authorities.
F. Items shall include providing, delivering, assembling, placing, excavating,
backfilling, anchoring, preparation of soil, repairing and reseeding damaged
areas, providing and applying water, maintenance throughout project duration,
removal of systems at the end of the project’s warranty period or earlier as
approved by the Engineer or Owner and disposal of materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND MAINTAINANCE
A. Silt Fence: Install silt fence as recommended by the manufacturer and as
detailed on the drawings. Install, inspect and maintain silt fence as required per
authorities having local jurisdiction and WisDOT Section 628.3.4.
All silt fences shall be inspected immediately after each rainfall and at least daily
during continuous rain events. All problems or deficiencies shall be repaired or
corrected immediately. Once the soil deposits have reached approximately 1/2
the height of the silt fence the soil shall be removed.
B. Erosion Mat: Install erosion mat as recommended by the manufacturer and as
detailed on the drawings. The pattern of the wire staples shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer for type and application of matting. Install,
inspect and maintain erosion mat as required in WisDOT Section 628.3.2.
C. Rock Entrance: Install rock entrance where shown and as detailed on the
drawings.
D. Bale Checks: Install bale checks where shown and as detailed on the drawings.
Install, inspect and maintain silt fence as required in WisDOT Section 628.3.3.
10731 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 312500-3

E. Inlet Protection: Install inlet protection as recommended by the manufacturer
and as detailed on the drawings. Install, inspect and maintain inlet protection as
required in WisDOT Section 628.3.13.
3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. Conform to WisDOT Section 628.3.4.2, and as follows:
1. Contractor is responsible for inspection, maintenance, and repair of any
washouts or accumulations of sediment that occur as a result of the
grading or construction. Restoration consists of grade repair, turf reestablishment,
and street sweeping of mud and debris tracked from the
Project Site.
2. Inspection of all erosion control items will take place immediately after
each runoff event and at least daily during prolonged rainfall. Any
required repairs shall be made immediately.
3. Upon final acceptance of the Project and establishment of permanent
erosion control measures, the Contractor shall remove all temporary
erosion control measures.
4. Temporary mulching and temporary seeding/mulching may need to be reestablished
several times throughout the duration of the work.
5. Maintain temporary construction entrances to prevent mud or sediment
from leaving the construction Project Site:
a. Replace gravel material when surface voids are visible.
b. After each rainfall, inspect any structure used to trap sediment and
clean it out as necessary.
c. Immediately remove all objectionable materials spilled, washed, or
tracked onto public roadways. Remove all sediment deposited on
paved roadways within 24 hours.
B. Sediment Removal: Conform to WisDOT Section 628 and Special Provision
S-25:
1. If an erosion control device has been reduced in capacity by 30 percent
or more, the Contractor shall restore such devices to their original
condition.
END OF SECTION
10731 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 312500-4

SECTION 313700
RIP RAP
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Riprap
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
D. Section 312000 – Earth Moving
E. Section 312500 – Erosion and Sediment Control
F. Section 329200 – Turfs and Grasses
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Section 205 - Roadway and Drainage Excavation
2. Section 606 - RipRap
3. Section 645 - Geotextile Fabrics
A. Shall conform to the General Conditions.
1.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
PART 2
MATERIALS
2.1 GEOTEXTILE FABRICS
A. Geotextile fabric shall conform to the requirements in WisDOT Section 645.
B. Type HR (Heavy Riprap): Shall conform to the requirements of WisDOT Section
645.2.7.
10731 RIPRAP 313700-1

2.2 RIPRAP
A. Material shall conform to the requirements in WisDOT Section 606.
B. The size of riprap shall be as noted on the plans or on the bid proposal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The contractor shall be responsible for utility notification to locate and mark
utilities prior to starting construction.
3.2 GEOTEXTILE FABRICS
A. Install according to the requirements of WisDOT Section 645.3.
3.3 RIPRAP
A. Install according to the requirements of WisDOT Section 606.3.
END OF SECTION
10731 RIPRAP 313700-2

SECTION 321123
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aggregate materials used for pavement or slab base course and drainage
applications.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312500 – Earth Moving
B. Section 321200 – Flexible Paving
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Section 301 - General Requirements for Base Aggregates
2. Section 305 - Dense Graded Base
A. Shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Submit one gradation test per 2000 tons of material placed or fraction thereof.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For Dense Graded Base, provide aggregates conforming to WisDOT Section
301.2 except as modified herein. Aggregates shall be crushed stone or crushed
gravel. Mixing of aggregate types will not be accepted.
1.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
10731 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123-1

PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 BASE AGGREGATE:
A. Shall conform to WisDOT Section 305, 1 1/4-inch base except 3-inch base will
not be allowed below the upper 4-inches.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Prior to placing base aggregates, verify that subgrade have been prepared
according to the specifications, have passed the specified roll test and has been
checked for line and grade.
3.2 PLACEMENT
A. Construct base in accordance with WisDOT Section 301.3.4 except as specified
herein.
B. Mix aggregate uniformly to maintain proper gradation.
C. Spread and compact each layer to the required cross section and density prior to
placing the succeeding layer.
D. Compact each layer of aggregate base to 100% Standard Proctor Density. The
contractor shall add water as necessary to achieve compaction.
E. The contractor shall apply water to control dust and to prevent the separation of
aggregates throughout the duration of the project or until the pavement has been
placed.
F. Deposit only the amount of aggregate which is intended to be spread and
compacted during the same day.
G. Finished base surface shall be within 0.04 feet of plan elevation.
END OF SECTION
10731 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123-2

SECTION 321200
FLEXIBLE PAVING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Plant mixed asphalt pavement for upper and lower layers, patching and
overlays.
B. Tack Coat
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 – Earth Moving
B. Section 321123 – Aggregate Base Course
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Section 450 - General Requirements for Asphaltic Pavements
2. Section 455 - Asphaltic Materials
3. Section 460 - Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements
4. Section 465 - Asphaltic Surface
A. Shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Submit asphalt mix design at least fourteen days (14) days prior to paving.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with WisDOT Sections 450, 455, 460, and 465 except as modified
herein.
B. The proposed asphalt mix design shall be approved for use on WisDOT projects
within the last two years.
10731 FLEXIBLE PAVING 321200-1

1.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
B. The testing requirements of the Quality Management Program do not apply to
this project.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 HOT MIX ASPHALT
A. Asphaltic Material: Shall conform to WisDOT Section 455 and WisDOT's
"Combined State Binder Group Certification Method of Acceptance for Asphalt
Binders". The asphaltic material shall be PG58-28.
B. Aggregate: The aggregate gradation range shall be in accordance with WisDOT
Section 460.2.2.
1. Lower Layer: Nominal Size 12.5 mm (when less than 2.25 inch layer).
2. Upper Layer: Nominal Size 12.5 mm
3. Pathway Reconstruction: Nominal Size 12.5 mm
C. Mix Design: The mix design shall be in accordance to WisDOT Section 460.2.7.
2.2 TACK COAT
1. Lower Layer: Type E-1
2. Upper Layer: Type E-1
3. Pathway Reconstruction: Type E-1
A. Shall conform to WisDOT Section 455.2.5.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The testing requirements of the Quality Management Program as specified in
WisDOT Section 460.2.8 do not apply to this project.
B. The contractor shall review the proposed placement for the upper layer or wear
course with the Engineer prior to placement. The review shall include at
minimum seams, compaction, and hauling routes.
C. Provide adequate traffic control at no additional cost to the contract.
D. Provide the Engineer with a 48-hour notice prior to all paving operations.
E. Where new pavements meet existing pavements, the edges of the existing
pavements shall be saw cut or milled straight.
10731 FLEXIBLE PAVING 321200-2

3.2 PLACEMENT
A. Adjust structures prior to placement of upper layer or surface course as specified
in Section 312000 – Earth Moving.
B. Prepare aggregate base course according to Section 321123 – Aggregate Base
Courses.
C. Prepare Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement as specified in WisDOT Section 450.
D. Equipment shall conform to WisDOT Section 450.
E. Deliver and place Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement as specified in applicable Sections
of WisDOT Sections 450, 455, 460 and 465 and at thickness shown on the
drawings. Temperature delivered to the site shall be within 20 F of that
recommended by the manufacturer as specified in WisDOT Section 450.3.2.3.
F. The surface of the pavement shall conform to WisDOT Section 450.3.2.9 except
that maximum allowable variation from a 10 foot straightedge shall be 3/16 inch.
G. The Contractor shall take special measures to prevent damage to edges of
concrete curbs and gutters during paving and rolling operations. Damage to
such will result in the removal and replacement of such damaged facilities
without compensation.
I. Prior to the placement of the upper layer or wear course the lower layer or base
course shall be cleaned with a power pick up broom.
J. Apply tack coat according to WisDOT Section 455.3 except that the rate of
application shall be 0.05 gallons per square yard and the tack coat shall be
applied to edges of adjacent pavement.
END OF SECTION
10731 FLEXIBLE PAVING 321200-3

SECTION 32 13 13
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete pavement.
B. Cast-in-place exterior equipment pads.
C. Cast-in-place cleanout frost sleeve pads.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base.
B. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Compacted subbase for paving.
C. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.
D. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International.
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International.
C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International.
D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International.
E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International.
F. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
G. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
H. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
I. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
J. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
K. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method.
L. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
M. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
N. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for
Use in Concrete.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work in this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
10731 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-1

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Concrete Mix Design: Submit proposed mix designs for each class of concrete a minimum of 7
days prior to the start of work in this section.
C. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound.
D. For work in public right-of-way comply with authority having jurisdiction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PAVING ASSEMBLIES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 301.
2.02 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished.
2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150 Normal - Type I portland type, grey color.
B. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N.
E. Water: Clean, and not detrimental to concrete.
F. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260.
G. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A - Water Reducing, Type C - Accelerating,
and Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding.
1. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by
weight of cement.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Expansion Joint: ASTM D 1751 type; 1/2 inch thick.
2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis
of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Hoffman LLC
for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Concrete Properties:
1. Compressive Strength, per ASTM C 39 at 28 days: 4000 psi, (reference only).
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 0.45 by weight.
4. Total Air Content: 6 percent (+/- 1 %), per ASTM C 173.
5. Slump: 2 - 4 inches (+/- 1/2").
6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch.
10731 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-2

2.07 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.02 SUBBASE
A. See Section 31 23 23 - Fill for construction of base course for work of this Section.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
B. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement.
C. Notify Hoffman LLC minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
3.04 FORMING
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.
C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete
placement.
3.05 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement at midheight of slabs-on-grade, unless noted otherwise.
B. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints.
3.06 COLD AND HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
C. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is
wet or frozen.
3.07 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during
concrete placement.
C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined
construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
D. Remove snow, ice, and frost from subbase surface and reinforcing prior to placing concrete. Do
not place concrete on surfaces that are frozen.
3.08 JOINTS
A. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 45 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical
surfaces and other components.
1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/8 inch of finished
surface.
10731 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-3

2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
B. Provide keyed joints at construction joints.
C. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide within 24 hours after finishing. Cut 1/5 into depth of
slab or maximum 1-1/4 inches. Space joints to the following:
1. Sidewalks: 5'-0" on center.
2. Curbs: 15'-0" on center and at tangent points of curves.
3. Gutters: 15'-0" on center and at tangent points of curves.
4. Pavement: 15'-0" on center, unless otherwise shown on plans.
D. For curved sidewalks and curbs, joints shall be cut perpendicular to perimeter edges.
3.09 FINISHING
A. Pavement: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction.
B. Sidewalks: Light broom, trowel radius joint edges to 1/4 inch.
C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction.
D. Inclined Vehicular Aprons: Medium texture, broomed perpendicular to slope.
E. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Imprinting of concrete with stamp identifying installing contractor is prohibited unless required for
work in public right-of-way.
3.10 JOINT SEALING
A. See Section 07 90 05 for joint sealer requirements.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests as specified:
1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed
firm.
2. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for
review prior to commencement of concrete operations.
3. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure
conformance with specified requirements.
B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure four concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 50 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.
1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under
same conditions as concrete it represents.
C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Do not permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing.
3.14 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
10731 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-4

A. The following concrete will be deemed to be defective, and must be removed promptly from the
project, unless repair is approved in writing by the Engineer:
1. Concrete that is not formed as indicated, is not true to intended alignment, is not plumb or
level where so intended, is not true to intended grades and levels, or does not conform to
the strength requirements of these specifications.
2. Concrete that has voids or honeycombing that have been resurfaced or filled without the
approval of the Engineer.
3. Concrete that contains sawdust, shavings, wood, or embedded debris.
4. Surface appearance defects resulting from curing or spalling.
END OF SECTION
10731 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-5

SECTION 321314
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND APRONS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cast-in-place concrete sidewalks, aprons, pedestrian ramps.
B. Reinforcement
C. Formwork
D. Detectable Warning System for Pedestrian Ramps.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 - Earth Moving
B
Section 321123 - Aggregate Base Courses
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1. Section 602 – Concrete Sidewalks, Loading Zones, Safety Islands, and
Steps.
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
C. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting
D. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting
E. ACI 309 - Recommended Practices for Consolidation of Concrete
E. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Submit concrete mix designs a minimum of fourteen (14) days prior to the
placement of the concrete.
C. Submit concrete test results as soon as results are known.
10731 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND APRONS 321314-1

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The contractor shall hire an independent testing laboratory to test the concrete
for air, slump and to cast test cylinders to verify conformance with the mix design.
All costs for testing shall be paid by the Contractor. One test required for each
parameter per 75 cubic yards of concrete or portion thereof. Three (3) copies of
the results shall be submitted to the Engineer.
B. All testing shall conform to the following standards:
1. Mix Design: ACI 301
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33
3. Strength Test: ASTM C31 and C39
4. Slump Test: ASTM C143
5. Air Test: ASTM C231
1.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
PART 2
MATERIALS
2.1 CONCRETE
A. Concrete shall be produced by a Ready Mix Plant approved by the Engineer.
Concrete shall conform to the requirement of ASTM C94 - Standard
Specifications for Ready Mix Concrete.
B. Concrete shall be in accordance with WisDOT Section 602 except as modified or
supplemented herein.
1. Concrete for sidewalks shall have a minimum 28 day strength of 4000 psi.
2. Entrained air content 6% +/- 1.5%
C. Sidewalk shall be 4 inches in thickness.
D. Material Requirements
1. Cement: Shall conform to ASTM C150, Type 1. All
cement shall be supplied from a single
source.
2. Aggregates: Shall conform to ASTM C33
3. Water: Shall be clean, potable water.
4. Admixtures:
10731 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND APRONS 321314-2

a. Air Entrainment: Shall conform to ASTM C260
b. Water Reducing Agent: Shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A
c. Fly Ash: Shall conform to ASTM C618 class C or F.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND FORMWORK
A. Formwork shall conform to ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete
Formwork.
B. Reinforcement shall be tagged and conform to ASTM A615 Grade 60.
Installation shall conform to ACI 315.
C. Tire wire: Shall be 16 gauge black annealed wire or heavier.
D. Forms shall be clean prior to concrete placement.
2.3 RELATED GENERAL MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene Sheeting: Shall conform to ASTM C171.
B. Finishing Compound: WisDOT approved white pigmented curing compound.
C. Expansion Joint: Bituminous fiber type conforming to ASTM D1751.
D. Joint Sealant: Two part - self leveling, polyurethane sealant. Sololastic SL2 by
Sonneborn Building Products or approved equal.
2.4 DETECTABLE WARNING SYSTEM FOR PEDESTRIAN RAMPS
A. Neenah detectable warning plate or approved equal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Provide all formwork. Modify forms as necessary to provide all required
openings.
B. Tolerances:
1. Thickness of slabs: +/- 1/4"
2. Specified grade, level +/- 3/16" over 10' with a maximum of 1/2"
and plumb
over entire length or height.
C. Adequately stake and brace forms to hold forms to true line and grade.
D. Remove forms as soon as concrete has hardened if not supporting the weight of
the concrete but not less than 24 hours after placement.
10731 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND APRONS 321314-3

3.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement shall be installed with a minimum of 2" of cover. Adequately
support reinforcement with concrete blocks or wire/plastic chairs. Splices shall
be installed with minimum lapping distances shown on the plans and bars wired
tightly together.
B. Tolerances: +/- 1/4"
3.3 CONCRETE WORK
A. Concrete Placement: shall conform to ACI 309 - Consolidation, ACI 306 - Cold
Weather Placement, ACI 307 - Hot Weather Placement.
B. Finishing: Apply float finish and broom finish to exterior slabs. Edge or
chamfered the edge of all concrete that is adjacent an expansion or construction
joint.
C. Install expansion and control joints where shown on plans and according to
WisDOT Section 602.3.2.5 except as modified or supplemented herein.
1. Control joints shall be hand tooled and not saw cut.
2. At minimum expansion joints shall be installed at the following locations:
a. Every 100 linear feet of sidewalk
b. Where sidewalk or apron meets curb and gutter or other rigid
pavement.
3. Seal top of expansion joints.
D. Curing: Cure concrete with impervious coating in accordance with WisDOT
Section 415.3.12 except as modified or supplemented herein.
3.4 CLEANING
1. Impervious coating shall be applied in multiple direction to assure
adequate coverage.
A. Remove all debris from the site when work is complete.
END OF SECTION
10731 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND APRONS 321314-4

SECTION 321600
CURBS AND GUTTERS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cast-in-place concrete curbs and gutters
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 - Earth Moving
B. Section 321123 – Aggregate Base Course
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1. Section 601 – Concrete Curb and Gutter
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
C. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting
D. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting
E. ACI 309 - Recommended Practices for Consolidation of Concrete
F. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Submit concrete mix designs a minimum of fourteen (14) days prior to the
placement of the concrete.
C. Submit concrete test results as soon as results are known.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The contractor shall hire an independent testing laboratory to test the concrete
for air, slump and to cast test cylinders to verify conformance with the mix design.
All costs for testing shall be paid by the Contractor. One test required for each
10731 CURBS AND GUTTERS 321600-1

parameter per 75 cubic yards of concrete or portion thereof. Three (3) copies of
the results shall be submitted to the Engineer.
B. All testing shall conform to the following standards:
1. Mix Design: ACI 301
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33
3. Strength Test: ASTM C31 and C39
4. Slump Test: ASTM C143
5. Air Test: ASTM C231
1.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
PART 2
MATERIALS
2.1 CONCRETE
A. Concrete shall be produced by a Ready Mix Plant approved by the
Engineer. Concrete shall conform to the requirement of ASTM C94 - Standard
Specifications for Ready Mix Concrete.
B. Concrete shall be in accordance with WisDOT Section 601 except as modified or
supplemented herein.
1. Concrete for sidewalks shall have a minimum 28 day strength of 4000 psi.
2. Entrained air content 6% +/- 1.5%
C. Material Requirements
1. Cement: Shall conform to ASTM C150, Type 1. All
cement shall be supplied from a single
source.
2. Aggregates: Shall conform to ASTM C33
3. Water: Shall be clean, potable water.
4. Admixtures:
a. Air Entrainment: Shall conform to ASTM C260
b. Water Reducing Agent: Shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A
c. Fly Ash: Shall conform to ASTM C618 class C or F.
10731 CURBS AND GUTTERS 321600-2

2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND FORMWORK
A. Formwork shall conform to ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete
Formwork.
B. Reinforcement shall be tagged and conform to ASTM A615 Grade 60.
Installation shall conform to ACI 315.
C. Tie wire: Shall be 16 gauge black annealed wire or heavier.
D. Forms shall be clean prior to concrete placement.
2.3 RELATED GENERAL MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene Sheeting: Shall conform to ASTM C171.
B. Finishing Compound: WisDOT approved white pigmented curing compound.
C. Expansion Joint: Bituminous fiber type conforming to ASTM D1751.
D. Joint Sealant: Two part - self leveling, polyurethane sealant. Sololastic SL2 by
Sonneborn Building Products or approved equal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Provide all formwork. Modify forms as necessary to provide all required
openings.
B. Tolerances:
1. Thickness of slabs: +/- 1/4"
2. Specified grade, level +/- 1/4" over 10' with a maximum of 1/2"
and plumb
over entire length or height.
C. Remove forms as soon as concrete has hardened if not supporting the weight of
the concrete but not less than 24 hours after placement.
3.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement shall be installed with a minimum of 2" of cover. Adequately
support reinforcement with concrete blocks or wire/plastic chairs. Splices shall
be installed with minimum lapping distances shown on the plans and bars wired
tightly together.
B. Tolerances: +/- 1/4"
10731 CURBS AND GUTTERS 321600-3

3.3 CONCRETE WORK
A. Cast-in-place concrete curb or curb and gutter shall be constructed in
accordance with the plans and Wis/DOT Section 601 except as modified herein.
B. Joints: Transverse expansion joints, filled with 1/2 inch preformed joint material,
shall be placed at the ends of all curved sections; at the ends of the curved
portions of entrance and street returns, 3 feet on each side of all catch basins
and at 200 foot intervals on all straight sections. Control joints shall be tooled in
curb at 10 foot intervals.
C. Finishing: Apply float finish and broom finish. Broom finish to be applied
perpendicular to flow line. Edge or chamfered the edge of all concrete that is
adjacent an expansion or construction joint.
D. Curing: Cure concrete with impervious coating in accordance with WisDOT
Section 415.3.12 except as modified or supplemented herein.
1. Impervious coating shall be applied in multiple direction to assure
adequate coverage.
E. Unacceptable work shall be removed and be replaced with acceptable work as
ordered by the Engineer.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall protect curb and gutter until backfilling of curb and paving of
street is complete.
3.5 CLEANING
B. Remove all debris from the site when work is complete.
END OF SECTION
10731 CURBS AND GUTTERS 321600-4

SECTION 32 17 23.13
PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Parking lot markings, including parking bays, crosswalks, arrows, and handicapped symbols.
B. Roadway lane markings and crosswalk markings.
C. "No Parking" curb painting.
D. Preparation of pavement surfaces for pavement marking.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 32 12 16 - Asphalt Paving.
B. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators
Association.
B. FHWA MUTCD - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Certificates: Submit for each batch of paint stating compliance with specified requirements.
D. Colors: Submit a sample chart for line paint colors.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years of experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver paint in containers of at least 5 gallons accompanied by batch certificate.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
10731 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-1

A. Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated.
1. Roadway Markings: As required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Parking Lots: Yellow.
3. Handicapped Symbols: Yellow.
B. Temporary Marking Tape: Preformed, reflective, pressure sensitive adhesive tape in color(s)
required; Contractor is responsible for selection of material of sufficient durability as to perform
satisfactorily during period for which its use is required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Hoffman LLC of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application of
marking materials.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with
compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods.
2. Completely remove rubber deposits, existing paint markings, and other coatings adhering
to the pavement, by scraping, wire brushing, sandblasting, mechanical abrasion, or
approved chemicals.
D. Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium
phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each
application; after cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the
new paint.
E. Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; provide
templates to control paint application by type and color at necessary intervals.
F. Temporary Pavement Markings: When required or directed by Hoffman LLC, apply temporary
markings of the color(s), width(s) and length(s) as indicated or directed.
1. After temporary marking has served its purpose, remove temporary marking by carefully
controlled sandblasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method so that
surface to which the marking was applied will not be damaged.
2. At Contractor's option, temporary marking tape may used in lieu of temporary painted
marking; remove unsatisfactory tape and replace with painted markings at no additional
cost to Owner.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Begin pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried.
B. Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50
degrees F or more than 95 degrees F.
C. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is
thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts.
D. Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov) for details not shown.
E. Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve
10731 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-2

control points until after markings have been accepted.
F. Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on the drawings
true, sharp edges and ends.
1. Apply paint in one coat only.
2. Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum.
3. Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
G. Roadway Traffic Lanes: Use suitable mobile mechanical equipment that provides constant
agitation of paint and travels at controlled speeds.
1. Conduct operations in such a manner that necessary traffic can move without hindrance.
2. Place warning signs at the beginning of the wet line, and at points well in advance of the
marking equipment for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. Place small flags or
other similarly effective small objects near freshly applied markings at frequent intervals to
reduce crossing by traffic.
3. If paint does not dry within expected time, discontinue paint operations until cause of slow
drying is determined and corrected.
4. Skip Markings: Synchronize one or more paint "guns" to automatically begin and cut off
paint flow; make length of intervals as indicated.
5. Use hand application by pneumatic spray for application of paint in areas where a mobile
paint applicator cannot be used.
H. Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other
markings indicated on drawings.
1. Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces.
2. Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable.
I. Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges
and ends, of the design and size indicated.
3.04 DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENT
A. Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked.
B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly
painted markings.
C. Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not
less than that recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate
from true alignment; exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or other
deficiencies or irregularities.
E. Remove markings in manner to avoid damage to the surface to which the marking was applied,
using carefully controlled sand blasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method.
F. Replace removed markings at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
10731 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-3

SECTION 32 17 26
TACTILE WARNING SURFACES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cast-In-Place detectable/tactile warning surface tiles.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
B. ASTM C 153 - Specification for Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
C. ASTM C 501 - Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile
by the Taber Abrader.
D. ASTM C 554 - Standard Test Method for Crazing Resistance of Fired Glazed Whitewares by
Autoclave Treatment.
E. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of
Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.
F. ASTM D 543 - Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical
Reagents.
G. ASTM D 1037 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and
Particle Panel Materials.
H. ASTM D 2486 - Standard Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Wall Paints.
I. ASTM D 5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by
Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact).
J. ASTM F 2296 - Standard Practice for Determining the Adhesion of Lamination Films to Prints
Utilizing Mechanical Stress: Four Different Test Methods Score/Tape, Cross Hatch, X-Cut, and
Crease-Folding.
K. ASTM G 155 - Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
Non-Metallic Materials.
L. FS SS-T-308b - Federal Specification for Ceramic Tile, Floor, Wall, and Trim Units.
M. AASHTO - Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges.
N. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) - Title III Regulations, 28 CFR Part 36 ADA STANDARDS
FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN, Appendix A, Section 4.29.2 DETECTABLE WARNINGS ON
WALKING SURFACES.
1.04 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Cast In Place Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface Tiles
shall comply with the detectable warnings on walking surfaces section of the Americans with
Disabilities Act (Title III Regulations, 28 CFR Part 36 ADA STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE
DESIGN, Appendix A, Section 4.29.2 DETECTABLE WARNINGS ON WALKING SURFACES).
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.
10731 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES 32 17 26-1

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication details, composite structural system, tile surface profile, sound
on cane contact amplification feature, plans of tile placement including joints, and material to be
used as well as outlining installation materials and procedure.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches
square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's specified installation and maintenance
practices for each type of Detectable Warning Surface Tile and accessory required.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with a minimum of 3 years experience in the
manufacture of Cast In Place Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface Tiles.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer certified in writing by Cast In Place Detectable/Tactile Warning
Surface Tile manufacturer as qualified for performing installation, and who has successfully
completed installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project.
C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by
Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products undercover in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.08 SEQUENCING
A. Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this
section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.
B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent
interruption of construction progress.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface Tiles shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of 5 years
(minimum) from date of substantial completion. The guarantee includes defective work,
breakage, deformation, fading and loosening of tiles.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
10731 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES 32 17 26-2

2.02 Advantage Tactile Systems; Buffalo, NY
A. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface Tiles shall have an integral non-slip surface
stamped into the stainless steel plate on the top of the domes and in the field surface between
the domes. It shall have an ultra violet stabilized coating. The tile shall incorporate an in-line
pattern of truncated domes measuring nominal 0.2 inch height, 0.9 inch base diameter, and 0.45
inch top diameter, spaced center-to-center 2.4" as measured on a diagonal and 1.7" as
measured side by side. For wheelchair and high heel shoe safety the field area shall consist of
an integral non-slip surface (within the stainless steel plate) that measure 0.03 inch above the
adjacent surface.
1. Type:
a. Cast In Place Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface Tiles.
2. Dimensions: Length and Width, nominal size as follows:
a. 24 by 60 inches (610 by 1524 mm).
3. Color:
a. Verify with Hoffman prior to installation
4. Performance Standards: Comply with the following.
a. Slip Resistance of Tile when tested by ASTM C 1028 the combined Wet and Dry
Static Co-Efficients of Friction not to be less than 0.80 on top of domes and field area.
b. Chemical Stain Resistance of Tile when tested by ASTM D 543 to withstand without
discoloration or staining - saturated calcium chloride, red enamel spray paint, red
lipstick, red wax crayon, black liquid ink, chewing gum, mustard, ketchup, urine,
coffee, diesel fuel, asphalt, tobacco juice, hydraulic oil and motor oil.
c. Abrasive Wear of Tile when tested by BYK - Gardener Tester ASTM D 2486 with
reciprocating linear motion of 37 plus or minus cycles per minute over a 10 inches of
travel. The abrasive medium, a 40 grit Norton Metallite sand paper, to be fixed and
leveled to a holder. The combined mass of sled, weight and wood block is to be 3.2
lb. Average wear depth shall not exceed 0.010 inch after 1,000 abrasion cycles when
measured on the top surface of the dome representing the average of three
measurement locations per sample.
d. Abrasive Wear of Tile when tested by Taber Tester ASTM C 501 and Federal
Specifications SS-T-308b with H22 coarse Calibrade Wheels with each testing coupon
weighed to the nearest 0.01 gram. Average wear index shall be a minimum of 480
after 1,000 abrasion cycles with ASTM C 501 parameters and 210 with SS-T-308b
parameters when measured on the top surface of the dome representing the average
of four sample measurements.
e. Gardner Impact to Geometry "GE" of the standard when tested by ASTM D 5420 to
have a mean failure energy expressed as a function of specimen thickness of not less
than 550 in. lbf/in. A failure is noted when a crack is visible in coating or a 3 mm
depression on domes for coated tile.
f. Accelerated Weathering of Tile when tested by ASTM G 155 for 3,000 hours shall
exhibit the following result - E

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
ASTM F 2296 not to show any failure of coating delaminating from metal panel.
k. Crazing resistance by thermal shock with breaches in coating by ASTM C 554 no
failure up to 450 degrees Fahrenheit
l. AASHTO HB-17 single wheel HS20-44 loading "Standard Specifications for Highways
and Bridges". The Cast In Place Tile shall be mounted on a concrete platform then
subjected to the specified maximum load of 10,400 lbs., corresponding to an 8,000 lb
individual wheel load and a 30 percent impact factor. The tile shall exhibit no visible
damage at the maximum load of 10,400 lbs.
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Cast-In-Place Installation:
1. Physical characteristics of the concrete shall be consistent with Section 03 30 00 while
maintaining a slump range of 3 - 4 to permit solid placement of the Cast In Place
Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface Tile system.
2. Factory-installed plastic protective sheeting must remain in place during the entire
installation process to prevent the splashing of concrete onto the finished surface of the tile.
3. It is imperative that the installation technique eliminates any air voids under the tile. Holes
in the tile perimeter allow air to escape during the installation process. Concrete will flow
through the large holes in each embedment flange on the underside of the tile and will lock
the tile solidly into the cured concrete.
4. Concrete shall be placed and finished true and smooth to the required dimensions and
slope prior to the tile placement. Immediately after finishing concrete, the electronic level
should be used to check that the required slope is achieved. The tile shall be placed true
and square to the curb edge in accordance with the Drawings.
5. The Cast In Place Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface Tiles shall be tamped (or vibrated)
into the fresh concrete to ensure that the field level of the tile is flush to the adjacent
concrete surface. The embedment process should not be accomplished by stepping on the
tile as this may cause uneven setting which can result in air voids under the tile surface.
The tile field level (base of truncated dome) should be flush to adjacent surfaces to permit
proper water drainage and eliminate tripping hazards between adjacent finishes.
6. In cold weather climates it is recommended that the Cast In Place Detectable/Tactile
Warning Surface Tiles be set deeper such that the top of domes are level to the adjacent
concrete on the top and sides of ramp and that the base of domes to allow water drainage.
This installation will reduce the possibility of damage due to snow clearing operations.
7. Immediately after placement, the tile elevation shall be checked to adjacent concrete.
Ensure that the field surface of the tile is flush with the surrounding concrete and back of
curb so that no ponding is possible on the tile at the back side of curb.
8. While concrete is workable, a 3/8 inch radius edging tool shall be used to create a finished
edge of concrete, then a steel trowel shall be used to finish the concrete around the tile's
perimeter, flush to the field level of the tile.
10731 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES 32 17 26-4

9. During and after the tile installation and the concrete curing stage, it is imperative that there
is no walking, leaning or external forces placed on the tile that may rock the tile causing a
void between the underside of tile and concrete.
10. Following tile placement, review installation tolerances to contract drawings and adjust tile
before the concrete sets. Two suitable weights of 25 lb each may be required to be placed
on each tile as necessary to ensure solid contact of the underside of tile to concrete.
11. Following the concrete curing stage, protective plastic wrap is to be removed from the tile
surface by cutting the plastic with a sharp knife, tight to the concrete/tile interface. If
concrete bled under the plastic, a soft brush shall be used to clean the residue without
damage to the tile surface.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Protect tiles against damage from rolling loads following installation by covering with plywood or
hardwood.
C. Clean Tactile Tiles not more than four days prior to date scheduled for inspection intended to
establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean Tactile Tile by method
specified by Tactile Tile manufacturer.
D. Comply with manufacturers maintenance manual for cleaning and maintaining tile surface and it
is recommended to perform annual inspections for safety and tile integrity.
E. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES 32 17 26-5

SECTION 32 31 23
PLASTIC FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. PVC privacy fences.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated
Poly(vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.
B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of entire fence layout, showing member sizes and part
identification, fasteners, anchors, and fittings.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in clean, dry location away from vehicular traffic.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's lifetime warranty to original consumer purchaser against failure of fencing
due to manufacturing defects that cause corrosion, blistering, peeling, flaking, rusting, abnormal
weathering, and discoloration under normal use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. DIYVinyl Products: www.diyvinylproducts.com.
B. Colonial Post and Fence: www.colonialpostandfence.com
C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.
D. Provide all fence components from the same manufacturer.
2.02 PRODUCTS
A. Fence: Prefabricated fence components manufactured of hollow extrusions (see plans).
1. PVC: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) specially formulated for outdoor applications;
compound conforming to ASTM D 1784 Classification 12333 or higher.
2. Layout: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Connections: Fence manufacturer's standard concealed fasteners and fittings, providing
flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
4. Exposed Ends of Hollow Members: Closed with prefabricated end fittings.
5. Color: White; integral solid color throughout extrusions.
B. Fence Members - Privacy Fence:
1. Height: 84 inches.
2. Configuration: Panels between bottom two rails and lattice between top two rails.
3. Posts: 5 inches square, with 0.15 inch nominal wall thickness and preformed holes for
10731 PLASTIC FENCES AND GATES 32 31 23-1

ails; spaced at 72 inches on center.
4. Rails: 5-1/2 inches high by 1-1/2 inches thick, by 6 feet long; 0.09 inch nominal wall
thickness.
5. Picket Panel: 13-7/8 inches wide interlocking panels.
a. Spacing Between Pickets: None (solid).
6. Post Length: As required to allow setting of post into the ground with approximately 6
inches between bottom of rail and ground.
C. Post Caps: Standard; snap lock style.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until grades have been properly prepared.
B. Where fences are to be installed between fixed building elements, field measure openings prior
to fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install fence posts plumb, set directly in holes in the ground.
C. Install fence rails level and securely fastened.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
10731 PLASTIC FENCES AND GATES 32 31 23-2

SECTION 329200
TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Soil preparation
B. Topsoil placement and grading
C. Seeding
D. Mulching
E. Fertilizer
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 311000 - Site Clearing
B. Section 312000 - Earth Moving
C. Section 312500 - Erosion and Sediment Control
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Section 627 - Mulching
2. Section 629 - Fertilizer and Agricultural Limestone
3. Section 630 - Seeding
A. Shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Planting plan for native plantings. See requirements in Part 2.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver grass seed and fertilizer in sealed containers protecting it from heat,
moisture, rodents and damage from other causes. Seed and fertilizer in
damaged packages will not be accepted. Each container of seed shall be
10731 TURF AND GRASSES 329200-1

labeled including seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging,
and location of packaging. Each container of fertilizer shall include analysis of
the contents showing minimum percentages of total nitrogen, available
phosphoric acid, and soluble potash. Information shall also include weight and
name of manufacturer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with all regulatory requirements for fertilizer composition and application.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Reseed and remulch all bare spots according to this Section for initial seeding
and mulching. Maintain these areas until written acceptance by the Owner.
1.8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
B. Payment shall also include maintenance, repair or replacement of materials
throughout project duration and project's warranty period.
PART 2
MATERIALS
2.1 TOPSOIL
A. Salvaged Topsoil: Shall conform to WisDOT Section 625.2(2) except as
modified herein. Topsoil shall be free of rocks, debris, wood, roots, lumps and
other deleterious material.
B. Topsoil: Shall conform to WisDOT Section 625.2(1) except as modified herein.
Topsoil shall be free of rocks, debris, wood, roots, lumps and other deleterious
material. Topsoil materials shall be weed free.
2.2 FERTILIZER
A. Unless otherwise specified fertilizer shall conform to the following minimum
requirements as specified for Type B fertilizer in WisDOT Section 629.2.1.3
Nitrogen, not less than 16%
Phosphoric Acid, not less than 6%
Potash, not less than 24%
Total nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash shall equal not less than 50%.
B. Fertilizer in planting areas shall be an organic low phosphorus (5-3-2) slow
releasing as recommended by the plant supplier.
10731 TURF AND GRASSES 329200-2

2.2 SEED
A. Use seed within one year of the test date appearing on the label.
B. Provide seed mixture conforming to WisDOT Section 630.2.1.5.1.1.1.
C. Seed Mixtures:
2.3 MULCH
1. Seed mixture for maintained lawns shall conform to WisDOT Mixture 40
2. Seed mixture for ponding areas shall conform to WisDOT Mixture 75
3. Seed mixture for all other areas shall conform to WisDOT Mixture 20.
A. Mulch shall be straw, wheat or oats free of noxious weeds straw material. Hay
shall not be used on this project.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The contractor shall furnish and apply all water required to maintain the seeded
and sodded areas throughout the duration of the project.
B. Keep pavements clean and protect existing landscaping.
C. Provide the Engineer with bags and tags for seed and fertilizer used on the
project.
3.2 SOIL PREPERATION
A. Prepare soil by fine grading the surface to eliminate uneven and low spots.
Maintain line, levels, profiles, and contours. Loosen seed bed by lightly tilling and
raking.
B. Remove all stones or rocks larger than 1 inch in size from the topsoil. For areas
that will be maintained or landscaped, remove all stones or rocks larger than ½
inch in size. In areas to receive seed, place topsoil flush with top of pavement.
In areas to receive sod, place topsoil 1 1/2 inch below adjacent pavement.
3.3 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT
A. Place topsoil at the minimum compacted thickness shown on the plans. If
thickness is not stated on plans, topsoil shall be placed at a minimum compacted
thickness of 6".
B. Fine grade topsoil surface and eliminate uneven and low spots and abrupt
changes in grade. Maintain line, levels, profiles, and contours. In areas to
10731 TURF AND GRASSES 329200-3

eceive seed, place topsoil flush with top of pavement. In areas to receive sod,
place topsoil 1 1/2 inch below adjacent pavement.
C. Remove all stones or rocks larger than 1 inch in size from the topsoil. For areas
that will be maintained or landscaped, remove all stones or rocks larger than 1/2
inch in size.
3.4 FERTILIZER APPLICATION
A. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 7 pounds per 1000 square feet and as specified in
Section WisDOT Section 629.3.1.1.
B. Fertilizer for plantings shall be applied at a rate recommended by the plant
supplier.
3.5 SEEDING
A. All areas disturbed by the work, except those areas which are to be covered by
pavement shall be seeded.
B. Seeding rates to conform to WisDOT Section 630.3.3.5.1.
3.6 MULCH
A. Place the mulch according to the general conditions of WisDOT Section 627.3.1
and the anchoring conditions of WisDOT Section 627.3.2.3 except as modified or
supplemented herein.
3.7 WATERING
1. Mulch shall be weed free. Hay mulch shall not be used the project.
A. The contractor is responsible for all watering required for growth through the
warranty period.
3.8 EXCESS MATERIAL
A. All excess topsoil shall be removed from the site unless otherwise stated. If an
area has been designated for stockpiling excess material, the site shall prepared
by stripping and stockpiling the existing topsoil prior to stockpiling material. The
stockpiled material shall be graded to blend in with the surrounding terrain and to
the Owner's satisfaction unless otherwise stated.
END OF SECTION
10731 TURF AND GRASSES 329200-4

SECTION 32 93 00
PLANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparation of subsoil.
B. Topsoil bedding.
C. New trees, plants, and ground cover.
D. Mulch and Fertilizer.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Topsoil material.
1.04 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Unit Prices:
1. See Section 01 22 00 - Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements.
2. Provide unit pricing for plants and materials as noted on landscape plan.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,
Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak,
Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble
Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.
B. Plants: Living trees, plants, and ground cover specified in this Section, and described in ANSI
Z60.1.
1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/ANLA Z60.1 - American Standard for Nursery Stock.
B. NAA (STDS) - Pruning Standards for Shade Trees; National Arborist Association.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Maintenance Data: Include cutting and trimming method.
C. Submit list of plant life sources.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Nursery Qualifications: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants with five
years documented experience.
1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of plants,
fertilizer mixture.
C. Plant Materials: Certified by state department of agriculture; free of disease or hazardous
insects.
10731 PLANTS 32 93 00-1

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of
manufacturer.
B. Protect and maintain plant life until planted.
C. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F or rise above
90 degrees F.
B. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide one year warranty.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for one continuous growing season; replace dead or unhealthy
plants. Plants damaged as a result of vandalism, animals, and/or poor maintenance practices
will not be included in the warranty.
D. Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing
season, with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANTS
A. Plants: Species and size identified in plant schedule, grown in climatic conditions similar to
those in locality of the work.
B. Trees, Plants, and Ground Cover: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule, grown in
climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the Work.
2.02 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer: Containing fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion
necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis..
B. Peat Moss: Shredded, loose, sphagnum moss; free of lumps, roots, inorganic material or acidic
materials; minimum of 85 percent organic material measured by oven dry weight, pH range of 4
to 5; moisture content of 30 percent.
C. Bone Meal: Raw, finely ground, commercial grade, minimum of 3 percent nitrogen and 20
percent phosphorous.
D. Lime: Ground limestone, dolomite type, minimum 95 percent carbonates.
E. Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of
plants.
2.03 MULCH MATERIALS
A. Mulching Material: Oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant life,
and dry. Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable.
B. Stone Mulch: Gravel for landscape beds to be naturally rounded and washed, graduation from
1" to 1-1/2" maximum, Mississippi Pebble.
C. Bark Mulch: Mulch for tree rings to be shredded hardwood free of fines and non-processed
materials.
10731 PLANTS 32 93 00-2

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Wrapping Materials: Burlap.
B. Stakes: Softwood lumber, pointed end.
C. Cable, Wire, Eye Bolts and Turnbuckles: Non-corrosive, of sufficient strength to withstand wind
pressure and resulting movement of plant life.
D. Plant Protectors: Rubber sleeves over cable to protect plant stems, trunks, and branches.
E. Wrapping: Waterproof fabric.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide analysis of topsoil; comply with requirements of Section 01 40 00.
B. Testing is not required if recent tests are available for imported topsoil. Submit these test
results to the testing laboratory for approval. Indicate, by test results, information necessary to
determine suitability.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared subsoil and planters are ready to receive work.
B. Saturate soil with water to test drainage.
C. Verify that required underground utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL
A. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in
grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
B. Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated
subsoil.
C. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 4 inches where plants are to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas
where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil.
D. Dig pits and beds 6 inches larger than plant root system.
3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 4 inches over area to be planted. Rake smooth.
B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade.
C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading.
D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage.
E. Install topsoil into pits and beds intended for plant root balls, to a minimum thickness of 6 inches.
3.04 FERTILIZING
A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply after initial raking of topsoil.
C. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.
D. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.
3.05 PLANTING
10731 PLANTS 32 93 00-3

A. Place plants for best appearance for review and final orientation by Hoffman LLC.
B. Set plants vertical.
C. Remove non-biodegradable root containers.
D. Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared plant mix, at a minimum depth of 6 inches
under each plant. Remove burlap, ropes, and wires, from the root ball.
E. Place bare root plant materials so roots lie in a natural position. Backfill soil mixture in 6 inch
layers. Maintain plant life in vertical position.
F. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full.
3.06 PLANT RELOCATION AND RE-PLANTING
A. Relocate plants as indicated by Hoffman LLC.
B. Replant plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared topsoil mixture, at a minimum depth of 6
inches under each plant. Remove burlap, ropes, and wires, from the root ball.
C. Place bare root plant materials so roots lie in a natural position. Backfill soil mixture in 6 inch
layers. Maintain plant materials in vertical position.
D. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Wrap deciduous shade and flowering tree trunks and place tree protectors.
3.08 PLANT SUPPORT
A. Brace plants vertically with plant protector wrapped guy wires and stakes to the following:
1. Tree Caliper: 1 inch; Tree Support Method: 1 stake with one tie
2. Tree Caliper: 1 to 2 inches; Tree Support Method: 2 stakes with two ties
3. Tree Caliper: 2 to 4 inches; Tree Support Method: 3 guy wires with eye bolts and turn
buckles
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00.
B. Plants will be rejected if a ball of earth surrounding roots has been disturbed or damaged prior to
or during planting.
C. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, Owner or Hoffman LLC will, upon
request, make and inspection to determine acceptability.
3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During work of this section, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.
B. Protect landscaping and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by
other contractors, trades, and person(s) who trespass onto the site.
3.11 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Maintain plant life immediately after placement and until plants are well established and exhibit a
vigorous growing condition. Continue maintenance until termination of warranty period.
C. Cultivate and weed plant beds and tree pits.
10731 PLANTS 32 93 00-4

END OF SECTION
10731 PLANTS 32 93 00-5

SECTION 330400
TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Trenching, excavating, backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the
building.
B. Includes: Staking, line and grade, traffic control, bracing, shoring, sheeting,
bedding,
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 - Earth Moving
B. Section 331000 - Water Utilities
C. Section 333000 - Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
D. Section 334000 - Storm Drainage Utilities
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA), most recent edition
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), most recent edition
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), most recent edition
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Compaction test reports
C. Gradation of improved bedding and backfill material.
1.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
10731 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 330400-1

PART 2
MATERIALS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The contractor shall be responsible for utility notification to locate and mark
utilities prior to starting construction. The accuracy of underground utilities as
shown on the plans can not be guaranteed.
B. Inspect existing utilities structures prior to starting construction.
C. No trees shall be removed without having first been marked by the Owner of his
designated representative. The Contractor shall be held liable for any trees
removed without such markings.
D. Underground utilities shall be installed so that trenches do not cut through root
systems of any existing trees to remain or be protected.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION STAKING, LINE AND GRADE
A. All work under these specifications shall be constructed in accordance with lines
and grades as shown on the plans and as established by the Engineer. These
lines and grades may be modified by the Engineer as provided in the Contract.
B. The Contractor shall furnish, at his own expense, such materials and render such
assistance as may be required for setting lines and grade stakes, batter boards,
templates, patterns, platforms, reference points, or other marks or points of line
or grade. Contractor shall provide all construction staking.
C. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, correct any mistakes that may be
caused by their unauthorized disturbance or removal of reference points. The
Engineer may require that work be suspended at any time when, for any reason,
such marks cannot be properly followed.
D. No additional compensation shall be allowed the Contractor for any claims of
crews being held up because of lack of line and grade stakes.
3.3 TRAFFIC CONTROL
A. When traffic cannot be diverted, the Contractor shall provide for use of the street
at all times.
B. The Contractor shall construct and maintain temporary bridges, crossings, and
detours, complete with flagmen, wherever necessary to expedite the work or to
maintain traffic. Temporary bridges or crossings shall be of ample size to safely
carry the load which may come upon them.
10731 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 330400-2

C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain lighted warning signs and warning
barricades at each end of the construction operation, and adjacent to and along
side thereof at points where deemed necessary.
D. The cost of all labor, material, tools and equipment for traffic control systems and
to maintain traffic through the job site shall be borne by the Contractor, and no
separate or additional payment will be made therefore.
3.4 EXCAVATION AND PREPARATION OF TRENCH
A. Strip topsoil within the trench excavation limits. Stockpile nearby for respreading.
B. The trench shall be dug to the alignment and depth shown on the plans and only
so far in advance of construction as the Engineer shall permit, but not to exceed
100 feet. The sides of the trench shall be sloped and/or braced and the trench
drained so that workmen can work safely and efficiently. It is essential that
discharge pumps be laid to natural drainage channels or to drain sewers.
C. Trench widths at the top of the excavation may vary depending upon the depth of
trench and the nature of the material encountered; however, the maximum
allowable width of trench at the level of the top of pipe in place shall be the
minimum width necessary for placement of the pipe.
D. When the trench bottom is discovered to be soft such that it may be unable to
adequately support the pipe or appurtenant structures, the Engineer shall be
notified. The Engineer will then determine if the trench bottom is able to
adequately support the planned facilities.
E. When the bottom at sub-grade is soft and in the opinion of the Engineer cannot
support the pipe, a further depth and/or width shall be excavated and refilled to
pipe foundation grade, or the pipe shall be placed on piling, or other approved
means shall be adopted as directed by the Engineer to assure a firm foundation
for the pipe.
F. In areas that are determined by the Engineer to have an unstable trench bottom,
and where crushed rock or binder rock is required as bedding, the Engineer will
instruct the Contractor as to the depth of crushed or binder rock to be used under
the pipe. In these areas, the Contractor shall bed under the pipe as directed by
the Engineer and/or as shown on the "Crushed Rock Bedding Details" shown on
the plans. The crushed or binder rock used in this type of construction shall be
paid for at the contract unit price. When the ditch conditions change from an
unsuitable trench bottom to a suitable trench bottom, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Engineer and, if the Engineer determines that the trench
bottom is suitable, then the Contractor shall continue laying pipe under the
specified conditions for a suitable trench bottom.
G. Dewater the ground as necessary to excavate the trench and install the pipe. All
pipe and structures shall be laid in a dry condition prior to backfill. Maintain
groundwater level a minimum of 1 foot below the pipe invert. Measure the rate of
flow from dewatering pumps at the beginning of the dewatering operation(s) and
once per week thereafter. Keep a daily log of hours pumped.
10731 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 330400-3

H. If the Engineer orders the Contractor to install pipe on piling that work shall be
done in accordance with the special provisions, or if no such special provisions
exist, as extra work.
I. Ledge rock, boulders, and large stones shall be removed to provide clearance of
at least 6 inches below outside pipe barrel and a clear width of at least 12 inches
on each side of and above the pipe shall be provided; however, the clearance on
the side of the pipe shall be adequate to provide for proper compaction of the
pipe bedding as required in these specifications.
J. The space between the bottom of the trench and rock and the bottom of the pipe
shall be backfilled with suitable material thoroughly tamped.
K. All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not endanger the work
and that will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways as much as practical.
L. Gutters shall be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions made for street
drainage at all times.
3.5 SHEETING AND BRACING
A. The Contractor, to prevent the disturbing or settlement of adjacent road surfaces,
foundations, structures, trees or other utilities, shall furnish and place all sheeting
and bracing necessary for good working conditions to prevent damage and delay
to the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the strength and sufficiency
of all sheeting and bracing.
B. Bracing shall be so arranged as to provide ample working space and so as not to
interfere with the work and so as not to place any strain on the structures being
constructed until such structures are of ample strength to withstand such strain.
All sheeting and bracing, unless otherwise specified or ordered to be left in place
by the Engineer, shall be removed from the work.
C. Any damage to the work under the Contract or to adjacent structures or property
caused by settlement, water or earth pressures, slides, cave-ins, or other causes
due to failure or lack of sheeting and bracing or improper bracing or through
negligence or fault of the Contractor in any manner shall be repaired by the
Contractor without delay at his expense.
D. Where the trench is not located near any existing buildings or structures, and
where water and other conditions permit, the Contractor may omit sheeting and
bracing of the excavation. In this event, he shall excavate a space of sufficient
size to provide adequate space for the construction work so as to prevent sliding
or caving of the banks into the area within the lines of structures.
3.6 LAYING OF PIPE, BEDDING, JOINTING
A. See Sections 331000 - Water Utilities and 333100 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities for
additional requirements.
10731 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 330400-4

B. Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be
provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient prosecution of
the work.
C. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the inside of the pipe before it is
lowered into its position in the trench, and shall be kept clean by approved
means during and after laying.
D. Install pipe in accordance with the appropriate portions of the specifications and
at the alignment and grade shown on the drawings.
E. In the event that suitable natural material required for bedding is not encountered
during normal trench excavation, or the material encountered is determined
unsuitable by the Engineer for back-filling around the pipe as required, the
Contractor shall furnish sand or gravel for bedding. Such sand or gravel shall
have a maximum particle size of 1 1/2 inch. The bedding material shall be
compacted to a minimum of 90% of Standard Proctor Density.
F. All dead ends shall be securely sealed with plugs or caps.
3.7 BACKFILLING, COMPACTION AND GRADING
A. All excavation in trenches shall be backfilled to the finished grade shown on the
plans or, if none, to the original ground surface. The backfill shall begin as soon
as practical after the pipe has been placed and shall thereafter be carried on as
rapidly as the protection of the balance of the work will permit. Backfilling shall
be done as completely as possible so as to attain complete filling using the best
materials available for this purpose, free from boulders, rubbish, frozen lumps,
and similar materials.
B. For purposes of backfill, boulders shall be considered as any piece of rock which
has it's largest dimension 12 inches or greater. Depositing of the backfill shall be
done so the shock of falling material will not injure the pipeline or structure.
Grading over and around all parts of the work shall be done to conform to
existing surfaces except as shown on the plans and as directed by the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall grade construction areas during all phases of the work to
provide drainage off of and away from the construction.
D. The requirements for backfilling shall vary depending on the portion of trench
concerned. Such requirements are to be as follows:
1. Bottom Portion of Trench: This portion of the trench is that part utilized
for bedding of the pipe. This portion of the trench shall be backfilled and
constructed in accordance with the requirements of this Section or related
Sections on sewer and water utilities, and as shown on the details. After
this portion of the trench has been completed, the Contractor will take all
precautions necessary to protect the pipe from damage while backfilling
and compacting the mid-portion of the trench.
10731 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 330400-5

2. Mid-Portion of the Trench: This portion of the trench which lies above the
bottom portion of the trench and below the top portion of the trench shall
be backfilled only with suitable material as approved by the Engineer.
Such material is to be obtained from the excavating of the same trench or
from any other trench excavation on this project. Compaction of the
mid-portion of the trench shall be either by specified density to at least
95% of Standard Proctor Density.
3. Top Portion of the Trench: The top portion of the trench shall be
backfilled and compacted as follows:
a. In areas to be paved, the top 3 feet of trench shall be backfilled
and compacted by method of specified density to at least 100% of
Standard Proctor Density.
b. In other areas the top portion of the trench shall be backfilled and
compacted to the same requirements as the mid-portion of the
trench.
E. Any areas found not to comply with the specifications shall be re-excavated and
recompacted by the Contractor until the compaction requirements are met.
F. It shall be the responsibility of the Owner to provide all testing and other services
to insure that the requirements of this section of the specifications are met. Any
and all compaction tests ordered by the Engineer shall be random tests and will
be used generally as a periodic check to insure Contractor compliance. Any
compaction tests taken by the Contractor for control of compaction shall be paid
for by the Contractor. Tests ordered by the Engineer to check compliance will be
paid for in accordance with General Conditions.
G. Respread salvaged topsoil to a minimum thickness of 6 inches.
3.8 PROTECTING UNDERGROUND AND SURFACE STRUCTURES
A. Temporary support, adequate protection, and maintenance of all underground
and surface utility structures, drains, sewers and other obstructions encountered
in the progress of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own
expense.
B. When necessary to determine the location of existing pipes, valves or other
underground structures, the Contractor, after an examination of available
records, shall make all explorations and excavation for such purposes.
C. Whenever existing utility structures, main sewers, drains, or other conduits,
ducts, pipes or other structures present obstructions to the grade or alignment of
the pipe, such structures shall be permanently supported, removed, relocated, or
reconstructed by the Contractor through cooperation with the Owner of the
structures involved. In those instances where relocation or reconstruction is
impractical, a change in line and/or grade will be ordered by the Engineer and the
10731 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 330400-6

change shall be made in the manner directed. No deviation shall be made from
the required line or grade except with the consent of the Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall promptly repair at his expense any break or damage to
other utility facilities or to house service connections for water, sewer and gas,
caused by his work.
3.9 DUST CONTROL
A. If ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall sprinkle water on the roads and
other construction areas for dust control purposes. Water shall be furnished by
the Owner for this purpose.
3.10 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY
A. The Contractor shall promptly restore the street pavements, curb and gutter,
walkways and boulevard areas which are disturbed as a result of this work. Such
restoration work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Owner and
these specifications.
END OF SECTION
10731 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 330400-7

SECTION 331100
WATER UTILITIES
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Watermains and Appurtenances
B. Water Service Laterals and Appurtenances
C. Fire Hydrants and Appurtenances
D. Control Valves and Appurtenances
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 330400 – Trenching for Site Utilities.
1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Standard Specifications: Reference in these Specifications to "Standard
Specifications" shall mean State of Wisconsin Standard Specifications for Utilities
Construction.
B. Commercial Standards referred to in this Section of Specifications:
ASTM A 307-00 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi
Tensile Strength
ASTM A 506-00 Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled
and Cold Rolled, Regular Quality and Structural Quality
ASTM A 575-96 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-
Grades
ASTM B 88-99 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
AWWA C104-95 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for
Water
AWWA C105-99 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems
AWWA C110-98 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through 48 in., for
Water
AWWA C111-00 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings
AWWA C115-98 Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy
AWWA C116-98 Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior
and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings
for Water Supply Service
AWWA C151-96 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other
Liquids
AWWA C153-00 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. Through 64 in., for
Water Service
AWWA C502-94 Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants
AWWA C504-00 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves
AWWA C509-01 Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-1

AWWA C512-99 Air-Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for
Waterworks Service
AWWA C515-01 Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water
Supply Service
AWWA C550-01 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants
AWWA C600-99 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances
AWWA C651-99 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C900-97 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. Through 12
in., for Water Distribution
AWWA C901-96 Polyethelene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 2 in.
Through 3 in. for Water Service
AWWA C906-99 Polyethelene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 in.
Through 63 in. for Water Distribution and Transmissions
1.04 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL
A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of any control valves in manholes in
accordance with requirements for "Shop Drawings" in Section 01300, Submittals
for following:
1. Any control valves in manholes.
2. Any restrained fittings and required length of restrained joint pipe.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions
for pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, corporations, curb stops, valve boxes, joint
restraining gaskets and devices, and appurtenances.
C. Record Documents: Provide record drawings for tees, bends, crosses, and plugs
showing distance to adjacent valve.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Must be firms regularly engaged in manufacture of water system
materials of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer: Must be firm with at least 2 years of successful installation experience
on water system projects similar to this project.
C. Local Fire Department Regulations: Must comply with governing regulations
pertaining to hydrants, including hose unit threading and similar matching of
connections.
1.06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-2

PART 2 -
MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Ells, tees, reducing tees, wyes, couplings, and other required piping accessories
shall be furnished of same type and class of material as conduit, or of material
having equal or superior physical and chemical properties as material specified.
B. Pipe shall be capable of withstanding conditions of 8 feet or more of cover and
150 psi working pressure.
C. Diameter and size shall refer to inside diameter (I.D.) unless otherwise noted.
2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP): Shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA
C151. Minimum class shall be Class 52 for 12 inch inside diameter (I.D.) and
smaller and Class 50 for 16 inch inside diameter (I.D.) and larger. DIP shall be
cement mortar lined and seal coated in accordance with requirements of AWWA
C104.
B. Ductile Iron Pipe Joints:
1. Push-on type with rubber gaskets in accordance with requirements of
AWWA C151. Rubber gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements
of AWWA C111.
2. Provide straps or gaskets for electrical conductivity capable of carrying
600 amps. Use of wedges to achieve electrical conductivity is not
allowed. Lead tipped gaskets are not allowed.
C. Fittings:
1. Shall be ductile iron with mechanical or push-on type joints in accordance
with requirements of AWWA C110 or C153.
2. Cement lined and seal coated in accordance with requirements of AWWA
C104.
3. Manufactured by U.S. Pipe, Tyler, American, or Star Pipe Products.
2.03 TRACER WIRE AND TRACER WIRE SIGNAL CONNECTION POST AND TRACER
WIRE
A. Signal Connection Box (Tracer Wire) shall be rated for direct burial applications;
#12 AWG solid copper core with 30 mil polyethylene jacket. Color shall be blue.
B. Tracer Wire Signal Connection Post shall be Rhino TriView Flex for direct bury,
manufactured by Rhino Markers, phone: 800-522-4343, fax: 888-522-4242,
www.rhinomarkers.com. Post shall be blue in color with decals as approved by
Owner applied to each face. Total height of post shall be 66” minimum.
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-3

C. Tracer Wire Signal Connection Box shall be Valco Tracer Wire Access Box
(www.cptest.com) or Bingham & Taylor Cathodic Protection Box
(www.binghamandtaylor.com). The lid shall be cast iron and stamped with the
word “WATER”.
2.04 HYDRANTS
A. Ductile iron with threaded male nozzle in accordance with requirements of
"American National Standard Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads".
B. Furnish with mechanical joint.
C. Dry-barrel Fire Hydrants:
1. Base valve type in accordance with requirements of AWWA C502 for
minimum 5-1/4 inch valve and 8 feet bury.
2. Traffic flange shall be minimum of 16 inches below upper housing.
3. Hydrants shall be Waterous Pacer WB67.
4. Working pressure shall be minimum of 150 psi.
5. Valve opening direction shall be counter-clockwise, indicated by arrow
and the word "Open" cast on dome.
6. Nozzles shall be two 2-1/2 inch hose connections and one 4-1/2 inch
pumper connection with caps and chains. Nozzle cap nut sizes and types
shall match operating stem nut sizes and types.
7. Hose nipples shall be bronze or non-corrosive.
8. Operating stem nuts shall be 1-1/2 inches, from point to opposite flat,
pentagon (5-sided) shaped.
2.05 CONTROL VALVES AND BOXES
A. Working Pressure: Minimum of 150 psi unless otherwise indicated.
B. Resilient Wedge Gate Valves:
1. Shall be in accordance with requirements of AWWA C509 or AWWA
C515.
2. Buried valves shall be mechanical joint, nonrising stem type with 2 inch
square operating nuts opening counter-clockwise.
3. Valves shall be American-Darling, Kennedy, Waterous, Mueller, U.S.
Pipe.
C. Valve Boxes:
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-4

1. 3 piece adjustable, heavy duty cast iron having base, center section, and
top section.
2. Cover shall be marked "Water".
3. Adjustable for 7 to 8 feet of cover.
4. Valve box adaptor shall be provided to ensure valve box is centered on
control valves. Shall be manufactured by Adaptor, Inc. or Power Seal.
5. Adjustable valve extension stems:
a. Adjustable to depth of valve box.
b. Valve extension stems shall be square, steel tubing.
c. Valve extension stems shall be as manufactured by Diversified
Fabricators, Inc., or approved equal.
d. To be installed on all mainline valves; and on hydrant valves
which are in ground water.
2.06 ANCHORAGES AND THRUST BLOCKING
A. Mechanical Joint DI Retainer Gland: Megalug, or approved equal.
B. Concrete:
2.07 TAPPING SLEEVES
1. Blocks shall have minimum compression strength of 2500 psi.
2. Poured in place concrete shall be made using Class F concrete.
A. Ductile Iron
1. Sleeve: ANSI/AWWA C110.
2. Joints: ANSI/AWWA C111, mechanical joint with 125 pound tapping
flange, rubber gasket.
3. Bolts: Cor-Ten or Usalloy.
4. Manufacturers: Clow, Mueller, Waterous, Tyler, or U.S. Pipe.
B. Stainless Steel
1. Sleeve: 18-8 Type 304 stainless steel.
2. Flange: CF8 cast stainless steel.
3. Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel.
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-5

4. Gasket: Full circumferential gasket.
5. Manufacturers: Power Seal, Ford, or Cascade.
2.08 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be polystyrene suitable for underground installation. It shall have
a compressive strength of at least 40 PSI, minimum R-value of 5, and maximum
water absorption of 0.17% by volume. It shall be provided in 4’ x 8’ sheets.
Sheets shall be no less than 1” or no greater than 2” in thickness. “Spray Type”
insulation may be used in the trench only upon written pre-approval of the
Engineer or Owner, and only if it meets or exceeds the compressive strength,
water absorption, and R-value properties for polystyrene and is suitable for
underground installation.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.01 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
A. See Section 330400 - Trenching for Site Utilities
3.02 PIPE INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall inspect pipe before installation to detect apparent defects.
Contractor shall mark defective materials with white paint so marks are clearly
visible and promptly remove from site.
3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Ductile Iron pipe shall be installed in accordance with requirements of AWWA
C600.
1. Watermain shall have minimum cover of 7.5-feet after backfilling to final
grade unless otherwise indicated on plans.
2. Watermain shall be laid at least eight (8) feet horizontally from any
existing or proposed sanitary or storm sewer, unless a greater distance is
indicated on drawings. The distance shall be measured center to center.
3. Lay pipe with bell ends facing in direction of laying, unless directed
otherwise by Engineer.
a. Deflection shall not exceed that recommended for joint and shall
be approved by Engineer.
4. Use proper implements, tools and facilities for installation.
5. All pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into
trench with suitable tools or equipment, to prevent damage to watermain
materials, coatings, and linings. Watermain shall not be dropped into
trench.
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-6

6. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected for defects and, while suspended
above grade, be rung with light hammer to detect cracks.
7. All lumps, blisters, and excess coal tar coatings shall be removed from
bell and spigot end of each pipe.
8. Outside of spigot and inside of bell shall be wire brushed and wiped until
clean, dry, and free from oil and grease before laying pipe.
9. Paint joint and rubber gasket with soap solution prior to joining pipe.
10. Bolts on mechanical joints shall be tightened in manner which provides
even pressure on flange.
a. Torque shall be checked with torque wrench if necessary.
b. Applied torque shall be approximately 85 foot pounds.
11. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from inside of pipe before
installation.
12. A heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size may be required over
each end of pipe until connection is made to adjacent pipe.
a. No debris, tools, clothing, or other materials shall be placed in
pipe.
13. When installing pipe in trench:
a. Spigot end shall be centered in bell and pipe forced home to
correct line and grade.
b. Secure pipe in place with approved backfill material tamped under
it; except, at bell.
c. Pipe and fittings shall allow sufficient and uniform space for joints.
d. Prevent dirt from entering joint space.
14. Open ends of pipe shall be closed during non-working periods by
watertight plug or other means.
a. If water is in trench, then seal shall remain in place until trench is
pumped completely dry.
15. When watermain crosses sanitary sewer:
a. Full length of pipe shall be used with ends located equidistant
from sewer.
b. Watermain crossing over sanitary sewer main shall have minimum
clearance of 6 inches.
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-7

c. Watermain crossing under sanitary sewer main shall have
minimum clearance of 18 inches.
16. No pipe shall be laid in water, or when in opinion of Engineer, trench
conditions are unsuitable.
17. Excavation and preparation of trench shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Section 330400 – Trenching for Site Utilities.
B. Any pipe, service laterals, hydrants, and valves that do not conform to planned
line and grade as shown on Drawings shall be removed and relaid by Contractor
at his expense.
C. Gaskets and forms shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation
requirements. Restrain new fittings in locations being placed.
D. Restraining Lengths:
1. See Restrained Pipe Length Chart for length of restrained joint pipe to be
installed at each fitting.
2. Contractor shall furnish Owner with a shop drawing showing all restrained
fittings and required lengths of restrained joint pipe.
RESTRAINED/TIED PIPE LENGTH CHART
Minimum Length Requiring Restraint in Feet (Bare Pipe)
Fitting Type 6" 8" 10" 12" 16" 20" 24" 30"
11.25 degree bend 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20
22.5 degree bend 10 10 10 15 20 20 35 40
45 degree bend 15 20 25 30 40 45 50 65
90 degree bend 20 20 25 40 60 80 80 120
Tee (side tied) 15 20 30 35 50 65 80 110
Stubs or dead ends 25 35 45 50 65 80 95 120
Cross with plugged 15 20 30 35 50 65 80 110
Valves at end of line 25 35 45 50 65 80 95 120
The above lengths (given in feet) represent the minimum length of pipe to be tied together in
each required direction from the fitting described.
E. Mark end of pipe stubs with 4" x 4" wood post buried to top of pipe with 4' of post
exposed above ground and top 1' painted blue.
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-8

3.04 WATER SERVICE LATERAL
A. Provide service laterals from main to individual properties as shown on Drawings.
All pipe diameters are inside diameter (I.D.).
B. Mark end of the lateral with 6 foot steel fence post buried 2 feet deep and painted
blue where laterals are left unconnected.
A. Laying: Lay in trench with a minimum of 7.5 feet of cover below the final grade
and reasonably straight, but free from kinks or flattened places.
B. Insulate water services wherever the depth of cover is less than 7.5 feet, or
passes within 2 feet of an underground structure or pipe, which may experience
freezing temperatures.
3.05 TRACER WIRE AND TRACER WIRE SIGNAL CONNECTION POST AND TRACER
WIRE SIGNAL CONNECTION BOX
A. All non-metallic pipe shall be fitted with tracer wire securely attached to the top of
pipe at a minimum of 10 foot intervals with tape or other method approved by
Engineer.
B. Splices shall be made with split bolt or compression-type connectors. All
connections shall be waterproof. Conductivity clamps shall be installed on all
tracer wire ends. All buried tracer wire terminations shall be grounded.
C. Tracer wires shall be daylighted at tracer wire signal collection boxes or posts
where provided. If signal connection boxes or posts are not specified as a
contract bid item, tracer wire shall be made easily accessible every 300 to 400
feet at valves, hydrants, and other locations as required by Owner or Engineer.
Daylight tracer wires at pipe stubs, cap with wire nuts, and attach to maker post
at least 2 feet above finished grade.
D. All buried tracer wire terminations shall be grounded.
3.06 CONTROL VALVES AND BOXES
A. Control valves and boxes shall be installed in accordance with the requirements
of AWWA C600 and with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide a valve box for each valve; except, where Drawings show to install in
masonry manhole.
C. Provide and install valve box adaptor for all valve boxes.
D. Provide and install adjustable valve extension stems on all mainline gate valves;
NOT on hydrant valves except in groundwater.
3.07 HYDRANTS
A. Installed in accordance with requirements of AWWA C600 and with
manufacturer's instructions; except as noted in the following:
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-9

1. Hydrants shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt or other foreign material.
2. Hydrants shall be set so traffic flange is 3 to 4 inches above proposed
grade.
3. Restrain hydrant and lead in accordance with Section 3.03.
B. High Water Table: In areas where water table is above hydrant base, plug drain
hole, install tag which reads “Pump After Each Use”, note it on record plans,
and notify Engineer and City of Menomonie Water Superintendent in writing.
3.08 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
A. Leakage Test:
1. Specified test pressure is 150 psi and time of test is one hour.
2. Perform leakage test on all pipe as soon as possible after installation.
Contractor shall furnish all equipment and labor for test.
3. Definition: Leakage shall be defined as quantity of water that must be
supplied into newly laid pipe, or any valved section thereof, to maintain
pressure of 145 psi after air in pipeline has been expelled and pipe has
been filled with water.
4. Allowable leakage:
a. Leakage shall not be greater than calculated by following
equation:
L =
SD P
133200
b. Where L = allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; S = length of
pipeline tested; D = nominal diameter of pipe, in inches, and P =
average test pressure during leakage test in psi.
5. If any test of pipe laid discloses leakage greater than allowed by formula,
then Contractor shall, at his own expense, locate and repair defective
material until leakage is within specified allowance. Any visible leaks
shall be repaired regardless of amount of leakage.
6. Pressure Testing Against Existing Valves:
a. Should the pressure test fail when pressure testing again an
existing valve, the Contractor shall investigate all possible sources
of leaking. The Engineer shall then make a determination whether
or not the existing valve should be replaced.
b. After the replacement of the valve, a pressure leak test shall be
completed. If the pressure leak test fails with the new valve
installed, the Contractor shall further investigate the possible
source of leaking and correct the leak. No compensation shall be
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-10

made to the Contractor for removal and replacement of existing
valve and box if the existing valve was not the cause of the leak.
c. If the pressure leak test passes due to the replacement of the
existing valve, the Contractor shall be compensated for removal of
the existing valve and installation of the new valve and box in
accordance with the applicable contract bid item(s); or by change
order if no bid items are provided.
3.09 ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY TEST
A. Timing:
1. Perform conductivity test including pipeline, valves, fittings, and hydrants
within one week after completion of pressure testing of all ductile iron pipe
water mains to establish that electrical thawing may be carried out in
future.
2. Electrical test shall be made after backfilling and successful hydrostatic
pressure test completion and while line is at normal operating pressure.
B. Procedure:
1. Test for electrical continuity and current capacity.
2. Testing system sections of convenient length will be allowed if approved
by Engineer.
3. Cables from power source to section of system under test should be of
sufficient size to carry test current without overheating or excessive
voltage drop. Sizes should be in range of 2/0 to 4/0 A.W.G.
4. Sources of D.C. for tests shall be arc welding machines. All such
equipment shall be furnished by Contractor, subject to approval of
Engineer.
5. When using arc welding machines, current control should be set at
minimum before starting. After starting the machines, advance control
until current indicated on ammeter is at desired test value. Caution: In
case of open circuits at joints or connections, voltage across
defective joint or connection will be in order of 50-100 volts.
6. Connections for test shall be made at hydrants. Hydrants shall be in open
position with caps on during test. Cable shall be clamped to body of
hydrant and not unto top nut. Note: After test, hydrant shall be shut
off and cap loosened to allow hydrant drainage. Tighten cap after
drainage.
7. Use hook-on type D.C. ammeter placed on one of cables leading to
hydrant to measure current.
8. Pass direct current of 350 amperes, + 10%, through the pipeline for 2
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-11

minutes. Current flow through pipe shall be measured continuously on
suitable ammeter and shall remain steady without interruption or
excessive fluctuation throughout 2 minute test period.
9. Insufficient current, intermittent current, or arcing that is indicated by large
fluctuation of ammeter needle shall be evidence of defective contact in
pipeline. Contractor shall isolate cause and correct it. Section in which
defective test occurred shall be retested as unit and shall meet
requirements.
3.10 DISINFECTION OF MAINS
A. Method: Use Calcium Hypochlorite Tablet Method in accordance with
requirements of AWWA C651.
1. One pound of commercial (70%) Calcium Hypochlorite to 1,680 gallons of
water may be used in lieu of tablets.
2. Section being tested shall be isolated from remainder of system.
B. Flushing
1. Disposing of chlorinated water flushed from mains shall flow into sanitary
sewers. Discharge to trout streams, or lakes will not be allowed unless
water is dechlorinated prior to discharge and discharge is approved by
WDNR.
C. Testing
a. Discharge into Owner’s sanitary sewer system after dechlorination
must have Owner’s approval.
1. One sample will be required to test for presence coliform bacteria for
every 1,200 feet of new water main, at end of lines, and at each branch.
2. Contractor shall provide sampling tap and collect samples.
a. Contractor will be responsible for cost of testing.
3. Contractor shall provide results of tests prior to making service
connections.
3.11 TRACER WIRE CONTINUITY TESTING
A. Provide all necessary labor, equipment and materials to perform an electrical
continuity test on tracer wire installed as part of directional drilling operations.
Continuity test shall be conducted using ohmmeter. Measured resistance on
tracer wire shall be no greater than 105% of the rated resistance of the tracer
wire. Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer unless this
requirement is waived. Contractor shall locate and document location of pipe
using electronic locator equipment in presence of Owner or Engineer. Provide a
written report describing equipment used, test methods, detailed test results, and
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-12

locations of traced pipe. In the event of a failed test, Contractor shall make all
necessary repairs required to provide a tracer wire system that complies with the
testing requirements of this section.
B. Provide additional quality assurance testing as required by applicable
specification sections.
3.12 TESTING VALVE AND CURB STOP BOXES PRIOR TO PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. All valves and curb stops shall be tested for proper operation, plumbness, and
alignment in the presence of the Municipality’s Utility Operator or Engineer.
3.13 WET TAP
A. Installation:
1. Schedule tap with Director of Public Works or Water Superintendent a
minimum of two (2) working days in advance.
2. Use approved tapping machine designed specifically for tapping under
pressure.
3. Disinfect sleeves, valve, and tapping machine with chlorine solution prior
to assembly.
4. Install tapping sleeve and valve in accordance with manufacturer=s
instructions. Maintain separation from ends of sleeve to adjacent joints or
fittings. Install a solid concrete block beneath valve for support.
5. Tapping Crew shall perform a leakage test on the installed tapping sleeve
and valve and provide for inspection by the Engineer and Owner. No
leakage will be allowed.
6. When tapping sleeve or tapping valve leaks, it is sole responsibility of the
Contractor to remove, reinstall, and replace, if necessary, tapping sleeve
and tapping valve. Retest reinstalled or replaced sleeves and valves until
they achieve satisfactory test results.
3.14 CONNECT TO EXISTING WATERMAIN OR WATER SERVICE LATERAL
A. Contractor shall verify material composition of existing main or lateral, as
applicable.
B. Contractor shall provide and install all adaptors and sleeves necessary to make
connection to main or lateral.
C. A leak-free connection shall be made.
3.15 MAINTAIN WATER SERVICE
A. Water service shall be maintained to the greatest extent reasonably possible
using temporary water systems, appropriate staging of construction operations,
and other Owner and Engineer approved methods. Additional measures shall be
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-13

undertaken by Contractor to insure service for water dependent users.
B. Contractor shall coordinate water shut-offs with the Owner and water department
as the case may be. A minimum of 24 hours notice to residents shall be
provided prior to shutting off their water.
C. State regulations require that water service to the existing health care
center can be shut down for a maximum of 4-hours. Water service to the
existing health care center can only be shut down one time.
D. Coordinate new water main installation and testing, connections to existing
water mains, and removal of existing mains to ensure that the existing
health care center is without water for no longer than 4-hours.
E. Unless pre-approved by the Owner and Engineer, the maximum allowable
duration of water service interruption to water utility customers shall typically be 4
hours. Customers to whom water service is critical (as determined by Owner),
shall have service interruption limitations and accommodation needs determined
on a case by case basis.
F. If a temporary water system is employed to maintain water service during
construction, it shall meet the following requirements:
3.16 INSULATION
1. The temporary water system shall be suitably sized to provide sufficient
flow rate and adequate pressure, shall be thoroughly cleaned and
disinfected in accordance with the specifications immediately prior to its
installation, and shall be free of leakage. Provide backflow preventers on
temporary water system connections to source water.
2. Fittings and bends shall be adequately anchored or strapped to prevent
blow-off.
3. The system shall be so installed as to not be damaged by, or create a
hazard for, vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Attachments to fire hydrants
shall be made in a manner that will allow removal with minimum effort in
case of emergency.
4. The temporary water system shall be subject to approval of the Engineer
prior to interrupting any water service.
A. Watermain shall be insulated where noted on the plans and wherever the depth
of cover is less than 7.5-feet. Prior to placement of these polystyrene boards,
bedding material shall be placed to a height of 6-inches over the top of the pipe,
leveled and compacted. The laying width shall be either 4-feet or 8-feet as
shown on the plan and details.
END OF SECTION
10731 WATER UTILITIES 331100-14

SECTION 333100
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Distribution Piping and Fittings
B. Service Lines, Connections, and Fitting
C. Manholes, Frames and Covers
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 - Earth Moving
B. Section 330400 – Trenching for Site Utilities
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute, most recent editions (Here after referred
to as ANSI Sections).
B. American Society for Testing and Materials, most recent edition (Here after
referred to as ASTM Sections).
1. ASTM D1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-Rated
Pipe (SDR Series).
2. ASTM D1785 - Specification for Service Pipe Schedule 40.
3. ASTM D2241 - Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-
Rated Pipe (SDR Series).
4. ASTM D2588 - Solvent Cement Joints for PVC.
5. ASTM D3034 - Specification for Type PSM Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer
Pipe and Fittings.
6. ASTM D3212 - Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
7. ASTM F477 - Gasket for PVC.
8. ASTM C48 – Specification for Gray-Iron Castings.
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-1

9. ASTM C139 – Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction
of Catch Basins and Manholes.
10. ASTM C150 – Specification for Portland Cement.
11. ASTM C478 – Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole.
C. Standard Specification for Sewer & Water Construction in Wisconsin, 1988
edition and all Addendums.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of all manholes, castings and fittings,
and all pipe products in accordance with the General Conditions. Submit to
Engineer for approval.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions
for manholes, castings, fitting and all pipe products.
C. Record Documents: Provide record drawings for manhole depths, wye locations,
pipe locations.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Shall be firm specializing and experienced in sewer collection system
work for 2 or more years.
B. Pipe Strength: Contractor shall provide certificates that pipe is of adequate
strength for project conditions.
C. Testing: Contractor shall perform mandrel and leakage tests as described in Part
3 of this section.
1.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
PART 2
MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Ells, tees, reducing tees, wyes, laterals, couplings, increasers, crosses,
transitions and end caps shall be furnished of same type and class of material as
pipe, or of material having equal or superior physical and chemical properties as
pipe specified.
B. Diameter and size shall refer to inside diameter (I.D.) unless otherwise noted.
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-2

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe: PVC gravity sewer pipe 8 inch through 15 inch shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D-3034 "Standard Specifications for Type PSM Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings".
B. Joints: Shall be bell and spigot, push-on type with an elastomeric o-ring gasket in
accordance with ASTM F477 and ASTM D3112-86.
C. Fittings and Wyes: Shall match pipe material.
D. Class: All PVC gravity sewer pipe shall be SDR 35 wall thickness unless
otherwise noted on the plans.
2.3 CONCRETE AND MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Concrete for the construction of poured manhole inverts, or other
minor work, not including the construction of cast in place minor structures, shall
be "ready-mix”.
B. Mortar: Mortar shall be mixed in an approved mixer. Mortar shall be "sakrete
mortar mix" or job mixed. Job mixed mortar shall be mixed one part cement,
three parts sand and sufficient clean water to produce a workable mix.
2.4 MANHOLES
A. Concrete manhole materials shall be in accordance with WisDOT Section 611
except as modified herein. Concrete block may not be used.
1. All precast manhole joints shall be Kent Seal #2 bituminous mastic, or
equal; or Ram-Nek rubber O-ring gasket, or equal.
2. Lifting inserts shall be furnished with all Type I manhole sections.
3. Manholes for sanitary sewers shall have manhole base cast integral with
first barrel section, precast pipe inverts, and watertight flexible pipe to
manhole connecting seal for sanitary sewer pipes having diameter of 18
inches or less. Precast invert shall be same diameter of largest adjoining
sewer pipe and have depth 1/2 of diameter of largest adjoining sewer
pipe. Invert bench shall slope towards invert at minimum of 2 inches per
foot.
4. Sanitary manholes shall have eccentric cone top section, with 27 inch
opening, designed to accommodate H-20 loading.
5. Steps shall be co-polypropylene plastic encapsulated steel reinforcing rod
as manufactured by M.A. Industries, or equal, and integrally cast into
manhole or inlet sidewall.
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-3

6. Infiltration shields shall be a continuous seamless band of EPDM rubber
with a minimum thickness of 65 mils, a minimum width of the height of
adjustment rings plus 5” and a length sufficient to fit tightly around the
perimeter of the adjustment rings and structure. Infiltration shield sealant
shall be non-hardening butyl rubber.
7. Manufacturer shall mark manhole sections and pieces as indicated on
Drawings.
8. For minor amounts of mortar, packaged materials shall be in accordance
with requirements of ASTM C 387, Type M, will be acceptable.
B. Covers and Castings: Castings shall be Neenah Foundry or approved equal with
numbers as shown on the plans. Type of casting shall match Owners standard if
not specified on the plans. Covers and castings shall have machined bearing
surfaces, and be self-sealing. Cast iron frames and covers shall be Class 35 or
better. Each cover shall be stamped “SANITARY SEWER” with 2 inch letters.
Covers shall have two concealed pick holes.
C. Rings: Rings shall be manufactured from concrete as specified herein. The
number of adjusting rings shall be in accordance with the plans.
2.5 TRACER WIRE and TRACER WIRE SIGNAL CONNECTION POST and TRACER
WIRE SIGNAL CONNECTION BOX:
A. Tracer wire shall be rated for direct burial applications; #12 AWG solid copper
core with 30 mil polyethylene jacket. Color shall be green.
B. Tracer Wire Signal Connection Post shall be Rhino TriView Flex for direct bury,
manufactured by Rhino Markers, phone: 800-522-4343, fax: 888-522-4242,
www.rhinomarkers.com or pre-approved equal. Post shall be green in color with
decals as approved by Owner applied to each face. Total length of post shall be
66” minimum.
C. Tracer Wire Signal Connection Box shall be Valco Tracer Wire Access Box
(www.cptest.com) or Bingham & Taylor Cathodic Protection Box
(www.binghamandtaylor.com), or approved equal. The lid shall be cast iron and
stamped with the word “SEWER”.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. See Section 330400 - Trenching for Site Utilities.
B. Pipe Inspection: Contractor shall inspect pipe before installation to detect
apparent defects. Contractor shall mark defective materials with paint so marks
are clearly visible and promptly remove defective materials from site.
C. Pipe Laying:
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-4

1. Pipe shall be laid beginning at low point of system, unless approved by
Engineer to begin elsewhere.
2. Pipe shall be laid on solid foundation prepared in accordance with
requirements of Section 330400.
3. Bell ends of all pipes shall be laid up grade.
4. Pipe that has been disturbed or does not conform to planned line and
grade shall be removed and re-laid by Contractor at his expense.
Unauthorized grade variation of 0.1 feet or more will require Contractor to
replace pipe at proper grade.
5. Pipes shall fit together and match so when laid they will form sewer with
smooth, straight, and uniform invert between manholes, inlets, or other
appurtenant structures. Gaskets and forms shall be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants,
cements, and other special installation requirements.
6. Pipe Plugs: Ends of pipe line must be protected from entrance of all earth
and other debris. Connection point to existing sanitary sewer system
shall be temporarily plugged during construction to prevent entrance of
foreign matter into existing system. Pipe cleaning necessary due to
Contractor’s failure to provide adequate protection measures will be
accomplished at Contractor’s sole expense.
7. Cleaning Pipe:
3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION
a. Interior of pipe shall be cleaned of dirt and other excess material
as work progresses.
b. Plugs shall be placed in ends of uncompleted pipes at end of day
or whenever work stops.
c. Clean pipe so no solid material will be allowed to enter existing
collection system or treatment facility, unless Contractor receives
written authorization from Engineer.
d. Flexible joint adapters shall be used for sanitary coupling sewer
laterals between different pipe materials.
8. Where new pipe or structures are laid in the same location or below, the
removal of any existing pipe or structures shall be incidental to the
construction of the new system.
A. PVC Pipe Installation:
1. This pipe shall be bedded and installed in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM D-2321, "Recommended Practice for Underground
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-5

Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe" except as provided
herein.
2. Unless called for on Drawings, intermixing of different manufacturer's pipe
or fittings will not be allowed.
B. In the event that natural, suitable, mineral material is not encountered during the
normal excavation of the sewer trench or when the material encountered is
determined unsuitable by the Engineer for backfilling around the conduit as
required, the Contractor shall provide and place such approved material as
required.
C. All dead ends shall be securely sealed with plugs or caps.
3.3 SERVICES
A. Requirements:
3.4 MANHOLES
1. Tracer wire is required.
2. Services shall be plugged to withstand low pressure air testing.
3. Ends of services not being connected to existing laterals shall be marked
with a 2" x 6" or 4" x 4" wood post positioned directly over end of lateral
with top of post being flush with finish grade.
4. Either 2 feet long, 1/2 inch minimum diameter, iron rod shall be placed
beside wood post or two 60-penny spikes shall be driven in post to
facilitate locating lateral in future.
5. Contractor shall record location, length, and number of bends on laterals
on record drawings. Location shall be measured from the closest
downstream manhole.
A. General: Installation shall be in accordance with WisDOT Section 611 except as
modified herein.
1. Contractor shall use precast concrete manhole sections and adjusting
rings; except, when precast shapes are not available to conform to project
needs.
2. Contractor shall use minimum of 2 and maximum of 4 precast adjusting
rings for each manhole or inlet.
3. Manholes shall be constructed plumb.
4. If manhole is out of plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 4 feet, then contractor
will have to correct at his expense.
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-6

5. Contractor shall mortar space around watertight flexible pipe to manhole
connection seal so it is uniform with inside and outside barrel of manhole.
6. Contractor shall fill lifting holes with non-shrink mortar in manner that no
groundwater can enter manhole through lifting holes.
7. For sanitary sewer manholes where incoming pipe invert is more than 2
feet above outgoing pipe invert, construct outside drop in accordance with
detail drawing for drop manhole.
8. All castings and concrete adjusting rings shall be set in a full bed of
mortar to the required elevation. No rings or concrete shall protrude
beyond the outside plane of the manhole. This will prevent frost action
from lifting the rings and casting, causing settlement around the casting.
9. Infiltration shields shall be installed over the adjusting rings and overlap a
minimum of 3” onto the casting and 2” onto the precast concrete
structure. Top and bottom of infiltration shield shall be bonded to the
casting and structure with sealant. Primer may be required to provide
sufficient bond with casting and structure.
B. Castings shall be adjusted to the elevation of the base course at the time of
paving the base course and to 0.03 feet below the finish elevation of the wearing
course at the time of the paving of the wearing course. Ramping of bituminous
around the casting shall not be permitted as an interim measure.
C. Castings not in roadways shall be set to the elevation as shown on the plans or
established by the Engineer. Areas around the manhole shall be graded from
the existing surface to a finished grade at the rim of the casting with slopes 4:1 or
flatter.
3.5 CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY PIPE
A. Contractor shall excavate to verify location, direction and depth of existing pipe
stubs. Contractor shall notify Engineer immediately if actual location, direction
and/or depth conflict with the plans.
B. Contractor shall remove any plugs or partial sections and commence pipe
installation at nearest existing bell.
3.6 CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY STRUCTURE
A. Contractor shall excavate to verify location and depth of existing structure.
Contractor shall notify Engineer immediately if location and/or depth conflict with
the plans.
B. Contractor shall core drill a hole in the structure large enough to accommodate
the pipe and a watertight flexible pipe to manhole connection seal.
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-7

C. Contractor shall install a watertight flexible pipe to manhole connection seal and
commence pipe installation.
D. Remove existing manhole invert. New concrete invert shall be poured and
shaped to conform to the new pipe and all existing pipes so as to allow a free
uninterrupted flow of sewage.
3.7 TRACER WIRE, TRACER WIRE SIGNAL CONNECTION POST and TRACER WIRE
SIGNAL CONNECTION BOX.
A. All non-metallic pipe shall be fitted with tracer wire securely attached to the top of
pipe at a minimum of 10 foot intervals with tape or other method approved by
Engineer.
B. Splices shall be minimized. Where unavoidable, splices shall be made with split
bolt or compression-type connectors. All connections shall be waterproof.
C. Tracer wires shall be connected securely to tracer wire signal connection posts
or boxes where provided. If signal connection boxes or posts are not specified
as a contract bid item, tracer access wire shall be made easily accessible at
other locations as required by Owner or Engineer.
D. Install tracer wire signal connection posts and boxes per manufacturer’s
instructions.
3.8 TESTING
A. Leakage:
1. Infiltration tests shall be performed on pipe that is below water table
between manholes and/or inlets on newly constructed pipe.
2. Test shall be completed only when the groundwater level is a minimum of
2 feet above the top of the pipe as measured at the highest point in the
line. The contractor may, at no cost to the owner, simulate this condition
by flooding the trenches.
3. Infiltration shall not exceed 200 gallons per inch of pipe diameter per mile
of pipe per day.
4. Ex-filtration test shall be performed on pipe that is completely above
water table.
5. Test shall have minimum positive head of 2 feet as measured at the
highest point in the line.
6. Ex-filtration between adjacent manholes shall not exceed 200 gallons per
inch diameter per mile per day.
B. Air Test:
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-8

1. If approved by Engineer, low pressure air test may be conducted in lieu of
infiltration and ex-filtration tests.
2. Contractor shall furnish test plugs, air compressor, test gage, and
personnel for conducting test under supervision of Engineer. Owner shall
supply stop watch and supervisory personnel.
3. Test procedure shall be in accordance with requirements for "Low
Pressure Air Test" of Section 3.7.3 WSSSWC.
a. Minimum specified time required for a 1.0 psig pressure drop from
3.5 psi to 2.5 psi for size and length of pipe indicated:
Pipe
Dia,
(in.)
Min.
Time,
(m:s)
Length for
Min.
Time, (ft)
Time for
Longer
Length,
(s)
Specification Time for Length (L) Shown, min:s
100' 150' 200' 250' 300' 350' 400' 450'
4 3:46 597 0.380*L 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46
6 5:40 398 0.854*L 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:24
8 7:34 298 1.520*L 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:36 8:52 10:08 11.24
10 9:26 239 2.374*L 9:26 9:26 9:26 9:53 11:52 13:51 15:49 17:48
12 11:20 199 3.418*L 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22.47 25:38
15 14:10 159 5.342*L 14:10 14.10 17:48 22:15 26:42 31:09 35:36 40:04
18 17:00 133 7.694*L 17:00 19:13 25:38 32:03 38:27 44:52 51:16 57:41
C. Deflection Test:
1. Pipe deflection tests shall be performed for all PVC and HDPE pipe
installations.
2. Test procedure shall be in accordance with requirements for "Deflection
Test" of Section 3.2.6.i.4. WSSSWC.
a. Testing Device Dimensions for D3034 SDR 35 PVC Pipe
Nominal Size
(Inches)
Minimum Diameter (Inches)
Base I.D. 5% Deflection 7.5% Deflection
8 7.67 7.28 7.09
10 9.56 9.08 8.85
12 11.36 10.79 10.51
15 13.90 13.20 12.85
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-9

18 16.98 16.13 15.70
D. Alignment:
b. The 5% deflection device shall be used if testing is conducted less
than 30 days after pipe installation.
c. The 7.5% deflection device shall be used if testing is conducted
30 days or more after pipe installation.
1. When light is placed at invert in one manhole, a circle of light shall be
visible from adjacent manhole. All pipe that does not meet this
requirement shall be corrected.
E. Tracer Wire Continuity Testing
1. Provide all necessary labor, equipment and materials to perform an
electrical continuity test on tracer wire installed as part of directional
drilling operations. Continuity test shall be conducted using an
ohmmeter. Measured resistance on tracer wire shall be no greater than
105% of the rated resistance of the tracer wire. Testing shall be
conducted in the presence of the Engineer unless this requirement is
waived. Contractor shall locate and document location of pipe using
electronic locator equipment in presence of Owner or Engineer. Provide
a written report describing equipment used, test methods, detailed test
results, and locations of traced pipe. In the event of a failed test,
Contractor shall make all necessary repairs required to provide a tracer
wire system that complies with the testing requirements of this section.
2. Provide additional quality assurance testing as required by applicable
specification sections.
END OF SECTION
10731 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 333100-10

SECTION 334000
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Storm sewer pipe
B. Culverts
C. Catchbasins, Frames and Covers
D. Manholes, Frames and Covers
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 - Earth Moving
B. Section 313700 - Riprap
C. Section 330400 - Trenching of Site Utilities
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway
and Structure Construction, 2012 Edition (Here after referred to as WisDOT
Sections).
1. Section 607- Storm Sewers
2. Section 608 - Reinforced Concrete Pipe Storm Sewers
3. Section 612 - Underdrains
B. American Society for Testing and Materials, most recent edition (Here after
referred to as ASTM Sections).
1. ASTM C76 - Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain,
and Sewer Pipe.
2. ASTM C478 - Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections
3. ASTM C655 - Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert,
Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe.
10731 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000-1

4. ASTM D1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-Rated
Pipe (SDR Series).
5. ASTM D2241 - Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-
Rated Pipe (SDR Series).
6. ASTM D2588 - Solvent Cement Joints for PVC.
7. ASTM D3034 - Specification for Type PSM Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer
Pipe and Fittings.
8. ASTM D3212 - Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
9. ASTM F477 - Gasket for PVC.
C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (Here after
referred to as AASHTO Sections).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. AASHTO M 170
A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of all manholes, catch basins, castings
and fittings, and all pipe products in accordance with the General Conditions.
Submit to Engineer for approval.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions
for manholes, castings, fitting and all pipe products.
C. Manufacturer’s Certificates of Compliance for:
1. Gray iron castings.
2. Precast manhole sections.
3. Rip rap.
D. Record Documents: Provide record drawings for manhole depths, wye locations,
pipe locations.
1.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work in the Section will be included in the lump sum contract
price and shall be full compensation for providing all labor, materials and
equipment for all work in this Section.
10731 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000-2

PART 2
MATERIALS
2.1 SEWER PIPE AND JOINTS
A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe. Class shall be as shown on the drawings. Ends of
pipe at manholes or catch basins shall be factory formed or saw cut in the field.
1. Round Pipe: Shall conform to ASTM C-76. Joints shall be rubber gasket
joint conforming to ASTM C-443 and the requirements of the Bureau of
Reclamation for R-4 joints.
2. Arch Pipe: Shall conform to ASTM C-506. Joints shall be tongue and
groove and shall be installed with Ram-Nek sealant or approved equal.
B. High Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings: Shall conform to ASTM D3350. All
round pipe shall be high density polyethylene (HDPE) with corrugated outside
and smooth interior wall.
C. PVC Pipe and Fittings:
2.2 CULVERTS
1. PVC gravity sewer pipe 8 inch through 15 inch shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D-3034 "Standard Specifications for Type PSM
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings".
2. Joints: Shall be bell and spigot, push-on type with an elastomeric o-ring
gasket in accordance with ASTM F477 and ASTM D3112-86.
3. Fittings and Wyes: Shall match pipe material.
4. Class: All PVC gravity sewer pipe shall be SDR 35 wall thickness unless
otherwise noted on the plans.
A. Corrugated Steel Pipe and Fittings: Shall conform to AASHTO M 36.
2.3 APRONS AND TRASH GUARDS
A. Apron shall conform to the requirements of the reinforced concrete pipe as stated
herein. Trash guards shall be constructed of hot-rolled steel shapes, with
traverse and longitudinal rods being a minimum of 1/2 inch diameter, except on
pipe larger than 60 inch diameter the transverse rods shall be a minimum 3/4
inch diameter. Spacing on longitudinal bars shall be not less than 5 inches and
not greater than 6 inches. Trash guards shall be galvanized after welding.
2.4 BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Bedding material shall Class C unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
10731 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000-3

2.5 CONCRETE AND MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Mortar: Shall consist of three parts sand for mortar and one part (by volume)
masonry cement or 50 percent portland cement and 50 percent masonry cement.
B. Cement: Shall be Portland cement Type I.
C. Sand: Sand shall be uniformly graded with 95-100 percent passing the No.8
sieve, 25 percent maximum passing the No.100 sieve and 10 percent maximum
passing the 200 sieve.
2.6 MANHOLES AND CATCHBASINS
A. Manholes and catch basins shall be constructed in accordance with the plans
and WisDOT Section 611 except as modified herein. Concrete block may not be
used except as shown on the plans.
B. Pre-cast manholes and catch basins shall meet the requirements of ASTM
C-478.
C. Manhole and catch basin castings shall be Neenah Foundry or approved equal
with numbers as shown on the plans. Type of casting shall match Owners
standard if not specified on the plans. Manhole rings, covers and castings shall
have machined bearing surfaces, and be self-sealing. Cast iron frames and
covers shall be Class 35 or better. Steps shall be cast aluminum or steel
reinforced plastic.
D. Manhole steps shall be Ductile Iron equal to Neenah R-1981-W or steel
reinforced plasti equal to M.A. Industries, Inc. PSI-PF or approved equal. Steps
shall be 12 inches wide and spaced at 16 inches on center vertically.
2.7 CLEAN-OUTS
A. Clean-outs shall be constructed in accordance with plan details and installed on
non-concrete storm drain pipe as required by code.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. See Section 330400 - Trenching for Site Utilities.
B. Protect all existing pipe lines and structures from damage and debris during
construction.
C. Install all erosion and sediment control devices around existing storm sewer or
culvert inlets prior to starting construction.
10731 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000-4

3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Storm sewer pipe shall be installed in accordance with the plans and WisDOT
Section 607.3 except as modified or supplemented herein.
B. Culverts shall be installed in accordance with the plans and WisDOT Section
520.3 except as modified or supplemented herein.
C. Joints for reinforced concrete storm sewers and culverts shall be pushed tight
according to WisDOT 607.3.4 for rubber gasket. Joints found to be varying in
width by more than 1/2 inch shall have a full circumferential wrap of geotextile
material extending 12 inches or more on each side of the joint and secured inplace.
Geotextile material shall be equal to Mirafi 140 N.
D. Clean out all new pipe prior to final acceptance. Clean out all existing pipe
affected by the construction prior to final acceptance.
E. Pipe Installation:
1. Lay and maintain pipe appurtenances to the alignment, grade, and
location shown on the Drawings and/or staked in the field. No deviation
from the Drawing and/or staked alignment, grade, or location is allowed,
unless approved by Engineer. Deviation from grade in excess of 0.05
percent may be cause for removal and relaying pipe at the Contractor’s
expense.
2. General Pipe Installation Procedures:
a. Wipe joints clean; apply the manufacturer’s recommended
lubricant compound over the entire joint surface; center spigot in
bell and push spigot home; take care to prevent dirt from entering
the joint space; bring pipe to proper line and grade, and secure
pipe in place by properly bedding.
3. Lay pipe upgrade with spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow.
4. All joints must be watertight.
5. Remove all foreign matter or dirt from inside the pipe. Keep the bell and
spigot clean during and after installation. Take care to prevent dirt from
entering the joint space. Remove any superfluous material from inside
the pipe after pipe installation by means of an approved follower or
scraper.
6. Where cut-ins make it impossible to construct bell and spigot joints or
when dissimilar pipe materials are joined, a reinforced concrete collar
shall be placed completely surrounding the joint or the connection shall
be made by using an approved adapter.
7. Any pipe which has been disturbed after being laid must be taken up, the
joint cleaned and properly relaid as directed by the Engineer.
10731 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000-5

8. Where a sewer line outlets to grade or where the line is terminated with a
flared end section:
a. Fasten at least the last 3 joints together using 2 “U” bolt fasteners
per joint approved and as recommended by the pipe
manufacturers.
9. Pipe installation shall include providing and installing all pipe materials,
bedding materials (unless otherwise noted), connections, fittings,
sealants, gaskets, and for performing all excavation, shoring, dewatering,
backfilling, compacting activities and testing necessary for a complete
installation as specified.
3.3 MANHOLES AND CATCHBASINS
A. Excavation shall be to a depth and size to provide for construction of the
manhole as shown in detail on the plans.
B. Concrete bases for manhole construction shall be set or poured on either
undisturbed earth or on compacted sand, gravel or binder rock. Bases shall be
level. Barrels or structure walls shall be plumb in accordance with the plans.
C. Barrel joints shall be made with gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Manhole inverts shall be poured or pre-cast of concrete and shall be shaped to
conform to the pipe so as to allow a free uninterrupted flow. All openings in the
manhole wall shall be sealed with mortar prior to backfilling.
E. Adjusting rings shall be set in a full mortar bed and plastered on the outside and
inside joints troweled flush and receive a brushed finish. The number of
adjusting rings shall be in accordance with the plans. Manhole casting frames
and covers shall be set to the designated elevation in a full mortar bed.
F. Casting frames and covers shall be adjusted to the elevation of the base course
at the time of paving the base course and to 0.03 feet below the finish elevation
of the wearing course at the time of paving of the wearing course. Ramping of
bituminous around the casting shall not be permitted as an interim measure.
G. Casting frame and covers not in roadways shall be set to the elevation as shown
on the plans or established by the Engineer. Areas around the manhole shall be
graded from the existing surface to a finished grade at the rim of the casting with
slopes 4:1 or flatter.
H. Jointing of pipes to the manhole shall be according to these specifications. Ends
of pipe at manholes or catch basins shall be factory formed or saw cut in the
field. Pipes shall not protrude into manhole or catch basins.
10731 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000-6

I. All manholes shall be constructed to prevent the penetration of water into the
manhole through walls, joint connections and other components of the
installation.
J. Steps shall be located on the downstream side. Secure and neatly mortar in
place 15 inches on center spacing.
K. Manhole installation shall include barrel, base, water stops for plastic pipe,
gaskets, grouting, casting, rings and steps and for performing all excavation,
shoring, dewatering, backfilling, and compacting, activities necessary for a
complete installation as specified.
3.4 CLEAN-OUTS
A. Clean-outs shall be constructed in accordance with plan details and installed on
non-concrete storm drain pipe as required by code.
3.5 TESTING
A. Leakage:
1. Infiltration tests shall be performed on pipe that is below water table
between manholes and/or inlets on newly constructed pipe.
2. Test shall be completed only when the groundwater level is a minimum of
2 feet above the top of the pipe as measured at the highest point in the
line. The contractor may, at no cost to the owner, simulate this condition
by flooding the trenches.
3. Infiltration shall not exceed 200 gallons per inch of pipe diameter per mile
of pipe per day.
4. Ex-filtration test shall be performed on pipe that is completely above
water table.
5. Test shall have minimum positive head of 2 feet as measured at the
highest point in the line.
6. Ex-filtration between adjacent manholes shall not exceed 200 gallons per
inch diameter per mile per day.
B. Air Test:
1. If approved by Engineer, low pressure air test may be conducted in lieu of
infiltration and ex-filtration tests.
2. Contractor shall furnish test plugs, air compressor, test gage, and
personnel for conducting test under supervision of Engineer. Owner shall
supply stop watch and supervisory personnel.
10731 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000-7

3. Test procedure shall be in accordance with requirements for "Low
Pressure Air Test" of Section 3.7.3 WSSSWC.
a. Minimum specified time required for a 1.0 psig pressure drop from
3.5 psi to 2.5 psi for size and length of pipe indicated:
Pipe
Dia,
(in.)
Min.
Time,
(m:s)
Length for
Min.
Time, (ft)
Time for
Longer
Length,
(s)
Specification Time for Length (L) Shown, min:s
100' 150' 200' 250' 300' 350' 400' 450'
4 3:46 597 0.380*L 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46
6 5:40 398 0.854*L 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:24
8 7:34 298 1.520*L 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:36 8:52 10:08 11.24
10 9:26 239 2.374*L 9:26 9:26 9:26 9:53 11:52 13:51 15:49 17:48
12 11:20 199 3.418*L 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22.47 25:38
15 14:10 159 5.342*L 14:10 14.10 17:48 22:15 26:42 31:09 35:36 40:04
18 17:00 133 7.694*L 17:00 19:13 25:38 32:03 38:27 44:52 51:16 57:41
C. Deflection Test:
1. Pipe deflection tests shall be performed for all PVC and HDPE pipe
installations.
2. Test procedure shall be in accordance with requirements for "Deflection
Test" of Section 3.2.6.i.4. WSSSWC.
a. Testing Device Dimensions for D3034 SDR 35 PVC Pipe
Nominal Size
(Inches)
Minimum Diameter (Inches)
Base I.D. 5% Deflection 7.5% Deflection
8 7.67 7.28 7.09
10 9.56 9.08 8.85
12 11.36 10.79 10.51
15 13.90 13.20 12.85
18 16.98 16.13 15.70
b. The 5% deflection device shall be used if testing is conducted less
than 30 days after pipe installation.
c. The 7.5% deflection device shall be used if testing is conducted
30 days or more after pipe installation.
10731 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000-8

D. Alignment:
1. When light is placed at invert in one manhole, a circle of light shall be
visible from adjacent manhole. All pipe that does not meet this
requirement shall be corrected.
E. Tracer Wire Continuity Testing
1. Provide all necessary labor, equipment and materials to perform an
electrical continuity test on tracer wire installed as part of directional
drilling operations. Continuity test shall be conducted using an
ohmmeter. Measured resistance on tracer wire shall be no greater than
105% of the rated resistance of the tracer wire. Testing shall be
conducted in the presence of the Engineer unless this requirement is
waived. Contractor shall locate and document location of pipe using
electronic locator equipment in presence of Owner or Engineer. Provide
a written report describing equipment used, test methods, detailed test
results, and locations of traced pipe. In the event of a failed test,
Contractor shall make all necessary repairs required to provide a tracer
wire system that complies with the testing requirements of this section.
2. Provide additional quality assurance testing as required by applicable
specification sections.
END OF SECTION
10731 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 334000-9